_________________________________________________________

Enhanced Notes from R. B. Thieme, Jr.’s

1976 Philippians series




The initial text will be from the Berean Literal Bible (BLB); followed, after the Greek exegesis, by R. B. Thieme, Jr.’s corrected translation.


These sets of notes vary considerably. Whereas, some sets of notes have nearly a word-for-word rendering of Bob’s teaching (at least in most sections); Philippians is not like that. There are long periods of time in ths set of notes where Bob is speaking, but no notes were taken. My notes are not always up to level to the person who took the notes for these various sets of books.


Philippians is also a very unusual study by Bob, as he did not cover these chapters in order altogether in the same study. Bob apparently did a study of Philippians in 1972, and then decided to do a better job in 1975 and 1976.


Philippians 1 (lessons #1–29; 5/3–31/1976);

Philippians 2 (lessons #33–70; 3/17/1976–5/2/1976 and 02/03/1972);

Philippians 3 (lessons #71–92; 2/17/1972 and 12/19/1975–1/8/1976);

Philippians 4 (lessons #93–116; 2/18/1976–3/16/1976).


Philippians 3 came from Bob’s 1975 2Timothy series (lessons #60–65, 69–80). Bob also appears to have covered the entire Philippians 3 in the 1985 Ephesians series. He covered most or all of Philippians 3 in 1974 in his series on Hebrews. Philippians 4 is covered in Bob’s 1972 supergrace series (lessons #1–9).


 

Doctrines in Philippians

Lesson Contents

Lesson #1 Notes

Lesson #50 Notes

Lesson #100 Notes

Thieme’s Translation of Philippians

Old Testament Passages Translated in Philippians

New Testament Passages Translated in Philippians

 

What are enhanced notes?

 



Doctrines in Philippians:


Aorist Tenses

Ascension and Session

Blessings of Supergrace

The Book of Life

Category One Love

Circumcision

Crowns

The Crowns

The Deity of Jesus Christ

Divine Attributes

Divine Essence

Divine Establishment

Dogs

Judaizers Called Dogs

Dogs (in Philippians 3:1)

Dung

Enemyship

Epaphroditus

Eternal Decorations

Faith

Giving

Giving (1976)

Grace

Greek Drama

Greek Drama Vocabulary Used in the New Testament

Hang-ups

Happiness

Happiness (2)

The Doctrine of Happiness (Revised)

Human Good

The Hypostatic Union

Impeccability

Importance of Bible Doctrine

The Ingredients of a Good Congregation

Jealousy

Kenosis

Knowing and Applying Doctrine

Motivation

Logistical Grace

Memory

Mental Attitude

Mental Attitude (2)

Metamorphisms


Morality

Occupation with Christ

Occupation with Christ (2)

The Pauline Modus Operandi

Positional Truth

Prayer

Prepared Pastor

Propitiation

The Rapture of the Church

Reconciliation

Redemption

Resurrection

Sacrifices of the Royal Priesthood

Stages of Reversionism

The Power of His Resurrection

The Royal Family of God

The Royalty of Jesus Christ

Royalty of Jesus Christ

Running

Salt

Sin unto Death

The Social Life of the Royal Family

The Soul Is the Battleground of the Angelic Conflict

Spiritual Maturity

Spirituality

Surpassing Grace

Temporary Gifts

The Doctrine of Thanksgiving

Timothy

Ultra-supergrace

The Virgin Birth

Walking

Witnessing

Worry



1976 Philippians

454


1

05/03/1976

Philippians 1:1a

Timothy’s 201 file; Cpt. Howard’s brief report

454


2

05/04/1976

Philippians 1;

Psalm 84:1–12

The promotion psalm

454


3

05/05/1976

Philippians l:1b

Table of organization: Military, local church

454


4

05/06/1976

Philippians 1:2a

The Doctrine of Grace (revised, pts. 1–4a)

454


5

05/07/1976

Philippians 1:2a

Doctrine of grace (pts. 4–8);

Logistical Grace

454


6

05/09/1976

Philippians 1; Job 5:19 27

Doctrine of grace (cont.); dying grace

454


7

05/09/1976

Philippians 1:2b

Concept of prosperity; 5 categories of supergrace blessing

454


8

05/10/1976

Philippians 1:3

Memory

454


9

05/11/1976

Philippians 1:4–5

The Doctrine of Thanksgiving ; the pleasure of prayer

454


10

05/12/1976

Philippians 1:5

Prep school. Doctrine of Giving ; mutual blessing by association

454


11

05/13/1976

Philippians 1:6–7a

Rapport in spiritual maturity

454


12

05/14/1976

Philippians 1:7b–8

Mutual love of right pastor–teacher and congregation

454


13

05/16/1976

Philippians 1:9

Prayer

454


14

05/16/1976

Hebrews 13:7

Ordination message and ceremony

454


15

05/17/1976

Philippians 1:10

Discernment from #1 priority of doctrine

454


16

05/18/1976

Philippians 1:11–12

Patrick Henry;

Human Good

454


17

05/19/1976

Philippians 1:13

Praetorian guard;

Positional Truth

454


18

05/20/1976

Philippians 1:14

Supergrace leadership;

Witnessing

454


19

05/21/1976

Philippians 1:15a

Doctrine of pride (review); false motivation; Hang-ups

454


20

05/23/1976

Philippians 1:15b

Doctrines of Jealousy and

Motivation

454


21

05/23/1976

Philippians 1:16–17

Trigger mechanism of pride; blind arrogance

454


22

05/24/1976

Philippians 1:18

Avoid pettiness

The Pauline Modus Operandi

454


23

05/25/1976

Philippians 1:19

S–G2 interpretation of history;

Greek Drama

Greek Drama Vocabulary Used in the New Testament

454


24

05/26/1976

Philippians 1:20–21

Esprit de corps of the mature believer

454


25

05/27/1976

Philippians 1:22

Ultra-supergrace

454


26

05/27/1976

Philippians 1:23–24

Paul’s dilemma; count down to ultra–supergrace

454


27

05/30/1976

Philippians 1:25–27a

Paul, logistical provision to ultra–supergrace

454


28

05/30/1976

Philippians 1:27b

Doctrine of Faith

454


29

05/31/1976

Philippians 1:28–30

Enemies & countdown suffering of supergrace believer

454


30

01/19/1976

Genesis 4:5b

Nine concepts of anger (1975 Genesis #33)

454


31

05/10/1976

Genesis 4:21–22

Evil based on emotion (1975 Genesis #45)

454


32

05/24/1976

Genesis 4:23b–24

Rebuilding pride; distortion of law (1975 Genesis #47)

no notes taken

454


33

03/17/1976

Philippians 2:1a

Doctrine of Category One Love

454


34

03/18/1976

Philippians 2:1b

Torture; doctrine of Spirituality

454


35

03/23/1976

Philippians 2:1c

Review; report on Rhodesia and South Africa

454


36

03/24/1976

Philippians 2:2a

Solzhenitsyn; doctrine of Happiness (revised)

454


37

03/25/1976

Philippians 2:2; Luke 11:27–28

Doctrine of happiness (cont.)

454


38

03/26/1976

Philippians 2:2b

Doctrines of Mental Attitude

Occupation with Christ

454


39

03/28/1976

Philippians 2:3–4

Hypersensitivity and true sensitivity

454


40

03/28/1976

Philippians 2:5–6

Doctrine of The Deity of Jesus Christ; syllogisms

454


41

03/29/1976

Philippians 2:7

Introduction; doctrines of The Virgin Birth, Metamorphisms, The Hypostatic Union

454


42

03/30/1976

Philippians 2:7

Doctrines of Kenosis (revised)

454


43

03/31/1976

Philippians 2

Doctrines of Divine Essence

Divine Attributes

454


44

04/01/1976

Philippians 2

Doctrines of Divine Essence

Divine Attributes

454


45

04/02/1976

Philippians 2:8

Doctrine of Impeccability

454


46

04/04/1976

Philippians 2:8

Doctrines of Redemption ,

Reconciliation , Propitiation

454


47

04/04/1976

Philippians 2:9

Doctrines of Resurrection , Ascension and Session of Christ;

The Royalty of Jesus Christ

454


48

04/05/1976

Philippians 2:10

Genuflect; doctrine of the

The Royal Family of God

454


49

04/08/1976

Philippians 2:11 (review vs 9–10)

Doctrine of

The Rapture of the Church

454


50

04/09/1976

Philippians 2:12a

Doctrine of the Rapture (cont.); right pastor

454


51

04/11/1976

Philippians 2:12

Knowledge vs. understanding

The Soul Is the Battleground of the Angelic Conflict

454


52

04/11/1976

Philippians 2:13–14

Doctrines of motivation

Eternal Decorations

454


53

04/12/1976

Philippians 2:15a

Doctrines of motivation, Morality

454


54

04/13/1976

Philippians 2:15b

Sin cf. evil and crime; doctrine of evil (introduced); the original Little Red Riding Hood

454


55

04/14/1976

Philippians 2 via Luke 11:20–21

US Constitution 1st and 2nd amendments; evil (cont.)

454


56

04/15/1976

Philippians 2

Doctrine of evil (pts. 1–16)

454


57

04/16/1976

Philippians 2 via Isaiah 45:7

Doctrine of evil (pt. 17); categories of SG2 blessings

454


58

04/18/1976

Philippians 2 via Isaiah 53:12

Jesus Christ’s victory, spoils, last exhale on the cross

454


59

04/18/1976

Philippians 2 via Isaiah 47:10–11; Matthew 19:27–20:16

Doctrine of evil (pts. 18–19)

454


60

04/19/1976

Philippians 2:16a

Doctrine of evil (pts. 20–31); equality is evil

454


61

04/20/1976

Philippians 2:16b

Doctrine of the Rapture; rank has its privileges (RHIP)

454


62

04/20/1976

Philippians 2:16c–17a

Doctrine of Running; sacrifice of the pastor–teacher

454


63

04/22/1976

Philippians 2:17

Evils of the press; abnormal life of the pastor teacher

454


64

04/23/1976

Philippians 2:18–20

Teddy Roosevelt, Jr.; legitimate congratulations

454


65

04/25/1976

Philippians 2:21–22

Concentration; “Interests of Jesus Christ”

454


66

04/25/1976

Philippians 2:23–24

Concept of the Prepared Pastor

454


67

04/30/1976

Philippians 2:25

Epaphroditus, the plugger

454


68

05/02/1976

Philippians 2:26–27

The Trend of Temporary Gifts

454


69

05/02/1976

Philippians 2:28–30

Doctrine of The Ingredients of a Good Congregation

454


70

02/03/1972

Philippians 2:25–30

Aorist Tenses; Epaphroditus

Mental attitude of Epaphroditus; bona fide depression of soul

454


71

02/17/1972

Philippians 3:1–2; 2Corinthians 11:18–20

Doctrines of occupation with Christ, dogs, reverse process reversionism

The lesson numbered #72 is actually lesson #71. The notes given match the description given for #71. My notes are kind of a mess for these two lessons as a result.

454


72

2/17/1972

Philippians 3:1–2; 2Corinthians 11:18–20

Doctrines of occupation with Christ, Dogs, Judaizers Called Dogs reverse process reversionism

Philippians 3 is taken out of the 2Timothy series. This is why the dates jump from 1972 to 1976. Apparently, Bob did a Philippians study in 1972, but replaced some chapters with later studies.

454


72

12/19/1975

Philippians 3:1a

Occupation with Christ;

Happiness (2) (pts. 1–3)

454


73

12/21/1975

Philippians 3:1a

Doctrine of happiness (cont.)

454


74

12/21/1975

Philippians 3:1b

Doctrine of happiness (cont.)

454


75

12/22/1975

Philippians 3:2

Dogs (in Philippians 3:1) Doctrine of dogs; mutilation of grace

454


76

12/23/1975

Philippians 3:3

Tabooism; Circumcision

454


77

12/24/1975

Philippians 3:4

Intro; documentation of Paul’s reversionism

454


78

12/25/1975

Philippians 3 via 2Tim. 4:5–8a

Final objective: ultra–supergrace (SG–2)

454


79

12/26/1975

Philippians 3 via 2Tim. 4:8

Blessings of Supergrace

Surpassing Grace

Crowns

454


80

12/28/1975

Philippians 3 via 2Tim. 4

Three wreath decorations – SG–3

The Crowns

454


81

12/28/1975

Philippians 3:4–7

Human celebrityship

454


82

12/29/1975

Philippians 3:8

Doctrine Dung

454


83

12/30/1975

Philippians 3:9–11

Grace orientation parenthesis for supergrace believers

The Power of His Resurrection

454


84

12/31/1975

Philippians 3:12

Paul anticipates ultra supergrace–2

454


85

01/01/1976

Philippians 3:13–15

Test of mental attitude before ultra–supergrace

454


86

01/02/1976

Philippians 3:15b

Doctrine of Mental Attitude (2); technical vocabulary

454


87

01/04/1976

Philippians 3:16

Importance of discipline; authority of original Canon

454


88

01/04/1976

Philippians 3:17

Spiritual chain of command; right pastor–teacher; doctrine of Walking

454


89

01/05/1976

Philippians 3:18

Opposition from reversionists

454


90

01/06/1976

Philippians 3:19a

Doctrines of Enemyship and the

Sin unto Death (part 1)

454


91

01/07/1976

Philippians 3:19b

Doctrines of sin unto death (part 2), emotions

454


92

01/08/1976

Philippians 3:19c–21

Stages of Reversionism (Mechanics of reversionism)

454


93

02/18/1976

Philippians 4:1a

Royalty of Jesus Christ and royal family (partial)

454


94

02/19/1976

Philippians 4:1b

Doctrine of surpassing grace (SG–3)

454


95

02/20/1976

Philippians 4:2–3

Doctrines of Mental Attitude,

The Book of Life

454


96

02/22/1976

Philippians 4:4; 1John 1:4

The Doctrine of Happiness (Revised) (revised points 1–3)

454


97

02/22/1976

Philippians 4

Doctrine of happiness (pts. 4–8)

454


98

02/23/1976

Philippians 4 via Matthew 5:3–8

Doctrine of happiness (pt. 9)

454


99

02/24/1976

Philippians 4; Matthew 5:9 11

Doctrine of happiness; opposition to ultra supergrace believer

454


100

02/25/1976

Philippians 4; Matthew 5:12–14

Doctrine of happiness (pt. 9); elections; Salt

454


101

02/26/1976

Philippians 4:5–6

Doctrine of thanksgiving

Worry

454


102

02/29/1976

Philippians 4:7

Doctrine of ultra–supergrace (US–G2)

454


103

02/29/1976

Philippians 4:8a

Doctrine of Divine Establishment

454


104

02/29/1976

Philippians 4:8b

Concepts of SG–2 and US–G2

454


105

03/01/1976

Philippians 4:9

Cycling doctrine from left lobe to the right lobe

454


106

03/02/1976

Philippians 4:10a

Doctrine of GAP (review pts. 1–5)

454


107

03/03/1976

Philippians 4:10b–11

Importance of Bible Doctrine

454


108

03/04/1976

Philippians 4:11–12

Amount of doctrine the issue, not circumstances

454


109

03/05/1976

Philippians 4:13–14

Giving: true, false, and SG–2

454


110

03/07/1976

Philippians 4:15–18

Evidences of doctrine in KARDIA;

Knowing and Applying Doctrine

Sacrifices of the Royal Priesthood

Giving (1976)

454


111

03/07/1976

Philippians 4

Doctrines of giving (pts. 1–6 revised; see notes above); logistical grace

454


112

03/12/1976

Philippians 4:19a

Master plan for Prep School

454


113

03/14/1976

Philippians 4:19b

Doctrines of logistical grace (amplified); electioneering

454


114


03/14/1976

Philippians 4:20–23

Doctrine of spiritual maturity;

The Social Life of the Royal Family

454


115


03/15/1976

Philippians 4

Doctrine Spiritual Maturity (pts. 1–4)

454


116


03/16/1976

Philippians 4;

Psalm 84:1–12

Doctrine of maturity (pts. 5–8)

END OF SERIES






1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #1


1 05/03/1976 Philippians 1:1a Timothy's 201 file; Cpt. Howard's brief report


Captain Howard speaks; and he is the most decorated man in US history.


Bob backed into this book, covering various chapters already, and now covering chapter 1 (Bob will not teach the entire book from scratch, but just piece together these previous studies in their order).


Supergrace A is paragraph 2 with the five sets of blessings. We enjoy some R&R for awhile, but then we saddle up and go through no man’s land for supergrace B and then to ultra supergrace.


Alpha grace is everything that we need in order to get to supergrace.


Bravo grace is the logistical support at this point. You carry your wealth, promotion, and leadership dynamics with you. We also see the various decorations traveling with the believer. The no man’s land of supergrace B.


No one can exceed the spiritual growth of his pastor.


The Roman army gave out their decorations, they at retirement were given some money and a certain amount of land. They had a bronze arm band and a silver arm band, both like the bronze star and the silver star. Three types of medals of honor for them. Every decoration in the Roman army meant considerable higher pay.


The Romans had a very realistic attitude when it came to the military.


Retired officers and noncommissioned officers came to Philippi to live.


Beautiful and famous women in Philippi. Paul has recovered and is moving toward supergrace. He is about to get the bravo cross and the ultra cross. This epistle brings the supergrace believer into ultra supergrace.


A sick society is always soft on the criminal soft on the communist; and they are anti-military; and they are anti-police. The greatness of the supergrace believer is to puncture the sick society. There are only spiritual solutions. This is a maximum of supergrace believers. Rome will move to a new system of leaders. Great leaders for the seoncd century.


Chapter 1


Philippi was the city the Romans had re-established for the purpose of taking its retired military and putting them there, and giving them rewards. At the time of writing the Romans had a system whereby any Roman soldier who won a decoration was given a certain amount of money and, at the time of his retirement, a certain amount of land. They were retired in grand style. So it will be understood that the basic group of people in the Philippian church were retired military personnel. They also had some Jews and some Greeks.


There are three paragraphs in this chapter. Paragraph one: the super-grace congregation at Philippi, verses 1-11; paragraph two: the super-grace prisoner of war [Paul], verses 12-19; paragraph three: verses 20-30, the anticipation of ultra super-grace.


Greeting


Philippians 1:1  Paul and Timothy, servants of Christ Jesus, To all the saints in Christ Jesus being in Philippi, with the overseers and deacons:  (BLB)


Verse 1 – “Paul.” Paûlos (Παλος) [pronounced POW-loss] is a Roman surname.


Praenomen is the given name, separates him from other family members. Publius or Gais or Lucius. Next is the nomen, the name of the tribe. Cornelius, Julius (the Julian tribe). Then the cognomen, which is the family name. Skipio, Cæsar, Julius Cæsar took the surname Emperor. Lucius Domicius Hannabarbas (known as Nero). The Hannabarbaras were very tough and cruel and occasionally smart.


Paul’s full name was Saul Benjamin Tarsus. Paulos is the name which he added as his sir-name. Their sir-names became their praenomens it is rare for a sir name to become the praenomen for someone, but this is true of Paul and of Nero.


By the grace of God, I am what I am, and this is why Paul’s sir-name became his praenomen. The security of the believer does not depend upon any temporal concept. Nothing can cause us to die until the Lord is ready to take us.


God is responsible to keep us alive as royal family. God enjoys blessing with great prosperity members of the royal family of God. God loves to promote the supergrace believer above his peers.


Paul is the human author. God the Holy Spirit is the origin of all Scripture as communicated to Paul. Paul inhaled that pertinent information; then he exhaled the content of the letter to the Philippians. This was the divine message to the Philippian church, which now comes to Berachah Church.


Paul felt differently about his different congregations. God the Holy Spirit uses Paul’s toughness to speak to the Corinthians, and his compassion and love to speak to the Philippians. The passages that deal with the inhale concept, from the Holy Spirit to the human writers - 2Samuel 23:2,3 Isaiah 59:21 Jeremiah 1:9 Matthew 22:42,43 Mark 12:36 Acts 4:24,25 28:25. The exhale: the human writers took the information, the doctrine, and they communicated it in writing. They thought in a language, they wrote in that language. The human writers of scripture so wrote that without waiving their human intelligence, their vocabulary, their personality, their individuality, their personal feelings, and their actual thoughts regarding the recipients and the subject matter; God's complete message to man was permanently recorded in writing with perfect accuracy in the original languages of scripture. What we have in Philippians is exactly what God the Holy Spirit wanted the believers in Philippi to know, particularly those on the verge of cracking the maturity barrier.


He gets his five paragraph field order, here is where he gets the order to follow me.


Paul does not mention his Apostleship to the Philippians.


The former pastor is mentioned. “Timótheos (Τιμόθεος) [pronounced tee-MOTH-eh-oss]” – [theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS] = God; timê (τιμή, ς, ἡ) [pronounced tih-MAY or tee-MAY] = honour], he who honours God.


Timothy

1.       He was the son of an unbeliever father, a Greek, and his mother was a believer and a Jewess—Acts 16:1-3.

2.       He was reared by his grandmother, Lois. Timothy was not only blessed by personal spiritual advice through doctrine but he was blessed by association with super-grace grandmother and super-grace mother. Consequently, Timothy received great spiritual heritage and great rearing—2Timothy 3:15.

3.       Timothy was circumcised by Paul—Acts 16:3, and ordained to the ministry—1Timothy 4:14 2Timothy 4:5. Timothy did not have to be circumcised but he was circumcised for a purpose. Paul anticipated that Timothy would be the greatest man in the next generation. Circumcision was a sign of maturity in Israel. That was its origin—Abraham was circumcised at age 99. He was 99 before he finally reached super-grace.

4.       He accompanied Paul, with Silas and Luke, to Philippi. He had been in Philippi before. He remained there as the first pastor after Paul left—Acts 16:12 Philippians 2:22.

5.       He also pastored the Berean church after he was replaced by Epaphroditus—Acts 17:14.

6.       After leaving Berea he joined Paul in Athens, and he pastored the church at Thessalonica for a short time—1Thessalonians 3:2.

7.       The fourth missionary journey. As pastor, Timothy had failed at Corinth— 1Corinthians 16:10. This failure was not in Bible teaching but in his inability to handle bullies. He couldn’t get tough with women!

8.       Timothy shared Paul’s first Roman imprisonment—Philippians 1:1; 2:19; Colossians 1:1; Philemon 1.

9.       After Paul was released from his first Roman imprisonment Paul and Timothy went to Ephesus where Timothy remained as the pastor. It was here in Ephesus that Timothy went into reversionism. This is where the women bullied him.


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #2


2 05/04/1976 Philippians 1; Psalm 84:1–12 The promotion psalm


The Day before Yesterday, book by TR’s wife.


Paul and Timothy are about to enter into the no man’s land of supergrace b.


Points

1.       God promotes the believer to whatever state he has advanced in maturity. If you advance to maturity in the sphere of business, you are promoted and advanced in that business. If you do this in a profession, then you advance in that profession. Whatever sphere of activity you are in, God promotes you in that sphere as you advance to supergrace.

2.       If God does not promote you, you are not promoted.

3.       Satan promotes reversionism; but this does not come with sharing the happiness of God.

4.       The only promotion which helps origininates from God. It comes from advancing to spiritual maturity.

5.       This helps the believer to remain relaxed. This principle of doctrine is totally relaxing. It protects him from evil ambition and it guards him from the success syndrome.

6.       Grace promotion is the only promotion.


Psalm 84:1 How loved are Your dwelling places [this is where the believer is taught doctrine; mature believers must stay with a mature pastor. Some pastor out of Berachah does not understand why he is not embraced by all of the tapers of his region, it is because he is still green, and his potential congregation is actually ahead of him; so they would not place themselves with a pastor who is not as advanced. No believer ever exceeds the spiritual maturity of his own pastor. When you have advanced, Bible doctrine is your #1 priority. You love the place where you get it. You are not always happy while you are there.],

Lord of armies! This phrase is found 4x in this passage and that is because the military is the source of the freedom of any client nation. You must be free to go to the place where Bible doctrine is taught. David would hear doctrine at the Tabernacle; at his own tent; when a prophet is speaking.

Psalm 84:2 My soul longed [intensive love, even positive volition] and even yearned [this verb indicates personal motivation; you apply that desire for teaching to experience, so that you get under the teaching of the wog] for the courts of the Lord [the place of doctrinal instruction in the Old Testament; the outer courts of the Tabernacle; the prophets and the priests would communicate doctrine there. You cannot advance spiritually by working. Witnessing and prayer are the result of growth, and not the means of growth];

My right lobe and my flesh [a reference to the body; the soul must be in the body to be alive] rejoice over the living God [This is sharing God’s +H; this is when we reach the perimeter of supergrace A, where we receive paragraph SG2].


Bob does not like birds or flowers (except in hunting season). He does like the buzzard and he cleans up the desert or the wilderness. A guy on a hunting trip tried to kill a buzzard and Bob clocked him. Or a vulture, which is a super-buzzard. He also likes them because they are ugly.


Bob is also an admirer or the hawk. He likes the eagle as the emblem of the United States.


Psalm 84:3 The bird also has found a house [this illustrates a believer finding security; he find his own right pastor] [sparrows are seed-ickers and they make their nests low to the ground and they are hidden by their look; they camaflauge] [we are never secure as believers unless we get with doctrine. It is a tough world on the believer who does not make Bible doctrine his #1 priority.],

And the swallow a nest for herself, where she may put her young [The swallow is another helpless bird; they are vulnerable birds outside of their nests; this is the believer with Bible doctrine; it is like the swallow in its nest.]:

Your altars [This is where Bible doctrine is taught.], Lord of armies,

My King and my God.

Psalm 84:4 Happinesses [the five categories of blessings] are those who dwell in Your house! [the daily, consistent function of gap]

They [mature believers] are ever praising You [there is occupation with the Lord Jesus Christ]. Selah The have a soul and you enjoy the things in your life. Jesus Christ is the key to everything in life. The Levites were professional singers; they practiced all day long. The chiors are amateurs. They cannot harmonize like the Four Freshmen. Selah means, the chior stops singing and the band plays on. If singers can rest their voices, we can rest our souls that God will carry the ball for us.


Psalm 84:5 Happinesses are to the man whose power is vested in You, [doctrine resident in the soul]

In whose heart are the roads to Zion! Or, the highways to maturity.

Psalm 84:6 Passing through the Valley of Baca [tears; this is the most difficult stage of spiritual growth; God allows other believers to act as interference.] they make it to the well; [or to the final objective of the supergrace life]

The early rain also covers it with blessings.

Psalm 84:7 They go from power to power,

Each one in Zion is seen [or, supported] by Elohim. After believing in Jesus Christ, we are under the support of God. We are walking around with the security of God. We have the perfect security in life.


The worst con-game in the world is social security.


Psalm 84:8 O Lord God of armies, hear my prayer;

Listen, God of Jacob! Selah Look, You took care of the worst jerk who lived; so You can take care of me. This is a prayer approach. Jacob did grow up and his name was changed.

Psalm 84:9 See our shield [protection and security; and this is Bible doctrine in the soul of the believer], God,

Therefore, regard with respect Your appointed one. Every believer is appointed by God. We are appointed as royal family forever.

Psalm 84:10 For a day in Your courts [this is Bible class; or a day in Berachah Bible class] is better than a thousand days elsewhere [in a bordello, or, with someone that you love madly; in the 20th century, there is no romance, there is no romantic love anymore.].

I would rather stand at the threshold of the house of my God

Than dwell in the tents of evil. The mature believer has the correct perspective.

Psalm 84:11 For the Lord God is a sun [the sun is the blessing of warmth and energy; and Bible doctrine in the soul gives you warmth and energy; this means that the Lord is your capacity for life.] and shield [security of the shield. ];

The Lord gives grace and promotion [Paul and Timothy were two promoted believers. The worst thing in the world is to become a frustrated old person. Humility is no hangups in the soul; it is the lack of subjectivity in the soul. Subjectivity in the soul means that you are arrogant.];

He withholds no good thing [God will not hold back the divine good; He will not hold back those categories of blessing, logistical grace, etc.] from those who walk with integrity [or, honor, as a result of doctrine in the soul.]. Bob grew up in a generation where your word was your bond. That was their honor code. The gentleman’s code is, never be guilty of kiss and tell. Men are never to gossip about women. A lady’s name would never be dragged out, except in a very respectful way, even if she were the town whore. Bob authored the honor code for the Army Air Corp; and he held a school in order to teach this to the soldiers.

Psalm 84:12 O Lord of armies, [Freedom comes from miltary victory.]

Happinesses to the man who trusts in You!


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #3


3 05/05/1976 Philippians l:1b Table of organization: Military, local church


Bob gives the medal of honor citation of a man who lives n Crosby, TX.


Greeting


Philippians 1:1  Paul and Timothy, servants of Christ Jesus, To all the saints in Christ Jesus being in Philippi, with the overseers and deacons:  (BLB)


Professionalism are those who work whatever hours are necessary.


The Master is the Lord Jesus Christ, and both Paul and Timothy were happy to be slaves to God.


“servants of Jesus Christ” – the nominative plural from doulos (δολος) [pronounced DEW-loss], translated “slaves.” “Slaves of Jesus Christ” is an anarthrous construction and it calls attention to the uniqueness of the profession. These are pastors, communicators of doctrine, and they are responsible to God. This is brought out by the absence of the definite article. All pastors are slaves. This means that the master of the slaves, Jesus Christ, is totally responsible for their provision, their blessing, their term of office, and their authority in the local church. Slavery therefore becomes the best form of life when Jesus Christ is the master, and it is a form of life for pastors only.


Whatever we do, we do unto the Lord. The pastor is not responsible to his congregation; he is responsible to God. The pastor concentrates on doing his job; and he depends upon his Master to provide the things which he needs.


The believers in the congregation must be free to choose; the slaves must work. Bob is a slave, but he outranks anyone in the local church. For him, slavery is the best form of life.


Being royal family means that you have privacy. When you walk into the local church, no matter what you are on the outside, you are a peon inside the auditorium. You are a student without portfolio.


There were very successful types who attended Philippi.


“to all” – dative plural indirect object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], which means all of the congregation are merged for the moment into one lump. With it is a noun, hagios (ἅγιος) [pronounced HA-gee-oss], correctly translated “saints.”[1]; We are all saints; we are all royal family. There is one requirement for saints, that they eat daily. This is the way that God gives us prosperity. God’s objective is to give us His prosperity without brown-nosing anyone; without having to ingratiate yourself to anyone else. The successful believers receive this from God.


We are under a Constitution which provides certain freedoms. When we believed in Jesus Christ we became royalty. We advance or we fail as royal family.


“in Christ Jesus” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]. The point of equality among believers is the point of union with Christ.


“which are” is the articular present active participle from eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The definite article is used for a relative pronoun to describe the royal family of God located in a specific place—at Philippi. The present tense is the present of duration, it denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The participle is circumstantial which expresses attendant circumstances and gives us an additional fact or thought.


“at Philippi” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative, and this is the prepositional phrase which emphasizes the concept that as long as you live on this earth you have to be somewhere, and when you are in the local church and assembled you are recognized as royal family. The objective of the local church is to provide a classroom for the transmission of Bible doctrine from the page of the Word of God to your individual souls, under the authority of the pastor-teacher.


“with the bishops” – another title for the pastor-teacher. This is the preposition sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] plus the instrumental of epískopos (ἐπίσκοπος) [pronounced ep-IS-kohp-oss]. It originally meant “overseer” but it also means “guardian.” This is a guardian who not only protects the people but he has a system that protects the people. The pastor-teacher is the top authority but he must also have a system functioning under him so that the congregation is properly administered when it is brought together. The pastor is the guardian of a system as well as the ruler of the congregation.


You must have a background of being under authority; where you learn the principle of authority. Where you are under unfair authority. You need someone who kicks you about and it is unfair and wrong. That is what you need.


Bob recommends Tombs of Glory with a very rough leader who was not always fair. They brought in ahead of him, the son of the former colonel of the regiment. At the end of the movie, the son commits suicide. He could not handle it.


As a pastor-teacher, you need a certain toughness of soul. The most important thing is your responsibility.


Keeping taboos do not advance a believer one inch in the Christian life.


What we do on the outside is not Bob’s problem.


Bob talks about what a pastor does in a church by setting policy.


“and deacons” – diakonos (διάκονος) [pronounced dee-AK-on-oss]. The deacons serve the system, but they do not set policy.


Bob illustrates with the military.


Translation so far:


Philippians 1:1 Paul and Timothy, slaves of Christ Jesus, to all the saints [royal family of God] in Christ Jesus who are located at Philippi, together with bishop-guardians and deacons:...


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #4


4 05/06/1976 Philippians 1:2a Doctrine of grace (revised, pts. 1–4a)


The pastor-teacher wears two hats: he teaches and he sets policy for the local church. He is the guardian of the system and the ruler of the congregation. Any system which has a system and personnel must be able to oversee both things.


Philippians 1:2  Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.  (BLB)


This next verse is more complex than it appears. Charis precedes human history and it will continue throughout human history. We will discuss the words grace and peace; and determine why the Holy Spirit was left out of this verse.


This doctrine of grace came from NB2; and seems to track reasonably well with Bob’s teaching in Philippians. Notes were added into this study from Philippians. There were a lot of additional sub-points in this study not found in the later doctrine of grace (the one which is below). It is clear that there is a vast additional material in these lessons of Philippians. I don’t know that this material on grace is covered anywhere else by Bob. Quite frankly, I made more of a mess of things by trying to make this doctrine work with the points that Bob gave in this study.


The Doctrine of Grace

1.       Definition.

          a.       Grace is all that God is free to do for man on the basis of the work of Jesus Christ on the cross.

          b.       Because of the complexities of God’s character, God must be able to bless man without compromising His essence.

                     i.         Man is born with imputed sin.

                     ii.        Man is born with a sin nature.

                     iii.       Man begins to sin at some point and he never stops sinning until he dies. The believer who says that he no longer sins makes God a liar.

                     iv.       Jesus lived a sinless life.

                     v.        He died on the cross for our sins.

                     vi.       God can enter into a relationship with us without compromising any portion of the plan of God.

                     vii.      At salvation, God gives us something permanent.

                     viii.     After that, we have the time part of grace. We get a better idea of what grace is during this time.

                     ix.       God must be free to give with no strings attached.

          c.        Grace is God’s freedom and consistency to express His love to mankind without compromising or jeopardizing His essence.

          d.       God the Father is able to bless mankind without compromising His essence.

          e.       God is free to express His love under the plan of grace.

          f.        God does all the work and all the providing.

          g.       No one can truly give and rightly give apart from freedom. God gives out of total freedom because of the cross, because of propitiation.

          h.       Consequently grace is the plan of God on behalf of man beginning at the cross. Grace is actually a one-word description of God’s plan. Therefore …

          i.         Grace is also God’s policy. God’s policy in dealing with the believer is always in grace.

          j.         Grace in summary is the plan, the policy, the function, the mechanics of divine modus operandi. Under grace God does all the work, all of the providing, and man does all of the receiving and all of the benefiting totally apart from human merit.

2.       The concept: Grace depends upon the essence or the character of God.

          a.       Therefore, grace depends on who and what God is.

          b.       Everything depends on the essence of God and how they function in His plan.

          c.        Grace is what God can do for man and be consistent with His own character.

          d.       Under the principle of grace, God provides a series of blessings for man totally apart from man’s ability, His planning, his energy, his merit, his morality.

          e.       Under the policy of grace, God gives and man receives. He receives what he cannot earn, what he cannot deserve.

          f.        Two categories of grace, before the fall and after the fall.

                     i.         Before the fall, relationship with God was based upon creation. Man had a relationship with God based upon the fact that God created man. No salvation was necessary.

                     ii.        In grace, God provided everything for man, for his body, soul and spirit.

                     iii.       One thing that man did not need, which was present, was the knowledge of good and evil. Trees for food; beauty of the trees for the soul; with the soul, there was the tree of lives. Capacity for all of these things was provided.

                     iv.       As a part of the angelic conflict, man’s volition was tested by having the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. This is Satan’s policy. Man had to have the freedom to choose. Appreciation for all that God had provided. Knowledge is good, but knowledge of good and knowledge of evil are not necessary to anyone who is in innocence.

                     v.        People try to impress God with what they do, not with what they do not do. People do all kinds of works in order to appeal to God. All of this starts with the knowledge of good and evil. We are under the control of good and evil even when the

                     vi.       Freedom is the basis for the resolving of the angelic conflict.

                     vii.      The relationship with God after the fall is based upon regeneration. This is a volitional test. Instead of being toward Satan’s plan. Doctrine in the form of the gospel

                     viii.     Under God’s plan is all the grace allows God to do for man, and this is completely apart from man’s ability.

                     ix.       Grace is the genius of God; Bible doctrine is the manifestation of do.

                     x.        Grace has a great enemy in our thinking. Grace versus legalism. This is point #3 below.

          g.       Grace is God’s relationship with the believer as well as God’s way of salvation. So that under its concept grace is all that God can do for man from salvation to eternity, totally apart from man’s merit, man’s ability, man’s talent, man’s planning.

3.       This brings up an issue: The great enemy to grace is legalism. Legalism is simply, by definition, man’s intrusion in the plan of God with his own works, his own ability, his own talent, his own schemes, and using these in order to gain the approbation of God. Legalism has many forms. One form of legalism is religion: man by man’s efforts seeking to gain the approbation of God. One thing Christianity is not is religion. As a believer in the Lord Jesus Christ you are in the plan of God, the plan of God is grace. Grace excludes religion, grace squeezes religion out of your soul like a strong man squeezes a sponge and squeezes the water right out of it. Religion is the worst enemy of man. Religion is the devil’s ace trump — Satanic systems of human ability and works used as substitutes for God’s works in grace. The believer must learn to sort out the difference, then, between grace and legalism, between grace and religion. The believer often clings to some talent or some ability, some plan, some gimmick, and actually tries to infiltrate into the plan of God with this gimmick. But anything that man adds or throws into the plan of God, if accepted, would destroy operation grace. The plan, operation grace, is never destroyed or neutralized because grace rejects all energy of the flesh, all human talent, all human ability, and all human viewpoint ideas. Therefore you must understand the issue that legalism and grace can never coexist. One entire book is devoted to this, the book of Galatians. Great portions of the book of Romans are devoted to this subject, and throughout the Word of God you will constantly see references to the fact that grace and legalism are mutually exclusive. In other words, a little leaven of legalism leavens the entire lump.

          a.       Legalism is cognizance of good and evil. Grace is cognizance of Bible doctrine.

          b.       Man’s intrusion into the plan of God with his own programs, talent, ability, this puts you under Satan’s plan. You have tried to intrude upon grace with your own ability.

          c.        This intrusion is called legalism.

          d.       Legalism categories: salvation by works, legalism exists in a second category of spirituality by works (you do or don’t do things based upon systems of spirituality by works). This is used to intrude upon the work of God. Anything an unbeliever can do is not spirituality.

          e.       The principle of maturity by words.

          f.        Sorting out the difference between grace and legalism. See portions of Romans and all of Galatians.

          g.       Talent believers have a difficult time because they associate their talent or ability or morality which comes from them.

          h.       Grace and legalism are mutually exclusive. They cannot coexist. If there is a little bit of legalism, there is no grace.

          i.         In cracking the maturity barrier, the believer usually eliminates legalism from his life.

          j.         There will be attacks.

4.       Grace and the new contract for the Church.

          a.       Jesus’ royalty, as coming from the line of David.

          b.       Battlefield royalty, but He has no royal family.

          c.        The old contract is the Old Testament.

          d.       A new contract had to be written for a new situation. Since grace is clearly defined under the new covenant. The New Testament word is diathêkê. It is old covenant or old contract.

          e.       The glorification of Christ by resurrection, ascension and session is the strategic victory of the angelic conflict.

          f.        This resulted in battlefield royalty being afforded to the Lord.

          g.       Jesus Christ did not possess a royal family to compliment this appointment. Therefore, the Jewish age is interrupted and the frfg is formed in the Church Age. Therefore, the Church Age must be completed before the Jewish age.

          h.       The formation of the royal family of God.

          i.         Formed by means of the baptism of the Holy Spirit.

          j.         The royal family is given a new contract, which is unfortunately called the New Testament. This new contract is related to the Church Age doctrine of sanctification. We already know that there are three sectionsWhen our Lord was brought back from the dead and ascended into heaven and seated at the right hand of the Father, that point is the strategic victory of the angelic conflict. The reason it is related to the angelic conflict is brought out by Hebrews 1: now Jesus Christ as a man in a resurrection body is higher than all angels. He is supreme and superior to all angels.

          k.        Therefore, we must be superior to all angels.

          l.         He sits there as the God-Man in hypostatic union forever. Now He is higher than the angels and some day we in resurrection bodies will be physically greater than angels. In the meantime we are positionally greater than angels. This is the strategic victory that broke the back of Satan in his great angelic revolution. This dramatic victory interrupts the Jewish age in order that the royal family of God might be formed. Until Jesus Christ was seated at the right hand of the Father there never was a royal family. All believers were family of God, now we are royal family.

          m.      Positional sanctification is a part of God’s grace plan. Under positional sanctification the greatest thing that God the Father could do for the believer is to make him like His Son, Jesus Christ. This is accomplished positionally at the point of salvation by means of the baptism of the Holy Spirit. All the Old Testament believers were regenerated by the Holy Spirit at the moment of faith in Christ. This act of regeneration is tantamount to being in the family of God forever. We share His election, His Sonship, His righteousness, and everything that Jesus is. His heirship, His kingship; we are royal family. This is a grace contract whereby each one of us at the moment of salvation in union with Jesus Christ. Positionally, we are now higher than angels. All angels, elect and fallen angels.

          n.       The same thing was accomplished at salvation for every believer in the Church Age. For the first time in history the baptism of the Spirit occurred through which every believer was entered into union with Christ. This is what God did when Jesus Christ was seated at the right hand of the Father. He began the great process of calling out a royal family. By being entered into union with Christ immediately, at salvation, you became superior to all angelic creatures. Man was created to resolve the angelic conflict, therefore when the first Adam failed through sin Jesus Christ became true humanity and won the victory at the cross, according to Colossians 2:14; Hebrews 2:14. So that believers in union with Christ have two factors of grace: positionally all Church age believers are higher than angels, and all Church Age believers are royal family of God forever. Therefore, paragraph one of our new contract is called the new covenant to the Church or the new contract.

          o.       We are in a new grace contract, and in this new grace contract paragraph one is the entering paragraph. It provides for royalty plus the fact that each member of the royal family is positionally higher than angels. This is grace, we don’t earn it or deserve it. In addition, the royal family all have the indwelling of God the Holy Spirit as a sign or as the escutcheon of the royal family. The sealing of the Spirit is our security.

          p.       The second part of the paragraph deals with experiential sanctification. Paragraph two of the new contract provides for the tactical victory of the angelic conflict. This will glorify Jesus Christ. This is, again, a strictly-speaking grace provision of God where He has provided numerous things for tactical victory:

                     i.         The principle of living grace by which the believer remains alive in the devil’s world. What good to have a contract unless you could stay alive? Satan would like to destroy you and all royal family. Satan would like to rid the earth of the royal family of God, even as he would like to rid the earth of the Jew. The Jew must be destroyed, says Satan, because God has unconditional promises to the Jew. And God is going to keep the Jew alive in spite of Satanic efforts. The same thing is true of the Church or the royal family of God. God guarantees under paragraph two of the new contract to keep us alive in the devil’s world for a determined length of time. The length of time is strictly a matter of the sovereign policy of God. How long we live is strictly up to Him.

                     ii.        He has provided for us a pastor-teacher. He has provided the local church as a classroom, and the Bible as a text book. In other words, He has provided spiritual factors for the spiritual growth of the royal family. He has provided factors in life that we might grow physically; He has also provided the spiritual factors for growth.

                     iii.       He has provided a grace apparatus for perception whereby Bible doctrine can be transferred from the page of the Bible to the soul of the royal family, and the system is a grace system of perception, it has nothing to do with human IQ.

                     iv.       Through GAP, the filling of the Spirit, and academic discipline, the local church exists for your spiritual growth. It is the only place for spiritual growth.

          q.       So in paragraph two we have the perpetuation of supergrace status through God’s grace provision. Experiential sanctification, therefore, or paragraph two, is designed to take you as a member of the royal family of God on earth to take you from salvation to the supergrace status. That is where the normal function of the royal priesthood begins. And your tactical victory compliments the strategical victory of Christ seated at the right hand of the Father. The supergrace blessings that you receive as you reach SG2 are in three categories: spiritual blessings, temporal blessings promoted by God, and dying grace.

          r.        The third and final paragraph of the new contract has to do with ultimate sanctification. This deals with eternity. Special rewards for those who reach spiritual maturity.

          s.        Three phases: initial sanctification, experiential sanctification, ultimate sanctification.

5.       All three paragraphs in the new contract: paragraph 1, salvation — all that God does at the moment we are saved, the moment we believe in Christ; paragraph 2 — all that God does for us in time; paragraph 3 — all that God does for us in eternity. These paragraphs all form the new contract to the church. This is the contract under which we live and in all three paragraphs there is no room for human merit or human ability.

6.       The five stages of grace (point 4 is the Philippians notes):

          a.       Stage one is saving grace. Every believer hast tasted the grace of God at least once, and that was the point of his salvation — Hebrews 6:4; 1Peter 2:3. The moment of salvation brings the believer 36 irrevocable items of grace. These cannot be cancelled and they cannot be destroyed. Because of propitiation every believer is also under maximum love from God — 1John 2:2. Maximum love frees God to pour out maximum grace, but grace can only benefit where there is a capacity for grace. The capacity for grace, like capacity for life is based upon the amount of doctrine resident in the believer’s soul. However, the believer is saved by grace which is all the Trinity has accomplished for our salvation — Romans 3:23,24; 4:4; 5:20; Ephesians 2:8,9. We can accept it or reject it. A dramatic experience adds nothing to your salvation.

          b.       Stage two is living grace. Living grace is all that God must do to keep the believer alive and on the earth in this dispensation. Under that principle God provides everything. Also called logistical grace. Supply, provision, planning; logistical grace is a coined term. No matter what the troops in the field are doing, they must have support. Logistical grace provides for the believer in his advance toward its objective. It is important for the recruit to learn the science of aggression. The only thing that we have by way of logistical support. We are in trouble when we are retreating, which is reversionism. Alpha grace and bravo grace is what moves us toward are objective, which is supergrace A, supergrace B and ultra super grace. Charley grace is give us discipline. This is the principle of the person whom the Lord loves, He disciplines with a whip. For the supergrace believer, there is fantastic believer for those in your periphery; but great misery to those in the periphery of the reversionistic believer.

          c.        Alpha grace:

                     i.         this takes you from zero to 100, from salvation to supergrace.

                     ii.        Alpha grace is called living grace in the Bible and the purpose is to protect, to provide and to support, to sustain the advance to the sug status.

                     iii.       This includes keeping the believer alive in the devil’s world. All the forces of hell cannot kill you. You can be in danger many times; you can be dying many times, but you can only die once. You can only die when the Lord is ready to take you. God keeps us alive. Any day when you hear revelry in your soul, we are alive by the grace of God. This keeps the believer alive in the devil’s world, protecting him from death. Providing him security in life from anything in life, any danger. Grace to you is the dative of advantage. We are imperfect persons in a perfect plan. God has taken our frailties and imperfections and integrated them into His perfect plan.

                     iv.       The believer under alpha grace requisitions is actually supplied by the divine Quartermaster. Our requisition and the supply lines are held open by our positive attitude toward Bible doctrine. Alpha and bravo and positive; and charley grace is discipline.

                     v.        This includes temporal provision: food, clothing, shelter, transportation, environment. Those are the five basics. We all eill be given the food necessary for the needed rations. You will always have a roof over your head or whatever it takes. Your shelter might be temporary or in a biulding. Clothing. It takes a certain amount of clothing to get along. In our circumstances, transportation is a necessity. God provides whatever it takes. Bob is happy to report that Houston has the worst bus system. Those in Berachah barracks are always late. Sgt. Bacon used to arrive on a motorcycle.

                     vi.       Spiritual provision, a local church, a classroom. A pastor-teacher who is prepared and a textbook, the most attacked book in history, and the best-selling book.

                     vii.      Security provision. Unseen security. We are on the wrong side of the ruler of this world. We are on the right side of history. We have from God a security system. We have flanker support, top cover, cover from above, in front and behind. Sometimes your own reflexes become a part of alpha grace. Whatever it takes, God is going to ieep us alive.

          d.       Bravo grace takes everything that you had under alpha grace and adds to it. You are in supergrace A and supergrace B and you move across no man’s land. Food, transportation, security, friends, loved ones. Other things are added. There is an R&R in the perimeter. When some people have to saddle up and go into no man’s land. Everyone gets an R&R under bravo grace. But there comes a time when you must advance. You take your blessings with you: spiritual blessings, capacity for life, you take your wealth, your promotion, your leadership dynamics, and whatevery kind of prosperity you go out in no man’s land. Bravo grace is called near grace in the Bible and it is found in Philippians 4:5 let your supergrace reasonable mental attitude be known to all mankind; the Lord is near. The adverb eggs, near as to place, as to being in the covenant, near to God, here it is near to grace .we are believers. We are alive because it is God’s will for us to be alive and breathing. We have had some of God’s rations today. We have had setbacks and we have had advances. When you get to the top three objectives, then life becomes wonderful. You find that ou can enjoy a lot of things that you could never enjoy before. This is God’s logistical support for the believer in maturity.

          e.       Charley grace. The world becomes a prison for punishment and discipline. No matter where you go in life, you are miserable. The reversionist. You have not lived until you have been knifed by a fellow Christian. Of the ten worst things which have happened to Bob, seven of which came from a Christian. A reversionist Christian are the worst. Moses had a very happy life in his second marriage. Miriam sniped at him and she became leprous. Those who attack the believer are often kept alive in order to provide pressure. Paul was under Charley grace and he was in prison for four years. Timothy was under Charley grace and his prison was the church at Ephesus. Whom the Lord loves He chastens.

          f.        Stage three is supergrace, which is equivalent to maturity in the spiritual life. In 1Timothy 1:14 supergrace is described as the abundant life. Supergrace is the adult stage of spiritual growth, attended by maximum blessings from God which glorify God. Supergrace is the ultimate in spiritual growth in time and the basis for the normal function of the normal priesthood. Supergrace is the sphere of life in which the royal family reaps what God sows in eternity past. Therefore the fulfilment of Romans 8:28. James 4:6 says, “But he gives greater grace [or supergrace], and therefore he says, God opposes the arrogant [reversionist] but gives grace to the humble.” Ephesians 1:6 — “Resulting in the recognition of glory from the source of his grace, from which he has pursued us with grace in then beloved.” Cf. Ephesians 3:20,21; 1:16-19. Supergrace is where we enjoy are R&R. These Philippians had already enjoyed the R&R and they had moved out. Supergrace B is moving out into no man’s land. Paul was about to go over the perapit. The next stage is ultra supergrace. After a tour in ultra supergrace, there is one more factor.

          g.       Stage four is dying grace. This is the permanent change of station from time to eternity, the greatest blessing that can exist in life, the highest decoration of life. Dying grace is the experience of physical death under special grace provisions whereby no matter what the type of death may be it is nothing but blessing all the way. The principle of dying grace links the supergrace blessings of time with the surpassing grace blessings of eternity — Hebrews 11:13. Therefore dying grace is the extension of the glory road over the chasm between time and eternity. It is that high golden bridge by which we go from paragraph SG2 to paragraph SG3. Cf. Psalm 33:18,19; 116:15; Philippians 1:20,21.

          h.       Stage five is surpassing grace. This is the second of the special blessing and reward paragraphs for the believer. This one lasts forever; this one is in eternity. This is above and beyond the normal blessings of heaven which belong to all believers. Beyond these normal blessings of heaven are the special blessings and rewards for the mature or supergrace believer — Ephesians 2:7. Again, God is glorified forever for those believers who are decorated in eternity. The efficiency report there is the alpha cross, and an oak leaf cluster for the pastor for every person who gets to supergrace. The decoration means more than just a medal or a ribbon. These mean billions of light years of planets. We all have freedom, but there are great differences in heaven. Indescribable blessings in surpassing grace.

7.       The modus vivendi of grace.

          a.       Grace is the means of growth — 2Peter 3:18. All growth comes through knowledge of doctrine. Knowledge of doctrine gives us love for Jesus Christ.

          b.       Grace is the basis for stability in life — Hebrews 13:8,9 12:28 1Peter 5:12.

          c.        Grace is the basis for production — 1Corinthians 15:10 2Corinthians 6:1.

8.       The failure to utilize grace. This is describes as reversionism — Galatians 5:4, reversionism is defined as drifting off course from grace; Hebrews 12:15, reversionism is described here as falling back from the grace of God. Whichever definition you use they all add up to neglect of Bible doctrine.

9.       Grace and suffering. 2Corinthians 12:7-10, we have the importance of the grace apparatus for perception [GAP], the importance of the constant and daily intake of Bible doctrine. The grace principle meets every exigency of life.

10.     The axioms of grace.

          a.       God is perfect, therefore His plan is perfect.

          b.       A perfect plan can only originate and function from the source of a perfect God.

          c.        If mankind can do anything meritorious in the plan of God it is not longer perfect. Why? Man is imperfect, he cannot contribute to a perfect plan. His imperfection only contributes imperfection, therefore man’s contributions are excluded.

          d.       A plan is no stronger than its weakest link. There are no weak links in God’s plan.

          e.       Grace excludes, therefore, all human merit, all human ability, all human good, all legalism, all self-righteousness and arrogance.

          f.        Legalism, therefore, is the enemy of grace. There is no place for legalism or human good in the plan of God.

          g.       All legalism and human good is associated with the greatest of mental attitude sins which is pride. Arrogance has no place in God’s grace plan.

11.     The four areas in which pride or arrogance reject God’s grace.

          a.       The pride of the believer who rejects the doctrine of eternal security. The believer who rejects eternal security thinks that his sins are greater than the grace plan of God. This is the quintessence of arrogance.

          b.       The pride of that believer who succumbs to pressure and adversity. He assumes that his sufferings and adversities are greater than the grace provision of God.

          c.        The pride of reversionism. The reversionist assumes that his form of reversionism is greater than supergrace blessings. He assumes that his emotions, his ecstatics, his experiences, his legalistic functions, or even his phallic stimulations are more important than Bible doctrine, the daily function of GAP and the resultant supergrace blessings.

          d.       The pride of pseudo-spirituality. The pseudo-spiritual believer thinks that his system of spirituality, his system of energy of the flesh, is greater than the true function of God the Holy Spirit in his life and in the life of the royal family. In his arrogance he becomes a holy-roller, becomes involved in the tongues movement, he ejaculates verbal nonsense which he calls tongues, or enters into spiritual functions like witnessing and prayer in the energy of the flesh, or observes the taboos in the name of asceticism, or functions under some point program which impresses him and impresses his friends. He changes his personality to become sombre, or he changes his personality to be one of the ‘happy boys’, but whatever he does it is pseudo and it is phoney.


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #5


5 05/07/1976 Philippians 1:2a Doctrine of grace (pts. 4–8); logistical grace


Three guys are at the front. Men from Vietnam. Sgt. Bacon. His life has been changed by Bible doctrine. Sgt. Howard was told to be always ready. A third guy. The previous guys were medal of honor recipients. Sounds like his first time in Berachah Church. The principle of freedom through military victory.


We are picking up with the stages of grace in the doctrine above.


The notes on logistical grace do not match those in NB2.


Logistical Grace

1.       Logistical grace is the basis for spiritual growth. There is no spiritual advance apart from logistical grace. 2Peter 3:18 But grow in grace and knowledge [it does not say, grow in grace and doing things for God, or by hooking up with Christian organizations].

2.       Logistical grace is related to doctrine and service. Hebrews 12:28 therefore, because we have received to ourselves an unshakable royal kingdom, let us be hanging onto grace through which we might render acceptable service to God with reverence toward Christ and respect toward doctrine. Hanging onto grace is positive volition toward doctrine. You hang on to grace by assimilating Bible doctrine.

3.       Logistical grace is the basis for stability. 1Peter 5:12 I have written you briefly exhorting and testifying that this is the true grace of God, stand fast in it. You eat food and it is converted into doctrine. Your attitude in life must be correct and aggressive. All stability in life comes from Bible doctrine. These three points are related to Paul writing grace to you to the Philippians. People have power in many ways, but this does not give them stability or security. People with power feel very insecure and they believe that someone is trying to take it from them.

4.       Logistical grace is the basis for true royal family production. 1Corinthians 15:10 In fact, His grace toward me was not empty. Paul exploited grace. If Bible doctrine is first in your priorities, everything else will fall into place.

5.       

6.       The grace blessings for the mature believer. This will be saved for when we get to the prosperity section.

7.       The promotion of the mature believer and we saw this in Psalm 84.

8.       The doctrine of the supergrace believer. This will need to be amplified. There is such a thing as supergrace. It is found in James 4:6 He gives greater or he gives supergrace or more grace. God has never let us down. The supergrace believer is the believer who has been given through logistical support. 1Timothy 1:14 super-abounding grace, which is supergrace.


Ultra Supergrace

1.       Ultra supergrace is the most advanced stage of spiritual maturity. Once the believer breaks the maturity barrier, his objective is ultra supergrace. He passes the perimeter stage. In no man’s land is the most subtle. Here friends drop you; marriages break up. Here is where Jesus said, “I have come not to unify but to divide with a sword.” Here is where you must decide which way you are going. You always get a choice. For those who pass, it is always darkest before the dawn. You will say, “It was worth every moment that I had to deal with disillusion, disenchantment, etc.

2.       This is a place of preservation from danger. Philippians 2:12 be accomplishing your own preservation in danger. Be advancing to ultra supergrace.

3.       Ultra supergrace is the place of deliverance. 2Timothy 2:10 For this reason I Bob gives the example of him playing chicken with a guy. Moses was accused of taking the people out into the desert to kill them. All things work together for good for the mature believer; not for the reversionist.


Bob did not go very far with this doctrine.


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #6


6 05/09/1976 Philippians 1; Job 5:19–27 Doctrine of grace (cont.); dying grace


Last night, they watched the movie “My Fair Lady” which is based upon an ancient myth. This guy was interested in his perfect match, and the women there did not enough for him.


A lot between and a man and a woman is greater than death. Psalm 102 118. Reversionism is miserable eand horrible. The Philippians are right behind Paul; they are right on his heels. No person exceeds the spiritual growth of his own pastor.


Certain passages only apply when you are in supergrace. The death of His godly ones is a reference to one stage of spiritual maturity. It is a high priority for God to deal with the deaths of supergrace believers.


Ask yourself that, when you were under pressure in supergrace, were you happy/ it goes from logistical grace to dying grace quite quickly.


Job 5:19 In six disasters He will save you;

Even in seven, evil will not touch you.


OSHA is filled with evil. We are here under logistical grace.


Job 5:20 In famine He will redeem you from death,

And in war, from the power of the sword.

Job 5:21 You will be hidden [g]from the scourge of the tongue,

And you will not be afraid of violence when it comes.

Job 5:22 You will laugh at violence and hunger,

And you will not be afraid of [h]wild animals.

Job 5:23 For you will be in league with the stones of the field,

And the animals of the field will be at peace with you.

Job 5:24 You will know that your tent is secure,

For you will visit your home and [i]have nothing missing.

Job 5:25 You will also know that your [j]descendants will be many,

And your offspring as the grass of the earth.

Job 5:26 You will come to the grave at a ripe age,

Like the stacking of grain in its season. There is a right time to pick corn. God decides when it is time for us to have our pcs (permanent change of station). In the military, you know when you are going to get a pcs.

Job 5:27 Behold this; we have investigated it, and so it is.

Hear it, and know for yourself." Dying grace is your time on earth coming to an end.


Verse 2 – “Grace to you [dative of advantage; for your benefit].”


In fou nights, we have explained v. 2a.


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #7


7 05/09/1976 Philippians 1:2b Concept of prosperity; 5 categories of supergrace blessing


“and peace” – the ascensive kaí (καί) [pronounced ], also used as an emphatic kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. In the emphatic use it is translated “and so.” The next word is a direct result of grace. The word “peace” is not world peace, peacefulness or tranquillity. It was taken from the Hebrew originally—shalom. Brought into the Greek it is eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay]. It means “prosperity.” While it is used as a salutation in the Greek language, that is not its meaning here in any sense of the word—”and so prosperity.” This is grace prosperity. Prosperity here refers to the attainment of mature status. The Philippians at the time of writing were mature believers, and as a result of this they were now under the logistical support of grace which included a lot of prosperity. As a result they were enjoying this prosperity under great pressures. This was more than a mere salutation. “Grace to you, and so prosperity” is an entire way of life. Prosperity is a part of spiritual growth, spiritual maturity, and it is one of the ways in which Jesus Christ is glorified in the devil’s world. God can only give prosperity to those who have the capacity for it. You either have capacity for prosperity or you have capacity for discipline. If you are in reversionism you have capacity for discipline. If you are in maturity, then you only have capacity for prosperity.


In a greeting, Bob says, “What do you say?” People do not immediately tell him everything on their mind, as it is just a way of saying hello.


No such thing as a good British lover; and if he was, he probably took on a French name.


Bob expounds on My Fair Lady. The American, Higgins, was an arrogant American.


Our capacity must have a place to express itself. Freedom is necessary in order for us to express capacity for life. God provides friends, loved ones, success, and prosperity. God provides for us in our capacity area; it keeps us from being frustrated. God provides the environment of prosperity; you can even have culture which you appreciate. Freedom from crime, freedom from idiocy. It is a demand from God. When you crack the maturity barrier, your capacity must have a place to go.


The Christian who is suffering for Jesus who cannot stand prosperity. They do not realize the basic principle of Bible doctrine, that capacity for life must have a place to go.


We can choose for doctrine or we can choose for discipline. So David said, “My cup overflows.” Does this mean that he had a careless waiter? He had wealth, he had promotion, he had wine, women and song; everything which we could construe as god never leaves anyone with an empty cup. No mature believer is a beggar. “Grace will pursue me for the rest of my life.”


The possibilities of our future when in supergrace A; and when we move across no man’s land, we take our prosperity with us. When you cross over into ultra supergrace, capacity comes from Bible doctrine in the soul.


There are abilities that come with Bible doctrine. How to face suffering and pressures in life. Ability to interpret current events in the light of the Word of God. Bob could distinguish the different laughs Saturday night, and they were happy laughs.


Temporal blessings. Not the most important. When on the outside looking in, they seem to be the most important. We do not all get the exact same blessings. Many of you will be very wealthy; and when you crack the maturity barrier, you will not lack. Promotion is handled separately in one’s sphere of life. Never push it; sit back and wait. Success and rapport. Sexual prosperity and find your rw or rm. You must have the capacity first. Mental ability; increased IQ and perspicacity. Blessing by association; blessing by relationship; not simply blessed by material things, but by your thoughtfulness. The loved one periphery.


Fourth category. All of the promises and all of the lies of the politicians in this election year. There is one thing which can save us. All of these places could be saved if a few believers in each of these countries progresses to spiritual maturity.


Capacity for life means to live beautifully and then to also die beautifully. If you have capacity for life, you will also have capacity for dying.


Philippians 1:20–21 According to my intense concentration on doctrine and resultant confidence that in nothing will I be disgraced....even now as always, Christ will be exhaulted by my person, by life or by death. For me, living is Christ and dying is gain.


“from God our Father” – the preposition apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] plus the ablative denotes ultimate source. We have the ablative of source mentioned as God—theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. Then comes a genitive singular of apposition, patêr (πατήρ) [pronounced pat-AYR]—”from God our Father.” The source of all logistical grace is God the Father, the author of the divine plan of grace. This is an anarthrous construction in which there are no definite articles, even though we put one in in the English, and the reason is because of the qualitative aspect of the source. Notice that the source is very personal, for we have the possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun egô; hêmn (ἡμόν) [pronounced hay-MOHN]—”our Father.” For all members of the royal family God is our Father.


“and” – here is the way we enter the plan of God. Here is the door by which we enter—the cross; “the Lord Jesus Christ.” This is the connective use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the ablative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss], used here for the deity of Christ; the ablative of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE]j, used for the humanity of Christ; the ablative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], used for the messianic appointment of Christ. Jesus Christ, the second person of the Trinity, is also said to be the source of grace and prosperity, along with the Father. The Father is the logistical supply; Jesus Christ is the door. Notice that there is no reference to God the Holy Spirit. This is the dispensation of the royal family of God and the ministry of the Holy Spirit in this dispensation is to glorify Jesus Christ, therefore He is not mentioned in verses such as these.


Philippians 1:2 Grace to you, and so prosperity, from God our Father, and from the Lord Jesus Christ.


At this point the apostle who has lived a very full life has the opportunity of pausing to give way to a great principle called “memory.”


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #8


8 05/10/1976 Philippians 1:3 Doctrine of memory


To be alone, you must have capacity for life. You carry your soul with you wherever you go and when you stop carrying it, you are dead.


Bob does not know how anyone gets along in life without imagination and a good memory.


Thanksgiving and Prayer


Philippians 1:3  I thank my God upon every remembrance of you,... (BLB)


Verse 3 – “I thank my God” is the beginning of a wonderful memory, and it starts in the right direction because this implies first of all a good set of priorities, a good scale of values. Who wants to be remembered by someone who has no priorities, whose scale of values is all wrong?


“I thank” is the present active indicative of the verb eucharisteô (εὐχαριστέω) [pronounced yew-khahr-ih-STEH-oh] [eû (ε) [pronounced yoo] = good; charis (χάρις) [pronounced KHAHR-iç] = grace], and the word “good grace” comes to connote gratitude. Grace oriented people have gratitude, appreciation, capacity. It means here to be mindful of benefits, therefore to be thankful, and it is correctly translated “I am giving thanks.” This is a customary present tense which denotes what habitually occurs when a person like Paul is in maturity, has great capacity for life. The Philippians were the greatest of memories to Paul; he loved them dearly. He remembers his association with them and obviously he remembers their positive volition toward Bible doctrine. The active voice: Paul as a teacher produces the action of the verb. He remembers them in a very special way at this time. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of thanksgiving based upon the fact that these people are a pleasant memory. His high priority: “my God” – dative of indirect object from the definite article and from the noun theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. There is also the possessive genitive singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]; mou (μο) [pronounced moo]; also emou (ἐμο) [pronounced eh-MOO]. Literally, “I am giving thanks to my God.”


Is there anyone who has a good memory of you?


Paul has a wonderful memory of the Philippians. He keeps his perspective.


“upon every remembrance” we have the preposition epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus the dative singular of pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], and the noun mneía (μνεία) [pronounced MNI-ah], meaning “memory”—”for every memory.” Then the phrase, “of you”—genitive of reference plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. The form: humôn (ὑμν) [pronounced hoo-MONE].


Philippians 1:3 I am giving thanks to my God for every memory[2] of you.


Principle

1.       To become pleasant memory for someone else requires, in the royal family, spiritual growth and spiritual advance.

2.       The Philippians were a pleasant memory because of the mutual rapport of spiritual advance.

3.       Believers who attain super-grace become a blessing by association. This is the memory of blessing by association.

4.       Blessing by association moulds the believer into a pleasant memory to others.

5.       The overflow into the principle of historical impact is also involved because many of the people that you remember are also involved in the historical impact.

6.       As the Philippians advance spiritually they also became very wealthy. Since Paul was in their memory they wanted to do something for him and share their grace blessings with him as he had shared his grace blessings with them. His grace blessing had been doctrine; theirs was financial success.

7.       This super-grace wealth was used out of the principle of blessing by association, and on three different occasions, having amassed large fortunes, they sent an offering to Paul at Corinth—2Corinthians 11:9; Philippians 4:15; to Paul at Thessalonica—Philippians 4:16; to Paul at Rome during his first imprisonment—Philippians 4:10, 14.


Doctrine of Memory

5/10/76

A.       Definition.

          1.       Memory is a vital function of the mentality of the soul related to one's capacity for life, happiness and absorption of doctrine.

          2.       It is the mental capacity of retaining unconscious traces of conscious impressions and of recalling those traces to consciousness with attendant perception.

          3.       Memory includes the power of retention and recollection.

          4.       Therefore, memory is a combination of retention and recollection. Memory obviously is a part of capacity for life.

          5.       Memory is also the function of the mentality of the soul in identification and perception of what has been previously learned.

          6.       Memory also includes the concept of people living in your soul. It is the perpetuation of thinking about people you love.

          7.       Another facet of memory is commemoration, which is the perpetuation of knowledge of anyone, anything, people or any event.

          8.       There are principles of memory such as the communion table. This is when we recall through the ministry of the Holy Spirit those doctrines pertaining specifically to the uniqueness of Christ and His work on the cross, and we relate it to our entrance into the plan of God.

          9.       There are parades which spark memories; there are songs of memory. An ancient saying, “Lovers remember everything.”

B.       Memory is a part of personal love toward God, Ecclesiastes 12:1. You should store good memories all of our lives as a defense against reversionism, Psalm 145:7-10.

C.       The mature believer is a pleasant memory to others, Philippians 1:3 Proverbs 10:7.

D.       Communion is designed to remember the Lord until the Rapture, Luke 22:19-20 1Corinthians 11:23-25. Memory and thanksgiving are also related.

E.       Bible doctrine in the memory center of the soul must have number one priority, 2Peter 1:12-13 (Therefore, I will always be ready to keep on reminding you concerning these doctrines although you have known and have become stabilized by means of resident doctrine. Moreover, I consider it my duty as long as I reside in this tent to arouse you by means of memory.). Repeated Bible teaching produces memory of doctrine. Stability comes from remembering the doctrine you have learned.

F.       Memory of reversionistic discipline produces misery, while memory of supergrace blessing produces happiness, Jeremiah remembers both of these, both the misery and the happiness. Lamentations 3:16-24 He had broken my teeth with gravel; he had made me cower in the dust; and my soul has been rejected from prosperity; and I have forgotten happiness. My strength has perished; my memory is from the Lord; remember my affliction (my reversionistic discipline) and my wandering in evil (remember it so that I avoid reversionism): wormwood (wormwood is a mental attitude of misery; this is absinth) and bitterness. Surely my soul remembers and is bowed down within me (it is a humiliating experience and a good one to remember what divine discipline is like). This doctrine I recall to my mind; therefore, I have hope; the Lord’s great support will never cease expressions never fail, they are new every morning, great is Your faithfulness. The Lord is my portion, says my soul therefore, I have confidence in Him.

G.       Doctrine in the memory center is designed to orient the believer to logistical grace. Psalm 103:2 Bless the Lord, O my soul, and forget not His benefits.

H.       The importance of doctrine in the memory center is taught in Psalm 119:16(I will delight in doctrinal principles; I will not forget Your Word), 83 (Although I have become like a wineskin and smoke [few things stink as much as an old wineskin being burned up] I do not forget Your doctrinal principles [once you have smelled a wineskin being burned up, you cannot forget it; similarly, you cannot forget doctrine]), 93 (I have not forgotten Your categorical doctrines, for by them, You have revived me.), 109 (My life is in continual danger, and yet I do not forget Your doctrine —you cannot apply doctrine unless you remember doctrine), 141 (I am small and despised; but I do not forget Your doctrinal categories.) Proverbs 4:5. You cannot apply doctrine unless you remember it. Acquire doctrine, but don't forget it. Doctrine is no good if it becomes subconscious trace material.

I.        Memory is also used as an anthropopathism. Memory is ascribed to God to encourage the believer about divine faithfulness. God has not forgotten you.

J.        Negative aspects of memory.

          1.       Judging and maligning other believers destroys the blessings of memory, Job 13:2-12.

          2.       For the unbeliever, memory has regrets beyond death, Luke 16:25.

          3.       Too much drinking causes a ruler to forget his responsibilities, a crying drunk cannot lead a division. Proverbs 31:4-5.

          4.       The memory center has the job of recalling sins, Numbers 5:15 Hebrews 10:3. This is necessary for the use of rebound.

          5.       The exercise of the fifth cycle of discipline blots out the memory of that nation in history, Exodus 17:14.

          6.       Reversionist is not remembered, Job 18:17 The memory of him perishes from the earth and he has no name around him (or in his periphery).

          7.       The reversionistic believer does not remember the Lord, especially when under the sin unto death, unless he changes his attitude. Psalm 6:4-5 Return, O Lord, rescue my life from reversionism; deliver me with Your grace; for there is no remembrance in you, O Lord, in dying. In the grave, who will give You thanks?

_____________________________________________________________________

R. B. Thieme, Jr. Bible Ministries 5139 West Alabama, Houston, Texas 77056 (713) 621-3740

c 1993, by R. B. Thieme, Jr. All rights reserved.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


1976 Philippians                                                                                            Lesson #9


9 05/11/1976 Philippians 1:4–5 Doctrine of thanksgiving; pleasure of prayer


I am giving thanks indicates that we are speaking of thanksgiving. This doctrine will be covered again in Lesson #101. Some additional notes from that lesson are included below. The doctrines match up pretty well, but Bob reads off more verses in this one.


The Doctrine of Thanksgiving

1.       Thanksgiving is the daily act of rendering gratitude to God. This is not just for material things. Therefore, the quality of thanksgiving reaches its zenith when the believer becomes more mature. And there is no gratitude to God apart from Bible doctrine in the soul. Thanksgiving is often a public acknowledgment or celebration of worship in which the goodness and graciousness of God are extolled, 1Chronicles 16:7-36.

          a.       This includes the various post-alv blessings, like temporal blessings. Blessing by association; and it is fun to be a blessing to others through association.

          b.       Thanksgiving reaches a peak when you can appreciate all five categories of blessing.

          c.        1Chronicles 16:7–36.

2.       Thanksgiving is the normal mental attitude of the royal family of God as one advances in the spiritual life. Ephesians 5:20 1Thessalonians 5:18.

3.       Thanksgiving is based on knowing God through doctrine resident in the soul. The key is being thankful to the giver rather than being focused upon the gift. Psalm 100:3-5 Know that Jehovah Himself is God. It is He Who has made us [the Lord Jesus Christ] and His we are. Enter into His gates with thanksgiving [today we would say enter into Bible class with gratitude] and into His courts with praise. Give thanks to Him; honor His Person, for the Lord is absolute good. His grace is everlasting. His faithfulness belongs to all generations.

4.       Thanksgiving is a priestly sacrifice. It was a sacrifice in the Old Testament, it is a sacrifice for the royal priesthood of the New. Praise is one response to having thanksgiving. Psalm 116:17 (To You shall I offer the sacrifice of Thanksgiving and call upon the Person of the Lord—Thanksgiving then prayer) 107:22 (Let them also offer sacrifices of thanksgiving and enucleate His works with joyful singing.) Amos 4:5 (Offer up also thanksgiving offerings from that which is leavened, then proclaim freewill offerings; make them known, for thus says the Lord, So you express your capacity for love.) Hebrews 13:15.

5.       Thanksgiving is a supergrace function. Colossians 3:15 2Corinthians 4:15 (For all things are for your benefit, that the grace that is being multiplied to more and more people shall cause the giving of thanks to abound to the glory of the God.) . Maximum ability in thanksgiving is related to the supergrace life, therefore maximum thanksgiving comes from maximum doctrine in the soul. You must have doctrine in the soul before you have the mental attitude of thanksgiving. 2Corinthians 9:10–11 (Now He Who supplies seed to the soul and bread for food will supply your seed for sowing [when you give sacrificially, God will provide more for the giving; the more that you sow, the more that God gives you] and increase the harvest of your spiritual blessings of supergrace. You will be enriched in everything for all liberality, which, through us, is producing thanksgiving to God.), related to the priestly function of giving. Personal testimonies of supergrace believers. Daniel 2:23 (To You, O God, of my fathers, I give praise and thanksgiving for you have given me wisdom and power.) John 11:41 (And so they removed the stone Now Jesus, speaking from His humanity as an ultra supergrace believer now Jesus raised His eyes and said, “Father, I thank You, that You have heard Me.”) Romans 1:8 1Corinthians 1:4 (I thank my God always—supergrace Paul is speaking) Philippians 1:3 2Timothy 1:3. (I thank God, Whom I serve.)

6.       Thanksgiving is motivated, therefore, by Bible doctrine resident in the soul. Colossians 2:7 (Having been rooted and constantly being edified to him). You have to be taught before you overflow in thanksgiving.

7.       Believers who are positive toward doctrine motivate thanksgiving in others. 1Thessalonians 3:9 For what thanksgiving could we offer to God for you in return for all the happiness with which we rejoice before our God on account of you.

8.       Thanksgiving is related to the function of prayer. Philippians 4:6 Colossians 4:2.

9.       Food should be accepted with thanksgiving. Bob always sanctifies his food before eating, even in a public place. 1Timothy 4:3-4.

10.     God is the object of thanksgiving. 2Corinthians 9:15 (Thanks be to God for His indescribable gift.) Revelation 7:12


Some sort of accident takes place near Berachah and cleaning was involved.


We should be able to express our thoughts when it comes to freedom and thanksgiving. What we think is extremely important. Arrogant people never seem to be thankful for anything. It is more the idea of true appreciation for others. To be thoughtful of someone else, to be grateful for someone else


Philippians 1:4  always making the supplication with joy in my every supplication for all of you,  (BLB)


Verse 4 – Parenthesis. “Always” is the adverb of time, pántote (πάντοτε) [pronounced PAHN-toht-eh], meaning always or at all times.


“in every prayer of mine” – Paul does not say he prays always, but he does say that when he does pray he always remembers the Philippians. We have en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative singular from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], plus the noun deêsis (δέησις) [pronounced DEH-ay-sis]—”in every prayer.” Then the possessive genitive of the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—”in my every prayer,” which reminds us of the fact that prayer is a personal matter. It is our privilege but it is also personal and private.


“for you” – the preposition hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] plus the ablative of the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], and with it the object, the personal pronoun plural su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. It is translated, “on behalf of all of you.”


“making” – present middle participle from poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh]. This means to perform, to produce, to accomplish. Prayer is the object, deêsis (δέησις) [pronounced DEH-ay-sis] again, and so when poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh] is put with deêsis (δέησις) [pronounced DEH-ay-sis] it means “offering prayer.” The iterative present describes something that occurs at successive intervals. It recurs. It is known as the present tense of repeated action. The iterative present means that when you pray, you pray effectively but you don’t pray all the time. The middle voice is the indirect middle, it emphasizes Paul as the agent producing the action of the verb rather than participating in its results. The participle is a temporal participle. Temporal participles have to be translated in a certain way, usually “when” – “when offering prayer.” The word “request” is prayer, the accusative singular direct object, and going with poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh] it means “offering prayer.”


“with joy” – the preposition metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive of chara (χαρά) [pronounced khahr-AH], “with inner happiness.” Inner happiness is sharing God’s +H.


Philippians 1:4 Always in my every prayer for all of you when offering prayer with inner happiness. [End parenthesis.]


Philippians 1:5  for your partnership in the gospel from the first day until now,  (BLB)


Verse 5 – “For your fellowship, epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus the dative of koinônia (κοινωνία) [pronounced koi-nohn-EE-ah]. It should be translated, “Because of your contribution.” Epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus the dative is “because,” not “for.” Not only does he give thanks for the memory (v.3) but he also gives thanks for the contribution. Omitting the parenthesis, (v.3) “I am giving thanks to my God for every memory of you (v.5) because of your contribution.” Verse 4 is parenthetical: prayer with pleasure. Paul is thankful to God for the Philippians’ financial contribution.


“in the gospel” is a prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on], which means “for the purpose of spreading the gospel.” That is the way people enter the plan of God. This was a major part of Paul’s service, though it is not emphasized because the Bible emphasizes his thinking, and not just regarding salvation but his thinking with regard to every realm of doctrine.


“from the first day” – apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] plus the ablative singular of the adjective prôtos (πρτος) [pronounced PROHT-oss], plus hêmera (ἡμάρα) [pronounced hay-MEH-raw]. It is correctly translated, “from that first day.” The definite article here is used as a demonstrative pronoun to call attention to the first time the Philippians ever contributed to Paul.


“until now” is a Classical Greek phrase. There is an Attic adverb, achri/achris (ἄχρι/ἄχρις) [pronounced AHKH-ree/AHKH-rece], used as an improper preposition with the genitive of the definite article, plus the adverb nun (νν) [pronounced noon]. This is an articular adverbial prepositional phrase, and that is Classical Greek.


Philippians 1:5 Because of your contribution [offering] from that first day until now for the purpose of spreading the gospel from the first day until now.


Principle

1.       God uses advancing believers or positive believers to provide the logistical support for right pastors. This liberates the pastor—his time.

2.       The pastor’s spiritual prosperity is transformed into material prosperity of the Philippians so that their material prosperity will become logistical support to sustain Paul.

3.       In this way each one becomes a blessing by association to the other.

4.       No one ever loses by taking in doctrine whether it is the pastor or the congregation.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #10


10 05/12/1976 Philippians 1:5 What is being done in prep school. Doctrine of giving; mutual blessing by association


A church this large is sometimes a rumor factory. This is gossip. We are in the process of drafting a new constitution; no it is not a dictatorship. Another rumor is that the prep school is crashing and burning. It is at an all-time high. Prep school is not only walking but marching. In Ken Wise, we have a remarkable G3. Bob developed an entire honor code for the cadets. Wise was given the task to put together the entire prep school operation. It is beautifully laid out on the calendar.


Operation ducks on a pond is an overall master plan, taking the children from the cradle to the auditorium (not the grave). For the two year olds to the sixth grade. Some teachers do not have the time to sit down and work things out. Previously, there was just a quarterly and teachers would read it 15 minutes before their class. It is now beautifully organized.


“When gossip in this congregation is discovered, it is rooted out and destroyed with an ammonia cloud.”


Translation gone over:


This was a very large offering, put into the hands of Epaphrodites. The believers who sent the first offering to Corinth were in supergrace A and the second offering they sent when they were in supergrace B. No pressure and no solicitation involved in this giving.


Paul, when in supergrace B, he was supported by the Philippians. He recovered from reversionism in Rome. Paul receives quite a bit of monetary support. These are large offerings. The Corinthians believed that Paul was in the ministry for the money. The mistake of the Corinthians had never given Paul a dime.


2Corinthians 11:7 Or did I commit a sin in humbling myself so that you might be exalted, because I preached God's gospel to you free of charge? 


The Corinthians were wealthy and they saw no reason to help Paul out.


2Corinthians 11:8 I robbed other churches by accepting support from them in order to serve you. 


This is sanctified sarcasm. Other churches paid my wages so that I could serve you.


Bob lived on his own private income for the first ten years of working at Berachah. There was a fairly wealthy family which helped out. Bob’s father cut him off; but this means that his step mother was well taken care of. This is around year 26 for Bob.


Bob knows very well about living close to the line. But he was fine during the depression.


Legalism cannot stand to see any grace oriented believer prospering.


2Corinthians 11:9 And when I was with you and was in need, I did not burden anyone, for the brothers who came from Macedonia supplied my need. So I refrained and will refrain from burdening you in any way. 


Philippi is in the Macedonian region. There are two offerings spoken of here. The Philippians supported the Apostle Paul. They sent very large sums of money from their own monetary blessing.


Paul had a trade on the side and he had to be a tent maker. He would not wear raggedly clothes and look sad and have a mournful expression and have his hand out for money.


The Four Gifts to Go Through Paul’s Hands

1.       Philippians 4:15 And you Philippians yourselves know that in the beginning of the gospel, when I left Macedonia, no church entered into partnership with me in giving and receiving, except you only.  Paul did not ask anyone for a dime.

2.       We do not know how many offerings there were, but at least two. Only the Philippian church was squared away. They were mature believers and they had been prospered.

3.       Philippians 4:10 I rejoiced in the Lord greatly that now at length you have revived your concern for me. You were indeed concerned for me, but you had no opportunity.  Bob said that this is gift #4? In any case, even with a re-listen, I am unsure how many gifts Paul handled. No opportunity to give when Paul was in reversionism.


Forget money; consider love. It is love, affection, consideration, and thoughtfulness. It is the capacity in the soul that is key.


Giving Principles

1.       God uses mature believers to provide for pastor-teachers or Apostles, thus liberating them the study and teach. You would be shocked as to how good a pastor-teacher can be in another profession.

2.       The pastor’s spiritual prosperity is transformed into material prosperity of the Philippians so that their material blessing Paul is provided with logistical grace

3.       Each becomes a blessing to the other.

4.       No one ever loses by taking in Bible doctrine. You cannot lose by consistenly taking in doctrine.


The doctrine of giving is taken from NB1. It turns out that it was not even close, nor was the doctrine from NB2.


Giving by R. B. Thieme, Jr.

1.       Definition:

          a.       Giving is an expression of worship which commemorates the grace policy of God.

          b.       Giving in the Church Age is the function of the believer’s royal priesthood, and since it is, giving must be accomplished in privacy without being pressured. There are four categories of Christian service, one of them is giving.

          c.        Giving is the means of inculcating teamwork into the body of Christ.

          d.       Giving is further defined as the presentation of money or other valuable commodities which may be used in the sustaining the ministry of communication in the spiritual gift of either evangelism or pastor-teacher.

2.       Principles of giving:

          a.       Proverbs 11:24–25 One gives freely, yet grows all the richer; another withholds what he should give, and only suffers want.  Whoever brings blessing will be enriched, and one who waters will himself be watered.  People who try to hold onto their money deprive themselves. Giving never impoverishes.

          b.       Not sure.

          c.        The concept of tithing. Tithing was never spiritual giving in Israel. Tithing would be a good thing for the US. 3 categories of taxation. Tithe for the maintenance of the Levites. Malachi 3:10 a straight-across the board income tax. The storehouse is the treasury. It is not the local church.

3.       The concept of giving in the 1st century 1Corinthians 16:2 Set aside money at the first day of the week. A time where people can be in the habit and bring money to the church.

4.       The doctrinal principles of giving:

          a.       Giving is a mental attitude. 2Corinthians 8:2

          b.       Giving must be an expression of free will apart from gimmicks or coercion. 2Corinthians 8:3

          c.        Giving must be an expression toward the Lord before it can be an attitude toward others. They first gave of themselves to the Lord and then from themselves.

          d.       Giving depends upon the consistent function of gap; 2Corinthians 8:7

          e.       Giving must be related to the principle of grace. 2Corinthians 8:9

          f.        Doctrine in the oul producing spiritual prosperity must precede extensive giving. 2Corinthians 8:12

          g.       Giving is affected by one’s attitude toward Bible doctrine. 2Corinthians 8:6

          h.       Giving is related to the doctrinal content of the soul. 2Corinthians 9:7

          i.         God provides the spiritual and material capital. 2Corinthians 9:8

          j.         The most effective grace giving happens when the believer cracks the material barrier.

          k.        Generosity of mind leads to generosity of giving. 2Corinthians 9:11

5.       Philippians 4:14–16 read.

6.       The principle of the pastor’s logistical support from giving.

          a.       Such support makes an issue out of the gospel and Bible doctrine rather than money 2Corinthians 6:9 I was not a burden to any of you Corinthians.

          b.       The pastor exchanges spiritual blessing for material blessing. Mutual blessing Philippians 1:1–3

          c.        Giving reflects the mental attitude of the congregation toward their right pastor. You have revived your thinking concerning me.

          d.       This becomes mutual blessing by association. This is a rapport between a mature congregation and a mature pastor-teacher. As the people are spiritually blessed they give. Philippians 4:14


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #11


11 05/13/1976 Philippians 1:6–7a Rapport in spiritual maturity


Medal of Honor recipient.


Philippians 1:6  being persuaded of this very thing, that the One having begun a good work in you will complete it until the day of Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


Verse 6 – confidence in the Philippian progress. “Being confident” is a perfect active participle from the verb peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh], which generally means to obey, to believe, to convince, to persuade. In the perfect tense it means to have confidence. This is the perfect tense of existing state in which the past is dropped from the perfect and the emphasis is placed on the existing state of confidence. Paul has a state of confidence at this moment rather than emphasizing any future results. This is the branch of the intensive perfect in which special attention is directed to the results of the action, hence the existing state is intensified. Paul has complete confidence, not only in his own spiritual advance to the final objective but even much more so in those who are following him closely in the Philippian congregation. The passive voice: Paul receives this confidence from Bible doctrine resident in his soul plus his own observation of the Philippian congregation. This is a causal participle, it denotes that which is the ground for the action of the main verb, and it is translated “Because I have confidence.”


“of this very thing” –auto (αὐτό) [pronounced ow-TOH], the accusative singular of reference from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], and it emphasizes the identity of Paul’s confidence. It also makes it very clear that there is no place in the spiritual life for ‘I hope so.’ Confidence is a spiritual asset, it is not a sign of arrogance. The more doctrine you have in your soul the more confidence you have about almost everything in life. There is a demonstrative pronoun with this as well—houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], the immediate demonstrative which emphasizes something in the immediate vicinity of the context. It should be translated, “in this doctrine itself.” Paul is confident in the Philippian advance. He is confident in the principle that when anyone is positive long enough they are going to get there. Some people take longer than others; some have more set-backs than others; but if you live long enough the tenacity of your own positive volition toward doctrine, plus many types of grace provision, you are going to reach that final objective, and with it you will have everything that God designed for you. And every blessing that you have glorifies God.


“that he which hath begun” – it begins with the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] used as a substantive for the epexegetical infinitive after a preceding demonstrative. The articular aorist middle participle is from the verb enárchomai (ἐνάρχομαι) [pronounced en-AR-khom-ahee]—”begin.” The definite article is used as a relative pronoun—”he who.” It refers to God the Father, the author of operation grace. The aorist tense is ingressive, it emphasizes the Philippian progress to super-grace from the standpoint of its beginning. The beginning was the point of salvation. Like the constative aorist it gathers into one entirety the progress of the Philippians from salvation to super-grace. The middle voice is the indirect middle, it emphasizes God the Father as the agent producing the action of the verb through logistical grace. The participle is circumstantial, emphasizing logistical grace. So we have, “that he who has begun.”


“in you” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative plural from the plural personal pronoun su; “a good work” – the accusative singular direct object from the adjective agathos (ἀγαθός) [pronounced ag-ath-OSS] for intrinsic good. God is absolute perfection. Anything that comes from God has to be intrinsic good, it can’t be anything else. The noun ergon (ἔργον) [pronounced EHR-gon] is also in the accusative. It has numerous related meanings such as “deed, action, accomplishment, work.” Here it connotes that which is brought into being by the work of logistical grace. The anartharus construction emphasizes the high quality of logistical grace.


“will perform it” – future active indicative from the verb epiteleô (ἐπιτελέω) [pronounced ep-ee-tel-EH-oh]. It means to perform, to accomplish, to fulfil, to complete: “will complete it.” The future tense is a gnomic future for a statement of doctrine, the Father’s logistical support of believers in advance to maturity. The active voice: God the Father provides the logistical support for those who are pressing toward the final objective. The indicative mood is declarative for statement of an absolute dogma of doctrine: that for any believer who is positive, in any stage of spiritual growth, God provides logistical grace.


“until the day of Jesus Christ” – in this statement of the Rapture we have an Attic Greek adverb of time achri/achris (ἄχρι/ἄχρις) [pronounced AHKH-ree/AHKH-rece], used as an improper preposition. The object is the descriptive genitive of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], emphasizing the central person involved in the resurrection of the Church, the God-Man, the Lord Jesus Christ. Logistical grace is available, then, to the royal family of God until the resurrection of the royal family occurs.


Philippians 1:6 Because I have confidence in this doctrine itself [logistical grace], that he who has begun a good work will complete it until the day of Jesus Christ.


 


Principles of Doctrine

1.       God has a plan for every Church Age believer and that plan has defined objectives—spiritual maturity. Notice that the divine objective is never stated in terms of Christians works or production. Reason: Works and production do not advance the believer. They are the result of advance but never the means.

2.       This plan and objective demands logistical support from the planner. Therefore God’s logistical grace will continue with the royal family until their resurrection or the Rapture.

3.       Logistical support will no longer be needed after the Rapture since the believer is in phase three.

4.       Out of these first three principles comes a conclusion: As long as you are alive God has a plan for your life.

5.       But you can never divorce that plan for your life from Bible doctrine resident in your soul.

6.       All objectives in the Christian life are accomplished through the daily function of GAP.

7.       All positive logistical grace comes through positive volition toward doctrine. (All logistical grace is divided into two categories: positive and negative)

8.       For those who are recalcitrant, who resist and reject Bible doctrine, there is the provision of grace which is the various stages of discipline for reversionism and the influences of the Satanic policy of evil.


Philippians 1:7  Accordingly, it is right for me to feel this about all of you, since I have you in the heart. Both in my chains and in the defense and confirmation of the gospel, you all are fellow partakers of grace with me.  (BLB)


Verses 7 -- the further you advance in the spiritual life the more your priorities change, your scale of values, and the more interesting becomes the rapport factor in


your life. It moves out and extends in areas that you would never dream possible.


“Even as it is meet” – kathôs (καθώς) [pronounced kahth-OCE] estin (ἐστίν) [pronounced ehs-TIN] dikaion. Kathôs (καθώς) [pronounced kahth-OCE] is a conjunctive adverb usually used to indicate comparison. Here it is a little different and is used here in its causal sense, correctly translated “since.” The present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] is next—estin (ἐστίν) [pronounced ehs-TIN]. The customary present denotes what habitually occurs when a pastor has a positive congregation toward Bible doctrine. The active voice: Paul produces the action doubling as a pastor here. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of absolute reality. The predicate nominative neuter dikaios (δίκαιος, αία, ον) [pronounced DIH-kai-oss] is translated “right”—”Since it is right.”


“for me” – dative of advantage singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH].


“to think this” – present active infinitive of the verb phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh], used here for objective thinking. Even in the area of the greatest conflicts of life the believer is capable of very objective thinking. Hence, this comes to mean to be holding an opinion—”for me to hold this opinion.” The customary present denotes what habitually occurs when believers are positive toward doctrine and have reached this stage of maturity; they hold opinions—correct opinions. The active voice: Paul is producing the objective thinking, he is holding the opinion. The infinitive is the infinitive of a conceived result assumed by the consequence of the Philippian attainment of super-grace.


There is also an accusative neuter singular direct object from the immediate demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]. It emphasizes here confidence in a principle, but it is a principle related to people. When people are hooked up with doctrine you can have confidence.


“of you all” – hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] plus the ablative from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] plus the pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. Literally, “in behalf of all of you.” Paul is holding an opinion about his favourite congregation which is composed of those who have been consistently positive and whose progress is right behind his own.


“because I have you in my heart”—begins with the preposition diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH]. The words diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] to e)xein me is Classical Greek. We have no comparable idiom today. The preposition diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] takes the accusative singular definite article means “because of,” not “through” as it would be in the genitive. The present active infinitive of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] means to have and to hold. Literally, “through the to have.” It doesn’t make sense in English. Me is the accusative singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. The present tense is a historical present, it views the past event with the vividness of a present occurrence. In other words, it is just as though Paul wrote it a few minutes ago and the ink is not even dry. The active voice: Paul produces the action, he had rapport with the Philippians. The prepositional phrase, “in my heart” is en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative singular of kardia (καρδία) [pronounced kahr-DEE-uh]—”in my right lobe.” This is the place where love exists. Anyone we truly love we lock up in our soul.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #12


12 05/14/1976 Philippians 1:7b–8 Mutual love of right pastor–teacher and congregation


Various laws and rules. A reading of the passage.


When a congregation reaches maturity with a pastor, they should stay with that pastor. A pastor should begin his career with a new congregation. No one ever exceeds the maturity of their own right pastor or even the wrong pastor. You cannot grow under a pastor who has a lower level of spiritual growth than you.


Epaphrodites will return to Philippi with information from Paul.


“inasmuch as” – no such word exists in the original manuscript. Next comes the prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] te (τε) [pronounced teh] tois (τος) [pronounced toiç] desmois, which is literally, “in my imprisonment.” The preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of desmos (δεσμός) [pronounced dehs-MOSS]. en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus te (τε) [pronounced teh] can be translated “while in prison.” With that is the adverbial genitive of place from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—”my.”


Then comes the repetition of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]—”both in the defence,” en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus apologia (ἀπολογία) [pronounced ap-ol-og-EE-ah] in the locative; “and confirmation”—kai bebêlos (βέβηλος,ον) [pronounced BEHB-ay-loss] which is translated “and establishment”; “of the gospel” – the descriptive genitive singular euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on], “good news.” Sometimes this refers to the good news of the gospel only, i.e. salvation doctrine. Sometimes it means the good news of doctrine in general. Sometimes it means good news without a doctrinal connotation. The words around it determine the meaning and in this chapter we see it once simply for the gospel (salvation), once for doctrine in general, and once simply for good news without any doctrinal connotation at all. He we have “both in defense of establishment of the good news.” The defence of the gospel or the good news is evangelization, while the establishment of the gospel is doctrinal teaching to new converts. So this is not talking about the gospel as the means of evangelization, this is talking about good news or doctrine you learn after you are saved. The establishment of the gospel also includes the organization of the local churches where Bible doctrine is taught to believers under strict academic discipline, and that is the means of it in this passage.


“you all are” is a present active participle from eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The present tense is a perfective present, it denotes a continuation of Philippian offerings as a result of their spiritual growth and advance to super-grace status. The active voice: the Philippians produce the action. The participle is circumstantial. With it is the accusative plural from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] plus the accusative plural of the personal pronoun su—”all of you are.”


“partakers” is the accusative plural direct object from sunkoinōnós (συγκοινωνός) [pronounced soong-koy-no-NOSS],, meaning “partners”; “of my grace”— the possessive genitive of the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. It modifies “partners”: ‘You are my partners’; “of grace” – the genitive singular meaning “in grace.” In this partnership Paul provides the doctrine for their spiritual growth and they provide the monetary offerings which is a part of his logistical support.


Philippians 1:7 Since it is right for me to be holding this opinion in behalf of you, because I have you in my right lobe while in prison, both in the defence of establishment of the gospel, all of you are my partners in grace.


Paul saw to it that he would write them and others epistles, from which they could grow. These offerings made it possible for Paul to study more, which meant that he could write more.


Philippians 1:8  For God is my witness how I long after you all in the affection of Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


Verse 8 – “For God is my record.” The Greek is mártus (μάρτυς) [pronounced MAHR-tooç] gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] mou ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. This is why gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] is called an enclitic particle, it does not come first in the sentence, it is simply the enclitic conjunctive particle which has an explanatory use here which can be translated “for” or “you see” or “for you see.” Then mártus (μάρτυς) [pronounced MAHR-tooç] is in the predicate nominative form, it is a nominative singular and means a judicial witness. There is also an implied present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The verb is not there, it isn’t necessary because of the predicate nominative. There is a possessive genitive singular personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] [mou], and then the nominative singular subject ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. (The definite article has a subject but the predicate nominative does not have a subject) “For God is my witness.” But this is an idiom and is not really what the idiom is saying. The idiom is saying, “I am telling the truth.”


“how greatly” – the adverb hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç] is used as a conjunction to introduce the characteristic quality of Paul. There is no word “greatly” in the original manuscript, it is simply “how.” And now we have the adverb used as a conjunction to reveal something in Paul.


“I long after” – the present active indicative from the compound verb epipothéō (ἐπιποθέω) [pronounced ep-ee-poth-EH-oh] [epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] = upon; potheô = to miss someone, to long for someone who is absent], and with the preposition it is simply intensified into a verb of strong love. Paul has the capacity for love; he has the expression of love. Capacity expresses itself. God has provided the object of Paul’s love, a whole congregation of wonderful believers advancing. The present tense of epipothéō (ἐπιποθέω) [pronounced ep-ee-poth-EH-oh] is a static present, it represents a condition which is assumed as perpetually existing. The active voice: Paul produces the action of teaching doctrine and directed toward those who are consistently positive. And from this comes capacity on the part of Paul. He studies to get his capacity for love, and then he communicates doctrine. That is the way those who are positive grow up. Between Paul and the Philippians is category #3 love. The indicative mood is declarative, it represents the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality: maximum category #3 love toward this congregation.


“ye all” – the accusative plural direct object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] plus the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. This is translated “all of you.”


There were retired military types in Philippi, and they were okay with Paul’s teaching and authority. They understood authority.


A woman who is successful in business is objective in life. She understands that someone must make policy and someone has to be in charge.


Deacons administer for the benefit of the congregation; but they are not the policy makers nor do they have to represent the congregation in any way.


“in the bowels of Jesus Christ” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental plural of splagchnon (σπλάγχνον) [pronounced SPLANGKH-non], plus the possessive genitive of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] and the possessive genitive of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE]. In scripture a portion of the anatomy is often used that does not refer to anatomy of the body but to an attribute of the soul. A known portion of the body is used to describe an invisible portion of the soul. From this is taken the principle of affection or the emotional response in the soul. So the word splagchnon (σπλάγχνον) [pronounced SPLANGKH-non] is used for the affection response of the emotion. The absence of the definite article stresses the qualitative aspects of the noun rather than the mere identity of the noun as “bowels.” If the background is understood this can actually be translated “affection.”


Outside of Berachah Church, there are those who speak of a head belief versus a heart belief; but there is no such difference. The heart always refers to thinking.


Philippians 1:8 For God is my witness [I am telling the truth], how I deeply desire all of you with the same affections of Christ Jesus.


Paul is saying that his love for the Philippians is so deep that he loves them as Jesus Christ would love them.


Principle

1.       There is no greater standard of love than that related to the Lord Jesus Christ.

2.       Paul as a believer in super-grace has maximum love capacity for the Philippians, so much that he is bold to relate it to the standard of our Lord Jesus Christ.

3.       So great is his love capacity that he can with boldness describe his love as the affections of Christ Jesus.

4.       A positive congregation toward doctrine provides additional motivation to the pastor to fulfil Philippians 2:17.

5.       The pastor is motivated to study and teach through the ministry of the Holy Spirit, his own spiritual growth, and a love response from his congregation.

6.       When a pastor finds a congregation responds to his doctrinal teaching he has both the love for the congregation and the desire to lead them to the maximum objective, which is ultra supergrace. This leads to maximum glorification of Jesus Christ.


In verses 9-11 we have a paragraph which tells us how to pray for a congregation of mature believers.[3]


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #13


13 05/16/1976 Philippians 1:9 Doctrine of prayer (review)


There were at least four or five doctrines of prayer in NB1 and NB2. One of chosen from NB1 and placed below.


Prayer

1.       The approach. How do you approach? What do you say?

          a.       All prayer is addressed to God the Father, always — Ephesians 3:14, 1.

          b.       In the name of the Son — John 14:13,14.

          c.        In the power of the Spirit — Ephesians 6:18.

2.       There are three categories of prayer that are addressed to God the Father. He receives prayer from us. He receives prayer from the Lord Jesus. He receives prayer from the Holy Spirit. Prayer from the source of the Son — Hebrews 7:25; prayer from the source of the Holy Spirit — Romans 8:26,27; prayer from the supergrace believer — Hebrews 4:16.

3.       There has to be an agenda. First of all if you think you are out of fellowship, rebound — 1John 1:9. Second item: thanksgiving, an expression of category #1 love — Ephesians 5:20; 1 Thessalonians 5:18. Then, intercession - Ephesians 6:18. Petition — Hebrews 4:16.

4.       Prayer is an exhale of the faith-rest principle — Matthew 21:22; Mark 11:24; Matthew 18:19; John 15:7. Prayer is an exhale of faith, which is directly related to the Word of God.

5.       There are eight principles of prayer.

          a.       Prayer becomes more and more effective as the believer functions consistently under GAP — John 15:7.

          b.       Prayer is an extension of the faith-rest exhale toward God — Matthew 21:22.

          c.        Prayer demands cognisance of the will of God. Cognisance of the will of God is based on the intake of Bible doctrine. The more doctrine you know the more effective your prayer life will become — 1John 5:14.

          d.       Prayer must be offered in the status of the filling of the Spirit — Ephesians 6:18. Therefore, God the Holy Spirit is related in this matter and in all other matters of the function of your priesthood. God the Holy Spirit indwells you, he keeps out demons. The only way you can get any influence from the devil is through the soul, your body is clear from demons.

          e.       Prayer is ineffective under any state of carnality. Psalm 66:18 mentions the worst category of sins: mental attitude sins.

          f.        Prayer in complying with the principle of grace demands that the believer grow in grace through GAPing it daily. Therefore prayer becomes an effective weapon in the angelic conflict when the believer reaches supergrace — Hebrews 4:16.

          g.       Prayer is ordained as a function of the priesthood as a part of the divine decrees — Jeremiah 33:3.

          h.       Prayer is directly related to category #1 love and/or occupation with Christ, and/or recognition of the celebrityship status of Christ — Psalm 116:1,2.

6.       Nine reasons why prayer isn’t answered.

          a.       You are not filled with the Spirit — Ephesians 6:18.

          b.       There is no faith-rest function from doctrine in the soul, therefore no faith rest — Matthew 21:22.

          c.        Mental attitude carnality — Psalm 66:18.

          d.       Lust type selfishness — James 4:2-4.

          e.       Failure in the field of authority, lack of obedience — 1John 3:22.

          f.        Noncompliance with the will of God — 1John 5:14.

          g.       The specific mental attitude of pride as a basic mental attitude sin and resultant self-righteousness — Job 35:12,13.

          h.       Lack of compassion (bona fide sensitivity).

          i.         Lack of domestic tranquillity — 1Peter 3:7.

7.       The principle of grace in prayer

          a.       Prayer is the privilege and the extension of grace function. Therefore it is impossible to approach God on the basis of human good or human merit.

          b.       The believer priest approaches God in prayer on the basis of our high priest, Jesus Christ, and His merits.

          c.        The Father is propitiated with the work of Christ but is no respected of persons among believers offering prayer.

          d.       God does not hear my prayers because I am fervent, moral, sincere, religious, or self-effacing.

          e.       God hears my prayers because of the function of GAP, the ministry of the Son, the ministry of the Holy Spirit, and reaching the supergrace life.

8.       There are four categories of returns on your prayer — four ways in which God can answer your prayer. There is a petition and a desire. Examples found below.

          a.       He can give you a positive and a negative. In each one of these categories you have a petition and a desire behind that petition. In category #1 God says yes to the petition, no to the desire. Under this category you wanted a million dollars and prayed for it. So God says no, or He says yes to the petition but no to the desire behind it. 1Samuel 8:5-9; 8:19-20 gives a Biblical illustration. The Jews prayed for a king so they could be like other nations. Petition: We want a king. But they lost all their blessings under the reign of Saul.

          b.       Negative on the petition and positive on the desire. You pray for a million dollars but this time you don’t get it but you get happiness. Illustration: Genesis 17:18; 18:23-33; 2Corinthians 12:7-10.

          c.        Yes and yes. 1Kings 18:36,37; Judges 16:28; Luke 23:42,43; John 11:41-45.

          d.       No and no.

9.       God answers prayers:

          a.       Principle — Hebrews 4:16; 1Peter 1:7.

          b.       Prayer is the privilege of the royal priesthood. Since grace is the basis of prayer no believer can come to God in prayer and expect to be heard on the basis of human merit, human ability, human function, human ingenuity.

          c.        Every believer approaches God in prayer on the basis of the merit of Jesus Christ, or the Father is propitiated with Christ but is no respecter of persons as far as believers are concerned.

          d.       In other words, God does not hear and answer prayer because I am good, moral, benevolent, sincere or religious.

          e.       God hears and answers prayer on the basis of who and what Christ is. Every believer is in union with Christ and gets through to the throne of grace on the basis of approach through the high priest, the Lord Jesus Christ.


Bob gives some examples of previous lessons of intercessory prayer.


Philippians 1:9  And this I pray, that your love may abound yet more and more in knowledge and all discernment,  (BLB)


Verse 9 – behind this prayer is love, Paul’s love for the Philippians, and also the greatness of the Philippians; they are a mature congregation. How do you pray for people who have everything? who are being blessed to the maximum by God? The prayer in this verse is for further advance, that they will complete their objective.


“And this” is the emphatic use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] which here means “in fact,” and the accusative neuter plural from the demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]. The demonstrative is used as a direct object of the verb. The immediate demonstrative is what we have there. It calls attention to Paul’s prayer for the Philippians.


“I pray” – the present middle indicative from the verb proseúchomai (προσεύχομαι) [pronounced pros-YOU-khoh-mai], which means to pray for someone else and therefore it connotes intercessory prayer. This is an iterative present tense, it describes what recurs at successive intervals, therefore the present tense of repeated action. The middle voice is the indirect middle in which Paul as the agent is producing the action of the verb rather than participating in its results. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the standpoint of reality. Translation: “In fact I pray this prayer.”


“that” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which denotes a final clause, used to indicate a purpose and objective. The objective in this final clause is the intensification of category #1 love, or occupation with Christ.


“your love” – the nominative singular subject from agápē (ἀγάπη) [pronounced ag-AH-pay], which involves the mentality of the soul and not necessarily the emotion or other factors. It is used here to refer to category #1 love as a matter of concentration. It is also used because the object of love in not physically visible to the eye. With this word is the possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] indicating that they do possess occupation with Christ or maximum category #1 love.


“may abound” – not quite correct, it is a little stronger than that. This is the present active subjunctive of the verb perisseuô (περισσεύω) [pronounced per-iss-SUE-oh], which means to be present and abundant, or to overflow, or to be outstanding, or to excel to the maximum. It can be translated “that your love may be caused to excel” or “to be caused to abound to the maximum.” This is a customary present which denotes what habitually occurs when one reaches super-grace status. This is a static present also for a condition which will perpetually exist in super-grace. The active voice: occupation with Christ produces the action. The subjunctive mood is not only the contingency potential subjunctive but with the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] it is simply used to denote an objective. This is an objective not accomplished, therefore potential at this point. It is contingency, otherwise there would be no need for including it in prayer.


“yet more and more” – éti (ἔτι) [pronounced EH-tee] means “still,” an adverb of time which denotes that a given situation, such as maturity, is continuing and that once a person reaches maturity there are many areas within it. These people are in super-grace but they have not reached the final objective, as indicated next by not only the adverb of time but a comparative word, mallon (μλλον) [pronounced MAL-lon], which is the comparative of mala, and it means “more” or “even to a greater degree.” It indicates the fact that even though they have a mature love it can still go higher.


How can this prayer be accomplished? Paul cannot simply pray for their continued advance unless he mentions in his prayer the means why which this advance is continued. The only way to advance in the spiritual life is cognisance. You must know doctrine.


“in knowledge” – growth always is related to knowledge of doctrine and there is no spiritual growth any other way. Deeds and production are the result of growth but never the means of growth. This is emphasized by a prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis], the growing material. Doctrine doesn’t cause the believer to grow when it is stored permanently in the Word of God, it is doctrine in the soul that causes his growth—”by means of epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis].” So Paul is praying for them to grow. There is no other way to grow.


“and in all judgement” – the word “all” is the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] in the instrumental, and we have the instrumental of the noun a)isqhsij which means spiritual discernment, and it is comparable to the unbeliever’s common sense. It is the application of doctrine, the power of judgment and discrimination based upon doctrine resident in the soul. First comes epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis], then comes discernment.


Philippians 1:9 In fact I pray that your love may be caused to abound still more, even to a greater degree, by means of knowledge [epignosis doctrine] and resultant all discernment.


Principle

1.       This is a prayer for the Philippian advance to ultra-super-grace. They are mature believers, they have reached a certain stage of maturity; they have not, however, reached the final stage of maturity. This is a prayer for the advance to ultra-super-grace with emphasis on occupation with Christ being intensified in this status.

2.       Category #1 love or occupation with Christ occurs in super-grace as a spiritual blessing. This is a prayer for the intensification of occupation with Christ.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #14


14 05/16/1976 Hebrews 13:7 Ordination message and ceremony


This ordination service takes place once a year. There is a written examination. Colonel McConnell gives the exam. The person then comes to Berachah Church to be queried on Saturday. Three men passed this test with high marks. These are guys with the gift of pastor-teacher. Dick Olsen of Washington state and Dallas Seminary; Gary Glenny former world heavyweight camption weight lifter or US; and Jack O’Brien has just finished 20 years in the military; and he has been on tapes for five years.


Hebrews 13:7 Be concentrating on them [your right pastor-teacher] who themselves are ruling over all of you, [pastors] who have communicated to you the word from the God; [pastors] whose doctrine be emulating, be carefully considering the end [supergrace] of their way of life.


There is no seminary professor who can give you any information about a practical application course, because nothing is more removed from reality than a seminary or a teacher at a seminary.


There is always a person over you with regard to the Word of God.


The believer must concentrate on what the pastor-teacher teaches. McConnell is Bob’s assistant pastor; and he understands all forms of authority.


Bob is in his 27th year and there have been many conspiracies during this time.


Some of you will have friend who will leave, but you will stay behind because Bible doctrine is more important.


It is an advantage to every believer to have a right pastor. The take in Bible doctrine but you remain yourself. You do not imitate the pastor’s personality; you learn and apply his teaching. We leave Bob’s style alone and stick with his teaching.


The end is not the end of the sermon for the day, but the end achievement. Whatever a pastor may be personally is not the issue.


Every believer has an old sin nature. We never share what our brand of sin is. We do not change our brand of sin to match the communicator. The person communicating Bible doctrine is imperfect and the recipient has a sin nature. And some people are going to be hit by this or that passage in the Word of God.


No congregation can exceed the spiritual growth of their right pastor.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #15


15 05/17/1976 Philippians 1:10 Discernment from #1 priority of doctrine


Family accusation, referring to Berachah as that church.


Those we know who lack discernment because emotion fans their soul. Bible doctrine must be the highest priority. Discernment is the key, and discernment is all about doctrine in your soul.


You canno divorce with written word from the living word (Jesus Christ).


Philippians 1:10  for you to approve the things being excellent, so that you may be pure and blameless unto the day of Christ,  (BLB)


Verse 10 – “That ye may approve” is the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the articular present active infinitive from the verb dokimázō (δοκιμάζω) [pronounced dohk-ihm-AHD-zoh] which means to test for the purpose of approval, to put to the test, to examine with reference to the result of the examination, to prove by testing, to approve. Here it means to approve, and it must be related to the last word of the previous verse which is “discernment.” When you are approving is disapproving something it is merely an expression of your scale of values. You are deciding which is more important. Are you going to go with your friends? Or are you going to stick with doctrine? There must be the definite article here to define the meaning of the preposition because of eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the articular present active infinitive of dokimázō (δοκιμάζω) [pronounced dohk-ihm-AHD-zoh], and the definite article makes the infinitive adaptable to prepositions. So it is eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of the definite article plus the present tense of dokimázō (δοκιμάζω) [pronounced dohk-ihm-AHD-zoh], and the static present represents a condition to be taken for granted as a fact for the believer who is approaching or is in super-grace. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action. The infinitive is conceived result, which simply means to follow the natural consequences of reaching super-grace status. To those who stick with doctrine it is inevitable that they will crack the maturity barrier. We might even translate eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the articular infinitive, “With the result that you may approve after testing.” Approval is based on your scale of values. You may not realize it but everything in life you test by your scale of values. The words “after testing” is a part of dokimázō (δοκιμάζω) [pronounced dohk-ihm-AHD-zoh]. After testing, does this make any changes in doctrine being number one? So discernment is based upon always keeping doctrine in the number one slot in your priorities in life.


Some subjects interest you and some do not.


Everything that you see, you have a scale of values, and you apply them. A guy will do this regarding every woman he see; and a woman will do this of men as well.


“things” is the accusative plural definite article used as a demonstrative pronoun to emphasize areas of discernment and the super-grace scale of values—”those things.”


“that are excellent” – present active participle from the verb diaphérō (διαφέρω) [pronounced dee-ahf-EHR-oh], which means to differ to one’s advantage, to be worth more, to be of greater value. With the definite article it means here, “things of greater value.” With a definite article this participle acts as a substantive. This is an articular participle and is a noun rather than a verb.


This is the result of the epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] and discernment of the previous verse. The two go together. Epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] means more doctrine accumulated since doctrine has number one place in your soul. Discernment is the use of your accumulated doctrine.


You must approve doctrine above all.


“that” – the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] used to introduce a second purpose or objective: “in order that.”


You are protected by your scale of values, because doctrine is your #1 priority.


Being wealthy and happy at the same time; that is ultra super grace.


The arrogant person views you and they see you having enjoyment of life; and they cannot stand it.


Women do not want to be replaced by another woman. When her affections are replaced by another, hell has no fury like a woman scorn. Miriam was the queen bee of Israel, but when Moses married the Ethiopian woman, this knocked her off this perch. She reacted badly, starting all kinds of malicious gossip. The more Miriam talked, the greater Moses’ marriage became. No one can reach ultra super grace without being blessed for the rest of their lives.


Many mothers do not like it when their sons replace them with another.


“ye may be” – present active subjunctive from the verb eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The present tense is a futuristic present, it denotes what has not yet occurred: the ultra-super-grace status. They are on the verge, and this is a prayer to get them in, as it were. This is regarded as so definite that it is put in the present tense, even though it is a future objective. The active voice: the ultra-super-grace status produces the action. They will get there. The subjunctive mood goes with hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na], indicating a purpose or an objective.


“sincere” – the predicate nominative plural from the compound eilikrinês (εἰλικρινής) [pronounced i-lik-ree-NACE] [heili = sunlight; krinô (κρίνω) [pronounced KREE-no] = to judge], which means to judge by sunlight. This does not mean “sincerity.” Sincerity is not even considered a virtue in Christianity. This means to judge the quality of something by holding it up to sunlight. Purity is determined by the sunlight test—”that you might be tested by sunlight.” Sunlight refers to doctrine. The word “sincere” really means to be completely pure and unmixed. It was used in the ancient world to test wine to see if there were any impurities in it, or if there was too much water in it. So to get rid of the ‘water’ of the soul and to replace and displace it with doctrine we have a word that doesn’t really mean sincere, but it means completely pure. But it doesn’t mean sinlessness, it simply means genuine—a genuine, totally mature believer. In other words, the soul is free from contamination. The scale of values is perfect because by making the written Word number one in your scale of values and assigning number one priority to doctrine you have eventually come to the place where you have made your number one priority the living Word—Jesus Christ whom you now see through doctrine. So the super-grace believer is completely pure in soul, and that means free from contamination and infiltration of Satanic policy. It has to do with thought, not with sin.


“and without offence” – the connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the predicate nominative plural from the compound apróskopos (ἀπρόσκοπος) [pronounced ap-ROSS-kop-oss] [a – negative; proskoptô (προσκόπτω) [pronounced pros-KOP-toh] = offence or stumbling], which means undamaged, blameless, or without offence. “Blameless” means freedom from human good and the expression of evil.[4]


“till the day of Christ” – eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative singular of hêmera (ἡμάρα) [pronounced hay-MEH-raw], “with reference to the day.” Then the descriptive genitive singular from Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], indicating the fact that this is the Rapture.


Philippians 1:10 In order that you might be completely pure in the light of doctrine; and blameless [in the area of human good and evil] with reference to the day of Christ.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #16


16 05/18/1976 Philippians 1:11–12 Patrick Henry; principle of human good


Patrick Henry’s message to the House of Burgess in Virginia. We have done everything that could be done to avoid the storm that is about to come upon us. Our petitions have been slighted. Our supplications have been disregarded. If we wish to be free... Shall we gather resolution by inaction? There is a just God Who reigns over the destiny of nations. I know not what course others may take, but give me liberty or give me death.


Repeat of the translation to v. 10.


Human Good

1.       Satan’s policy is evil and part of that evil is the production of human good. Neither is acceptable to God or desired for His divine plan. This is why these things were not needed by Adam or the woman.

2.       Hebrews 6:1 graduating from the elementary doctrines of man. Not laying again the foundation of dead works. Hebrews 6:1 Hebrews takes you to the barrier; and Philippians takes us all the way to the final objective (which is supergrace A and supergrace B and ultra super grace). Alpha grace carries you to the border and bravo grace takes you all the way. The works that we do impress people but God is not impressed by such things. God is impressed by His Own plan. Human good is dead to the plan of God and the policy of God.

3.       Human good is connected to arrogance and is a part of boasting. Ephesians 2:9 Romans 4:2 takes us to phase II of the plan. People tend to lead with their pride. When they do not see it in themselves, that is blind arrogance. This is merely one of the things which causes the individual to get away from grace. The person who thinks that he is doing great things for God. And there is competition between them. They get to numbers which everyone knows is false. They go from evangelism to revival. Erroneous priorities leads to human works. Ground for boasting must be eliminated from our lives. We carry into Bravo grace is occupation with Christ. We stop all of the competing and we stop hating people.

4.       Human good is never acceptable to God. Isaiah 64:6 all of our righteous deeds are like menstrual rags.

5.       Human good will not save mankind. 2Timothy 1:9 Titus 3:5 Ephesians 2:8–9

6.       Judgment of human good. It was not judged at the cross. It will be judged at the end of human history. Human good comes from the area of strength of the sin nature. The believer’s human good will be judged at the final judgment.


Philippians 1:11  being filled with the fruit of righteousness that is through Jesus Christ, to the glory and praise of God.  (BLB)


Verse 11 – prayer for ultra-super-grace production in contrast to the production of human good and arrogance. “Being filled” is the perfect passive participle from the verb plêroô (πληρόω) [pronounced play-ROH-oh]. It means here to be filled with the highest possible quality. The perfect tense is a dramatic perfect, which is the rhetorical use of the intensive perfect. The intensive perfect always takes the action of the verb and shows it as completed, and then shows the continuation of results from that completed action. The passive voice: the ultra super-grace believer receives the action of the verb. The participle is telic, indicating a purpose, and this denotes the 3rd purpose which has been expressed in this prayer. Literally, “Having been filled up.”


Having doctrine in the soul and operating under the first generation of the Spirit, divine good is produced.


“with the fruits of righteousness” – the word “fruits” is the accusative singular direct object from the noun karpos (καρπός) [pronounced kahr-POSS], which means fruit in the sense of production. It could be much better translated “production of righteousness.” With it is dikaiosunê (δικαιοσύνη) [pronounced dih-kai-oh-SOON-ā or dik-ah-yos-OO-nay], which dies not mean ‘righteousness,’ as such. It means the total fulfilment of spiritual progress and is a technical word here for ultra-super-grace.


“which are” is not found in the original. However the accusative singular direct object of the definite article is used here as a relative pronoun and can be translated “which comes.” The word “comes” is not found but is implied.


“by Jesus Christ” – diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] should be translated “through Jesus Christ.”


“unto the glory” – this is a prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of doxa (δόξα) [pronounced DOHX-ah], and is correctly translated “for the glory.” Jesus Christ is personally glorified when the believer is prosperous under paragraph SG2.


“and praise” – a continuation of the prepositional phrase, épainos (ἔπαινος) [pronounced EHP-ahee-noss], which means praise, approval, recognition, is the object of eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE]; “of God” is a descriptive genitive singular theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. The entire prepositional phrase is anartharus, there is no definite article, emphasizing the quality of the glory, the quality of the praise, emphasizing the object of glory in praise.


Philippians 1:11 Having been filled up with production of spiritual progress [righteousness], which comes through Jesus Christ, for the glory and praise of God.


Ultra-super-grace production glorifies God forever and has the most fantastic temporal reproduction.


The Advance of the Gospel

Philippians 1:12  Now I want you to know brothers, that the things concerning me really have turned out to the advancement of the gospel,  (BLB)


Verse 12 – the super-grace prisoner in Rome. The principle and pattern of life in super-grace. This verse is like Genesis 50:20 and Romans 8:28. They all demonstrate the same principle.


“But I would” – the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] used as a transitional conjunction and translated “Now,” plus the present active indicative of the verb boulomai (βούλομαι) [pronounced BOO-lohm-ahee] which is used of a person desiring something. It means to wish, to want, to desire, and it is often used in the sense of desiring to clarify a point with someone you love. Paul has already declared his love; these are his greatest friends. Because they are his loved ones an explanation is forthcoming. The present tense is a perfective present, used here to denote the continuation of existing results. It refers to a fact which has come to be in the past but is emphasized right at this moment as a present reality. The active voice: Paul produces the action in his desire to communicate a point of doctrine.


“ye” is the accusative plural direct object from the personal pronoun su; “understand” is the present active infinitive of ginskô (vινώσκω) [pronounced gih-NOH-skoh], which means to understand, to comprehend, to learn. Here is it “comprehension” because of an explanation. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what may be reasonably expected to occur in the case of super-grace. The active voice: the Philippians will produce the action of perceptive comprehension. This is the infinitive of intended result, when the result is indicated as fulfilling a deliberate object. Hence, it is a blending of purpose and result. This is a deliberate explanation to someone you love.


“brethren” is a vocative plural, adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS], indicating that not only is this explanation due them but Paul recognizes that he will have students in every generation for the rest of the Church Age and forever, and he wants all of the royal family to come in on this very important point.


“that the things which happened to me” – hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], a causal conjunction meaning “because”; ta (τά) [pronounced taw], a nominative neuter plural definite article, translated “things”; kat’, the preposition, plus the accusative singular of the personal pronoun, eme, me (ἐμέ, με) [pronounced ehm-EE, mee]. Literally, “the things according to me,” but it is an Attic idiom for “my circumstances.”


“have fallen out” – perfect active indicative of érchomai (ἔρχομαι) [pronounced AIR-khoh-my], which means to come, but when used of things or events it means to “turn out.” It therefore has the same connotation as all things working together. This is a dramatic perfect, again the rhetorical use of the intensive perfect, completed action, emphasizing the existing results as being intensified. The turning out is an intensified result. The active voice: the circumstances of the mature believer produces the action. The indicative mood is declarative for historical reality. This is a dogmatic principle of doctrine that Romans 8:28 is fulfilled in super-grace.


“rather” is mallon (μλλον) [pronounced MAL-lon], the comparative of the adverb mala. It originally meant to a greater degree, or it can be translated “for a better reason,” but here we have another word with it. We have the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], and that changes the meaning. As a super-grace believer the Roman imprisonment has worked together for good, has turned out in a certain way. Four epistles were written, and of these four Philippians was the last one. Ephesians prepares a person to crack the maturity barrier and in effect tells the believer what he must know to be a mature believer.


When Paul was shipwrecked, he was in supergrace A and while imprisoned, he was in supergrace B. Hebrews says, this is the direction to maturity; Ephesians tells how to get into maturity. Ephesians, Colossians, and Philippians all work together for good. Philippians is how to cross no man’s land.


All things worked together for good for Paul when being imprisoned in Rome.


“unto the furtherance of the gospel” – eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative singular of the noun prokopê (προκοπή) [pronounced prok-op-AY], meaning progress; then a descriptive genitive euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on]—”gospel”—”for the advance of the gospel.”


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #17


17 05/19/1976 Philippians 1:13 Praetorian guard; doctrine of positional truth


V. 12 is a restatement of Romans 8:28. This is amplified, beginning in v. 13. Any nation is sustained and its freedom sustained by the military establishment. The Jewish nation was sustained by a military establishment. Jesus Christ Himself secured this freedom. It was in the second generation that the Jews began to fight with a military force.


Judges is a commentary on the fact that the military failed and they did not follow the policies that they should have been following. In both the days of Saul and David, there was a great deal of military activity, providing peace for a generation in the time of Solomon.


Hosea truly loved his wife, even though she was a prostitute. Their first two children were his; second two were not. She was unsatisfied by all other men except Hosea. She wound up as a slave. She was sold at half-price.


Philippians 1:13  so as for my chains in Christ to have become clearly known in all the palace guard and to all the rest;  (BLB)


Verse 13 – the impact of the Praetorian Guard. The conjunction hôste (ὥστε) [pronounced HOH-steh] is used to introduce an independent clause and should be translated “With the result that.” We have just seen the principle of “All things work together for good” for mature believers. It is no accident that for two years of Paul’s life he is a prisoner in Rome and that for two years the final decision on his appeal has been delayed before he goes before the ruling Caesar who is Nero. Paul had am impact on the military organization of that day, an organization without which no man ever ascended to the throne of Caesar.


“that my bonds” – accusative plural of general reference, which means it is going to be the subject of an infinitive, from the noun desmos (δεσμός) [pronounced dehs-MOSS] which refers to the chains that were used to shackle people in prison. But since Paul was not shackled (he was under house arrest) it is better to translate desmos (δεσμός) [pronounced dehs-MOSS] as “imprisonment.” There is a descriptive genitive singular from egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], indicating his status quo, and it is translated therefore “With the result that my imprisonment.”


The next phrase deals with the fact that every believer, no matter where he is in time, he is also in union with the Lord Jesus Christ: “in Christ” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]. It is true that Romans 8:28 applies to the believer. It is also true that due to the fact that every believer is in union with Christ that for every believer, before reaching maturity, the concept of Romans 8:28 is operational in the life. It is obvious, therefore, that for anyone who is positive toward doctrine, or anyone who is operating within the framework of the plan of God, that all things are working in the proper direction. Reason: Every believer is in history and in Christ as of the moment of his salvation. Because he is in Christ and at the same time living on this earth it is impossible for the person who is in Christ not to have a foreshadowing of the principle of Romans 8:28. The principle is therefore very obvious that while Paul’s circumstances vary in phase two his position in Christ never changes. There are three principles that must be pulled together: a) Jesus Christ controls history; b) Every believer is in union with Jesus Christ who controls history: c) Therefore the varying circumstances of life have to turn out right because we are in union with Christ, the same Jesus Christ who controls history.[5]


Positional Truth

1.       Positional truth is equivalent to positional sanctification. They are synonymous terms. This is the Church Age believer who is in Christ. This is why we are royal family of God. This distinguishes the Church Age believer from all other believers. This separates us from all religions. Christianity is a relationship with Christ. Religion is a works-type activity seeking out the approbation of Jesus Christ. No Old Testament believer had this; and this will not happen after the rapture of the church. Only we will be royal family of God.

2.       The mechanics is the baptism of the Holy Spirit, which takes us and places us in union with Jesus Christ. 1Corinthians 12:13 Ephesians 4:5 One baptism is the baptism of the Holy Spirit.

3.       Positional truth guarantees no judgment for believers in eternity.

4.       Positional truth qualifies the believer to live with God forever. In order to live with God, we must be as good as God is. This is achieved by union with Jesus Christ. He is perfect righteousness and we share His righteousness. Jesus is eternal life; and we have eternal life by being in Him.

5.       Positional truth guarantees eternal security. Nothing can separate us from the love of God which is in Christ Jesus.

6.       Positional truth belongs to all categories of believers. This takes place before we have any sort of Christian experience. Positional is already settled. Positional truth belongs to the carnal believer as well as to the believer in fellowship. Few churches were as carnal as the Corinthian church; yet they were all in Christ. 1Corinthians 1:2, 30

7.       Positional truth creates a new creature. Union with Christ is unique and did not take place until Pentecost. This makes us new creatures. You are not a new creature because you have given up something. Unbelievers give these things up all the time, and that does not make them new creatures.

8.       Positional truth is the basis for grace blessing. Ephesians 1:3–6 God provies these benefits based upon Who and What Christ is, not based upon anything we do or don’t do.

9.       The implications of positional truth:

          a.       Christ is eternal life — 1John 5:11,12.

          b.       Christ is absolute righteousness — 2Corinthians 5:21.

          c.        Christ is elected, we share His election — Ephesians 1:4.

          d.       Christ has a destiny, we share His destiny — Ephesians 1:5.

          e.       Christ is the Son, we are in union with Christ, we share His sonship — 2Timothy 2:1.

          f.        Christ is the heir, we share His heirship — Romans 8:16,17.

          g.       Christ is sanctified, we share His sanctification — 1Corinthians 1:2.

          h.       Christ is a King, we share His kingdom — 2Peter 1:11.

          i.         Christ is a high priest, we share His priesthood —Hebrews 10:10-14.

10.     The characteristics of positional truth.

          a.       It is not an experience, it is neither emotional nor ecstatics.

          b.       It is not progressive, it cannot be improved on earth or in heaven; in time or eternity.

          c.        It is not related to human merit or human good. Grace escalates divine good and excludes human good.

          d.       Positional truth is eternal in nature, it will last forever.

          e.       Positional truth is known only to the Word of God.

          f.        Positional truth is obtained en toto at the moment of salvation. It is accomplished by means of the baptism of the Spirit, one of the 36 things we receive at the point of salvation.

          g.       This is known only through the function of gap.


All of the time that Paul was in failure, he still remained in Christ.


 “are manifest” is the aorist active infinitive of gínomai (γίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my]. This is translated in the KJV by the verb to be, but it should not be. It should be translated “has become.” With this is the predicate nominative singular from faneroj, meaning “manifest” or “well-known.” Thus far we have, “With the result that my imprisonment in Christ has become well-known.” The aorist tense here is a culminative aorist, it views Paul’s imprisonment in its entirety but it emphasizes the existing results. The active voice: Paul’s imprisonment produces the action of the verb. The infinitive is a part of the accusative of general reference, as well as actual result.


Paul is in prison but he is also in Christ. He is in prison in Rome for two years.


“and in all the palace” is an incorrect translation. This is the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative singular from an adjective holos (ὅλος, η, ον) [pronounced HOH-loss]—”in all.” But “the palace” is the noun praitôrion (πραιτώριον) [pronounced prahee-TOH-ree-on] which is called in English “Praetorium.” This is a reference to the Praetorium Guard. The Praetorium Guard was a brigade of 10,000 Roman soldiers stationed at the palace of Caesar and in a camp near Rome. This is the same as our Old Guard stationed at Fort Meyer in Virginia. They are show troops.


The Praetorium guards were very well-paid. The origin of this Praetorium guard was done by Scippio Africanus, who defeated the Carthaginians, the arch enemies of the Romans. They were the best troops. They were considered the greatest troops of the empire.


It was the emperor Tiberius who first concentrated all 10,000 soldiers at Rome. They enlisted for 12 years and they received $20,000 a year, which was a massive amount of money. They were the most powerful organization in the Roman empire. No emperor could reign without their support.


Some of the most famous people were these super-generals, who headed the Praetorium Guard. Bob names a few of these super-generals.


Nero was forced to commit suicide by the Praetorium guard. Bob thinks that there is a direct relationship between the death of the Apostle Paul at the hands of Nero and that Nero died shortly after (by his own hand), saying, “It is a shame that such a great actor must leave the stage.”


“and in all other places” – the connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the locative plural definite article and the locative plural from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs]. The locative plural from loipon (λοιπόν) [pronounced loy-POHN] is not correctly translated. It means rest, remainder—”all the rest [of Rome].”


Philippians 1:13 With the result that my imprisonment in Christ has become well-known through the entire Praetorium Guard, and to all the rest [of Rome].


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #18


18 05/20/1976 Philippians 1:14 Supergrace leadership; doctrine of witnessing


Philippians 1:14  and most of the brothers, trusting in the Lord by my chains, to dare more abundantly to speak fearlessly the word.  (BLB)


Teachers use their own outlines. Too often in church, teachers use the outlines and material of others. So people would read the monthly lesson that morning or the night before. Whatever the material was, it was not the material of the teacher.


Verse 14 – the influence of super-grace leadership. “And many brethren” – the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ], translated here “in fact,” plus the accusative plural definite article and the accusative plural of pleiôn/pleione/pleon (πλείων/πλεον/πλέον) [pronounced PLI-own,PLI-on,PLEH-on], a comparative of polus, polos (πολύς, πολλός) [pronounced poll-OOS], and it means actually “the majority” here.


Bob illustrates with various conspiracies in the time of Nero, which included a plot against his mother. She was in a yacht and the plugs were pulled, and the soldiers jumped overboard, but she survived, having been able to swim three miles to shore.


The accusative case is a part of the accusative of general reference with the present active infinitive of laléô (λαλέω) [pronounced lah-LEH-oh] which means to communicate; “of the brethren” – i.e. the royal family of God, a descriptive genitive plural of adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS].


Paul took a stand because he knew he was right. Some would not admit to this, because they could not stand his authoritative ways.


“in the Lord” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss]. This time it doesn’t refer to positional truth, it refers to an object. Prepositional phrase is used an object. The participle comes up next, the object of the participle peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh]—perfect passive participle, it means to obey, but in the perfect tense it means to have confidence. Translated, “having received confidence in the Lord.” The perfect tense is intensive in which the action is completed with special emphasis on the results. The results are said to be intensified. The passive voice: the majority of believers in Rome are receiving the action of the verb through the superb leadership of the apostle Paul. Even though the Roman church was in very bad condition it was Paul’s courageous leadership that turned the tide.


“In fact the majority of the brethren, because they had received confidence in the Lord.” This is a causal participle. Such confidence comes not only from the consistent function of GAP but it comes from leadership. Everyone needs a leader. No one understands mankind better than God Himself, and He has made it clear that 98% of all mankind needs some kind of supervision, and therefore a system of authority—establishment, even authority principles related to love. You can’t have anything in life that is worthwhile without authority, even your own self-discipline. The leadership discussed here is a spiritual leadership whereby God Himself provides the commission. He commissioned Paul at the point of his salvation by giving him the gift of apostleship. And there are several spiritual gifts which are the basis for all spiritual leadership. Since apostleship is extinct all that is left is the gift of pastor-teacher, and to a very limited extent evangelism.


“by my bonds” – the instrumental of cause from desmos (δεσμός) [pronounced dehs-MOSS]. An instrumental of cause means that you are getting back to some origin concepts. Paul is saying the origin of his leadership, his base of action, his base of operation for leadership, is imprisonment. This is translated “because of my imprisonment.” The believers had received confidence because of his imprisonment—not because he was in prison but because in prison he maintained his leadership activities. He continued to teach the Word of God and to rule the church.


“are much more bold” – the comparative adverb perissotérōs (περισσοτέρως) [pronounced per-is-sot-EHR-oce]. It means “much greater” or “far more,” and the present active infinitive tolmáō (τολμάω) [pronounced tol-MAH-oh], which means to have courage here. With the comparative adverb it means to have “much greater courage.” The infinitive has a descriptive present, it indicates what is now going on. The fact that Paul is in prison and awaiting a very serious trial has not intimidated him at all. The active voice: certain Roman believers seeing that Paul is not intimidated, bolder than ever, produce the action of production. The infinitive is the infinitive of actual result.


“to speak” – present active infinitive of laléô (λαλέω) [pronounced lah-LEH-oh], and it means to communicate. The present tense is iterative, it describes what recurs at successive intervals. Witnessing isn’t something you do all the time, it is something you do as a result of doctrine resident in the soul, as a result of spiritual progress, and at times when God when God gives opportunity. It is something you never force, it is something that God drops in your lap.[6]


“the word” – accusative singular direct object of logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss], referring specifically to the gospel; the adverb aphobôs (ἀφόβως) [pronounced af-OHB-oce]—”without fear.”


Philippians 1:14 In fact the majority of the brethren, since they have received confidence in the Lord because of my imprisonment, have much greater courage to communicate the word without fear.


Not all people witness for the same reason. Bob knows some guys got the attention of certain gals by doing a lot of witnessing or give his testimony in order to get her attention.


Nero would use Christians as lights for a party, and set fire to them.


The doctrine of witnessing, taken from NB1, is pretty close to the lesson given by Bob.


The Doctrine of Witnessing by R. B. Thieme, Jr.

1.       Definition: Witnessing is the royal family fulfilling its ministry of reconciliation. One of the full-time Christian service functions that belongs to you is the ministry of reconciliation, 2Corinthians 5. Witnessing is the royal family communicating the gospel to the unbeliever on a personal basis. Witnessing, therefore, is personal evangelism.

          a.       Witnessing functions apart from mass evangelism, apart from church evangelism or the preaching of the believer who has the gift of evangelism. This is a personal contact, personal conversation, do-it-yourself type of thing.

          b.       The threefold character of witnessing is found in 1Thessalonians 1:4,5, the witnessing of the life, the lips, the witnessing of God the Holy Spirit.

2.       The Holy Spirit is the sovereign executive of witnessing. The unbeliever is minus a human spirit, he has no frame of reference for the gospel. The gospel is spiritual phenomena and therefore it is impossible for any unbeliever to understand any portion of the gospel by his own ability in the field of perspicacity. Therefor God the Holy Spirit must act as a human spirit in order for them to understand the gospel — John 16:8-11. In these verses sin does not mean personal sin, or the fact that you are bad or that you are a sinner. The only sin that is an issue in presentation of the gospel is the rejection of Jesus Christ as saviour. Therefore verse 9 says, “Concerning sin because they do not believe on me.” Personal sin is not the issue. The second factor, “concerning righteousness because I go to the Father and you no longer see me.” In other words, Jesus Christ as a member of the human race is accepted at the right hand of the Father, everyone who believes in Him is in union with Christ, also accepted at the right hand of the Father. This is what the Holy Spirit emphasizes. Finally, “concerning judgement because the ruler of this world has been judged.” The ruler of this world is Satan and Satan was judged when Jesus Christ died on the cross, rose again, ascended. The judgement of Satan is mentioned in Colossians 2:24 Hebrews 2:14. Satan has been judged and therefore since he has and is going to be cast into the lake of fire those who reject Christ as saviour will share the lake of fire with him. Again, the reason for God the Holy Spirit having to make this information real to the unbeliever is because of the statement of 1Corinthians 2:14, “The soulish man [unbeliever] does not accept the things of the Spirit of God, for they are foolishness to him; and he is not able to obtain knowledge of the gospel because they are discerned from the source of the human spirit.” There is no way he can understand the gospel because all gospel information is discerned by the human spirit. We are born with a soul and a body but without a human spirit. We acquire the human spirit at the point of regeneration. The human spirit is the means, the frame of reference, for spiritual phenomena. Before the spiritual phenomena [Bible doctrine in any form] can enter the frame of reference in the soul it must be assimilated in the human spirit. But the unbeliever doesn’t have a human spirit, therefore the spiritual phenomena is foolishness to him, he can’t comprehend it. So whenever the gospel is presented it is God the Holy Spirit who takes what is pertinent in the presentation and makes it reality in the soul of the unbeliever so that he sees an issue, so that he understands an issue, so that he becomes aware of what the issue really is.

3.       Pertinent Bible doctrine [the gospel] is always the weapon of witnessing — not salesmanship tactics, not weeping and wailing and begging, not some gimmick system or jumping through psychological hoops. Under this concept we have seven principles related to the Bible as the weapon:

          a.       The gospel which is in the Bible is the power of God to salvation. It is the gospel, the message, the content, that saves, not salesmanship tactics, Romans 1:16 1Corinthians 1:18. A true presentation of the gospel is what God the Holy Spirit uses and it is the power of God unto salvation.

          b.       The Bible is the absolute norm or standard for truth, 2Peter 1:12-21.

          c.        The source of the gospel, therefore, is the Bible, Luke 16:28-31 1Corinthians 15:3,4.

          d.       The Bible is the mind of Christ, 1Corinthians 2:16. So when you are witnessing you are presenting the very thinking of the Lord Jesus Christ.

          e.       The Bible is said to be divine power, Hebrews 4:12.

          f.        The Bible never returns void, Isaiah 55:11.

          g.       The Bible endures forever, Luke 21:33 1Peter 1:25. When you put all these things together you have a weapon. And you never sit around and argue, Is the Bible the Word of God? That is ludicrous, it is beside the point.

4.       The believer priest is the agent in witnessing.

          a.       Witnessing is the responsibility of every member of the royal family of God, Acts 1:8 Ephesians 6:15,20 2Timothy 4:5.

          b.       There are two areas in which we as believers witness: the witness of the life, 2Corinthians 3:3 6:3; the witness of the lips, 2Corinthians 5:14-21 6:2.

          c.        Knowledge of pertinent doctrine is necessary for effective witnessing because the believer must witness in the wisdom of the Spirit. he must make the issue clear. He must exclude human persuasiveness and human salesmanship. The believer must understand principles of Christology and soteriology. He must understand, above all, redemption, reconciliation, and propitiation. He must certainly understand imputation and justification, as well as positional sanctification. And if he is going to be lucid and clear he must understand the true issues of the last judgement. So knowledge of pertinent doctrine is very important in witnessing.

          d.       The believer’s ability to witness depends on five different concepts:

                     i.         His emphasis on the gospel, especially reconciliation, Ephesians 2:14-17.

                     ii.        His correct and accurate information, 1Corinthians 1:18 Ephesians 6:17 Hebrews 4:12.

                     iii.       He must be filled with the Spirit when he witnesses. This gives him the flexibility to do the job correctly, Acts 1:8.

                     iv.       He must have the right mental attitude — the best expression is found in Romans 1:14-16, the three “I aorist middle subjunctives.” If you are ashamed, then don’t do it. In fact, no matter what you are doing, if you are ashamed, then stop doing it. Shame is a major form of subjectivity of the soul.

                     v.        The believer must have the assurance of eternal security to be stabilized in his own witnessing, Romans 8:38,39 1Peter 1:4,5.

5.       The witnessing of the royal priest is the extension of his ambassadorship, 2Corinthians 5:18-20.

6.       The concept of making the issue clear:

          a.       You must give the unbeliever pertinent salvation information. When you walk away from an unbeliever after witnessing he must have a clear understanding of the issue of the gospel. Christ is the issue; attitude toward Christ is the issue. False issues must be avoided., they muddy up the water [drinking, smoking. etc. are false issues]. There are certain things that are obnoxious to all of us but we should not get our own personal likes and dislikes tangled up with the gospel. The issue is very clearly presented by Ephesians 2:8,9.

          b.       Never put the cart before the horse. Do not try to get the unbeliever to live the Christian way of life before he is born again.

          c.        Be sure to provide gospel information on which the unbeliever can make a decision for Christ. Remember the gospel boundaries are well defined in 1Corinthians 15:3,4. Make sure that you make an issue out of the Lord Jesus Christ and not out of people’s sins and bad habits.

          d.       Do not add to the gospel of grace. Grace needs no addition. Nothing is accomplished toward salvation by persuading the unbeliever to give up his sins, improve his personality and behaviour pattern, feel sorry for his sins, join the church, be baptized, or give money.

          e.       Do not try to force a decision for Christ. This is the Ministry of God the Holy Spirit under the doctrines of common and efficacious grace, so stay out of the way of the Holy Spirit. Do your job and get out of the way.

          f.        Remember that the first divine institution is free will. This includes freedom and privacy for decision. You provide gospel information but you leave the results in the hands of the Lord. The gospel must persuade the unbeliever to believe in Christ, and nothing else. Therefore avoid gimmicks which confuse the issue — emotional begging, public invitations, the raising of hands, the walking of aisles, the jumping through psychological hoops. There is no place for these in witnessing.

          g.       Effective witnessing depends on the ministry of God the Holy Spirit: the ministry of the Holy Spirit directed toward the believer in spirituality, Acts 1:8 2Corinthians 3:3 the ministry of the Holy Spirit directed toward the unbeliever in convincing, John 16:8-11 1Corinthians 2:14.

          h.       Clarity of witnessing depends on the believer understanding the judgement of human good. Human good was rejected at the cross, only sin was judged. Human good will be judged in the believer at the judgement seat of Christ, and human good will be judged in the unbeliever at the great white throne or the last judgement.

7.       Summary:

          a.       Prerequisites for witnessing involve knowledge of pertinent doctrines related to the gospel. You must know these.

          b.       Effectiveness of witnessing depends upon the ministry of God the Holy Spirit.

          c.        responsibility for witnessing belongs to every member of the royal family of God.

          d.       Dynamics of witnessing depend upon the believer’s mental attitude related to his spiritual growth.

          e.       Clarity of witnessing depends upon the believer’s accurate understanding of the two deaths of Christ on the cross.

          f.        Areas of witnessing include both the life and the lips.

          g.       The challenge to witnessing comes from the doctrine of unlimited atonement.

          h.       The reward for witnessing is included in the believer’s paragraph SG3, surpassing grace.

8.       The biblical pattern for witnessing is found in 1Thessalonians chapter two.

9.       The postulates of pitfalls in witnessing:

          a.       Avoid argumentation. You may win the debate but you won’t win the soul. Your responsibility is to disseminate information, not to argue over the validity of the information. You present it, leave the rest to the Holy Spirit.

          b.       Do not be sidetracked by false issues. These include such subjects as: Is the Bible the Word of God? What about the people who have never heard?

          c.        Deal with the individual alone where possible. Witnessing in front of others creates false issues by producing embarrassment, loss of prestige, heckling.

          d.       Avoid getting into a rut, using the same approach in every case. different approaches to the subject of the gospel are necessary for different people. Your flexibility comes with your spiritual maturity.

          e.       Avoid the false concept that you must speak to a certain number of people every day about Jesus Christ or you are not spiritual. Witnessing is not spirituality, it is the result of the balance of residency in the soul between the filling of the Spirit and maximum doctrine.

          f.        Motivation for witnessing must come from doctrine resident in the soul, not human pressure, not approbation lust.

          g.       Avoid bragging about your experiences in witnessing. The Lord knows what you have done and that is all that is necessary.

          h.       Do not judge other believers for their apparent failure to witness. This is a matter between them and the Lord. Such judging and maligning only brings divine discipline on yourself. You must face that issue for yourself and no one else.

10.     The analogy to witnessing — Matthew 4:19, “Follow me and I will make you fishers of men.” A fisherman must have a desire to fish, and that is true of witnessing. You must have a desire to impart the gospel, you must love Jesus Christ, there must be some true spiritual motivation.

          a.       A fisherman goes equipped. He knows exactly what he is after and he knows what he is going to hook it with. This is important in being a fisher of men, you must be equipped with the gospel.

          b.       And they always go where the fish are located.

          c.        They keep out of sight. Never make an issue of yourself, you are not the issue, Christ is the issue.

          d.       Fishermen must be patient. When you get to the point where you are getting vibrations, cut it off!

11.     The principle of prayer in witnessing is a bona fide principle — Romans 10:1.

12.     Effective witnessing belongs to those in supergrace status — Proverbs 11:30.

13.     There is a relationship between witnessing and doctrine resident in the soul. Human perspicacity based on high IQ is not necessary for evangelizing those who have a high IQ. You have information he needs no matter how smart he is. Cognisance of the unbeliever’s religion or his philosophy is not necessary for witnessing. For example, you do not have to understand Judaism to witness to the Jews; you do not have to understand Mohammadanism to witness to the Muslim, Mormonism to witness to a Mormon, philosophy to witness to a philosopher. What you need is doctrine in your soul. The creation of a public relations image is not s substitute for the filling of the Spirit. The believer’s consistency in the function of GAP determines both his motivation and his effectiveness.


Bob only covers the first 4 points.


Verses 15 & 16, true and false motivation.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #19


19 05/21/1976 Philippians 1:15a Doctrine of pride (review); false motivation


Philippians 1:15  For some, even from envy and strife, are proclaiming Christ, but some also from goodwill—  (BLB)


Some points on pride. Sin and evil are not the same, but they meet at the point of arrogance. You can take a true doctrine, like rm/rw, and set up standards based upon arrogance.


This book picks up where Acts left off.


Verse 15 – “Some indeed,” tines (τινες) [pronounced tihn-ehs], the nominative plural subject from the indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç]. ‘Indefinite’ means a specific category. An indefinite pronoun always refers to a specific category of people and therefore it is translated “Certain ones.” It is called an indefinite pronoun because the category is referred to without naming the people in the category. The affirmative particle mén (μέν) [pronounced men] in classical Greek is usually used with the particle de: “on the one hand; on the other hand.” This category [certain ones] is the category of false motivation. “On the one hand certain ones.”


“preach” – present active indicative from the verb kêrussô (κηρύσσω) [pronounced kay-ROOS-so]. This word is derived from the noun kērux (κρυξ) [pronounced KAY-roox], which is a herald for a king, a representative for a VIP. He must go around and declare the policy of the king, and kêrussô (κηρύσσω) [pronounced kay-ROOS-so] means to go around and declare the policy of the king as a herald of the king. The present tense is a descriptive present, it indicates the witnessing is in the process of occurrence. We translate this, “Certain ones [reversionists] are making known.” The active voice: the reversionist, the legalist, under the principle of false motivation is performing the witnessing or testifying. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of actual historical reality.


“Christ” – accusative singular direct object ton Christon, “the Christ.” The anrtharous construction (without the definite article) always emphasizes the person; the definite article merely identifies the noun. The definite article is put in here to indicate that they are talking about Christ, but they are not getting it straight. They are doing it from a false motivation: “even of envy and strife.”[7]


This is the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ]—”even,” and then diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative. The preposition diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive means “through,” but here we have diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative and it means “because.” The first object is phthonos (φθόνος) [pronounced FTHOHN-oss]—”jealousy.” From this, going into the right lobe and combining with evil the production is “strife, discord, contention” – éris (ἔρις) [pronounced EHR-is]: “even because of jealousy and discord.”


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #20


20 05/23/1976 Philippians 1:15b Doctrines of jealousy, motivation


There is a fine thread between being self functioning and the function of the mental attitude sin pride, which is the original sin. Satan fell through pride; the woman fell through pride. This is the most basic of the mental attitude sins. This is the basis for all false motivation among the believers. Pride is often a blind spot. We all possess a sin nature and we all have hangups. Pride makes the individual... Paul’s teaching offended the legalists. There was an all-time response from these legalists. People had a lifetime antagonism toward Paul. The Judaizers came in right behind Paul and tried to attack his ministry. They spent their lives with their pride submerged. A variety of mental attitude sins occur as a result of this pride and legalism. False motivation which occurs when pride is suppressed. Mental sins related to the right lobe of the soul. Evil is a thought. These mental attitude sins are minute particles and they are fired into the right lobe of the soul where they release evil.


This doctrine of jealousy came from NB1 and it is reasonably close to the teaching that Bob is doing.


The Doctrine of Jealousy

1.       Definition.

          a.       Jealousy is a mental attitude sin which demands exclusive devotion and is intolerant of rivalry. If there is such a thing as blind arrogance, then there is certainly hidden jealousy. Many people are mixed up due to hangups in the soul. They are going to prove this or that group wrong; but this can be attributed to various hangups in the individual. Until there is an actual challenge, these things will always exist and they will always slow you down. You do not have capacity for love in any category. Maybe you got fired from a job where you rejected the authority of your boss. You might blame persecution and other things, but you bring this on yourself. The same thing that causes people to change churches also leads people into a life of crime.

          b.       Jealousy is a mental attitude sin which is a constant concentration upon self. It is devotion to self to the exclusion of other things. It is a chagrin when someone else is more attractive or receives approbation or has achieved something of value.

          c.        Jealousy is chagrin or discontent at the blessings, successes or status symbols of other people.

          d.       Jealousy is the resentment of the attractiveness or the approbation that someone else has received.

          e.       In the old English jealousy also had the connotation of ardent devotion. God would say, “I am jealous of my people.” So it has to be remembered that the old English has to antithetical meanings for jealousy, one is a mental attitude sin and the other is a synonym for love. This study is all about the mental attitude sin of jealousy.

          f.        This study will be confined to the mental sin of jealousy or envy.

2.       The source of jealousy. There are two basic sources for all mental sins of jealousy.

          a.       The old sin nature’s area of weakness. This produces the source of all categories of sin, including mental, verbal, and overt.

          b.       These sins all reside in the soul; but the impulse comes from the sin nature.

          c.        It also emanates from reversionism or being under the influence of evil, as in this passage, 1Timothy 6:3–4. If any teaches a different doctrine and does not concur with sound doctrine, namely those doctrines of our Lord Jesus Christ, even to that doctrine pertaining to godliness [which we describe as cracking the maturity barrier, going from supergrace A to supergrace B and eventually ultra super grace]. He has received blind arrogance understanding nothing, but he has morbid obsessions about controversies and verbal conflicts from which originate jealousy.

          d.       Pride when challenged is like firing a bullet. When the other mental attitude sins are released, they move into a sphere and hook up with any evil that might be there.

          e.       If anyone teaches a different doctrine, and it does not concur with sound doctrine, and is a challenge to pride. A person reacts like a sudden release of the drop of a hammer which cuts loose all of the associated mental attitude sins.

          f.        There have been reactions to various doctrines. The actual detailed study of maturity, but it is a source of reaction to those whose pride is offended.

          g.       Evil in the soul combine with the mental attitude sins and they enter into controversy with a pastor or friends.

          h.       When the firing pin moves forward, this sets off the other mental attitude sins. They are fired into the place where evil becomes a part of this. Fired into the right lobe, it detonates strife, controversy, and various similar sins.

3.       Therefore jealousy is a sin inevitably related to reversionism. Jealousy crops up in unbeliever reversionism, mentioned in Romans 1:28,29. Jealousy also crops up in any type of believer reversionism — James 3:14-16.

4.       Jealousy rejects Bible doctrine, therefore jealousy characterizes reversionism — Acts 13:45 But when the Jews saw the crowds, they were filled with jealousy and began contradicting the things spoken by Paul. The religious Jews could not attract large crowds. Their jealousy was compressed, jealousy and the whole cluster of mental attitude sins were released. They were motivated to destroy the ministry of the Apostle Paul. Acts 17:5 Then the Jews, being jealous, and taking along some evil men from the marketplace, organizes a mob and set the city in an uproar [this is when they tried to kill Paul by rioting, but Paul escaped]

5.       Jealousy motivates religion — Mark 15:10.

6.       Jealousy of authority — e.g. the authority of Joseph motivated his brothers to sell him into slavery — Acts 7:9.

7.       Jealousy can split all kinds of organizations and jealousy actually split the nation Israel. We have the northern and the southern kingdom because of jealousy — Isaiah 11:13.

8.       So great was the sin of jealousy in Israel that a special offering was designed for it under the Levitical code — Leviticus chapter 5:11-31. Bob said numbers, but maybe that was incorrect.

9.       Jealousy was the basis for the destruction of category #2 love. Any true love can be in danger when jealousy attacks — Song of Solomon 8:6.

10.     Jealousy is a self-destructive sin — Job 5:2; Proverbs 14:30.

11.     Jealousy, therefore, is the strongest of the mental attitude sins — Proverbs 27:3,4.

12.     Jealousy, related to pride, is part of the trigger mechanism producing both false motivation and discord. Philippians 1:15


Hang-ups (Philippians 1:15a)

1.       Arrogance creates hang-ups of the soul. These hang-ups become a source of false motivation in life.

2.       When these hang-ups which produce false motivation are reversed by the suppression of pride or arrogance a change reaction of mental attitude sins and evil place the reversionistic believer directly under the command of Satan. False motivation puts them under his policy.

3.       Pressure on pride causes that pride to depress, creating a trigger mechanism which sets off the entire range of other mental attitude sins.

4.       Not only does the trigger mechanism release these mental attitude sins to the soul but drives them like a projectile into evil, so that evil and mental sins combine to produce a Christian monster who causes dissension and strife in the name of the Lord.

5.       The Christian monster resists Bible teaching from his right pastor and reacts to the authority of his right pastor. And by resisting his authority he produces strife and discord in the local church.

6.       When the suppression of pride cocks the trigger the trigger released produces jealousy, vindictiveness, implacability, hatred, bitterness.

7.       These mental attitude sins are combined with the resistance to doctrine to produce evil in the soul and false motivation in the soul. Therefore legitimate functions, such as witnessing and helping around the church, become an operation of evil.

8.       The resultant strife or discord undermines the pastor’s authority and causes strife in the local church.

9.       Combined with evil resident in the soul from resisting doctrine and rejection of authority of right pastor, reversionists, then, in emotional revolt, uttering pious phrases, rationalizing their alliance with evil as a good thing, cause division among the brethren.

10.     And when they are reprimanded by the pastor, or even by friends or associates, they gather their coterie of friends and their social clique and lead them into a labyrinth of confusion, into a maze of reversionism from which recovery is almost totally hopeless, for they are in a baffling network of wrong turns.

11.     The right turns demanded for recovery are unthinkable to such arrogance because they demand recognition of the authority of hated right pastor and concentration on that very doctrine which condemns their thought and motivation.


Motivation

1.       Definition and description:

          a.       Motivation is what is inside of the individual, impelling or exciting action. Everything that we do in life is related to emotion. Everything that you do in life is motivated, even if from subconscious traces.

          b.       It is both mental and psychological impulse.

          c.        A motive is any thought which determines a choice or induces action.

          d.       Inducement is an attractive consideration held out to persuade.

          e.       Impulse is an involuntary feeling prompting to act.

          f.        Therefore, motivation is a mental state or emotional force which induces an act of volition.

          g.       Motivation is the design or object one has in any action; hence, it is one’s intention or purpose.

          h.       Motivation is an act or process of furnishing with an incentive or inducement to a decision or action or both.

          i.         In the Christian life, the believer is either motivated by Bible doctrine in the soul and the filling of the Holy Spirit, which produce personal love for God, or by the lust pattern of the old sin nature and Satan’s cosmic system which produces good and evil.

          j.         Attitude toward doctrine and spiritual growth determines proper motivation.

2.       The Bible is the judge of your motives and the judge of your actions. The Word of God is a critic of our motivation. Hebrews 4:12 This keeps everything on a very high level of objectivity. No one can read your thoughts, although you may give them the basis for some good guesses. The privacy of your soul and it becomes a very objective thing when the Bible goes to your soul and criticizes or commends your motivation.

3.       Evil is the source of anti-Christian motivation, Psalm 21:11 (Though they devise a conspiracy against you, they will not succeed.) ; 1Corinthians 10:5-6; Mark 7:22-23.

4.       False motivation hinders spiritual growth, Philippians 2:14; Job 17:11.

5.       The word prothêsis (pre-determined plan) is used to describe motivation

6.       The great issue in spiritual giving is motivation, God loves a believer who gives without hangups. 2Corinthians 9:7.

7.       For the mature believer, God turns evil motivation into grace blessing, Genesis 50:20.

8.       The motivation of the ultra super grace believer is often maligned, example of Moses, and there was nothing wrong with his motivation. Exodus 17:3.


This doctrine will be repeated in Lesson #52.


“and some” – tines (τινες) [pronounced tihn-ehs] dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], “on the other hand.” Tines (τινες) [pronounced tihn-ehs] is the nominative plural subject from the indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç]. Also the ascensive use of the conjunction


kai—”also.” Now we have the good motivation crowd: “of good will,” diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative of eudokia (εὐδοκία) [pronounced you-dohk-EE-ah], which means good will or good motivation—”because of good motivation.”


Philippians 1:15 On the one hand certain ones [reversionists] are making known the Christ even because of jealousy and strife [discord]; on the other hand certain ones [positive and advancing believers] because of good motivation.[8]


It is not what you do but what you are thinking when you do it. The believer under the influence of doctrine have the right motivation.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #21


21 05/23/1976 Philippians 1:16–17 Trigger mechanism of pride; blind arrogance


Bob: “I have in my hand a .45 automatic, model 1811...cleared.” Probably the finest handgun to come into existence. One of the safest weapons. Bob explains how to squeeze the trigger. About 3.5 lbs. This is a perfect illustration of what we have been studying the past few nights.


It is an illustration of jealousy. When these mental attitude sins hook up with evil, that is the explosion.


Pride is an expanded image of self. It sits in contempt with the image that it creates. When pride is injured, it contracts, forcing the pressure to increase to the point of detonation. Whatever compresses pride creates a pressure that must explode. It detonates and evil pattern in the soul. It creates maximum hypersensitivity spots in the soul. Vulnerable sensitivity spots are called hangups. A hangup is an obstacle in the normal function of life related to pride or arrogance. A hangup is become snagged. They exist because of an abnormality or some area of subjectivity. There are all kinds of sensitivity spots. One of the blessings of getting into supergrace A, and there are no appreciable hangups there. You get bravo grace, but you carry with you SG2, everything that you had in alpha grace.


Many appear to be fine, but that is because this person has never been crossed. Hit one of the areas of sensitivity and see what happens. Sooner or later, doctrinal teaching will offend someone.


The Trigger Mechanism

1.       The hangups of the soul and the pride complex are like a lot of bouys floating on the water. The real you exists. Out here all of these buoys hooked up and floating, and they represent the sensitivity of your soul.

2.       These hangups are those areas vulnerable to attack. Sink one of the buoys and the whole thing deflates.

3.       People are nice until they are attacked at their buoys or hangups.

4.       When the hangups are attacked, injured pride creates a trigger mechanism. All of these things go in. The real you suddenly appears as insignificant in your own eyes. All of this beautiful network out here is gone. This is where the believer serves Satan because he falls under the policy of evil.

5.       Sudden detonation of pride.

6.       When the firing pin of frustrated pride, other mental attitude sins are released into the right lobe combining with evil to create the Christian monster.

7.       In other words, the suppression of pride cocks the hammer and releases the projectile of all mental attitude sins into the right lobe.

8.       This produces that Christian monster or reversionism, who becomes a source of discord or strife. When pride is suppressed, it goes down, down, down.


More Points

1.       Frustrated pride released more mental attitude sins. Witnessing is turned into some kind of system of retaliation. Pride is suppressed and it strikes the primer. Paul was the greatest attacker of legalism. The legalists would witness, but they would add to it. They would do this to get people in opposition to Paul.

2.       The strife and discord from witnessing under these circumstances was to cause revolvt against Paul plus to cause antagonism because of his teaching.

3.       for this reason, they have entered into a labyrinth of reversionism, from which there is almost no escape.

4.       Injured pride dominates and detonates either mental attitude sins, by which they make a series of wrong turns for the rest of their lives until they exit the labyrinth by the sin unto death. Almost impossible to come back from this.


Hell hath no fury like a woman scorned. Men come against this and they say, “I don’t understand women.” The woman’s pride is offended when the man rejects her. The pressure keeps increasing. Women have been known to spend their entire lives holding back and waiting to exact their revenge.


Saturday night at the movies, she thought that she had been rejected (she had not) and that changed her entire approach.


Some women marry a man that they do not love in order to exact revenge against someone that they are truly in love with.


Pride is an expanded view of oneself. An atom is a well-balanced instrument. Bob talks about chain reactions and unstable molecules. Pettiness and no capacity for life.


Pride becomes the basis of all false motivation among those who are believers in the Lord Jesus Christ. Pride is often a blind spot in the soul of the individual, and especially believers who have been exposed to, or are influenced by, any form of legalism. Pride makes the individual with hang-ups of the soul extremely vulnerable, for pride is highly sensitive to anything in the periphery which in any way attacks it, and an attack upon pride immediately causes it to be compressed and become a trigger system of the soul for all sorts of things that are a source of misery and dishonouring to the Lord.[9]


Verses 16 & 17 in the King James version are reversed in the Greek.


Philippians 1:16  the ones indeed out of love, knowing that I am appointed for the defense of the gospel;  (BLB)


Verse 16 – Good motivation, not as in the KJV in verse 17. Bad motivation occurs at verse 17, not as in the KJV in verse 16.


Verse 16, which is really verse 17—Good motivation amplified. The verse begins hoi men ex agápē (ἀγάπη) [pronounced ag-AH-pay]j. Agapê is a relaxed mental attitude. This is to sit in the perimeter with no hangups. The nominative plural of the definite article hoi refers to the good motive category. This is not to be translated but simply used as a reference point to one of the categories previously given by the indefinite relative pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç], which while it is called indefinite refers to a specific category without naming names, i.e. the good motivation group. Next is the affirmative particle mén (μέν) [pronounced men] used correlatively with the particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] to emphasize a contrast between the two categories of motivation. Then comes ex (ἐξ) [pronounced ehks], which is from the preposition ek (ἐκ) [pronounced ehk], used because the next word begins with a vowel, plus the ablative of agápē (ἀγάπη) [pronounced ag-AH-pay]. This describes true motivation. Agápē (ἀγάπη) [pronounced ag-AH-pay] is a soul with no hang-ups and total capacity for love. The sooner hang-ups are eliminated the sooner and more rapid becomes the believer’s advance spiritually. So this is occupation with Christ. But it is more than that, for the same capacity which is directed toward the Lord Jesus Christ in category #1 is directed toward a member of the opposite sex—a right woman/man, and toward friends, so that the believer is a totally wonderful person because he has capacity for love. It is the exact opposite of pride being depressed. All good motivation is based on capacity for love.


“knowing” is the perfect active participle from oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da]. This is a consummative perfect tense, it denotes a completed process as an implied result from a process. In other words, the reason it is a consummative perfect is because it emphasizes the process whereby you are free from hang-ups. The active voice: properly motivated believers produce the action. The proper motivation comes from doctrine in the soul. This is a circumstantial participle to show that there is something which is exactly opposite from what we have been studying. This is the antithesis of the Christian monster!


“that I am set” – the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] [after verbs of cognisance to show the content of the cognisance], translated “that”, plus the present active indicative of keimai (κεμαι) [pronounced KĪ-mahee] which means to recline, to lie down. It therefore comes to mean to be appointed, to be destined. Here it means “I am appointed.” This is a retroactive progressive present, it denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The active voice: Paul produces the action. The indicative mood is declarative for reality, the reality of being totally free in life from any hang-up about anything.


“for the defence” – eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of apologia (ἀπολογία) [pronounced ap-ol-og-EE-ah]; “of the gospel” – the descriptive genitive singular from euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on], “good news.”


Philippians 1:16 The latter category from the motivation of love [occupation with Christ], knowing that I am appointed for the defence of the good news [the policy of God for the Church Age].


Philippians 1:17  but the others are proclaiming Christ out of selfish ambition, not purely, supposing to add tribulation to my chains.  (BLB)


Verse 17 – False motivation amplified. This refers to the category of verse 15. This verse begins hoi (οἱ) [pronounced hoy] dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], the former category making known Christ because of jealousy and discord. In other words, the false motivation crowd is now presented. Next is ex (ἐξ) [pronounced ehks] plus the ablative of eritheía (ἐριθεία) [pronounced er-ith-Ī-ah], which indicates motivation for those who have an erroneous one. It denotes self-seeking. It means to gain one’s objective by causing strife and factions, to derive happiness from someone else’s unhappiness. In other words, to be petty, arrogant, a trouble-maker—”The former category from the motivation of divisive self-promotion.” In other words, one who contrives from intrigue, duplicity, deception, and machination; to promote himself at the expense of creating factions.


“not sincerely” is wrong. It is the strong negative ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook] plus the adverb hagnōs (ἁγνς) [pronounced hag-NOCE], and it means “not from pure motive.”


“supposing” – present active participle from oíomai (οἴομαι) [pronounced OY-om-ahee], which means to think, to presume, to assume. The verb means inference without fact. That is a summary of anyone with hang-ups. The present tense is a descriptive present to indicate what is now going on, the events in the process of occurrence in Rome. Witnessing from false motivation is the background. The active voice: it is really a middle voice with an active meaning. The reversionists in Rome produced the action, they have false motivation, false inference, and they are witnessing in order to retaliate against Paul. The participle is a causal participle, translated therefore, “since they presume.”


“to add” – present active infinitive of egeirô (ἐγείρω) [pronounced ehg-Ī-row], which means to wake, to rouse, or to activate. This is an iterative present tense, it describes what recurs at successive intervals. When Paul hears of their false witnessing. The active voice: the reversionists in Rome produce the action, seeking to retaliate against Paul and trying to make him miserable by their false witnessing. The infinitive is intended result in which the result seeks to fulfil a deliberate objective: to make Paul unhappy while he is in prison waiting for trial.


“affliction” – mental pressure or distress, the accusative singular direct object from thlipsis (θλίπσις) [pronounced THLIP-siss]; “to my bonds [or incarceration].”


Philippians 1:17 The former category from the motivation of divisive self-promotion, not from pure motive, since they presume to arouse [or, activate] mental distress with regard to my incarceration.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #22


22 05/24/1976 Philippians 1:18 Pauline modus operandi; avoid pettiness


The PREP school is using personal notes and outlines and using doctrine in the soul to teach from that. The lid is off and teachers using their ingenuity are presenting the material in their own way. They transfer the information to the souls of the little ones as well. Less discipline problems in the PREP school.


Case in point is puppet show for the 3 year olds, the stages of reversionism, or Reggie Fish Takes a Dive. The room was decorated as if being under water. Includes Icky Eel, a sly guy. Squeezer Octopus, a opportunistic boor. Reggie goes fishing, a frantic search for happiness.


Getting away from the quarterly and using your own personality has improved things 1000%.


To Live Is Christ


Philippians 1:18  What then? Only that in every way, whether in pretext or in truth, Christ is proclaimed. And in this I rejoice. Yes, and I will rejoice,  (BLB)


The conclusion begins in verse 18 with the phrase “What then?”—Ti (τί) [pronounced tee] gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr]. Ti (τί) [pronounced tee] is literally “What,” the gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] is used in the sense of an inference with the interrogative pronoun. It is an idiom which means “What is my conclusion?” The conjunctive particle gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] sometimes is used to express inference when used [in this case] with a nominative neuter singular of the interrogative pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç].


“notwithstanding” – an old English translation of an adverb plên (πλήν) [pronounced plane] which is used as a conjunction meaning “only, nevertheless, or however.” We translate it only here.


“that in every way” – hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] is a conjunction used to express verbs of thought. With it, translated with the adverb plên (πλήν) [pronounced plane], “only that,” is the locative neuter of sphere from pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] plus the locative from tropos (τρόπος) [pronounced TROP-oss] —”only that in every way.”


“whether in pretence or in truth” – the words whether or is Classical Greek again: eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh]. After the first eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] we have the word prophasei, the locative of próphasis (πρόφασις) [pronounced PROHF-ahs-iç], which means pretext but it is much deeper than that, it means false motive. Then following the second eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] comes alêtheia (ἀλήθεια, ας, ἡ) [pronounced ahl-Ā-thi-ah] in the locative which means here a true motive. “Whether in false motivation or true” is the correct translation.


“Christ is preached” – the subject Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] refers to the Lord Jesus Christ as the only saviour. It could be translated “Christ and only Christ.” The present passive indicative of katangéllō (καταγγέλλω) [pronounced kat-ang-GHEHL-low] means to proclaim. It is a verb not indicating the accuracy involved but the person involved is proclaimed. This is a descriptive present for what is occurring in Rome in a.d. 62. The passive voice: the subject Jesus Christ is receiving the action. Whether it is accurate or inaccurate is not the point, the fact is that He is proclaimed. The indicative mood is declarative for historical fact. The verbal action is the fact that in witnessing, whether true or false motivation is involved, it does bring out the name of Christ and does present Christ before the people as an issue. The principle is, and the thing that Paul is going to use in his conclusion is that people are making an issue of Christ without realising it because of their bad motivation. So God is using the wrath of man to praise Him. At the same time Paul is going to draw a specific conclusion from it. Christ is proclaimed regardless of their motivation and regardless of their accuracy.


“and I therein do rejoice” – incorrect. We have kaí (καί) [pronounced ] en (ἐν) [pronounced en] toutô (τούτῳ) [pronounced TWO-toh] chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]. kaí (καί) [pronounced ] can usually be translated “and,” but here is a very unique use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. It is the emphatic use of the conjunction and it should be translated “in fact.” “Therein” is actually a prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of the demonstrative houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]. The demonstrative gives special emphasis on the true issue. The true issue is not the pettiness and false motivation, it is that Christ is being presented by people who are really not interested in presenting Christ but in hurting Paul. But it is boomeranging on them. Jesus Christ controls history. The whole thing is turning around on them and they haven’t even accomplished their objective which is to make Paul unhappy. Paul is not only happy but he is happy in the very thing that they are using against him. We actually have “in fact in this [the thing they are doing].” “I rejoice” is the present active indicative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]—”I am happy.” The present tense is a descriptive present for what is now going on. Active voice: Paul produces the action in spite of the efforts to reverse it. The indicative mood is declarative for unqualified assertion of a fact—false motivation—and all of the other things that accompany this false motivation cannot possibly hurt the person who is insulated with doctrine, occupied with Christ, and about to step into ultra-super-grace. Paul is able to ignore all the pettiness. Chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row] means inner happiness. But here chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row] means inner happiness under a certain concept: minus hang-ups of the soul.


You avoid the pettiness; and sometimes you change the people with whom you hang. I am not telling you to divorce your wife. You cannot run around being hypersensitive. You cannot wear your feelings on your sleeve, looking for any chance to be offended or upset. Looking for anything to be offended by. Instead of buoys on the water, maybe radar stations where you are looking for a place to be offended.


You cannot get along with hangups in your soul. Too many complications in life to deal with petty things. The cobwebs are out of your soul is having a soul without hangups.


“yea” is an old English word. It is the affirmative use of the conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] [allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] is generally used as an adversative conjunction], translated here “in fact.” Or, not only this, but...


“and will rejoice” – kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is used with the rhetorical ascensive of the conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], and it is translated “not only at this time but.” kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is used here as an idiom. “I will continue being happy” – future middle indicative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]. The progressive future denotes the idea of progress in future time.


Philippians 1:18 What is my conclusion? Only that, in every way. Whether in false motivation or true, Christ is being proclaimed; in fact, in this I am happy, not only now, but I will continue to be happy.


“I have no hangups now, nor will I develop any.”


The Pauline Modus Operandi

1.       Paul does not condone false teaching or false doctrine. Nor does this verse imply it.

2.       Paul does not concern himself with false motivation, therefore he does not become involved in pettiness. This is the last ambush.

3.       False motivation becomes self-destructive and a part of satanic policy of evil.

4.       Therefore false motivation is a matter for God and His administration of justice. Paul does not become involved.

5.       Paul ignores the false teaching, the false motivation, and finds happiness in the fact that Christ is being proclaimed to the citizens of Rome—falsely, but at least He is being presented.

6.       Not only is Paul happy at this moment but his happiness will be perpetuated into intensification. It will be perpetuated regardless of any personal circumstances or catastrophes of history.

7.       Bible doctrine resident in the soul is the basis for Paul’s happiness, not the false or true motivation of others.

8.       Furthermore, Paul’s ministry and happiness will both continue since they do not depend on what others do.

9.       This fact leads to the super-grace [maturity] interpretation of contemporary history: Catastrophe and disaster in history cannot change the blessing or the happiness of the mature believer.

10.     Principle: Happiness belongs to the person with no hang-ups in the soul, no areas of hypersensitivity. When you remove hypersensitivity opens you up to true sensitivity. Hypersensitivity is when your pride is attacked. People have a right to their privacy, to their property, to their self-determination. So you become thoughtful of other people and aware of other people. You are well-mannered and self-disciplined.


The super-grace [maturity] interpretation of contemporary history: Catastrophe and disaster in history cannot change the blessing or the happiness of the mature believer. This begins with v. 19.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #23


23 05/25/1976 Philippians 1:19 S–G2 interpretation of history; Greek drama


Philippians 1:19  for I know that through your prayer and the provision of the Spirit of Jesus Christ, this will turn out for me to deliverance,  (BLB)


Verse 19 – the super-grace interpretation of history. Jesus Christ controls history under three separate categories. He controls history directly through His power and perfect attributes, His essence. He controls indirectly through the laws of divine establishment. He controls permissively by permitting evil to run its course in history in order that the angelic conflict might be completed.


This must now be related to the principle of advance to maturity. The advance to maturity is accomplished by persistent intake of Bible doctrine.


“For I know” – this begins with the inferential use of the conjunctive particle gar, the word translated “for,” but is actually used to express a self-evident conclusion from Paul’s ability to interpret history. The perfect active indicative of oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da] —the perfect is used as a present tense for knowledge or doctrine in the right lobe of the apostle. This is a perfective present denoting continuing results, and the continuation of these results goes on at that moment in history. This is a part of the correct interpretation of contemporary history. Paul, through doctrine, has come to understand the significance of the Roman empire.


From a.d. 96-192 this was a great period of history brought to you by Paul teaching Bible doctrine.


We translate the inferential use of the conjunction “indeed”—”Indeed I know.” This is the expression of total confidence. The perfect tense used as a perfective present tense is an expression of a confidence when he realizes that history demands his continuation. The situation in history, the tremendous intensity of opposition, suddenly turned everything around for him. That opposition is meaningful, supernatural, extra-natural. It has some meaning or purpose that has eluded him up until now, and in the next few verses we see one of the most beautiful pictures of how common sense, maximum doctrine in the soul, the reasoning power which is given to anyone who has divine viewpoint, is brought to focus in a perfect interpretation of contemporary history, and then a perfect interpretation of the meaning of his own life and why he must go on.


Why would there be all of these threads intersecting at this point? Paul is at an historic moment and he has had some discouraging moments in his life. But all of these things have a very wonderful purpose. The more doctrine that you have in your soul, the greater is your confidence in life and finding your own place in history.


“that this” – the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] introduces an objective clause. This is used to show a conclusion, after verbs of knowing, after verbs of confidence expressed. It indicates a conclusion, and the principle. The subject of the objective clause is the nominative singular neuter from the demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]—”this.” This is an immediate demonstrative because it is emphasizing something in the context. “Indeed I know that this event.”


“shall turn” – the future middle indicative from apobaínō (ἀποβαίνω) [pronounced ap-ohb-AH-ee-no]. The word means to come back, to turn out, to disembark from a ship, and possibly to result from something. Here it means to turn out as another illustration of the principle of Romans 8:28. The future tense is a predictive future for an event which has not occurred but is expected to occur in the near future. The middle voice is a dynamic middle, it emphasizes the part taken by the subject in the action of the verb. The subject is the nominative neuter singular of the demonstrative pronoun referring to the events described in verses 13-18 as a part of contemporary history. Paul interprets this extensive witnessing for Christ as an inference that his soon release is about to occur. The indicative mood is declarative for historical reality, and bringing all of these things together in his mind and correctly interpreting history gives him a new lease on life.


“to my salvation” is wrong. This includes the dative singular indirect object from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—very important in the interpretation of history on the part of the believer because he must start with the awareness of his own existence. In interpretation of history it is normal to relate yourself to what is going on in history. Ego is not arrogance or pride, it is self-consciousness, awareness of one’s own existence, and the ability to use doctrine in the soul to face the reality of contemporary events. Then a prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of sôtêria (σωτηρία) [pronounced soh-tay-REE-ah] —translated deliverance, not salvation. It should be translated, “Indeed I know that this shall turn out to me for deliverance [or, deliverance for me].” Note that this is an anartharous construction in the prepositional phrase, no definite articles of any kind. That indicates the highest quality of deliverance, a divine deliverance, the direct intervention of the Lord Jesus Christ to turn around courtroom procedures and to hold back the trial. So we have, then, when a person can take doctrine and integrate it with current events and come up with the answer. It also confirms the fact that Romans 8:28 applies to the mature believer without any questions or doubts.


Paul and Nero will rise and fall together. Nero frees Paul in a.d. 62 but he will execute him in a.d. 68 (and Nero will die soon thereafter; maybe six weeks later).


Principle

1.       Paul now relates the events of contemporary history to two other events which are involved in his deliverance.

2.       Both of these factors come directly from the Philippian congregation, namely their prayers and their monetary offering.


 These events carry Paul for the next five years. He will go to Philippi again and to Ephesus. Paul has a very large offering from the Philippians. He was discouraged and this large influx of cash. This is to give him hope for the future.


“through your prayer” – Paul notices the power of prayer, diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive singular of deêsis (δέησις) [pronounced DEH-ay-sis]. This means “through intercessory prayer,” but he also specifies the origin, for their origin indicates their love and personal interest. It is the ablative plural of means from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. Ordinarily the ablative is not used to express means, but it may be used to express means when accompanied by the implication of origin or source. The Philippians loved Paul so much that they prayed for him all the time. This is the prayer of those who have broken through the maturity barrier and have followed Paul.


“and the supply” – the continuative use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ], used to indicate that the prepositional phrase is not over and that there will be another object of the preposition, i.e. the genitive or ablative of epichorēgía (ἐπιχορηγία) [pronounced ep-ee-khor-ayg-EE-ah]. This is an Attic Greek word and one of the oldest words in all of the history of drama. It was originally used for a very wealthy Athenian who provided the money for the chorus to train for a year for Greek tragedy. The next phrase, “of the Spirit,” emphasizes the source of all this true giving, but in effect the Philippian offering is epichorēgía (ἐπιχορηγία) [pronounced ep-ee-khor-ayg-EE-ah], it provides Paul with what he needs by way of money for the next five years plus. So we call this logistical provision—”and logistical provision.” Then we have to add a word not found in the original—”motivated.” They were motivated by God.


In a Greek drama, the chorus carries the drama. There will be a few main characters and a few minor characters. The chorus dances and sings and they fill in all of the blanks. The chorus might say woe, woe, woe, and you know things are not good.


Someone has to foot the bill for the chorus, because they are talented. A sponsor might pay the salaries for the chorus in order for there to be a chorus.


“of the Spirit of Jesus Christ” – the ablative singular of means for pneuma (πνεμα) [pronounced PNYOO-mah], referring here to God the Holy Spirit. This is the origin of their motivation. Again, the ablative is used when the origin is emphasized. Then the genitive of relationship from Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]. Jesus Christ is mentioned because it is the ministry of God the Holy Spirit in this dispensation to glorify Jesus Christ. So the motivation for all of these things: doctrine resident in their souls and the ministry of God the Holy Spirit.


Philippians 1:19 Indeed I know that this shall turn out for deliverance to me through your intercessory prayer, and logistical provision, motivated by the Spirit of Jesus Christ.


There are many doctrines related to this verse: the doctrine of the filling of the Spirit, the doctrine of prayer, the doctrine of giving, the doctrine of motivation.


Greek Drama and its relationship to the New Testament. (This was also done in 1988 in much more detail in the Ephesians series)


The concept of Greek drama is taken from the epic poems of Homer. This epic poems were very well-known. There was the fraternity of Baccus or Dyanitcious, who was mostly the god of drinking and singing. They began to organize this a little bit and wrote what is known as a dithyramb. They would sing and dance to this and then they started the mummary parade. They decided to set up some kind of place where they could do this as public and they experienced a catharsus as a result. It was their rebound. It was a big assembly worship. This was to them their Bible class. They listened to a drama in honor of their gods.


Aristotle defined tragedy as the imitation of an action which is serious and of a certain magnitude. It renewed the people for another year. It was complete. The man started out as successful but he was brought down.


The Greek drama performed a religious function. The hero is the basic concept of the tragedy. He is great but he is not completely virtuous. He is recognized by everyone as being a great person. The hero had a tragic flaw, and that flew causes him to pass from fortune to misfortune. This would never be a bad man going from misery to happiness.


Misfortune always comes to the hero by some error in judgment. The hero often has an ideal perfect marriage that also goes bad. Some error in judgment is followed out to the end.


The great tragedians: Aeschylus, Sophocles and Euripides.


Paul used the vocabulary of the Greek tragedies in order to get certain points across.


Greek Drama Vocabulary Used in the New Testament.

1.       The Greek word HUPOKRITES was used for the actor who wore a large wax mask. It is used for the hypocrisy of legalism in Galatians 2:12-13. "For prior to the coming of certain men [legalistic believers] from James, he [Peter] used to have dinner with Gentiles. But when the legalists came, he began to withdraw and hold himself aloof, fearing the circumcision party. And the rest of the Jews acted out this hypocrisy [put on the mask of legalism], with the result that even Barnabas was carried away by this hypocrisy [acting]." Along with wearing masks, the HUPOKRITES also wore boots on stilts, or KOTHORNOS, which represent arrogance.

2.       The Greek word MECHANE was used for machines used to lower actors onto the stage who played the parts of gods. Harnessed to this machine, the actor would say his lines while hovering over the stage. The phrase DEUS Exodus MACHINA came from the malfunction of this machine, when the actor should have been removed from the stage but was still hanging there. This was also called in Greek KATARTIZO, and is so used in 1Corinthians 1:10. The Corinthians were divided into schisms, losing any effective testimony. In effect, their "machine" had broken down.

3.       The Greek verb PAREISERCHOMAI is used in Romans 5:20 for a minor actor entering the stage to play a minor role in the drama. Romans 5:20 describes the Mosaic Law as a minor actor entering the stage to play a minor role. The Mosaic Law is not a part of the Christian way of life. All precedence for the Christian way of life is taken from the dispensation of the Hypostatic Union, not from the dispensation of Israel.

4.       The Greek verb EPICHOREGEO means to supply the money necessary to train and to costume the chorus. It is used for logistical grace wherein God provides everything for us in 2Corinthians 9:10, Galatians 3:5, and 2Peter 1:5.

5.       The patron, or in Greek the EPICHOREGIA, is used in Ephesians 4:16, translated "supply." This passage means that in every generation of the Church Age, God supplies the spiritual gift of pastor-teacher so that positive volition need not be frustrated. God uses prepared men, and He provides prepared men for every congregation that has positive volition.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #24


24 05/26/1976 Philippians 1:20–21 Esprit de corps of the mature believer


Philippians 1:20  according to my earnest expectation and hope that I will be ashamed in nothing, but in all boldness also now as always, Christ will be magnified in my body, whether by life or by death.  (BLB)


Verse 20 – the esprit décorps of the mature believer—especially the super-grace believer.


“According to me earnest expectation” is a Greek prepositional phrase, Kata plus the accusative of the definite article, plus the accusative of the noun apokaradokía (ἀποκαραδοκία) [pronounced ap-ok-ar-ad-ok-EE-ah] [apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] = from; kara = head; dokéô (δοκέω) [pronounced dohk-EH-oh] = to watch], which means to watch with the head stretched forward, and comes to mean intense concentration which, of course, is involved in the daily function of GAP. It should be translated, “According to my intense concentration.” The principle behind this prepositional phrase: Intense concentration denotes giving Bible doctrine number one priority. It also denotes the modus vivendi of the daily function of GAP. It comes to means that all esprit décorps in the royal family of God must originate from doctrine inside of the believer’s own soul.


“and my hope” is the continuation of the prepositional phrase. This time there is the word elpís (ἐλπις) [pronounced el-PIS] in the accusative and it does not mean hope this time, it actually means here confidence. Confidence is based upon the fact that Bible doctrine has the number one priority, and from this you have the reversal of the pride trigger mechanism which starts all the mental attitude sins that combine with evil to form a believer serving up with Satan. Bible doctrine knocks out evil and the process is reversed.


“that” is the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] used after a verb of perception to indicate what is being taught; the content of thought.


“in nothing” is a prepositional phrase, again, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of oudeís (οὐδείς) [pronounced oo-DICE]. This means to the various aspects of life.


“I shall be ashamed” – the future passive indicative of aischunomai (αἰσχύνομαι) [pronounced ai-SCHOO-noh-my] which means here to be disgraced. He is talking about the disgrace of being vulnerable to having hang-ups of the soul resulting from pride—hypersensitivity, etc. This means total freedom from the arrogance complex.


“but” is an adversative conjunction, allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], that sets up a contrast between the person with hang-ups and the person with no hang-ups, the person with blind arrogance in the soul and the person with no arrogance at all.


“with all boldness” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of parhsia which means courage or confidence, boldness in the presence of persons, joyous confidence in relationship with God, etc. The problem with determining the meaning of parhsia here is that the various connotations all relate to the political sphere, the private sphere, moral concepts of integrity, and the word was actually developed in the Attic Greek in that line, especially where it was used for freedom of speech and expressing the courage of the soul or the integrity of the soul. So in the private sphere it was used for someone who was not afraid to censor a friend, hence boldness of speech, and eventually it came to mean candour or frankness. Eventually it went back into the origins of the soul where it meant to have no hang-ups, to be totally relaxed and therefore to be a good friend. It finally comes to mean integrity, which is its meaning here—”but with integrity.” Integrity is the state or quality of being unbroken, complete, undivided, with honour and sometimes with moral courage added.


“as always” – the relative adverb hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç], used as a comparative particle indicating the manner in which something proceeds, plus the adverb of time pántote (πάντοτε) [pronounced PAHN-toht-eh], always. The two words together mean “as always.”


“so now also” – kaí (καί) [pronounced ] nun (νν) [pronounced noon] is literally “even now.” This is the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] and it should be translated even; nun (νν) [pronounced noon] is an adverb of time.


“Christ shall be magnified” – the nominative singular of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] used as the subject. Here is true esprit décorps in the royal family of God, Christ magnified. Christ is magnified, not by running around doing things for God but by having a soul that is free from hang-ups. The subject is the Lord Jesus Christ; this is anartharous, there is no definite article. The absence of the definite calls attention to the uniqueness of the person of Jesus Christ. He is the only one in history worth glorifying. That is the principle of the absence of the definite article. The reason is because He is unique, the God-Man. The unseen battle is the major emphasis on glorifying Him.


The real Christian life is submerged like an iceberg. You can only see the most obvious things when someone is involved in some form of Christian service. It may look good and it may impress someone, but it is what is behind it—the content of the soul—that is key. God can see this and, apparently, Satan and the demons have a good idea of what is happening.


“shall be magnified” is the gnomic future of megalúnô (μεγαλύνω) [pronounced meh-gah-LOO-noh] which means to be exalted. The gnomic future is for a statement of fact expected under normal conditions of being a super-grace believer. The passive voice: Jesus Christ receives the glorification or exaltation from believers in super-grace.


“in my body” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of sōma (σμα) [pronounced SOH-mah], used here for the entire person alive in phase two, rather than just the body. Sōma (σμα) [pronounced SOH-mah] is used for just the body, but also it is used for a person being alive in time. Translated under those conditions it is translated “in my person.”


Now Paul brings the issue. He has been leaning toward dying. He thought for a while that he was going to be executed by Nero at this time, now he has been told to start leaning the other way.


“wether by life, or by death” – this is the dilemma of his personal interpretation of history. Is it time for him to leave this life and to go to be with the Lord, or should he anticipate staying around for a while longer? What is the Lord’s will for his life? He is ready to go to be with the Lord but is now facing a very serious dilemma. The translation here is correct: eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] zôê (ζωή) [pronounced dzoh-AY]j; diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive of zôê (ζωή) [pronounced dzoh-AY]; eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] is Attic Greek and is translated “either, or.” Then comes diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive of thanatos (θάνατος) [pronounced THAH-nah-toss], which can be translated either “through” or “by.”


Philippians 1:20 According to my intense concentration [on doctrine] and resultant confidence, that in nothing I shall be disgraced, but with integrity [or, spiritual maturity], even now as always, Christ shall be exalted in my person, whether by life, or by death.


Philippians 1:21  For to me, to live is Christ and to die is gain.  (BLB)


Verse 21 – the principle of this verse is: You carry around your own solutions long before you face the problems. This verse is not for new believers. Or for reversionistic believers.


“For” is the explanatory use of the postpositive conjunctive particle gar—”For you see.”


“to me” is a dative of indirect object singular from the emphatic personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—”for me.” This refers to Paul in super-grace. This is also dative of advantage.


“to live” – the articular present active infinitive from the verb zaô (ζάω) [pronounced DZAH-oh]. The articular infinitive is a verbal noun used here as the subject, and when the infinitive is used as a substantive it is translated like a gerund—”For me living.” The noun force of the infinitive is found in the articular use of the infinitive.


“Christ” – Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], predicate nominative indicating occupation with Christ. Occupation with Christ comes in three stages: For the believer who has cracked the maturity barrier and is in super-grace, as a part of his SG2, category #1, he has occupation with Christ—maximum love of the Lord Jesus Christ. He has the capacity to love Jesus Christ who is invisible. Then, in super-grace B he is under the logistical support of Bravo grace, and so occupation with Christ is taken out of SG2 and becomes his logistical support. He is going to be ambushed by friends and loved ones who come out of nowhere as reversionists and try to lead him astray. But when getting into ultra-super-grace occupation with Christ, along with all of these blessings, intensifies to the maximum.


“and” is the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] and should be translated here, “likewise.”


“or by death” – the articular aorist active infinitive of apothnêskô (ἀποθνήσκω) [pronounced op-ohth-NACE-koh]; This is a noun, a substantive, and it should be translated “dying.”


“gain” – predicate nominative, kérdos (κέρδος) [pronounced KER-doss], for great profit or unusual gain. This is a reference to dying grace and the fact that being a mature believer he is going to accrue profit for all eternity after the judgment seat of Christ.


Philippians 1:21 For me living is Christ [occupation with Christ], likewise dying is gain [profit, advantage].


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #25


25 05/27/1976 Philippians 1:22 Doctrine of ultra–supergrace (review)


Two medal of honor recipients.


Jesus Christ controls history, directly, indirectly through laws of divine establishment, and permissively, to allow evil to play out.


Review of the translation of vv. 20–21.


Although this doctrine also comes from 1976 (six month’s later), Bob made a considerable number of changes in this doctrine. This doctrine is covered again in Lesson #102 (02/29/1976) That was actually about 3 months earlier than this doctrine. Ultra supergrace is also a part of the Doctrine of Spiritual Maturity given in Lesson #116. Any important additions will be added here (this doctrine was given at least 3x in 1976).


Doctrine of Ultra-supergrace

11/11/76 (which is the Study of Abraham). There are considerable differences between this doctrine and the one given in Philippians.

A.       Definition and Concept.

          1.       Ultra-supergrace is the most advanced stage of spiritual maturity related to time, history, and the angelic conflict.

          2.       Once the believer breaks the maturity barrier through the daily metabolization of doctrine, he moves into three different spheres of maturity.

                     a.       Supergrace A is a period of rest and relaxation, receiving the basic elements of paragraph supergrace two (although some elements are not received until ultra-supergrace).

                     b.       Supergrace B is the period of crossing no man's land, where the believer receives the greatest attacks by reversionistic believers.

                     c.        Ultra-supergrace is the quintessence of maturity. You face the subtlety of attacks. All of these things are intensified. His contemporaries despised him intensely. They blamed him for everything. Everything is intensified in ultra supergrace.

                                (1)      If a child reaches ultra supergrace, but dies, the parents enjoy their great blessing as a result. Or vice versa.

                                (2)      Might be a gf who survives her ultra supergrace bf (or husband).

                                (3)      Your nation is preserved.

          3.       "Supergrace" is derived from the corrected translation of James 4:6. God gives supergrace.

          4.       In ultra-supergrace, the believer receives maximum opposition from the Satanic forces of evil, which only intensifies supergrace two blessings.

          5.       This opposition is the highest decoration the believer can receive from God is a string of reversionists under the influence of evil, constantly antagonistic, seeking to destroy the ultra supergrace believer.

          6.       The greater the opposition, the more intense the happiness of the supergrace believer. These decorations indicate great future blessings in eternity.

          7.       In ultra supergrace, the believer crosses over no man’s land from supergrace to ultra supergrace.

          8.       Maximum opposition takes place in ultra supergrace; but it is impossible to make an ultra supergrace believer unhappy in any way.

          9.       The highest decoration received by the ultra supergrace are the string of reversionists who are constantly antagonistic toward the ultra supergrace believer.

B.       The Principle and Illustration of Ultra-supergrace, 2Timothy 2:10, 3:8-12.

          1.       The principle of ultra-supergrace is deliverance and eternal glory. Paul would endure all things for the elect.

          2.       The opposition toward Moses is compared with the opposition Paul received in ultra-supergrace.

          3.       Your worst enemies will be fellow believers who have no capacity for anything. He is the lowest creature on the face of the earth.

          4.       The believer in adolescence is very vulnerable to testing.

          5.       Once you break the maturity barrier, you have some R&R. But there will be a point when you cross over no man’s land. Bob has a large, unseen congregation for about ten years, through the tape minister. There have been pastor-teachers they have taken on, but unqualified. Reversionists. Arrogant pastors who are leading them astray.

          6.       For a congregant to go negative, they stop attending Bible class. For a pastor to go bad, he ceases to study.

          7.       Bob waxes eloquently on stainless steel weaponry and a shotgun of Bobby’s (from Lesson #116).

C.       The principle of ultra super grace is found in Philippians 2:12. Be accomplishing your own preservation in danger.

D.       The mature believer in ultra-supergrace must get use to the idea that blessing doesn't always mean lack of pressure, Do not be shocked when people respond to you so negatively. Antagonism merely gives us more blessing. 1Peter 3:12-14, 4:12-14.

E.       The pressure of ultra super grace is found in 1Peter 3:14 you cross no man’s land but then on the other side you have a sudden change. Everything turns to blessing. It is the opposite of everything turn to the unmentionable. In ultra super grace, everything turns to blessing. If you should suffer persecution because of supergrace, happinesses belong to you.

F.       The concept of ultra-supergrace is found in Matthew 5:10-14. Happinesses to the ones [the ultra super grace ones] who have been persecuted for the sake of righteousness [technical for the total fulfillment of spiritual progress] because for them is the kingdom from the heavens [great rewards in phase III]. You [ultra super grace believer] are happy when they heap insult on you. They both persecute and speak all kinds of evil against you, they themselves constantly lying against you on account of the Christ. [No matter what they do, you are still happy.] keep on having this happiness, even becoming extremely happy [stay where you are in ultra super grace] because your reward [paragraph SG3] is great in the heavens for in this manner they have persecuted these ultra super grace prophets before you [you’re not the first, you’re not the last]. [Historical impact:] You [ultra super grace believer] are the salt of the national entity [salt in terms of flavor on society; but also salt in terms of preservation] [the ultra super grace believer is the ultimate in preserving a national entity.] If the salt should become tasteless, useless, how shall it function as a preservative of the nation or as a flavor of society. It is efficient for nothing, either for preservation or for flavor anymore [it is totally useless], except having been cast outside [sin unto death], it is to be trampled down by men [fifth cycle of discipline]. You ultra supergrace believer the light of the world, a city located on the top of a mountain cannot be hidden [the top of the mountain is ultra supergrace status].

G.       The advance to ultra-supergrace is taught in Philippians 3:12-16. This is the press-on passage in order to attain ultra supergrace.

H.       This is a very low point in his nation’s history for Jeremiah because what is taking place nationally. Nebuchadnezzar has come to bring many Jews on the death march (to Babylon?) The intensification of blessing in ultra-supergrace is taught in Lamentations 3:21-25. This I recall to my mind and have confidence in time of historical disaster. The grace expressions of the Lord [that’s logistical grace with emphasis upon bravo grace in crossing no man’s land, that is ultra supergrace] ; the grace expressions of the Lord [logistical grace] are never exhausted; His compassions never fail, they are new every morning. Great is Your faithfulness. The Lord is my portion says my soul, therefore I have confidence in Him. The Lord is good to those who wait for Him, to the soul who will constantly seek Him. Every day is a new day and God provides food, clothing, shelter and Bible doctrine. This is all about logistical grace supply. The two categories of logistical grace are living grace and near grace. We go from zero to spiritual maturity; and we go from one stage of maturity to the next in a similar fashion. In spite of this great disaster, Jeremiah still has confidence and inner happiness. Bob speaks of Jeremiah being taken to both Babylon and Egypt. Maybe Egypt was him missspeaking?

I.        The Eternal Decorations of the Ultra-supergrace Believer.

          1.       The crown or wreath of life, James 1:12 Revelation 2:10.

          2.       The crown of righteousness, 2Timothy 4:7-8.

          3.       The crown of glory, 1Thessalonians 2:19-20 1Peter 5:4 Philippians 4:1.

J.        Historical Illustrations.

          1.       Moses received persecution from his nation, family, unbelievers, believers, and demons.

          2.       Jeremiah received maximum pressure during the fifth cycle of discipline to Judah.

          3.       David was in supergrace B, when he was married to Saul’s daughter. He pawned her off on another man, and even that was a good marriage, blessing by association.

          4.       Paul received maximum opposition from Satanic forces, Acts 19:15. The demons put Paul on a level with Jesus Christ. It would have been profitable for Paul to die; but God has much more for him to do, which included blessing by association to others. Paul was already on the bridge to go into eternity, and God told him that it was not time yet and to get off the bridge. That may be what is being taught in Philippians. For me, living is Christ and dying is gain. When we get to v. 22, Paul will tell us of his dilemma. Paul was enduring all things on behalf of the elect.

          5.       Ultra-supergrace moves us into the area of Romans 8:28. Genesis 50:21 illustrates.

K.       Those who are against you in every way will intensify your blessing; and they will face retribution from God.

L.       Ultra-supergrace is preservation from danger, Philippians 2:12, and the place of deliverance, 2Timothy 2:10.

M.      Logistical grace takes us from salvation to supergrace to ultra supergrace. This involves food and shelter; and in today’s world, transport and modern technology. The branches of Berachah Church who are listening tonite.


There is no advantage to the reversionist who dies. Category #2 love is stronger than death. The reversionist is incapable of category #2 love. If you make an attempt to get out of reversionism, time will be given for you to grow. The sin unto death does not bring glory to God. The dying of the mature believer does. Several points given on dying grace.


Philippians 1:22  But if I am to live in flesh, this is the fruit of labor for me. And what shall I choose? I do not know.  (BLB)


Verse 22 – the dilemma of the mature believer. “But” is an enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], used here as an adversative conjunction to emphasize the contrast between life and death; “if” is a conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] to introduce a first class condition, a supposition from the viewpoint of reality—”if I live,” and the supposition here is a correct one although he will explore the possibility of death.


“I live” is the articular present active infinitive from the verb zaô (ζάω) [pronounced DZAH-oh], used as a noun to repeat the alternative of the previous verse. The first alternative, then, is living. “But since living is Christ” is the way it should be translated. It must be related to the previous verse. We don’t translate ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] as “if” because this is the actual first class condition and it can be legitimately translated “since.” Or, as we might translate it, “But since living in the flesh is Christ,” because we have en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus sarx (σάρξ) [pronounced sarx] —”in the flesh.” This refers to physical life on earth as a mature believer; being in the body.


Paul is about 64 yeares old and it is believed that he died around age 70.


“this” – nominative neuter singular subject from the demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]. This emphasizes phase two being lived in spiritual maturity: “this status of maturity” is the way we could translate it. It is the near demonstrative. The word “is” must be added, though it is not found in the original because we have a predicate nominative singular from karpos (καρπός) [pronounced kahr-POSS]—”fruit” is all right, karpos (καρπός) [pronounced kahr-POSS] does mean fruit in Greek. It also means “result, outcome, profit, gain, advantage.” Here it means “result.” Also, there is the dative singular indirect object from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. “This status of maturity is for me a result.”


“of my labour” – there is no my in the original, it is simply the genitive of possession singular of ergon (ἔργον) [pronounced EHR-gon], used here for accomplishment or achievement. The accomplishment here is grace achievement.


“yet” – the emphatic use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] should be translated “really”; “what” is the accusative neuter singular from the interrogative pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç]. The accusative with this is the direct object of the verb of perception, the present active indicative of gnôrizô (γνωρίζω) [pronounced gnoh-RID-zoh] —”really I do not know what [I am going to decide/do].” “Not” is the negative ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook]. The present tense is a descriptive present to indicate what is now going on. The active voice: the subject is Paul, he produces the action of the verb of not knowing what his preference is between living and dying. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of Paul’s dilemma.


“I shall choose” – future middle indicative of haireô (αἱρέω) [pronounced hai-REH-oh]. The middle voice changes the meaning of haireô (αἱρέω) [pronounced hai-REH-oh] a little. In the middle voice it means to choose or exercise an option, and since the verb connotes selective preference, and since the subject is a dilemma with few possibilities, it is correctly translated “I prefer,” because it is a deliberative future. The deliberative future is used for a question of uncertainty, expressed therefore in the future indicative. The middle voice: the subject is Paul and he participates in the results of the action of the verb as the agent. The direct middle refers the results of the action directly to the agent Paul with reflexive force. The indicative mood is potential, a potential indicative of obligation; it is not declarative.


Philippians 1:22 But since living in the flesh is Christ, this status of maturity is for me a result of grace achievement [accomplishment]. Really, I do not know what I myself prefer.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #26


26 05/27/1976 Philippians 1:23–24 Paul's dilemma; count down to ultra–supergrace



Philippians 1:23  But I am pressed between the two, having the desire to depart and to be with Christ, indeed very much better,  (BLB)


Verse 23 – “For” is the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] which is used here as an emphatic conjunction and translated “In fact.”


“I am in a strait” – present passive indicative from the verb sunechô (συνέχω) [pronounced soon-EKH-oh] [sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] = together with; echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] = to have and to hold]. It means to hold together with, to have the means to hold together, also to hold in custody. But is also has another meaning, especially in the passive voice: to be hard pressed, to receive pressure. To receive pressure in this case from several points. In fact, this is a Greek idiom for a dilemma. “In fact, I am hard pressed from two alternatives” is the real meaning here. It is idiomatic for, “I am hard pressed to choose between the two alternatives.” We also have “betwixt two”: ek (ἐκ) [pronounced ehk] plus the ablative of the definite article plus the ablative of duo (δύο) [pronounced DOO-oh], and it should be translated “from the two”, and it refers to the two alternatives. So sunechô (συνέχω) [pronounced soon-EKH-oh] plus the prepositional phrase is all part of a Greek idiom expressing a dilemma, and expressing the fact that there are two alternatives to be considered. The present tense of sunechô (συνέχω) [pronounced soon-EKH-oh] is a descriptive present for what is now going on—the dilemma. The passive voice: Paul receives the action of the verb—pressure from both sides of the dilemma. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of the dilemma of choosing between going on to ultra-super-grace or going to heaven. He has already indicated his own preference. As far as he is concerned going to heaven is much more important than even going to ultra-super-grace, though ultra-super-grace is the ideal situation in life. Life isn’t so important to Paul, the relationship with the Lord is so great, his occupation with Christ is so important, his love is so important. This is love of a member of the Godhead who is invisible to him; he sees Him who is invisible, and he loves the Lord Jesus Christ much more than he loves life.


“having a desire” – tên (τὴν) [pronounced tayn] epithumian echôn. This includes the present active participle of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh]. The reason we start with this is because of the type of participle we have. This is a causal participle and it is translated “because I have.” The retroactive progressive present denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The active voice: Paul is producing the action in the thinking with regard to his dilemma. Then the accusative of the definite article tên (τὴν) [pronounced tayn] plus epithumian, also in the accusative, and they are the objects of the participle. It should be translated then, “In fact, I am hard pressed to choose between the two alternatives because I have the desire.” The word epithumia (ἐπιθυμία) [pronounced ep-ee-thoo-MEE-ah] means desire.


“to depart” – this is a prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of the definite article plus the articular infinitive. The infinitive is the aorist active infinitive of analuō (ἀναλύω) [pronounced an-al-OO-oh]. This is a reference to dying. The meaning of the verb analuō (ἀναλύω) [pronounced an-al-OO-oh] is very important, it means to weigh anchor, to unloose threads, to strike a tent, to break camp. All of these meanings apply to physical death; all of them apply, in this case, to Paul. He wants to depart from this life. The meanings apply in this way: Paul says, I am ready for the thread to be snapped.” The snapping of the thread is death. Even though this is an aorist active infinitive, neither the aorist nor the active voice have any meaning as far as the verb is concerned because this is, again, the articular infinitive.


To review the concept, in its earliest appearance in the Sanskrit the infinitive had a noun origin. It was not a verb at all. The infinitive is a relic of a declension rather than a conjugation. It represent two primitive noun inflections, the dative and the locative. The voice and tense of the infinitive is not found until as early as Homer. Therefore it is concluded that it originated somewhere along the line in prehistoric Greek. As a noun the infinitive has case relationship and is accompanied by the preposition and the definite article. As a verb it is often without the definite article, and occasionally in the Koine of the New Testament the articular infinitive will have a verbal connotation. The articular infinitive is an Attic idiom, it is Classical Greek and it is, once more, a demonstration of objectivity. Every use of the Attic or Classical Greek in Philippians is a demonstration of objectivity. Paul is very relaxed about this, he is very objective, he has no hang-ups in life, and therefore when he says that he prefers to weigh anchor or strike his tent it isn’t because of some adverse incident or circumstance of life. It has nothing to do with subjectivity, he has no hang-ups of the soul.


“and” is a resultant use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], correctly translated “and so.”


“to be” – present active infinitive of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME], the verb to be. The present tense is a futuristic present for an event which has not yet occurred (his death) but is regarded as so certain in Paul’s thought that he takes it for granted. He thought that he was going to die after the elapse of time in this first Roman imprisonment. It can also be regarded as a static present for a situation taken for granted as a fact. The active voice: Paul produces the action of being with Christ after death. The infinitive is for conceived result which is assumed as a consequence of dying, and is translated literally, “to keep on being.”


“with Christ” – sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] plus the instrumental of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] is translated “together with Christ.” This is anarthrous, i.e. there is no definite article. The absence of the definite article calls attention to the uniqueness of the Lord Jesus Christ, and specifically with the Attic Greek phrase, the articular infinitive, it emphasizes the uniqueness of Christ in the thinking of Paul. While Christ is unique He is not unique in the thinking of many believers. In order for the uniqueness of Christ to be a reality you have to know certain doctrines, they have to be resident in your soul. You have to understand doctrine and then the uniqueness of Christ emerges as a beautiful thing in your soul and as a part of category #1 love. Not all believers understand nor appreciate nor admire the uniqueness of Christ. The absence of the definite article here simply follows the fact that his maximum category #1 love makes him appreciate. To him Christ is unique; it is real, much more real than anything in life. So this is translated: “and so to keep on being together with Christ.”


“which is far better” – this is really not what he says. There is no verb here, it is a triple comparative and this is extremely emphatic—pollô gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] mallon (μλλον) [pronounced MAL-lon] kreisson (κρεσσον) [pronounced KRICE-son]. He considers at this point that dying grace, absent from the body and face to face with the Lord, to be infinitely better than remaining behind for his triumph in life. For the Lord is about to vindicate Paul’s ministry as never before. He is truly in love with the Lord as very few people would be. The word gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] is translated “for.” Pollô is “by means of.” Mallon (μλλον) [pronounced MAL-lon] is “much.” Kreisson (κρεσσον) [pronounced KRICE-son] is “to a greater degree”—”for by means of much to a greater degree better.” It is the idiom which gives the meaning here. This is a perfect illustration of a literal translation of an idiom. It doesn’t mean anything to us in English, we have to know what the idiom is.


Breaking this down: gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] is the explanatory use of the enclitic conjunction—”for,” with the implication that he is referring to the alternative of dying; “for this alternative.” Then the instrumental of measure from polus,pollos (πολύς,πολλός) [pronounced poll-OOS], used to express degree of difference: “by much.” The adverb mallon (μλλον) [pronounced MAL-lon] is a comparative meaning “to a greater degree.” Kreisson (κρεσσον) [pronounced KRICE-son] is a comparative from agathos (ἀγαθός) [pronounced ag-ath-OSS], meaning “better.” This is an idiom meaning, “for it is better by far.”


Philippians 1:23 In fact, I am hard pressed to choose between the two alternatives [of life and death], because I have a desire to weigh anchor, and so to keep on being together with Christ; for this alternative is better by far.


Philippians 1:24  but to remain in the flesh is more necessary for your sake.  (BLB)


Verse 24 – “Nevertheless” is the postpositive conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] [which has a number of translations and uses], used to state the second alternative which is God’s plan and provision for Paul, as well as the means by which the Philippians are going to go as a congregation all the way to ultra-super-grace. Corrected translation: “Yet on the other hand.”


“to abide” – the articular present active infinitive of epiménō (ἐπιμένω) [pronounced ep-ee-MEHN-oh] which means to remain. The present tense is retroactive progressive present, denoting what has happened in the past and continues into the present time: Paul’s continuation in phase two. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb, continuing in time as a part of God’s will and God’s plan for his life. The infinitive denotes God’s purpose, God’s will. It is verbal in its use to denote purpose whereas the previous articular infinitive was substantive in its use to denote the preference of Paul.


In the next five years, Paul will go as far as Spain and southern France. He will be taken by the Romans while in the Balkans. Paul has to write 1Timothy, so that he can guide Timothy while in Ephesus.


“in the flesh” – sarx (σάρξ) [pronounced sarx] means flesh all right; it also means body. But it also means “in person”—en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of sarx (σάρξ) [pronounced sarx].


“more needful” – the comparative predicate nominative singular from anankaîos (ἀναγκαος) [pronounced an-ang-KAH-yoss], which means “more necessary”; “for you” – diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative of the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] which means “because of you all.” Paul must remain alive lead them to ultra-super-grace. His focus has to do with the original recipients of this epistle, the Philippians. It is necessary for Paul’s ministry to reach a triumphal climax, a procession through the ancient world where the setting aside of all of his enemies, the total neutralization of all of those who have tried to destroy his ministry, can occur.


Philippians 1:24 Yet on the other hand to remain in my body [in person] is more necessary for your sake.


Closing Points on Paul

1.       Not one can exceed the growth of its pastor. But Paul makes it possible for his many churches to go to ultra supergrace.

2.       A reversionistic pastor cannot lead anyone.

3.       A baby pastor can only evangelize his congregation over and over again. He can teach them small bits of legalism and morality, but he cannot lead them to supergrace.

4.       An adolescent pastor cannot lead his flock past his own growth, so he will be a legalistic pastor leading a church of legalistic congregants. This explains the present condition of fundamentalism.

5.       A supergrace A pastor can lead his congregation to the perimeter of supergrace. Supergrace A is the first stage of glorification of Jesus Christ. Supergrace B is glorification of Jesus Christ. And ultra supergrace is glorification of Christ.

6.       There were 11 remaining disciples and became 11 Apostles. They had an election at the ascension and voted for a replacement for Judas. But God chose Paul. There are many reasons to think that Peter and John moved to ultra supergrace. There will be a century of people going through the entire countdown from supergrace A, to supergrace B to ultra supergrace. 3-2-1 zoom.

7.       From a.d. 96 to a.d. 192. At that point, Doctrine had the maximum impact.

8.       Paul was on 3-2- and then he wanted to go home. God said, get off that bridge. God decided the Nero and Paul will die within a few months of each other. God needs Paul on earth to bring so many more people to supergrace. Paul had to live and he needs to continue in this life.

9.       The pastor-teacher can lead his congregation to supergrace.

10.     A supergrace pastor-teacher can lead his congregation to the edge of supergrace.

11.     An ultra supergrace pastor can lead his congregation to maximum growth.

12.     Paul will live to ultra supergrace and he will lead the greatest countdown in history.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #27


27 05/30/1976 Philippians 1:25–27a Paul, logistical provision to ultra–supergrace


There are symbols of salvation like the cross, the fish, the steeple. I think where he was going with this was the symbol of our freedom, the military uniform.


It is a national holiday, Memorial Day. Bob has the military types stand. All of our services are represented; and this is why we are able to assemble and to grow in grace.


People have the freedom to reject Jesus Christ and not be persecuted either.


We have seen the pressure put on the Apostle Paul.


Philippians 1:25  And having been persuaded of this, I know that I will remain and will continue with all of you for your progress and joy of the faith,  (BLB)


Verse 25 – Paul is the logistical provision for the attainment of ultra-super-grace. It is Paul who leads the way. There has to be a leader at a crisis period in history, and this one leader has now emerged.


“And having this confidence” includes the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] which introduces a result which comes from what precedes. Under this use we translated the conjunction “And so”; plus the accusative neuter singular direct object from the demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]. This is the immediate demonstrative used to designate a thought relatively near in actuality. With it is the perfect active participle of peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh], an important verb because it means to obey in the present tense, and in the aorist tense; and obedience in certain areas of the spiritual realm finally comes to mean strong faith. In the perfect tense it means to have what very few people in life really have, and that is total and complete confidence on a day by day and moment by moment basis. This word here means to have confidence. We have a causal participle, and so we translate it “since having confidence.” We have a consummative perfect tense. The perfect is the concept of a completed action and this use does not have the emphasis on existing results so much as a process which has occurred and is now being consummated. It is a reference to the fact that a process has occurred with Paul: he has GAPed it, he has recovered from his Jerusalem reversionism, he has cracked the maturity barrier. Therefore the consummative perfect is not merely the process but a consummative process of glorifying Jesus Christ to the maximum. God is now preparing Paul for departing from Rome and having a five-year plus triumphal procession through the ancient world, strengthening churches, leading congregations to ultra-super-grace and evangelizing Spain. Then active voice: Paul, after the process of doctrinal application, has produced the action of completing a process of thought resulting in his present confidence. “And so having this confidence [in this principle of doctrine].”


“I know” – the perfect of oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da] used as a present tense for the frame of reference of the right lobe. This is the perfective present denoting the continuation of existing results. Paul is producing the action. The indicative mood is historical reality as well as the main verb related to the participle. Paul has confidence; he has knowledge. When you have confidence through entering this stage of maturity you also have knowledge of doctrine, and your knowledge is used to correctly interpret contemporary history. He is on the right side of history, he thoroughly understands the issue, and he now completely understands why he must remain alive even though he chooses to depart from this world.


“that” is the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] used after verbs of perception to indicate the content of Paul’s conclusion; “I shall remain” – future active indicative from the verb ménô (μένω) [pronounced MEH-noh], which means to remain or abide, to stay, to continue. This is a predictive future. Paul realizes that he is going to stay alive and therefore he is, in effect, saying so. The active voice: Paul produces the action by remaining in phase two to complete his mission, his triumphal procession as an ultra-super-grace believer and to lead others into the same status. The indicative mood is declarative for relating his life to history in a very dogmatic way of confidence.


“and continue” – the future active indicative of paramenô (παραμένω) [pronounced par-am-EHN-oh]. This is very strong, ménô (μένω) [pronounced MEH-noh] followed by a compound of ménô (μένω) [pronounced MEH-noh], paramenô (παραμένω) [pronounced par-am-EHN-oh] [para (παρά) [pronounced paw-RAW] = beside; ménô (μένω) [pronounced MEH-noh] = to continue]. It simply means here to continue beside life rather than going to be with the Lord. This is a progressive future, however, and enotes the idea of progress in future time. The active voice: Paul produces the action. The indicative mood: he has correctly interpreted history, he has correctly evaluated contemporary events, he has his finger on the pulse of history, and he realizes his own relationship to it as he now moves into the ultra-super-grace status.


“with you all” – the instrumental plural of association from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], and with it the pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] “with all of you.” Specifically the Philippian church is going to be the key, it is made up of super-grace believers. Because the Philippians and others need to advance to ultra-super-grace Paul must continue in phase two. Therefore it will be almost six years before he sees the Lord face to face through physical death. This association means that Paul is personally going to come back to Philippi and teach them so that they will go into ultra-super-grace.


“for the furtherance” – a prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative from prokopê (προκοπή) [pronounced prok-op-AY]. This does not really mean furtherance, it means progress.


No man’s thinking has changed more things in human history than Paul and his epistles.


Paul has still to write the pastoral epistles.


“and the joy of faith” – the connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ], the accusative singular direct object of the preposition chara (χαρά) [pronounced khahr-AH] [eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus chara (χαρά) [pronounced khahr-AH]] which is +H. This is one of the category #2 blessings of paragraph SG2—”and your inner happiness.” Then an ablative singular of source from pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs]. Pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs] does mean faith but that is one of three different meanings. It means what is believed or doctrine, and that is the meaning here—”from the source of doctrine.” Remember that all happiness in life for the believer, since the day he was born again, must be associated with doctrine. As doctrine is associated with your soul you relate yourself to life and have great capacity for life and blessing.


Philippians 1:25 And so since having confidence [in this principle of doctrine], I know that I shall remain [in phase two] and be continuing in association with all of you [Philippians] for the purpose of your advance and inner happiness from doctrine.


That is only the first half of the sentence which he continues in verse 26.


Philippians 1:26  so that through my coming to you again your boasting in me may abound to Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


God keeps some believers alive in order to set them against other believers in their periphery. No matter what, God has a purpose for our lives. For some us to advance; and for others to trip up other believers.


Africa is the key right now. Chrome is necessary for so many things and it is found mostly in Africa.


Verse 26 – “That” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which introduces a final clause. A final clause means purpose, goal, objective, and it is a reminder to each one of us that as long as we live on this earth God has a purpose for our lives.


“your rejoicing” – this is not the word rejoicing at all, this is the Greek word kaúchēma (καύχημα) [pronounced KOW-khay-mah] and it means “boasting.” It also has another meaning. In addition to what is said in boasting it means the object of boasting, it means glorying, but here it does mean boasting, boasting without pride. So kaúchēma (καύχημα) [pronounced KOW-khay-mah] has to connotations: boasting plus pride and minus pride. Here it means boasting in the sense of stating a confidence in a time of uncertainty. But historical uncertainties do not change the confidence of any believer in super-grace/maturity. So boasting here refers to confidence and it does not refer to the sinful type boasting which is a manifestation of pride. With this is the possessive genitive plural from the pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. This is the boasting of the mature believers at Philippi. They are right behind the apostle Paul, therefore they have a confidence which comes from doctrine in their souls as Paul has confidence from doctrine in his soul.


“may be more abundant” – present active subjunctive from the verb perisseuô (περισσεύω) [pronounced per-iss-SUE-oh] which means to abound or to overflow. This is a retroactive progressive present denoting what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The confidence or boasting has abounded in the past and continues to abound as the Philippians look to Paul to lead them to the final objective. The active voice: the Philippian confidence in Paul as a communicator of doctrine produces the action of the verb. No one ever advances spiritually apart from his own right communicator. The present tense is retroactive progressive present denoting what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The confidence or boasting has abounded in the past and it must continue. The active voice: Philippian confidence in Paul as a communicator of doctrine produces the action. The subjunctive mood with hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] denotes purpose, objective and goal. It is God’s purpose that Paul remains for five plus years.


“in Christ Jesus” – this denotes the sphere of confidence. You first discover that confidence is a part of the Christian way of life when you discover, after salvation, that you have received 36 things at salvation, one of which is being entered into union with Christ. This is the beginning of understanding your confidence—positional sanctification.


Note that the subjunctive mood not only denotes a purpose but is a potential subjunctive indicating the fact that this is only true for those who follow their right pastor day by day in the function of GAP, until the objective is achieved.


“for me” is incorrect, it is en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] and it should be translated “by means of me.” Here is Paul recognizing the purpose for remaining alive. They can’t make it without Paul’s teaching. Paul in his doctrinal teaching is not only the means of taking the Philippians to maturity but it is the means of countless generations of believers going through the same procedure toward the objective.


“by my coming to you again” – diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive of the definite article, plus the possessive genitive of an adjective emos (ἐμός) [pronounced ehm-OSS], and also by the genitive object of diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] which is parousía (παρουσία) [pronounced par-oo-SEE-ah], the word for coming or being present—”through my return to you again.” There is a second prepositional phrase, prós (πρός) [pronounced pross] plus the accusative plural of su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. The word “again” is the adverb palin (πάλιν) [pronounced PAL-in], used to denote the return to a previous activity.


Philippians 1:26 That your confident glorying in Christ Jesus may abound by means of me through my return once more, face to face with you.


Principle

1.       Paul anticipates a personal return to Philippi and having the privilege of leading many of them to ultra-super-grace.

2.       It is concluded, therefore, that both Paul and the pastor, Epaphroditus, will be involved in the final countdown of getting the Philippians to the objective.

3.       Obviously Paul must remain in phase two to attain ultra-super-grace himself and to lead others in the same direction.

4.       No greater responsibility has ever been entrusted to a member of the royal family of God than the communication of Bible doctrine, so that believers can grow in grace.

5.       No greater honour can be conferred on a male believer than to possess the spiritual gift of pastor-teacher to which God has chosen to provide for the spiritual advance of every believer.

6.       There is no spiritual progress from doctrine apart from its communication by a right pastor.

7.       The spiritual gift carries the greatest responsibility in both preparation and execution.

8.       Execution carries the greatest responsibility of faithfulness to God in the function of studying and communicating. Therefore Paul begins to see a pattern in why he must remain. This responsibility requires the most in self-discipline, dedication, understanding the job profile of the pastor-teacher as located in the Word of God.


Philippians 1:27  Only conduct yourselves worthily of the gospel of Christ, so that, whether having come and having seen you, or being absent, I might hear the things concerning you, that you are standing firm in one spirit, striving together with one mind for the faith of the gospel,  (BLB)


Verse 27 – “Only” is a neuter adjective monon from monos (μόνος) [pronounced MON-oss]. It is used as an adverb limiting the action of the one designated by the verb. So it is translated “Only.”


“let your conversation” – the present middle imperative from the verb politeúomai (πολιτεύομαι) [pronounced pol-it-YOO-om-ahee] which means to have one’s citizenship or to have one’s home in a specific area. It means also to rule or to govern a state, to live or conduct one’s life in a certain manner, to lead one’s life. To discharge one’s obligations as citizens. Neither here nor in Acts 21 does the word contain any reference, however, to life in society as such. There are no political implications of the word in either place, it simply involves the New Testament usage of the verb which means to lead one’s life or to discharge personal responsibility in life. “Only lead your life” is a better translation. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs or may reasonably be expected to occur among those who are advancing to maturity. The middle voice is the indirect middle stressing the agent as producing the action rather than participating in the results of the action. This is a command—imperative mood. The degree of authority invoked in the command and the degree of probability that the recipient will respond or obey is incidental to this mood. Degrees of probability are found in the indicative and subjunctive moods. The original authority was the apostle Paul as the human writer in giving this command. However, the apostleship gives Paul the authority and the power to transmit for a permanent record, a command not only to the Philippians but to us today. “Only conduct your life as royal family of God” is the command here.


“as it becometh” is the adverb axíōs (ἀξίως) [pronounced ax-EE-oce] meaning “worthy of”—”in a manner worthy of.”


“the gospel of Christ” – euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on], descriptive genitive which means good news—”the good news doctrines of the Christ.” This does not refer to the gospel of salvation only but is much more extensive. Here it refers to any portions of the Word of God dealing with the royal family and advance to maturity, spiritual growth.


Principle of v. 27 so far

1.       It is good news that doctrine resident in the soul carries the believer to the objective of maturity.

2.       It is good news that reaching maturity is the manner worthy of such doctrine.

3.       It is good news that Christ is glorified in time by the attainment of spiritual maturity.

4.       It is good news that such glorification of Christ is accompanied by fantastic blessings. The countdown 3-2-1 zoom.

5.       There is only one way to go in the Christian life and that is forward.

6.       All believers should be offensively minded. Hence, in effect, what we have here is the command to attack, and that means thrust forward, advance.

7.       This is accomplished in only one way—the daily function of GAP, the daily intake of spiritual food. The believer must take the high ground of spiritual maturity.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #28


28 05/30/1976 Philippians 1:27b Doctrine of faith (review)


Philippians 1:27  Only conduct yourselves worthily of the gospel of Christ, so that, whether having come and having seen you, or being absent, I might hear the things concerning you, that you are standing firm in one spirit, striving together with one mind for the faith of the gospel,  (BLB)


“that” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which introduces a final clause. A final clause denotes a purpose, an objective, a goal, an aim in life. It is translated here, “in order that.”


Then we have Classical Greek again, the repetition of eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh], eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh], “whether, or.” They state the two alternatives of Paul’s ministry to the Philippians. With this is the aorist active participle from érchomai (ἔρχομαι) [pronounced AIR-khoh-my] which means to come or to go. Here it means to come. This is a constative aorist which indicates Paul’s personal presence in Philippi to teach Bible doctrine. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb in face to face teaching. The participle is circumstantial.


“and see you” – another aorist active participle, this time from the verb horaô (ὁράω) [pronounced hoh-RAW-oh]. Horaô (ὁράω) [pronounced hoh-RAW-oh] connotes a panoramic view and is consistent with Paul teaching the Philippians over a period of time. Again, we have a constative aorist tense which gathers into one entirety Paul’s face to face teaching with the Philippians. The active voice: Paul produces the action by personally visiting them. Again, the participle is circumstantial. Plus the accusative plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] referring to a very special congregation. This is translated, “whether I come and see you.”


The second alternative is for Paul to be absent. Again there is eíte (εἴτε) [pronounced I-teh] introducing the alternative. This time we have the present active participle from ápeimi (ἄπειμι) [pronounced AP-i-mee] which means to remain absent, not to be absent. This is a perfective present tense, it denotes a continuation of existing results, i.e. Paul’s continued absence from a face to face situation. Active voice: Paul produces the action. And again, it is a circumstantial participle. It is translated, “or remain absent.”


Now having presented the alternatives, both of which have existed with the Philippians congregation, he now amplifies that regardless of whether he is absent or present there should be no retrograde movement of any kind. There should be no retreat under any circumstances. They should have enough stability so that they can stand fast or advance, but definitely not retreat. No withdrawing action is enjoined.


“I may hear” – present active subjunctive from the verb akoúô (ἀκούω) [pronounced ah-KOO-oh]. This verb in the present tense is futuristic. The futuristic present is one in which the action of hearing hasn’t occurred yet but is regarded as so certain as to be coming to pass. Paul will receive a report. In effect, that is what this verb deals with: he will receive information regarding them. Active voice: Paul produces the action of receiving reports. The subjunctive mood is potential, it implies a future reference, it is qualified by the element of contingency.


“of your affairs” – a Classical Greek idiom, ta (τά) [pronounced taw] peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE] humôn (ὑμν) [pronounced hoo-MONE] plus the genitive plural of the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. It is literally, ta (τά) [pronounced taw] (τά) [pronounced taw] = the things; peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE] = concerning; humôn (ὑμν) [pronounced hoo-MONE] = you. This is an idiom for status quo—”that I may hear about your status quo.”


“that ye stand fast” – the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] after verbs of hearing to denote the content, or what is heard regarding the status quo, and the present active indicative of the verb stêkô (στήκω) [pronounced STAY-koh], a verb formed on a verb. It is formed from the perfect tense of the verb histêmi (ἵστημι) [pronounced HIHS-tay-mee], which means to stand (among other meanings). It is found only in the New Testament and it is a late Koine word. It means to stand fast, to be stabilized. This is a retroactive progressive present, it denotes what has happened in the past and continues into the present time—present tense of duration. There is no excuse for withdrawal or any retrograde movement. The active voice: the Philippians in maturity produce the action. The verb implies reaching super-grace status and remaining there. The indicative mood is declarative for verbal action from the viewpoint of historical reality, i.e. the Philippians are going to reach ultra-super-grace and they are going to stand fast.


“in one spirit” – when you are under heavy fire there are certain procedures that should characterize a veteran organization like the Philippians congregation. We have the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental from the numeral heís,mia,hen (εἵς,μία,ἕν) [pronounced hice,Mee-ah,ehn], and with it the instrumental of pneuma (πνεμα) [pronounced PNYOO-mah]—”by means of one and the same Spirit.” Heís,mia,hen (εἵς,μία,ἕν) [pronounced hice,Mee-ah,ehn] is an emphatic numeral meaning “one and the same.” This is a reference to God the Holy Spirit whose ministry continues and intensifies in the mature believer. This is the balance of residency: the filling of the Holy Spirit plus maximum doctrine resident in the soul equals experiential sanctification.


“with one mind” – the locative of sphere from the numeral heís,mia,hen (εἵς,μία,ἕν) [pronounced hice,Mee-ah,ehn] plus psuchê (ψυχή) [pronounced psoo-KHAY], generally translated soul but sometimes means life—”in one and the same soul.” The locative of sphere is in a metaphorical use of the locative case. The limits suggested here are logical rather than special or temporal. The locative case has special and temporal limitations. Here they are logical limitations, therefore one idea is confined within the bounds of another idea by this particular use of the locative. It indicates the sphere into which the former idea is applied. The ministry of the Holy Spirit to the ultra-super-grace believer is applied to the sphere of the soul. You grow up in the soul, the key to your life is the soul, everything in life that is important is the soul. The soul contains your scale of values, your priorities are there. God the Holy Spirit, when He controls your life, fills the soul. All of there things, therefore, must pertain to the soul.


“striving together” – bad translation. This is the present active participle from the compound verb sunathléō (συναθλέω) [pronounced soon-ath-LEH-oh] [sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] = together with; athléō (ἀθλέω) [pronounced ath-LEH-oh] = to engage in competition or conflict]. It means to play as a member of a team in athletics but it also means to fight as a member of a highly-skilled and professional organization and to do your job in such an excellent professional manner, along with everyone else, that the team operates together. This is a causal participle. A causal participle denotes what is the ground of the action of the main verb. It is translated, “since you have joined in the conflict.” The present tense is a historical present, it views the past event with the vividness of a present occurrence. Active voice: the mature Philippians congregation are producing the action of the verb. They have entered into the conflict.


“for the faith” – instrumental of means from both the definite article and the noun pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs], and pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs] here refers to faith rather than the usual meaning which is doctrine—”by means of the faith.”


“of the gospel” – the objective genitive singular from the noun euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on] and it refers here to the gospel—”in the gospel.” It indicates the means by which Paul and the Philippians entered the angelic conflict.


This doctrine is pretty close to what Bob taught in this lesson. It has a number of additional points.


The Doctrine of Faith

1.       Definition. There is no such thing as blind faith, all faith has an object which can be seen by the individual. Blind faith is a meaningless phrase that people have dug up. Faith is never blind, it is always looking at an object. The object it sees and trusts in may be good or may be bad but it is there. It is an object. So faith is a non meritorious system of perception in contrast to rationalism and empiricism which are meritorious systems of perception. it is the non meritorious system that counts - faith; when the object is Christ, when the object is Bible doctrine.

2.       Greek etymology. There are five words that have almost the same base.

          a.       Pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs] - it has an active meaning and a passive meaning. The active meaning means faith, faithful, or reliable. The passive meaning: what is believed or doctrine. The body of doctrine. So pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs] means both faith and doctrine, the context determines. It is used technically in the New Testament epistles for doctrine resident in the soul.

          b.       Pistós (πιστός) [pronounced pis-TOSS], an adjective. It means dependable, inspiring trust, believing.

          c.        Pisteúô (πιστεύω) [pronounced pis-TOO-oh], a verb. It means to believe, to be convinced of something or someone.

          d.       Pistow means to show one's self faithful, to feel confidence in something.

          e.       Peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh], a verb. Different meanings depending upon the tense. In the present tense it means to obey. In the aorist tense it means to believe. In the perfect tense it means to have confidence.

3.       Hebrew etymology. There are ten of them.

          a.       Amen, which is used in Genesis 15:6 and means to use something as a foundation, to use God as a prop or a foundation is the meaning in the hiphil. Its use in Genesis 15:6 is where Abraham's salvation is declared. Abraham believed in the Lord and it was credited to his account for righteousness.

          b.       this root there are five other Hebrew words:

          c.        Emun, a noun which means faithfulness.

          d.       Emunah, a feminine noun which means truth or steadiness.

          e.       Amen, meaning truth.

          f.        Omen, another noun, very close to Amen, which means faithfulness or dependability.

          g.       Bâţach (בָּטַח) [pronounced baw-TAHKH], a wrestler's term for a body slam, used for the faith-rest technique - Psalm 37:3; 91:2, etc.

          h.       Chasah - a rabbit is being chased by a wolf and the rabbit runs into a little crack in the rock and the wolf can't get to him. So obviously this means to hide in the cleft of a rock and take refuge from danger.

          i.         Jachal, found in Job 13:15 - "Though he slay me, yet will I trust in him." This means to trust God in pain, in pressure, or in disaster. It is used in Lamentation 3:21,24.

          j.         Qawah, represents a little string that you can snap by grabbing it with your hands and pulling. You can break it. But when you wrap that little thread into a great rope then it can't be broken. So it means to weave the thread of our life, easily broken in itself, into a great rope which cannot be broken. It means to bind or twist the strands together, it is the strongest word for faith and is generally mistranslated "wait" - like "they that wait upon the Lord shall renew their strength."

4.       Some biblical definitions of faith as far as the word is concerned which means having revelation about the unseen and believing that revelation, as in Hebrews 11:1 or 2Corinthians 4:18.

5.       The grammar of the verb. Grammatically the verb to believe is a transitive verb. A transitive verb is one that has a subject and has an object. The object is either implied or stated. This means that whenever we believe in something there is an object. When we believe in Christ there is the unique object, the only saviour, Jesus Christ Himself. Since faith is non meritorious perception the whole value or efficacy of faith lies in its object. For salvation, if you believe in Christ you have eternal life. So the point is, there is only one saviour, Jesus Christ.

6.       Classification of the objects of faith. The plan of God is divided into three parts: phase one, salvation; phase two, the believer in time; phase three, the believer in eternity. Faith is only involved in phases one and two. In eternity we will see Him even as we are seen, we will know Him even as we are known. In phase one the object of faith is Jesus Christ the only saviour - Acts 16:31. In phase two the object of faith is the Word of God or Bible doctrine - 2Corinthians 5:7; Hebrews 4:1-3; 11:6.

7.       The concept of faith.

          a.       All the believing in the world secures nothing but condemnation from God.

          b.       However, the tiniest bit of faith in Christ secures eternal salvation.

          c.        Therefore the efficacy of faith lies in the object of faith. For salvation, Jesus Christ; for spiritual growth, Bible doctrine.

          d.       Since Christ did all the work for salvation on the cross the only way we can respond when the work is already finished is to believe because that is the only non meritorious system of perception.

          e.       Therefore faith is nothing we do but a channel whereby we appropriate what God has done for us.

8.       After salvation faith develops in at least five ways.

          a.       The primary development of faith is the balance of residency in the soul. The Holy Spirit indwells the body of every believers. That is the escutcheon of the royal family of God. We start out with the filling of the Spirit. We lose it periodically when we sin. We rebound and we recover it. But we start out minus doctrine and this minus must become a plus. Therefore the first key to developing faith is the intake of Bible doctrine - Romans 10:17, "Faith cometh by hearing, and hearing by the word of God."

          b.       A second way of developing faith is the filling of the Spirit. However, the filling of the Spirit only produces faith as it has doctrine resident in the soul - Galatians 5:22, "The fruit of the Spirit is faith."

                     i.         These two together form the function of GAP and the spiritual exercise which is necessary for temporal sanctification. The filling of the Spirit plus the daily function of GAP resulting in doctrine in the soul = experiential sanctification. Once you are in progress - the filling of the Spirit plus the function of GAP - it is going to be tested. You are going to have tests in your life. It is just like the filling of the Spirit and the function of GAP is nourishment. We eat and we have energy and are mostly very well nourished, but nourishment produces energy and energy must be used in exercise. Even though you eat and eat you do not get big and strong, you get big and fat! Therefore it is important to exercise, to take nourishment and through the channel of exercise produce something that is presentable.

          c.        The function of the faith-rest technique. How do we put muscle on our faith? How do we develop spiritual muscle? We take the doctrine we have learned and use it in pressure, use it in adversity, use it in some disaster situation. This is called the faith-rest technique - Hebrews 4:1-3. We find the charge of the flea and we shoot down fleas with scripture - when we start. Every time a flea charges us we whack him down with the Word of God. We don't know much yet, that is why our calibre is only for shooting fleas.

          d.       The testing that comes as we take in large amounts of doctrine. But as we begin to take in more doctrine and take in more doctrine then we get some real tests - the charge of the elephant. To knock the elephant down we have to have a large calibre. When the real test comes it takes the big chunk of doctrine to knock these disasters down. So we have 1Peter 1:7,8.

          e.       The principle of occupation with Christ is the final manner in which we face every exigency of life and demonstrate the greatest possible power. This is the principle that belongs to the supergrace believer only - Hebrews 12:2. This is maximum faith, faith in its greatest power.

9.       The victory of faith - 1John 5:4,5. The utilization of doctrine in the soul under supergrace status is found in Romans 4:17-21. Here is the amalgamation of non meritorious positive volition with Bible doctrine provided for us by God in eternity past and recorded under the ministry of God the Holy Spirit to human writers in time.


Philippians 1:27 Only conduct your life as royal family of God in a manner worthy of the good news doctrines of the Christ; in order that whether I come and see you, or remain absent, I may hear about your status quo, that you are standing fast by means of one and the same Spirit [the Holy Spirit indwelling and filling], in the sphere of one and the same soul since you have joined in the conflict by means of faith in the gospel.


Vv. 20–27 read.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #29


29 05/31/1976 Philippians 1:28–30 Enemies & countdown suffering of supergrace believer


30May is the actual Memorial Day. The guy who led the raid on Pearl Harbor and he since believed in Jesus and met with Bob at the previous auditorium. From Pearl Harbor to Calvary by Mitsuo Fuchida (I think).


Reading of all Philippians 1.


3-2-1 zoom supergrace A to supergrace B to ultra supergrace.


Now it is time to discover who are your enemies. This is what happens when you get into super-grace. You have the discernment to know who are your enemies and who are not your enemies. For all of those around you who are friendly are not always your friends. Friendliness and friendship are two entirely different entities. But there is one thing of which you must be very wary: while you will be ambushed out in super-grace B on numerous occasions you are never to be bitter or hateful, or even to hate your enemies. You should know your enemies. In a five paragraph field order, one is about you learning about your enemy.


We have a perfectly written five paragraph field order, and this particular section is, know your enemies. You are professional. You do not hate your enemies, they are simply objects to be wiped out. This is done without any emotional involvement at all.


Your enemies are often lovely, sweet believers, who have a holy vocabulary. You need to recognize your enemies so that you are not ambushed by them. You must not hate your enemies, but you must be wary of your enemies.


At some point the pressures on them are overwhelming because they do not have the same priorities.


There is always someone sitting around, not to advance, but to ambush.


Philippians 1:28  ...and not being frightened in anything by those opposing you, which is a demonstration of destruction to them, but of salvation to you—and this from God.  (BLB)


Verse 28 - “And in nothing be terrified.” The first word is the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ], used as an adverb and should be translated “Likewise.” Then a prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative neuter adjective mêdeis (μηδείς) [pronounced may-DICE] -literally, “in the sphere of not one thing,” or to reduce it to good English, “in no way.” There is a negative mê (μή) [pronounced may] here plus the present passive participle from pturō (πτύρω) [pronounced PTOO-ro]. It is used for a frightened horse running away. It comes to mean to be intimidated. Panic is stupidity and lack of thought, action without thinking and without application of doctrine. The present tense is an iterative present describing what occurs at certain intervals. It is known as the present of repeated action. This is talking about the believer in super-grace where ambushes occur and where distraction from doctrine is challenged to the utmost. The passive voice: the believer receives the action of the verb-panic or intimidation from ignorance of reversionism-and with the negative mê (μή) [pronounced may] it is a command not to be intimidated, for this is the participial use of the imperative and it should be translated, “Likewise in no way be intimidated.”


“by your adversaries” - hupó (ὑπό) [pronounced hoop-OH] plus the ablative of agency of the definite article, and the ablative of agency or means of implicating a present active participle; in other words, an articular participle. It is the definite article in the ablative of means that gives us the meaning of hupó (ὑπό) [pronounced hoop-OH]. When the ablative of means is used it indicates the origin or source of means, which is a present active participle antíkeimai (ἀντίκειμαι) [pronounced an-TIHK-ī-mahee]. It means to be opposed, to be in opposition to, to be an enemy of. But with the articular use of the participle here we have a noun and it is correctly translated “by your enemies.”


The question arises: who are your enemies? First of all, Satan is your enemy. As the ruler of this world he is your very definite enemy because you have now arrived at super-grace. Satan commands a great host of demons. These are all angels, super creatures as compared to us, and this is our invisible enemy—Hebrews 10:13. Unbelievers also are our enemies, they are under the influence of evil which is the Satanic policy and produces evil deeds. But the worst enemy and the most obvious visible enemy is the born again believer in a state of reversionism. He is described as King Saul in 1Samuel 28:16, indicating that Saul was the enemy of God. The reversionistic believer is always the enemy of God—James 4:4. Believers by their own volition appoint themselves the enemy of God. To be a lover of the world is nothing more or less second or any other place below #1 to Bible doctrine. So this passage is really warning about the least obvious to us but the most obvious from the standpoint of God Himself—the reversionistic believer. These are the ones who are the greatest and most subtle enemies, the ones who are constantly ambushing you in super-grace. A good empale of this is King Saul, as the enemy of both David and Samuel. “The Lord has departed from you and He has become your enemy.” Saul became the enemy of God even though, at one time, he was on the cusp of spiritual maturity. James 4:4 Whoever had decided to be a lover of the world has appointed himself as an enemy of God...they are the enemies of the cross of Christ. The reversionistic believer may be your friend of your family, but they are out there to ambush you.


“which is” the nominative feminine singular from the qualitative relative pronoun hostis (ὅστις) [pronounced HOHS-tiss], indicating persons belonging to a certain category or a certain class. It emphasizes a certain quality they have which is reversionism under the influence of evil. The verb to be here is the present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The present tense is pictorial, it presents to the mind a picture of events in the process of occurrence. The active voice: intimidation or panic produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is potential, expressing the fact that this only occurs to those who are qualified to have such enemies, those who have cracked the maturity barrier.


“to them” – dative plural indirect object from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], which emphasizes the identity of those reversionistic believers who are antagonistic toward those believers in super-grace.


“an evident token” – the is a predicate nominative and we have again Attic or Classical Greek. The noun is éndeixis (ἔνδειξις) [pronounced EHN-dike-sis] which means an omen or a proof. Here it means proof.


“of perdition” – not exactly. Perdition here means a successful ambush. This is a descriptive genitive singular from apôleia (ἀπώλεια) [pronounced ap-OH-li-a], and while it does mean destruction in the analogy the words with which it is used means a successful ambush—“which is a proof of their success in the ambush.”


“but to you” – the adversative use of the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] plus the adverbial genitive of reference from the personal pronoun su—“but with reference to you.”


“of salvation” – descriptive genitive from sôtêria (σωτηρία) [pronounced soh-tay-REE-ah], meaning deliverance.


“Which [panic] is to them [the reversionistic believer ambushing you] a proof of a successful ambush, but with reference to you deliverance.”


So if you panic they assume they have won; if you don’t you are obviously going to be delivered.


“and that” is the emphatic use of the conjunctive particle kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the nominative neuter singular from the immediate demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], meaning “in fact this [deliverance].”


Then comes an implied present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]—“is,” and apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] plus the ablative of source from theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]—“from the source of God.”


Philippians 1:28 Likewise in no way be intimidated [or, panic] by your enemies; which [panic] is to them a proof of your destruction [successful ambush], but with reference to you deliverance; in fact this deliverance is from the source of God.


That is the warning that there are enemies. The final phrases deal with the battlefield itself—verses 29 & 30.


Philippians 1:29  For it has been granted to you concerning Christ, not only to believe in Him but also to suffer concerning Him,  (BLB)


Verse 29 – the first word hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] cannot be translated “For.” It is a causal use of the conjunction and should be translated “Because.” Because you are in super-grace.


“to you” – dative plural indirect object from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] referring to the Philippians who are in super-grace.


“it is given” – aorist passive indicative from charizomai (χαρίζομαι) [pronounced khar-ID-zohm-ahee], as strong a word as we have for giving, it means to give on a grace basis, to give graciously, to give without strings, to give freely as a favour from God. The constative aorist tense here gathers into one entirety the action of the verb. Passive voice: the believers receive the action. The indicative mood is declarative for an absolute fact that these people are in super-grace and therefore under these conditions.


“in the behalf of Christ” – the accusative neuter singular of the definite article to. This is the generic use of the definite article with the prepositional phrase to distinguish the super-grace believer from other members of the royal family of God, and therefore it isn’t translated. It is simply a distinguishing particle which shows these people are unique. People who are in this battlefield and in this type of situation are coming very close to the final objective of ultra-super-grace. Therefore a definite article is thrown in to distinguish them simply from other believers. Then, hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] plus the ablative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]—“in behalf of Christ.” The definite article is not translatable in this case.


“not only to believe in him” – the negative ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook] plus the adverb monon, the neuter of monos (μόνος) [pronounced MON-oss], an adjective made into an adverb—“not only.” Next is the repetition of the accusative neuter singular definite article as a device employed for emphasis in which the article functions with more than ordinary force. It is translated, “it is not necessary.” Then eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], meaning a very strong principle that salvation comes only by faith in Christ, and the present active infinitive of pisteúô (πιστεύω) [pronounced pis-TOO-oh], which is the way of salvation. This is a historical present, is views the past event when you believed in Christ, faith in Christ, with the vividness of a present occurrence. This is the infinitive of actual result.


“but also” – allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] kaí (καί) [pronounced ]; allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] is the strong adversative conjunction setting up a contrast between being saved and going all the way to super-grace. kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is the adjunctive use, “also.” Then we have a repetition of the definite article used for emphasis again, but not translated, plus hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] plus the ablative of autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], the intensive pronoun which always emphasizes something very important; here it emphasizes Christ as indicated in the present active infinitive of paschô/pathô/penthô (πάσχω/πάθω/πένθω) [pronounced PAHS-khoh/PATH-oh/PEHN-thoh],, which refers to suffering. It is intensified suffering but it is suffering with blessing in super-grace. This is a static present, it assumes a consequence of reaching super-grace B. The infinitive is a conceived result assumed as a consequence of reaching super-grace.


Philippians 1:29 Because it has been given to you in behalf of Christ, not only to believe in him, but also to suffer in behalf of Him.


Philippians 1:30  having the same conflict such as you saw in me and now hear of in me.  (BLB)


In ultra supergrace, you receive the maximum accolades. Being such a high honor means there must be some preparation for it. Before this last step, you go through a real barrage of suffering. This is the final stage of suffering prior to ultra supergrace.


Verse 30 – “Having” is a present active participle from echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] which means to have or to hold, or both. This is a present tense of duration, it denotes what has begun in the past and continues right into the present time. It continues into the present time with these people who are just about to go into ultra-super-grace. The active voice: the believer in super-grace produces the action of the verb. The participle is a causal participle, translated “Since you have.”


“the same conflict” – accusative singular direct object from the definite article, the accusative singular direct object from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. This is the attributive use of the intensive pronoun and it is translated “the same.” The intensive pronoun emphasizes the identity of the point of the conflict—“Since you have that same conflict.” There are others out on that same battlefield.


Deserved suffering is divine discipline. Punishment for carnality, suffering for reversionism. There is suffering through national discipline. Variety of suffering, suffering from war, suffering from revolution. Suffering to demonstrate the sufficiency of grace. All of the kinds of suffering named here; but what is happening here is sharing the sufferings of Christ, which occurs only in the countdown. 2 to 1, getting ready for zoom. You are not suffering with Christ on the cross, but you are suffering similar to His suffering during His life.


“which ye saw” – Paul has already advanced over that same ground. We have the accusative singular from the relative pronoun hoios (οος) [pronounced HOY-oss] —“such as,” a correlative use of the relative pronoun. Plus the aorist active indicative of horaô (ὁράω) [pronounced hoh-RAW-oh]—“you have seen.” The only way they could see this was to be right behind Paul in his advance. The constative aorist contemplates the action of super-grace pressure in its entirety. The active voice: the Philippians are in super-grace, right behind Paul, and are therefore experiencing the same conflict that he is. The indicative mood is declarative for historical reality of tactical pressure from Satanic forces of evil at this stage of advance.


“in me” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. Since they are following him they see it and experience it at the same time.


“and now” – the connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the adverb nun (νν) [pronounced noon] referring to the moment of the writing of Philippians; “hear” – present active indicative of the verb akoúô (ἀκούω) [pronounced ah-KOO-oh]. They will hear this when they get the epistle, which will be taught by Epaphroditus. The present tense is an aoristic present for punctiliar action in present time. The active voice: the Philippians will produce the action by functioning under the principle of GAP with regard to this epistle. The indicative mood is declarative for historical reality.


“in me” is en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—“through me.”


Philippians 1:30 Since you have the same conflict such as you have seen in me, and now hear through me.


Ephesians and Colossians are for 3 in the countdown; 2 is Philippians; and the pastoral epistles are for 1 and 2Timothy is for zoom.


Bicentennial series begins tomorrow night 06/1/1976 That bicentennial series is the Assyrian Crisis.


 

[1] See the Doctrine of Sanctification.

[2] See the Doctrine of Memory

[3] See the Doctrine of prayer

[4] See the Doctrine of Human Good

[5] See the Doctrine of Positional Truth

[6] See the Doctrine of Witnessing

[7] See the Doctrine of Jealousy

[8] See the Doctrine of Motivation

[9] See the Doctrine of Pride



I am not sure what these Genesis lessons are doing here. I won’t listen to them here or provide notes.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #30


30 01/19/1976 Genesis 4:5b Nine concepts of anger (1975 Genesis #33)


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #31


31 05/10/1976 Genesis 4:21–22 Evil based on emotion (1975 Genesis #45)


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #32


32 05/24/1976 Genesis 4:23b–24 Rebuilding pride; distortion of law (1975 Genesis #47)


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #33


33 03/17/1976 Philippians 2:1a Doctrine of category #1 love


Recognition of .


Saint Patrick was a Scotsman, not an Irishman; and he was not a Catholic; he was a born again believer. The greatest evangelist in history was Patrick. He was taken by Irish pirates as a slave. He escaped back to Scotland, then was born again, and then he realized that he should return to Ireland to evangelize them.


This should be celebrated with the tartan.


Chapter 2 (which was covered before chapter 1)


The title of this chapter is occupation with Christ. The outline is four simple paragraphs.


Chapter Division

Paragraph one: The function of occupation with Christ, verses 1-4.

Paragraph two: The object of occupation with Christ, verse 5-11.

Paragraph three: Progress of occupation with Christ—the advance to ultra-super-grace, verses 12-16.

Paragraph four: Three illustrations of occupation with Christ, verses 17-30.


Christ's Example of Humility


Philippians 2:1  Therefore if there is any encouragement in Christ, if any comfort of love, if any fellowship of the Spirit, if any affections and compassions,  (BLB)


Verse 1 – “If” is a conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I], it introduces the protasis of a first class condition. The conditional clause is divided into two parts. The first part, the “if” clause is called the protasis, and the following clause is called the apodasis. The conditional clause, then, becomes very important for the interpretation of the Scripture. The part contained in the protasis is called supposition, which is why it begins with the word “if.” The second part of the clause containing the statement based on the supposition is called apodasis. Conditional clauses are classified on the basis of the attitude they express toward reality. This is a first class condition, and the protasis of the first class condition presents supposition from the viewpoint of reality—if and it is true. The second class condition is the condition of unreality—if and it is not true. The third class condition is the potentiality—if, maybe yes and maybe no. The fourth class condition expresses a desire in the probability—if, I wish it were true but it isn’t. All of the “ifs” found in verse 1 are statements of reality, even though they appear to be some form of a potential. The way in which the first class condition is identified in the Greek is simply by the particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I]—any tense, any mood in the protasis.


“therefore” – the words there be in the KJV is certainly implied but it is not in the actual text. “If therefore” – the inferential particle oun (ον) [pronounced oon] is the next word, it connotes an inference from what has preceded, namely a short dissertation on ultra-super-grace given in chapter one, verses 28-30.


It was better for Paul to go to ultra supergrace and lead the Philippians and others further in their spiritual growth.


Philippians 1:28 In no way be intimidated by your enemies; which is to them a public proof of your neutralization [in the angelic conflict] [any believer who is intimidated in no man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace has been neutralized and he is moving into reversionism] but to you deliverance and this deliverance from the source of God.


This same deliverance comes out in chapter 2:12 Wherefore, my beloved, as you have always obeyed in my presence but now much more in my absence, accomplish your deliverance with occupation with Christ (which is the occupation with the living word]


Philippians 1:29 Because to you it has been graciously given, not only to believe on Him but also to suffer for His sake.


This suffering takes place in ultra supergrace, where all suffering intensifies the blessing.


Two categories of logistical support. The first category is alpha grace, which takes the believer from zero to maturity. This is how all believers crack alpha grace. Everything that it takes to keep us alive and everything to takes us to Bible doctrine, all of this is accomplished under alpha grace. Then he has an R & R; and then he moves out into ultra supergrace. To be supported or sustained in this intensified arena is bravo grace, to take you from supergrace to ultra supergrace.


This is mentioned into our first four conditional statements. This is all about bravo grace and how we need it to be sustained.


“any consolation in Christ” – this phrase includes an enclitic indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç] (which is anything but indefinite), plus the nominative singular subject from the noun paraklêsis (παράκλησις) [pronounced par-AK-lay-sis]. It does mean consolation, however consolation has changed its meaning since the translator used it in this passage. More up to date and in keeping with the Greek word is the English word “encouragement.” The encouragement comes from the divine logistical support between super-grace and ultra-super-grace. “Therefore if there is any type of encouragement”—and there is. The phrase “in Christ” is very important—en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], used for the point of salvation where logistical support begins for the believer. This phrase portrays the principle of the baptism of the Holy Spirit whereby the believer is entered into union with Christ, the means of the formation of the royal family of God. We cannot change our union with Christ. Union with Christ is the basis for logistical support in time. This is the great encouragement which was designed in eternity past, a part of the divine decrees. God is obligated by His own plan of grace to provide, to sustain, to plan for the royal family of God.


Then comes a second “if” – a conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] introducing a second protasis of a first class condition; “any comfort” – this includes, again, the indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç], which means any type of comfort; and with that is the nominative subject paramuthion (παραμύθιον) [pronounced par-am-OO-thee-on], which means encouragement, especially alleviation or consolation—“if there is any consolation.” Then comes the ablative singular of source from the noun agápē (ἀγάπη) [pronounced ag-AH-pay]—“from love,” that is, occupation with Christ and a relaxed mental attitude. The word for love here is referring to category #1 type of love, the principle of occupation with Christ which provides encouragement. The relaxed mental attitude from doctrine is a part of the contribution of category #1 love, logistical support from God.


Category One Love

3/17/76

A.       Definition.

          1.       Love comes in four categories for the royal family:

                     a.       Category one is toward God.

                     b.       Category two is toward right man or right woman.

                     c.        Category three is toward friends.

                     d.       Category four is "loving the brethren" or impersonal love.

          2.       Category one love is the believer's capacity to love God and to respond to God's love based on Bible doctrine in his soul.

          3.       Category one love is maximum when the believer reaches maturity or occupation with Christ.

          4.       The command to have category one love is found in Deuteronomy 6:5, 11:13, 10:12. Apart from the daily function of GAP, it is impossible to love God, Hebrews 12:2.

B.       The Means of Category One Love.

          1.       Since God is invisible and the object of category one love, we must see and love Him through doctrine in the soul. We can only see God and love Him through His Word.

          2.       The reversionist doesn't love God because he is under Satan's policy of evil.

          3.       The immature believer doesn't love God because he too lacks Bible doctrine in the soul.

          4.       You cannot love God unless you know God, and you cannot know God unless you have metabolized enough pertinent doctrine, 1Peter 1:8, Ephesians 3:18-19, Hebrews 6:10, 2Timothy 1:13-14 Retain the standard of sound words [doctrinal teachings] which you have heard from me in the sphere of doctrine and love, which are in Christ Jesus. Guard through the Holy Spirit Who dwells in us the deposit of doctrine which has been entrusted to you. , Colossians 3:1-2. Category one love is the most difficult love of all, because it takes consistency in the inhale and exhale of doctrine.

C.       Category one love sets up the standard for grace, Psalm 119:132 Turn to Me and be gracious, according to the standard by which you are gracious to those who love your person. , Psalm 31:23 Love the Lord, all you, His supergrace ones, the Lord preserves the faithful but He fully pays off in discipline the arrogant doers [the reversionists] . You have to have capacity to be grace oriented.

D.       Category one love is the basis for supergrace blessing, 1Corinthians 2:9 But just as it stands written, things that the eye has not seen and the ear has not heard [empiricism] and it has not entered into the right lobe of man [rationalism] for all that God has prepared for those who love Him [alpha supergrace believers, bravo supergrace believers and the ultra supergrace believers]. Psalm 37:4-5 Delight yourself also in the Lord [this is used for amorous behavior for human beings], therefore He will give you the desires of your right lobe; commit your way to the Lord, trust also in Him and he will do it beyond your fondest imagination.

E.       Category one love is the basis for personal and national blessing, Deuteronomy 30:15-20. Behold, I have set forth before you, life and prosperity [supergrace blessing or ultra supergrace blessing] or death and despair [discipline for reversionism] [attitude toward doctrine determines which] when I command you today to love the Lord your God [occupation with Christ] to walk in His way, both to keep His commandments [codex #1] and His statutes [codex #2] and His judgments [codex #3] in order that you may live and multiply and in order that the Lord God may bless you [paragraph SG2] while you are in the land, where you are entering to possess it. By loving the Lord your God and by obeying His voice [doctrine] and by holding fast to Him [the function of gap] for this is your life, the length of your days in order that you live in the land that your Lord promised to your ancestors, Abraham, Isaac and Jacob.

F.       Category one love motivates combat courage and military victory, Joshua 23:10-11 One man [a supergrace blessing or an ultra supergrace believer] puts to flight a thousand enemy soldiers for the Lord your God is He Who fights for you just as He promised He would, so take careful heed to yourselves to love the Lord your God. This is fulfilled in alpha supergrace, bravo supergrace or ultra supergrace.

G.       Category one love provides strength for adversity and pressure, Hebrews 11:27 By means of doctrine resident in his soul, Moses gave up the throne of Egypt, not being afraid of the anger of the king [Thutmose III] for you see, he became strong under pressure [ultra supergrace] as long as he kept seeing the Invisible One [occupation with Christ]. , 12:3.

H.       There is a special curse on believers who fail to have category one love in 1Corinthians 16:22 If anyone does not love the Lord [that refers to all reversionists] let him be anathema maranatha [which is an Aramaic phrase "cursed until the Lord comes."]. They are said to be "cursed until the Lord comes."

I.        Witnessing must be motivated by category one love and not by showing off. 2Corinthians 5:14 The love of Christ controls us, having concluded this that one died for all.

J.        The Description of Category One Love, 1John 4:15-19 Whoever acknowledges that Jesus is the Son of God, God abides in him and he in God and we have come to know and believe the love that God has for us [demonstrated through propitiation] God is love and the one who abides in love abides in God and God abides in him. By this, love has been perfected with us that we may have confidence in the day of our efficiency ratings [the judgment seat of Christ] because, as He is, so also are we in the world [when He was in the world, He progressed all the wa to ultra supergrace] there is no fear in love, but perfect love [lov in ultra supergrace] casts out fear [eliminates fear because fear begets punishment] and the one who fears is not perfected in love We love Him because He first loved us. The mature believer isn't afraid of anything. God the Father expects you to love God the Son as much as He does. That is the divine standard, but it is only possible through the enabling power of the Holy Spirit inside the divine dynasphere.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #34


34 03/18/1976 Philippians 2:1b Torture; doctrine of spirituality


Admiral Stockdale, tortured in North Vietnam. Medal of honor citation. When he returned to the United States, he quoted Sophocles. Third man to be awarded the medal of honor for resisting torture.


We are studying the logistical support which begins at point zero. This is alpha grace or living grace.


Spiritual gift believer who is in R & R; and then the supergrace believer who moves out onto no man’s land.


The great uniform of the resurrection body. These bodies will wear decorations. There is a wreath under the translation stephanos (crown). This is the highest decoration. The alpha cross, the crown of righteousness. 2Timothy 4:7–8 I have fought that fight, I have completed the course [dying grace] I have retained or guarded or preserved the doctrine resident in my soul. In the future [phase III], a crown of dikaiosunê [total fulfillment of spiritual progress in the attainment of spiritual maturity] is reserved for me, which the Lord, the righteous evaluator, will aware me on that day [which is the Judgment Seat of Christ where every believer receives his efficiency rating]. And not only me, but also to all those who have loved Him at His appearance [occupation with Christ in time].


A pastor cannot lead his congregation beyond his own stage of growth. A pastor with no spiritual growth can only evangelize his congregation over and over again. He can only proclaim the gospel to saved people. A reversionistic pastor can only mislead his people. An adolescent pastor can only take his people to adolescence. A supergrace pastor can lead his congregation to supergrace; and he can lead them up to where he is.


The pastor grows negative toward doctrine when they stop studying. For others, the cares of this life are too much and it drags them down. The congregation stops growing when they stop going to Bible class. No one grows outside of the strict academic discipline of the local church. No spiritual growth in any other entity other than a local church; or by praying. All legitimate production comes about as the result of spiritual growth.


The ultra cross,the crown of glory, for the pastor who leads believers with positive volition to maximum spiritual growth. The motivation is found in Philippians 2:13.


The pastor who leads his congregation to supergrace, he gets the oak leaf cluster. He receives the alpha cross, the bravo cross, ultra cross, which is the crown of glory.


Philippians 2:1a Therefore, if there is any encouragement in Christ (and there is); if there is any comfort from love [both a relaxed mental attitude and ];...


The third “if” in this verse is a conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] introducing the third part of the protasis of the first class condition. This is a supposition from the viewpoint of reality.


“any” is an indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç]. It is not indefinite, it has a specific category in mind; “fellowship” – the nominative singular subject from the noun koinônia (κοινωνία) [pronounced koi-nohn-EE-ah], which means here “partnership”—“if there is any partnership.”


“of the Spirit” is a genitive of relationship from the noun pneuma (πνεμα) [pronounced PNYOO-mah], a reference here to God the Holy Spirit—“with the Spirit.” Partnership with the Spirit is the result of being filled with the Spirit on the part of the advancing believer.[1]


There are two doctrines of spirituality from NB1 and NB2. Neither match with Bob’s teaching here, but portions of these two doctrines are close. The first doctrine began to match up pretty closely with Bob’s notes.


The Doctrine of Spirituality

1.       At salvation, God the Holy Spirit does five things.

          a.       Regeneration. This means that God the Holy Spirit is the agent by which we are born into the family of God - John 3:1-16; Titus 3:5. This is the ministry that God the Holy Spirit has always had with every person who has ever been saved, the only difference being that in the Age of the Gentiles and the Age of Israel - skipping the Church Age - in the Tribulation, and in the Millennium, this is the only ministry of the Holy Spirit at salvation. In the Church Age He also has four other ministries and these all occur simultaneously.

                     i.         First, there is common grace, where the Holy Spirit makes the gospel real to the unbeliever.

                     ii.        The unbeliever does not understand the things of the Spirit. This is why it is necessary.

          b.       The baptism of the Spirit - Acts 1:5; 1Corinthians 12:13. This is the ministry by which He enters us into union with the Lord Jesus Christ. This ministry is absolutely unique, this is the ministry whereby we become royal family of God. This is the ministry by which we live in the palace forever, it is not something we experience, it is something God the Holy Spirit did for us at salvation. We live in there palace forever.

          c.        The sealing ministry of the Holy Spirit. This is security for royalty. We have two kinds of security as believers. This is alpha grace. We have security from salvation itself: we can't lose our salvation. We have security in our royalty: we can't lose our royalty forever and ever. We are sealed by God the Holy Spirit - 2Corinthians 1:22; Ephesians 1:13; 4:30.

          d.       The Holy Spirit gives each one of us a spiritual gift at the point of salvation - 1Corinthians 12:11. Every believer has a spiritual gift. It doesn't mean that you have to know it or understand it, unless it is a communication gift which demands preparation. Generally speaking when you are filled with the Spirit and grow up your gift functions without your cognisance, whatever it is. This give cohesion and function to the royal family.

          e.       What is pertinent to our subject is the indwelling of the Holy Spirit at the point of salvation - Romans 8:9; 1Corinthians 6:19,20. This is the sign of royalty. This is the first time in human history when this occurs. The Bible never commands a believer to be indwelt by the Spirit. This takes place at salvation and it continues no matter what your status. God the Holy Spirit will always indwell your body, whether you are under alpha, bravo or charley grace. The soul of the believer is the battleground of the angelic conflict. Evil is the genius of Satan and the plan of Satan. If you are controlled by doctrine, you are a progressing believer. If your life is controlled by evil, you are in one of the eight stages of reversionism.

2.       A distinction must be made between the salvation and the post-salvation ministry of the Holy Spirit. We are to be filled with the Spirit or walking in the Spirit or walking in the light or being a partaker of the din essence.

3.       Spirituality and carnality are mutually exclusive, therefore absolutes in phase two. Light and dark are mutually exclusive, says 1John 1:7; 2:10, and so it is with carnality and spirituality. They are mutually exclusive - 1John 3:4-9. John calls walking in the light the filling of the Spirit; walking in darkness, carnality. It is an either/or situation. Again, the moment you believe in Christ you enter into union with Christ forever. Your positional sanctification is your badge of royalty but you also have the indwelling and filling of the Holy Spirit. Sin makes you carnal; rebound puts you back in fellowship. 1John 1:6 2:11

4.       Imitation becomes one of the great issues of spirituality in phase two. Spirituality is the imitation of God - 2Corinthians 3:3 Ephesians 5:1 2Peter 1:4 - whereas carnality and reversionism is the imitation of the unbeliever - 1Corinthians 3:3 Galatians 5:19-21 1John 1:6. So believers either imitate the unbeliever or they imitate God, they never imitate themselves.

5.       Spirituality is a function of the royal priesthood, therefore it is not subject to the Mosaic law of the Levitical priesthood. The Levitical priesthood function under the Mosaic law and functioned to the nation Israel. But now we have a royal priesthood which is not authorised by the law, it is authorised by God Himself and under the new covenant we have the statement of it and so it is not subject to the Levitical priesthood, it is not subject to the Mosaic law - Romans 8:2-4 10:4 13:8 Galatians 5:18.

6.       In keeping with partnership in the divine essence through the filling of the Spirit (2Peter 1:4) spirituality produces the character of the incarnate Christ - Galatians 4:19 cf. 5:22,23; 2Peter 1:4; 1John 2:5,6. In other words, the filling of the Spirit produces the character of Christ, the personality of Christ.

7.       The general objective of spirituality and/or the filling of the Spirit is

          a.       Partnership with divine essence - 2Peter 1:4

          b.       Imitation of God - Ephesians 5:1

          c.        Glorification of Christ - John 7:39 16:14 1Corinthians 6:19,20 The Holy Spirit glorifies Jesus Christ; NOT Himself.

          d.       Fulfilment of the Mosaic law - Romans 8:2-4

          e.       Proper function of GAP - John 14:26 16:12-14 1Corinthians 2:9-16.

8.       Spirituality is lost through carnality but recovered through the rebound technique of 1John 1:9. The principle is stated in Proverbs 1:23.

9.       The results of spirituality.

          a.       Christ is magnified in the inner life - Ephesians 3:16,17 2Corinthians 3:3 Philippians 1:20,21.

          b.       The perception of doctrine - John 14:26 16:12-14 1Corinthians 2:9-16 1John 2:27.

          c.        Effective witnessing - Acts 1:8 2Corinthians 3. Do not cry, do not push, do not sell it like selling soap.

          d.       Guidance and assurance in phase two - Romans 8:14-16.

          e.       True worship - John 4:24 Philippians 3:3.

          f.        Effective prayer - Ephesians 6:18.

          g.       Helping the carnal or reversionistic believer to rebound - Galatians 6:1.

10.     Spirituality is the source of divine good - 1Corinthians 3:16. Divine good is the believer's decorations in eternity - 1Corinthians 3:12-14. Human good, produced in carnality or reversionism, is destroyed at the judgement seat of Christ because no member of the royal family of God can be contaminated by human good in eternity - 1Corinthians 3:12,15.

11.     Nomenclature for spirituality. Positive nomenclature: Walk in the Spirit - Galatians 5:16; Walk in the light - 1John 1:7. Negative nomenclature: Quench not the Spirit - 1 Thessalonians 5:19, the production of human good; Grieve not the Spirit - Ephesians 4:30, the production of personal sins.

12.     Emotion or ecstatics does not characterize spirituality in the Church Age - 2Corinthians 6:11,12 Romans 16:17,18. When the Holy Spirit controls the life He does not produce ecstatics.

          a.       Only in the Millennial dispensation does ecstatics characterize the filling of the Spirit.

          b.       In the Church Age the believer represents the absent Christ in the devil's world, therefore no ecstatics.

          c.        However, in the Millennium the believer filled with the Spirit appreciates the present Christ, therefore ecstatics.

          d.       Believers in the Millennium are also indwelt by the Spirit - Ezekiel 36:27 37:14 Jeremiah 31:33 Joel 2:28,29..

          e.       Believers in the Millennium are filled with the Spirit - Isaiah 29:19 32:15 44:3 Ezekiel 39:29 Zechariah 12:10.

          f.        Ecstatics characterizes spirituality in the Millennium because of the personal presence of Christ - Joel 2:28,29.

13.     The royal family is in partnership with the Holy Spirit - Philippians 2:2.

14.     Confidence regarding the filing of the Spirit comes from knowledge of pertinent doctrine - 1John 3:20,21.

15.     The clarification of the means and results in spirituality: the power, the means of that power, and the results. The power is the indwelling Holy Spirit. The means of having Him control the life is the rebound technique. The result is yieldedness to the plan of God and the will of God at any or every point.

16.     Pseudo-spirituality: the things that are used as substitutes for the filling of the Spirit or spirituality by grace.

          a.       Spirituality by yielding. This system assumes that the believer is spiritual because of something he does such as yielding himself or dedicating himself to God, doing a certain amount of praying or witnessing or giving. This is putting the cart before the horse because yieldedness of Romans 6:13,19 12:1 is the state of being filled with the Spirit and therefore positive toward doctrine. No one has ever been filled with the Spirit by yielding.

          b.       Spirituality by personality imitation. This consists of imitating some believer whom you admire, associating some superficial mannerism with spirituality. Every believer must learn to distinguish between spirituality and personality. Spirituality comes one way - the filling of the Spirit. The Bible never emphasizes changing your nasty personality! Using certain speech patterns or spiritual sayings. Do not imitate facial expressions. Things like God willing, or if the rapture does not take place.

          c.        Spirituality by self-crucifixion. This system of pseudo spirituality is closely related to the above. It originates from a false interpretation of Romans 6 whereby the believer claims spirituality by virtue of crucifying self. However, ego never cancels ego; self cannot crucify self. Self is crucified by the principle of retroactive positional truth. The believer is identified with Christ in His death. In His death He bore our sins from the area of weakness of the old sin nature but He rejected human good. By being identified with Christ positionally we have rejected human good and that is what self-crucifixion is all about. It is simply the rejection of human good through identification with Christ on the cross. It is not a system of spirituality. So self is crucified by the principle of retroactive positional truth whereby the believer becomes dead to human good through the baptism of the Spirit.

          d.       Spirituality by tabooism.

                     i.         A taboo is a prohibition set up by a religious or social group. Here a taboo is forbidden activity but by our definition a forbidden activity not forbidden by the Word of God.

                     ii.        Therefore taboos are legalistic superimpositions on the Word of God.

                     iii.       Taboos are customs of legalistic and religious or self-righteous types of believers in groups.

                     iv.       Basic taboos of fundamentalism include the following: don't drink, don't dance, don't smoke, don't play with cards, don't go to movies.

                     v.        In addition, certain taboos related to geographical locations - no use of cosmetics by the ladies, never go swimming in the same swimming hole with the girls.

                     vi.       The principle: Anything the unbeliever can do is not the Christian way of life. Whatever God has commanded you to do is something that no unbeliever can ever do.

                     vii.      The Christian way of life is a supernatural way of life executed by supernatural means, i.e. the filling of the Spirit, GAPing it to supergrace.

                     viii.     No two believers have attained the same degree of growth in phase two. That is the big problem and why people come along with taboos.

                     ix.       Consequently the immature do not handle taboos in the same manner as adult believers. Spiritual maturity will eventually force out the truly objectionable things. A mature believer will recognize that a young believer is having problems and therefore does not make an issue of what he does. The self-righteous, legalistic people want to make an issue out of everything.

                     x.        Legalistic bullying and/or the imposition of taboos on new believers always has one of two results: response or reaction. Under response the acceptance of the bullying always results in converting the new believer into a legalistic hypocritical individual. Then there is the reaction to this which is rejection of the taboos, resulting in conflict, bitterness, disillusion. Here is where many new believers immediately enter into reversionism. They react, they think the whole Christian life is just giving up a lot of things and having no fun. So making an issue out of the taboos is to destroy the whole concept of spirituality. xi) There is a bona fide place for the observation of taboos: 1. The application of superseding law. There is a time when the law of love, the law of expediency or the law of supreme sacrifice causes you to discontinue something you are doing because of the importance of the spiritual growth or blessing of others. Then, certain things are given up as a result of growth and this is a bona fide give-up situation.

          e.       Spirituality by relativity. This says I'm spiritual because my sins are more refined and more respectable than your sins. In this comparison a subtle type of sinfulness is compared to an obvious shocking type of sinfulness, resulting in false rationalization. Included in this notion is the delusion that there are degrees of spirituality. There are degrees of growth but not in spirituality. Any sin, regardless of its category, puts a believer out of fellowship, results in loss of the filling of the Spirit; and no believer can be carnal and spiritual at the same time, therefore the importance of rebound.

          f.        Spirituality by ecstatics - the function of the holy rollers. It is known as the monopoly of the emotional - I'm spiritual because I have some kind of ecstatic or stimulating experience. Believers evaluate Christian experience by how they feel rather than by what the Bible says. The emotion of the soul is not the criterion for either salvation or spirituality. There is no such thing as feeling saved or feeling spiritual.

          g.       Spirituality by ritualism. I'm spiritual because I observe certain rituals of the church, such as baptism or the Eucharist, or the observance of "Lent," etc.

          h.       Program spirituality. I'm spiritual because I conform to the program of the local church, because of my attendance, my giving, because I participate in prayer meetings, because I teach Sunday school, etc. The problem here is obvious. Action has been substituted for the learning of doctrine, everyone must be put to work, and this becomes mass negative volition toward Bible doctrine in the local church. This system always caters to approbation lust, power lust, it ignores the fact that even a right thing done in a wrong way in the energy of the flesh is wrong. The Word of God demands that a right thing be done in a right way.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #35


35 03/23/1976 Philippians 2:1c Review; report on Rhodesia and South Africa


People are investing money in the United States because there is nowhere else where life is prosperous.


A review of each word already covered. The pastor-teacher must know the original languages in order to determine what is there. The gift of pastor-teacher is the only gift that allows for understanding and interpretation.


There is a big difference between modern Greek and the Koine Greek.


If you are a zero believer, you cannot quote Philippians 1:21. This is only the testimony of someone who has broken the maturity barrier. Similarly, Romans 8:28.


If a lot of believers don’t getup to 100, we are not going to make it as a nation. Bob is going to bring a lot of things to our attention during this bicentennial.


You don’t need face to face teaching in order to grow up. Bob has been able in the last 90 days to thin out the ranks.


 “if any bowels” – this is not a reference to anything physiological, it refers to something in the soul: splagchnon (σπλάγχνον) [pronounced SPLANGKH-non] = emotions. This word is never used in the New Testament for that physiological portion of the anatomy called “bowels.” It is emotion responding to something which has the highest priority: doctrine in the right lobe. When emotion responds to doctrine—doctrine which the believer has in his own soul— it supports the believer. When a woman responds to a man she supports the man; when the emotion of the soul of a believer responds to doctrine it supports the believer— “if there is any emotional response to doctrine [and there is].” A responding woman supports a man; and a woman who does not respond can tear up the man. Doctrine in the soul, and the man responds it it. That is growth.


“and mercies” – oiktirmós (οἰκτιρμός) [pronounced oyk-tir-MOSS] means compassion, grace in action and therefore mercy. It is in the plural and should be translated “and resultant mercies [or grace in action].”


Philippians 2:1 Therefore if there is any encouragement in Christ [and there is], if there is any comfort from love [occupation with Christ; and there is], if there is any partnership with the Holy Spirit [and there is], if there is any emotional response to doctrine and resultant mercies [grace function in action; and there is].


The apodasis deals with the principle of occupation with Christ in verse 2. Occupation with Christ and sharing God’s happiness are two sides of the same coin.





1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #36


36 03/24/1976 Philippians 2:2a Solzhenitsyn; doctrine of happiness (revised)


Quotes from Solzhenitsyn.


V. 1 is a four-part protasis in a conditional statement.


Theoretically, one can lose ultra supergrace, but unlikely that will happen.


Ultra supergrace believer leaves divine blessing behind for those who had interactions with this person. It only takes a few ultra supergrace believers to save a nation. +H changes the person’s character as he goes from supergrace A to supergrace B to ultra supergrace. Never in our history have we needed more ultra supergrace believers.


Bob is intolerant of people who think they have heard this all before. Teaching involves repetition.


We are going to see a lot of occupation with Christ and +H. The Philippians were the one congregation following Paul. Paul’s ultra supergrace books are the pastoral epistles.


Philippians 2:2  ...fulfill my joy so that you may be of the same mind, having the same love, united in soul, minding the same thing,  (BLB)


Verse 2 – the command. “Fulfil ye” – aorist active imperative of the verb plêroô (πληρόω) [pronounced play-ROH-oh]. It generally means to fill up, to make full, to complete, to finish, to bring to an end. Here it means to bring to completion, and it is a challenge to move toward the final objective—ultra-super-grace. This is the command to get out into the most intensive battlefield in the angelic conflict, the no-man’s land between super-grace and ultra-super-grace. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist which views the event of crossing no-man’s land in its entirety but looks at it from the standpoint of its existing results. The active voice: the super-grace believer is commanded to produce the action of the verb. The imperative mood is a command to all super-grace believers to move out of the periphery and advance. Reason: If you stay too long in the perimeter of super-grace you will start to go backwards. If you are not moving forward you are going to start moving backwards.


Sometimes God takes the life of a supergrace believer because he might break out of the perimeter and go backward. Under this circumstance, you are able to hold onto maximum blessings.


Philippians is important because it is a book written to a mature congregation.


“my joy” – accusative singular direct object from chara (χαρά) [pronounced khahr-AH], used here for God’s perfect happiness or +H. With it is the possessive genitive singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. Egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] in the possessive genitive is saying in effect, ‘Follow me’—‘my +H’, and he is referring to it not as the blessing of paragraph SG2, which it is, but as logistical support as he moves across no-man’s land. This suggests that Paul was in supergrace B and was encouraging the Philippians to follow him.


Principle: Bring to completion my happiness

1.       Divine happiness in the believer is intensified at the ultra-super-grace attainment.

2.       This is a command to the super-grace believer to advance to the next objective—ultra-super-grace.

3.       +H is not only the blessing of super-grace but is also the logistical support for the super-grace believer crossing no-man’s land.

4.       +H, along with occupation with Christ, is the key to advancing to ultra super-grace; it is the basic principle of support.[2]


This does not match either doctrine of happiness which I have.


Doctrine of Happiness

1.       Perspective of divine happiness: God has always had happiness and we cannot make God unhappy. God wants to share His happiness with us. On one side of the coin is occupation with Christ; on the other side is possession of the happiness of God. God can make us unhappy; we cannot make God unhappy. Divine happiness is the other side of occupation with Christ.

2.       Three stages of maturity.

          a.       Supergrace A, Rest and recreation of maturity comes after the achievement of supergrace A. God gives us some time to enjoy it.

          b.       Supergrace B, advancing through no man’s land to the final destination. Crossing no man’s land.

          c.        ultra supergrace.

3.       Each stage of maturity has a corresponding usage for God’s happiness or +H.

          a.       Supergrace A and receives grace paragraph.

          b.       +H becomes the logistical grace support of the believer under the concept of bravo grace. This takes us from supergrace to ultra supergrace. Saddles up and moves across no man’s land, which is where there are many dangers and pressures.

          c.        Ultra supergrace intensifies happiness. You need to identify your right pastor-teacher and stick with him. You cannot pout with +H.

          d.       +H is intensified in ultra supergrace. Some of the opposition is unseen; and the ultra supergrace believer might have Satan after him. Also subject to attacks by reversionistic believers.

          e.       Pressure and adversity to the ultra supergrace believer intensifies his happiness; and increases their misery.

4.       Three kinds of happiness in life: –H, neutral H, and +H. Satan can provide promotion and success and various kinds of stimulation; and he can also take it away. That is –H.

5.       The amplification of human happiness:

          a.       Satan has extra natural and supernatural powers; but these are limited by the power of God.

          b.       One of those powers is to provide temporary happiness for certain believers in the human race.

          c.        This is related to reversionism and the function of evil in the human soul.

          d.       Since happiness is related to –H. Satan’s policy is still good and evil. A thought can make or break you. Evil can break you; and doctrine can help you grow. Welfare state, socialism, communism, intrusion on the freedom of the individual. Since minus H is not consistent, it can only be related to time and history and this life. Satan will rule this world until the second advent. He can only promote or provides the details of life is during the tenure of his rulership.

          e.       Therefore this type of happiness involves better environment, accumulation of details, satisfaction of the lust pattern.

          f.        This happiness is volitol and unstable.

          g.       Satan is the greatest genius among creatures and he cannot maintain what he provides. No happiness for anyone including himself.

          h.       This happiness does not sustain mankind.

6.       Neutral H

          a.       This is human happiness derived from the laws of divine establishment.

          b.       Under this happiness, people are happy because they possess freedom and privacy. Maybe they have their right person or they have a family.

          c.        Unbelievers in category #2 relationship can derive happiness from establishment.

          d.       Rm/rw have many types of happiness. Soul happiness, sex happiness, compatibility, etc. Sometimes some form of job happiness.

          e.       There is neutral happiness when children grow up and turn out alright. If they are responsive to training and to discipline. The demonstrate good manners and poise; and they recognize the property and privacy of others. Also good when believing parents have children who are positive.

          f.        Happiness does not depend upon children, but adult children can be a source of happiness.

          g.       A happy nation is a nation having a spiritual and military heritage. Happinesses to the people who keep hearing the sound of the trumpet. Bob is reading A Bodyguard of Lies. Many generals that Hitler got rid of were born-again believer and Hitler could not stand them. Germany at one time was a very happy nation. They will advance, O Jehovah, in the light of your doctrine. They will rejoice all day long. For you, O Christ, are the object of their power.

          h.       Doctrinal teaching has a definite relationship to doctrinal happiness. Where there is no revelation of Bible doctrine, the people are unrestrained. But happinesses to those who keep the law.

          i.         Happiness is related to total military victory.

7.       From this point forward, Bob has given this doctrine before.

8.       Paul’s happiness is fulfilled in various places in supergrace. Crown of righteousness, Crow of Life, Crown of Glory are the appropriate awards of moving from supergrace to ultra supergrace.

9.       Jesus is teaching the angelic conflict to a crowd and there is a dramatic interruption. There is a woman who is very negative toward doctrine and she is very arrogant. She is trying to find a way to take the Lord Jesus down a peg. Jesus is manly of soul and manly of physic. The woman wants to put Him down. She will shrink Him to childhood. The nagging woman reduces the man to zero. This Jesus challenges her feminism. She knows nothing about the virgin birth. She is merely talking about motherhood. She is saying that motherhood is superior to everything else in life. A woman responds to a man and that is where children come from. Motherhood is necessary for life; but motherhood is not the greatest thing. Luke 11:27–28 Now it came to pass, while He was teaching these things, a certain woman [a very emotional and reversionistic woman, whose name will not be revealed] from the audience having interrupted with a loud voice [she is talking to express her arrogance] shouted to Him, [she should not be speaking at all; it is rude to speak when someone else is already speaking], “Happy is the woman whose womb carried you [wombs cannot be happy; the womb receives no stimulation in sex; it is the womb which has the curse] [This is a bright yet stupid woman; and she is interrupting the Lord] [If there is ever a time when a woman is unhappy, it is during her pregnancy] and whose breasts You have sucked.” [which is a walking grocery store for the little one] But He replied, “Wrong! [or, on the contrary] [Jesus is there to teach] :Happinesses to those who keep hearing the Word of God and keep on guarding.” (and therefore, retaining) [the crucial aspect is Bible doctrine is related to happiness]


My numbering above is way off.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #37


37 03/25/1976 Philippians 2:2; Luke 11:27–28 Doctrine of happiness (cont.)


Notes for the doctrine of happiness are placed above. Although there are a few places of commonality with the two doctrines of happiness which I have, there is much more in this doctrine of happiness than I have seen anywhere else.


The only reason Bob can peel of a five dollar bill and purchase something is the person taking the money has more faith than he does.


Evolution demands more faith than any person should have. No form of evolution is believable.


This is an evil world and unfortunately, the US has become an evil nation.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #38


38 03/26/1976 Philippians 2:2b Doctrine of occupation with Christ


Verse 2 – Bob reviews some of the vocabulary already covered.


“that” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which introduces a final clause. A final clause is one which denotes a purpose, a goal, an objective of one sort or another. It is translated “that” or “in order that.”


“ye be like-minded” – present active subjunctive from the verb phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh]. If there is one thing we cannot be it is all believers being like-minded as the word is used today. No two believers think alike and no two believers have reached the same point of spiritual maturity. So there are tremendous variations in thinking. Therefore the result here of being like-minded requires some amplification.


There were people on the outside who brought their infants to Berachah and then go out for a date. Professional babysitters have also shown up to Berachah with a child, but a child who is not theirs. These are illustrations of people who are not like-minded. There is a wide range between common sense and no common sense. So this concept of unity needs to be discussed further.


Phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh] means to think, and it doesn’t mean to be like-minded. It just means to think. If there is one thing that all believers who are positive are required to do, it is to think, to concentrate. The accusative neuter singular from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] is also involved, it emphasizes doctrine resident in the soul of the super-grace believer. It is also referring to the super-grace believer at a certain stage: when he is crossing no-man’s land to the final objective—ultra-super-grace. This is the attributive use of autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] and we translate it “the same thing”—“that you might be thinking the same thing.” This is not identical thinking but the same category of things is involved. The customary present tense denotes what habitually occurs among super-grace believers. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action by thinking doctrine which is resident in his own soul. The subjunctive mood linked with the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] denotes the purpose, the aim, the objective in crossing no-man’s land. The whole point is that no one can advance in the Christian life by doing. The whole realm of the devil’s philosophy today is to get believers to work. The more believers work the less time they have for the true function of spiritual growth. You only grow by thinking; it is the thought that makes or breaks the believer.


If the pastor is a baby, he only evangelizes Sunday after Sunday. If he is an adolescent, he is dangerous. You must be under a pastor who has advanced beyond where you are.


In going from supergrace to ultra supergrace, there is an intensity of logistical support when crossing over no man’s land, where there is much greater opposition. The key is more doctrine.


“having” – the present active participle from the verb echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] which means to have or to have and to hold. The present active participle here has strong linear aktionsart. The present tense is the present of duration, denoting what has begun in the past and continues into the present time. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb through occupation with Christ or maximum category #1 love. The participle is circumstantial for being in no-man’s land.


This doctrine ended up being pretty close to the Doctrine of Mental attitude from NB1. It is not exactly the same and my numbering below is messed up.


Mental Attitude

1.       What you think is what you really are. This means that a thought can make or break you. We are at any given time the thoughts of our soul.

2.       Everything is divine viewpoint or human viewpoint. These are mutually exclusive concepts fighting over the soul. If the believer is positive toward doctrine, then he can fight off evil, but if he is negative toward doctrine, then evil creeps into the soul.

3.       If you have evil and human viewpoint in your soul, you are ready for Charley grace, which is divine discipline. Human viewpoint allows good and evil to enter into your life.

4.       Minus H is Satan’s counterfeit of +H. Everywhere you turn today, you see the signs of reversionism. Example of Gladstone. He was a weak sister in all of government. Disraeli was a much greater man in politics. Gladstone was a believer was reversionistic. What you think determines how you go and how society goes. A person is not what he is on the surface, but what takes place in the thinking. Example of a drunk who was very gregarious and when drunk would invite people who later he did not remember inviting. Proverbs 23:6–7 Do not eat the bread of a selfish man or enjoy his delicacies (when such a person invites you over to dinner, say no) for as he thinks in his soul, so he is. And he says to you, “Eat my food, drink my beverage” but in his right lobe, he is not with you {a Hebrew idiom for, “He despises you.”] This passage portrays the great hypocrisy of even our day. You have the superficial personality which the person presents, but underneath all of that is what that person really thinks.

5.       Conflict of mental attitudes. Isaiah 55

6.       The believer is commanded to the divine viewpoint of life. This is obeyed when the believer reaches ultra supergrace.

7.       The analogy to warfare alluded to 2Corinthians 10:4-6 tells us what our attitude and what our concept in the royal family should be - For the equipment and the weapons of our conflict are not human attributes - we are fighting in the greatest of all warfares, the angelic conflict, older than the human race, and we are not fighting it with human attributes. The power is in the soul - but the attributes of unseen power [resident doctrine in the soul] through God against the destruction of [Satan's] fortifications. - Satan's fortifications, Satan's concepts. Assault and demolish cosmic thoughts and demolish [human viewpoint], and every obstacle of pride which attacks against the objective of knowledge of God [divine viewpoint], and makes a prisoner of every human viewpoint system of thought to the authority of Christ; - in other words, your greatest fighting capabilities in the angelic conflict are in your soul. You can have a weak body and be totally out of it as far as your physical body is concerned and you can have the most dynamic powerful attack. You possess in your soul the great capabilities for fighting. However, like any good weapon, the soul has to be loaded; and loading and locking is Bible doctrine in the soul. You have to load the weapon - holding in readiness to punish all deviation from obedience [reversionistic human viewpoint], when your obedience [daily function of GAP] is fulfilled.

8.       Rapport in the royal family is also based on divine viewpoint - Philippians 2:2, "Fill up the deficiency with inner happiness, that you keep on thinking the same thing [divine viewpoint], having the same love, soul rapport, in thinking." Love is a mental attitude. Soul rapport in thinking is the basis for love. What is love? It is soul rapport in thinking. So the power of anything that is great in life, the dynamics of everything that is wonderful in life, is based upon what goes on in the soul."

9.       The function of the royal priesthood, therefore, demands a new mental attitude - 2Timothy 1:7, For God has not given us the spirit of fear, but of power [resident doctrine], love [the capacity for life which comes from that doctrine], and stabilized mentality - nobility is based upon stabilized mentality. Romans 12:2 - ""And stop being conformed to this world, but be ye transformed by the renewing of your mind, that you may prove what the will of God is, namely that the will of God is good, and acceptable, and perfect."

10.     Divine viewpoint from doctrine produces confidence - 2Corinthians 5:1, "For we know that if the earthly tent which is our house is torn down [physical death], we have a building from God [resurrection body], a house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens." Verse 6 - "Therefore, we keep having confidence, and knowing that, while we are at home in the body, we are absent from the Lord." As long as we live in this life we can have great confidence based upon knowing. Verse 7 - "(For we walk by doctrine [our confidence] resident in the soul, and not by sight). Our whole instrument system is doctrine resident in the soul. Verse 8 - "We keep having confidence, and take mental delight in the fact that to be absent from the body is to be at home with the Lord." So consequently, everything in life that is important for the member of the royal family of God, his nobility, his impact, his dynamics, his glorification of the Lord, is related to what goes on in his soul, what he thinks in his mind.

11.     The areas of life involving mental attitude.

          a.       Stability is a mental attitude - James 1:8. Being a creature of habit does not make you stable.

          b.       Prosperity is a mental attitude - Philippians 4:7.

          c.        Giving is a mental attitude - 2Corinthians 9:7.

          d.       Worldliness is a mental attitude - Romans 12:2; Colossians 3:2.

          e.       Evil is a mental attitude - Matthew 9:4.

          f.        Arrogance is a mental attitude - Galatians 6:3.

          g.       1Timothy 2:9, 10, 15 Inner beauty is a mental attitude.

12.     The greatest test of the mental attitude is advancing from supergrace to ultra supergrace. "Therefore, as many as are mature, let us continue objective-type thinking [the result of being spiritually mature], and if you think differently in anything at all [and you do], this also will God reveal that to you. - Philippians 3:15." In other words, the answer to divine viewpoint, the answer to the dynamics of objective thinking is all bound up in Bible doctrine.


“the same love” – logistical support. The accusative singular definite article is used as a demonstrative pronoun, plus the accusative singular direct object from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], plus the accusative singular direct object from agápē (ἀγάπη) [pronounced ag-AH-pay], used here for occupation with the person of Christ because it must be related to doctrine or thinking. This is the strongest kind of love and it is a thinking love—category #1 love, occupation with the person of Jesus Christ.


“of one accord” – the nominative masculine plural from the noun sumpsuchos (σύμψυχος) [pronounced SOOM-psoo-khoss] [psuchê (ψυχή) [pronounced psoo-KHAY] = soul; sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] (m) = together with], it is translated “with one accord” but in modern English it should be “soul rapport” or “united in soul.”


“of one mind” – the accusative singular definite article plus the numeral hen (ἕν) [pronounced hehn], plus the present active participle for that same verb for mental attitude thinking, phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh]. It means “thinking the one thing,” which is an idiom for “intent on one’s objective.” The one objective on which the believer should be concentrating is ultra-super-grace. The present tense is tendencial for what is purposed. The active voice: super-grace believers out in no-man’s land produce the action—concentrating on the objective. The participle is circumstantial for a believer in no-man’s land.


I have three doctrines called occupation with Christ; and this closely matches the second one, but with additional material. Therefore I copy and pasted those notes below. Right after doing that, the notes no longer lined up. It began to synch up again in the final five minutes.


Occupation with Christ

1.       Definition and description

          a.       Occupation with Christ is the highest position for the believer in time. It is the direction of the believer’s love for Jesus Christ.

          b.       This is category #1 love of the ebel in supergrace status.

          c.        Since Christ is the manifest Person of the Trinity, this is maximum love toward that Person, called occupation with Christ.

          d.       Therefore, occupation with Christ is the maximum expression of category #1 love toward God. This is the objective of every believer in all dispensations. Christ is the representative of the Trinity in our relationship with God. That is because He is our saviour, because He is the King of kings and Lord of lords, because He is in hypostatic union, the God-Man, because He is the royal high priest forever, because He is the true ruler of Israel. Deuteronomy 6:5, a command to Israel in the Old Testament. "You shall love the Lord your God [Jesus Christ] with all of your heart [the right lobe]" - there must be maximum doctrine in the right lobe, doctrine in the frame of reference, doctrine in the memory centre, doctrine in the vocabulary, categorical doctrine, norms and standards based on doctrine, with the result that maximum category #1 love is directed toward the visible member of the Godhead, Jesus Christ who is described here as Jehovah or the Lord - "and with all of your soul" - doctrine must be resident in the soul - "and with all of your power" - the power here is the inner residency of doctrine. Man is incapable of loving God apart from Bible doctrine. It is Bible doctrine that leads to our salvation. The Gospel is doctrine. It is Bible doctrine accumulated in the soul through the daily function of GAP that leads to development of all of the categories of love and the one in focus here, category #1 toward God. Hebrews 12:1,2 says basically the same thing in our description.

2.       Occupation with Christ begins at the believers entrance into the supergrace life - Colossians 3:16,17. "And the doctrine from the Christ, let it keep on dwelling in you abundantly to the point of wealth [supergrace], in all wisdom [the application of doctrine] teaching and warning self and others by grace in your hearts, keep singing to the God by psalms of praise by means of spiritual things. And all, whatever things you so in word or in deed, keep doing all things by the person of the Lord Jesus Christ" - occupation with Christ, therefore, becomes the greatest motivator in life - "constantly giving thanks to the God" - the mental attitude of thanksgiving and its occasional verbalization is in view here - "even the Father through him." That verse adds up to the fact that the only way to become spiritually self-sustaining is to be on the high ground of supergrace, not only to take in doctrine but to seize and hold, to stay there no matter what comes in life, to have and to enjoy paragraph SG2 in all of its categories and to anticipate that salute and embrace, SG3.

          a.       God gives us some time to enjoy the great blessings of the supergrace life. We enjoy the blessing by association; everyone in your periphery are blessed. Children, loved ones, historical impact, dying blessing. The rest and relaxation period.

          b.       The second stage is out in no man’s land, which is supergrace B. The things from supergrace remain with you. You are sustained with the spiritual factors, occupation with Christ, +H and the continual intake of Bible doctrine. You never get away from doctrine.

          c.        In ultra supergrace, all of these things are intensified. The worst enemies of the ultra supergrace believer are other believers, who are kept alive in order to put pressure on the ultra supergrace believer. The more pressure means the greater is his +H and his blessings. Ten Commandments only has a few chronological problems. The more that the people opposed Moses, the greater his happiness. Joshua was blessed all of his life due to blessing by association from Moses. There are areas where occupation with Christ exists.

          d.       Occupation with Christ in ultra supergrace becomes the means of great decisions in history.

                     i.         Hebrews 11:27 Moses gave up the crown in Egypt as the result of a ultra supergrace decision. He was not afraid of the wrath of Thutmose III. Hapshepsit had a natural daughter by Thutmose II. Moses was selected to be the ruler of Egypt. He was an engineering genius. He bilt the two great cities. Four times defeated the Ethiopians when it appeared that they would get the best of Egypt. He was also an administrative genius and he laid the foundation for the great empire that Thutmose III would rule. His son, Amenhotep II who would be the pharaoh of the Exodus. Moses kept on being strong under pressure because he kept on seeing the Invisible One.

          e.       Occupation with Christ begins with the entrance into supergrace. Colossians 3:16–17

3.       Occupation with Christ obviously glorifies Christ - Ephesians 3:19-21. "And come to know the surpassing knowledge love of Christ [occupation with Christ], that you might be filled up with all the fullness from the God" - category #1, paragraph SG2, the spiritual blessings, the resident doctrine in the soul to handle every situation in life - "Now to the one himself being able far beyond all things to do infinitely more than that which we could ask or be imagining [paragraph SG2 - for time], according to the power being itself being effective in us, to him the glory in the church and in Christ Jesus" - "to him" refers to God the Father who planned your personal SG2 paragraph in eternity past. The attainment of these things is totally dependent upon doctrine in the soul, not what you are doing for God - "with reference to all generations" - every generation of believers in the royal family of God from the time of Pentecost until the Rapture occurs will have the accomplishment of the tactical victory of the angelic conflict through an issue of Bible doctrine, with all Bible doctrine located in the text of the scripture. The canon of scripture contains all the doctrine in writing. This was never done before the Church Age, the age of the royal family of God.

4.       By means of occupation with Christ the function of GAP is possible. Occupation with Christ is accomplished through the function of GAP. The only way to occupation with Christ is through the daily function of GAP. The persistence of perception of doctrine accumulates maximum residency of doctrine in the soul. The basic characteristics of supergrace are related to occupation with Christ and man's sense of accomplishment by human ability and effort can never be compared with the daily function of GAP producing supergrace status.

          a.       Jeremiah 9:23,24 - "Thus saith the Lord, The wise man shall not boast in his wisdom, furthermore, the successful man shall not boast in his success, the rich man shall not boast in his riches" - True supergrace, you have these things from God and you don't boast in them, you are occupied with the person of Christ - "For the one boasting [the reversionist in the warning stage of reversionism] let him boast in this principle, to be caused to understand [the function of GAP] and prosper" - understanding of doctrine resulting in prosperity - "even to know me [occupation with Christ], I the Lord manufacture grace, judgement [discipline]" - and every believer is either in one category or the other, grace or discipline - "and justice in the earth" - God is fair. Judgement means discipline for the reversionist, justice means the protection of freedom under the laws of establishment - "for in this I take pleasure, decrees the Lord."

          b.       The same concept of GAPing it to supergrace is found elsewhere in the scripture. Ephesians 4:20 - "But you [members of the royal family of God] have not been taught in this manner the Christ." Or, Ephesians 3:18,19 - "In order that you might have complete ability [living grace] to comprehend in the company of all saints [the local church], what is the breadth, and length, and depth, and height, and come to know the surpassing knowledge-love of Christ, in order that you might be filled up with all the fullness [supergrace blessing] from the God."

5.       Occupation with Christ eliminates the superficialities of human celebrityship - Philippians 3:7,8. Gaining Christ means to hold the high ground. Bible doctrine in the soul will give supergrace, and supergrace recognises the celebrityship of Jesus Christ, and you step aside and relax and lose all of your arrogance and have true humility. True humility is a mature believer occupied with the person of Christ, totally relaxed, proving nothing and enjoying everything.

6.       Occupation with Christ motivates the pastor-teacher to communicate doctrine so that the royal priesthood reaches its objective - Hebrews 6:10.

7.       The mechanics of GAP produce the dynamics of occupation with Christ. James 1:19 - "Know this, my beloved brethren, everyone keep on being swift for the purpose of hearing, slow for the purpose of talking, slow with reference to anger" - Are you slow to gel mad in class? Verse 21: "Wherefore, having removed all pollution" - pollution has to do with soul environment and it has to do with mental attitude sins [rebound] - "and receive and retain in the sphere of meekness [respect for the authority of the communicator - "the impregnated word, which is able to deliver your souls." The impregnated word is exactly the same as doctrine resident in the soul.

          a.       James 2:20 - "But are you willing to learn, O empty of doctrine man, that doctrine apart from production is unemployed." Verse 21: "Abraham, our father, not from the source of works was he vindicated, having offered up Isaac, his adult son, on the altar? Verse 22: "You see at a glance how that doctrine kept on working together with production, and from the source of production the doctrine was completed [fully developed]?" Verse 23: "And the scripture was fulfilled which said, Abraham believed the God [Jesus Christ], and it was credited to his account for righteousness; and [from saving grace to supergrace] he was designated [filoj qeou] lover of God [occupation with Christ]."

8.       We have an illustration of occupation with Christ. The illustration of occupation with Christ is found of right man-right woman - Ephesians 5:25-33.

9.       Occupation with Christ is related to the strategic victory of the angelic conflict - Colossians 3:1,2. "If, therefore, you have been raised in the Christ [positional sanctification], keep on desiring to possess and endeavouring to obtain the above things [SG2, dying grace, SG3], where the Christ is sitting on the right hand side of the God. Keep thinking objectively about above things, not things on the earth."

10.     Therefore characteristics of occupation with Christ:

          a.       Occupation with Christ is the basis for the supergrace believer contributing to national blessing - Deuteronomy 30:15, 16, 20.

          b.       Occupation with Christ produces combat courage and victory in battle - Joshua 23:10,11.

          c.        Occupation with Christ is the basis for preservation in testing - Psalm 31:23,24.

          d.       Occupation with Christ is the basis for stability and great happiness - Psalm 16:8,9.

          e.       Occupation with Christ results in supergrace blessing - Psalm 37:4,5.

          f.        Occupation with Christ is the basis for strength, dynamics, power under pressure - Hebrews 11:27.

          g.       Occupation with Christ avoids boredom or soul fatigue - Hebrews 12:3.

          h.       Occupation with Christ is both the logistical provision in bravo grace and the intensified blessing of the ultra supergrace life. Philippians 2:1–2, 5


Philippians 2:2 Bring to completion my happiness [+H], that you might be thinking the same thing, having the same love [occupation with Christ][3], united in soul, concentrating on the same objective.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #39


39 03/28/1976 Philippians 2:3–4 Hypersensitivity and true sensitivity


During the movie, the Ten Commandments, Bobby leaned over and said, “You see, they used the King James version originally.”


Philippians 2:3  nothing according to self-interest or according to vain conceit, but in humility be esteeming one another surpassing themselves,  (BLB)


three categories of grace, alpha grace, bravo grace; and the alternative is charley grace.


Verse 3 – we begin to note the possibilities of failure. There is a warning against failure to utilize logistical grace in crossing no-man’s land. The word “nothing” is actually the first word in the verse—the accusative neuter direct object from the adjective mêdeis (μηδείς) [pronounced may-DICE] . It is used as a substantive here, a noun, and the accusative says it is the direct object of a verb, but there is no verb stated. However, this is what is called the elliptical idiom and it demands the present active imperative from the verb poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh], and it should be translated “do”—“Do nothing.”


“through strife” – a prepositional phrase, kata plus the accusative singular from the noun eritheía (ἐριθεία) [pronounced er-ith-Ī-ah], derived from a verb eritheuô which is an Attic Greek word meaning to do the work of a day labourer, to conduct one’s self like a day labourer. A day labourer in the ancient world was a person who worked for a day’s wages and was paid off at the end of the day. The noun which comes from this verb means that day labourers had to be properly handled, they had to be under a system of discipline. If they did not have authority over them then they started bickering among themselves, and they did not work, they merely started fighting and bickering. So eritheía (ἐριθεία) [pronounced er-ith-Ī-ah] came to mean to have the attitude, the manner, or the disposition of a day labourer. This meant labourers are under the authority of bosses who keep down petty quarrels which might erupt among those who are working. The meaning of this word came to mean contentiousness. It actually says here, “Do nothing motivated by contentiousness.”


“or vainglory” – a negative disjunctive particle, mêde (μηδέ) [pronounced may-DEH] which means “nor”, and with it another prepositional phrase, kata plus the accusative of kenodoxía (κενοδοξία) [pronounced ken-od-ox-EE-ah], which means conceit, excessive ambition, and comes to mean “ambitious pride.” Pride plus predilection for strife eliminates the provision of logistical grace as the believer is crossing no-man’s land. Then he falls into reversionism, discipline, and eventually the sin unto death.


“but” is the adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], it always sets up some kind of a contrast. Here it is between the failure to utilize logistical support in crossing no-man’s land and the other situations that support the believer as he moves along.


“by lowliness of mind” – the instrumental of means from the definite article used as an immediate demonstrative to emphasize grace orientation; plus the instrumental of means from the noun tapeinophrosunē (ταπεινοφροσύνη) [pronounced tap-i-nof-ros-OO-nay]. This noun was first used by Plato to designate the state of mind which submits to divine order in the universe and does not impiously exalt self. This is grace orientation as the antithesis of arrogance or pride—“but by means of grace orientation.”


“let each one esteem” – present active participle of the verb hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee]. The word means to find an expert as a guide to take you over a battlefield, to show you the ruins, to take you through the museum, which is how the word was originally used. It means to guide, to think, to consider, to regard, to be in the hands of an expert. Here it is used for logistical grace as the means of providing the grace thinking. The customary present tense denotes what habitually occurs when super-grace believers are crossing no-man’s land to ultra-super-grace. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The participle is the imperative use of the participle. Also with it is the object of the participle used as an imperative, the accusative plural from a reciprocal pronoun, allêlôn (ἁλλήλων) [pronounced al-LAY-lohn] —“each other [members of the royal family].”


“better” – present active participle from huperéchō (ὑπερέχω) [pronounced hoop-er-EHKH-oh]. This is not lack of confidence, this is lack of pride. The present active participle means to be “better than.” The customary present denotes what habitually occurs with a grace-oriented person. He is totally free from pride and also has great confidence, but his self-confidence is not linked with arrogance and therefore he is completely relaxed. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action. This is a concessive participle, translated “as better than.”


“than themselves” – the ablative of comparison from the reflexive pronoun heautôn (ἑαυτν) [pronounced hay-ow-TONE] —“than himself.”


Philippians 2:3 Do nothing motivated by contentiousness nor ambitious pride; but by means of grace orientation be considering each other as better than himself.


What Does this Mean?

1.       This is the true principle of sensitivity and thoughtfulness of others based on grace thinking.

2.       Hypersensitive believers are subjective about themselves and insensitive of others. There is no such thing as a friendly or unfriendly church. There is doctrine taught or not.

3.       Out of this comes a principle: You cannot build your happiness on your own arrogance. Look out for the hypersensitive woman; she cannot be satisfied. She is arrogant with a facade of sweetness. She is always pious, always sweet; and she is a fraud underneath.

4.       Therefore this hypersensitive person is like carborundum (used to polish diamonds) under Narcissus (or Camelia, if a woman). He has a façade of sweetness and light, of piousness, and underneath is hardness.

5.       This person is going to be demanding as long as he/she lives, and totally insensitive to the one he/she makes demands of. She is insensitive to others and hypersensitive about herself. She disciplines her husband by pouting or nagging.

6.       On the surface these people appear attractive but underneath they are hard, cruel and arrogant, selfish, implacable, vindictive and demanding. You can never satisfy such persons. They are unteachable. They are stubborn. They demand their own way in everything. And the dole out their affections in cc test tubes only after they get their way. The man cannot be at ease with her. Behind the facade of sweetness is that rock hard substance of Carborundum under Camellia. She is easily slighted; she is blind to humor, and without 100% affection, she does not believe anyone is paying attention to her.


Hypersensitivity is the enemy of spiritual growth. This is where women’s lib got its start.


Philippians 2:4  each considering not the things of themselves, but each also the things of others.  (BLB)


Verse 4 – no one ever crosses no-man’s land without being highly objective in his soul. If anyone has a tendency toward subjectivity doctrine must knock it out.


No ultra-super-grace believer is subjective. Verse 4 warns against being pinned down by evil. Subjectivity is always a form of evil. The subjective believer is totally aware of himself and his problems but he is totally indifferent to the feelings and the problems of others.


“Look not every man on his own things” is an incorrect translation. It actually begins with the negative mê (μή) [pronounced may] which is a particle, it denotes here a qualified negation. With it is the accusative plural direct object from the definite article ta (τά) [pronounced taw] (τά) [pronounced taw] (τά) [pronounced taw], which in the neuter gender refers to circumstances, personal affairs, modus operandi. Next is heautôn (ἑαυτν) [pronounced hay-ow-TONE], in the genitive form here. It is the possessive genitive plural from the reflexive pronoun; then the nominative plural from the adjective hekastos (ἕκαστος) [pronounced HEHK-as-toss], used as a substantive and as the subject.


The verb is the present active participle from skopéō (σκοπέω) [pronounced skohp-EH-oh], which means here to regard, though it generally means to look out for, to notice or to respect. The customary present is for what should be expected of a super-grace believer out in no-man’s land. The active voice: the super-grace believer crossing no-man’s land to ultra-super-grace produces the action of the verb. The participle is, again, an imperative participle, with the negative mê (μή) [pronounced may] is the imperative of prohibition—“Every one of you should not only be regarding his own personal interests [in the advance] …”


“his own personal interests” – ta (τά) [pronounced taw] heautôn (ἑαυτν) [pronounced hay-ow-TONE] hekastoi. That is “each ones things of themselves” which is an idiom for “his own personal interests.” By personal interests is meant the perpetuation of positive volition toward doctrine as the means of receiving logistical support while crossing no-man’s land. Doctrine keeps feeding the fires of occupation with Christ. Doctrine keeps +H intensified in order to meet the various adversities in no-man’s land. Remember that the super-grace believer must not only respect the privacy of others but at the same time he must be very thoughtful of those advancing with him toward the objective.


“but” – a strong adversative conjunction which sets up a contrast, allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], between the super-grace believer concentrating on reaching ultra-super-grace and at the same time being thoughtful of other believers so as not to hinder their advance to the same objective; “also” is the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] and this should be translated “but also.”


“every man” is not found in the original MSS. It should say here, “but also one of the things of others”—ta heautôn (ἑαυτν) [pronounced hay-ow-TONE] hekastoi again, the accusative neuter plural direct object definite article, ta; the possessive genitive plural from héteros (ἕτερος) [pronounced HEH-ter-os], used for other super-grace believers advancing, plus hekastos (ἕκαστος) [pronounced HEHK-as-toss] again in the plural, the adjective uses the substantive; it should be translated, “but also everyone advancing [to ultra-super-grace] the personal interests of others.”


Philippians 2:4 Every one of you [advancing to ultra-super-grace] should not only be regarding his own personal interests [in the advance] but also every one of you [so advancing] the personal interests of others.


This Means:

1.       This is the principle of thoughtfulness for others who are super-grace believers. But this is specific to others crossing no-man's land with you to ultra-super-grace.

2.       The pressures are intensive through no-man's land.

3.       There are problems in the advance and all believers in this advance have their own problems. People may not show it, but they have problems too. Therefore do not judge them, do not malign them, do not succumb to any form of subjectivity in crossing no man's land. In concentration on your advance remember others are advancing with you-be thoughtful of them. This is so that you do not hinder their spiritual advance.


Peer evaluation is worthless. What do your superiors think of you? That is key.


Avoid conversation which attacks authority, like the authority of the pastor-teacher or of the husband, etc.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #40


40 03/28/1976 Philippians 2:5–6 Doctrine of the deity of Jesus Christ; syllogisms


Jesus advanced to supergrace and to ultra supergrace in His humanity.


Philippians 2:5  Let this mind be in you which was also in Christ Jesus:  (BLB)


Verses 5-11, the object of occupation with Christ. We see the challenge to the super-grace believer in verse 5. It reminds us that the Lord Jesus Christ while on earth had normal physical as well as unusual spiritual growth as he moved along in the spiritual life. The translation of this verse is not correct in the KJV. The first problem with it is found in the first four words of that translation — toutô (τούτῳ) [pronounced TWO-toh] froneite en (ἐν) [pronounced en] humin (ὑμν) [pronounced hoo-MEEN]. The very first word, toutô (τούτῳ) [pronounced TWO-toh], is the accusative neuter singular from the immediate demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], and the very fact that it is in the accusative case tells us there is something wrong with the English translation, “Let this mind be in you which was also in Christ Jesus” because here is the object of a verb. The accusative case is used as the direct object and houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos] as the demonstrative pronoun emphasizes doctrine resident in the soul of the super-grace believer. The word “this” which is a demonstrative pronoun is the object of the verb, not the subject, and it does not modify a word called “mind” for the word “mind” is actually a verb and this is the object of the verb.


The verb is the present active imperative of phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh]. The word is used for objective thinking. The present active imperative is a command and the object of that command is the demonstrative pronoun in the accusative case. The present tense is a customary present denoting what habitually occurs when closing in on the ultimate objective of super-grace. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action. The imperative mood is a very strong command. “Keep on thinking” is the correct translation of the verb. Add the demonstrative pronoun and you have the word “this.” “Keep on thinking this” are the first four words of the corrected translation. The demonstrative pronoun refers to resident doctrine in the soul, so we can add: “Keep on thinking this doctrine.”


You cannot think in your soul with things that are outside of your soul. You cannot use the information in a textbook until it has been transferred into your soul where it is useable. You have to have information in your soul in order to be able to use it. “Keep on thinking this” means that you cannot think what is in the Bible, you can only think that portion of Bible doctrine which has been transferred to your soul. If it isn’t transferred to your soul you cannot think it.


Next is en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] and it should be translated “within you.” “Keep on thinking this doctrine within you.” You can only think in terms of what is resident in your soul. All thought resident in your soul is broken down into vocabulary, so you must have vocabulary storage. But vocabulary alone will not do it. This vocabulary must be organised categorically so you also have in your right lobe categorical storage. To fulfill this command you must have epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] type doctrine in the right lobe of the soul. It has to be in the frame of reference and in the memory centre but this is impossible unless you have loaded up your vocabulary and your categorical storage areas. This is called sunesis (σύνεσις) [pronounced SOON-es-is]. Then you have norms and standards, called a conscience or suneidêsis (συνείδησις) [pronounced soon-Ī-day-sis]. Then you have a launching pad where this same doctrine becomes sophia (σοφία) [pronounced sohf-EE-ah]. And when it says “Keep on thinking this doctrine within you” it is referring to epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis], sunesis (σύνεσις) [pronounced SOON-es-is], suneidêsis (συνείδησις) [pronounced soon-Ī-day-sis] and sophia (σοφία) [pronounced sohf-EE-ah] all functioning inside of your right lobe. The only way you get that type of information is from a pastor-teacher. You have to be taught academically under strict academic discipline, there is no other way to get it. Production in the Christian life is a bona fide function but as a result of growth, not the means. All spiritual growth is related to the daily function of GAP.


“Keep on thinking this doctrine within you.” We are not the first people to think these doctrines. They were thought by Moses when he reached super-grace. They were thought by Jeremiah, by Isaiah, by the apostle Paul, long before we lived on the face of the earth. And these doctrines were thought by Jesus Christ during the first advent.


“which” — the nominative neuter singular from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], referring to doctrine resident in the soul. The antecedent for the relative pronoun is the personal pronoun su — “within you.” The word “was” is not found in the original, but implied. We have the implication of the imperfect active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME].


“also” is the adjunctive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. Then we have en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]. This is how we happen to be royal family of God and what makes our life so meaningful. At the point of salvation everyone of us entered into union with Christ and became royal family of God forever. We are the royal family to complement our Lord’s battlefield royalty. Jesus Christ is royalty because He is God, and under that title He is called Son of God, and His royal family is God the Father and God the Holy Spirit. Jesus Christ was royalty when He came in the flesh. He was born a Jew, the son of David. So He is Jewish royalty and His title is son of David, and He has a royal family beginning with David and Bathsheba. Then Jesus Christ became through the cross, resurrection, ascension, battlefield royalty. His title is King of kings and Lord of lords, but at the time that He received His battlefield royalty He did not have a royal family. But He has one now. You and I as believers in this dispensation are a part of the royal family of God. Every time we see this prepositional phrase in the New Testament it is a reminder to us that we are royal family, that we live in the palace forever, that God has special objectives for us in time and special blessings for time and eternity as royal family of God. We are to live like royalty, to think like royalty, to function like royalty, and therefore this wonderful phrase, “in Christ Jesus.”


Philippians 2:5 Keep on thinking this doctrine within you, which also was resident in Christ Jesus.


Summary

1.       This means that the super-grace believer, crossing no man’s land, is challenged by mental attitude. He must have a certain type of mental attitude and a certain type of motivation to reach the final objective. The greatest testing, the greatest pressure in life is out in no man’s land between super-grace and ultra super-grace. Therefore he must have a mental attitude like the mental attitude of our Lord Jesus Christ as he crossed no man’s land while He was on earth, facing greater pressure than we will ever know.

2.       This means that the mental attitude of Jesus Christ was one of total grace orientation — total dependence upon logistical grace provided by God the Father.

3.       The grace orientation of our Lord Jesus Christ included grace awareness, grace consciousness, grace dependence on the plan of God. He was aware of the plan of God, He knew it in His humanity through doctrine, He knew it in His deity, He was there with the Father when the decrees were ordained.

4.       Jesus Christ in His advance to super-grace exploited to the maximum all of the doctrinal principles of logistical grace.

5.       Therefore no believer can attain ultra super-grace apart from the same total exploitation of logistical grace.

6.       This total exploitation demands more and more doctrine resident in the soul after reaching the super-grace objective which is the first stage of maturity. So there must be a continuation of the same academic discipline, the same positive volition toward doctrine that existed in the spiritual growth from salvation to the maturity barrier.

7.       Therefore there can be no letup in the function of GAP, there can be no change in the doctrinal priorities. Doctrine must still be #1 priority in the life of the believer crossing no man’s land.

8.       The perpetuation of the function of Gap in super-grace is absolutely necessary for the continuation of grace awareness, grace consciousness, and grace dependence on the plan of God.

9.       The perpetuation of the function of GAP in super-grace demands occupation with Christ, sharing the happiness of God as the basic principles of the logistical grace support by which the believer crosses no man’s land in the face of both great angelic and human pressure. There is more direct attention from Satan when the believer crosses no man’s land than at any other time.


Philippians 2:6  Who, existing in the form of God, did not consider to be equal with God something to be grasped,  (BLB)


Verse 6 — the Lord Jesus Christ as He was before the incarnation. This verse answers the question: What was Christ like before the first advent, before the virgin birth and the incarnation. This question must be answered in order to understand the following verses, to see what happened at the incarnation, to see in effect what the humiliation of our Lord really was. Se we begin with the pre-incarnate Christ, Jesus Christ as He existed in eternity past.


“Who being” — nominative singular from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç] referring to Jesus Christ before the incarnation, plus the present active participle of the verb huparchô (ὑπάρχω) [pronounced hoop-AR-khoh] which means to exist. Here it means to preexist. “[Jesus Christ] who though he preexisted” is the corrected translation.


“in the form of God” — the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of sphere morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY]. Morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] is minus the definite article, and the absence of the definite article emphasizes the qualitative aspects of the essence of Jesus Christ before the incarnation. The essence of Jesus Christ before the incarnation is the essence of God. He was, is, always will be eternal God. Morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] refers to His divine essence. Morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] does not refer to the outward shape of a physical object but the inner essence of the object. Here we have a reference to the inner essence of Jesus Christ. We also have the possessive genitive singular from theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], the noun for God, also minus the definite article, emphasizing again quality. “En (ἐν) [pronounced en] morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY], “in the form,” is exactly the same as en (ἐν) [pronounced en] archê (ἀρχή) [pronounced ar-KHAY] in John 1:1. In John 1:1 we have en (ἐν) [pronounced en] archê (ἀρχή) [pronounced ar-KHAY]. In this passage we have en (ἐν) [pronounced en] morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY]. These two words are both the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative, and both of them describe the preexistence of the Lord Jesus Christ. archê (ἀρχή) [pronounced ar-KHAY] means a beginning which was not a beginning. The quality of the beginning was no beginning at all. Here we have the essence emphasized; in John 1:1 we have the eternity emphasized. In eternity past Jesus Christ as God possessed all of the characteristics of divine essence and exercised all of the qualities of God. And since God cannot change this means that all of the time that Jesus Christ was a human being He was also undiminished deity. This cannot be changed.


 The Deity of Jesus Christ

1.       Jesus Christ is eternal God. As a member of the Trinity He always existed, there never was a time when He did not exist. He is coequal and co-eternal with the Father and the Holy Spirit — Colossians 1:15 Jesus Christ, Who keeps on being the exact image of the unseen God and the privileged firstborn with reference to all creatures. In eternity past Jesus Christ had exactly the same essence as God the Father and God the Holy Spirit. The same sovereignty, the same righteousness, the same omniscience, etc.

2.       The logical approach to the deity of Christ: The syllogism of deity. A syllogism is a logical formula consisting of two premises and a conclusion. Premise #1 is called the major premise, premise #2 is called the minor premise. The third line is the conclusion. But it is not quite that simple. In deductive reasoning you not only have a major premise and a minor premise and a conclusion but the major premise enunciates the general rule, the minor premise subsumes from that general rule a specific. And the subject of the major premise is the object or predicate nominative of the minor premise. While the predicate nominative or object of the major premise combines with the subject of the minor premise to form the conclusion. Illustration: Major premise: The Trinity is eternal. Minor premise: Christ is a member of the Trinity. Conclusion: The subject of the minor premise, Christ, and the object of the major premise, eternal, are put together — Christ is eternal. The Trinity is eternal, Christ is a member of the Trinity, Christ is eternal. Or, the Trinity is God, Christ is a member of the Trinity; Christ is God.

3.       Scriptural documentation:

          a.       Micah 5:2 explains that the incarnate Christ born in Bethlehem is eternal God. This explains that the incarnate Christ born in Bethlehem is eternal God. “However as for you, Bethlehem Ephrathah, too small to be among the clans of Judah, from you one shall go forth from me to be ruler of Israel; his appearance is from long ago, from the days of eternity.” That last phrase is Hebrew idiom saying that He is eternal God.

          b.       John 1:1-3 — “In a beginning which was not a beginning” — a wonderful phrase used to describe the reality for thinking doctrine. Neither rationalism nor empiricism will work in this case — “there always existed the Word, and the Word was face to face with God, and the Word was God.” The Word is a title for Jesus Christ. “This same one was in the beginning with God” — there never was a time when Jesus Christ did not preexist and coexist with God the Father. “All things came into existence through him [Christ] and apart from him nothing came into existence that has come into being.”

          c.        John 8:58 — “Jesus answered them [the Pharisees], A fact I communicate to you, Before Abraham came into being, I had always existed.” Jesus Christ while in the flesh was totally aware of His deity, He could not be anything else but. No item of His essence could be changed.

          d.       Romans 9:5 — The promises which belong to the fathers, and from whom is the Christ, according to the flesh, who is over all, God, blessed forever. Amen.” Jesus Christ is called “over all God.”

          e.       Titus 2:13 — Jesus Christ is called “the great God and our saviour.” He became humanity to be our saviour but before He became humanity, and during the course of His humanity, He was, always has been, there never will be a time when it is otherwise, Jesus Christ is eternal God.

          f.        Hebrews 1:8-10 — “But of the Son He says, Your throne, O God” — Jesus Christ is addressed as God by God the Father — “is forever and ever; and the righteous sceptre is the sceptre of his kingdom. You have loved righteous and have hated unrighteousness, therefore God [Jesus Christ], your God, has anointed you with the oil of gladness above your peers. And you, Lord, in the beginning, have laid the foundation of the earth and the heavens are the work of His hands.”

          g.       1John 5:20 — “And we know that the Son of God has come, and He has given us understanding, in order that we might know Him Who is true; also we are in Him Who is true, and in His Son Jesus Christ. This One is the true God and eternal life.”

4.       The pre-incarnate work of Jesus Christ. While whatever God did in eternity past before creatures existed, before the universe existed, some things are mentioned specifically. For example, the pre-incarnate work of Christ necessitates His preexistence and His deity. In eternity past He is said to be the creator of the universe by John 1:3; Colossians 1:16; Hebrews 1:10. So the fact that He existed before creatures and the fact that He is the creator of creatures indicates that He is God. The pre-incarnate work of Jesus Christ necessitates not only His preexistence but the actuality of His deity.

5.       The doctrine of divine decrees makes a contribution. It actually proves that the deity of Christ is a reality and provides a further evidence for us. Christ is so identified with the divine decrees so as to be God in Psalm 2:7-9; 22:1-6; Psalm 40; Psalm 110.

6.       The tetragrammaton is one of the titles for Jesus Christ: YHWH. Part of this which is the name by which He is revealed is the verb to be, and it is said to be the verb to be doubled: “I am that I am.” These are the letters that are used, some of it is on the verb to be. They did not put vowel points in the Hebrew and the Jews never pronounced this. We actually have a J and an H and a W and an H. This was a name too holy for the Jews to pronounce, so they used Adonai which is simply the same as Kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] in the Greek, indicating that deity is involved. What they finally did was to take the vowel points of Adonai and put them in, and later generations began to pronounce Jehovah. There is the Father, the Son, and the Spirit and so there had to be another word for when they were referred to together, and this other word became Elohim. This is a plural word. The word echad was put in front of it to indicate that there is only one essence. When it says that God is one it refers to the fact that God is one essence, the essence box, but there are three persons who have this essence and therefore we have Jehovah used. Jehovah the Father is generally the initiator, and the revealed Jehovah who becomes the Angel of Jehovah is the Lord Jesus Christ, and Jehovah is also used for God the Holy Spirit. Usually there is somewhere in the context another word to indicate the Holy Spirit in the Hebrew — ruach. So the tetragrammaton is the sacred name for God with absolute existence being the criterion and the connotation. The tetragrammaton is assigned to Jesus Christ in enough passages to establish the deity of Christ. For example, Isaiah 9:6,7; 40:3; Jeremiah 23:5,6; Zechariah 12:10. The tetragrammaton, then, becomes a basis for demonstrating the fact that Jesus Christ is God.

7.       The essence of God. The divine attributes of deity are all ascribed to Jesus Christ.

          a.       The sovereignty of Jesus Christ as God is mentioned in Psalm 2:6; Matthew 28:18 Acts 2:36 2Peter 1:11 Revelation 29:16. This is conclusive in itself without any of the others being added. He is sovereign God. He has just as much sovereignty as the Father and as the Holy Spirit.

          b.       Jesus Christ also has the same holiness — righteousness and justice together: Luke 1:35 John 6:69 Hebrews 7:26.

          c.        He is also said to possess the same love that the Father and the Spirit possess: John 13:1,34 1John 3:16.

          d.       Jesus Christ as God is eternal life: Isaiah 9:6 Micah 5:2 John 1:1 8:58 Colossians 1:16,17 Ephesians 1:4 Revelation 1:11.

          e.       Jesus Christ is omniscient. He has always existed and He has absolute mentality: Matthew 9:4 John 2:25 1Corinthians 4:5 Colossians 2:3 Revelation 2:23.

          f.        The principle involved in omniscience is that Jesus Christ is God in all of these. In omnipresence: Matthew 28:20 Ephesians 1:23 Colossians 1:27. In veracity, John 14:6 Revelation 3:7. All of these scriptures point out the fact that Jesus Christ has each one of these characteristics, any one of which demonstrates the fact that He is eternal God. When He came in the flesh there is the factor of humiliation but it does not mean that He suppressed His deity. He did not suppress His deity.

8.       The theophanies — appearance of Jesus Christ before the incarnation. By contrast, a Christophany is a post-resurrection appearance of Jesus Christ. Jesus Christ has actually had four categories of appearances: theophany before the incarnation; the incarnation or first advent is also an appearance; Christophany, His appearance after His resurrection; the second advent is His final appearance for history in which He will be on the earth for a thousand years.

          a.       Theophanies: Christ appeared as a man in Genesis 18, and 32:24-32.

          b.       Christ has also appeared as a phenomenon of nature: the cloud of the Lord in Exodus 40:38; the pillar of the cloud in Exodus 33:9-23; the burning bush of Exodus 3:2ff Acts 7:30; the Shekinah glory. The word “shekinah” is not found in the Bible. It merely means “residence,” and the glory that resided between the mercy seat and between the cherubs of Exodus 25:22 is the Shekinah glory.

          c.        Christ also appeared as the angel of Jehovah, identified as God in may passages: Genesis 16:7-18 22:11-18 31:11ff 24:7 24:40 Exodus 23:20 32:34 1Chronicles 21:15-19 Isaiah 63:9 Zechariah 1:12.13. Christ is always the visible member of the Godhead: John 1:18; after the incarnation He no longer appears as the Angel of Jehovah.


“thought it not robbery to be equal with God” is not a correct translation. We have three words here, the first of which is ouch (οὐχ) [pronounced ookh], one of the forms of the strong negative particle. This form is because we have a rough breathing in the next word harpagmon. These two words are a key, along with the verb hêgêsato, which is the aorist indicative of hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee]. Harpagmon is the accusative singular direct object from a very rare noun harpagmós (ἁρπαγμός) [pronounced har-pag-MOSS]. It is found only in this passage. It means the activity of the verb which means to seize forcibly, to take by force. It is used for plundering, for rape, for taking something by violence. It is a verb of violence in its original use in the Greek language. The noun connotes here, however, taking up an attitude toward something which is available as prey, taking an attitude toward something which can be grasped. It is a chance to gain something suddenly by seizing it. There is no robbery here. Christ did not see equality with God the Father and God the Holy Spirit as seizing and appropriating by violence something he didn’t have. In other words, He didn’t have to steal something. He didn’t have to seize by violence His place in heaven, He always had it. He was always God. Deity was not something that He had to reach for, it was something He always had.


So to summarize the principle, Jesus Christ did not regard equality with God as a gain which He must not let slip through His fingers by becoming true humanity. He wasn’t losing anything. Jesus had Deity; He was God. This was not something which He needed to seize and hold to himself. He could not lose it.


We also have hêgêsato which is the aorist active indicative of the verb hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee] which means the thinking of an expert. “A gain” is the accusative, so it is the object of the verb here. The verb is hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee], He did not think a gain to be seized. What is left out is “equality with God.” What this is actually saying is that He did not think equality with God a gain to be seized. He was equal with God, He was God, and therefore it wasn’t something he had to steal. The aorist tense of hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee] is the culminative aorist, it views the attitude of the eternal and pre-incarnate Jesus Christ in its entirety but it emphasizes the existing results in the incarnation, the hypostatic union, and the kenosis. Jesus Christ is eternal God, He is just as much deity as the first person and the third person of the Trinity, and therefore to become a member of the human race He didn’t think He couldn’t leave heaven because he might lose something, that if He became true humanity He would somehow be inferior, that somehow something would be stolen from Him. He didn’t have that attitude. He did not think equality with God a gain to be seized. The active voice: Jesus Christ as God in contemplating the incarnation produces the action. In other words, in the divine decrees of eternity past God the Father said, “The plan calls for you to go to the cross, become a member of the human race, and to provide eternal salvation for the human race, and at the same time to resolve the angelic conflict. Will you do it?” Answer: “I will.” The indicative mood is the reality of dynamic grace thinking of Jesus Christ prior to the incarnation.


Bob could enumerate 17 weird interpretations of this passage based upon the English.


Philippians 2:6 Who though He existed in the essence of God, He did not think equality with God a gain to be seized and held.


The verb to be is the articular present active infinitive of the verb eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. This is strictly Attic Greek. The articular infinitive in the accusative is the substantive serving as the object of the finite verb. The definite article is in the accusative, it is the object of the verb. He did not think equality with God a gain to be seized.


“equal with God” is the predicate nominative from the infinitive and it indicates more than one person in the Godhead because it is plural. “Equal” is in the plural — ísos (ἴσος) [pronounced EE-sos]. Why is it plural? Because there is more than one person in the Trinity.


We also have the instrumental associative noun theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. Jesus Christ was always associated with God the Father and God the Holy Spirit.


Summary

1.       Jesus Christ is God, coequal and co-eternal with the Father and with the Holy Spirit.

2.       Being God and living in heaven Christ did not have the arrogant attitude of Satan. His deity was not a gain to be seized and held in such a way as to hinder the plan of God the Father. There is no plan of grace without the incarnation. There is no salvation without the incarnation.

3.       Jesus Christ did not grab His deity and cling to it saying, No, No, No.

4.       The omniscience and mental attitude of God the second person of the Trinity was positive toward the plan of God the Father even though it involved the humiliation of being made lower than angels, human race type, in fact the last Adam.

5.       The mental attitude of Christ in submission to the Father’s plan of the first advent must become the mental attitude of the super-grace believer.

6.       The super-grace believer must not regard paragraph SG2 as a gain to be seized and held. In other words, you can’t stay in the R & R camp, you have to go back to combat. He must be willing to saddle up and move out, and go back to the fight.

7.       There is an analogy being set up here, to the supergrace believer who wants to continue in blessing and not go back to the battlefield; and Jesus Christ, who saved us because he did not see His Deity (and all attendant privileges) to be seized and held onto. He fulfilled the plan of God by coming to this earth; and we fulfill the plan of God by being willing to go onto the battlefield of the Christian life.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #41


41 03/29/1976 Philippians 2:7 Introduction; doctrines of the virgin birth, metamorphisms, hypostatic union


Philippians 2:7  but emptied Himself, having taken the form of a servant, having been made in the likeness of men.  (BLB)


Verse 7 answers the question: What was the person of Christ during the first advent?


The Virgin Birth

1.       The virgin birth refers to the only birth in human history, namely the incarnation, whereby no sex was involved. Jesus Christ was conceived by the Holy Spirit, therefore born apart from human copulation. In this way Christ came into the world without the imputation of Adam’s sin and without the old sin nature. The womb is cursed and this is how we come into the world. Jesus Christ is the only-born.

2.       The necessity for the virgin birth. It is based on the fact that the old sin nature is passed down to each member of the human race through the human father. This is because man sinned in cognisance while the woman sinned in ignorance — 1Timothy 2:14. Because the woman was deceived in the fall the old sin nature is passed down through the man in copulation. The virgin Mary was not immaculate, she had an old sin nature, she had the imputation of Adam’s sin. The virgin birth is the only way to be born into the human race apart from spiritual death and to be qualified to bear the sins of the world. Jesus Christ had to enter the human race apart from the sin nature and the imputation of Adam’s sin. So to qualify for saviourhood He had to enter the world under the saviourhood of the virgin birth.

3.       The first prophecy of the virgin birth is found in Genesis 3:15–16. “And I will put hostility between you and the woman, between your seed and her seed; he [the seed of the woman, Christ] shall crush your head [Satan], and you [Satan] will crush his heel [at the cross]. Unto the woman he said, multiplying I will multiply your pain in pregnancy; in sorrow you shall bear sons; and to your right man you will have the strongest desire, therefore he shall rule over you.” Strongest desire is a response. The woman was designed to respond to her right man. The man will always rule the woman where there is right man, right woman. The human race is divided into two conflicting camps. The historical phase of the angelic conflict includes the seed of the Satan, the unbeliever; the seed of the woman, the believer influenced by doctrine. These angelic forces are divided and so is the human race. The human race is divided by John 3:36. While the woman lost out in the garden because she rejected the authority of her right man, as well as the authority of Jesus Christ, she regains through receiving Christ as saviour plus her daily function of GAP. All of this is prophesied in the childbearing passage in Genesis 3:16.

4.       The Jewish prophecy of the virgin birth — Isaiah 7:14. It begins with an inferential conjunction lâkên (לָכֵן) [pronounced law-KANE], “therefore.” The conclusion is the fact that God the Father will provide a sign or a miracle beyond depth or beyond height — verse 11, Isaiah had offered such a miracle as a sign of divine deliverance and it had been refused. So Isaiah says God will give you a sign that has great theological implications. “he shall give [as a blessing]” is the qal imperfect of the verb nâthan (נָתַן) [pronounced naw-THAHN], the verb to give in the Hebrew. It is used here as a jussive. The jussive expresses a command, a wish, advice, or a blessing. Here it is a blessing. “a sign” — ʾôwth (אוֹת) [pronounced oath], which here means a supernatural manifestation. “Behold a virgin” — the word for virgin, ha ʿalemâh (עַלְמָה) [pronounced ģahle-MAW]. ʿalemâh (עַלְמָה) [pronounced ģahle-MAW] does mean two things. It means a virgin and it can also means simply a young woman without questioning whether she is a virgin or not. The word is not conclusive here but it is correctly translated as “virgin.” The reason is because in Matthew 1:22,23 we have the Greek equivalent parthenon (παρθένος) [pronounced par-THEN-oss] which means a virgin, not a young woman. “shall conceive” — qal perfect of hârâh (הָרָה) [pronounced haw-RAW]. The perfect tense is used here to indicate the reality of this fact. It is going to happen and so it is put in the past tense, the perfect tense of the Hebrew. This is called a prophetic perfect to indicate the fact that it is so certain to happen that it is regarded as already past. Then we have an inferential waw plus the qal active participle from the verb yâlad (יָלַד) [pronounced yaw-LAHD], and this means “consequently bearing a son.” The word “son” fulfills Isaiah 9:6. “and shall call his name Immanuel [God with us].”

          a.       Isaiah 7:14 Therefore the Lord Himself shall give [as a blessing] a sign: Behold a virgin shall conceive consequently bearing a son.

          b.       Isaiah 7:14 Therefore the Lord himself [God the Father] will give you a sign [supernatural manifestation]; Behold, the virgin shall be pregnant, consequently bearing a son, therefore you will call his name Immanuel [God with us].

5.       The historical fulfillment of the virgin birth — Matthew 1:19-25.

6.       The result of the virgin birth — John 1:14 The Word became flesh, and tabernacled among us (and we beheld the glory, the glory as of the Unique One from the Father), full of grace and full of doctrine.


The key to all of the metamorphisms is the same key in the virgin birth, it is the change is Jesus Christ from eternal God to the hypostatic union.


Isaiah 7:14 Therefore the Lord himself [God the Father] will give you a sign [supernatural manifestation]; Behold, the virgin shall be pregnant, consequently bearing a son, therefore you will call his name Immanuel [God with us].


The title implies virgin birth, hypostatic union, impeccability of the last Adam, the son of David, the Son of God. All of these great doctrines of Christology are related and all of them depend upon the virgin birth.


Metamorphisms

1.       Definition: Metamorphisms is derived from a Greek verb, metamorphóō (μεταμορφόω) [pronounced met-am-or-FOE-oh], and it means a change of form. Sometimes it means to transform. The verb can be used for an outward visible transformation, like Jesus being transfigured on the Mount of Transfiguration — Matthew 17:2. It can also be used for inner, invisible transformation, as in Romans 12:2. However, the theological connotation has to do with a striking change of form or thought or action.

2.       There are six metamorphisms in the Bible.

          a.       Innocent man in the garden became a sinner and spiritually dead — Genesis 3:6. Man who was not a sinner, who was free from evil of any kind, did not have an old sin nature, was not spiritually dead, and he had opportunity of making a choice, positive or negative. His positive volition would be to refrain from the plan of Satan called the tree of the knowledge of good and evil. Good and evil are the invention of Satan, works and evil the invention of Satan, the manifestation of his genius. All man had to do was to stay away from that one tree. Positive signals kept man in the state of innocence but once man went negative toward doctrine, which is going negative toward God, then he went positive toward Satan’s plan, the tree of the knowledge of good and evil, and ate from the tree. The result was the first metamorphism. Man who was innocent became a sinner, man was changed in that moment.

          b.       Genesis 3:16; 1Timothy 2:15. The woman who before the fall did not have a womb received a womb and became a child bearer. There were no children in innocence.

          c.        Eternal God, the second person of the Trinity, became the man Christ Jesus — Hebrews 10:5-10. The baby cannot talk, but the deity of Christ carries on a conversation with God the Father.

          d.       Sinful man through faith in Jesus Christ becomes regenerate, born again, a member of the family of God. This causes the spiritually dead to become alive unto God — Titus 3:5.

          e.       This is a temporal metamorphism of the royal family of God in time, the daily function of GAP changes the believer from a spiritual baby to a mature believer.

          f.        An eternal metamorphosis, the royal family of God in eternity having a resurrection body minus the old sin nature, minus human good, minus the lake of fire.


The Hypostatic Union

1.       Definition.

          a.       In the person of the incarnate Christ [Incarnate means the God-Man; Christ means God, but the God-Man is represented by the word incarnation] are two natures inseparably united [The first nature is God; second nature: true humanity] without mixture or loss of separate identity [This means the deity remains deity and the humanity remains humanity. Even though they are inseparably united they are not blended], without loss or transfer of properties or attributes, the union being personal and eternal.

          b.       In other words, since the incarnation Jesus Christ is true humanity and undiminished deity in one person forever.

          c.        Jesus Christ is the God-Man, different from God in that He is mankind, different from mankind in that He is God.

          d.       Jesus Christ, therefore, is the unique person of the universe. As God he is infinitely superior to man and angel, as humanity He is now superior to all angels and all other forms of human life.

          e.       The pre-incarnate person of Christ was deity, coequal with the Father and with the Holy Spirit. The post-incarnate person of Christ includes both undiminished deity and true humanity in one person forever.

          f.        Through the virgin birth Jesus Christ was born without an old sin nature, without the imputation of Adam’s sin. In His humanity Jesus Christ was trichotomous, having a true body, a true soul, and a true human spirit. In His deity He retained all of the essence of the Godhead.

2.       Biblical documentation of the hypostatic union:

          a.       Compare John 1:1-3 which describes the deity of Christ with John 1:14. Remember that “only-born one” is the fact that when God the Father gave the spark of life to Jesus Christ He was the only person ever born and ever given the spark of life who did not have an old sin nature.

          b.       Romans 1:3-5 — “...born the seed of David according to the flesh, who was demonstrated the Son of God by means of power, according to the Holy Spirit, by the resurrection from the deaths [plural].” Christ was resurrected from two deaths, spiritual death and physical death.

          c.        Romans 9:5 — “...from whom is Christ, according to the flesh, who is over all, God blessed forever.” He is flesh and God.

          d.       1Timothy 3:16 — “And by consent of all, great is the mystery doctrine with reference to godliness: the unique one [Jesus Christ as eternal God] became visible by means of the flesh [Jesus Christ is true humanity], the same one [Christ in hypostatic union] was vindicated by means of the Holy Spirit, observed by angels, proclaimed among the nations, became the object of faith in the world, taken up into the place of glory.”

          e.       Hebrews 2:14 — “Since therefore children share blood and flesh, he also himself [Jesus Christ] in the same manner took hold of the same flesh and blood, in order that he through spiritual death might neutralize and destroy the one having the ruling power of spiritual death, that is, the devil.”

          f.        Philippians 2:5-11.

3.       The incarnate person of Christ includes His deity. Jesus Christ is eternal God. He is coequal with the Father and with the Holy Spirit and His deity was never diminished at any time during the incarnation, nor at any time because of the hypostatic union. The incarnation does not diminish or destroy His deity, therefore the doctrine represents Christ as undiminished deity forever.

4.       The incarnate person of Christ is also true humanity. That means He has a body, a soul, a human spirit. Because of the virgin birth Christ was born without the old sin nature and without the imputation of Adam’s sin. When God the Father gave the spark of life to Jesus Christ it is the only case on record where both human life and spiritual life occurred simultaneously with life at birth.

5.       In hypostatic union the two natures of Christ are united without transfer of attributes. The attributes adhere to their corresponding natures. The essence of His deity cannot be changed — Hebrews 13:8. In other words, the infinite cannot blend in and become finite; the infinite cannot be transferred to the finite. To take from God a single attribute of His deity would destroy His deity and to take from the humanity of Christ a single attribute of His humanity would destroy His humanity, so they never leave one and go to the other.

6.       No attribute of divine essence was changed by the incarnation. In fulfilling the Father’s plan for the first advent certain attributes of deity were not manifest but they were there. This does not imply that they were surrendered or destroyed, as per the false doctrine of Kenosis.

7.       Therefore the union of divine essence and the human nature of the incarnate Christ must be considered as two things: hypostatic and personal. It is a hypostatic union, it is a personal union. Hypostatic is the Greek noun hupóstasis (ὑπόστασις) [pronounced hoop-OSS-tas-ihs] transliterated. It means standing under, substance or essence, or taking a thing on one’s self. Jesus Christ was eternal God, there never was a time when he wasn’t God, He took upon Himself true humanity — Hebrews 1:3. Hypostatic refers to the whole person of Christ as distinguished from His two natures. When certain things occur we analyze it on the basis of His deity of His humanity. Deity does not become humanity, that would destroy humanity; humanity does not become deity, that would destroy deity. So the attributes of His humanity remain the attributes of His humanity and the attributes of His deity remain the attributes of His deity but He is one person with two natures inseparably united forever. The personal part of the concept refers to the emergence of a unique person. As God Jesus Christ is coequal with the Father and with the Holy Spirit but He is different from them because He is true humanity. As true humanity Jesus Christ is superior to all members of the human race but He is different from the human race in that He is God.

8.       The false interpretation of the hypostatic union. There is a false implication that the deity of Christ is possessed by the humanity of Christ or that the deity of Christ indwelt the humanity of Christ. Furthermore, the union was more than harmony or sympathy which is the view of liberalism. All the false concepts either say that Jesus Christ was humanity and not God, Jesus Christ was God and not humanity after the first advent, or that the deity of Christ indwelt the humanity of Christ. This is all false. The true fact: It is personal. Divine and human natures have been combined in one hypostatic union forever.

9.       Therefore Jesus Christ, the God-Man, has one hupostassis or essence forever.

          a.       The attributes of both divine and human natures belong to the person of Christ. They are united but not compromised or changed.

          b.       The characteristics of one nature are never attributed to the other. The characteristics of the deity of Christ are never attributed to the humanity of Christ. The characteristics of the humanity of Christ are never attributed to the deity of Christ.

          c.        This means that during the first advent Jesus Christ could be simultaneously omnipotent and weak. He could be omniscient and ignorant. As a baby in the cradle He was ignorant, but He went all of the way to ultra-super-grace, “full of grace and doctrine” — John 1:14. He was omnipresent in His deity but He was always located in one place at a time in His humanity.

10.     The necessity for the humanity of Christ. Four principles:

          a.       Jesus Christ had to become a member of the human race to be our saviour — Philippians 2:7,8; Hebrews 2:14,15.

          b.       He had to become true humanity to be our mediator, for the mediator is defined as being equal with man and God, the two parties in the mediation. Jesus Christ is mediatory because He is God; equal with God. Jesus Christ is also true humanity, and that is why there is only one mediator — Job 9:2,32,33; 1Timothy 2:5,6.

          c.        A priest is a man who represent man before God so before Jesus Christ could be a priest He had to be true humanity — Hebrews 7:4,5,14,28; 10:5-14.

          d.       Jesus Christ had to be the son of David to fulfill the unconditional covenants to Israel, therefore He had to be born a true member of the human race, also the son of David — 2Samuel 7:8-16; Psalm 89:28-37.

11.     Everything verbally communicated by Jesus during the incarnation came from one of three sources: His deity, His humanity, or from His entire person called the hypostatic union.

12.     The categories of attributes that come out of point 11. This is related to the person of Christ who is God and man in one person forever.

          a.       The attributes which are true of His entire person. For example, saviour or redeemer. This is an attribute which is true of the God-Man, His whole person. Both natures are necessary for the function of saviour and redeemer. Jesus said in John 14:6, “I am the way, the truth, and the life; no man cometh unto the Father but by me.” He said in Matthew 11:28, “Come unto me all ye that labour and are heavy laden, and I will give you rest.” That was spoken from His entire person.

          b.       The attributes true only of His deity but the whole person is the subject. The subject is the entire person, the God-Man but the attribute given is true of His entire person. The whole person is the subject of John 8:58 but eternity is an attribute of deity and applies only to the divine nature.

          c.        The attributes true only of His humanity, but the whole person is the subject. John 19:28 — “I thirst.” Only the humanity of Christ could thirst, but He said “I thirst” and “I” is the God-Man.

          d.       The person of Christ is described according to His divine nature but the predicate of the human nature. Revelation 1:18, the deity of Christ is in evidence, yet Christ is described as the one who was dead. Death is only possible to the humanity of Christ. This classification disappears after the resurrection, ascension and session.

          e.       The person of Christ is described according to His human nature but the predicate of the divine nature — John 6:62. While the title Son of Man belongs to His human nature the predicate, ascending where He was before, describes the divine nature of Christ.

          f.        The person of Christ is described according to His divine nature but the predicate of both natures. John 5:25-27. Christ is described according to His divine nature under the title “Son of God.” However, Christ will execute judgement as the God-Man. The title Son of God specifically emphasizes the involvement of the humanity of Christ so we have the person of Christ described according to His divine nature — Son of God, but the predicate of both natures. Christ will judge as the God-Man.

          g.       The person of Christ is described according to His human nature but the predicate of both natures — Matthew 27:46. Christ was speaking from His human nature. The sins of the world were being poured out upon the humanity of Christ, but He says “Why have you forsaken me?” The pronoun “me” has reference to the God-Man. So the person of Christ is described according to His human nature but the predicate of both natures “me” is the God-Man. So Christ was forsaken by God the Father and God the Holy Spirit because He was bearing our sins in His own body on the tree — in His human body. The same concept is found in John 5:22 where the Son of Man, the humanity of Christ, and the Son of God, the deity of Christ, will judge the world. But Christ spoke from His humanity when He said that the Father gives all judgment to the Son.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #42


42 03/30/1976 Philippians 2:7 Doctrine of KENOSIS (revised)


Philippians 2:7  but emptied Himself, having taken the form of a servant, having been made in the likeness of men.  (BLB)


Verse 7 — “But” is the adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], it sets up a contrast between the deity, a gain to be seized and held, and the sacrifice of the kenosis.


“But made himself of no reputation.” We have a Greek phrase made up of two words, heauton (ἑαυτόν) [pronounced heh-ow-TOHN] ekenôsen (ἐκένωσεν). The accusative singular of heautou (ἑαυto) [pronounced heh-ow-TOO], a reflexive pronoun which occurs with enough frequency to be very important. It is important here because it gives great emphatic position to a voluntary action of divine sovereignty in a very special way. The divine sovereignty of Jesus Christ is given tremendous emphasis. We think of the sovereignty of God in so many ways. Here we find the sovereignty of God involved in what might be classified as an act of humiliation. So the reflexive pronoun becomes extremely important. When the action of the verb is referred back to its own subject the construction is called reflexive. Jesus Christ Himself from His own deity and from the volition of His deity, known as sovereignty, made a decision to become true humanity. The greatness of this decision can never be overemphasized because our salvation, our very existence, and our eternal future are all based upon this decision.

ekenôsen (ἐκένωσεν)


There were actually two great decisions related to our salvation. The first is the decision of sovereign deity which is described in this passage — heauton (ἑαυτόν) [pronounced heh-ow-TOHN] ekenôsen (ἐκένωσεν), He deprived Himself of the proper function of deity. The second was the decision of His true humanity mentioned in Matthew 26:39; Mark 14:36; Luke 22:41–42 (And He withdrew from them about a stone's throw, and knelt down and prayed, saying, “Father, if You are willing, remove this cup from Me. Nevertheless, not My will, but Yours, be done.”). The composite of all of these phrases indicates in a very forcible and important way the tremendous decisions involved in providing everything that we have right now. The cup represents the cross.


With this reflexive pronoun we have the aorist active indicative of kenoô (κενόω) [pronounced kehn-OH-oh]. Kenoô (κενόω) [pronounced kehn-OH-oh] means to deprive one’s self of a proper function. It means, by the way, that you do it yourself. The aorist tense is a constantive aorist which states the incarnation or the first advent, views it in its entirety, gathers it into a single whole which is the function of the true kenosis. The active voice: Jesus Christ by a sovereign decision from His deity, as emphasized in the reflexive pronoun, produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of dogmatic and absolute reality. The phrase says literally, that He deprived himself of the proper function of His deity. A second phrase is added to further explain what is involved in this kenosis:


“and took upon him the form of a servant” — the accusative singular direct object of morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY]. There is no conjunction, it was used as a translator’s device. The word “form” comes first in this phrase, emphasizing this word in a very unusual way. The first important word is morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] refers to inner essence or form. The next important word we will see is schema (σχμα) [pronounced SKAY-mah] which means outer appearance. The third will be homoíōma (ὁμοίωμα) [pronounced hom-OY-oh-mah] which means overt appearance but not true inner nature.


There are many nuances to the connotation of morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] but generally it refers to inner essence which is perceivable in contrast to schema (σχμα) [pronounced SKAY-mah] which connotes overt appearance, overt form, overt shape. We had the word morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] previously used in verse 6 for the essence of God. Jesus Christ was morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] of God in eternity past. Now it is used for morphên (μορφὴν) doulou (δούλου), the inner essence of humanity whereas in verse 6 it was the inner essence of God. Put the two morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY]s together and you have the hypostatic union: morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] God and morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] slave or servant. The absence of the definite article emphasizes the high quality of our Lord’s slavery, the highest quality of a servant in all of history. We also have the descriptive genitive singular from the noun doulos (δολος) [pronounced DEW-loss] which means a slave. It is also used for servant. So we have the principle of our Lord taking upon Himself the form of a slave.


Slavery is a great existence, because all your needs are provided by someone else.


“took” — the aorist active participle from the verb lambánô (λαμβάνω) [pronounced lahm-BAHN-oh] which means to receive. The aorist tense here is a constantive aorist, it contemplates the incarnation, the first advent, in its entirety. It starts at the point of the virgin birth and takes us all the way to the resurrection, ascension and session, and gathers it up into one entirety. This passage emphasizes the cross, and during that entire period our Lord was a slave or a servant. The active voice: the incarnate person of Jesus Christ produces the action of the verb. The participle is known as a complementary participle, it completes the idea of the action expressed in the main verb, kenoô (κενόω) [pronounced kehn-OH-oh]. It is also a temporal participle and therefore it should be translated: “But He deprived Himself of the proper function of deity when He received the form of a servant.”


“and was made in the likeness of men” — it starts with a prepositional phrase and, again, there is no “and.” We have the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative singular of homoíōma (ὁμοίωμα) [pronounced hom-OY-oh-mah]. en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative means “in,” and it should be “in likeness [overtly but not inwardly].” This is a synonym to eikôn (εἰκών) [pronounced ī-KOHN] which is the Greek word for image, likeness, form, appearance — on the outside but not on the inside. So the translation “in likeness” means that Christ had a true physical body, fashioned like any male physical body, but He did not have on the inside a sin nature. Inwardly the true humanity of Jesus was impeccable. The essential difference between Christ and the other members of the human race, then, was impeccability.


With this a a descriptive genitive plural of anthrôpos (ἄνθρωπος) [pronounced ANTH-row-poss] which means mankind. The absence of the definite article calls attention to the high quality of the true humanity of Christ. Jesus Christ is the highest quality from the standpoint of kenosis and the standpoint of impeccability. There is also, the aorist active participle from the verb gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my]. The dramatic aorist states the present reality of the incarnation with the certitude of a past event. The Greek idiom is a device for emphasis on doctrine which has been understood and correlated. The active voice: Jesus Christ produces the action of the first advent. The participle is complementary, it is used to complete the idea of the main verb, kenoô (κενόω) [pronounced kehn-OH-oh].


Philippians 2:7 But he deprived himself of the proper function of deity, when he had received the form of a servant, although he had been born in the likeness of mankind.


The Doctrine of Kenosis

1.       The origin of the doctrine. It is derived from kenoô (κενόω) [pronounced kehn-OH-oh] used in Philippians 2:7 — “He deprived Himself of the proper function of deity, when He had received the form of a servant, although He had been born in the likeness of mankind.” The verb in context means to deprive Himself of the proper function of His divine essence.

2.       Definition of kenosis: Christ voluntarily took on Himself the form of mankind in order to redeem man from sin, to reconcile man to God, and to propitiate God the Father. All of these purposes were accomplished at the cross. In fulfilling the mission of the first advent Jesus Christ did not exercise His divine attributes to benefit Himself or to provide for Himself or to glorify Himself.

          a.       None of the attributes of Deity were removed. To remove one attribute of Deity is to have no Deity at all.

3.       The false concept of Kenosis.

          a.       The relative divine attributes of Christ were surrendered during the incarnation.

          b.       Denial that Christ had a real body or His body was made of a heavenly substance instead of human flesh.

          c.        Denial that the incarnation involved any humiliation — the blasphemy of the Lutheran church since the time of Melanchthon.

          d.       The kenotic theologians who hold that the Logos [Jesus Christ] though retaining His divine self-consciousness and His imminent attributes — holiness, love and truth — surrendered or erased His relative attributes which are omniscience, omnipotence, omnipresence.

4.       The objections to these false doctrines of Kenosis. There are three basic ones:

          a.       It is impossible to surrender and attribute without changing the character or the essence to which that attribute belongs. So we have five principles:

                     i.         To rob light of its various colours would change the character of light.

                     ii.        To rob God of any attribute would destroy His deity.

                     iii.       If Christ did not possess all the attributes of divine essence then He did not possess true deity.

                     iv.       Since attributes belong to the essence it is impossible to subtract any attribute without destroying the essence of God.

                     v.        The fact remains that during the incarnation Jesus Christ was God, undiminished deity without any change. The incarnation and hypostatic union did not change any attribute of deity.

          b.       There is no logical basis for distinguishing between relative attributes and absolute attributes as being more or less essential to deity. Absolute attributes imply the necessity for relative attributes.

                     i.         The absolute attributes of the essence of God are three: Spirituality of God, the infinity of God, the perfection of God. Under the spirituality of God we have His life and personality; under the infinity of God we have His self-existence, immutability and unity; and under the perfection of God we have His holiness, truth and love.

                     ii.        The relative attributes (relative to things which exist): First of all, those related to time and space: eternity and immensity. Secondly, those related to creation: omniscience, omnipresence, and omnipotence. Thirdly, those related to moral beings: veracity and faithfulness which involve truth, mercy and goodness which involve His love, justice and righteousness which involve His holiness.

                     iii.       The principle: If one category of attributes is necessary for deity it logically follows that other categories of attributes are likewise essential. In the false doctrines of kenosis, someone is trying to remove one or more of these attributes.

          c.        The purpose of the Gospel of John is to prove the deity of Christ, that He remain in status quo during His incarnation and during His humiliation of the incarnation. His omnipresence continued while in the flesh, as illustrated by John 1:48; 3:13.

5.       The fact of the true humiliation of the incarnation. There is a false doctrine of humiliation and there is a true doctrine. The false doctrine of humiliation goes with the false doctrine of kenosis; the true doctrine of humiliation goes with the true doctrine of kenosis.

          a.       In taking on Himself the form of man the Lord Jesus Christ veiled His pre incarnate glory. The glory of Christ was veiled but never surrendered. On the Mount of Transfiguration the glory was revealed, and at Gethsemane instantaneously there was a flash of His glory which knocked over the soldiers trying to seize Him — John 18:6.

          b.       The union of Christ in unglorified humanity is a necessary factor in His humiliation. There was humiliation. While the deity of Christ was united to perfect humanity He was still subject to temptation, distress, weakness, pain, sorrow, and limitation. This is humiliation for undiminished deity. This continued until His resurrection.

          c.        From His own free will Jesus Christ did not use His relative attributes of omniscience, omnipotence, and omnipresence. These attributes were not surrendered but voluntarily restricted in keeping with the Father’s plan for the first advent. During the first advent Christ therefore gave up the independent exercise of certain divine attributes in living among men with their human limitations.

          d.       Christ depended on the power of the Holy Spirit or the power of the Father in the performance of all miracles and all extra-natural phenomena. He depended upon maximum doctrine resident in His soul for all normal functions of His humanity. Omnipotence could have turned the whole world into cake. This is where Satan tempted Jesus. Unique temptations.

6.       The true doctrine of Kenosis.

          a.       During the incarnation Jesus Christ was both undiminished deity and true humanity in one person forever.

          b.       Therefore as undiminished deity He did not surrender His divine attributes or empty His deity, as per the blasphemies of the false kenosises.

          c.        However, Christ voluntarily restricted the independent use of these attributes of deity in compliance with the Father’s plan. This was the great issue in the three unique temptations of Jesus Christ. They were unique because no one else has ever been tempted that way: rulership of the world; gone without food for forty days and then tempted to turn stones into bread — this was a legitimate temptation with regard to the Lord Jesus Christ because it dealt with the use of His relative attributes independently of God the Father. He did not so in Matthew 4:1-10.

          d.       Therefore Christ did not exercise His divine attributes for His own benefit or His own glory. He did not give up His deity but He voluntarily gave up the independent exercise of His deity when that reliance upon His Deity would violate the Father’s plan.

          e.       To execute the Father’s plan for the first advent the humanity of Christ relied on logistical grace, just as we do, plus the ministry of the Holy Spirit, plus Bible doctrine resident in His soul.

          f.        Consequently the independent expression of His deity and the independent exercise of His divine attributes was “not a gain to be seized and held so that the Father’s plan for the first advent would be neutralised” — the corrected translation of Philippians 2:6. The KJV is a stupid translation.

          g.       Therefore Christ voluntarily took upon Himself the form of a servant in order to redeem man from sin, to propitiate God the Father, to reconcile man to God.

          h.       In fulfilling the mission of the first advent Jesus Christ did not exercise His divine attributes to benefit Himself, to provide for Himself, to glorify Himself.

7.       The factors of kenosis.

          a.       Christ gave up the outward appearance [schema (σχμα) [pronounced SKAY-mah]] but not the essence [morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY]], the inner essence of God.

          b.       Therefore Christ took upon Himself the likeness of mankind [homoíōma (ὁμοίωμα) [pronounced hom-OY-oh-mah] anthrôpos (ἄνθρωπος) [pronounced ANTH-row-poss]].

          c.        For this reason He prayed for glorification of His true humanity in John 17:5.

          d.       Jesus Christ had not emptied His deity or His divine glory but at this point He had not yet achieved the strategic victory of the angelic conflict.

          e.       Therefore in John 17:5 Jesus was praying for battlefield victory for His humanity, not for the restoration of His divine glory; and He was not asking for God the Father to give Him back His essence. He always had His Deity, so he was not praying for it.

8.       Part of the kenosis is the sustaining ministry of the Holy Spirit to the humanity of Christ. This is prophesied in Isaiah 11:1–3. Related to the virgin birth in Matthew 1:20 Psalm 40:6 Hebrews 10:5 constantly filled with the Spirit (John 3:34), related to the baptism of Jesus in Matthew 3:13–17, related to our Lord’s public ministry in Matthew 12:18.

          a.       Isaiah prophesied that a power system would come, i.e., that God the Holy Spirit would indwell a human and fill the soul. Jesus Christ was the first one to receive this ministry. Isaiah 11:1-3, 42:1, 61:1.

          b.       This ministry of the Holy Spirit is related to the virgin birth in Matthew 1:20; Psalm 40:6; Hebrews 10:5.

          c.        Christ was constantly filled with the Spirit from birth, John 3:34.

          d.       The filling of the Holy Spirit is related to the baptism of Jesus, Matthew 3:13-17.

          e.       It is related to His public ministry, Matthew 12:18, 28 Luke 4:14-15, 17-18, 21.

          f.        The omnipotence of the Holy Spirit sustained Jesus Christ while bearing our sins on the cross. (See Doctrine of Omnipotence.)

          g.       The Holy Spirit's ministry to Christ is continued as the agent in resurrection, Romans 8:11; 1Peter 3:18-19.

          h.       This same ministry and power is transferred to the royal family, John 7:38-39, 16:13-14 2Corinthians 3:1-3 Ephesians 3:16-17.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #43


43 03/31/1976 Philippians 2 Doctrines of KENOSIS, divine essence, attributes (revised)


Corrected translation. The Doctrine of Divine Essence continues into the next lesson. I will keep most or all of the notes with lesson #43.


Bob goes back to review the doctrine of Kenosis. Any additional notes will be placed with the previous lesson. 19 minutes in, Bob is ready to cover this next doctrine (which I assume will continue in lesson #44). There are perhaps three doctrines with this name in the Notebook, but none of them match the doctrine given below.


The Doctrine of Divine Essence

1.       Definition.

          a.       “Essence” is derived from the Greek adjective, sometimes used as a substantive, ousía (οὐσία) [pronounced oo-SEE-ah]. It is derived from one of the participial forms of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME], “to be,” but it doesn’t mean “being,” it means “substance.” Therefore substance means inner nature, true substance, intrinsic nature, the qualities or the attributes of a person — invisible in many cases, also manifest in some.

          b.       Essence implies the existence or being. Essence, therefore, refers to the qualities [here] or attributes of God — being, qualities, attributes.

          c.        At no point does the believer feel his limitations more than when confronted with the responsibility of accurately recognizing the essence of God. And yet it is revealed to be understood.

          d.       Since God is a spirit His attributes or qualities are invisible. They are spiritual. They are invisible to human perception through empiricism or rationalism. This is where only exegesis clarifies.

          e.       The believer is totally dependent upon divine revelation from the canon of scripture to understand the invisible, immaterial, unlimited essence of God.

          f.        Super-grace Moses was commanded to remove his shoes because he stood on holy ground when confronted with the essence of God — operation burning bush. We should concentrate and be reverent regarding this doctrine.

          g.       The doctrine of divine essence recognizes the existence of the Godhead in three persons, each person of the Trinity having identical essence or attributes.

          h.       Therefore God is one in essence, three in persons. There are three separate and distinct persons but they all share one identical essence.

          i.         The oneness of God and/or the glory of God refers to His essence or character — John 10:30.

          j.         All the attributes of divine essence are resident in God but all are not manifest at the same time — as illustrated by light. The essence of light is always manifest, but made known to us by reflection or refraction. They are all there, but they do not all manifest at the same time.

2.       The correlation between essence and the Trinity. The fact that God exists in three separate and distinct persons is documented by such passages as Isaiah 48:16 John 10:30 cf. Psalm 110:1 2Corinthians 13:14 1Peter 1:2. Remember that each member of the Godhead is a separate person but each member of the Godhead has identical essence or attributes. So the scripture emphasizing essence always declares that God is one. That does not mean one person, that means one essence. “One” is a numerical adjective, it must have a modifier. It modifies the essence of God, not the persons of God. Elohim emphasizes the essence of God; and YHWH distinguishes One Member of the Godhead from another.

3.       The concept of divine personality.

          a.       The personality of man is due to the fact he is made in the image of God. This is teaching by frame of reference. We are aware of the oneness of man yet the differences between people. In essence, man is one, like the words mankind, homo sapiens.

          b.       Man’s personality is based on the essence of man’s soul — his self-consciousness, his mentality, his volition, his emotion.

          c.        There are many people in the human race but all have the same essence. Therefore mankind is one but has many personalities in mankind. Men have the same essence, but men are not equal.

          d.       While, mankind is possessed of the essential elements of personality and is capable of their normal exercise within a limited sphere, God is the embodiment and the source of these essential elements which He exercises in the sphere of infinity and to a limitless degree. Man is a reflection of the limitlessness of God (the infinite nature of God).

          e.       Almost every page of the Bible asserts the personality of God. (For category #1 love you must become aware of God’s personality)

          f.        For example God designs and executes and empowers. That is personality.

          g.       God speaks of Himself as “I,” therefore He is self-conscious and eternally Himself.

          h.       God thinks; God makes decisions; God feels. The person and substance of God is the superstructure of His divine essence. God is a personality; God has attributes.

4.       The attributes of God.

          a.       Those qualities and perfections which belong to God are termed attributes.

          b.       Essence is the being which is attributed to God since these charactersitics are eternally inherent in Him.

          c.        Since the grace of God and the work of God are manifestations of His essential qualities or attributes it is important to understand the essence of deity or divine attributes to understand the thoughts and functions of God. After salvation, we are designed to understand the thoughts and the functions of God.

          d.       The difficulty of the study of divine essence is that it brings the finite human mind into constant contemplation and concentration on the infinite.

          e.       There are two categories of divine attributes. The basic essence has already covered many times, but it is an over-simplification. This is 1+1 = 2

                     i.         The absolute. These are intransitive, primary, and incommunicable;

                     ii.        The relative. These are transitive, secondary, and communicable.


What God has revealed in His Word, He means for us to understand.


Divine Attributes: the Breaking down of Sub-point 5:

A.       Absolute attributes:

          1.       Spirituality of God. God the Holy Spirit produces the character of God in us; this is us being spiritual, which reflects the Person of God.

                     a.       The true theistic concept of the universe is that the universe is composed of material and immaterial.

                     b.       Matter is material but God is immaterial — John 4:24 — in contrast to all living creatures who are both material and immaterial. Human beings are material and immaterial — 2Corinthians 4:7.16.

                     c.        God is life; God lives — Jeremiah 10:10 1Thessalonians 1:9. God does not possess life as we do but He lives; He is life. All life is from Him but not of Him as pantheism claims.

                     d.       The eternal life of God is imparted through Jesus Christ to all who believe in Jesus Christ — John 3:36 5:24 10:10 14:6 20:31 1John 5:11,12.

                     e.       God is also personality. He not only lives but He is a person — Exodus 3:14. Personality connotes both self-consciousness and self-determination. There is the true concept of personality.

                     f.        God recognizes Himself to be a person and as such He acts rationally.

                     g.       Animals are conscious but not self-conscious. Animals have determination but not self-determination. Therefore animals will not be in heaven.

                     h.       Man is a person possessing to a limited degree self-consciousness and self-determination, but God is infinite personality.

                     i.         His absolute will and absolute perfection characterize both His design and execution — Ephesians 1:9,11.

                     j.         God is to an absolute degree all that constitutes personality. He is Himself, He knows Himself to be beyond comparison with any other being.

          2.       Infinity.

                     a.       By infinity is meant that God is without boundary or limitation, uniting those perfections which belong to His own character. They all coalesce to His essence but they are without boundary or limitation.

                     b.       God cannot tempt; He cannot sin.

                     c.        God cannot be complicated with ignorance nor absurdities.

                     d.       God may be self-limited as in the case of the incarnate Christ in the hypostatic union under kenosis. God’s infinity is intensive rather than extensive. God is infinite energy and power — Psalm 8:3.

                     e.       Infinity characterizes all that God does — His holiness, His love, His veracity.

                     f.        The divine motive is for His Own glory, not His self-praise or self-aggrandizement. God recognizes His glory and claims it in the interests of absolute truth.

                     g.       Because of this fact all things exist, as per Exodus 33:18 Psalm 19:1 Isaiah 6:3 Matthew 6:13 Acts 7:2 Romans 1:23 9:23 Hebrews 1:3 1Peter 4:14. God’s glory was before all creation — John 17:5. God’s glory exists apart from His creatures.

                     h.       Infinity involves three categories or characteristics: self-existence, immutability, and unity.

                                (1)      Self-existence:

                                           (a)      God exists eternally unsustained by Himself or any other source. God cannot be better or worse because of His character. We have to do things in order to be sustained; and we have to depend upon God to be sustained.

                                           (b)      Jehovah or the Tetragrammaton means the self-existing one.

                                           (c)      God’s existence is unalterable. He is the cause of all existence outside of Himself.

                                (2)      Immutability:

                                           (a)      God is unchanging; God cannot change. God cannot, again, be better or worse. The problem is that anthropomorphic representations of God in the scripture are misunderstood. The really represent the perfect attitude of God toward variations in man or in history in human language so man can understand God’s policy. If we have a relationship with God and God is unchanging, then whois going to do the changing?

                                           (b)      These Anthropomorphisms make it appear that God changes, but we are the ones who change, and God adjusts to whatever change has taken place in us. When we change, God appears to change, but He does not actually change. Immutability is consistent with God’s freedom and His ceaseless activity.

                                           (c)      God’s immutability is Illustrated by a weather vane, which twists with the wind, but retains its exact essence. The change is in the wind, not in the weather vane.

                                           (d)      God is free to do anything according to His own essence and therefore salvation is not God’s second best but a part of His eternal purpose.

                                (3)      Unity:

                                           (a)      Jehovah our Elohim is one Jehovah — Deuteronomy 6:4. There is one perfect absolute spirit, says Isaiah 44:6 John 5:44 17:3 1Corinthians 8:4 1Timothy 1:17. Unity only applies to divine essence, not to the persons.

          3.       Perfection

                     a.       The intellect, character and affections of God are perfect. Divine perfection involves truth, love and holiness. Take for example truth. This is not merely veracity to other beings. God is true to Himself, to His own being, to His own character. So truth as an attribute of perfect or is a part of perfection is the truth that God is true to Himself, His own being, His own essence, His own character. Man says, “I speak the truth,” but God says, “I am the truth” — John 14:6. God does not hold the truth as being acquired, He is the truth from eternity past. In God every truth and every form of knowledge dwells in absoluteness. Therefore the dogmatism of Bible doctrine. This absolute guarantees the genuineness of divine revelation — Deuteronomy 32:4 1John 5:20 John 6:32 15:1 Hebrews 8:2.

                     b.       Also a part of His absolute perfection is love. Like all the attributes love belongs to God’s being. We may acquire love for persons and by growing in grace to the point of super-grace love for God is acquired. But God does never acquire, never attain love; He always was love. God is love regardless of having any object to love. For us, love often requires an object; God’s love does not require an object. Man may fall in love with a woman and this changes everything about the man. For the moment, there is a category #2 vacuum. God is always love, even without having an object. It is His nature to bestow Himself whether there is an occasion or not.

                     c.        Holiness. God is absolute holiness from all eternity — Exodus 15:11 19:10-16 Isaiah 6:3. This holiness is required of men — 2Corinthians 7:1 1 Thessalonians 3:13 4:7. God’s holiness is maintained by His will, it is His unchangeable self. His holiness includes righteousness and justice. The two of them together make up His holiness which is His perfection.

B.       Relative attributes (these attributes must be related to something):

          1.       Eternity and immensity (related to time and space).

                     a.       Eternity applied to God means that He has always existed and always will exist, totally apart from time.

                     b.       God is not subject to time for He is the cause of time, the origin of time — Deuteronomy 32:40 Psalm 90:2 102:27 1Corinthians 2:7 Ephesians 1:4 1Timothy 1:17.

                     c.        Both time and space but without substance are both objects of His creation. Time and space were created even though they do not have substance.

                     d.       God is not in time but time is in God — another way of saying God is the origin of time. Maybe we could say that God is not subject to time but time is subject to God.

                     e.       God transcends all creation, including time.

                     f.        God is logical, therefore He does not need to be chronological — Romans 4:17.

                     g.       Time which is finite has both succession and duration.

                     h.       Eternity, which is infinite, has duration only. Time has a line of procedure while eternity is a circle reaching into infinity.

          2.       Immensity:

                     a.       God is not subject to space. Like time, God created space.

                     b.       God cannot be more or less than He is.

                     c.        God is the cause of space — Romans 8:29.

                     d.       In relation to space God is both imminent and transcendent.

                     e.       Omnipresence is the term descriptive of space in relationship to God; immensity is the term descriptive of God’s relationship to space.

                     f.        Since God is the creator, the cause of space, if space were defined in boundaries God would exceed those boundaries to infinity.

          3.       Creation: In relationship to creation there are three relative charactersitics of His essence — omnipresence, omniscience, omnipotence.

                     a.       Omnipresence:

                                (1)      God is personally present everywhere. The whole of God is in every place.

                                (2)      This is not pantheism since pantheism denies the person of God.

                                (3)      God in the total of His essence, without diffusion, expansion, multiplication or division penetrates and fills the universe. That is omnipresence. Psalm 139:7,8 Jeremiah 23:23,24 Acts 17:27.

                                (4)      God is also free to be local, as in the mountain with Moses or in the holy of holies, the Shekinah glory between the angelic creatures. He is free to become flesh and tabernacle among us, as per John 1:14.

                     b.       Omniscience:

                                (1)      God is all-wise. He knows perfectly and eternally all that is knowable whether actual or possible — Psalm 147:4 Matthew 10:29 Psalm 33:13-15 Acts 15:8 Hebrews 4:3 Psalm 132:9 Matthew 6:8 Malachi 3:16 Matthew 10:30 Isaiah 46:9,10 Isaiah 44:28.

                                (2)      There are three categories of divine knowledge or omniscience. First there is there is the eternal concept of His knowledge — Acts 15:18. Secondly, His knowledge is incomprehensible — Romans 11:33. Thirdly, His knowledge is wise — Ephesians 3:10.

                                (3)      Every detail of creation in history is in God’s mind at all times.

                                (4)      Therefore the future is as perspicuous to God as the past.

                                (5)      God foreknows the future. Since events take place according to His councils He foreknows. But God’s foreknowledge is not predetermination. He knows but doesn’t interfere with volition.

                                (6)      God foreknows the functions of every free will. He foreknows what will be the choice of other beings.

                                (7)      Likewise He may determine their choice by gracious influence — Bible doctrine.

                                (8)      God’s knowledge is not subject to development, reasoning, regretting, or foreboding.

                     c.        Omnipotence:

                                (1)      God is all-powerful, infinitely able to do all things which are the object of His power within the range of His holy character or essence. However, He will not make right wrong, nor will He act foolishly — Isaiah 44:24 2Corinthians 4:6 Ephesians 1:19-21 3:20 Hebrews 1:3. If God is limited at any time it is because of a self-limitation consistent with His own essence. God can do all he wills to do but He may not will to do all He can do.

                     d.       Third relative attribute; related to moral beings:

                                (1)      Veracity and faithfulness: God is infinite perfection in truth and faithfulness.

                                (2)      Truth: God honours doctrine resident in the soul of the believer with spiritual growth. That’s why you cannot grow by witnessing, by praying, by doing things.

                                (3)      Faithfulness: God provides divine logistics to support the believer on earth during his period of growth.

                                (4)      Mercy and goodness: Mercy is grace in action, infinite love and action toward the object of His divine affection, therefore the other side of God’s category #1 love — His love toward us instead of ours toward Him. God’s judgments are perfect, demanding perfect righteousness. So God is not only absolute good in contrast to the policy of Satan, which is evil, but He is justice and righteousness; infinite holiness acting toward others. His righteousness is perfect and therefore demands perfect righteousness. His judgments are perfect demanding perfection. Principle: Justice administers the penalty which righteousness demands.

                                (5)      In righteousness is the divine love for holiness revealed. In justice is the divine hatred for sin revealed. God is not arbitrary in any way. Holiness demands holiness, righteousness demands righteousness. God’s nature therefore cannot change. He must demand holiness and punish both sin and evil as long as He is what He is. His penalties are not vindictive but vindicating. With unchangeable sin and evil there is unchangeable condemnation and judgement, but in grace God provides through salvation all which He demands, and through rebound sin is handled for the believer.

          4.       Other divine characteristics.

                     a.       The freedom of God. God must be consistent with Himself; God cannot compromise His essence. The incarnation was the only way the free will of God could provide salvation for man.

                     b.       The affection of God. This is related to the subject of anthropopathisms — ascribing to God a human characteristic which He really does not possess but it explains divine policy in terms of human attitude. For example. God repents. God doesn’t really change His mind — Genesis 6:6. The hatred of God — Romans 9:13; the anger of God in Romans 1:18; the scorn of God in Psalm 2:4; the benevolence of God in Romans 8:32; the compassion of God in Lamentations 3:33; the long-suffering of God; the happiness of God.

                     c.        The authority of God.

                                (1)      God’s authority is over possible things and actual things.

                                (2)      Over possible things, God is sovereign in that He leaves them as only possible and not actual.

                                (3)      He has destined them yet as future, like the cycles of discipline. Here, He renders no account to others but acts in conformity with His Own perfect character.

                                (4)      In relation to existing things, God is the final and absolute authority. Psalm 145:14 Matthew 20:15 1Timothy 6:15

                                (5)      the authority of God over creatures rests upon three facts: the fact that God is the Creator. Therefore, He has the right to save or punish, the right to reward or discipline the believer. God cannot compromise His essence. The cattle, the gold and the silver all belong to God and He has absolute and sovereign ownership of all things. Psalm 50:10. So we might have secondary ownership over some of these things. The authority of God rests upon His infinite perfection. The authority of God is based upon redemption. God has purchased us; we are bought with a price. The authority of God is related to the amount of doctrine in the soul.

                                (6)      God’s essence presented as the essence box. Bob will skip the essence box for now.

C.       the categories of anti-theistic theories. All prevalent theories and the correct one. They are against the personality and attributes and essence of God. Bob presents this as point 7, but it seems removed from the authority of God (the way that he is presenting this material); and possibly removed from this entire category of His attributes. [These notes came from God’s Essence Part I from the notebook):

          1.       Polytheism is the belief in the plurality of God like the Greek and Roman Pantheon.

          2.       Pantheism is the philosophy that God and the universe are one. This denies the transcendency of God, or that God has any existence outside the universe. Pantheism also denies the personality of God and contends that He exists in the sum total of all life; this is the way the Hindus regard Him. It squeezes God into the size of the universe. India is overrun with cows, cobras and monkeys because of their belief in pantheism.

          3.       Evolution believes that the cosmos has been developed from crude homogenous material to its present heterogenous state by means of resident forces. There are two kinds of evolution.

                     a.       Theistic evolution is believed by many scientists who are Christians. It recognizes God as the creator of the original materials, but contends that evolution is the method by which all developed from its primitive state to the present completeness.

                     b.       Atheistic evolution rejects the person of God and contends that matter is eternal and self-developing.

          4.       Materialism is that form of atheism which denies the existence of God and contends that matter is eternal and that life is a product of matter. This is the basis for all communist beliefs. This is the philosophy of communism. P

                     a.       Materialism contends that within material substance is the basis for and only explanation of all things.

                     b.       Materialism is one type of monism, which is any system of thought which recognizes one substance only.

          5.       Idealism is another system of monism which recognizes one thing only, the human mind. Idealism is a system of thought which contends that the mind is the only entity. Hence, the universe is no more than an impression or an illusion of the mind. Your body isn't really your body; you really are immaterial. Some idealists do believe in God, but they deny His creation of material things because they deny materialism.

          6.       Positivism is a system of thought which accepts nothing which cannot be accredited by human evidence. Hence, it disregards God and the soul.

          7.       Monotheism is the belief that there is only one person in the Godhead, in contrast to the existence of the Father, Son and Spirit. This is the view of Islam and all Muslims (the largest religion in the world today). This is also the belief of the Sikhs and of Judaism.

          8.       Deism says that God is personal, infinite, holy, and the creator of the universe. But it contends that God purposely abandoned His creation when He completed it with the intent that it would be self-sustaining and self-promoting by forces which are resident in it. Deism rejects the Scriptures or any suggestion that God is immanent and transcendent in the universe. Deism was subscribed to by such people as Thomas Paine, Hume, Gibbon, and Voltaire; this was very popular in the eighteenth century.

          9.       In contrast to all of these, we are classified philosophically as Biblical theists.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #44


44 04/01/1976 Philippians 2 Doctrine of divine essence (cont.)


Review of translation. Hypostatic union, the virgin birth, impeccability are all found between vv. 7 and 8.


Bob returns to the Essence of God and begins at the beginning for review. The review takes 56 minutes and adds some information here and there, all recorded in the doctrine in the previous lesson. Bob resumes with authority of God. Notes remain with the doctrines above (there are times when additional material was added from this lesson). It would have been much messier to try to separate these into two sets of notes.


Philippians 2:7  ...but emptied Himself, having taken the form of a servant, having been made in the likeness of men.  (BLB)


Philippians 2:7 But he deprived himself of the proper function of deity, when he had received the form of a servant, although he had been born in the likeness of mankind.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #45


45 04/02/1976 Philippians 2:8 Doctrine of impeccability


The most conservative element of most societies are the military. The Prussian Military Corps and he had to remove these in order to continue with his evil.


One more doctrine, the doctrine of Impeccability. It does not appear that this doctrine is the same as the two recorded in NB1 and NB2.


Impeccability

1.       Impeccability means not liable to sin. Exempt from the possiblity of doing wrong. Jesus Christ, in fact, did not sin. The sinlessness of Christ differs from the sinlessness of Adam before the fall. The first Adam was temptable and peccable. He was capable of being tempted to sin but able to yield to that temptation. Jesus was able not to sin; and He was also able not to sin.

2.       Can an impeccable person be tempted to sin? That is the great issue.

          1)       Christ did not have a sin nature. He was not born with a sin nature nor did he acquire a sin nature through personal sin. The first Adam received a sin nature because he chose to sin, in disobedience to God. The last Adam did not even acquire an old sin nature, therefore, since He did not have an old sin nature, he could not be tempted from the inside. This does not diminish temptation or remove the pressure of temptation, but it is merely a matter of source. All temptations to the Lord came from the outside.

          2)       Whatever temptation was real, came from outside.

          3)       Christ was tempted as to His Person (Hebrews 4:15); He was tempted in all points like as we were, yet apart from sin. He was tempted in ways that we are not tempted. He was tempted in as many ways as anyone on the face of this earth. We have never had a temptation of any kind that the Lord did not face that temptation and resist it.

          4)       Temptation could come to Christ because He was true humanity.

          5)       Of course as God, Christ could not be tempted. James 1:13 therefore temptation came to Christ through His human nature. It is blasphemous to think that it came to His divine nature. God cannot be tempted.

          6)       His human nature was temptable; He divine nature was not temptable. Jesus is both human and divine nature, in one person, undiminished divinity and true humanity in One Person forever.

          7)       The question arrises. Is the temptation of an impeccable person a real temptation.

          8)       The reality of temptation is provable by the frequency of sin. While the old sin nature is the general source of sin, with Christ, it was different. Satan used all of his genius to tempt Christ as a major thrust of evil in the angelic conflict. They were just as real. Hebrews 4:15 For we have not a High Priest unable to sympathize with our weaknesses but having been tempted in all points in quite the same way as we, yet apart from sin.

          9)       Our Lord’s temptations came directly from Satan. Directly from evil; and therefore, much more intensified. Our temptations come from our own sin nature. The source of sin is the old sin nature; the source of evil is thought. Temptation from outside; and you are in trouble when you are under the influence of evil. David under operation Bathsheba did not lose his kingship and he was still a multimillionaire and he still had his supergrace blessings all of this time. There is discipline for sin. All the sins of the world were judged on the cross and paid for. You can even have cursing turned to blessing after rebound. Sin does not keep you from advancing. What keeps you from advancing is reversionism and evil. Evil destroys believers, not sin. As you grow up spiritually, your sins obviously will change. We will hear tons of evil by hearing politicians and hearing commentators. Now and again, a politician is not evil, and we call him a statesman to distinguish him from evil politicians. The greatest government on earth will be the Millennium and Jesus Christ was not elected. Every efficient government in history was not elected. Imbeciles voting mean that you will have imbeciles in government. Athens started as a democracy, but they survived and finally had dictators and lawgivers. The United States government is destroying the farmer. There will be a time when you cannot buy beef. A committee in congress voted to break up oil companies so that if a company was drilling, it could not own the related hardware (or build it); and those who owned such things could not drill with it. Something crazy like that, and it was agreed to and brought out of committee. They are imbeciles. We will only be saved by Bible doctrine. All of the Lord’s temptations came from the outside.

          10)     Because of omnipotence, Christ has the infinite power to resist temptation. Because of omniscience, He understood all temptations from eternity past.

          11)     Christ, in His deity, is not temptable and not peccable; therefore impeccable. The human nature of Christ is temptable and peccable.

          12)     While the woman was deceived in her temptation and fall, Jesus cannot be deceived.

          13)     Sin appeals to the ignorance of the one being tempted.

          14)     The sovereignty of God cannot change His mind about sin.

          15)     The justice of God would reject sin and temptation. There is nothing in the essenced of God that would make Him temptable or peccable. James 4:3 Let no man who is tempted say, “I am tempted of God.” For God cannot be tempted from evil. Furthermore, He Himself does not tempt anyone.

3.       The salient (prominent or conspicuous) facts about impeccability.

          1)       Christ did not have a sin nature by birth nor did He commit any sin curing His incarnation.

          2)       In addition to Hebrews 4:15 there is the statement of 1Peter 1:19 The previous blood of Christ, a Lamb without spot and without blemish [without any sin and without any evil]. Christ did three things on the cross: redemption, reconciliation and propitiation. Christ would not be qualified to provide those things unless He was impeccable.

          3)       1John 3:5 And you know He appeared in order to take away sins and in Him is not sin.

          4)       Christ was definitely and repeatedly tempted in the realm of His humanity. Matthew 4:1–11 Hebrews 4:15

          5)       As with Adam in innocence, all temptations came from outside.

          6)       Neither the first nor the last Adam had a sin nature. The first Adam created without a sin nature.

          7)       Adam sinned and acquired a sin nature. Christ did not.

          8)       Christ resisted the greatest of all of all temptations at Gethsemene. Matthew 26:39 Mark 14:35–36 Luke 22:42

          9)       Jesus Christ resisted the great kenosis temptation of Matthew 4:1–11.

4.       Categorical breakdown:

          1)       The humanity of Christ was temptable and peccable.

          2)       The deity of Christ was not temptable and not peccable.

          3)       Christ in hypostatic union was temptable but impeccable.

5.       The conclusion:

          1)       In Hypostatic Union, Christ was temptable but impeccable.

          2)       Illustration take up the fact of the impeccability concept. It is conceivable that a rowboat could launch an attack on an aircraft carrier but it could not defeat the aircraft carrier.

          3)       You can bent a copper wire back and forth and break it. You can weld it to a steel beam and you can no longer bend and break it. The wire is the humanity of Jesus Christ and the steel beam is the deity.

          4)       It is possible for the humanity of Jesus Christ during the incarnation to suffering human limitations of a nonmoral type. He can be hungry, tired, etc., but that is not related to sin.

          5)       Therefore, Christ is posse non pecari and non posse pecari. Able not to sin; not able to sin. That is a summary of this doctrine.


Review of vv .1–7.


At this point, Bob begins the exegesis of v. 8 (which follows this set of points). Maybe he covers the translation twice? He has done that before. Link to the beginning of the translation of Philippians 2:8.


Three principles involved in this paragraph


5. The soul is the battle ground of the angelic conflict. There are two forces fighting for the soul of every believer. The force representing God is Bible doctrine and the force representing Satan is good and evil. Evil is the great genius of Satan and evil is a thought. Doctrine is the thinking of God; evil is the thinking of Satan, and there is a struggle for the soul between doctrine and evil.


a. A person is said to be brilliant or to possess a high IQ because of his ability to accumulate information in his left lobe. Human IQ is based upon getting information in the left lobe. You can be tested on that information and give it back but it is never over in the right lobe where it counts.


b. The rapid accumulation of information in the left lobe is called in the Bible, gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis]. Both unbeliever and believer are considered brilliant if they could accumulate a lot of gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis], but it is only when this information becomes epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] that it is useful.


c. However, gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis] or knowledge in the left lobe cannot be applied to life or any facet of life. Therefore smart people are often stupid. What you accumulate in the left lobe is not meaningful at all, it is what you have in your right lobe that counts.


d. However, a little bit of knowledge in the right lobe [epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis]] is worth a vast amount of information in the left lobe, for it is only the information you have in your right lobe that orients you to life and that makes you move in any direction in life.


e. In the Bible the right lobe is called kardia (καρδία) [pronounced kahr-DEE-uh], translated heart. This is the only place where thought is turned to action, to dynamics, where it produces advance. Thought does not produce in the left lobe, only in the right lobe. Knowledge in the heart, therefore, makes the unbeliever practical. It gives him a lot of common sense and often makes him very wise in life.


f. Knowledge in the believer’s heart advances him spiritually, gives him maximum application of doctrine to experience. The secret to spiritual growth


      is not in doing things, even legitimate things, it is in what you think in your right lobe.


g. Bible knowledge is called doctrine. The residence of doctrine in the soul determines both spiritual growth and glorification of Jesus Christ. But it must be the residence of Bible doctrine in the right lobe.


h. The humanly brilliant person can accumulate maximum doctrine in the left lobe—gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis] or knowledge.


i. This knowledge can be repeated or parroted to others but it has no meaning, no application, and is not a source of growth in the spiritual realm nor source of success in the realm of unbelievers. Both the person who has acquired such knowledge and those who hear it are impressed, and many conclude that here is a great spiritual giant. But such is not the case.


6. It is spiritual IQ which counts in life—doctrine in the right lobe.


a. Spiritual IQ is the sum total of understanding of doctrine—epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis].


b. Doctrine must reside in the right lobe under four categories found in the scripture. There must be epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis], and this goes into the frame of reference, the memory centre, and into the vocabulary—you have to have a technical vocabulary to understand technical things. Therefore there is a vocabulary storage and a categorical storage, and that is called sunesis (σύνεσις) [pronounced SOON-es-is] in the Greek—working knowledge. When epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] gets into the conscience and develops norms and standards, that is called suneidêsis (συνείδησις) [pronounced soon-Ī-day-sis]. Then, when it gets out on the launching pad and is used, that is called swfia or wisdom.


c. Knowledge of doctrine does not produce growth and glorification of Christ, but understanding of doctrine produces growth and glorification of Christ.


d. You cannot teach what you know, you can only teach what you

 understand.

e. Verses 12-16 teach us that you cannot grow spiritually on what you know, you can only grow spiritually on what you understand. There are two negatives in spiritual growth. You do not grow spiritually by what you do and you do not grow spiritually by what you know. You only grow spiritually by what you understand.


f. Furthermore, you cannot glorify Christ by what you know, you can only glorify Christ by what you understand.


g. Doctrine which remains in the left lobe is vulnerable to instant destruction by evil.


7. The greatest malfunction in GAP is the failure to transfer doctrine from the left to the right lobe through the ministry of the filling of the Spirit, plus the acceptance of the authority of one’s right pastor.


a. Doctrine in the right lobe is the basis for all spiritual growth, the advance to maturity and the glorification of the Lord Jesus Christ.


b. In crossing no-man’s land between super-grace and ultra-super-grace there is the area of great vulnerability where the believer is in danger of ambush from reversionism and evil. He is vulnerable through failure to accept the authority of his right pastor and because of failure to transfer doctrine from his left lobe to his right lobe under the proper function of GAP, and also because of failure to utilize the continued and faithful provision of divine logistics.


c. This is why Pilippians 2:12 includes words such as obey—hupakouô (ὑπακούω) [pronounced hoop-ak-OO-oh], aorist active indicative; then, work out your own salvation—work out is the present middle imperative[G. L. 1] katergázomai (κατεργάζομαι) [pronounced kat-er-GAD-zom-ahee] which means to be accomplishing your own preservation in danger; then that final phrase, with fear and trembling, which means reverence toward Christ and respect toward doctrine.


d. The soul continues to be the battle ground for the angelic conflict.


e. Doctrine which has not been transferred to the right lobe is subject to distortion and vulnerable to attack from evil.


f. The believer in crossing no-man’s land, therefore, is in grave danger from reversionism.


Link the right before the notes above. Beginning of the translation of Philippians 2:8:


Philippians 2:8  And having been found in appearance as a man He humbled Himself, having become obedient unto death, even the death of the cross.  (BLB)


Verse 8 – the humble Christ. Christ suffered humiliation by the hypostatic union, all the way from birth to the point of resurrection where glorification in His humanity began. It was a humiliation for undiminished deity to be in union with true humanity, even though it was impeccable and perfect humanity. The verse answers the question: What was the work of Christ during the incarnation?


“And being found in fashion as a man” – kaí (καί) [pronounced ] schêmati euretheis hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç] anthrôpos (ἄνθρωπος) [pronounced ANTH-row-poss]. This is an emphatic kaí (καί) [pronounced ], and should be translated “In fact”; plus the locative singular from schema (σχμα) [pronounced SKAY-mah], for His outer or overt appearance, used here for Christ as He appeared to those who observed the crucifixion; it brings us to the cross.


Then comes the aorist passive participle of heuriskô (εὐρίσκω) [pronounced hyoo-RIHS-koh], which is heuretheis. It means here to discover. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it takes the occurrence of the cross and gathers it into a single whole, including the spiritual and physical death of Christ, the six hours our Lord was on the cross. The passive voice: Christ on the cross received the action of the verb. The concessive participle is very important, it will change our translation—“In fact, although having been discovered in outward appearance.” Christ was on the cross from 9 am to 3 pm.


“as a man” – the comparative particle hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç], indicating the manner in which the crucifixion proceeded. He was stripped naked and discovered in outward appearance to be a man. Plus the nominative singular from anthrôpos (ἄνθρωπος) [pronounced ANTH-row-poss], used here as a nominative of appellation emphasizing the importance of Christ’s humanity on the cross. This is His humiliation; His humanity was His humiliation, and his humiliation was His humanity, and anthrôpos (ἄνθρωπος) [pronounced ANTH-row-poss] indicates He was stripped naked on the cross, badly bruised (Isaiah 53, etc.).


“he humbled himself” – aorist active indicative from tapeinoô (ταπεινόω) [pronounced tap-i-NO-oh]. With it also the accusative singular direct object of the verb from the reflexive pronoun heautou (ἑαυto) [pronounced heh-ow-TOO]. The reflexive pronoun refers the action of the verb back on the subject. So this part is correctly translated in the KJV, except for its true meaning. The meaning will be derived from understanding more about the verb. This is a culminative aorist, it gathers the humiliation of Christ on the cross into one entirety but regards it from the standpoint of its existing results—spiritual death whereby Christ was judged for our sins and provided our salvation. For the perfect humanity of Christ to come into contact with our sins is maximum humiliation; bearing our sins on the cross, as per 1Peter 2:24. He was impeccable and then suddenly He is bearing the sins of the world. He resisted every type of sin, every temptation that ever came to Him He resisted it, and suddenly every sin ever committed from Adam and Eve down to the end of time was poured out on Him, and that is His humiliation. That’s what is means when it says, “he humbled himself.” The active voice: Jesus Christ produced the action of the verb in the three hours of His spiritual death. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action of salvation from the viewpoint of absolute and dogmatic reality. What does it mean to humble Himself? It means that here is the perfect person bearing the sins of the world.


“and” is not found in the original.


“became” – aorist active participle from gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my]. This is an instrumental participle (very rare), it indicates the means by which the action of the main verb is accomplished. The main verb: “he humbled himself.” He humbled Himself by becoming obedient. So gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my] is translated “by becoming obedient,” not “and became.” The instrumental participle is translated by the word “by.” The aorist tense is the constative aorist, it gathers into one entirety the obedience of the humanity of Christ to the authority and the plan of God the Father by taking the sins of the world on Himself: he was judged for our sins on the cross. The active voice: Jesus Christ produced the action of the verb by bearing our sins.


“obedient” is the predicate nominative (gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my] takes the nominative case) from hupêkoos (ὑπήκοος) [pronounced hoop-AY-ko-oss], which becomes the supreme illustration of the recognition of the Father’s authority and the Father’s plan for the incarnation. Recognition of the Father’s authority led to this action. Gethsemane is a good illustration of the intensity of the temptation prior to the cross. Recognition of the Father’s authority led to the action of bearing our sins on the cross. In other words, the action of redemption, reconciliation and propitiation, the action whereby the work of Christ becomes the coin of the realm. So instead of saying redemption, reconciliation and propitiation every time, the word blood, taken from the animal sacrifices, is used. The coin of the realm for salvation is blood, the blood of Christ. Salvation is free because it is paid for by the coin of the realm.


“unto death” – the adverb méchri (μέχρι) [pronounced MEHKH-ree], denoting degree or measure. It is used as an improper preposition with the genitive singular of thanatos (θάνατος) [pronounced THAH-nah-toss]. It should be translated, “to the point of death.” He humbled Himself by becoming obedient to the point of death. Death here is in the singular, but it’s in the plural that it refers to both spiritual and physical death. Death in the singular here refers to spiritual death only— “to the point of [spiritual] death.”


“even the death of the cross” – the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is a transitional conjunction to insert an explanation. It should be translated “that is”; plus the genitive of apposition, thanatos (θάνατος) [pronounced THAH-nah-toss] in the singular, referring to His spiritual death (after which He was still talking). This is anartharous construction, i.e. without the definite article it emphasizes the unique quality of this spiritual death—Christ was bearing our sins; plus the adverbial genitive of place, stauros (σταυρός) [pronounced stow-ROSS] —“cross.” This actually occurred at a place, and that is why Christ had to become true humanity.


Philippians 2:8 In fact, although having been discovered in outward appearance as a man, he humbled himself by becoming obedient to the point of [spiritual] death, that is, the death of the cross.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #46


46 04/04/1976 Philippians 2:8 Doctrines of redemption, reconciliation, propitiation


God is love without an object.


There is no life until God gives life to the fetus and He must do so individually. This is a sovereign act of God. But God has a limitation here. God can only give us temporal physical life.


We all possess a sin nature; and that is the basis of spiritual death. The person who has physical life is born being spiritually dead.


God created the first Adam without any sin. Therefore, he is called innocent. That is the original status of man. Man was not in any way evil or sinful. Evil and sin originate with Satan.


God gave His only Born-Son. There was no sin nature; there was no imputation of Adam’s sin. His exhale was spiritual life and physical life.


The exegesis of Philippians 2:8 is reviewed, but briefly. Jesus 12 noon to 3 pm, all of our sins were poured out on the Lord. During these three hours, the Lord screamed many times, having taken our place. Then He said, “It is finished in the past with results that go on forever.” Then Jesus breathed His last from His Own free will. That was His physical death. Jesus died as an act of volition; it was not because He bled to death.


Blood of Christ represents His spiritual death. His taking upon Himself our sins was His humiliation.


Philippians 2:8 In fact, although having been discovered in outward appearance as a man, he humbled himself by becoming obedient to the point of [spiritual] death, that is, the death of the cross.


the coin of the realm is the blood of Christ. This brings together salvation by believing in Christ. Before the cross, animals were used to portray this. Giving us the Old Testament phrase, without the shedding of blood, there is no remission. The priest would have his hand on the sinner and on the animal, and the sins would be transferred from the person to the animal.


Every civilization has the coin of the realm, the medium of exchange in that particular area. Salvation was paid for. When we believe in Christ, it is through faith in Christ. Someone else has paid for our salvation.


We have faith every day in our money; and all business today is conducted based upon the printed paper money. As long as everyone believes in the dollar, then it is the coin of the realm. We are a nation of believers because we operated on the American dollar.


Redemption, reconciliation and propitiation are the key doctrines here.


Redemption

1.       Etymology. We are documenting this doctrine by etymology.

          1)       Greek.

                     (1)      antílutron (ἀντίλυτρον) [pronounced an-TIHL-oo-tron] = substituting money; the payment for the freedom of a slave or prisoner. It is usually translated "ransomed," meaning "instead of slavery - freedom." In 1Timothy 2:6, with the preposition hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR], it means "ransom paid." This means, instead of the slave market, freedom. Redemption implies that there must be a free man (someone must be free in order to purchase a slave from the slave market of sin). Jesus provides the coin of the realm, His blood to purchase us as slaves.

                     (2)      apolutrôsis (ἀπολύτρωσις) [pronounced ap-ol-OO-troh-sis] = deliverance procured by the payment of a ransom; to release a slave upon receipt of a ransom.

                     (3)      Noun lutron (λύτρον) [pronounced LOO-tron] = the payment of a ransom; the price paid for letting loose.

                     (4)      Verb lutroô (λυτρόω) [pronounced lloo-TROH-oh] = to pay the ransom; to deliver by ransom; to liberate. In the middle voice it means to redeem.

                     (5)      Noun lutrôsis (λύτρωσις) [pronounced LOO-troh-sis] = redemption; deliverance; freedom.

                     (6)      Noun lutrōtês (λυτρωτής) [pronounced loo-tro-TACE] = redeemer; deliverer; one who pays for the freedom. In Acts 7:35, it refers to Moses as the redeemer of Israel.

                     (7)      Verb agorazô (ἀγοράζω) [pronounced ag-ohr-AD-zoh] = to buy; to purchase in the market. (agora (ἀγορά) [pronounced ag-or-AH] = slave marketplace.)

                     (8)      Verb exagorázō (ἐξαγοράζω) [pronounced ex-ag-or-AHD-zo] = to purchase from the slave market; to completely and totally liberate a slave from the slave market.

          2)       Hebrew.

                     (1)      Verb gâʾal (גָּאַל) [pronounced gaw-AHL] = to redeem; to purchase the freedom of a slave; to buy back.

                     (2)      Verb pâdâh (פָּדָה) [pronounced paw-DAWH] = to redeem; to loose by a paying ransom; to set free.

                     (3)      Noun GELLUAH = redemption.

2.       Definition and description: Redemption is the saving work of Christ on the cross by which He purchases our freedom or salvation. Redemption is accomplished in His spiritual death. Redemption is directed toward sin. The human race is born with a sin nature, and therefore born spiritual death to God. This means that the human race is born in the slave market of sin. Redemption is the saving work of Christ by which He purchased our freedom from the slave market of sin, the coin of the realm being the blood of Christ, which is tantamount to Christ being judged for our sins. Ephesians 1:7 Colossians 1:14.

3.       Jesus Christ is the only qualified Redeemer. The qualification begins with the virgin birth, where He is free of imputed sin, from Adam and from the old sin nature. Christ is perfect in the realm of His humanity.

4.       Jesus Christ was willing to be the Redeemer. The redemptive work of Christ on the cross was an act of His Own free will. First, the sovereignty of His Deity in eternity past (doctrine of divine decrees); and then the act of His humanity, his free will, especially in that great struggle in the garden of Gethsemene, where our Lord said, “Father if it be Your will, let this cup pass from Me; yet not My will but Your will be done.” This means that in time, the Lord’s human volition was willing to go to the cross. Luke 23:42 (found in all of the synoptic gospels). Romans 5:19 For as through the one man’s disobedience [Adam] many were made sinners [the human race], even so, through the obedience of One [Jesus Christ] the many will be made righteous. Hence Philippians 2:8.

5.       The doctrine of redemption was communicated in the Old Testament sacrifices by the shedding of blood, Hebrews 9:22 (And according to the standard of the law [the Law was given in the Old Testament] nearly all things are cleansed by animal blood and without the pouring out of blood, forgiveness does not happen.). The Old Testament saints understood this principle. Redemption provides the basis for the believer's eternal inheritance, Hebrews 9:15. This is illustrated by Job 19:25–26, where Job says, “I know that my Redeemer lives.” Application of the blood followed by the resurrection.

6.       The blood of Christ is the ransom or the purchase price of redemption. Ephesians 1:7 In Whom, we keep on having redemption through His blood, the cancellation of sins according to the wealth of His grace. The work of Christ on the cross is portrayed as grace because He did all of the work for salvation. Therefore, nothing can be added to it and nothing can be taken from it. The cancellation of sins comes from the wealth of His grace. Colossians 1:14 By means of Christ, we have redemption through His blood, the cancellation of sins. 1Peter 1:18–19 Knowing that you were not redeemed with corruptible things like silver and gold from your empty way of life inherited from your forefathers, but with the precious blood as with a lamb unblemished and spotless from the Christ. The blood of Christ depicts by analogy the saving work of Jesus Christ when He was judged for our sins as per 2Corinthians 5:21 and 1Peter 2:24.

7.       It is the soul of the believer which is redeemed in salvation. Psalm 34:22 The Lord redeems the souls of sinners; therefore, none of those who take refuge in Him will be condemned. There is eternal security. The soul is saved, not the body. We get a new body at the resurrection.

8.       Redemption removes the condemnation of the Mosaic Law. Galatians 3:14 Christ has redeemed us from the curse of the Law having become a curse for us. The Mosaic Law can only condemn us. It reminds us that we are sinners and there is not asset from spiritual birth to help us. Keeping the Law will not provide us with salvation. For it stands written, Cursed is everyone who hangs on the wood. Galatians 3:10 For as many who are under the Law are under a curse; for it stands written [in Habakkuk 2:4] Cursed is everyone who does not abide by all things written in the book of the Law to do them, knowing that a man is not justified by the works of the Law but by faith in Jesus Christ, even we who have believed in Christ that we might be justified the faith of Christ and not by the works of the Law. For by the works of the Law shall no flesh be justified. Keeping the Law in any way, whether you are talking about tithing or morality, it does not save. Morality has a wonderful place in this world, but morality does not save. Neither does anything related to church, like walking down the aisle or weeping great tears of repentance.

9.       The results of redemption:

          1)       We are delivered from the curse of the Law. Galatians 3:13, 4:4-6.

          2)       We have the cancellation or forgiveness of all sin, Isaiah 44:22; Ephesians 1:7; Colossians 1:14; Hebrews 9:15.

          3)       Redemption is the basis for our justification, Romans 3:24.

          4)       Redemption is the basis for our sanctification, Ephesians 5:25-27.

          5)       Redemption is the basis for eternal inheritance of believers, Hebrews 9:15.

          6)       Redemption is the basis for the strategic victory of Jesus Christ in the angelic conflict, Colossians 2:14-15; Hebrews 2:14-15 (the passage for bumping demons).

          7)       Redemption of the soul in salvation results in redemption of the body in resurrection, Ephesians 1:14; Romans 8:23; Ephesians 4:30.

          8)       Redemption views salvation from the standpoint of the complete payment of our sins, the option to believe in Christ for eternal life.


Redemption as a doctrine is directed toward sin and toward God; but reconciliation is directed toward man.


Reconciliation

1.       Definition.

          1)       The doctrine of reconciliation is defined as that category of soteriology (the biblical doctrine of salvation) which explains the removal of the barrier between God and mankind through the salvation work of our Lord Jesus Christ on the Cross. There is an impossible barrier between man and God; man cannot go through it, go around it; man has no ability tjo bypass this barrier.

          2)       In this definition, mankind is reconciled to God, not visa versa. God is never said to be reconciled to mankind. In propitiation, God is satisfied with the work of Christ on the Cross. In reconciliation, man is reconciled to God by the work of Christ.

2.       Reconciliation is related, therefore, to the blood of Christ. The blood of Christ describes the coin of the realm and the blood of Christ describes the work of Christ on the cross to remove that barrier. The blood of Christ is a synonym for the removal of the barrier. The blood of Christ is the basis for reconciliation, says Colossians 1:20; and therefore, the work of the cross is associated with reconciliation. Ephesians 2:16

3.       In the concept of reconciliation, mankind is regarded as the enemy of God. Romans 5:10 Colossians 1:21 Man by physical birth and the other things mentioned, has a barrier between him and God. Man in effect is God’s enemy.

4.       The Greek noun eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay] is translated "peace." It is a synonym for reconciliation, emphasizing the saving work of Jesus Christ on the Cross as removing the enmity between man and God, i.e., the removal of the barrier between man and God. In Romans 5:10, it says "For if while we were enemies we were reconciled to God by the death of His Son, much more, having been reconciled, we shall be delivered by His life." In Ephesians 2, He is said to make peace. Ephesians 2:14 and 16. This has nothing to do with world peace, which is the blasphemy of the liberals. In the Church Age, there is only freedom through military establishment. This is a divine law of establishment. Hitler was undeterred because liberals were chasing after world peace through treaties.

5.       Reconciliation was illustrated by the Levitical offerings. Leviticus 3 7:11–38 8:15

6.       The application of the doctrine of reconciliation to the family of God. The believer is an ambassador for Christ. He represents Jesus Christ on this earth. Therefore, each member of the royal family has the ministry of conciliation. 2Corinthians 5:18–20. This is one of the reasons why we as believers are in full-time Christian service.

7.       Isaiah 57:19 is the prophecy of reconciliation.

8.       The actual mechanics of reconciliation. There is a barrier between man and God. There is sin in this barrier. The wages of sin is will known to us, but there is sin as a simple fact. There is the imputation of Adam’s sin at the point of physical birth. There is also the possession of an old sin nature at the time of physical birth. We thereafter express the sin nature by committing personal sins. Sin is a part of the barrier between man and God. God’s justice demands a penalty be laid upon man.

9.       The whole condemnation structure does not come from personal sin, but comes from physical birth. We are born physically alive but spiritually dead. When God gives us the spark of life, this is only physical life, so there is the problem of spiritual death. The next problem in the barrier is relative righteousness. We can produce human good, which is –R. The rich young ruler had, at best, relative righteousness. –R cannot have fellowship with +R. God has perfect character. There is the problem of position. In Adam all die. We are on one side of the barrier, and God is on the other side. Everything in this barrier is solved by the cross. Redemption cancels sin; and unlimited atonement solves that problem as well. The penalty of sin is paid for by Christ. The doctrine of expiation cancels this out. The problem of physical birth. Salvation produces regeneration. Righteousness is a problem, because our righteousness is as filthy rags in His sight. We are justified because we have received the righteousness of God. There is the problem of God’s perfect character, which is solved by propitiation. Position in Adam is exchanged for position in Christ. God the Father is satisfied with the work of Jesus Christ.


This next doctrine is not matching up at all with any existing doctrine of propitiation.


Propitiation

A.       Definition.

          1.       Propitiation is the Godward side of the work of Christ in salvation. God the Father is satisfied with the sacrificial ministry of our Lord on the cross.

          2.       Propitiation is the work of Christ on the cross which deals with the integrity of God.

          3.       Propitiation means what our Lord satisfied the Father. Hence, in propitiation the justice of God judges our sins and the integrity of God is satisfied with that judgment.

          4.       The Ark of the Covenant, Exodus 37. There were three things which spoke of sin. The table of the Law, which speaks of sin as a violation of the Law. There was Aaron’s rod that budded, which is sin by way of rejection of authority. The pot of manna represents a violation of God’s provision. All of these things speak of the sins of mankind.

          5.       Propitiation frees the justice of God to immediately give anyone who believes in Christ one-half of divine integrity, the righteousness of God. This is the down payment on our salvation. This was illustrated by the Day of Atonement when the blood was sprinkled on the Mercy Seat.

          6.       Faith is the basis for gaining divine righteousness.

          7.       The mercy Seat represents the mercy of God. Numbers 7:39

          8.       Hebrews 9:6 mentions the Mercy Seat.

          9.       Propitiation is related to unlimited atonement in 1John 2:2

          10.     Propitiation demonstrates the perfect love of God. 1John 4:10

          11.     By propitiation, God is free to save mankind without any compromise of His essence.

          12.     Propitiation presents the celebrityship of Jesus Christ. Romans 3:25 Whom the God has predetermined the Mercy Seat through faith by means of His blood for a demonstration of His righteousness because of the passing over of previously committed sins by the delay in judgment from the God. It is propitiation which satisfies God the Father.

          13.     The importance of propitiation is observed with the tables of Law in the Ark of the Covenant. The Law has always been set forth as a means of salvation (erroneously).

                     a.       The Law is not an instrument of salvation. Galatians 2:16 Romans 3:28

                     b.       The Law is an instrument of condemnation of the Jew and the gentile. Romans 3:20 Galatians 3:20–28 1Timothy 1:9–10

                     c.        The Law curses mankind with a hopeless curse. Galatians 3:10 only the work of Christ can remove that curse. Galatians 3:13

                     d.       Keeping the Law does produce a righteousness which has no credit with God and that cannot be compared with the divine righteousness received through faith in Christ. Philippians 3:9

                     e.       Many Jews of the previous dispensation failed by trying to keep the Law and not trusting in Jesus Christ. Romans 9:30–33

                     f.        The Law cannot save; the Law cannot provide justification. Acts 13:39

                     g.       Therefore the prayer of the sinner, “O God, be propitious to me a sinner.” Aorist active imperative of hilostomai, so the word is propitious. The pharisee was bragging about his righteousness. Self-righteousness will never work with God.

          14.     Salvation adjustment to the justice of God by faith in Christ frees divine justice to provide blessings for the believer at salvation. These blessings include both our logistical grace blessings and escrow blessings. The imputation of perfect righteousness at salvation means instant justification. God is justified in blessing us.

          15.     Divine justice must judge sinful man before divine justice is free to bless sinful man.

          16.     When the justice of God judged our sins in Christ on the cross, both the righteousness and justice of God were propitiated. That is, the integrity of God was satisfied or expiated. Propitiation means expiation. Now that same justice of God can provide blessing without compromising any attribute of divine essence.

          17.     Propitiation is the Godward side of salvation. Reconciliation is the manward side, and redemption is the sinward side.

          18.     Therefore, propitiation relates directly to the integrity of God, since it is the Godward side. Propitiation means that the act of judgment satisfies the integrity of God. Romans 3:25-26 says that Jesus Christ was publicly displayed as the mercy seat, the place of the propitiation of God’s justice. Cf. 1John 2:2, 4:10.

          19.     Propitiation is the turning away of the wrath of God by the offering of Jesus Christ on the cross for our sins.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #47


47 04/04/1976 Philippians 2:9 Doctrines of resurrection, ascension and session of Christ; royalty of Jesus Christ


Check translation.


Philippians 2:9  Therefore God also highly exalted Him, and granted to Him the name above every name,  (BLB)


Verse 9 – we now see the exalted Christ in contrast to the humiliated Christ. “Wherefore” is an inferential conjunction, dio (διό) [pronounced DEE-oh], composed of the preposition diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], the relative pronoun. Literally, it is translated “Because of which,” but it comes to mean “Therefore” as an inferential conjunction. There is also the adjunctive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ], denoting that the inference is obvious and self-evident; “God also” – the subject: the nominative ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], translated “the God”—“Therefore also the God.”


“hath highly exalted him” includes the object of the verb on the accusative singular, the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. The intensive pronoun always gives great emphasis on the person involved, and it denotes the Lord Jesus Christ seated at the right hand of the Father after His resurrection and ascension. With this is the verb, the aorist active indicative of huperupsóō (ὑπερυψόω) [pronounced hoop-er-oop-SO-oh], correctly translated “exalt.” It means to raise someone to the loftiest heights, to exalt supremely, to exalt to the maximum. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. The action of the verb includes resurrection, ascension and session. The active voice: God the Father produces the action of the verb in the exaltation of the person of Jesus Christ after He was in the grave for three days. The indicative mood is declarative, indicating the reality of the resurrection, ascension and session of Jesus Christ. “Therefore also the God [the Father] has exalted Him to the maximum.”


“and has given him” – aorist active indicative of charizomai (χαρίζομαι) [pronounced khar-ID-zohm-ahee]. The word means to give freely, to give graciously, to give as a favour, to grant, to bestow a favour upon someone. Here it means “and he has bestowed on him.” This is a culminative aorist which views the resurrection, ascension and session in its entirety but emphasizes the existing results. It shows the result of the resurrection, ascension and session. Active voice: God the Father produces the action. The indicative mood is declarative, viewing the action of the verb from the viewpoint of reality. And again there is the dative singular, this time, indirect object from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], emphasizing the uniqueness of the person of Jesus Christ as He is seated at the right hand of God the Father.


“a name” – the word “name” is the correct translation for the accusative singular direct object, plus the definite article, but the noun here is onoma (ὄνομα,ατος,τό) [pronounced OHN-oh-ma]. It is true that this means “name,” and that is the primary meaning of this particular noun, but it also connotes “name” in the sense of rank. Sometimes it is even used for personality—“and he has bestowed on him [the unique Christ] the rank.”


“which is” – the accusative definite article used as a relative pronoun; the verb to be is understood but does not occur; “above every name” – hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] plus the accusative from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] and the noun onoma (ὄνομα,ατος,τό) [pronounced OHN-oh-ma]—“which is above every rank.”


Philippians 2:9 Therefore also, the God [the Father] has exalted Him to the maximum, and has bestowed on Him [Jesus Christ] the rank which is above every rank.


Jesus has achieved a human rank above every other rank.


Part of our Lord’s victory in the angelic conflict is the resurrection, ascension and session, at which point He receives battlefield royalty.[4]


Resurrection

1.       Definition: There are two returns from the dead:

          1)       Resuscitation, when a person comes back from the dead; but he would later die. Same thing happened with Paul in Lystra. 1Corinthians 15 , two boys in the Old Testament, Elijah and Moses during the Tribulation. So far, just Jesus Christ.

                     (1)      Resurrection means a person returns from the dead in a body of incorruption and never dies again.

          2)       Therefore resurrection is rising again from the dead in a human body, and never again being subject to death.

          3)       Resurrection is the beginning of eternity for the person.

          4)       Resurrection is one of the basic doctrines all believers must understand for spiritual growth, Hebrews 6:1-2 Therefore, having graduated from the elementary (or basic) doctrines of Christ, let us advance ourselves toward maturity [supergrace, ultra supergrace], not laying again the foundation, that is, a change of mind away from dead works, faith toward God, doctrine of baptisms, as well as the laying on of hands, resurrection from the source of deaths and eternal judgment. Therefore, a part of spiritual growth is understanding the resurrection.

2.       Resurrection is a part of the Gospel, 1Corinthians 15:1-4. The Gospel includes the spiritual death of Christ bearing the sins of the world, His physical death, and His resurrection. Now I make know to you, brothers, the gospel which I preached to you, which also you received in which also you keep standing forever [Paul came to Corinth, evangelized them and organized them into a local church] by which you were saved, if you hold fast (and you do) the word which I preached to you, unless you have believed in vain [this is a type of reversionism where the resurrection is rejected as true] for I delivered to you as a matter of first importance what I also received [or, I delivered to you that which had the highest priority] that Christ died for our sins according to the Scriptures [that’s according to the Old Testament Scriptures] and that He was buried and that He was raised on the third day according to the Scriptures [resurrection is an Old Testament as well as a New Testament doctrine; and it is a part of the gospel as declared in these verses].

3.       The Importance of Resurrection Related to Faith in Christ, 1Corinthians 15:12-17. This passage tells us how useless it would be to believe in Christ if He had not been raised from the dead. Without resurrection, faith is in vain.

4.       The resurrection emphasizes the difference between a theophany and Christophany.

          1)       A theophany is an appearance of Christ prior to the First Advent and can be as an animate person or inanimate thing. He appeared as an angel before Sodom and Gomorrah.

          2)       A christophany is an appearance of Christ after His bodily resurrection, Mark 16:9-14; Luke 24:13-43; Acts 2:32. There have been nineteen appearances of Christ in resurrection body.

5.       The resurrection of Christ is part of His strategic victory of the angelic conflict, 1Corinthians 15:20-25. But now Christ is raised from the dead, the firstfruits of those who have been asleep [the soul does not sleep; only the body]. For since by man came death [that is, the first Adam; he sinned] by man came also the resurrection from the dead [that’s the last Adam, the Lord Jesus Christ] For as in Adam, all die [spiritual death] so also in Christ shall all be made alive. But each one of u sin his own battalion, Christ the first fruits, and then those there at His coming [the royal family of God] then comes the end [the end of the Jewish Age; the end of the Tribulation] He delivers up the kingdom to God, even the Father [this is the time of operation footstool] when He has abolished all rule, all authority and all power, for He must reign until He has put all of His enemies under His feet [the dispensation of the Millennium]. The body is asleep waiting for resurrection. The soul never sleeps. We have an interim body while waiting in heaven for our resurrection body.

6.       Resurrection is necessary for perpetuation of the line of David and fulfillment of the Davidic covenant, Romans 1:3-4 (Concerning His Son, born of the seed of David according to the flesh, having been established the Son of God in the sphere of inherent power [His omnipotence] according to the standard of the Spirit of sanctification [the Holy Spirit] from the source of the resurrection from the deaths.); 2Timothy 2:8 (Keep in mind [or, recall to mind] Jesus Christ having been resurrected out from the deaths [the two deaths on the cross], out from the seed of David according to my gospel.). During the First Advent the Jews rejected Christ as their King. Therefore, the fulfillment of the Davidic covenant is postponed until after the Church Age.

7.       The resurrection of Christ indicates the completion of the ministry of justification, Romans 4:25 (Who has been delivered over to judgment because of our transgressions and has been raised up from the dead because of our justification.). Christ was "raised because of our justification." We are justified, therefore, Christ had to be raised. Because justification was completed on the Cross, the Father was free to resurrect Christ.

8.       The Agents of the Resurrection of Christ.

          1)       God the Father, Colossians 2:12 1Thessalonians 1:10 1Peter 1:21 Hebrews 13:20.

          2)       God the Holy Spirit, Acts 2:24 Romans 1:4, 8:11 1Peter 3:18.

          3)       Christ Himself, John 10:17-18.

9.       Resurrection is necessary for advance of the Father's plan, Isaiah 53:10 (He shall see a seed; he shall prolong His days [the resurrection]; therefore, the plan of Jehovah [the Father] shall advance in His hand [that is, the hand of Christ in the resurrection]). The Father’s plan advances through the resurrection of Jesus Christ; therefore, the resurrection of Jesus Christ is a critical event in history. .

10.     The resurrection of Christ is the basis for the believer's confidence in the future, 1Peter 1:3-5 (Blessed be the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ Who according to His great mercy has caused us to be born again to a living hope through the resurrection of Jesus Christ from the deaths, to obtain an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled and will not fade away, reserved in heaven for you are guarded by the power of God through the faith of salvation ready to be revealed in the last time.), 21 (Who through Him are believers with reference to God Who raised Him from the deaths and gave Him glory so that your faith and hope is in God.); Philippians 3:21.

11.     There are two general resurrections:

          1)       For believers only: resurrection to eternal life. The resurrection body is eternal and permanent, superior to that of angelic creatures, Daniel 12:2; John 5:24-29; 1Corinthians 15:20-22; Revelation 20:6,13. This resurrection is called the "first resurrection."

          2)       For unbelievers only: resurrection and cast into the lake of fire forever, Matthew 25:41; 1Corinthians 15:24; Revelation 20:5-15. This is called the "second resurrection" or the last judgment.

12.     The first resurrection is pictured as a battalion pass-in-review, and therefore, is divided into four echelons, 1Corinthians 15:20-24.

          1)       Alpha Company: the resurrection of Christ at the end of the great power experiment of the Hypostatic Union, for He is "the first fruits of them that slept." Jesus Christ has battlefield royalty. Matthew 28 Mark 16 Luke 24 John 20-21 Acts 2:31-34.

          2)       Bravo Company: the resurrection of the royal family of God at the end of the great power experiment of the Church Age, the royal family of God comes out of our Lord’s battlefield royalty. John 14:1-3 Philippians 3:20-21 1Corinthians 15:51-57 1Thessalonians 4:13-18 1John 3:1-2.

          3)       Charlie Company: the resurrection of the Old Testament believers and Tribulational martyrs at the end of the Tribulation and the Second Advent, Daniel 12:13 Isaiah 26:19-20 Matthew 24:31 Revelation 20:4.

          4)       Delta Company: the resurrection of the millennial saints at the end of the Millennium.

13.     Resurrection and the Tactical Victory of the Angelic Conflict by the Royal Family

          1)       The tactical victory of the royal family is the advance to maturity in time (supergrace A, supergrace B and ultra supergrace).

          2)       The royal family is formed by the baptism of the Holy Spirit. 1Corinthians 12:13

          3)       Tactical victory is believer's heritage, 1Corinthians 15:57-58 (But thanks be to God Who gives us the victory through our Lord Jesus Christ [the victory is everything involved in reaching maturity]; therefore, my beloved brothers, be stabilized [be consistent in the function of gap], be immoveable [lock your positive volition in toward Bible doctrine] knowing that your labor [advance to supergrace] is not empty in the Lord.).

          4)       The royal family is motivated to advance to maturity through identification with Christ in His resurrection, Romans 6:4 (Therefore, we have been buried with Him through baptism into death in order that, as Christ was raised from the dead, through the glory of the Father, so we too might walk in newness of life [being in a state of spiritual maturity; our motivation being based upon Christ being raised from the dead]).


Philippians 2:9 Therefore also, the God [the Father] has exalted Him to the maximum, and has bestowed on Him [Jesus Christ] the rank which is above every rank.


Resurrection is only a part of that constantive and culminative aorist. The constantive aorist includes resurrection, ascension and session. So far we have seen resurrection only. The culminative aorist is tied to has bestowed upon Him a rank; this is the result of resurrection, ascension and session and the existing results. These points are similar to have is in NB2. There are one or two additional points below and many missing points from the later study.


Doctrine of Ascension and Session

1.       Definition.

          1)       The ascension is that doctrine of Christology pertaining to the transfer of our Lord’s true humanity from planet earth to the third heaven in a resurrection body.

          2)       The session is that doctrine of Christology pertaining to the glorification of our Lord’s humanity at the right hand of the Father. These definitions presume your understanding of the Hypostatic Union.

          3)       These doctrines are closely related to and based on the resurrection of Jesus Christ from the dead. If Christ remained on earth, He would have a limited glory, but when He went to the third heaven He became superior to all creation, and therefore had unlimited glory. Limited glory means that Jesus could have traveled about the earth and be seen in His glorified state, but this would have been limited to mankind.

          4)       When Jesus was told by God the Father, “Sit here at My right hand,” this would have indicated that he had become, in His humanity, superior to all angels.

          5)       These doctrines are closely related to and based on the resurrection of Jesus Christ from the dead. If Christ remained on earth, He would have a limited glory, but when He went to the third heaven He became superior to all creation, and therefore had unlimited glory.

          6)       As a result of the resurrection of our Lord’s humanity, He remained on earth for forty days before His ascension. The ascension of Jesus Christ occurred on day forty in His resurrection body. This period of time demonstrated the capabilities of the resurrection body. The resurrection body can eat food.

          7)       The ascension and session of Christ are predicated on the capabilities of the resurrection body.

                     (1)      It can travel horizontally and vertically at unlimited speed, and is capable of unlimited space travel.

                     (2)      Our Lord traveled horizontally during His forty days on planet earth, as well as moving through closed doors.

                     (3)      The ascension of Christ demonstrates the vertical travel of the resurrection body, moving with ease through the atmosphere of the earth, the galaxies of stellar universe, and the billions and billions of light years in an instant, and entering into the third heaven, the abode of God.

          8)       Upon arrival in the third heaven, our Lord was seated at the right hand of God the Father; this is the doctrine of the Session. Then He received His third royal patent and the title “King of kings, Lord of lords, the Bright Morning Star.” Because His third royal warrant had no accompanying royal family, the Church Age was inserted for the calling out of a royal family.

2.       Historical Account, Acts 1:9-11 And after He had said these things [announcement of Church Age, Acts 1:5, 8], He was lifted up before their very eyes, and a cloud hid Him out of their sight. And as they were gazing intently up in the sky as He was going, behold two men [teaching angels] dressed in white stood beside them. And they also said, “Men of Galilee, why do you stand staring into the sky? This Jesus Who has been taken from you into heaven will come in the same way as you have seen Him go into heaven.” While the angels were still talking our Lord was already in the third heaven. He traveled billions and billions of light years in just a few seconds.

3.       Significance of the Session.

          1)       After His ascension, His session fulfilled the prophecy of Psalm 110:1. The Lord [God the Father] said to my Lord [God the Son], “Sit down at My right hand until I make Your enemies a footstool for Your feet.” Jesus Christ had to be seated to resolve the angelic conflict. It was the strategic victory of the angelic conflict. Remember that His deity is omnipresent, everywhere, imminent and transcendent. It was His humanity that was seated at the right hand of the Father. This was an extract from the doctrine of divine decrees.

          2)       This prophecy is quoted a number of times in the New Testament, Matt 22:44; Mark 12:36; Luke 20:42-43; Acts 2:34-35; Hebrews 1:13, 10:13. It is quoted so often because it is very important.

          3)       Romans 8:34 asks, who has the right to condemn others? Who is the one who has the right to condemn? Christ Jesus is He Who died; yes rather, was raised from the deaths, Who is at the right hand of God, Who also intercedes for us. The authority of Jesus Christ is the authority of judgment and of condemnation.

          4)       Ephesians 1:20 Which power has been operational in Christ, the Father having raised Him from the dead and having seated Him at His Own right hand in the heavenlies. No session of Jesus Christ and no filling of the Holy Spirit.

          5)       Colossians 3:1-2 If therefore you have been raised in Christ [and you have in baptism of the Spirit and current positional truth], keep on desiring to possess and endeavoring to obtain the above things [escrow blessings] where Christ is, sitting at the right hand of the Father. Keep thinking objectively about the above things [doctrine], not things on the earth [good and evil]. For you have died, and your life is hidden with Christ in God.

4.       The sesion and the priesthood:

          1)       The session, therefore, confirms the celebrityship of Jesus Christ. Hebrews 1:3 Who, being the flashing forth of His glory and the exact image of His essence, also sustaining all things by the verbal expression of His power [Jesus Christ in the cradle held the entire universe together by the verbal expression of His power] having Himself accomplished the purification of sin was caused to sit down at the right hand of the majesty in the highest places. The Lord is now the #1 celebrity of the universe.

          2)       The session and the angelic conflict. Hebrews 1:13 But to which of the angels did He say at any time, “Sit down at My right hand until I appoint your enemies a footstool for your feet?” The answer is, only to none. God the Father said this only to God the Son. By this change of station, from earth into the 3rd heaven, Jesus Christ went from limited glory to unlimited glory above all angels and above all human beings.

          3)       The session and the priesthood. Hebrews 8:1 Now the main point on what is being communicated is this: we have such a category of High Priest high priest [that’s Jesus Christ, the God-man] who has taken His seat at the right hand of the throne of the majesty in the heavens.

          4)       Hebrews 10:12 But this One [Jesus Christ in contrast to the Old Testament sacrifices], when He had offered one unique sacrifice as a substitute for our sins for all time, sat down at the right hand of God. The session of Jesus Christ indicates the efficacy of His work.

          5)       The session and occupation with Christ is found in Hebrews 12:2

          6)       The session and strategic victory - 1Peter 3:22 Jesus Christ Who is at the right hand of God, having gone into heaven after the angels and authorities and powers had been subordinated to Him. All angelic forces, evil type, all types of demons, have been subordinated to Him. The Lord Jesus Christ is infinitely superior and has dominion over all creatures. This is demonstrated by the session.

          7)       the session confirms the celebrityship of Jesus Christ:

                     (1)      Acts 2:33, “Therefore, [Jesus Christ] having been exalted to the right hand of God.”

                     (2)      Acts 5:31, “He is the one whom God has exalted at His right hand as prince and Savior.”

                     (3)      Philippians 2:9, “Therefore also, God has highly exalted Him and given Him a title which is above every title, that at the title of Jesus every knee should bow and every tongue should confess that Jesus is Lord to the glory of the Father.”

          8)       The ascension and session and the angelic conflict. Hebrews 1:3–13 The ascension and session began a new sphere in the angelic conflict Ephesians 1:22–23 Which power [the power of the Word, understood through the function of GAP] has been operational in Christ, the Father having raised him from the deaths, and having seated him at his own right hand in the heavenlies, over and above all principality [the super demons], and authority [the commissioned demon], and power [the gifted demons], and lordship [the ruling demon], - in other words, Jesus Christ is superior and over all of these categories of demons - and every name that is named [rank and file demons], not only in this age but also in the one to come; and he has subordinated all demons under his feet, and has given absolute sovereignty over all the royal family of God with reference to the Church. And there lies the intensification of the angelic conflict, the demons who have been strategically defeated and are still tactically resisting, and the Church, the royal family of God. The same concept is amplified in Ephesians 4:7-10. This means that the Church Age is the dispensation of the intensified stage of the angelic conflict, not the Tribulation. The royal family of God is therefore subjected to the most unusual types of pressures throughout this dispensation. The believer, even in prosperity, begins to recognize the intensity of the Church Age as he begins to cross over no man’s land between supergrace A and ultra supergrace.

          9)       The ascension and the royal family: Jesus Christ is resurrection body is seated alone at the right hand of the Father. Not good that Jesus should be alone, so time is given over to establishing the royal family. Something to compliment His royalty. We fall into this category. We are formed by the baptism of the Spirit. God the Holy Spirit took believers and enters us into Jesus Christ. We are in the palace forever. This is why there are no sacred buildings today.

          10)     the ascension and the new priesthood.

                     (1)      The ascension and session of Christ abrogates the Levitical priesthood. The Levitical priesthood was a specialized priesthood, they had special holy days related to this priesthood, a lot of special activity, but they did not have the effectiveness that we have today.

                     (2)      The Levitical priesthood is replaced by the royal priesthood of the Church Age - 1Peter 2:9 You are a chosen race [a race of election; the only super race in the Church Age are those who have believed in Jesus Christ. Superiority is based upon grace and not upon any human act or ability.], you are a royal priesthood, you are a holy nation, a people of God's Own possession [God does not just keep us alive to provide us with the bare necessities. God wants to bless us to the maximum.], that you may proclaim the excellencies of Him Who has called you out of darkness into His marvelous light. God owns us and He wants to show us off; but our interior must be sorted out first. We must have the capacity for these things. Cf. Revelation 1:6 (And He has made us to be a kingdom of Priests, God His Father to Him be the glory forever.); 5:10 (); 20:6 (Blessed and royal is the one who has part in the first resurrection, over these, the second death has no power; but these will be priests of God, of Christ, and they will reign with Him 1000 years). Therefore the Lord Jesus Christ at the right hand of the Father is the new high priest - Hebrews 10:1-10 - and our high priest even makes intercession for us - Hebrews 7:25.

          11)     The ascension verifies the efficacy of the cross: Hebrews 9:23–24 Of necessity, therefore, on the one hand that the copies [or models] of things in heaven be cleansed with shadows; but on the other hand the heavenly realities themselves with better sacrifices than these - the work of Christ on the cross is superior to animal blood on the altar; the Jews were good at preserving the shadows, but they did not associate the shadows with the reality. - For Christ has not entered into a holy of holies made with hands [the tabernacle], a model of the reality [heaven], but into heaven itself to appear in the presence of God on behalf of us. The Levitical priesthood dealt with shadows; our priesthood deals with realities. However, these realities are not realities apart from Bible doctrine resident in the soul.

5.       The ascension and the ultimate defeat of Satan. The ascension and session of Christ begin operation footstool, according to Psalm 110:1, quoted in Luke 2:42 and 43, and quoted again in Acts 2:33,34 and Hebrews 1:13. The quotation of the prophecy in those three passages indicates the fact that operation footstool began with the session of Christ. The second advent terminates operation footstool. Christ will superseded Satan as the ruler of the world at that time - Daniel 7:14 describes that, "And to him was given dominion, glory and sovereignty, that all peoples, nations and languages might serve him; his dominion is an everlasting dominion which will not pass away, furthermore his kingdom is one which shall not be destroyed." Zechariah 13:2, "And it will come to pass in that day, saith the Lord of armies, that I will cut off the names of the idols from the land, and they will no longer be remembered; furthermore I will also remove the false prophets and demons from the land." The removal of demons means that they are bumped off the earth as it confirmed by Revelation 20:1-3. Colossians 2:15 describes the same thing, "Having disarmed demon archons . he made a public display of them, having celebrated a triumphal procession over them by means of him [His victory]."

          1)       The strategic victory of the great power experiment of the Hypostatic Union is the key to the importance of the ascension and session of Jesus Christ.

                     (1)      The resurrection, ascension, and session all deal with the true humanity of Jesus Christ. Jesus Christ is undiminished deity and true humanity in one person forever.

                     (2)      Just as only the humanity of Christ could provide our salvation by receiving the judgment for our sins in His own body, so only the humanity of Christ could be resurrected, ascend, and sit at the right hand of God the Father.

          2)       The humanity of Jesus Christ in Hypostatic Union is now exalted and glorified at the right hand of the Father where His posture is one of being seated.

          3)       The strategic victory of Jesus Christ in the great power experiment of the Hypostatic Union is related to the award of His third royal patent.

                     (1)      His first royal patent is related to His deity. His title is “Son of God.” His royal family is God the Father and God the Holy Spirit.

                     (2)      His second royal patent is related to His humanity. His title is “Son of David.” His royal family is the Davidic dynasty.

                     (3)      His third royal patent is related to His resurrection and ascension. His title is “King of kings, Lord of lords, Bright Morning Star.” His royal family is in the process of being completed, made up of every Church Age believer. You are not simply a child of God; you are a royal child of God.


This next doctrine is from NB2, and therefore, it has more material below than is found in the doctrine given by Bob.


The Royalty of Jesus Christ

A.       Definition.

          1.       The adjective royal means kingly, pertaining to a crown. It’s used to describe a king as the sovereign ruler of people.

          2.       The noun royalty connotes the regal quality or nature of a king.

          3.       The connotation is portrayed in both the original languages of the Bible. The Hebrew word used is meleke (מֶלֶ) [pronounced MEH-lek]; the Greek word is basileus (βασιλεύς) [pronounced bahs-ee-LOOSE]. Both words are used in connection with our Lord Jesus Christ and in other relationships.

          4.       The Bible not only recognizes the legitimacy of various concepts and categories of royalty, but favors it.

          5.       Our Lord Jesus Christ now possesses three categories of royalty.

                     a.       By virtue of His eternal and infinite being as God, He wears the diadem of the royalty of His deity.

                     b.       The royalty of His true humanity, by virtue of the virgin birth, Incarnation and First Advent.

                     c.        The royalty of His Hypostatic Union, by virtue of His strategic victory of the first Advent.

B.       The Divine Royalty of Christ.

          1.       His divine royalty is based on the fact He is eternal and infinite God, possessing all the attributes of divine essence. This is Christ’s eternal and infinite relationship with the Godhead. Jesus Christ is eternal God. He has all the attributes of God the Father and God the Holy Spirit. He is coequal and coeternal with them. As the manifest person of the Trinity, our Lord wears the crown of divine royalty, John 1:18 6:46

          2.       1Timothy 6:16 1John 4:12. The title for His divine royal patent is Son of God. This royalty has no beginning and no end. All Bible doctrine comes from His divine royalty.

C.       The Jewish Royalty of Christ, the Royalty of His Humanity.

          1.       The royal title of our Lord’s humanity is Son of Man. The Jewish royal title of our Lord is Son of David. The virgin birth introduces the humanity of Christ to the world. The royal patent of our Lord’s humanity is the virgin birth, resulting in His humanity.

          2.       At the point of His virgin birth, our Lord Jesus Christ became Jewish royalty as a direct descendant of King David in the tribe of Judah, the family of Jesse. Mary is descendant from their son Nathan. Joseph is descendant from their son Solomon, Joseph being Jesus’ legal but not real father. Mary’s line from Nathan is recorded in Luke 3:31; Joseph’s line comes down from Solomon through Jeconiah (who is also called Coniah—see the Coniah curse in Jeremiah 22:24-30, and Jehoiachin, 2Kings 24:6ff; Jeremiah 52:31ff) and is recorded in Matthew 1:11. The Coniah curse is that the Messianic line would at some point be cut off and not be descended from Solomon’s line. This curse was fulfilled at the point of the virgin pregnancy of Mary.

          3.       As Jewish royalty, our Lord fulfilled the Davidic covenant. In resurrection body in Hypostatic Union, Jesus Christ will reign forever as the Son of David. Mary became pregnant because God the Holy Spirit provided the necessary chromosomes for her pregnancy.

          4.       Our Lord’s promise of the Davidic covenant is found in Psalm 89:33-37, “But I will not break off My lovingkindness from him, Nor deal falsely in My faithfulness. My covenant I will not violate, Nor will I alter the utterance of My lips. Once I have sworn by My holiness; I will not lie to David. His descendants shall endure forever And his throne as the sun before Me. It shall be established forever like the moon, And the witness in the sky is faithful. Selah.” Cf. 2 Chr 21:7, “Yet the Lord was not willing to destroy the house of David because of the covenant which He had made with David, and since He had promised to give a lamp to him and his sons forever.” Acts 13:22b-23, “I have found David, the son of Jesse, a man after My own heart who will do My will.” We fail God, but the integrity of God never fails us. “From the descendants of this man, on the basis of the promise, God has brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus.” This is the fulfillment of the royal law.

D.       Battlefield Royalty

          1.       Jesus broke Satan’s back in the angelic conflict.

          2.       Resurrection, ascension and session is the basis for our Lord’s battlefield royalty. This is a unique royalty resulting in the strategic victory of the angelic conflict. This is a royalty bestowed upon Jesus Christ in Hypostatic Union and the emphasis is on His humanity, which was told to sit down at the right hand of the Father.

E.       The Hypostatic Union Royalty of Jesus Christ.

          1.       Our Lord’s hypostatic union royalty is based upon His strategic victory during the first Advent, when He defeated Satan during His thirty- three years of executing the prototype spiritual life for the Church Age.

          2.       By living in the prototype divine dynasphere, our Lord was qualified by impeccability to go to the cross and be judged for our sins. That judgment is the beginning of the strategic victory of our Lord. It was followed by His resurrection, ascension and session at the right hand of the Father. The cross was the greatest battlefield in history!

          3.       This royalty makes Jesus Christ the ruler of elect angels and regenerate mankind, Colossians 2:14 Hebrews 2:14.

          4.       The hypostatic union royalty was given to our Lord Jesus Christ as a verbal commission, Psalm 110:1,4, “The Lord [God the Father] says to my Lord [the Lord Jesus Christ]: “Sit down at My right hand Until I make Your enemies a footstool for Your feet. ...The Lord has made a solemn promise and will not change His mind, `You are a priest forever according to the order of Melchizedek.’” There is a complete break with Israel in this royal family. Jesus Christ is a king-priest. The royal priesthood is formed in the dispensation of the Church Age and every Church Age believer is a royal priest, 1Peter 2:5,9; Revelation 1:6. This is a royal family born again into a royal line. Our royalty does not come from physical birth because it includes every race in the world, but from the new birth. You have the same royal life to fulfill the royal law as our Lord Jesus Christ had on the Cross to fulfill the royal law (Jam 2:8). The royal high priesthood of Jesus Christ is confirmed in Hebrews 5:5-6; 6:19-20; 7:15-28.

F.       The Titles of Our Lord’s Royalty.

          1.       The divine title of royalty is “Son of God” (or Jehovah Elohim in the Old Testament), Romans 1:4. Only-born of the Father.

          2.       The Jewish title of royalty is “Son of David,” Romans 1:3.

          3.       Our Lord has the royal title “Son of Man” because He made the decision in eternity past as part of the divine decrees to come to the earth and provide eternal salvation for the entire human race.

          4.       Hypostatic union royalty title: “King over kings, Lord over Lords; the Bright Morning Star.” “King over kings” gives Christ precedence over human rulers; “Lord over lords” gives Christ precedence over angelic rulers, Revelation 17:14; 19:16; Revelation 22:17.

          5.       The royal title “The Logos” is based on our Lord’s decision to come into the world and provide eternal salvation. This was an unknown title until it was recorded in the word of God.

G.       The Royal Families of Jesus Christ.

          1.       Divine royalty includes God the Father and God the Holy Spirit. Jesus Christ always had this family in His divine royalty and always will.

          2.       Jewish royalty is the dynasty of David.

                     a.       All His ancestors from David and Bathsheba down to his legal father Joseph and His real mother Mary.

                     b.       His half-brothers: James, Joseph Jr., Simon, and Judas or Jude.

                     c.        His half-sisters: at least two, being also royal descendants. Matthew 13:55,56

          3.       Hypostatic union royalty is the royal family of God, every Church Age believer. After His ascension and session, there was no royal family for His third royalty. So the Age of Israel was brought to a screeching halt, and the Church Age was inserted, the dispensation for the calling out of the royal family of God. The Church Age is the mystery age, its doctrines being previously unknown. Technical phrases are used to describe the royal family: body of Christ, Church, bride of Christ, baptism of the Holy Spirit, sanctification, and beloved brethren.

H.       The Royalty of Christ Applied to His Name.

          1.       This is found in three words, Kurios Iesous Christos, meaning Lord Jesus Christ.

          2.       “Lord” refers to His divine royalty.

          3.       “Jesus” means Savior, emphasizing the strategic victory of the cross, resurrection, ascension and session, Hebrews 1.

          4.       “Christ” means anointed or commissioned one, emphasizing His Jewish royalty. Its Hebrew equivalent is Messiah and refers to His Jewish royalty.

I.        The Royalty of Jesus Christ at the Second Advent.

          1.       Each part of our Lord’s royalty performs a specific function at the Second Advent.

          2.       The divine royalty of Christ changes creation for the millennium, judges ecumenical religion and removes it, destroys the armies of the world, removes all unbelievers under the baptism of fire, and establishes perfect environment for the millennium. In His divine royalty, Jesus Christ controls history. Therefore, Jesus Christ judges the world both on the battlefields of Armageddon and in the baptism of fire to surviving unbelievers. Jesus Christ also establishes the Millennium and its 1000 years of perfect environment as the last dispensation of history, a parallel to the first dispensation of perfection.

          3.       The Jewish royalty regathers Israel, terminates the fifth cycle of discipline, establishes Israel as the last client nation to God in history, fulfills the unconditional covenants to Israel, and causes Israel to become a great source of blessing during the millennium.

          4.       His battlefield royalty emphasizes the angelic conflict in which Christ won the victory at the cross, resurrection, ascension and session. Jesus terminates Satan’s rulership of the world, incarcerates Satan and his great demon army. Only at the end of the Millennium will they be released for a short time. King of Kings, Lord of Lords is His battlefield royalty. .

          5.       Hypostatic union royalty makes Christ the strategic victor of the angelic conflict and replaces Satan as the ruler of the world, imprisons Satan for one thousand years, removes all demons from the world, and rules the earth for one thousand years.

J.        The Unknown Royal Title of Christ, Revelation 19:12ff.

          1.       This is mentioned in Revelation 19:12 And His eyes [were] a flame of fire, and on His head [are] many diadems [crowns]; and He has a royal title which has been written which no one understood except Himself. The many crowns refer to the types of royalty. Divine royalty, battlefield royalty and His Jewish royalty.

                     a.       The title has been revealed to the Church, but was unknown up until the Church Age and it is still a prophetic title. Matthew 11:27 is the key to interpreting this verse, “All things have been handed over to Me by My Father; and no one knows the Son except the Father; nor does anyone know the Father except the Son, and anyone to whom the Son determines to reveal Himself.”

                     b.       The Son, our Lord Jesus Christ, has the right of determination to reveal Himself. The Son has made the decision to reveal Himself in the infallible word of God, which abides forever.

          2.       The Son has revealed Himself to His royal family, all Church Age believers, in the next verse and gives us the name of this title. Revelation 19:13 He is clothed with a military robe splattered with blood, and His royal title is designated The Logos of God.

                     a.       The Lord Jesus Christ as a warrior is described in the prophecy of Isaiah 59:17, “He put on righteousness like a breastplate and a helmet of victory on His head; furthermore, He wore the uniform of justice, and He wrapped around Himself a military cloak of zeal.”

                     b.       Revelation 14:20 explains why this military cloak is splattered with blood: And the wine press was trampled outside the city, and the blood flowed from the wine press up to the horses’ bridles as far a one hundred and eighty miles.

                     c.        Isaiah 34:2, “For the Lord’s wrath is against all the nations, And His anger against all their armies; He has utterly destroyed them, He has given them over to slaughter. So their slain will be thrown out, And their corpses will give off their stench, And the mountains will be drenched with their blood.”

                     d.       Other passages describe the same annihilation of the enemy, Joel 2:20; (In Ezekiel 38-39 the Hebrew word “Gog” in this passage refers to the king of the North involved in the Armageddon campaign. In Revelation 20:7-9, the Greek word “Gog” refers to the end of the millennium.) Ezekiel 39:2-5, “and I will turn you around, drive you on, take you up from the remotest parts of the north and bring you against the mountains of Israel. I will strike your bow from your left hand and smash down your arrows from your right hand. You will fall in the mountains of Israel, you and all your troops and the armies who are with you; I will give you as food to every kind of predatory bird and beast of the field. You will fall on the open field; for it is I who have spoken,” declares the Lord God.” Isaiah 63:1-3.

                     e.       There are three explanations and great doctrines that come out of the title “the Logos of God.”

                                (1)      The Logos of the Word, that is, Bible doctrine.

                                (2)      The doctrine of verbal plenary inspiration.

                                (3)      The doctrine of the Logos of God.

                     f.        The unknown royal title (HO LOGOS TOU THEOU—"the Word of God”) has been written in the infallible word of God for every Church Age believer as royal family of God to see and understand for himself. However, it should be remembered that even the revelation of Bible doctrine is not known to us as it is known to our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ. Nevertheless, we can understand this unknown title through the study of the divine essence of Jesus Christ. Our understanding of the unknown title of royalty includes not only inculcation and cognition of the divine attributes of Jesus Christ as God, but the human attributes of Jesus Christ in hypostatic union. Our Lord’s unknown title is not hidden, but deliberately revealed in Scripture.

                                (1)      “The Logos” is the royal title of eternity past in the divine decrees, John 1:1-3, which is based on four decisions Jesus Christ made. (See the doctrine of Logos.) This is the title of the decisions our Lord made in eternity past to become our savior.

                                           (a)      Jesus Christ made the decision in eternity past to provide unlimited atonement by becoming the only efficacious sacrifice in human history, the basis for our salvation. This was one day’s work in eternity past.

                                           (b)      Jesus Christ made the decision to propitiate God the Father through His perfect sacrifice of Himself being judged for our sins. As a result of going to the Cross and being judged for the sins of the world, God the Father is satisfied with the salvation work of Christ on the Cross—propitiation. This eliminates all religions in human history as being efficacious to God the Father.

                                           (c)      Jesus Christ made the decision to reconcile mankind to God through faith alone in Himself. As a result of our Lord’s work on the Cross, mankind is reconciled to God.

                                           (d)      Jesus Christ made the decision to become the mediator between God and man, and therefore, equal with both parties—God and man. Therefore, Jesus Christ made the decision to become true humanity to become our mediator.

                                           (e)      Jesus Christ made the decision to redeem mankind from the slave market of sin. The result of Cross is also redemption, being freed from slavery to the lusts and desires of the sin nature. Every believer is born spiritually dead in the slave market of sin.

                                (2)      Because of our Lord’s victory on the Cross, one day’s work, God the Father added a second eternal title, “The Logos of the Cross,” 1Corinthians 1:18, “For the word of the cross is foolishness to those who are perishing, but to us who are being saved it is the power of God.”

                                (3)      At the second Advent there will again be one day’s work and another victory, and God the Father adds another title, “The Logos of God.”

                                (4)      Each of these three royal warrants was awarded for one day’s work by our Lord.

          3.       Revelation 19:14 And the armies of heaven were following Him on white horses, and they were clothed in fine linen, white and pure.

                     a.       The armies of heaven which were following our Lord include three army groups: all of the elect angels, all of the Church Age believers in resurrection bodies, and all the Old Testament believers and Tribulational martyrs.

                     b.       Everyone followed Him willingly and was delighted to be there with Him. This is the greatest march in all of history. All of these armies come out of heaven. Each of these groups is made up of millions upon millions of creatures.

                     c.        Every creature who comes back with our Lord will be mounted on white horses.

                     d.       The fine linen is the eternal body.

          4.       Revelation 19:15 A sharp broadsword comes out from His mouth, in order that with it He might strike the nations, and He will rule them with an iron scepter, and prior to this He treads down the wine press of the wine of the wrath of the anger of God, the Omnipotent One.

                     a.       The armies that follow our Lord, both angelic and human, follow the principle of Exodus 14:13-14, “Stand still and watch the deliverance of the Lord. The Lord will fight for you today.” 1Samuel 17:47, “The battle is the Lord’s." 2 Chr 20:15, “The battle is not yours but God’s."

                     b.       Total annihilation of the enemy results in one thousand years of world peace, the fulfillment of Psalm 46:9, “He makes wars to cease to the ends of the world. He breaks the bow and cuts the spear in two. He burns the chariot with fire.” Isaiah 2:4, “He will judge between the nations. He will condemn many peoples. They will hammer their swords into plow shears and their spears into pruning hooks. No nation will lift up a sword against another nation, and they shall never learn war any more.”

                     c.        This is the fulfillment of the prophecy of Isaiah 9:6-7, “He will be called Wonderful Counselor, the Mighty Hero, the Father of Eternity, the Prince of Peace. There will be no end to the increase of His government or of peace on the throne of David and over his kingdom to establish it and to uphold it with justice and righteousness from then on and forevermore. The zeal of the Lord of the armies will accomplish this.” The Lord Jesus Christ will be the greatest Judge in the history of the world. He will also be the greatest solider in all of history.

                     d.       The end of this verse has a concatenation (to link together as in a chain) of genitives. This is very dramatic. The violence of divine integrity destroys the violence of evil.

          5.       Revelation 19:16 And He has a royal title written on His military cloak and on His thigh, “KING of KINGS, AND LORD of LORDS.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #48


48 04/05/1976 Philippians 2:10 Genuflect; doctrine of the royal family of God


First nine verses are read.


Philippians 2:10  that at the name of Jesus every knee should bow, in the heavens and on earth and under the earth,  (BLB)


Verse 10 – “That” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which denotes a final clause, indicating a purpose, an aim, or an objective” “In order that.”


“at the name of Jesus” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of onoma (ὄνομα,ατος,τό) [pronounced OHN-oh-ma], which can mean rank, name, or personality. This time it means “in the presence of the person.” Also, the possessive genitive of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE], referring to the Lord Jesus Christ by His human name, meaning saviour—“In order that in the presence of the person of Jesus.”


“every knee” – nominative neuter singular from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], plus the nominative of the noun gonu (γονύ) [pronounced gon-OO] —“knee.” This refers to the first action of the resurrection body after the Rapture of the Church. The word “knee” is interesting because it is in the singular, which means down on one knee.


“should bow” – aorist active subjunctive of the verb kámptō (κάμπτω) [pronounced KAMP-toh]. The reason why so much emphasis is placed upon genuflecting is because at this time we will be in a resurrection body and we will know Him even as we are known. Therefore the soulish part where Bible doctrine is stored will be up to scratch with everyone; everyone will have maximum doctrine, therefore maximum appreciation of what is occurring at the Rapture of the Church. Consequently, because of the conditions of ultimate sanctification, the mental conditions involved, the maximum doctrine in the soul at that time for everyone, the genuflecting is a correct posture as a result of what is in the soul. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. It takes the occurrence of the Rapture of the Church and resultant genuflecting of the resurrection body before Jesus Christ, and regardless of its extent of duration it gathers it up into a single whole. In other words, from the time of the Rapture of the Church, all of the way through operation genuflect, it is all gathered up into one constative aorist. The active voice: the royal family of God produces the action of the verb. The subjunctive mood used with the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] is called a subjunctive of objective, a subjunctive of purpose, in this particular clause. It emphasizes the relationship between the subjunctive mood and the future indicative. The future indicative is a variation of the aorist subjunctive, which we have here, and often as far as morphology is concerned in the Greek they are exactly the same. In the early Greek the future indicative and aorist subjunctive were used interchangeably, and therefore the subjunctive here has the connotation of something in the future, rather than something that may or may not occur. This is not the usual potential subjunctive, therefore it is recognized with hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] as being a definite factor—“every knee shall bow,” there is no question about it, no potentiality here; this is a purpose related to the Rapture of the Church for the entire royal family of God.


Phoney religious talk today is indicative of having no doctrine in the soul.


“of things in heaven” – incorrect. Here is a possessive genitive plural from epouranios (ἐπουράνιος) [pronounced ep-oo-RAN-ee-oss]. The point here is that it is plural, and it goes with “every knee” (singular). It is “every knee of the heavens shall bow.” So this genitive plural is not “of things in heaven” at all. The genitive has to modify something and it goes back to the knee—“every knee of the heavens.” In other words, everyone who makes it to heaven at the Rapture—all of the Church Age believers. This verse actually summarizes the entire royal family of God composed of all Church Age believers.[5] The reason that the word “heavens” is in the plural is because of the immensity of space, and while we simply translate it “every knee of heaven shall bow” it is actually in the plural and indicates the vastness of space.


The following doctrine was taken in pieces from the larger doctrine taken from NB2. There are more points below than Bob actually gave during this lesson. Some of the notes below also come from Lesson #93, where this doctrine is covered again.


The Royal Family of God

A.       Definition and Description of the Royal Family of God.

          1.       The royal family of God is defined as every Church Age believer, regardless of his antecedence, background, race, classification, etc. All distinctions are erased at the point of salvation and reconciliation.

          2.       Whatever we were before, we are now royal family of God. This is a permanent royalty that will last forever. Our royalty is eternal and secure since it is related to our regeneration. This means all Church Age believers are in full time royal service for Christ as royal priests and royal ambassadors.

          3.       The royal family is simply the family of the king. All members of the royal family receive specific titles and names, like duke and duchess.

          4.       Just like the royal family knows what to do because they have been trained, we similarly have been trained. We do not think like people on the outside. We are royalty. We know how to deal with this life. We are not bullies; we are aristocrats. We know exactly what to do and exactly what to say in every situation. And you are clean and well-organized. You are relaxed and you develop poise so that this poise cannot be shaken. You do not fall apart. You are born into it when you were born again. We are different, but it does not show until you are trained.

          5.       Being a gentleman and a lady is a matter of training. No one is born that way.

B.       The Setting of the Royal Family.

          1.       The First Advent of Christ occurred in the dispensation of Israel. This includes Christ's two deaths on the cross, burial, resurrection, ascension, and session at the right hand of the Father. He received battlefield royalty at this point. Ten days later, He sent the Holy Spirit. His divine family is God the Father, God the Son and God the Holy Spirit. His Jewish family refers to all who pave believed in him who were Hebrew.

          2.       Ten days after the session, the Age of Israel was interrupted in order to insert a new dispensation into history for the purpose of calling out a royal family.

          3.       Jesus Christ was royalty by birth, by deity, and by His spiritual victory on the Cross.

          4.       The spiritual royalty of Christ occurred as a result of His spiritual victory over Satan on the cross and His acceptance by God the Father at the session.

          5.       Being seated at the right hand of the Father, he has a new title, "King of kings, and Lord of lords." Therefore, as the God-man, He is a new type of royalty: superior, permanent and spiritual royalty. Thus He must have a royal family to share His reign.

          6.       The Age of Israel had to be interrupted in order to introduce a dispensation in which the specific objective is to form a royal family for Christ. "The Church" and "the body of Christ" are synonyms for the royal family. The royal family on earth is called the body of Christ. In heaven, we are the bride of Christ.

C.       The Documentation for the Royal Family. Documentation is found in the entire books of Ephesians, Hebrews, Romans, and Colossians.

          1.       Ephesians emphasizes the status or position of the royal family forever.

          2.       Hebrews emphasizes the priesthood of the royal family forever.

D.       The Formation of the Royal Family.

          1.       The royal family is formed by the baptism of the Holy Spirit at salvation.

          2.       This is the work of God the Holy Spirit which began at Jerusalem on the Day of Pentecost to the eleven disciples and about 200 others. The Holy Spirit entered these believers into union with Christ.

          3.       Everyone celebrated by using some temporary spiritual gift such as healing, miracles, or tongues. But these gifts all ended with the completion of the Canon.

          4.       At salvation, the Holy Spirit enters us into union with Christ which makes us royal family. The baptism of the Spirit is identification with Christ as royalty, John 14:20 Acts 1:5, 2:3, 11:15-17 1Corinthians 12:13 Galatians 3:26-28 Colossians 2:12.

          5.       The result of the baptism of the Spirit is positional truth. Positional truth means the believer is positionally with Christ at the right hand of the Father. We are accepted positionally as royalty just as Christ is accepted in fact as royalty. We share all that Christ is and has as royalty in union with Him.

          6.       Positional truth belongs to all believers regardless of their spiritual status or maturity level. All Church Age believers are royalty no matter how evil or sinful they might be.

          7.       3 stages of sanctification.

E.       The Royal Family Relationship.

          1.       The spiritual royalty of Jesus Christ is unique. He is spiritual royalty at the right hand of God. Son of Man, Son of David, and the King of Kings Lord of Lords are three different names for Jesus in relation to the different types of royalty that He is.

          2.       As the victor of the angelic conflict, Jesus Christ in Hypostatic Union was alone at the right hand of the Father. Therefore the Father interrupted the Jewish Age to insert the Church Age, the dispensation of the calling out of the royal family for Christ.

          3.       The royal family on earth is called "the body of Christ" and in heaven is called the "bride of Christ."

F.       The Escutcheon of the Royal Family: the Indwelling of the Spirit.

          1.       The Spirit indwells us as a sign of royalty, 1Corinthians 6:19-20.

          2.       The Holy Spirit also indwells the believer's body (so that we can never be demon possessed) to provide a temple for the indwelling of Christ.

          3.       When we sin, we are still indwelt with the Spirit. Therefore we are still royal family even though out of fellowship.

          4.       As long as you are indwelt by the Holy Spirit you are royalty. You are indwelt forever, therefore are royalty forever.

G.       The Objective of the Royal Family on Earth.

          1.       The first objective of the believer is to take in doctrine on a consistent basis until he begins to have a personal love for God. This develops spiritual self-esteem.

          2.       Next, the believer must continue to grow spiritually by the intake of doctrine until he has developed spiritual autonomy, the virtue of impersonal love toward other members of the human race.

          3.       Then he must pass the momentum tests: people testing, thought testing, system testing and disaster testing.

          4.       Finally he must reach spiritual maturity, where he is blessed by undergoing evidence testing, thus becoming a witness against Satan.

          5.       At maturity, we receive our blessings which were deposited in escrow in Christ in eternity past (Ephesians 1:3-14). These blessings glorify God to the maximum. Then God may test us concerning these blessings as evidence against Satan. This is the objective of the royal family while on earth.

H.       The Objective of the Royal Family on Earth.

          1.       The first objective of the believer is to take in doctrine on a consistent basis until he begins to have a personal love for God. This develops spiritual self-esteem.

          2.       Next, the believer must continue to grow spiritually by the intake of doctrine until he has developed spiritual autonomy, the virtue of impersonal love toward other members of the human race.

          3.       Then he must pass the momentum tests: people testing, thought testing, system testing and disaster testing.

          4.       Finally he must reach spiritual maturity, where he is blessed by undergoing evidence testing, thus becoming a witness against Satan.

          5.       At maturity, we receive our blessings which were deposited in escrow in Christ in eternity past (Ephesians 1:3-14). These blessings glorify God to the maximum. Then God may test us concerning these blessings as evidence against Satan. This is the objective of the royal family while on earth.

          6.       We cross no man’s land with the various things that we had. We take these things with us. When you get into Bravo grace, you are no longer dealing with alpha grace, but everything is intensified.

          7.       Believers are used as opposition and they act as opposition when you cross over no man’s land.

I.        The Royal Family in Eternity.

          1.       After the Rapture, every member of the royal family will possess a resurrection body exactly like our Lord's .It will be minus the old sin nature, human good, and evil.

          2.       Then the royal family will be evaluated at the Judgment Seat of Christ with regard to their attitude toward Bible doctrine and their advance to maturity. Members of the royal family who reach maturity will have great rewards for all eternity and will be blessed to a greater extent than those believers who failed in time. These eternal rewards will glorify God for all eternity. There is no equality in heaven.

          3.       Next the royal family will return with Christ at the Second Advent to observe His victory against Satan and all the fallen angels in the Armageddon campaign.

          4.       Finally the mature believers of the royal family will rule with Christ during His millennial reign and then throughout all eternity.

          5.       No human good and no evil brought into eternity. No holy Joes in heaven. Vast differences between believers in eternity. There is no equality in heaven. Equality begins and ends with the resurrection body. Great divide between the believers who made it and those who didn’t.


Next we have a “both and,” a repetition of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] kaí (καί) [pronounced ]—“both in earth,” an appositional genitive masculine plural from epigeios (ἐπίγειος) [pronounced ep-IHG-i-oss], which means “the ones on earth.” It refers to the royal family who are alive when the Rapture takes place. These believers are living on earth and they are designated in 1Corinthians 15:54 as mortals taking on immortality.


“and things under the earth” – incorrect. This is an appositional genitive plural from the compound katachthónios (καταχθόνιος) [pronounced kat-akh-THON-ee-oss] [kata = under; chthôn (χθών) = earth], and it is translated “the ones under the earth.” It refers to all members of the royal family who die before the Rapture occurs. The emphasis is on their bodies which are placed under something—under the surface of the sea but generally under the earth. They are described in 1Corinthians 15:54 as this corruption shall take on incorruption.


Philippians 2:10 In order that in the presence of the person of Jesus every knee of heaven shall bow, both the ones on earth [believers alive at the Rapture], and the ones under the earth [believers who die before the Rapture occurs].


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #49


49 04/08/1976 Philippians 2:11 (review vs 9–10) Doctrine of the Rapture (revised)


Bob flew through a storm in a relatively small plane. He really enjoyed it.


Bob reviews some of the Greek which was previously covered.


Philippians 2:9 Therefore also, the God [the Father] has exalted Him to the maximum, and has bestowed on Him [Jesus Christ] the rank which is above every rank.


The word translated name also means rank. Battlefield royalty is King of Kings, Lord of Lords.


V. 10 is the acknowledgment of the Lord’s battlefield royalty; also known as the Great Genuflex in the Sky. The royal family formally recognizes the Lordship of Jesus Christ.


The possessive genitive must belong to something; they belong to the knees.


Philippians 2:10 In order that in the presence of the person of Jesus every knee of heaven shall bow, both the ones on earth [believers alive at the Rapture], and the ones under the earth [believers who die before the Rapture occurs].


Two categories of people: those on earth and those in the heavens. The ones on the earth and the ones under the earth (those who were buried).


Philippians 2:11 And every tongue shall acknowledge that Jesus Christ is Lord, resulting in the glory of God the Father.


Philippians 2:11  and every tongue should confess that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the Father.  (BLB)


Verse 11 – “And” is the transitional use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]; “every tongue” – nominative feminine singular from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], which means all of us are going to acknowledge our Lord, and the nominative feminine singular subject glôssa (γλσσα) [pronounced GLOHS-sah]. Interestingly enough, the resurrection body will have a tongue!


“should confess” – this is not confess, it is the aorist middle subjunctive from exomologeô (ἐξομολογέω) [pronounced ex-o-mo-lo-GEH-oh] and it means to acknowledge. This is a reference to the verbal acknowledgement of the uniqueness of Jesus Christ. This will be the acknowledgement of the royal family, all of whom will recognize the headship of Christ in resurrection body. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views the genuflection of the Rapture in its entirety but it emphasizes the results in the verbalising of doctrine resident in the soul—a specific doctrine which everyone will be cognisant of at that time, i.e. the unique royalty of Jesus Christ. The middle voice is an indirect middle, it emphasizes the agent—the royal family of God in resurrection body—as producing the action of the verb at the Rapture. The subjunctive mood indicates the purpose or the objective as the compliment of the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na]. The subjunctive here emphasizes, again, the relationship between the subjunctive mood and the future tense.


“that” – the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], used here after verbs of perception to indicate the content of the thought; “Jesus Christ is Lord” – kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]. Kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] is the title of our Lord’s royalty. The entire title is King of kings and Lord of lords, and kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] is often used simply to indicate the royalty of Jesus Christ—His royalty in hypostatic union at the right hand of the Father, the royalty that brought about the Church Age, the royalty that makes us in union with Christ royal family forever. Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] is the human name of our Lord, it means saviour. Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] brings in the fact that He has another type of royalty in His humanity: Jewish royalty from birth. He is Jewish royalty from birth; He is battlefield royalty from resurrection, ascension and session; and both of these titles of royalty are tied into His human name, indicating that both titles are related to His humanity. Notice that this is an anartharous construction which means no definite article, and the absence of the definite article emphasizes the uniqueness of the hypostatic union.


All members of the royal family of God will have their priorities straight under these conditions. The point is that when we acknowledge the Lord Jesus Christ it is going to glorify someone. The plan of God in a certain phase is concluded, the formation of the royal family of God is over with the big genuflect in the sky and the acknowledgment of the royalty of Jesus Christ.


Many reversionists took oaths of loyalty to Cæsar is lord. When we acknowledge Jesus Christ, this glorifies Him. The formation of the royal family of God is completed with the great genuflex.


“to the glory” – the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of doxa (δόξα) [pronounced DOHX-ah] means literally, “resulting in the glory.”


“of God the Father” – descriptive genitive theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], appositional genitive patêr (πατήρ) [pronounced pat-AYR], referring to the first person of the Trinity. The phrase is anartharous emphasizing the qualitative aspect of both God the Father and anything that comes from Him. The fact remains that God is perfect, therefore His plan is perfect; and the Father is the author of the plan.


Philippians 2:11 And every tongue shall acknowledge that Jesus Christ is Lord, resulting in the glory of God the Father.


This doctrine comes from NB2 and tracks very close to what Bob is teaching here. This doctrine is reviewed in Lesson #61, and all additional notes will be placed here.


The Rapture of the Church

A.       Definition.

          1.       While the Rapture is defined as the act of being transported, it is also defined as the state of being rapt or carried out of oneself. However, these definitions do not apply here. Rapture is used here in a technical theological sense for the resurrection of the royal family of God. It is the transport from earth into heaven. This is specifically used in the Bible for the singular event of the rapture of the church. The Age of Israel is completed only after the Church Age is completed. God does not mix His dispensations. That is why there is no mid-Tribulation rapture and no end-of-Tribulation rapture. Rapture is a Church Age doctrine.

          2.       Thr rapture is the second phase of the first resurrection following the resurrection of Christ.

          3.       Christ is resurrected, ascended, and seated at the right hand of the Father as part of the strategic victory of the angelic conflict.

          4.       This is known as our Lord's battlefield royalty. This is His only royalty with no family. Therefore, God interrupted the Jewish Age with the Church Age to call out and provide a royal family of God.

          5.       Once the royal family of God is completed, the Church is resurrected as the body of Christ to become the bride of Christ.

          6.       The Church Age is that period of human history when the royal family of God is being formed on earth, Ephesians 1:22-23 2:16 4:4-5 Colossians 1:18 24 2:19.

          7.       When the royal family of God is completed, then the Rapture occurs, 1Thessalonians 4:16-18 1Corinthians 15:51-58.

          8.       During the conclusion of the Jewish Age, the bride is prepared in heaven by receiving a resurrection body exactly like that of the Lord. Then comes the Big Genuflex and acknowledgment of the royalty of Christ. Then comes the Judgment Seat of Christ, when all Church Age believers are evaluated and rewarded. These are the supergrace rewards and the ultra supergrace rewards. 2Corinthians 5:10.

B.       The Promise of the Rapture, John 14:1-3 Let not your heart be troubled; you believe ini God, believe also in Me. In My Father’s house [the eternal heavens] are many dwelling places. If it were not so, I would not have communicated this to you. For you see, I got to prepare a place for you.. If I go to prepare a place for you [and I do], then I will come again [promise of the rapture] and receive you to Myself, that where I am, you also may be. The promise and prophecy of the rapture.

C.       The Imminency of the Rapture.

          1.       Imminency means impending, or threatening to occur immediately. It does not mean immediately. The rapture has been imminent for 2000 years. When Paul described the rapture as imminent, it could occur in the next few minutes or the next day; but it has not taken place yet.

          2.       Rapture is used technically for the fact that no prophecy has to be fulfilled before the Rapture occurs. The Rapture will occur when the last member of the body of Christ is saved.

          3.       While the Rapture is imminent, the Second Advent is not. Before the Second Advent occurs, there are many prophecies which must occur, e.g., the Rapture, the Tribulation, the Judgment Seat of Christ, Revelation 6-19.

          4.       Because there was no unfulfilled prophecy before the Rapture could occur, the early Church anticipated the Rapture under the concept of imminency, 1Corinthians 1:4-8 I always thank my God concerning you for the grace of God which was given to you in Christ Jesus [this is Paul’s sanctified sarcasm; in other words, they were still alive], that in everything you were enriched by Him [they had wonderful logistical support] by all the doctrine and all the knowledge [gnosis], even as the testimony concerning you was confirmed among you. You were not lacking any of the spiritual gifts. You should be eagerly waiting for the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ [Rapture], who will strengthen you to the end [of Church Age], blameless in the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.

          5.       The metabolization of doctrine and resultant growth to maturity results in occupation with Christ, whereby the believer waits with keen anticipation for the Rapture, Titus 2:13 Waiting with keen anticipation for that happy guarantee, even the appearance of glory of that Great God, even our Savior, Jesus Christ;...

          6.       James 5:7-8 Therefore, brethren, have patience [faith-rest technique; have patience because it could happen at any time] until the coming of the Lord [Rapture]. The farmer waits with anticipation for the valuable production of the soil, constantly being patient until it has received the early and the latter rains. Have patience! Furthermore, all of you become stabilized in your right lobes because the coming of the Lord [Rapture] has approached with the result that it is constantly drawing nearer and nearer. This means that the rapture could occur today, tomorrow; a year from now, 1000 years from now.

D.       The rapture and the resurrection:

          1.       1Corinthians 15:50-53 Now I communicate this doctrine to you, royal family, that flesh and blood cannot inherit the Kingdom of God [in our present bodies, we cannot go to heaven]; neither does corruption inherit incorruption. Behold, I teach you a mystery that we shall not all sleep [the body is asleep] but we shall all be changed, in a moment, in the blinking of an eye, at the last trumpet [for the assembly of the royal family], for the trumpet shall sound and the dead shall be raised incorruptible and we shall be changed. For this corruptible [subject to death] must put on the incorruptible [not subject to death] and this mortal must put on immortality [this is a reference to the rapture of the church].

          2.       Philippians 3:20-21 For the seat of our citizenship exists in heaven; even from which place [heaven] we eagerly anticipate the Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ; Who shall change the form of our body of our humble station [phase II] in conformity with the body of His glory [resurrection body; the glory of the resurrected Christ] according to the operational power from of this same one [Jesus Christ] also keeps on being able also to bring into subjection all these things to Himself.

          3.       1John 3:1-2 Concentrate on how great a love the Father has given to us that we should be called the children of God [and we are]; therefore the world does not recognize us because it did not recognize Him. Beloved, now are we the children of God and it has not yet appeared what we shall be; but we know that if He should appear [the rapture of the church], we shall be an exact copy of Him because we shall see Him just as He is.

          4.       The Church Age is the only dispensation in which there are historical trends and no prophecy. The Church Age began with an event prophesied-the baptism of the Spirit. Our Lord prophesied this in the Upper Room Discourse and just before He ascended. The Church Age terminates with the Rapture, which was also prophesied. There is no prophecy between these two events. This is the dispensation of the mystery doctrine.

          5.       No prophecy between the baptism of the Spirit and the Rapture means that the Rapture is imminent. It could occur at any time; no one knows the day or the hour.

          6.       The resurrection of the Church, like our dying, is completely out of our control. Just as we have no control over the time and manner of our death, so we have no control over the time and manner of the Rapture.

          7.       The resurrection of the Church is totally beyond our control because resurrection is the Lord's victory. 1Corinthians 15:57, "Thanks be to God who gives us the victory through our Lord Jesus Christ."

E.       The Rapture and the Big Genuflex, Philippians 2:9-11. The entire royal family of God will identify Jesus Christ as the head of the family to the glory of the Father. The Church in resurrection body makes a formal acknowledgment of the Father's function in the resurrection, ascension and session of Christ. The Big Genuflex occurs after the Rapture and before the Judgment Seat of Christ. We will kneel in front of the Lord Jesus Christ in a resurrection body. The first emotion that we will have is directed toward Christ. Therefore, also, the God (God the Father) has exalted Him [to the maximum] and He has bestowed on Him the rank which is above every rank [battlefield royalty] in order that in the Presence of the Person of Jesus every knee of heaven shall bow both the ones on earth and the ones under the earth. Every tongue shall acknowledge the Jesus Christ is Lord resulting in God the Father.

F.       Characteristics of the Rapture.

          1.       Cognizance and application of the doctrine of the Rapture provides stability for the royal family in phase two of the plan of God, 1Corinthians 15:58 Therefore, my beloved brothers, be stabilized (immoveable) always abounding in the production of the Lord, knowing that your labor [the advance to ultra supergrace] is not empty in the Lord. This is not being stubborn, which is ignorance; but being stable.

          2.       The Rapture takes the sting out of death. 1Corinthians 15:54-57, But when this corruption shall put on incorruption and this mortal shall put on immortality, then will come to pass the doctrine that stands written [Isaiah 25:8] "Death is swallowed up in victory. O death where is your victory, O death, where is your sting?" Shakespear stole a great deal from the Bible.

          3.       The Rapture removes hysteria and the hopelessness of bereavement, 1Thessalonians 4:13-14. However, we do not desire you to be ignorant, royal family, about those who are asleep [Christian death; the body is sleeping waiting for the resurrection] in order that you might not grieve as the rest of the world who have no hope. For if we believe that Jesus died and rose again [which we do] so also the God will bring with Him those who have fallen asleep in Jesus.

          4.       The Rapture is a source of comfort in time of bereavement, 1Thessalonians 4:15-18 For this doctrine of the word in the Lord we communicate to you, that we who are alive who remain until the coming of the Lord [the rapture] shall not precede those who are asleep for the Lord Himself will descend from heaven with a command [the command is to assemble everyone] with the voice of the archangel, also with the bugle of God; in fact the dead in Christ shall rise first and then we who are alive who remain shall be caught up together with them [the dead in Christ] in the clouds for the purpose of meeting the Lord in the air, and so we shall always be with the Lord. Therefore, comfort one another with these doctrines. Philippians 1:6.

G.       The Rapture is a part of ultimate sanctification, Ephesians 5:26-27. Having purified her [the royal family] He might consecrate her by means of the washing [that’s the teaching of Bible doctrine] from the water with the word that He Himself [Jesus Christ] might present the splendid glory of the church to Himself, not having stain [an sin nature] or wrinkles [human good, evil] or any such category of things related to reversionism, but that she [the church] should be holy and blameless. The bride cannot return to Christ until all vestiges of good and evil have been removed. The royal family of God is purified at the Rapture. Human good and evil are burned and the old sin nature is removed.

H.       The Rapture is the basis for confidence. Confidence is awareness of security. Integrity is a manifestation of awareness/cognizance. Many of the so-called martyrs died the sin unto death. The function of gap is key here.

          1.       The metabolization of doctrine and resultant growth to maturity results in occupation with Christ, whereby the believer waits with keen anticipation for the Rapture, Titus 2:13 Waiting with keen anticipation for that happy guarantee, even the appearance of glory of that Great God, even our Savior, Jesus Christ; Philippians 1:6 For I have confidence in this same doctrine, that He Who began a good work in you will accomplish it until the day of Christ Jesus (being the rapture of the church); 1Peter 1:3 Blessed by the God, even the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, Who, according to His great mercy, has caused us to be born again to a living confidence through the resurrection of Jesus Christ from deaths. The word for confidence again is elpis (ἐλπις) [pronounced el-PIS], which we often translate hope. The modern concept of hope is lack of confidence; lack of assurance.

          2.       The Rapture is categorized under three kinds of hope.

                     a.       Living hope, 1Peter 1:3.

                     b.       Blessed hope, Titus 2:13.

                     c.        Purifying hope, 1John 3:3.

I.        Chronology of the Rapture.

          1.       The Rapture takes place, 1Corinthians 15:51-58; 1Thessalonians 4:13-18.

          2.       The Big Genuflex occurs, Philippians 2:9-11. Emotion must follow doctrine; not vice versa.

          3.       The Judgment Seat of Christ when we receive our efficiency rating, 2Corinthians 5:10 Romans 5:10.

          4.       Bride returns with Christ at the Second Advent with our resurrection bodies, 1Thessalonians 3:13.

          5.       The manifestation of the Bride, Romans 8:19 Colossians 2:15 3:4 On the occasion when Christ our life might be made manifest, also you shall become manifest together with Him in glory.

          6.       Operation Footstool, Psalm 110:1 Zechariah 13:2 Colossians 2:15 1Corinthians 15:24-25. The fallen angels are removed from the earth and incarcerated.

          7.       The Coronation of Christ, Revelation 19:6.

          8.       The Wedding Supper of the Lamb, Revelation 19:6-9 And I heard as a voice of a great crowd of people [the OT saints] and as a voice of many waters [the tribulational martyrs, who are the friends of the groom] and as a voice of mighty thunderings [the tribulational believers alive at the second advent]; singing, “Praise the Lord because the Lord God all-powerful has become King [this is an act of worship, where we first must have cognizance]. Let us express super-happiness and let us give glory to Christ because the wedding of the Lamp has occurred and His bride [the church] has prepared herself [the 7 year preparation, receiving a resurrection body minus the old sin nature, our human good burned, our rewards and decorations received]. And it was given to her [the church, the bride] that she herself should be clothed in fine linen [the perfection of ultimate sanctification; the meeting of imputed righteousness with a resurrection body] and the unsoiled [absence of human good and evil] for the fine linen is the justification of the royal family. And He said to me, “Write, happinesses to the ones invited to the wedding supper of the Lamb” and He says to me, “These are genuine doctrines from the source of the God [the friends of the groom are there in their resurrection bodies] and the friends of the bride [it will be 1000 years before they receive their resurrection bodies].

                     a.       The groom is the Lord Jesus Christ; the bride is the royal family of God or the church; there are the friends of the groom and the friends of bride (who wait outside for the bride to show up). The friends of the groom are all the OT believers; and they receive their resurrection bodies. The friends of the bride who are the believers alive at the end of the Tribulation; and they go into the Millennium as the initial population. This begins a civilization. Matthew 25:1–13.

                     b.       With v. 7, the groom and the bride’s father make a deal. “I will take the bride off your hands for 10,000 drachma.” And the father says, “SOLD!” The groom says when he will pick up the bride. When he picks up the bride, that makes them married. They go to the groom’s house and they have been partying for 3 hours. The bride’s friends are cold stone sober. They are outside. They cannot enter into the celebration until to the bride shows up. Then for 7 days there is eating and drinking and feasting (the Bible calls this making merry). The marriage is consummated sometime during the 7 days. The Bible must be interpreted in the time that it was written. The 7 days of feasting characterizes the wedding.

                     c.        The bride and groom leaving in their chariot is the 2nd advent.

          9.       The purpose of the Rapture is to get the royal family of God prepared for the Second Advent and the Wedding Supper.


This doctrine was in a different order than that found in the NB, but most of the points were the same .


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #50


50 04/09/1976 Philippians 2:12a Doctrine of the Rapture (cont.); right pastor


There are a couple more points which deal with the rapture, and they will be placed with the previous lesson.


Lights in the World


Philippians 2:12  Therefore my beloved, just as always you have obeyed, not only as in my presence, but now much more in my absence, work out your own salvation with fear and trembling.  (BLB)


Verse 12 – if ever there was a verse which has been misunderstood and misapplied it is this verse. A lot of human good and evil are produced by people who try to apply this verse to their lives.


The Philippians are located in supergrace B.


In some cases my beloved refers only to advanced believers; and other times, it refers simply to people who have believed in the Lord.


“as ye have always obeyed” – we have a comparative adverb, kathôs (καθώς) [pronounced kahth-OCE]. The point is, whether Paul was present or absent, they were hearing or reading his doctrine and were always obedient. The word always is pántote (πάντοτε) [pronounced PAHN-toht-eh] which has to do with consistency of getting doctrine. It is an adverb of time, and it means today they go to Bible class, tomorrow they go, the next day they go, and the next, and so on.


The verb is hupakouô (ὑπακούω) [pronounced hoop-ak-OO-oh], and this is the key to everything. It does mean obedience but it means obedience in a very special sense. It means recognition of the authority of the pastor and therefore applying that recognition from the right lobe by attendance. The aorist tense is a constative aorist contemplating the action in its entirety. It takes the Philippian recognition of Paul’s authority and gathers it into one entirety so that every epistle of his they read and every time he comes they are there. Active voice: the positive Philippians produced the action of the verb, recognition of Paul’s authority and concentration on his message. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality.


“not as in my presence only, but now much more in my absence.”


Principle

1.       Since Paul was an apostle and had a teaching authority over all local churches before the canon of scripture was completed and circulated his authority was just as important in his absence.

2.       While the Philippians did not have face-to-face teaching they still learned more from Paul than from their pastor Epaphroditus.

3.       This was not because Epaphroditus had failed but because Paul was the greatest Bible teacher of the Church Age.

4.       Note the principle: The believer’s right teacher does not have to be present for the believer to grow through his ministry. There was the written ministry then.

5.       Believers have advanced spiritually without face to face teaching. The people in San Antonio are advancing right now because they are listening to Bob teach.

6.       Both Paul and Epaphroditus are in Rome but the Philippians continue their advance. Face to face teaching from one’s right pastor is obviously the easiest way to advance but in the absence of one’s right pastor the believer can still advance to super-grace.

7.       Therefore, while face-to-face teaching is desirable it is not necessary for spiritual growth.

8.       The Philippians have letters from Paul, but believers today have many other sources of communication, through radio, writings, television and tapes.


Paul’s brilliance is revealed in the Greek of his writing, and this makes him stand out as the greatest Greek mind in ancient history.


“work out” – here is where we run into a problem, the present middle imperative of katergázomai (κατεργάζομαι) [pronounced kat-er-GAD-zom-ahee]. This sword does not mean to work out. Sophocles gave us the real meaning of this, the first one who used it. He used the word in the sense of overcoming all opposition, to subdue. And in the Koine Greek it changes meaning slightly, it means to accomplish or bring about something, and often in the context, where there is a danger—to accomplish something where danger exists is the meaning. It is a perfect word to express combat activity, being a professional soldier in combat. This verse means and says, “be accomplishing your objective” or “advancing in your objective under pressure and danger.” It does not mean to work out salvation. The present tense is a descriptive present to indicate what is now going on. The Philippians believers are advancing professionally. The middle voice is the intensive or dynamic middle which emphasizes the part taken by the agent in the action of the verb. The agents: super-grace “B” Philippians believers. The imperative mood of permission in which the command signified by the imperative complies with the personal desires of the recipients. The Philippians want to advance, they want doctrine.


“your own salvation” is the accusative singular direct object from the definite article plus the accusative singular direct object from sôtêria (σωτηρία) [pronounced soh-tay-REE-ah], used for no-man’s land. It means to be preserved in a place of danger, often deliverance from impending disaster—which is where it gets the meaning of salvation. When you believe in Christ you are delivered from the impending disaster of the last judgment. But it actually means preservation in danger—“be accomplishing your own preservation in danger.” This is an idiom which is tantamount to a command: Be advancing to ultra-super-grace.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #51


51 04/11/1976 Philippians 2:12 Knowledge vs. understanding


Many people have great brilliance, but they cannot put on a suit coat that matches their pants; and others are very organized. The real you is the soul. The soul is invisible and immaterial. We have two frontal lobes, nous and kardia. Bob has often wondered how very intelligent men but they are often failures in many ways. Why are so many people on the psychiatrist couch.


We measure intelligence by IQ. This is the amount of knowledge that a person accumulates in the left lobe. They can accumulate a lot of information and give that information back to you. People have used their memory and can write down a great deal of things academically. They are said to have a high IQ and they are called brilliant. But these people often do not have wisdom. Information which is found in the left lobe cannot be applied to experience.


Doke Walker had the ability to think under pressure as a football player. He noticed where everyone was after a play. He always observed the opposition. He was one of the great gridiron people of all time.


Ulysses S. Grant graduated at the bottom of his class and he had phenomenal ability when in the War Between the States. Patton needed an extra year in school; but he could apply this information under pressure.


You need certain principles to understand Philippians 2:12. This verse is mistranslated and misapplied.


Three principles.


The soul is the battleground of the angelic conflict. The force representing God is Bible doctrine and the force which represents Satan is good and evil. Evil represents the great genius of Satan. Doctrine is the thinking of God, evil is the thinking of Satan.


The doctrine in your left lobe is no good; it must be transferred over to the right lobe. Left lobe knowledge has no practical application. A professor in Rice University may be brilliant and his C students will do better in life.


Many of you learned sex from a sex book. But it is in your left lobe but not your right lobe.


The Soul Is the Battleground of the Angelic Conflict

1.       A person is said to be brilliant or to possess a high IQ because of his ability to retain information in his left lobe. Human IQ is all about information in the left lobe. It is never in the right lobe where it counts.

2.       The rapid accumulation of information in the left lobe is called γνσις. They have book-learning but they don’t know what to do with it.

3.       Γνσις cannot be applied to life or to any facet of life. So smart people are often stupid. Nothing worse than a smart woman or smart man who is really dumb. No common sense. What you accumulate in your left lobe is not helpful at all.

4.       A little bit of knowledge in the right lobe is worth tons of information in the left lobe.

5.       In the Bible the right lobe is called kardia. The left lobe is the nous. You can only use what you know in the kardia. Thought from the right lobe produces dynamics and advance.

6.       Knowledge in the believer’s heart helps him to grow spiritually. The key in the Christian life is what you think in the right lobe. Knowledge in the heart helps the believer to advance spiritually.

7.       Bible knows is called doctrine. Spiritual growth and glorification of Jesus Christ.

8.       The humanly brilliant person can accumulate doctrine in the left lobe.

9.       This knowledge can be repeated or parroted to others, but it has not meaning or application.

10.     Both the person who has acquired such knowledge and those who hear it are impressed. They think you are a great spiritual giant. In reality, many people with left lobe knowledge are spiritual midgets. They possess a great human IQ, but in reality they have no IQ.


It Is Spiritual IQ Which Counts in Life

1.       It is doctrine in the right lobe that counts in life. Spiritual IQ is the sum total of understand doctrine. It is ἑπίγνωσις in the right lobe. The categorical storage, the launching pad, the vocabulary, etc. Knowledge is doctrine in the left lobe; understanding is doctrine in the right lobe.

2.       Doctrine must reside in the right lobe under four categories found in Scripture. When it goes into your vocabulary. You need a technical vocabulary for spiritual information. You need a vocabulary storage and a categorical storage. Suneisis is working knowledge. Suneidesis and when on the launching pad, the is sophia.

3.       Knowledge of doctrine does not produce growth and glorification of Christ. Understanding of Bible doctrine does produce growth and glorification of Jesus Christ.

4.       You cannot teach what you know; you can only teach what you understand.

5.       Our passage teaches us that you cannot grow spiritually on what you know; only on what you understand.

6.       Furthermore, you cannot glorify Jesus Christ by what you know; only by what you understand.

7.       Doctrine that remains in the left lobe is vulnerable to instant destruction by evil. People sometimes leave Bible doctrine in the left lobe. They reject the authority of the pastor; they have hangups, etc. Doctrine in the left lobe cannot cause spiritual growth or glorification of Christ. When evil gets into the soul of the believer, it is sucked into the soul by the vacuum in the left lobe. Human IQ of the brilliant believer can acquire left lobe knowledge rapidly; but they can lose that quickly.


Failure in the Christian Life

The great failure in the Christian life is not transferring doctrine from the left lobe to the right lobe through the ministry of the Holy Spirit and acceptance of the authority of one’s pastor-teacher. The one with the gift advances through personal study. .

1.       Doctrine in the right lobe is the basis for all spiritual growth and glorification of Jesus Christ.

2.       In crossing no man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace. The believer leaves the perimeter of supergrace and crosses over no man’s land into ultra supergrace. In crossing no man’s land, there is a period of vulnerability. The believer is in danger of ambush from reversionism and evil.

3.       Alpha grace is 0 to 100. Logistical support from God; a right pastor-teacher; food, shelter and clothing, the classroom, the canon of Scripture. At 100, yuu get another system of grace. In no man’s land you get bravo grace to take you from supergrace to ultra supergrace. So, beyond all of those other things. Bravo grace: you had some enjoyment of occupation with Christ, enjoyment of this. In no man’s land, these become logistical support. There are temporal blessings, wealth, prosperity of different types. David, for most of a year, was a carnal believer, but he still had his successes, he still had his wealth, he still had his prosperity. He still had sexual prosperity and leadership dynamics. All of the time of operation Bathsheba, it was not evil or reversionism. Blessing by association. The believer in no man’s life is under the greatest pressure of his life. But he is still a blessing to others; still a blessing to friends; still a blessing to others; a blessing historically. All of these other blessings are intensified. David was the wealthiest man of his day. He became the greatest king in all of history. Once you get to ultra supergrace, your children will have blessing from God, whether they are believers or unbelievers. Anything associated with the believer in ultra supergrace is blessed.

4.       This is why Philippians 2:12 includes words like obey. The Philippians are to work out their own deliverance under pressure.

5.       The soul continues to be the battleground for the angelic conflict.

6.       Doctrine which has not been transferred to the right lobe is subject to distortion and vulnerable to attack from evil.

7.       The believer crossing over no man’s land is in grave danger from reversionism.


Bob goes back to the first word in v. 12.


You never hear of a person walking out of a Calculus class in college and say, “That is an unfriendly class; I need to find a friendly one.” No, they go to get the subject. The church is the classroom where you get doctrine. No one can destroy the ministry of another if that ministry is of God.


Bob is one of the most maligned teachers of the past two centuries. The pastor loves the members of the congregation who take in Bible doctrine.


There are at least four other congregations listening to Bob right now in real time. The people in San Antonio concentrate on what he teaches; they obey (meaning they pay attention). You can grow spiritually on the radio or a tape recorder. It could theoretically occur on television.


Pan tote is related to being consistent.


When Apostles were alive, a person could have two right pastors. The regular pastor of the church and Apostles like Paul.


Teens coming to Berachah for fellowship. Their fellowship results them in being pregnant.


Bob does not understand a person who is bored when alone. Fellowship is for people who are mature enough to handle it.


Those who leave Berachah retrogress. Bob could mention ten cities where they were on tapes, but they picked up some pastor who was not giving them what they need. The believers right teacher does not have to be present in order for the people to grow. The Philippians grow based upon the writings of Paul. Face to face teaching is desirable, but not necessary in order to grow.


Bob continues with the exegesis previously covered (that is because he was teaching this in Bible class, and this is Sunday morning).


“work out” – here is where we run into a problem, the present middle imperative of katergázomai (κατεργάζομαι) [pronounced kat-er-GAD-zom-ahee]. This sword does not mean to work out. Sophocles gave us the real meaning of this, the first one who used it. He used the word in the sense of overcoming all opposition, to subdue. And in the Koine Greek it changes meaning slightly, it means to accomplish or bring about something, and often in the context, where there is a danger—to accomplish something where danger exists is the meaning. It is a perfect word to express combat activity, being a professional soldier in combat. This verse means and says, “be accomplishing your objective” or “advancing in your objective under pressure and danger.”


WWII soldiers who stacked up Kraut bodies to make chairs and tables to eat. They were professionals and they do a magnificent job. And they do not return to civilian life as killers and psychos.


Be accomplishing your objective or advance professionally is what believers are to do.


“your own salvation” is the accusative singular direct object from the definite article plus the accusative singular direct object from sôtêria (σωτηρία) [pronounced soh-tay-REE-ah], used for no-man’s land. It means to be preserved in a place of danger, often deliverance from impending disaster—which is where it gets the meaning of salvation. When you believe in Christ you are delivered from the impending disaster of the last judgment. But it actually means preservation in danger—“be accomplishing your own preservation in danger.” This is an idiom which is tantamount to a command: Be advancing to ultra-super-grace.


Next we have the preposition metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive of phobos (φόβος) [pronounced FOHB-oss]. While phobos (φόβος) [pronounced FOHB-oss] means fear it also means reverence and respect. It is used here for the believer as he is now moving across no-man’s land. He is to do so with phobos (φόβος) [pronounced FOHB-oss] —occupation with the person of Jesus Christ. It is respect directed toward Christ.


Then we have a second word, trómos (τρόμος) [pronounced TROM-oss], which means quivering or trembling but here comes to mean respect. The respect is toward Bible doctrine. This is like a person being braced standing for a long time; and they begin to quiver. It comes to mean to quiver. This is reverence toward Christ and respect toward doctrine.


Philippians 2:12 So then, my beloved, just as you have always obeyed, not in my presence only, but now much more in my absence, be accomplishing your own preservation in danger [be advancing even in danger] with reverence [toward Christ] and respect [toward Bible doctrine].


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #52


52 04/11/1976 Philippians 2:13–14 Doctrines of eternal decorations, motivation


The rugged terain that we transverse, is no man’s land, between supergrace A and ultra supergrace. This requires the most support beyond the regular rations. So this is logistical grace along with the support of paragraph supergrace 2.


Philippians 2:13  For God is the One working in you both to will and to work according to His good pleasure.  (BLB)


Verse 13 – the logistical support for the advance to ultra-super-grace. “For” is the explanatory use of the conjunctive particle gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr]. It actually indicates the role of God the Holy Spirit in the function of logistical support. With it is the present active indicative of the verb eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The present tense is a static present representing a condition perpetually existing—“For it keeps on being [it always is].” God the Holy Spirit is always involved in every step in the advance. The active voice: God the Holy Spirit produces the action. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal idea from the viewpoint of absolute, dogmatic reality. The believer is supported and sustained by the ministry of the Holy Spirit.


The next phrase is a predicate nominative from the anartharous theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], referring here to the third person of the Trinity. The absence of the definite article calls attention to the fact that God the Holy Spirit, even though He is numbered as the third person in the Godhead, has the exact same essence as the Father and the Son. The mechanics include the ministry of the Holy Spirit in the function of GAP. Not only does the Holy Spirit transfer the information into the left lobe, but under the filling of the Spirit it is transferred to the right lobe.


“which worketh in you” – the articular present active participle of energéō (ἐνεργέω) [pronounced en-erg-EH-oh]. It means to be at work or to work inside, it means to be effective in its intransitive meaning. “For it is [the Holy Spirit] God who is at work in you.” The present tense is a retroactive progressive present denoting what was begun in the past at the point of salvation and continues into the present time. The active voice: the indwelling Holy Spirit produces the action of the verb. The participle is circumstantial for the logistical support. The prepositional phrase which follows indicates the member of the Trinity involved—en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative plural of su (σύ) [pronounced soo] meaning all believers.


Then we have the phrase “both, and”—the repetition of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], and with it the present active infinitive of thélô (θέλω) [pronounced THEH-loh], “to will.” It connotes both a wish of desire and a wish of purpose or result. Hence, it means to purpose and it has the connotation of motivation. The present tense is pictorial, presenting to the mind a picture of crossing between super-grace and ultra-super-grace in the process of occurrence. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The infinitive is of intended result, when the result is indicated as fulfilling a deliberate objective—reaching ultra-super-grace, hence it blends purpose and result. It requires strong motivation from the indwelling presence of God the Holy Spirit to cross between super-grace and ultra-super-grace. This motivation must be constantly fed from maximum doctrine resident in the soul. Here, again, is the sustaining ministry of God the Holy Spirit in the function of GAP in motivating the believer to remain under doctrine—“both to purpose [motivation] and to do [execution].”


“of his good pleasure” – a prepositional phrase, hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] plus the ablative of eudokia (εὐδοκία) [pronounced you-dohk-EE-ah]. Eudokia (εὐδοκία) [pronounced you-dohk-EE-ah] (strictly a Koine Greek word) is the key here because in the ablative with hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] it means above and beyond his good pleasure.” It originated out of the necessity to find an equivalent of the Hebrew word râtsôwn (רָצוֹן) [pronounced raw-TSOWN] which means delight, acceptance, approbation, favour, grace, will, pleasure. It did not occur in Attic Greek and in this passage it indicates both the will and the pleasure of God.


Philippians 2:13 For it is God [Holy Spirit] who is at work in you both to will [motivation] and to do [execution] above and beyond his will and good pleasure.


Eternal Decorations

1.       The alpha cross. This goes with supergrace A; anyone who attains this level of spiritual maturity receives the alpha cross. This is called the crown of righteousness. This is the maturity fulfillment of phase II. It is worn on the body of the believer who has attained supergrace A it is worn forever and it glorifies Jesus Christ forever and ever. It means tremendous above and beyond blessings in heaven. There will be a lot of peons in heaven. There is no equality in heaven. All of the laws in the world cannot many any two people equal. The Romans fought on the sea exactly as they fought on land. They still defeated every great Navy that existed. Two types of shoes. Three types of helmets. The Romans were wearing decorations. Once you reach maturity, you are then guaranteed an alpha cross. Roman soldiers were very well paid for these decorations.

2.       The alpha cross oak leaf cluster. This goes to the pastor or the Apostle who leads the believer to supergrace status. For every person a pastor leads to supergrace, he gets an additional oak leaf cluster or a silver leaf cluster, depending upon how many were involved.

3.       The bravo cross, the crow of life worn on the resurrection body of the believer for achieving ultra supergrace. For every believer who reaches supergrace B, the pastor gets an oak leaf cluster for his Bravo cross.

4.       The bravo cross oak leaf cluster. The pastor who leads his congregation to supergrace B. No pastor can lead his congregation beyond his own spiritual growth. He is the blind leading the blind; he and his congregation fall into the ditch. A program pastor. This is how you get program churches. The pastor who is a baby preaches the gospel a couple of times on Sunday and a devotional on Wednesday. The adolescent pastor will have some sort of legalistic teaching. The pastor in ultra supergrace can lead his congregants to any stage of supergrace.


Philippians is all about no man’s land. Some have been R & R-ing for many years. There is a logistical grace for R & R. Once we are out in no man’s land, we have to take out our various blessings. These are things in a saddlebags which can be used to get us across no man’s land.


Philippians 2:14  Do all things without murmurings and disputings,  (BLB)


Verse 14 – opposition to the advance to ultra-super-grace. “Do” is the present active imperative of poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh]. It means to do, but in the present active imperative it should be “Keep on doing.” The present tense is a futuristic present, it denotes what has not yet occurred in crossing between super-grace and ultra-super-grace but is regarded as so certain that in thought it is regarded as already coming to pass. So this may be regarded as a pictorial present depicting what is in the process of occurrence—super-grace believers following Paul toward ultra-super-grace. The active voice: super-grace believers produce the action of the verb. This is the believer who has cracked the maturity barrier and is crossing no-man’s land toward ultra-super-grace. The imperative mood is a command to cross no-man’s land to ultra-super-grace status.


“all things” – accusative plural direct object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], and it is related to crossing no-man’s land. This means everything that is necessary to keep moving, to keep closing in on the objective. “All things” means to utilize food, shelter, clothing, transportation, to forsake not the assembling of yourselves together, to keep coming to Bible class.[6]


“without murmurings and disputings” – the adverb chôris (χωρίς) [pronounced khoh-REECE] is an improper preposition. (When an adverb is used as a preposition, that is improper) With this is the genitive plural of gongusmós (γογγυσμός) [pronounced gong-goos-MOSS], which connotes sullen discontent, complaining, criticism. It is a sloppy, evil mental attitude. We translate it, “without complaints.” The next word is also a part of the prepositional phrase—dialogismos (διαλογισμός) [pronounced dee-al-og-is-MOSS], referring to argumentation, trying to undermine someone’s authority. Polibius used dialogismos (διαλογισμός) [pronounced dee-al-og-is-MOSS] for thinking or reflecting. In the Septuagint of Psalm 55:5, where it is hooked up with a formula for evil thought. Hence, in the New Testament is does connote evil thinking resulting from the combination of being under the influence of evil or tempted by evil and hooking it up with a brand of carnality known as pride or arrogance.


Philippians 2:14 Keep on doing all things [advancing] without sullen discontent and augmentations [which undermine authority].


The Doctrine of Motivation has already been given in Lesson #21. Some additional notes were added there.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #53


53 04/12/1976 Philippians 2:15a Doctrines of motivation, morality


Reading of translation.


The Doctrine of Motivation reviewed and continued. This doctrine is found back in Lesson #21 and is also listed in the doctrines of R. B. Thieme, Jr. Some additional material added, but not a lot.


Pride causes them to fail to see. They always distort the movies of supergrace believers. Pride and arrogance were submerged and evil motivation would come up.


Philippians 2:15  so that you may be blameless and innocent, children of God unblemished in the midst of a crooked and perverted generation, among whom you shine as lights in the world,  (BLB)


Verse 15 – the historical impact of ultra-super-grace. “That” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na], used for a final clause to denote a purpose, an objective. This use after the present imperative is rare in the Attic Greek but is constantly used in the Koine Greek—“In order that.”


“ye may be” – aorist middle subjunctive from the verb gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my]. It means to become. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views ultra-super-grace status in its entirety but it emphasizes its existing results in the area of historical impact: “In order that you yourselves might become.” The middle voice is the direct middle in which the agent, the ultra-super-grace believer, participates in the results of the action. The agent is related to the action with a reflexive connotation, for the results of the action are referred to the agent with strong reflexive force. In other words, no one ever reaches ultra-super-grace without having definite historical impact. The ultra-super-grace believer has blessing by association, not only while he is alive but after he has died. The subjunctive mood of the verb gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my] is a potential subjunctive and goes with the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] to denote a divine goal or objective. This is the historical impact of the ultra-super-grace believer.


Historical impact is first stated by a predicated nominative plural—“blameless.” It is a compound adjective, amemptos (ἄ́μεμπτος) [pronounced AM-emp-tos] [a = negative, not; memphomai (μέμφομαι) [pronounced MEHM-fom-ahee] = to find fault, to censor, to blame], “not blamed, faultless.” It refers to the believer in ultra-super-grace. It does not mean that he doesn’t sin. We must distinguish between sin and evil. Evil has a source—the right lobe, thought. Sin originates with the old sin nature. They have a different source, and while mental sins and verbal sins often overlap into evil, or are the motivation or the result of motivation and evil, evil and sin are different just as sin and crime are also different. Crime often involves sin. All people are sinners but not all people are criminals. Sin was judged on the cross, and recovery from sin and/or carnality is as quick as naming the sin to God; but such is not the case with evil. Evil is not confessable and evil has no instant recovery. The quickest recovery from evil and reversionism ever made was the apostle Paul who in two years made the recovery from his Jerusalem reversionism. Timothy made a quick recovery from his Ephesians reversionism, but generally people do not make that rapid recovery, and this is the great danger and challenge to the Christian life—evil. The believer in ultra-super-grace is free from evil. No believer can have historical impact and be in a state of reversionism because in the state of reversionism he is under the influence of evil. The ultra-super-grace status, by the way, is insulation against both reversionism and evil. When the believer is in ultra-super-grace he has maximum occupation with Christ and the intensification of divine happiness. Under these conditions he is free from sin and evil. So the word “blameless” is simply used to indicate the ultra-super-grace status of total freedom from evil. This is the greatest freedom in life.


Our Congress votes to whitewash the devil’s world. They are not advancing under the glorification of the Lord Jesus Christ. Most of the legislation offered since FDR has been evil, with some exceptions. No believer can have historical impact and be influenced by evil. If women were properly loved, there would be no women’s lib. The happiest people in the world are under the authority of someone else. Bob is under the authority of God.


Bob does not want to be manumitted from slavery to Jesus Christ. He is under authority and he is happy. Some of you women have never been under authority and you are miserable. Bob knows that Jesus Christ loves him.


“harmless” – what is harmless today? Not much of anything! People try to be harmless by being sweet to others. Being sweet is sometimes one of the most harmful things that can happen to other people. To be sweet to some people is to be harmful. To be sweet and soft on communism is harmful; to be sweet to criminals is harmful. There are certain kinds of people who are bullies and have no respect for any authority unless it is backed by force, and to be sweet to such people is totally destructive. Here we have the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], which means “even.” The word “harmless” is a predicate nominative plural from the compound adjective akeraios (ἀκέραιος) [pronounced ak-EHR-ah-yos] [a = negative; keránnymi (κεράννυμι) [pronounced ker-AN-noo-mee] = to mix drinks, to dilute good wine with water and therefore to cheat, to charge the full price for the wine and therefore deceive the customers], which means not a huckster, not diluted. In other words, it is pure and not diluted with evil. So this is not the word “blameless” at all, it means “no evil”—“even innocent of evil.” It means to be full of doctrinal integrity. Undiluted by evil.


“the sons of God” – a reminder of the family, but more so of the discipline of the family, tekna theou: the predicate nominative plural from teknon (τέκνον) [pronounced TEK-non] which means a child in relationship to parents, but it means a child under discipline, under the authority of parents. We do not have the adult word here which is often used for the royal family, the word huios (υἱός, ο, ὁ) [pronounced hwee-OSS]. The royal family is not in view here so much as the believer under the authority and discipline of God. We advance under the discipline and authority of God in phase two. Failure to take in Bible doctrine means discipline for reversionism. The genitive of relationship from theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS] indicates the “parent” source. God Himself is like a parent, and as long as we are on this earth we are like children.


“without rebuke – another predicate nominative, amômos (ἄμωμος) [pronounced AM-oh-moss] [a = no/negative; mōmos (μμος) [pronounced MO-moss] = disgrace to society]—“not a disgrace to society.” This word was used for sacrificial animals being unblemished. It also means harmless in the moral or establishment sense. Since morality[7] is a part of establishment it refers to establishment orientation: believers who are patriotic, pro-military, pro-police and against the criminal, anti-communist. Believers are under the laws of establishment just as are unbelievers, and therefore they have an establishment obligation in he field of morality and patriotism.


Berachah has a floating population of males who attempt to outwit some women in Berachah. And attempt to seduce them. Bob says the parents need to warn their girls about men and not to trust anyone who even says hi. Berachah has some of the most obvious wolves in the world.


The Doctrine of Morality comes from NB2 and there is more material in the notes which follow than what Bob gave in class.


Morality

4/12/76; 3/28/79; Spiritual Dynamics 4, 7/4/92

A.       Definition.

          1.       The believer must learn to distinguish between the spiritual life and morality and at the same time to understand morality's relationship to the Christian life.

          2.       Morality is defined as right conduct and excellence in the practice and function of the laws of divine establishment. Morality is conformity to the rules of right conduct as delineated in establishment principles, such as, what the Scripture teaches about establishment, Romans 13:1-10. Morality is conformity to the laws of divine establishment, the duties and responsibilities toward establishment principles. Morality pertains to the character, conduct, ethics, motivations, and integrity related to the laws of divine establishment found in the word of God. Morality is the doctrine of the duties and responsibilities of all mankind in the direction of establishment.

          3.       Morality is conformity to the laws of divine establishment.

                     a.       Morality is virtue in sexual matters, or chastity. Hence, morality is right conduct related to divine institutions.

                     b.       Morality is right conduct in marriage as a divine institution.

                     c.        Morality is right conduct in family function; for the family is also a divine institution.

                     d.       Morality is right conduct in conformity to the laws of a nation, since nationalism is a divine institution, Acts 17:26 Romans 13:1-10.

          4.       Since divine institutions such as marriage, family, government are for both believers and unbelievers alike, morality is for believers and unbelievers alike. Conformity to the principles of morality as stated in divine institutions is the heritage of both believers and unbelievers. Both believers and unbelievers must recognize that morality belongs to the human race. Morality is the only way we can live together and at the same time have our privacy and our freedom to fail or succeed in life. In order to perpetuate the human race during the angelic conflict, God designed a set of laws to guarantee privacy, freedom, property and the perpetuation of the human race. These laws are called establishment. Morality is the basis for the function of the laws of divine establishment for both believer and unbeliever.

          5.       The believer is mandated by the word of God to be a moral person and to fulfill his obligation of right conduct within the framework of the national entity. Jesus emphasized the fact that believers have moral obligations and responsibilities when He said, "Render unto Caesar the things that are Caesar's and unto God the things that are God's."

          6.       In order to perpetuate the human race in the postdiluvian civilization from Noah to the Second Advent and in order to fulfill the divine purpose in the creation of mankind, morality was designed for compatibility with establishment principles.

B.       Morality and Christianity.

          1.       The believer is mandated to be moral on the one hand, but on the other hand he is mandated by the word of God to live in a realm much higher than the system of morality found in establishment. He is mandated to a higher responsibility and purpose for a life that is not only dealing with mankind but also with billions of angels who are watching as part of the angelic conflict. Since the unbeliever can be and often is extremely moral, obviously the Christian should be able to match the morality of the unbeliever. Anything that the unbeliever can do is not the spiritual life. Anything the unbeliever can do is not the Christian way of life. The unbeliever can be moral but not spiritual. The unbeliever can be very moral and very wonderful. The spiritual life is the monopoly of the believer. The believer does not reject morality, but has a higher calling. Morality belongs to the entire human race. The spiritual life is given to every believer at the moment of salvation as a part of our portfolio of invisible assets.

          2.       Morality is for believers and unbelievers alike, while the spiritual life is for believers only. This does not imply that the spiritual life rejects morality but adds a dimension related to regeneration.

          3.       Christianity is not morality but a relationship to God through Christ, 2Corinthians 5:17. However, in the Christian way of life, morality is the result, not the means of living the Christian way of life. When filled with the Holy Spirit, you are moral. Morality is not Christianity, but a by-product of the function of any adult person under the laws of divine establishment. Morality forbids fornication in the spiritual life, Ephesians 5:3, "But fornication and all licentiousness or insatiable erotic desire should not even be mentioned by you as is protocol for the saints." This is passage is directed toward believers even though the subject is morality. While the plan of grace does not give the believer a license to sin, nor does the Bible condone antinomianism, nevertheless, morality has no spiritual dynamics in the Christian way of life.

          4.       Morality is a part of Christian modus operandi along with, and not in contradiction to, your spiritual life.

          5.       Morality has no dynamics in the Christian way of life.

          6.       Morality belongs to the believer and the unbeliever. Morality accompanies Christian advance; but morality is not the Christian way of life.

          7.       Morality is for believers and unbelievers.

          8.       Unbelievers can be very moral and the Christian ought to be able to match the morality of the unbeliever.

          9.       Morality s the result but not the means of the Christian life. All of the Sunday School literature, it is mostly morality. Nothing wrong with teaching morality to children; but do not teach it as the Christian way of life.

C.       The true dynamics of Christianity is virtue, not morality.

          1.       The dynamics are supergrace A going to supergrace B going to ultra supergrace. Experiential sanctification and/or Christian maturity constitutes the true dynamics of Christianity.

          2.       Experiential sanctification is a combination of the balance of maximum metabolized doctrine circulating in the stream of consciousness and the enabling power (filling) of the Holy Spirit in the divine dynasphere.

          3.       This combination exists when the believer has cracked the maturity barrier through the daily momentum of metabolized doctrine applied during momentum testing.

          4.       While the mature believer and growing believer are moral, Christian dynamics, while including morality, exceed morality greatly.

D.       The Limitations of Morality.

          1.       Morality cannot provide eternal salvation, Titus 3:5 Galatians 2:16, 3:2 Romans 3:20, 28.

          2.       Morality cannot produce the spiritual life, Galatians 3:2-3, "This is the only thing I want to find out from you: did you receive the Spirit by the works of the Law, or by the hearing of faith? Are you so foolish that having begun by means of the Spirit, you are now trying to be perfected by the flesh?"

          3.       Morality cannot advance the believer in the protocol plan of God. However, immorality can hinder the believer from executing the plan of God, because immorality puts him out of fellowship.

          4.       Morality cannot produce the enabling power of the filling of the Holy Spirit.

          5.       Morality cannot provide maturity, escrow blessing, or evidence testing, which glorify God.

          6.       Morality cannot produce supergrace or ultra supergrace.

E.       The relationship of morality and evangelism:

          1.       Morality protects human freedom. The magna carta of human freedom is the ten commandments, which contain human freedom.

          2.       Morality is produced by keeping the Ten Commandments.

          3.       This morality produced protects human freedom making evangelism in every generation possible.

          4.       The local church can function because of morality and the laws of divine establishment. .

F.       The relationship between morality and the angelic conflict.

          1.       Morality is essential to the survival and perpetuation of the human race during the angelic conflict. It is so designed by God.

          2.       Morality is designed by God for the function of the human race. Morality is designed for the function of human freedom in relationship to us being evangelized and for the advancement in the Christian life.

          3.       Morality creates the environment of freedom. This makes it possible for you to come to Berachah Church night after night.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #54


54 04/13/1976 Philippians 2:15b Sin cf. evil and crime; doctrine of evil (introduced); the original Little Red Riding Hood


Bob has a copy of Army Times. Article: Few Had Neutral Views on Monty. He was the most controversial leader in the second great war. The writer is of the opinion that Monty was overrated. He was insufferably arrogant; where most leaders from Great Britain were exactly the opposite. PM Churchill referred to Montgomery as an . “There but for the grace of God goes God” is one comment made about him. Some of his troops did like him because he tried to avoid casualties.


A review of the translation of v. 15 so far.


“in the midst of a crooked and perverse generation” – the adverbial accusative of time from the adjective mesos (μέσος) [pronounced MEH-soss], meaning literally, “in the middle of.” The accusative can be used to indicate a point of time the same as the locative case can. However, duration or extent of time is not possible in the locative and therefore the accusative is used for a point of time. It is a part of a continuous period implied in this context by historical generations. In other words, evil exists in every generation, says the adverbial accusative of time. Plus the descriptive genitive from the adjective skolios (σκολιός) [pronounced skol-ee-OSS], which means crooked, unscrupulous, dishonest; hence a generation under the influence of evil, not influenced by the laws of divine establishment or by Bible doctrine. A person influenced by evil is dishonest; a generation influenced by evil is crooked or dishonest. The word “perverse” is the connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the perfect passive participle from the verb diastrephô (διαστρέφω) [pronounced dee-as-TREHF-oh]. It means to make crooked, to become misshapen, to be perverted or depraved. It means all of those here because the principle deals with the influence of evil—“and perverted.” Plus the descriptive genitive singular from the noun genea (γενεά) [pronounced ghen-eh-AH], meaning “generation.”


“among whom” – preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative plural of the relative pronoun hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç]. The relative pronoun has an antecedent, the negative generation under the influence of evil. By negative generation is meant “reversionistic.” Reversionism originates from two areas of negative volition: rejection of the laws of divine establishment; rejection of Bible doctrine.


“ye shine” – here is where the super-grace believer comes into the picture. The present middle indicative from phainô (φαίνω) [pronounced FAH-ee-noh], which means to shine or to give light. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs in the historical impact of super-grace or ultra-super-grace believers. This is also a static present for the perpetual impact of the mature believer on his generation of history. All mature believers, whether they realize it or not, have a definite impact on history. The middle voice is an indirect middle in which the agent (mature believer) produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of historical impact of the mature believer, not only in his own generation but often other generations as well.


“as lights” – the relative adverb hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç] sets up a comparative particle for analogy to the historical impact of the mature believer to his own generation. The nominative plural from the noun phōstήr (φωστήρ) [pronounced foce-TARE], which means a light-giving body. This is a nominative of appellation which emphasizes the impact on history of the mature believer. To give light you must have light. The light is Bible doctrine, and the light is reflected or given out by the mature believer. Therefore he has historical impact. So here is the radiance of maximum doctrine resident in the mature believer’s soul.


“in the world” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kósmos (κόσμος) [pronounced KOSS-moss], referring to the devil’s world. To be a light-giving body you must also be a light-containing body. To be a light-containing body you must take in Bible doctrine every day. No body can give light until it contains light. Light is analogous to Bible doctrine and the believer must have Bible doctrine resident in the soul to radiate that doctrine in the devil’s world.


Philippians 2:15 In order that you yourselves might become blameless [faultless, not censored by God for reversionism, undiluted by evil], even innocent [full of doctrinal integrity; not influenced by evil], blameless [from the standpoint of establishment, morals, patriotism], sons of God in the middle of a crooked [rejection of establishment] and perverted [under the influence of evil] generation, among whom you [mature believers] keep shining as light-giving bodies in the world [the devil’s domain].


Principle: This is the historical impact of the mature believer on his own generation. This includes supergrace A, supergrace B, and the ultra supergrace. Supergrace A is the believer enjoying his R&R on the edge of no man’s land. Supergrace B is the believer who has gone into no man’s land. The ultra supergrace believer has attained the maximum spiritual growth possible in time and who has reached the point of glorifying God to that same maximum.


The Doctrine of Evil needs to be reviewed. Bob has covered this doctrine previously, but not in this study of Philippians. This is 19 pages of the Doctrine of Evil. Sin and evil are entirely different subjects, but they do cross over here and there. Sins were judged on the cross. Evil is the thinking of Satan; evil is the plan of Satan. If you have guilty feelings about something, that is a problem with you and you are carnal. Good and evil go together. Good is an expression of evil.


If evil controls the soul, then whatever you do is evil. Much of the good performed in the world today comes from Satan’s plan. OSHA is a Satanic organization and a conspiracy to destroy free enterprise. It is a vicious horrible evil. Those connected with OSHA are probably sincere doers of human good. Bob gives the example of sin and crime. There is an overlap there, but they are not the same things. All criminals are sinners but not all sinners are criminals. All people under the influence are sinners, but not all sinners are under the influence of evil.


in the garden, the man needed to know God and he needed to know his wife; but he did not need to know good and evil. Adam needed to know doctrine even in this state of innocence. Good and evil go together. Man in innocence performed no acts of human good. There was no OSHA inspectors coming to inspect the pruning of the trees. If a person is stupid, you cannot pass a law to make him smart.


The woman could be fooled. Adam was not deceived. He knew what he was doing. He sinned knowingly. In innocence, there were four categories of trees, those desirable to the sight. Men with souls like to have pleasant things to view. Culture is what man develops in order for his soul to appreciate. Adam has the same appreciation as we do, but without sin. There were trees for food; and that could be enjoyed by one’s taste. And this could be eaten without gaining a pound. And they could eat as much as they wanted. There was a tree in the middle of the garden. This was positive volition tree. The tree of lives was to sustain this relationship between man and God. Positive volition toward God’s plan.


If you want to do human good, then you must have evil in your soul in order to motivate you. The United Nations is evil. National Council of Churches got the UN into our country, and they are the most evil religious organization so naturally, they would sponsor the most evil political organization. We do not need knowledge of good and evil in order to relate to God.


If you begin to neglect Bible doctrine as Little Red Riding Hood did, you will ruin your life in this world. Bible doctrine is our only protection from good and evil. Genesis 2:16–17 was what God taught Adam and the woman. “You will not eat from the tree of good and evil because in the day that you eat of it, dying you will die.”


Bob introduces the doctrine of evil, but does not begin to cover it until Lesson #55:


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #55


55 04/14/1976 Philippians 2 via Luke 11:20–21 US Constitution 1st and 2nd amendments; The Doctrine of evil (cont.)


A review of the translation back to v. 1.


The concept of good and evil is found in the thinking of those who want to take guns out of the hands law-abiding citizens.


The 1st and 2nd Amendments

1.       The Second Amendment says, A well-regulated militia being [the militia is the army of that era; we had no professional military at the beginning of our nation)] necessary to the security of a free state, the right of the people to bear arms shall not be infringed. The militia is made up of people, but not all people belong to the militia. Judge Young shows us how evil has destroyed our nation. The protection of the freedom of the press and freedom of speech. As goes the 1st amendment so goes the 2nd; and vice versa. The press are very much in favor of takings guns away from the people, and this will destroy the power of the press.

2.       Congress shall mkae no law respecting the establishment of a religion or prohibiting the free exercise thereof or abridging freedom of speech or of the press or the right of the people peaceably to assemble and redress the government with petitions of grievances.

3.       All officials must pledge allegiance to the Constitution: “I do solemnly swear that I will faithfully execute the office of the president of the United States and will to the best of my ability defend the Constitution of the United States.” we have had a series of presidents who have tried to destroy the 2nd amendment. They could destroy all freedom in the United States by taking away our firearms.

4.       Out of 40 million people in the United States, a small percentage possess handguns. Less than 1% of gun owners use their guns to commit a crime.

5.       When laws are drawn up to protect criminals and to bear down on law-abiding citizens, the politicians have become evil and degenerate.

6.       Gun control laws never take guns out of the hands of criminals. They take them out of the hands of law-abiding citizens. It makes citizens more vulnerable to crime and violence.

7.       Every communist takeover of government was preceeded by the registration and confiscation of firearms. Criminals and communists are for gun control bills.

8.       The Sullivan law in NY City that sends to jail people who use their gun to pretect themselves from murder rape and robbery.

9.       A disarmed citizenry is a helpless citizenry. They are also non-free.

10.     Vicious propaganda from evil.

11.     The law instead of protecting our freedom ,privacy and business is destroying it.

12.     Killing is a matter of volition of the soul. Weapons are simply used; they are one of many means. It is easy to kill someone without a weapon. You cannot stop crime and violence by passing laws against weapons. You cannot legislate the sin nature out of existence.

13.     Criminals are criminals because they break the law, not because they have weapons. Anti-gun legislation disarms the law-abiding citizen; it does not disarm the criminal.


No society can tolerate homosexuality. It is not a sickness. It is a vicious, horrible, monstrous evil. There is a thought pattern which goes with it. The greatest nation in all of history was great because it was intolerant of homosexuality (a reference to Rome). No one was allowed to hold a job in Roman government if they were homosexual. They were executed. A father could execute his son for being a homosexual under Roman law. Totally intolerant of that kind of evil.


Proverbs 6:9–11 How long will you lie there, O sluggard? When will you arise from your sleep?  A little sleep, a little slumber, a little folding of the hands to rest, and poverty will come upon you like a robber, and want like an armed man. 


Carthage agreed not to enter into war without the express permission of the Roman Senate. Rome came there and demanded that they disarm. The Carthaginians agree to it. Rome decided to destroy them, but partied for a few weeks first. They held out for man years. Rome got Corinth and Carthage the same way. They got these cities to disarm and then the destroyed everything. They raped, tortured, enslaved in 146 b.c. This is what happens when a city disarms itself.


Luke 11:20 But if it is by the finger of God that I cast out demons (and I do), then the kingdom of God has arrived to you. 


There is more power in God’s little finger than all of Satan’s empire.


Jesus here was presenting Himself as the King.


This sets up a principle.


Luke 11:21 When a strong man, fully armed, guards his own palace, his goods are safe;... 


A strong man does not lack common sense. Certain people have strength because they have common sense.


Bob loves the Colt 45 automatic. Criminals and communists understand force.


Kathoplizô is what every broadcast station is again. If you are fully armed and you know how to use your weapons, then you can defend yourself. Every criminal is a tyrant.


Phulossô means to guard, to protect. You do not have to use a weapon every day. A weapon that is going to be used in defense must be loaded and the people must know how to use it. In four generations of Thiemes, there have been weapons in the home. This is the way that you guard. He protects his family; he guards his own home. His loved ones remain undisturbed.


A poor person can only afford a $9 revolver. The Saturday night special is a legitimate weapon. This may be all the poor person can afford. An attack upon Saturday Night Specials is the first step. After that, they will go after other weapons.


Luke 11:22 but when one stronger than he attacks him and overcomes him, he takes away his armor in which he trusted and divides his spoil. 


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #56


56 04/15/1976 Philippians 2 Doctrine of evil (pts. 1–16)


Jim Wolfe on staff on a Kansas City Missouri paper. He writes a article entitled, hammers kill people too. Amendment adds hammers to dangerous weapons. 347 persons were murdered with hammers last year in Chicago. He installed a short wave radio and he has now heard over and over again, “Put the hammer down!” He wants to eliminate those cheap Sunday morning specials.


 A letter from Harry Truman that Bob received.


Many of the points found below are given by Bob in this study. Not in the same order and much found below was not taught by Bob. There were a number of points added to this doctrine as well, so it should replace this particular doctrine in the notes.


Evil (1978, 1982) by R. B. Thieme, Jr.

Revelation 2:2 2/10/82; Romans 12 4/3/78, 16 10/3/78; Philippians 4/13/78;

A.       Definition.

          1.       Evil is the policy of Satan as the ruler of this world. Evil is the modus operandi of Satan from the time of his fall throughout the angelic revolution and down to the point when be became the ruler of the world.

          2.       Evil is Satan's failure to produce a system of good in mankind and society that would bring in a pseudo-millennium.

          3.       Evil is Satan's system by which he administers the rulership of this world. Satan cannot restrain sin, and he parlays human good into sin and evil.

          4.       All evil has two sources: sin and erroneous thinking, and human good (the motivation of evil) and erroneous thinking. Where the sin of self-righteousness plus human good or sincerity combine, there is a saturation of evil in a nation.

          5.       The principle is that if Satan as the ruler of this world is not capable of ruling the world he controls, then no man can rule it either. Man cannot solve his problems by human solutions. All solutions to the problems of life depend on the imputation of God's perfect righteousness.

          6.       Evil is the function and innovation of that person who is consistently involved in the cosmic system.

          7.       Evil is the adverse trend of society. It is the destruction of society, the malfunction of society, and the removal of legitimate authority and its function under category one truth, i.e., the laws of divine establishment.

          8.       Just as grace and doctrine represent the genius of God in relationship to the human race, so evil represents the genius of Satan in relationship to the human race.

          9.       The soul is the battleground of every believer in the Church Age, especially because this is the intensified stage of the angelic conflict. What you think is more important than you realize.

          10.     There are two ways of thinking.

                     a.       Divine viewpoint is thinking doctrine, which glorifies Christ.

                     b.       Human viewpoint is thinking evil, which dishonors Christ.

                     c.        Therefore, the issue is thought versus thought.

          11.     Recovery from sin is instantaneous through the use of the rebound technique, but recovery from evil takes a long time through post-salvation epistemological rehabilitation.

          12.     Evil is the human good panacea which attempts to solve the problems of life apart from doctrine and divine establishment. Doctrine and establishment came first, being from the mind of God.

          13.     Evil is often a distortion of doctrine or a distortion of the laws of divine establishment. Satan's original sin was a distortion of doctrine. Evil distorts law and order, substituting evil, as in crime.

          14.     Evil comes in many forms: altruistic humanitarianism, philanthropy, religion, legalism, reversionism, socialism, political internationalism, government interference, distortion of the law, bribery in government, cutting down the military, gun legislation, sociology, public welfare, the common wheel, and the United Nations.

                     a.       Evil is the misconception of "brotherly love."

                     b.       The whole idea of government trying to abolish sickness, mental illness, economic problems, frustrations, and human problems by legislation and human solutions is evil. The world's problems can never be solved apart from Bible doctrine and the laws of divine establishment.

                     c.        Evil also includes social action, the social Gospel, restriction of human freedom for the greater good, the distortion of law to solve social and economic problems; i.e., the interference of government in business and free enterprise, setting restrictive regulations, legislating car requirements, government quotas, gun legislation, catering to minorities; these are all illegal and distorted laws.

                     d.       However, the greatest of all evils is religion. Legalism and apostasy are the greatest manifestations of evil.

                     e.       Evil includes all systems of Christian function outside of and apart from the local church. God only ordained and authorized one institution, and that is the local church. God has ordained and authorized the local church as the only vehicle for spiritual growth in the dispensation of the Church. No one has authority over believers in the spiritual realm except for the pastor-teacher, who must teach doctrine in the local church.

                     f.        This means that not only are denominations evil, but so are independent service organizations. Most denominations last about 100 years.

                     g.       Evil is what you think as an apostate, reversionistic liberal, a bleeding-heart, guilty type.

          15.     So the worst and most detrimental thing that can happen to a believer is to come under the influence of evil. The recovery from evil is lengthy and very painful.

          16.     Evil is every deviation from Bible doctrine and the laws of divine establishment.

B.       Etymology.

          1.       Hebrew.

                     a.       Noun AWEN means evil in the sense of nothingness or vanity.

                     b.       Adjective RA means evil, bad, worthless (RAA comes from RA).

                     c.        Noun ROA means badness of quality, evil.

                     d.       Verb RAA means to be evil.

          2.       Greek.

                     a.       Adjective KAKOS means evil, bad, worthless.

                     b.       Adverb KAKOS means wickedly.

                     c.        Noun KAKIA means depravity or wickedness; e.g., religion.

                     d.       Adjective PONEROS means evil, worthless, degenerate; as a noun means the evil one (Satan).

                     e.       Noun PONERIA means maliciousness, sinfulness.

                     f.        PHALLOS means evil in the sense of worthless.

C.       The Origin of Evil: Satan.

          1.       Evil originated and existed before human history. The means by which it was transmitted from previous creature existence to human history is Satan himself.

          2.       The origin of evil is Satan's genius to devise a system to oppose God.

          3.       Evil originated in angelic creation in the greatest creature to ever come from the hand of God.

          4.       Profile of Satan. (Also see the doctrine of Satanic Strategy.)

                     a.       He is the highest of all creatures.

                     b.       He is the ruler of one-third of all angels, Matthew 8:28, 9:34, 12:26; Luke 11:18-19.

                     c.        If Satan could take on human appearance, as fallen angels did before the Flood, he would be the most beautiful, smartest, and strongest of all human beings. He would have every form of attractiveness.

                     d.       He is the central antagonist of the angelic conflict. Hebrews 1- 2; Genesis 6; 1Peter 3:18-22.

                     e.       Being a super-genius, he is a great organizer, Ephesians 6.

                     f.        He is the original murderer, 1John 2; John 8:44.

                     g.       He is the ruler of the world, Luke 4:5-7; John 12:31, 16:11; 2Corinthians 4:4; Ephesians 2:2. He has set up a system of administration whereby Mr. Hyde can function in Dr. Jekyll.

          5.       Satan has devised a system whereby people can be nice, lovely, and look good to society, and yet behind the facade of good there lurks an evil, destructive person who is often self-deceived.

          6.       Satan controls most of Christianity through his cosmic system. The thing that makes people function in the cosmic system is arrogance.

          7.       Satan's plan is related to beating Christ to the Millennium with his own the production of a perfect world. The more the world follows his plan, the greater the degeneracy which occurs. His plan seeks equality by destroying success and failure with legislation.

          8.       Satan's plans always look good to the stupid, but it always results in degeneracy. L. S. Chafer put it best in his Systematic Theology, Vol 2, pp. 100-1, 108-111.

          9.       1John 3:8, "When anyone commits a sin, he has become the agent of the devil."

                     a.       The old sin nature is usually the source of temptation; volition is the only source of sin.

                     b.       Your decision to sin puts you immediately into the cosmic system, making you the agent of the devil.

                     c.        The works of the devil can only be destroyed by residence and function inside the divine dynasphere. We are the products of our own decisions; therefore, we bring disaster on ourselves.

          10.     Satan's strategy regarding nations is found in Revelation 12:20; regarding unbelievers in 2Peter 2; Luke 8:12; 2Corinthians 4:34; 2Thessalonians 2:7-10; Colossians 2:8; Revelation 17; regarding believers in 2Corinthians 2:11; to accuse believers in Job 1:6-11; Zechariah 3:1-2; Revelation 12:9-10. 1John 2:1-2 teaches that the Lord defends us.

          11.     Satan seeks to frustrate the will of God with every believer; i.e., regarding what we think, Ephesians 4:14; where we are located, 1Thessalonians 2:18; and what we do, Jas 4:7-8. He especially seeks to keep us from functioning at gate 4 of the divine dynasphere, where we learn and apply Bible doctrine. He seeks to destroy the believer's focus so that he gets his eyes on other people, on himself (in self-pity), or on things, (e.g., logistical grace is not sufficient).

          12.     Arrogance is the system by which Satan keeps you functioning in the devil's world without going crazy. His system is designed to distract believers by entertainment, improving the world (crusader arrogance), occupation with temporal solutions to man's problems, social action, the welfare state, communism, fear, and religion.

          13.     Religion is created by Satan to counterfeit the plan of God. Religion is man seeking approbation from God on the basis of his works. Satan counterfeits the following.

                     a.       The Gospel, 2Corinthians 4:3-4.

                     b.       Ministers, 2Corinthians 11:13-15.

                     c.        Doctrine, 2Timothy 4:1.

                     d.       The communion table, 2Corinthians 10:19-21.

                     e.       Spirituality, Galatians 3:2-3.

                     f.        Righteousness, Matthew 19:16-28.

                     g.       The power and dynamics of the divine dynasphere, 2Thessalonians 2:8-10.

                     h.       He has counterfeit gods, 2Thessalonians 2:3-4.

                     i.         Counterfeit function in the cosmic system, Matthew 23:13-26.

          14.     Satan's system of false teachers is part of his strategy. They have a phony and hypocritical facade, Matthew 7:15; Romans 16:18. They use human public relations as a system of flirtation, Galatians 4:17-18; 2Timothy 3:5-7. They appeal to arrogance and pride, 2Corinthians 10:12. They promote idolatry as part of the devil's communion table.

D.       Characteristics of Evil.

          1.       Evil is a factor that the believer must face which was not judged at the cross. The believer must realize that he cannot confess evil in something like the rebound technique, because evil was not judged at the cross.

                     a.       The sin nature produces sin, good, and evil.

                     b.       Only sin was judged at the cross.

                     c.        Good and evil has been an issue since the fall of man.

                     d.       Rebound deals with our personal sins and nothing else.

                     e.       The believer is not to be involved in good and evil in any way. The believer can avoid good and evil.

                     f.        You cannot be tried twice for the same crime; a mistake being made by the Supreme Court.

                     g.       Jesus was pronounced guilty. But Jesus became obedient unto death.

                     h.       When a person is acquitted, no one has a right to turn to anarchy.

          2.       Human good and evil have been an issue since the fall of man, both before and after the cross. After the cross, the angelic conflict must continue in order to be resolved. The angelic conflict can only be resolved through human volition. Positive volition toward the cross results in faith in Jesus Christ, solving the problem of sin. But salvation could not resolve human good, lust, and evil, because the angelic conflict must continue with some issue.

          3.       Man must be free to express his volition toward salvation, and toward sin after salvation in the rebound technique. But evil must continue or there is no angelic conflict. This is because Satan must have his "equal time." Therefore, human good and evil continue right down to the Second Advent.

          4.       Man must not only be free to express his volition toward the cross and toward sin after being saved in rebound, but he must also be free to express his volition in the same way Christ did on the cross when He rejected, separated from, and divorced Himself from human good and evil. This takes a lot of doctrine for the believer to do this experientially. The believer's positive volition toward doctrine develops divine viewpoint thinking which rejects evil.

          5.       Anything not judged does not have a one-second solution. In one second, you can believe in Jesus Christ and be saved. Likewise, in one second you can confess a sin and be forgiven. But there is no one-second solution to anything dealing with evil.

          6.       That's why the post-salvation epistemological rehabilitation is a daily thing that must go on and on and on in order that you might be able to resist evil. The more doctrine you have, the more you reject evil.

          7.       All human good is the application of evil to experience.

          8.       The whole purpose of water baptism as a picture of retroactive positional truth was to teach the rejection of evil.

          9.       Evil and its various aspects become the greatest distraction to doctrine, because it catches doctrine at the point of your thinking.

E.       Biblical Documentation.

          1.       The mature believer should be able to distinguish between sin and evil and between evil and honor. Hebrews 5:13-14, "But solid food [sound doctrine] is belonging to the mature, the ones who because of academic self-discipline keep having their perceptive faculties well-trained with reference to differentiating between both the honorable and the evil." Therefore, the mature believer rightly divides the Word of Truth so as to distinguish between sin and evil. 2. Motivating evil exists in the thought pattern of the soul. Evil and degeneracy start with a thought.

                     a.       Mt 6:23, "But if your eye is evil, the entire body is full of darkness [cosmic involvement]."

                     b.       Mt 15:19, "For out of the right lobe comes evil thoughts."

          2.       The balance of residency of the soul (Bible doctrine plus filling of the Holy Spirit; i.e., residence, function, momentum inside the divine dynasphere) avoids thinking evil.

          3.       Impersonal love from maximum doctrine in the soul eliminates evil. It takes lots of doctrine to reject evil, Proverbs 23:7.

          4.       The divine dynasphere is the only real protection against evil. 1Corinthians 13:5, "The love [virtue-love] does not behave dishonorably, is not preoccupied with self, is not hypersensitive, does not think evil." "Love" refers to virtue-love. Personal love can think evil, but impersonal love, a function of the royal family honor code, cannot think evil. It is virtue- love which defeats evil.

          5.       The believer in the cosmic system is constantly frustrated by evil. Romans 7:19, "For what I desire I do not do, but what I do not desire [evil], this I keep practicing." Romans 7:21. Sincere do-gooders are the major practicers of evil. The more involved you are in sincere human good crusades, the more you intensify your evil.

          6.       Therefore, the believer is warned to beware of those who practice evil, Philippians 3:2. Even legitimate things are mutilated or distorted. To beware does not necessarily mean to avoid but to understand. You never get over the mutilation of your norms and standards by evil. (Elijah #1-3)

          7.       Believers are specifically warned not to be influenced by evil but by doctrine in 3 John 11. "Beloved, do not be imitators of the evil but of the good."

          8.       False doctrine is both evil and insanity. Eccl 9:3 refers to psychotic arrogance. Ecclesiastes 9:3 is fatalism and fatalism is evil.

          9.       Those who are under the influence of evil always have a price. 1Timothy 6:10, "The love of money is the root of all kinds of evils." It is a dangerous temptation to any poor believer to chase after money so as to neglect Bible doctrine. Actually, this verse applies to the love of any detail of life.

          10.     Influence by evil explains why prayers are not answered, Job 35:9-13. Rebounding doesn't erase the influence of evil. Job 35:12, "There they cry out, but He does not answer because of the pride of evil men." This explains the pattern of saying no to truth, building scar tissue on the soul, intensifying arrogance into self-pity, self-righteousness, and guilt, and therefore coming to believe the lie.

          11.     Believers are often led into the cosmic system and evil by their Christian friends.

                     a.       1Corinthians 15:33, "Evil companions corrupt good morals."

                     b.       2Thessalonians 3:2-3, "That we may be delivered from perverse and evil men, for all believers do not have doctrine; but the Lord is faithful and He will strengthen you and protect you from evil."

          12.     God protects that believer inside the divine dynasphere who has positive volition to doctrine.

                     a.       Prov 12:21, "No evil happens to the righteous."

                     b.       Psalm 37:17, "But the Lord sustains the righteous."

                     c.        Psalm 91:10, "No evil will befall you; you who love the Lord hate evil. The Lord preserves the souls of His mature ones; He delivers them from the hands of the evil one." Psalm 119:101.

                     d.       Psalm 121:7, "The Lord will protect you from all evil; He will guard your soul." Proverbs 1:33.

                     e.       Prov 2:11-13, "The wise sees the evil and hides himself, but the stupid goes on and is punished for it."

          13.     The attitude of the mature believer toward evil is stated in Psalm 84:10. "For a day in Your courts is better than a thousand days in the cosmic system. I would rather be a doorkeeper in the house of My Lord than to dwell in the tents of evil."

          14.     Submission to the authority of establishment prevents evil and the influence of evil, Eccl 8:2-5. A leader can do anything he wants in his private life as long as he does his job well as a leader. Rulers do have a right to their privacy.

          15.     The laws of divine establishment are designed to protect the citizens of the nation from evil. Romans 13:3-4 implies that the unbeliever can function in the divine dynasphere at gate 3 when he follows establishment truth. "Do you desire not to fear the authority? Therefore, keep on doing the good and you will have recognition from it. For it [government] is a minister of God to you for the purpose of good. But if you do evil, be afraid. For he does not wear the sword for nothing."

                     a.       All crime is evil. Crime is extended by a soft society. Evil criminals must be executed. Capital punishment is designed to separate out evil crimes.

                     b.       Evil in the soul is like hydrophobia; it must be removed from society. If it is not, crime rages wild in society.

                     c.        Once under the influence of evil, the criminal will never change; he will always be destructive. However, criminals with no evil can be resuscitated.

                     d.       Certain sins express evil, but not all sins are evil. Certain sins express crime, but not all sins are criminal. All believers are sinful, but that does not mean all believers are criminals.

                     e.       So by protecting against evil, the laws of divine establishment give freedom and protection for evangelization and for the teaching of Bible doctrine.

          16.     The domination of good in the client nation determines its historical prosperity, while the domination of evil determines its historical judgment, Proverbs 12:20; Psalm 34:16.

                     a.       If the nation through its law does not remove its criminals by death, the Lord will punish the entire nation for their failure. Disaster will come in one or more forms. Isaiah 13:11, "Thus I will punish the world for its evil. I will also put an end to the arrogance of the proud, and abase the pride of the dictator." Isaiah 47:10-11.

                     b.       The only limitation on crime is humility and respect for authority. Micah 1:12 teaches that our failure to cope with evil leads to destruction of the nation. Amos 5:14-15, "Hate evil, love good, and establish justice in the court; consequently, the Lord God of the armies will be gracious to the remnant of Joseph."

          17.     Evil is distinguished from war and disease, Jeremiah 28:8.

                     a.       Sin and evil occur in war, but war as a category is not evil. War brings national freedom. The same is true of disease.

                     b.       Our Lord said there is a time for war, a time to talk, and a time to kill.

                     c.        War is not sin; it is inevitable and a necessity.

                     d.       Disease in itself is not sinful, though sin and evil are associated with disease. Not all people who are sick are being disciplined by God.

F.       The system of evil has two cosmic Dynasphere.

          1.       Cosmic one is called the interlocking systems of arrogance in which the believer grieves the Holy Spirit. Arrogance is to the believer and unbeliever in cosmic one what the filling of the Holy Spirit is to the believer in the divine dynasphere.

          2.       Cosmic two is called the interlocking systems of hatred in which the believer quenches the Spirit.

          3.       Cosmic One has the following 26 gates. (See the doctrine of Cosmic One.)

                     a.       Mental attitude arrogance is anything related to preoccupation with self to the point of sin, human good or evil. It is satisfaction with self and dissatisfaction with others.

                     b.       Negative volition arrogance is related to preoccupation with self causing apathy toward doctrine. The authority of the pastor or the message is rejected.

                     c.        Impulsive arrogance is any abuse of authority.

                     d.       Institutional arrogance is rejection of the authority, policy, and purpose of the organization.

                     e.       Blind arrogance is the arrogance of legalism. This is being partially divorced from reality (sociopathic rather than psychotic). This includes self-righteous arrogance, which is failure to see in yourself what you criticize in others.

                     f.        Conspiracy arrogance comes after institutional arrogance and results in a conspiracy to overthrow the purpose, policy, or authority of an organization.

                     g.       Criminal arrogance seeks to solve problems through violence. It is total divorcement from reality. It includes terrorist and revolutionary activities.

                     h.       Crusader arrogance is the self-righteous arrogance of trying to straighten out the world. A person places his personal standards above the law or any form of establishment or authority. When criminal arrogance interlocks with crusader arrogance, there is terrorism or revolution.

                     i.         Psychotic arrogance is total divorcement from all reality. It is a result of bad decisions, not genetics. It is intense concentration on self. It is the emotional control of reason.

                     j.         Sexual arrogance is preoccupation with sex and self-gratification. It is preoccupation with the body to the exclusion of the soul.

                     k.        Genetic arrogance is assuming that greatness in life is inherited. Parents who seek recognition through the achievement of their children have this type of arrogance.

                     l.         Political arrogance is a result as well as an interlock with crusader arrogance. It is any human panacea which offers the solution to life's problems. Liberals and conservatives both suffer from political arrogance. It rejects the separation of church and state.

                     m.      Client nation arrogance emphasizes the laws of divine establishment and the function of government leadership in terms of arrogance versus humility. There are three basic forms of legitimate government.

                                (1)      Monarchy is the rule of one man in the interest of the common good, which under arrogance becomes tyranny, i.e., the rule of one man for his own advantage.

                                (2)      Aristocracy is the rule of a group in the interest of the common good. This degenerates to an oligarchy, which is the rule of a group for their own benefit, as the cosmic system influences the nation.

                                (3)      A republic is the rule of the better part of the people in the interest of common good. But when arrogance comes, it degenerates into a democracy, which is the rule of the worst part of the people for their own benefit.

                                (4)      Client nation arrogance is the failure of our elected representatives and arrogant bureaucracy in trying to control the government.

                                (5)      Client nation arrogance is the collective arrogance of a people in cosmic one.

                     n.       In authority arrogance, the individual fails to make the most difficult transition of temporal life, which is going from the authority in the home to freedom in life. The home is organized humility. The parents' authority is enforced humility, and child's response to enforced humility produces genuine humility. Rejection of overt authority in life results in rejection of inward authority of the soul, and that destroys your own self-discipline.

                     o.       Arrogance of Ignorance. Genuine humility is necessary for the transitions from authority in the home to freedom in life and from ignorance at salvation to cognizance at spiritual maturity. Genuine humility is the necessary teachability to make that transition. The arrogance of ignorance is the failure to make that transition from ignorance to cognizance in the Christian way of life.

                     p.       In the arrogance of unhappiness, self-centeredness eliminates any capacity or possibility for happiness. Involvement in cosmic one guarantees unhappiness and leads to erroneous ideas about what constitutes happiness. This means you expect others to make you happy. Entertainment and marriage is for people who are already happy. But with the arrogance of unhappiness, you have a martyr complex which results in trying to control people by giving them a guilt complex. This is how the weak control the strong.

                     q.       The arrogance of disillusion is called iconoclastic arrogance or the feet of clay syndrome.

                                (1)      This begins when you put someone on a pedestal. Then when their feet of clay shows, you become disillusioned and react to whatever they represent.

                                (2)      In other words, arrogance creates an idol of enchantment and illusion, but when the idol is shattered, arrogance is shocked and distracted and disoriented to life.

                                (3)      As a result, the arrogant creator of the idol seeks to destroy the idol, a revenge in which the person can only gain his self-respect by destroying the thing which has allegedly destroyed his self-respect.

                                (4)      Illusion created by arrogance is illusion destroyed by arrogance.

                     r.        The arrogance of morality is the self-righteous arrogance of superimposing false standards of morality on others. People major in one moral thing so they can rationalize and say they are better than everyone else in that area. This is superimposing a false standard of morality on others or taking a true standard out of its context, e.g., salvation. Morality is designed to protect human freedom.

                     s.        The arrogance of emotion is irrationality. Arrogant people stop thinking and so their emotion becomes their substitute for thought. This is total preoccupation with self related to emotion. Knowledge is the environment for thinking. Bible doctrine is the environment for decisions. Emotional arrogance fantasizes and therefore collapses under pressure.

                     t.        In the arrogance of pseudo-generosity, a person gives because of a desire for attention, approbation, or to buy friendship or happiness. 2Corinthians 9:7,11 teach that the function of genuine generosity is found in the mind.

                     u.       Arrogance of Christian service. Loss of momentum comes from rejection of doctrine and substituting Christian service for spirituality. Christian service becomes a distraction to momentum. Production is a result of growth, never the means. Perpetuation of Christian service while in the cosmic system is the arrogance of Christian service. Arrogance mistakes Christian service for growth and momentum.

                     v.        The arrogance of discouragement is preoccupation with self under pressure and testing. Unexplained disaster tempts the believer to feel sorry for himself. Being maligned, treated unfairly, or facing the death of loved ones are the kinds of disaster or pressure that bring this on. Matthew 26:58; 1 Kg 19:10. This was Peter and Elijah's problem.

                     w.       Arrogance of Lust. When legitimate desire is linked with arrogance, it becomes lust. Inordinate desire is lust. Desire is not wrong, but lust is. Lust is arrogant preoccupation with one's desires.

                     x.        Pseudo-intellectual arrogance is the superimposition of human I.Q. over spiritual I.Q. Arrogance rejects divine viewpoint. It glorifies human speculation to the exclusion of Bible doctrine, or seeks to reconcile Bible doctrine with false philosophical, psychological, and scientific speculation; e.g., gnosticism.

                     y.        Pseudo-love arrogance is the attempt of anyone to duplicate the principles or function of true love while residing in the cosmic system.

                     z.        The function of suicide is produced by a permanently locked-in arrogance which motivates taking one's own life.

          4.       Cosmic two has the following nine gates. (See the doctrine of Cosmic Two.)

                     a.       Negative volition to doctrine. This person resists doctrine because he is antagonistic to truth, to God, and to the things of God. He is the enemy of God's plan. Evil, before it ever becomes a function or action, is a thought or motive. People are degenerate because of the way they think, not because of what they do. You have to be preoccupied with yourself before you can be negative to doctrine in cosmic two. This is characterized by antagonism toward everyone associated with the divine dynasphere. There are three categories of negative volition.

                                (1)      Negative volition at God-consciousness. This is the point of accountability which occurs at different ages depending on the culture. God-consciousness can occur in a number of ways.

                                           (a)      Teleological thinking says a structure demands a designer.

                                           (b)      Cosmological thinking says the intuitive law of cause and effect demands the existence of God.

                                           (c)      Ontological thinking says that since the human mind possesses the idea of a perfect Being, such a Being must exist. There must be an absolute which gives character to the relative.

                                           (d)      Anthropological thinking says that man's soul possesses both volition and conscience with an urge to choose right rather than wrong, and that the structure of society is based on the recognition of virtue and truth.

                                           (e)      Theological thinking says that God must exist because men universally believe in His existence. Heathen are heathen because of negative volition at God-consciousness or Gospel hearing, Romans 1:18-25.

                                (2)      Negative volition at Gospel hearing. Rejection of Jesus Christ enters you into gate 1 of cosmic two, 1Corinthians 1:18; 2Corinthians 4:3-4; 2Peter 2:20-22.

                                (3)      Negative volition to doctrine. The believer immediately enters this gate when he rejects the communicator and/or his message. Emotional arrogance is a big reason for this. 2Corinthians 6:11, "You are hindered by your own emotions." You become selective in what you think, thus rejecting anything resembling truth. Then you lean on your emotions for pleasure, thereby misusing emotion, Romans 16:17-18.

                     b.       Cosmic degeneration. When you become antagonistic to truth you enter into a state of degeneracy. Degeneracy is in thought long before it is in actions. Romans 1:24-27 illustrates, "they who exchange the doctrine of God for a lie."

                     c.        Anti-establishment occurs when the soul is antagonistic to the laws of divine establishment and authority. 2Timothy 3:2-3 teaches that this begins in the home with "disobedience to parents." This is ingrained antagonism toward authority. Romans 1:28-32 is the best illustration of anti- establishment.

                     d.       Cosmic panaceas.

                                (1)      Man's attempts to improve the world are always sponsored by Satan. Anyone's solution sought apart from divine truth is a cosmic panacea.

                                (2)      Cosmic panaceas rejects any salvation by grace or spirituality by grace.

                                (3)      Instead of freedom, there is the demand for equality.

                                (4)      "The end always justifies the means," is the motto of the believer in cosmic two. He believes in redistribution of wealth, over- taxation, legislation to solve all problems, sameness in life, big government and little people where citizens are slaves of the state, regulation of private enterprise, confiscation of private property, and utopianism.

                                (5)      Cosmic panaceas lead to violence, terrorism, and revolution under the principle of social engineering.

                                (6)      The state trains the children to be obedient to the dictates of the state rather than to parents. There is a total rejection of freedom and authority.

                     e.       Religion is Satan's counterfeit of the plan of God. Christianity is not a religion, but is a relationship with God through the person of Jesus Christ. Religion is man by man's efforts seeking to gain the approbation of God. 2Corinthians 11 describes religious leaders. 2Timothy 3:7-8, "these religious types oppose doctrine, are men of depraved mind [degenerate], disqualified from blessing with regard to doctrine . . ." Cf. 2Peter 2:1-3.

                     f.        Demonism. See the doctrine of Demonism.

                     g.       Anthropocentric academic speculation is motivated by pseudo- intellectual arrogance. This is the attempt to reconcile philosophical and scientific speculation with doctrine. When this can't be done, the person rejects doctrine and seeks a substitute. The more arrogant you are, the more you are attracted to academic speculation.

                     h.       The old sin nature gate. See the doctrine of the Old Sin Nature.

                     i.         Evil as the policy of Satan.

G.       Evil and the Emotional Revolt of the Soul.

          1.       Negative volition toward doctrine causes the believer to be changed by evil, Proverbs 5:13-14. Evil changes your thinking.

          2.       Emotion revolts in the fourth stage of reversionism against its right lobe. This is when people get into many different kinds of evil trends.

          3.       You can always tell historically when emotion takes over because there is a tremendous change in culture; e.g., in music and drama, which goes from being great, honorable, and romantic to being perverse, sick, imbecilic, and irrational. These pointless things apparently appeal only to those in emotional revolt of the soul. (This is why so many people still instinctively go for sports where there's still some honesty.) But many people are still propagandized by the current music, drama, and art trends. All of this explains why men now have long hair and women have short hair, as they try to run everything in revolt.

          4.       Emotion has no ability to think, no standards, no honor, no morality, and no establishment.

          5.       Normal emotion responds to our norms and standards, to doctrine in our soul, to establishment principles in the right lobe, and it recognizes authority.

          6.       But emotional revolt means rejection of authority. This sets up a vacuum which sucks evil into the soul. Evil in the left lobe produces scar tissue; evil in the right lobe produces hardness of heart.

          7.       There is no question that Satan controls any believer who has no doctrine in his soul. Therefore, you get into a tremendous amount of human good in reversionism.

H.       Grace Versus Evil.

          1.       Every generation has to choose between the grace policy of God, represented by the cross, and the evil policy of Satan. This issue has never left the human race. The genius of God has perpetuated the issue of volition throughout human history and throughout the human race.

          2.       Therefore, the issue before the royal family is: are you influenced by doctrine or by evil? Our parents in the Garden faced this same issue.

          3.       Grace is the means by which doctrinal principles are elucidated; evil as Satan's policy is the means by which false doctrine is inculcated, Proverbs 11:18-19, 14:22, 15:3, 16:6, 22:3, 24:1-4; Ephesians 5:16; 2Thessalonians 3:2-3. These passages present some of the following principles.

                     a.       Divine omniscience provides discipline for evil and blessing for doctrine.

                     b.       Thinking you are an island unto yourself is in itself evil.

                     c.        The end of the pursuit of evil for the believer is the sin unto death. This is the most suffering any believer can ever endure, but he deserves every bit of it.

                     d.       Now, just as in the beginning, when you partake of the "forbidden fruit" of evil, you receive tremendous divine discipline. Just as what you eat from a tree becomes a part of you, so when you partake of evil it becomes a part of you. And simply by being filled with human good and evil, you bring on yourself a whole system of self-induced misery and divine discipline.

                     e.       Ephesians 5:16 summarizes all these principles of evil found in Proverbs. You redeem time by the filling of the Spirit and maximum doctrine in your soul, which at the same time kills off evil.

          4.       Doctrine neutralizes evil in the soul, Psalm 54:5 (The evil will return for those who lie in wait for me and you will put them to silence with your doctrine.); Romans 12:21. Once under the influence of evil, the only possible recovery comes from learning doctrine.

          5.       The mandate regarding evil is found in Romans 12:21: "Stop being conquered by evil, but conquer evil by means of the good." This refers to the function of the plan of God, X+Y+Z. The divine system for the administration of the good is residence and function in the divine dynasphere. Therefore, the only way to "overcome evil with good" is to advance in the plan of God through the daily perception of doctrine.

          6.       Evil distorts grace, Psalm 38:19-20 (But my enemies are vigorus and numerous [says ultra supergrace David] and many are those who hate me wrongfully; and they who repay evil for good, they oppose me because I follow the absolute good [Bible doctrine].), 52:1 (Why do you boast in evil, O might man; the grace endures all day long [in other words, grace grace will always outweigh evil and will endure beyond it.]). Grace does not come through when you are under the influence of evil.

                     a.       The Psalm 38 passage says that anytime a person follows the absolute good and doctrine, he is subject to many attacks of evil, both subtle and obvious.

                     b.       1Corinthians 15:33, "Be not deceived; evil companions corrupt good morals." Many people become anti-establishment through their association with those who are influenced by evil, who are in effect evil evangelists.

          7.       There is no evil in God, Psalm 5:4; James 1:13-15. It is impossible for any of God's attributes to be evil. He is minus all the evil things Satan does all the time. That there is no evil in God indicates the great dividing line in the angelic conflict.

I.        Protection from Evil.

          1.       The supergrace believer is protected from evil. (Here is another reason to get to supergrace!) In supergrace B or no-man's land, all the greatest attacks of evil strike. So when you mature as a believer, you face all kinds of evil.

          2.       Satan wants you to drop your guard and go negative toward doctrine, Psalm 21:11, 23:4; Proverbs 12:12, 20, 21; Genesis 48:16. Genesis 50:20, "They meant it for evil, but God meant it for good."

          3.       There is no coexistence with both evil and inner happiness. However, sin and happiness can coexist. Do you know anyone happier than David, or anyone who lived better than David? You can be happy living in your sins.

          4.       There is divine protection from evil for the positive believer.

                     a.       Psalm 37:16-19, "They [mature believers] will not be ashamed in the time of evil; in the day of depression they will still have abundance."

                     b.       Psalm 91:10, 97:10, 119:101, 121:7; Proverbs 2:10-14.

                     c.        Prov 1:33, "He who listens to Me shall live in security, and shall be at ease without fear of evil."

                     d.       Prov 16:6, "By occupation with the Lord, one avoids evil."

                     e.       Prov 19:23 teaches that there is divine protection from evil all around.

          5.       The more doctrine you have in your soul, the more you will love the Lord and the more you will hate evil. All thoughts in life are actually fighting over your soul, Proverbs 3:7.

          6.       The negative believer immediately finds a great deal against which he can react, and he moves into the stages of reversionism. Remember that Satan offers him a pseudo-supergrace status, paragraph, and pseudo prosperity. Satan is capable of rewarding as the ruler of the world.

          7.       So the constant intake of doctrine is the only insulation from evil, because doctrine goes where evil would reside; i.e., in the right lobe, and there doctrine combats evil.

J.        More Principles on Evil.

          1.       Evil distorts establishment, Psalm 50:16-21 (But to the evil God says, what right do you have to distort My laws , to take My covenant into your mouth [OSHA is a distortion f divine law; gun legislation is a distortion of divine law] for you hate authority and you cast My words behind you. When you see a thief, you are pleased and you associate with adulterers. You send your mouth loo and your tongue frames deceit. You sit and speak against your brother [you slander your own brother] these things you have done and I have kept ), e.g., law and order, the sanctity of marriage.

                     a.       Evil especially distorts divine institution #2, marriage, and divine institution #3, the family.

                     b.       Evil also rejects authority. Psalm 50:18 says "for you hate authority." Rejection of authority in every area of life is evil. This is so prevalent in our day that you would think verse 18 was written recently.

          2.       Reversionists are influenced by evil, Psalm 36:1-4 (Transgression speaks to the ungodly, within his right lobe, there is no respect of God in his eyes for he flatters himself in his own eyes concerning the discovery of his iniquity; the words of his mouth are evil; and deceit he has ceased to be wise he planes evil on his own bed, he sets himself on a path not good, he does not despise evil.); John 3:19; Psalm 36.

                     a.       Evil begins at certain stages of reversionism, especially from the frantic search for happiness stage and on.

                     b.       All reversionists are evil, for evil is the thinking of Satan and the propaganda of Satan. So anyone in reversionism is under the influence of Satan.

                     c.        Evil is the result of rejecting doctrine.

          3.       Evil rationalizes. Isaiah 5:20, "Woe to them that call evil good, and good evil." Since evil must avoid any guilt reaction, it must rationalize by distorting the conscience and setting up its own norms and standards.

          4.       Conspiracy and revolution is evil, Psalm 64:4,5 (To shoot from concealment at the blameless, suddenly they shoot and they do not fear. They hold fast to themselves and evil purpose.) Assassination has yet to solve a problem in history. Proverbs 17:11. If a person is anti-authority, he is evil, because evil always attacks authority. No problems can ever be solved by assassination.

          5.       Evil is self-destructive, Psalm 34:21 (Evil shall slay the wicked and those who hate the righteous [or the mature ones] will be condemned]); Proverbs 24:19-20. This explains why David lived while Saul died the sin unto death. Evil people always try to solve the world's problems by violence; e.g., anti-Semitism, which is three evils and two sins.

          6.       Criminals under the influence of evil can never be rehabilitated. A sof society, an evil society, is very anti-military and anti-police and it creates helpless people and puts them on welfare. Evil itself creates helpless people. Evil creates a welfare society. When evil is in the soul of a criminal, then that criminal must be executed. When parents had a teenager who was incorrigible, he potentially could be executed.

          7.       Evil seeks to build happiness on someone else's unhappiness, Psalm 35:12.

          8.       The laws of divine establishment protect a society from evil. , for rulers are not a cause of fear for good behavior.

          9.       evil is repaid for good, it always hurts the soul of the one who did good. You haven't lived until this happens to you!

          10.     God judges evil, Psalm 34:16; Isaiah 13:11. God uses Evil One to punish Evil Two because evil responds to evil. People respond to their leaders, and if the leader is evil, so will the people be evil. As an illustration, Hitler was accepted in his evil, and so was his nation evil.

          11.     Bible doctrine and evil were here before we came into the world. You cannot change either doctrine or evil, but they can change you. The believer who seeks to change evil is changed by evil.

          12.     The principle of historical trends.

                     a.       The uptrends of history are caused by the evangelization of mankind, followed by the communication and reception of the mystery doctrine of the Church Age.

                     b.       The downtrends of history are caused by a maximum number of people living in Satan's cosmic system under the influence of evil.

                     c.        Therefore, there are no tragedies in history. Historical disaster is related to certain cosmic trends based on evil, e.g., the demand for power exceeds the need for power.

                     d.       Isaiah 47:11, "Evil shall come upon you and you will not understand its origin. Consequently, national disaster shall fall on you, and you will not be able to avert it; suddenly destruction shall come to you, and you will not understand."

          13.     Remember that evil is the policy of Satan as the ruler of this world, and Satan is the greatest creature genius. Using his genius against God led to his evil, for his arrogance led to revolution which led to evil.

          14.     While evil and sin originate from Satan, the source of man's evil is different. Man's sin comes from his old sin nature, whereas the source of evil is his right lobe in the mentality of his soul. Sin comes from the old sin nature; evil comes from your thinking, from the thoughts of your right lobe and frame of reference. Remember, you are what you think.

          15.     Good and evil must continue as part of the angelic conflict. Good and evil must continue to challenge us as to which way we will go: Satan's way or God's way.

          16.     Evil will not be solved until Satan is removed as the ruler of this world, until he is incarcerated at the Second Advent in Gehenna.

          17.     Evil can only be avoided by establishing a command post of the soul. Hebrews 13:10. Evil can only be handled in each generation by those who are influenced by Bible doctrine.

          18.     Evil cannot understand life. In evil, there is no such thing as reality. People who are influenced by evil do not know reality nor can they face reality. When disaster strikes, people do not recognize the evil that originated it.

          19.     Evil is blind to the correct interpretation of history and does not understand life. This is because scar tissue on the soul believes the lie. Evil is divorced from reality. Reality says there is sin and evil in life.

K.       Jesus Christ controls history.

          1.       In spite of evil, Jesus Christ continues to control history in three ways.

                     a.       Direct control based on His own divine sovereignty will be brought more forcibly to the earth at the Second Advent.

                     b.       Indirect control occurs through the laws of divine establishment. Destroying the laws of divine establishment results in anarchy and revolutions. Any people who have ever tried violent solutions have never found answers to their problems. Violence and revolution has never been the answer. God will demonstrate this at the Gog and Magog Revolution at the Second Advent.

                     c.        Permissive control is God permitting evil to run its course during the angelic conflict.

          2.       Prov 16:3-4 summarizes the principle. Therefore, evil is going to run its course in human history, but evil should not be a deterrent to your spiritual growth. You advance spiritually in spite of evil. In other words, you don't throw up your hands and say "It's useless!"

          3.       Isaiah 45:7, "The One forming light and creating darkness [God created the creature who created darkness]; the One manufacturing prosperity and the One creating the evil one; I Jehovah, am the One manufacturing all of these things [Jesus Christ controls history]."

L.       The saturation of evil means national destruction.

          1.       A vigorous nation can sin vigorously, but that doesn't mean destruction will fall upon it. Sin is not the issue; evil is.

          2.       The fourth cycle of discipline is economic disaster. Leviticus 25-26. The fifth cycle of discipline is being taken over by a foreign power. Isaiah 47:10-11, "Because you have trusted in your evil . . . " is a description of nations influenced by evil.

          3.       Nations not influenced by Bible doctrine or by the laws of divine establishment have a tendency to be influenced by one or more forms of evil.

          4.       Evil is the policy of Satan as the ruler of this world. Satanis the most beautiful creature of God, the most personable and the wisest. Satan combines in one person everything that is attractive in a creature. He is the most brilliant, the most beautiful, the most attractive in every way. These attributes have all been combined to lead a revolution against God. By using his creature genius to rebel against God, evil was developed as well as sin. Pride or arrogance are a part of Satan’s original sin against God. His arrogance led to revolution and revolution has led to an evolving of evil. The poicy, which is called evil in the Word of God, is a policy developed by Satan himself.

          5.       While both evil and sin in this world originate with Satan, their source in mankind is different. The source of sin in mankind is the old sin nature. The source of evil is the heart or the right lobe of man. Evil come from the right lobe of man.

          6.       Sin comes from the old sin nature; evil comes from thinking thoughts of heart or the right lobe.

          7.       Evil includes human good, social and economic panaceas, trying to solve the problems of life through legislation. This kind of evil is taking place in Ontario where a mandatory seat belt law was passed. Residents were interviewed by the media here, and they were surprised to hear that many opposed it. One guy used his seat belt, but did not believe that it was the government’s business to tell him what to do inside his own car. The government is to encourage freedom, not to destroy freedom. When the government destroys freedom in the name of good, in the attempt to solve some human problems, that is evil. This ends up being a greater problem. The social gospel is evil, socialism is evil, social activism is evil, anthropocentric altruism is evil, humanitarianism is evil, legalism is evil, religion is evil, reversionism is evil, and even victorious life panaceas are a part of evil.

          8.       Sin was solved in salvation; but evil can only be resolved by spiritual growth, resulting in supergrace A, supergrace B and ultra supergrace. The sins of humanity were judged on the cross but evil was not resolved by the cross. Evil could not be resolve by the cross. The area of strength of the sin nature produces good; and good was not judged and neither was evil.

          9.       The tree of the knowledge of good and evil must continue until the end of human history. Sin was judged, but good and evil will continue until the end of the Millennium. Sins were solved by the cross, but good and evil were not.

          10.     Evil will not be solved until evil has been removed from the world, and it will be removed when Satan is removed . However, we have a problem here. If Satan is removed from this world and put into the Lake of Fire, then how does evil continue on the earth?

          11.     In the meantime, the believer’s sin is handled by rebound; and those sins are named and done with. There are constraints placed upon evil; but rebound does not set aside evil. You cannot name your evil and be forgiven. Recovery from evil takes a very long time. Paul’s recovery from evil took approximately 2 years. There is no instant recovery from evil.

          12.     Evil will not be resolved until Satan is removed from this world.

          13.     The sins of believers are handled by rebound.

          14.     Evil can only be dealt with by establishing a command post of the soul.

          15.     Any time a believer is reversionistic, apostate, involved in any way n whitewashing the devil’s world, or involved in the social gospel, he is trusting in evil. That takes us all the way back to Isaiah 47:10.

          16.     There are three things a nation must have for survival and blessing: evangelism, spiritual growth in local churches by means of pastor-teachers teaching doctrine, and the laws of divine establishment functioning within the framework of the government.

M.      Evil never understands grace function, Matthew 19:27-30.

          1.       Matt 20 is the Parable of the Vineyard Workers. (Note especially verse 16.)

          2.       The Bible always advocates capitalism and free enterprise.

          3.       Evil is always antagonistic towards grace and always seeks to manipulate grace.

          4.       God's standards for maturity and qualifications for blessing are the same for every believer: advance to spiritual maturity.

          5.       It is therefore blind arrogance for any believer to suggest or imply that he has achieved what no other believer ever has, or that he has had some unique experience, or that his life is more important than anyone else's.

          6.       Blind arrogance divorces the believer from the reality of spiritual things. Blind arrogance comes in many forms: legalism, salvation by works, spirituality by works, maturity by works. All three are signs of evil.

          7.       So the person who assumes that the plan of God stands or falls on the basis of his behavior is arrogant and under the influence of evil. The plan of God depends on the essence of God, never on what we do.

          8.       Peter was like the arrogant person who sets up false standards, and then by complying with those false standards concludes that he is a great believer. Arrogance assumes many incorrect things, and always slips so easily into evil. (For more amplification, see Philippians #59.)

          9.       Like believers in reversionism and evil, the labor union of Matt 20 had erroneous standards. Only blind arrogance made them cling to their standards instead of yielding to the superior standards of management. Labor becomes evil by complaining and judging management. The Bible calls the owner AGATHOS, for he kept his word.

          10.     So blind arrogance keeps the believer from yielding to the superior standard of God's matchless and perfect grace. Grace is related to doctrine, never to works.

          11.     Rewards for the believer in eternity depend on God's policy of grace, not on the arrogant, legalistic, anthropocentric evil standards of blind fundamentalism. God neither blesses in time nor rewards in eternity on the basis of arrogant standards of legalists. All His blessing is based on His grace standards.

          12.     You don't make covenants or contracts with God. When you know and love Him, you depend on His wisdom to deal faithfully with you at all times.

          13.     So the "first" in this passage are those under the influence of evil. The "last" are the mature believers, depending on God's grace standards.

N.       Evil as Distinguished from Other Categories.

          1.       Evil is distinguished from war and disease, Jeremiah 28:8. Neither war nor disease are evil. War is not evil, though there are evil acts in war. But the principle of war is good and noble, for it is a part of the function of establishment to maintain freedom. Most religious organizations make war or disease a part of evil, which is where they get mixed up.

          2.       Evil is distinguished from sin. 1Chronicles 21:1,17. You can't confess evil as you can confess sin.

                     a.       Checking up on God is evil.

                     b.       Evil possession of the soul is far worse than demon possession.

                     c.        So David distinguished between sin and evil, though both were a part of his numbering the people. His motivation for doing so was evil.

          3.       Evil is distinguished from evil in the administration of the fifth cycle of discipline, Jonah 3:10. The people were first thinking evil, which led to the fifth cycle of discipline, which is always administered through evil. But God let them off from the fifth cycle of discipline, allowing the other evil to continue. So there are two kinds of evil.

                     a.       There is evil in a national entity when the people are negative to the laws of divine establishment, or when believers reject Bible doctrine and go into reversionism.

                     b.       The fifth cycle of discipline is called an evil. "An evil to an evil nation." In other words, God matches the punishment to the crime. He uses evil one to judge evil two.

O.       Testimonies Concerning Evil.

          1.       Jacob: Genesis 48:16, "The angel who has redeemed me from all evil."

          2.       Joseph: Genesis 50:20, "You intended evil against me, but God meant it for good."

          3.       David: Psalm 84:10, 37:25-27, "I have been young, now I am old; yet I have not seen the righteous forsaken, nor His seed begging bread. Depart from evil and do good; therefore, live a long time."

          4.       Job: Job 28:28, "The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom; to shun evil is understanding of doctrine."

          5.       Solomon: Proverbs 16:6,17, "And by occupation with the Lord one stays away from evil. The highway of the mature believer is to depart from evil."

          6.       Isaiah: Isaiah 59:15, "And the one who turns aside into evil makes himself vulnerable."

          7.       Jeremiah: Jeremiah 23:21-22, 9:3. 8. The Lord Jesus Christ: John 17, "I do not ask You to take them out of the world, but to guard them from evil."

P.       The Final Mandate. 1Thessalonians 5:22, "Abstain from every form of evil."

_____________________________________________________________________

 c 1989, by R. B. Thieme, Jr. All rights reserved. –––––––––––––––––––––––––---------------------------------------------------------------------------


It appears that this doctrine is contained in lessons #56–60. I will keep all of the doctrine in this one place, and for the lessons which follow, there may be a few paragraphs of other things which are said.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #57


57 04/16/1976 Philippians 2 via Isaiah 45:7 Doctrine of evil (pt. 17); categories of SG2 blessings


I am the Lord and there is no other. The antithesis of light is darkness.


Isaiah 45:7 I form light and create darkness; I make well-being and create calamity; I am the LORD, who does all these things. 


Satan complains that God did not give him a fair shake; same for the other.


God sculpted light; but darkness was an indirect creation. The One Who created light can control both the creature and what the creature creates. The power of Satan is much greater than the power that we have. Satan has the power of death; he has the power of disease. It is Jesus Christ Who controls history, in spite of evil.


The three words of creation are found in this verse.


Isaiah 45:7 I formed light and I created darkness [God created Satan or created darkness] I am the One manufacturing prosperity and I create [out of nothing] evil. .God created the one who is the author of evil and the author of darkness.


Light is necessary for light and energy and heat.


Bob wants to take a Good Friday break and talk about prosperity. The verb means to manufacture something out of something.


Every generation remembered what the Scripture said; they memorized it. So they knew what the words were apart from the vowels. In the 10th century, the Masoretes decided that it was time


The Five Categories of Blessing

1.       Spiritual blessings. Occupation with Christ. Bravo grace extracts from spiritual blessings. Maximum doctrine, more than maximum and then the most you can have. These are blessings supergrace A, B and ultra supergrace.

2.       Temporal blessings, which follow the same pattern. Wealth (received, or acquitted); earned is still a blessing from God. Success, like promotion, recognition in one’s special sphere of tife. Promotion can be seen as a different factor. This can be a blessing in Supergrace A; prosperity and there are many types (social prosperity related to category #3 love; sexual prosperity.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #58


58 04/18/1976 Philippians 2 via Isaiah 53:12 Jesus Christ's victory, spoils, last exhale on the cross


Isaiah 53:12 Therefore I will divide him a portion with the many, and he shall divide the spoil with the strong, because he poured out his soul to death and was numbered with the transgressors; yet he bore the sin of many, and makes intercession for the transgressors. (ESV)


Jesus said, “My God, My God, why have your forsaken Me?’ God the Father judged all of our sins on the cross. The Holy Spirit cannot have anything to do with sin. The Holy Spirit could not be in Jesus to give Him support.


With His last breath, Jesus uttered, “I manufacture doctrine out of prosperity.”


there were a great many spoils to be distributed. This is a description of the prosperity which will be given to us. God the Father then gave David all of the grand blessings of the universe. The many refers to us; it refers to all who have believed in Jesus Christ. We are the beneficiaries of the plunder of the universe.


Therefore, I will distribute with the many, and He will distribute these spoils with the strong (the strong is the supergrace believer) occupation with Christ and sharing the happiness of God. Two sides of the same coin.


Crossing over no man’s land is the most difficult portion of the Christian life. But at this point, there are all types of prosperity which go with the believer. These points of prosperity become logistical support. The ultra supergrace believer, even after he dies, his children will be blessed, as they have been associated with an ultra supergrace parent.


Our legislative body is using legislation to solve social problems. Legislation is designed to protect freedom; not to solve social problems. A sick society always develops helpless people and put them on welfare. They are anti-police and anti-military. Never have we faced so much catastrophe. We need people to make an historic impact.


The policy is simple: there will be no electioneering. The only thing that will save this nation is the believer cracking the maturity barrier. That will be the historical impact.


Man does not need the knowledge of good and evil for a relationship with God. He needs a knowledge of Bible doctrine.


Isaiah 53:12  Therefore I [God the Father] will divide the spoils [the gain, the plunder of the angelic conflict] to him [the Lord Jesus Christ, in resurrection, in the hypostatic union] because of the many believers. Then he [the Lord Jesus Christ] will distribute this [the plunder, the gain] to the great ones [the powerful ones, believers who have reached some level of supergrace] because He poured out his soul unto death.


The distribution of the spoils of victory includes all of the things needed to get there. No believer has ever grown by prayer or by witnessing or by any program, including any sort of production.


Spiritual advance is Bible doctrine resident in the soul. We advance as we take in Bible doctrine. A program church is the blind leading the blind. The pastor is reversionistic. The greater the legalism, the greater the possibility of being ambushed by legalism. It is the pastor-teacher who guides the believers in the congregation to maturity. The pastor distributes the doctrine, which is spiritual growth.


Inside you body is your soul and when your soul departs from the body, you are dead. Matthew 27:50 tells us that Jesus, having screamed out with a loud voice, dismissed His breath. Then Jesus said, “O Yehowah, God of doctrine.”


Our prosperity begins at the point of salvation. The last thing for Jesus to say on the cross is a reference to doctrine.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #59


59 04/18/1976 Philippians 2 via Isaiah 47:10–11; Matthew 19:27–20:16 Doctrine of evil (pts. 18–19)


Isaiah 47:10  You felt secure in your wickedness; you said, “No one sees me”; your wisdom and your knowledge led you astray, and you said in your heart, “I am, and there is no one besides me.” 

Isaiah 47:11  But evil shall come upon you, which you will not know how to charm away; disaster shall fall upon you, for which you will not be able to atone; and ruin shall come upon you suddenly, of which you know nothing. 


Batak is depending upon some system.


Isaiah 47:10 Because you have trusted in your evil. Your wisdom and knowledge have seduced you.


Only the daily function of gap can a person from good and evil. Our nation is on the brink of disaster. The Chaldean empire was a place of salvation and blessing, as Nebuchadnezzar had moved to spiritual maturity. This same nation is under discipline.


Bob was going to go on a yacht with his family, the largest yacht in the world at that time, and Bob’s father told him that there was a little boy going to be there that he would not like. Bob was told that he would get along with this boy or his father would make life miserable for him over the days to come. Bob understood this and apparently got along. In effect, legislation had been passed and Bob’s freedom had been curtailed. It was legislated that Bob had to be nice to someone that he did not like. Bob would not have liked this person no matter what because he was ordered to.


When Lincoln freed the slaves, that was one thing, as the Bible does not condone slavery either.


There is no such thing as a race in the United States. You are a citizen of the United States or you are not. You have the freedom the government is supposed to protect.


George III had taken away too many of our freedoms and the founding fathers responded to this. All of our freedom is explained in terms of the English language; therefore, citizens must speak English in order to understand his freedoms.


So far in this country, wisdom and knowledge has seduced us. To be influenced by evil is to be seduced by evil. The television is a great place for evil to be taught. Learning Bible doctrine means that we can live a life free from evil.


Isaiah 47:10 Because you have trusted in your evil. You said, “No one sees me.” Your wisdom and knowledge have seduced you. I am and there is no one beside me.


Arrogance is thinking in the right lobe. They think that man by man’s plans can solve the problems of history.


Isaiah 47:11 Therefore, evil comes upon you and you will not understand its origin. Consequently, disaster will fall upon you until you are finally destroyed and you will not be able to avert it (or to prevent it).


People do not realize that when they try to solve man’s problems with man’s schemes that his... He is going to help God instead of growing up, he is getting worse and worse. People are saying, “My you are a wonderful believer.” All of this hustling puts you in the wrong way.


Evil cannot understand history. The more evil there is in the right lobe, the more a person moves away from reality.


It is cut and dry. It is a contract. The boss man needs more labor.


Matthew 19:27–20:16 management versus labor unions.


The last are the supergrace and ultra supergrace believers.

 

19.     Evil never understands gracde function.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #60


60 04/19/1976 Philippians 2:16a Doctrine of evil (pts. 20–31); equality is evil


Lt. Colonel Addison Baker won a medal of honor for Ploesti. His medal does not tell us that he dove his disabled plane into the target.


Sgt. Baker for the next medal of honor. He was found with his gun empty and 18 dead enemies around him


The points below were not listed in the doctrine of evil already covered.


Doctrine of Evil Continued

20.     Evil is distinguished from other categories.

          a.       Evil is distinguished between war and disease. Jeremiah 28:8 War is sometimes necessary. Sins are committed during war and there is some evil involved in war. Adolf Hitler went from one evil to another. Warfare and proteting one’s freedom is not an evil. 1Chronicles 21:17 David noted the difference, “Is it not I who ordered the numbering of the people? Indeed, I was the one who sinned. ...my sheep, what have they done?”

          b.       Evil is distinguished from evil when administering the 5th cycle of discipline ub Jonah 3:10. This is the evil of the Assyrian nation.

21.     Evil is often mistaken for good. In Micah 1:12, the citizens of Merah, which means bitterness, very close to Jerusalem. The citizens of Merah became weak waiting for good, but evil came down from the Lord to the gate of Jerusalem. The real evil was tovb or good. The evil was the administration of the fifth cycle of discipline. This came almost to the gate of Jerusalem.

22.     Evil provides false security for reversionism. Her leaders pronounce judgment for a bribe, her priest instrut for a price and her prophets divine for a bribe. All of these things are evil yet they lean on the Lord, saying, no evil will come upon us.

          a.       Because of you, Zion will become a plowed field and Jerusalem will become a heap of ruins.

23.     Evil is located in the soul. Matthew 6:23 If your eye is evil, your whole body is filled with darkness. Matthew 15:19 For out of the right lobe come evil thoughts.

24.     Because of this evil thinking. Amos 5:15–16 Hate evil, love doctrine and establish justice in the courts.

25.     Attiduge of the mature believer toward evil. Psalm 84:10 For a day in Your courts is better than a thousand days in reversionism under evil. I would rather be a supergrace doorkeeper than to dwell in the tents of evil. There is nothing in this passage which talks about sin.

26.     Evil leadership is anti-God. Nahum 1:11 From You, has advanced one who plots evil against the Lord. A policy maker of Belial (and Belial is maximum evil).

27.     Since evil is altruistic, national leaders are often presented as altruistic. Luke 11:19 Parents can be evil and still give gifts. “If you, being evil, know how to give good gifts to your children, how much more shall your heavenly Father give the Holy Spirit to those who ask Him.”

28.     Evil is related to its source.

          a.       Satan’s angels are evil. Acts 19:12–16

          b.       His domain is called evil world. Galatians 1:4

          c.        1Thessalonians 5:22 Satan’s policy is called evil. 2Thessalonians 3:3

          d.       Those under the influence of satanic policy are called evil men in Job 35:12 Matthew 12:35 2Timothy 3:13. They are also called evil workers. Philippians 3:2.

          e.       Inventors of evil things. Romans 1:30

29.     Therefore, because of the nature of evl, the mature believer avoids evil.

          a.       Jacob’s testimony. Genesis 48:16 The Angel who has redeemed me

          b.       1Samuel 25:39 blessed is the Lord Who pleaded my cause and has kept back my servant from evil.

          c.        Job 28:28 To depart from evil is the application of wisdom.

          d.       Psalm 37:25–27 I have been young and now I am old. Yet I have not seen the mature believer ever forsaken or his relatives begging bread. Dwell forever in a state of reward.

          e.       David’s son Solomon: proverbs 16:6 By grace and doctrine a propitiatory covering shall be put over iniquity and something about evil.

          f.        The one who turns aside to evil makes himself vulnerable. From Isaiah.

          g.       Jeremiah 9:3 and they bend their tongues like a bow (the arrow is gossip, maligning or judging); they malign; he will protect and guard you from evil.

30.     The command to put away evil. Deuteronomy 18:5 A demon-possessed prophet. Abhor that which is evil. Be not overcome with evil but overcome evil with good.

31.     Evil will be eliminated in the Millennial reign of Christ. At the beginning at least. Zephaniah 4:14–15 The Lord has removed his judgment against you.


Philippians 2:16  ...holding forth the word of life unto a boast to me in the day of Christ that I did not run in vain nor toil in vain.  (BLB)


Verse 16 – the mechanics of the advance to ultra-super-grace. Remember that no-man’s land is a place of great testing; that when you leave the super-grace perimeter you are advancing across the most difficult stage of your spiritual life. In the advance to ultra-super-grace we get down to what is really important, not only in this final push in getting there, but in any advance in any stage of the Christian life.


I don’t think that I have completed this lesson; I think Bob was reading the translation, but late in the lesson


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #61


61 04/20/1976 Philippians 2:16b Doctrine of the Rapture; rank has its privileges (RHIP)


John Bazilone Marine in the Solomon Islands.


Bob is presently working on the first two verses of chapter 1, because he did Philippians in an odd order.


Philippians 2:16  ...holding forth the word of life unto a boast to me in the day of Christ that I did not run in vain nor toil in vain.  (BLB)


“Holding forth” – present active participle from the compound word epéchō (ἐπέχω) [pronounced ehp-EHKH-oh] [epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] = the preposition ‘upon’; echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] = to have or possess] which means to hold on, to hold fast, to give attention to, to aim at, to focus on. All of these really mean concentration. “Concentrate on” is the meaning here. “Be concentrating on” is the present active participle here. The present tense is retroactive progressive present or the present tense of duration, it denotes what has begun in the past [daily function of GAP] and has continued into the present time. It takes the believer at the point of his salvation, with his positive volition toward doctrine, and sees him GAPing it one day, the next, the next, and finally breaking through the maturity barrier and reaching super-grace. He is now approaching the final target which is ultra-super-grace. The one characteristic that follows him all of the way through is the daily function of GAP. The active voice: super-grace believers produce the action of the verb in crossing no-man’s land between super-grace and ultra-super-grace. The participle is used as the imperative mood.


“the word of life” is the object of the verb, the accusative singular direct object from logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss]. Logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss] or word is used because the basic meaning of logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss] is doctrine or thought. Thoughts come from words, and so it means doctrine or thought. It becomes a synonym for teaching, as it 1Timothy 4:16. Logos refers to the canon of Scripture.


Also, the possessive genitive singular from the noun zôê (ζωή) [pronounced dzoh-AY], “life.” But it must be understood that life here is used in the sense of a means of sustenance. The “word of life” is the sustaining of the super-grace believer in his terrible journey across no-man’s land. It doesn’t mean just any doctrine; it means a person sets out across no-man’s land, the greatest period of pressure, the period of greatest deception, when all of the problems designed to cut the believer off begin. You only get through no-man’s land the same way you got to no-man’s land—daily function of GAP. Bible doctrine here is called “the word of life.” It is the Word that sustains life. Furthermore, for the super-grace believer who advances across no-man’s land to the objective there is waiting for him a decoration—the crown of life, a decoration which has with it blessings of an intensified nature in time that are beyond description, and blessings in eternity that are beyond description. Cf. James 1:12. Bible doctrine is the means of crossing over into no man’s land.


“that I may rejoice in the day of Christ” – or literally, “in order that I may have a basis for boasting with reference to the day of Christ”— the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE], plus the accusative of kaúchēma (καύχημα) [pronounced KOW-khay-mah], the word for boasting, and the dative singular of possession from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], emoi (ἐμοί) [pronounced ehm-OY], a rather unusual use of it—the dative of possession (usually the genitive). The dative of possession in Koine Greek becomes a very strong Greek idiom which has no exact equivalent in English. It is a particular interest particularized to the point of ownership. The possessive dative is a very unusual type of dative and it should be translated here with the connotation that Paul has a personal interest in every member of his congregation reaching ultra-super-grace, and that they stay up with him in his interest in the objective—“in order that to me a basis for boasting” is the literal translation. This is an idiom which means in the English, “that I may have a basis for boasting.” The boasting of a pastor-teacher taking anyone in his congregation to supergrace. This boasting will be done in the resurrection body, so that there is no sin involved.


Then a second prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] again with the accusative of hêmera (ἡμάρα) [pronounced hay-MEH-raw], another purpose connotation, plus the genitive of reference from Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]—“with reference to the day of Christ.” This is also an anartharous construction, there are no definite articles in the Greek, which emphasizes the high quality of this day. Not only does the genitive of reference point to the uniqueness of the day in history but the lack of any definite articles points to the extreme high quality.[8]


The Doctrine of the Rapture is revisited. It is back in Lesson #49.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #62


62 04/20/1976 Philippians 2:16c–17a Doctrine of running; sacrifice of the pastor–teacher


A reading of the chapter so far.


Philippians 2:16  ...holding forth the word of life unto a boast to me in the day of Christ that I did not run in vain nor toil in vain.  (BLB)


 “that” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which introduces a final clause, denoting a purpose, objective, goal. Paul’s objective is the crown of glory for leading positive believers under his ministry all the way to ultra-super-grace. 1Timothy 4:1; 1Thessalonians 2:19, 20; 1Peter 5:4. (No pastor-teacher can lead his congregation past the point of his own spiritual growth) –“in order that.”


There is a place for boasting, but not an expression of pride or arrogance. The basis for his boasting is leading other believers to his spiritual status. No pastor can lead his sheep beyond his own spiritual growth.


“I have not run in vain” – aorist optative indicative from the verb trechô (τρέχω) [pronounced TREHK-oh], which means to run. Running, however, is used as an analogy for advancing to maturity in the spiritual life. The aorist is a culminative aorist, it views the advance to maturity but regards it from the viewpoint of existing results—reaching ultra-super-grace. In other words, Paul broke the maturity barrier and advanced to ultra-super-grace. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of Paul’s attainment of maturity. This is a prepositional phrase, eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of kenos (κενός) [pronounced kehn-OSS], which basically means “empty.” It also connotes “without results,” or “without profit,” which is really the connotation here, or “for not profit.” While Paul has reached ultra-super-grace himself his objective as a communicator of doctrine is to bring members of the royal family along with him. Paul will run in vain unless he brings his congregations to the same spiritual status which he himself enjoys. Therefore he talks about running[9] in vain.


Bob’s Greek profession said that Paul’s intellect exceeded that of anyone else in the ancient world.


A professor told Bob that, if he could only teach for a year, he would want 25 years of preparation.


The pastor-teacher spends his life shacked to a desk and to one book. Bob takes a daily exam. There are two kids of running in vain. The pastor who studies 30 minutes a week, but is able to teach for a little bit of time. Then there is the pastor who studies, but his congregation is too tired to stay with him. Both of them are running in vain.


“neither laboured” – this includes the negative conjunction oude (οὐδέ) [pronounced oo-DEH] which means “nor” here, “nor have worked hard, struggled,” the aorist active indicative of kopiaô (κοπιάω) [pronounced kop-ee-AH-oh], which means to struggle, to work very hard to the point of exhaustion. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views Paul’s study and teaching in its entirety but it regards it from the viewpoint of existing results. The results are the attainment of ultra-super-grace on the part of many of his congregation. The active voice: Paul produces the action.


Philippians 2:16 Be concentrating on the world of life; that I might have a basis for boasting with reference to the day of Christ [Rapture, with emphasis on the judgment seat of Christ], that I have not run in vain, nor worked hard for no purpose.


Doctrine of Running

4/21/76

1.       By way of definition, running is the believer's advance to maturity. While walking connotes the modus operandi of the Christian life, running connotes the advance.

2.       Running is related to the blessings of maturity, 1Corinthians 9:24-27. The believer has to keep studying doctrine so that he doesn't lose his spiritual growth and therefore his rewards.

          a.       Bob talks about swinging at the air; and counter punching.

          b.       Then, boxing was brutal and many matches ended in death. The gloves were studded with metal.

          c.        The pastor-teacher cannot teach without being a student the whole time.

3.       Running is contrasted with reversionism in Galatians 5:7 You were running honorably; who cut in and broke your stride resulting in you to you not obeying doctrine?

4.       Running is related to doctrinal teaching.

          a.       Galatians 2:2 Now according to revelation, I went up and submitted to them the good news which I preach among the Gentiles, but I did so in private to those who were of reputation, for fear that I might be running, or had run, in vain. Those who were in charge in Jerusalem were stupid; they were legalistic. Even Peter got caught up in their legalism. Paul did not want to show them up publically. He was trying to get grace through to these people, but it did not work.

          b.       Philippians 2:16 be concentrating on the word of life [bravo grace leading to the award of the bravo cross, the crown of life] that I may have reason for boasting with reference to the day of Christ that I have not run or advanced in vain or struggled for no purpose.

          c.        Hebrews 10:25 Stop neglecting or the forsaking of assembling yourselves as is the habit of certain ones [reversionistic believers under the influence of evil]; but by being en encouragement even so much more as you see the day drawing near that you stop running [you stop running when you forsake the assuming of yourselves together].

5.       Running is related to the advance to maturity, Hebrews 12:1 for this reason, therefore, since we have such a battalion of witnesses [old testament supergrace believers] surrounding us, having stripped for action, having laid aside every impediment [distractions to gap] and the easily ensnaring sin [the function of rebound], let us advance on the run with endurance to the present [supergrace A, Supergrace B, and ultra supergrace].

6.       So running is used in the connotation of spiritual advance.


There is one Apostle and two pastor-teachers who are advancing.


Philippians 2:17  But even if I am being poured out as a drink offering on the sacrifice and service of your faith, I am glad and rejoice with you all.  (BLB)


Verse 17 – “Yea, and if,” allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. Allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] is the adversative conjunction used before an independent clause to indicate that the preceding paragraph is regarded as a settled matter. There is nothing more dogmatic in the concept of spiritual growth than the fact that the daily function of GAP produces maturity. Nothing else will do it. All growth comes from the intake of Bible doctrine. The next word ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] is used to introduce a first class condition. The two words together mean “But if [and it is true].” Plus the ascensive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ], translated “even.” So the corrected translation is “But even if.”


“I be offered” – present passive indicative of the verb spéndō (σπένδω) [pronounced SPEN-do]. It means to offer a libation, a drink offering, to make a libation or a drink offering of one’s self by expending one’s life and energy in the function of studying and teaching. In 2Timothy 4:6 this same verb is used for Paul’s dying grace, but here it is a reference to his sacrifice of energy and time being poured out in the ministry of studying and teaching. So Paul says, “But even if I am being poured out as a libation [1st class condition: And I am].” The present tense is a descriptive present to indicate what is now going on. The passive voice: Paul receives the action of the verb by being poured out as a drink offering to the ministry of doctrinal teaching. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of Paul’s life being devoted to the sacrifice of study and teach, study and teach.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #63


63 04/22/1976 Philippians 2:17 Evils of the press; abnormal life of the pastor teacher


Philippians 2:17  But even if I am being poured out as a drink offering on the sacrifice and service of your faith, I am glad and rejoice with you all.  (BLB)


“sacrifice and service of your faith” – epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] tê (τ) [pronounced tay] thusia (θυσία) [pronounced thoo-SEE-ah]. Epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] as a preposition take three different cases: plus the genitive emphasizes contact, translated on, at, by, before; plus the locative emphasizes position, translated over, on, or before; but plus the accusative emphasizes motion or direction, translated on, up to, or over it. We have epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus the locative here and it emphasizes position. The pastor must pour his life out on the altar of sacrifice. Thusia (θυσία) [pronounced thoo-SEE-ah] does not mean sacrifice, it means a sacrifice on an altar. What is the altar? It is study, study, study. God uses prepared men, and a prepared pastor is one who has prepared himself academically, in life under the will of God, and he is now ready to study and doing a little teaching in between. The altar is study and teach. This should not be misunderstood. It is no strain to be a pastor. The word “service” continues the prepositional phrase, the locative of leitourgia (λειτουργία) [pronounced li-toorg-EE-ah], used for service performed by an individual for the state, but he performs this service free of charge. It isn’t a job he has to do in order to live, he does it because he is so motivated to do it that he does it without being paid by the state. This service was generally performed by a wealthy or successful person. Principle: Paul is spiritually wealthy and materially wealthy. Because a pastor is on the altar he has to have a source of income totally apart from a regular job, because he has this responsibility before the Lord. This noun was used in the Septuagint also for the priestly function of services at the altar, but it was used for the Levitical priesthood.


It is difficult to study and teach and to work a job at the same time. God uses people in strange and wonderful ways. A pastor helps his congregants to advance and they help him with what they are being paid.


The Levitical priest spent his time studying the Word and fulfilling the requirements of his tribe.


There is also a genitive singular of reference from pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs], translated “faith.” While that is one meaning it is not really the most common meaning in the New Testament. The most common meaning is what is believed—Bible doctrine. The genitive singular of reference is used here for what is believed. Plus a possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] indicating doctrine resident in the soul of the super-grace Philippian believers.


So far: “But even if I am being poured out as a libation on the altar of sacrifice [study] and service [teaching] with reference to your doctrine.” Someone has to present the doctrine so that the believers can grow.


Principle

1.       The pastor or communicator of doctrine must live an abnormal life—thusia (θυσία) [pronounced thoo-SEE-ah], sacrificial. He is married to Bible doctrine. His devotion, time and energy belongs to the ministry of studying. As a result of his studying he has a service—teaching. Everything else in the life of the pastor-teacher is secondary to his studying and teaching.

2.       No member of the royal family of God with the spiritual gift of pastor-teacher should function as a pastor unless he is willing to devote his life to being on the horns of an altar—studying and teaching.

3.       The motivation for becoming a libation on the altar of studying and teaching is found in logistical support—occupation with Christ, sharing God’s +H, and always having enough temporal things so that time can be devoted to study.


“I joy” – the present active indicative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]. It means to possess God’s +H. The present tense is a static present, it represents a condition assumed as


perpetually existing in a mature pastor. Every pastor who cracks the maturity barrier has continual +H. The active voice: the mature communicator, Paul, produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality—“I keep in having inner happiness.”


“and rejoice with you all” – the connective use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the present active indicative from sugchairô (συγχαίρω) [pronounced soong-KHAH-ee-roh]. Ordinarily this word means to congratulate [sug is the preposition sun (σύν) [pronounced soon], “with”; chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row], the verb to rejoice or have happiness with]. The meaning of a word is determined by its usage, and the Koine word here means to congratulate—“and congratulate” is what Paul says. This is the aoristic present for punctiliar action in present time. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb. He is congratulating the Philippians congregation on the daily function of GAP, resulting in staying right behind him, right on his heels. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality, namely the Philippians right behind Paul. The words “you all” is the dative plural indirect object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs]—“all.” The dative of indirect object indicates the believers in whose interest maturity is attained; the dative plural indirect object from the personal pronoun su—“all of you.”


Philippians 2:17 But even if I am being poured out as a libation on the altar of sacrifice [study] and service [teaching] with reference to your doctrine, I keep on having inner happiness, and congratulate you all [who are right behind me].


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #64


64 04/23/1976 Philippians 2:18–20 Teddy Roosevelt, Jr.; legitimate congratulations


An article about Theodore Roosevelt and his son. Confidential report to keep Roosevelt’s name out of the news. Damning evidence to keep information about Roosevelt, Jr. out of the news. He won almost more battle decorations than almost any other American in WWII. Some mysterious edict which kept his name from being known, despite being a war hero.


Apparently this is all because of his famous relative, FDR, who did not want the competition from another Roosevelt.


I am not sure where these next notes are from?

 

The news media is more interested in shaping history and making news rather than simply giving the news. Rarely do we get all of the facts. One fact cannot be obscured, that the United States has hit a high time record of evil.

 

There are those trying to get rid of the Marines. A Mexican who could not speak English was railroaded. This was the exception and this case was used to make a rule from it.

 

The Marine Corp is just as American as apple pie.

 

Apparently one guy who should not have been in boot camp. If someone dies occasionally, he just flunked. Obviously his parents are going to be upset. Bob wondered why the good died young and why he was still alive. He found some answers in the Bible.


Bob wants to put the press through motivation platoon.


Philippians 2:18  And likewise you also be glad and rejoice with me.  (BLB)


Verse 18 – “For the same cause also.” The enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is used as a transitional particle without any contrast intended, so it is translated “now.” The accusative singular direct object from the definite article to and the attributive use of the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] means “the same reason,” and the adjunctive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] which means “also”—“Now the same reason also” is the correct translation. The phrase cannot be properly translated without some verb inserted to clarify the accusative of direct object—“do ye joy.” What Paul is saying is, “Now you also have inner happiness for the same reason.” The words “do ye joy” is the present active indicative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row] which means to have inner happiness. The retroactive progressive present denotes what was begun in the past when the Philippians reached super-grace and continues into the present time. The emphatic use of the nominative plural of the personal pronoun su refers to the Philippians. “The same reason” means because of Paul’s faithfulness in studying and teaching. This has resulted in the fact that they now have +H.


“and rejoice with me” – the emphatic use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] should be translated “indeed” or “truly,” but in modern English, “in fact.” Plus the present active indicative of sugchairô (συγχαίρω) [pronounced soong-KHAH-ee-roh], which doesn’t mean to rejoice with. The meaning of a word is determined by its usage, and the usage is “congratulations,” or to congratulate. The indicative mood is a potential indicative of obligation. This means the English word “ought” should be added. There is great emphasis on “me”—dative singular indirect object from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH].


Philippians 2:18 Now you also have inner happiness for the same reason; in fact you ought to congratulate me.


The Philippians would not be this far along were it not for the fact that they were positive toward Paul’s doctrinal ministry of teaching. No believer advances in phase two without a pastor-teacher.


Bob reviews the translation back to v. 16.


Principle

1.       Here is the relaxed mental attitude of a mature believer who is getting ready to give the command, again, “follow me.”

2.       Having reached super-grace and out in the middle of no-man’s land they are congratulating each other.

3.       The Philippian believers who are now sharing the happiness of God in super-grace are congratulating Paul, and Paul who has led them there and whom they have followed so faithfully is congratulating them.

4.       Mutual congratulations are based upon the principle that all spiritual advance comes through Bible doctrine, not through doing.


Number two pastor is Timothy, verses 19-24.


Timothy and Epaphroditus


Philippians 2:19  But I hope in the Lord Jesus to send Timothy to you soon, that I also may be encouraged, having known the things concerning you.  (BLB)


Verse 19 – “But I trust” is the word elpizô (ἐλπίζω) [pronounced el-PID-zoh], generally translated “hope.” Here as a present active indicative it is a little stronger than that, it means to anticipate. The enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is used as a transitional particle without contrast intended—“Now I anticipate.” The present active indicative of elpizô (ἐλπίζω) [pronounced el-PID-zoh] is a future present, it denotes an event which has not yet occurred but is regarded as so certain that in thought it is contemplated as already coming to pass. This changes the meaning of elpizô (ἐλπίζω) [pronounced el-PID-zoh] from hope to the connotation of anticipation. The active voice: produces the action. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality.


“in the Lord” is the prepositional phrase en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus instrumental of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE], translated literally, “by the Lord Jesus.” We have to add something—“by the grace of the Lord Jesus.”


“to send” – aorist active infinitive of pempô (πέμπω) [pronounced PEHM-poh], The aorist is constative, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. A major move is about to be taken, Paul is going to make a major personnel change in transferring Timothy from Rome to Philippi. The active voice: Paul as an apostle has the authority to make these personnel changes. The aorist infinitive denotes that which is eventual and particular, while the present infinitive indicates a condition or a process. This is the infinitive of intended result in which the results indicated are the fulfilment of a very deliberate objective. This is a blending of purpose and result. “Now I anticipate by the grace of the Lord Jesus to send Timothy to you”—dative plural indirect object from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] “to you.” The dative of indirect object indicates that Timothy is sent as an interim pastor for the benefit of the Philippians and to bring them up to date on some doctrines they need immediately to get them into ultra-super-grace. So this indicates that Timothy at the time of writing was himself in the mature status of super-grace. The anartharous construction of the prepositional phrase emphasizes the highest rank, the Lord Jesus Christ is the Prince-Ruler of the Church.


“shortly” is not quite correct. This is the adverb of time tachéōs (ταχέως) [pronounced tahkh-EH-oce], and the correct translation is “without delay.” Paul does not want to leave the local church at Philippi without a pastor or doctrinal teaching during the critical time of crossing no-man’s land. There are more pressures, ambushes, problems of good and evil, more distractions, more counter-attacks from reversionistic believers at this stage of spiritual growth; therefore he feels that it is expedient without delay to dispatch Timothy to Philippi.


“that” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which introduces a purpose clause. It denotes the purpose that he has in mind for the Philippians, a congregation whom he dearly loves.


“I also may be of good comfort” – that doesn’t sound like a purpose for the Philippians but more like a purpose for the apostle Paul. But in reality, as goes the Philippians so goes the tranquillity of Paul. The people that can really upset you are the people that you really love. Paul’s tranquillity is definitely tied up with the Philippian congregation. kagô/kamoi/kame (κἀγώ/κἀμοί/κἀμέ) [pronounced kag-OH/ kam-OY/kam-EH] eupsuchéō (εὐψυχέω) [pronounced yoo-psoo-KHEH-oh] is the phrase, it includes the contracted form of the adjunctive kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] [kagô/kamoi/kame (κἀγώ/κἀμοί/κἀμέ) [pronounced kag-OH/ kam-OY/kam-EH]], and the present active subjunctive of the compound e)uyuxew [eû (ε) [pronounced yoo] = good; psuchê (ψυχή) [pronounced psoo-KHAY] = soul]. To have a good soul means to have tranquillity of soul, to be encouraged or to have courage, or to be glad, or to be of a cheerful disposition: “that I also may have tranquillity of soul” is the corrected translation. The present tense is an aoristic present for punctiliar action in present time, in contrast to the aorist which connotes punctiliar action in past time. The aoristic present sets forth the event as now occurring. Because Paul is getting concerns that there might be some problems in Philippi he is sending Timothy immediately. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb. He is possessing tranquillity of soul because he is taking the proper steps to make a personnel adjustment for the benefit of the Philippians. The subjunctive mood is combined with the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] to denote a purpose—to send Timothy ahead to Philippi.


“when I know” is the aorist active participle of ginskô (vινώσκω) [pronounced gih-NOH-skoh] which means to know. The culminative aorist views Paul’s knowledge of the Philippian status quo in its entirety but it emphasizes the existing results. Paul at this point has tranquillity. The participle is a temporal participle.


“your state” – ta (τά) [pronounced taw] peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE] (περί) [pronounced per-EE] humôn (ὑμν) [pronounced hoo-MONE], is an idiom. This is the accusative plural indirect object from the definite article ta (τά) [pronounced taw], plus the preposition peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE], plus the genitive plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. Literally, “the things concerning you.” This is a Greek idiom for “your status quo.”


Philippians 2:19 Now I anticipate by the grace of the Lord Jesus to send Timothy to you without delay, that I also may have tranquillity of soul when I know your status quo.


Philippians 2:20  For I have no one like-minded, who genuinely will care for the things relative to you.  (BLB)


Verse 20 – “For” is the explanatory of the conjunctive particle gar, so we know that the verse is an explanation: “I have” – present active indicative of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh]. The present tense is a descriptive present, it indicates what is now going on. Timothy is the only qualified person to send at that time. The active voice: Paul produces the action by doing the right thing: having a personnel pool and having only one person qualified. The indicative mood is declarative representing the action of the verb from the standpoint of absolute dogmatic reality.


“no man” – accusative singular direct object from the adjective oudeís (οὐδείς) [pronounced oo-DICE] which means “no one.” This doesn’t mean that his personnel pool is empty but it means that there is only one qualified person.


“like-minded” – accusative singular direct object from the compound adjective isópsuchos (ἰσόψυχος) [pronounced ee-SOP-soo-khoss] [ísos (ἴσος) [pronounced EE-sos] = equal; psuchê (ψυχή) [pronounced psoo-KHAY] = soul], equal-minded or rapport in the sense of having common sense, knowing what to do. Paul implies that Timothy has advanced as far as himself at this time in that he is in super-grace and that they have a rapport of maturity and an equality of spiritual growth.


“who will naturally care for your state” – a very long clause in the Greek. It begins with a qualitative relative pronoun hostis (ὅστις) [pronounced HOHS-tiss] which emphasizes the fact that at the moment of writing Timothy is the highest quality person in the personnel pool of Paul. “Who because of his spiritual maturity” is the meaning of the qualitative relative here. The adverb with this, gnēsíōs (γνησίως) [pronounced gnay-SEE-ose], means born in wedlock, legitimate, reliable, genuine. Here it means genuine. The accusative plural direct object from the definite article ta (τά) [pronounced taw], plus peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE], plus the genitive plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] and it means again status quo. Plus the future active indicative of the verb merimnaô (μεριμνάω) [pronounced mer-im-NAH-oh], which means to be concerned, to care for, to be concerned about. The future tense is a predictive future, it predicts an event which is expected to occur in the near future. The active voice: Timothy will produce the action. The indicative mood is declarative for dogmatic reality.


Philippians 2:20 For I have no equal soul [comparable spiritual growth], who because of spiritual maturity will be genuinely concerned for your welfare.


Principle

1.       God uses prepared people. Timothy at this point in AD 62 is the prepared person.

2.       Many men with the gift of pastor-teacher are not qualified to serve as a pastor in the local church because they are not prepared.

3.       Some are not prepared academically.

4.       Some are not prepared from the standpoint of life—mentally immature.

5.       Some are not prepared from the standpoint of self-discipline.

6.       Some are not prepared from the standpoint of the proper exercise of authority.

7.       Some are not prepared because of arrogance, ambition, power lust, approbation lust.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #65


65 04/25/1976 Philippians 2:21–22 Concentration; "Interests of Jesus Christ"


To be successful today, you must continue to go back to school. In the military, you are constantly taking courses as you advance. People who can concentrate are the best lovers.


Last night, they saw The Taming of the Shrew.


Chapter 2 read:


Philippians 2:21  For those all are seeking the things of themselves, not the things of Jesus Christ.  (BLB)


Verse 21 – “For all” is hoi (οἱ) [pronounced hoy] pantes (πάντες) [pronounced PAHN-tehç] gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr]. The first word in the English is “For,” but it is the third word in the Greek sentence. The first word is the nominative


plural definite article, then the nominative plural from pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] [pantes (πάντες) [pronounced PAHN-tehç]]—“the all for” in its word order. But we say in English, “For they all.” The definite article is used for a personal pronoun. This is a reference to the reversionistic believers of Rome. It is a change of subject from the wonderful relationship between Paul and the Philippians. From the very outset the church at Rome was a reversionistic church. This is a reference to the fact that the church at Rome was made up of reversionistic believers, negative toward doctrine, under the influence of evil.


Alpha grace is what gets you from salvation to supergrace. Bravo grace is what gets you to ultra supergrace. Charley grace is the disciplinary grace given you when you do not advance but you retrogress.


David when he was matured sinned with Bathsheba. The new believer is spiritual and carnal; the supergrace believer is spiritual and carnal; the ultra supergrace believer is spiritual and carnal.


People in reversionism have prosperity, but it is not of God because they are miserable. There are people in reversionism who can have all kinds of things and yet, they are miserable.


Bob has never escaped be scaled by the Scriptures.


“seek” – present active indicative of the verb zêteô (ζητέω) [pronounced zay-TEH-oh]. This is a retroactive progressive present, it denotes what has begun in the past and continues into the present time on the part of the Roman church in contrast to the Philippian church—“keep seeking.” The active voice: the reversionists under the influence of evil produce the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the standpoint of reality.


“their own” – accusative plural direct object from the definite article meaning “the things,” plus the genitive of reference plural from the reflexive pronoun heautou (ἑαυto) [pronounced heh-ow-TOO]. Literally this would be translated “the things of themselves.” This is a Greek idiom and you cannot literally translate an idiom in the Greek. It means “there own interests.” “For they all keep seeking their own interests [self-gratification].” So there is a concentration on evil and there is a concentration in reversionism which is a negative one, a bad one. This is where many of the hang-ups and syndromes of life occur. They occur simply because people are concentrating on their own pleasure, their own happiness, their own satisfaction to the exclusion of everything else.


“not the things which are Jesus Christ’s” – ou (οὐ) [pronounced oo] ta (τά) [pronounced taw] Christou Iêsou. The strong negative ou (οὐ) [pronounced oo], “not,” plus the definite article ta (τά) [pronounced taw] in the plural, “the things,” plus the genitive from Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] and genitive of Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE], “Christ Jesus.” This is a descriptive genitive indicating that happiness and blessing in life, plus capacity for life and concentration in life, all belong to one person, “Christ Jesus.” When you neglect Bible doctrine you are ignoring the Lord Jesus Christ. So we translate this, “not the interests of Jesus Christ.”


Philippians 2:21 For they all [reversionists] keep seeking their own interests, not the interests of Christ Jesus.


The interests of Christ Jesus puts Bible doctrine before everything else; it is the number one priority.


   Principle

1.       Number one priority in life for the believer must be Bible doctrine. Only the daily function of GAP, resulting in cracking the maturity barrier, can produce in the life of any believer “seeking the interests of Christ Jesus.” This involves getting under a doctrinal pastor and learning Bible doctrine.

2.       The interests of Christ Jesus can only be served by the mature believer. Supergrace A, supergrace B or ultra supergrace.

3.       When the believer seeks the interests of Christ Jesus he continues to take in doctrine until the saturation of inculcation results in that maturity which serves the best interests of Christ.

4.       At this point the believer is not only in a state of glorifying Christ in history but becomes the beneficiary of 5 categories of blessing under his own paragraph SG2.

5.       Reversionism and evil hinder the royal family of God from serving the interests of Christ Jesus.

6.       Good and evil is not only Satan’s policy as the ruler of this world but his greatest weapon against the believer in the angelic conflict.

7.       When the reversionistic believer seeks his own interests he becomes vulnerable to the lies prevarications of pastors who do not study and teach.

8.       He is equally led astray by various categories of evil and legalism because they appeal to his arrogance.

9.       The believer who seeks his own interests is vulnerable to the subtleties of arrogance. The only protection from arrogance is Bible doctrine in the soul.


Philippians 2:22  But you know his proven worth, that as a child with a father he has served with me in the gospel.  (BLB)


Verse 22 – having set up a great contrast between two churches he now advocates one more time why he is sending Timothy. “But ye know” – the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] which sets up a contrast between the reversionists of Rome and supergrace Timothy. Plus the present active indicative of the verb ginskô (vινώσκω) [pronounced gih-NOH-skoh] which means here to come to know, to perceive, to realize. The Philippians have had Timothy before and they have responded to Timothy as a pastor. The present tense is a perfective present, it denotes a continuation of existing results. The active voice: the Philippians believers produce the action of the verb, they have come to know and respect Timothy’s ministry. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal idea from the viewpoint of reality.


“the proof of him” is incorrect. This is the accusative singular direct object from the noun dokimê (δοκιμή) [pronounced dok-ee-MAY] which denotes the quality of being approved, and therefore it means character. With it is the possessive genitive singular from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. The possessive connotation of this possessive pronoun means his very own character.


“that, as a son with a father” – why did they respect Timothy? Was he the Bible teacher that Paul was? No, but he was willing to be as long as Paul lived a student of his doctrinal teaching and he never got away from what Paul taught, he was the perfect disciplined person. This phrase begins with the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] to indicate perception, something that the church at Philippi had noticed about Timothy. The word “as” is a comparative particle, hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç]. The word for “son” is not huios (υἱός, ο, ὁ) [pronounced hwee-OSS], it is teknon (τέκνον) [pronounced TEK-non], a child in relationship to the discipline of his father. A better translation of teknon (τέκνον) [pronounced TEK-non] here is really a “student.” Patêr (πατήρ) [pronounced pat-AYR] in the singular means “father” but it also means “academic ruler” here in the sense that as long as Paul lives Timothy always took his teaching, never deviating from his teaching. Even when he went into reversionism it wasn’t because he deviated from his teaching, it was because he failed to follow the advice of Paul and apply discipline in his congregation. So it should be, “as a student with reference to his father [teacher].” The great pastors and teachers are those who never go out and undermine the source of their spiritual growth.


“he hath served with me in the gospel” – aorist active indicative of douleúō (δουλεύω) [pronounced dool-YOO-oh] which means that he has been a slave. This means to serve as a slave. The constative aorist contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. Both Paul and Timothy are slaves of Jesus Christ. The active voice: Timothy is producing the action. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of a dogmatic conclusion. The fact remains that every pastor is the slave of the Lord Jesus Christ.


“with me” – sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] plus the instrumental of egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]; “in the gospel” – eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of euangelion (εὐαγγέλον) [pronounced yoo-ang-GHEL-ee-on], often used, not simply for the gospel as evangelizing people but for the entire ministry of teaching the gospel. The point is that it starts with salvation and that’s why we have, right from the Bible, the gospel ministry. It doesn’t mean that all you have to do is give the gospel but it means that that is where the ministry of the pastor begins. The word “gospel” is used to remind all of us of our entrance into God’s plan. But in effect the pastor does not have a ministry to you until you have been evangelised, and so at the point of your evangelization is where the pastor’s ministry begins.


Philippians 2:22 But you have come to know his character as a student with reference to a teacher, who has served with me in reference to the gospel.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #66


66 04/25/1976 Philippians 2:23–24 Concept of the prepared pastor


The Concept of the Prepared Pastor

1.       Preparation begins at the point of salvation when the individual believer receives the spiritual gift of pastor-teacher from the Holy Spirit. The gift is given to male believers only. A woman is designed to be a responder.

2.       First there must be cognizance of the gift of pastor-teacher.

3.       Constant positive volition toward doctrine and resultant daily function of gap causes the initial spiritual growth which allows you to become aware of the gift.

4.       Specific preparation. Every male ought to consider the military. If you are 35 or 40, you may have no desire to return to school. Obviously, if you have this gift, you have passed the awareness point. Doubtful that you actually have it. That may be too old and God may have or ruled the use of the gift. There must be the exploitation of the gift, which means long preparation. Special preparation is getting into a situation where your head is beat in, unfairly. You have a boss that abuses you terribly and you stick it out; you gut it out. Or go into the military. The inculcation of discipline. No inculcation of discipline without this. There are people who came up from the gutter. We have no control over where we are born and who are parents are. There is a lot of arrogance among young males today and sometimes it is based upon being born on the wrong side of the tracks. There are many jobs open today and one needs to be under strict discipline or unfair discipline. Too much has been made up of the dignaty of man; and it is the total depravity of man. You can always tell those who grew up in the depression because they have grown up hard-scrabble. But today, there are those who have no discipline in their lives. Drug addiction is the antithesis of self-discipline. Special preparation. Stay under discipline long enough for it to seep into your soul. There are some exceptions to the special preparation. The Apostle Paul was one of the greatest trainers of pastor-teachers that there was. Humiliation is healthy; it is a good thing, not a bad thing. Timothy was able to take all kinds of discipline from Paul and he became great and Paul’s true successor. The school of hard knocks.

5.       Academic training. There are exceptions. How can any man stand up in the pulpit without first being a student yourself. How do you think about those in the pews if you have not been there as well. There must be the original languages and pertinent subjects, like history.

6.       Military training and academic training in the classroom is a good combination. Two things from from diligent study: personal growth and personal blessing and spiritual growth based upon the teaching. The pastor-teacher is always a student and he takes exames every time that he teaches.

7.       God uses prepared men. No pastor can lead his congregation beyond his own level of spiritual growth. Much of the true function of the pastor has been lost.

8.       Preparation also involves honor and integrity. The field of professional ethics for the pastor-teacher. This is not morality. Professional integrity demands that the pastor keep on studying and teaching. He must be faithful in the little things, which leads to faithfulness in the big things. He must be insulated. A pastor who teaches under the concept of encore, he is going to teach a lot of fluff. Pastors make the mistake of trying to please their congregation. The pastor must do his job as unto the Lord. He most avoid self-promotion.


Bob talks about 4 places in CA where you think you have this gift. In the desert, in the valley, in the mountains or at the ocean. Every person is in full-time Christian service in life. You do not dedicate to something you already are in.


Philippians 2:23  Therefore indeed I hope to send him immediately, when I shall have seen the things concerning me.  (BLB)


Verse 23 – “Him therefore” is touton (τοτον) [pronounced TOO-tohn] men oun (ον) [pronounced oon]. Touton (τοτον) [pronounced TOO-tohn] is the accusative singular direct object from the demonstrative houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], called the immediate demonstrative. It calls attention with special emphasis to Timothy as a mature believer. We can translate this near demonstrative “This one,” with special emphasis on Timothy as the man most qualified in Paul’s personnel pool to be transferred to Philippi. The next word, men, is an affirmative particle, often non-translatable, used frequently in the Classical Greek, generally used correlatively with other particles, like de. It is used here with the demonstrative to mean “This one.” The inferential enclitic particle oun (ον) [pronounced oon] denotes an inference from what is preceded and is correctly translated “therefore.” In the English we usually say “Therefore” first. “Therefore him” is the way that the demonstrative is actually emphasized. Since “him” is an accusative and a direct object, obviously between therefore and him it is necessary to insert a verb: the present active indicative of elpizô (ἐλπίζω) [pronounced el-PID-zoh]. Here it means “expectation” with a nuance of counting upon. So we translate it “I expect.” The present tense is a futuristic present, it denotes the fact that Timothy has not yet been sent to Philippi but the dispatch to Philippi is so certain as to be regarded as already coming to pass. The indicative mood is a potential indicative of obligation. Altogether it is translated “Therefore I expect.” Not a complete sentence, so “Therefore I expect him.” But that isn’t good enough, there has to be some kind of an infinitive or subjunctive to go with it—here, the aorist active subjunctive of pempô (πέμπω) [pronounced PEHM-poh], “Therefore I expect to send him.” The culminative aorist of pempô (πέμπω) [pronounced PEHM-poh] views the action of sending Timothy to Philippi in its entirety, but it emphasizes the existing results. Philippi will have an interim pastor to take care of the church until Epaphroditus returns. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb. The subjunctive mood is the potential subjunctive used to denote Paul’s purpose in sending Timothy ahead.


“presently” is incorrect. It is the adverb exautēs (ἐξαυτς) [pronounced ex-OW-tace] and it means “immediately.”


“so soon as I shall see” – the comparative particle hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç], “as soon as,” plus the particle án (ἀν) [pronounced ahn] which introduces an indefinite temporal clause. It isn’t translated, it just indicates that this is one of those signals that this is an indefinite temporal clause coming up. It is also used for 3rd class conditions in the protasis. It here helps to translate hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç] “as soon as.” Next comes the aorist active subjunctive from aphoraô (ἀφοράω) [pronounced af-or-AH-oh] [apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] = preposition of ultimate source; horaô (ὁράω) [pronounced hoh-RAW-oh] = to see] which means to see from the ultimate source, to look away, to fix one’s eyes on something—“as I see how things go with me” is the corrected translation of the idiom. This is a dramatic aorist, it states what has just been realized or is on the point of being accomplished. Active voice: Paul is producing the action. The potential subjunctive indicates that just as soon as it is cleared up whether Paul is going to be released or not he is going to dispatch Timothy.


“how it will go with me” is ta (τά) [pronounced taw] peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE] eme (ἐμέ) [pronounced ehm-EH] which is an idiom. The word ta (τά) [pronounced taw] is the accusative plural definite article, translated “the things.” peri (περί) [pronounced per-EE] = “concerning.” Eme (ἐμέ) [pronounced ehm-EH] is the object—“the things concerning me” which is the Greek idiom for “my status quo.”


Philippians 2:23 Therefore I expect to dispatch him [Timothy] immediately, as soon as I determine my status quo [or, ‘as soon as I see how things turn out here’].


Philippians 2:24  And I am persuaded in the Lord that I myself will also come soon.  (BLB)


Verse 24 – “But I trust,” the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] used as a transitional conjunction, generally translated “now,” and is used to insert an explanation at this point; plus the perfect active indicative of peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh] which means to obey, to be convinced, to have confidence. This is the intensive perfect, it denotes completed action with emphasis on existing results. The active voice: Paul produces the confidence. The indicative mood is the reality of this characteristic of Paul.


“in the Lord” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] means occupation with Christ. Paul is occupied with Christ and therefore possesses confidence. Occupation with Christ is viewed here as the logistical support of super-grace.


“that” is the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] stating the content of Paul’s thinking.


“I also myself” – the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is “also,” the nominative singular of the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] emphasizes the identity of Paul as a super-grace believer taking his occupation with Christ. He has confidence in doctrine and he is occupied with the Lord. He has the logistical support of the living Word, the logistical support of the written Word, and therefore he has maximum confidence.


“shall come” is the future active indicative of érchomai (ἔρχομαι) [pronounced AIR-khoh-my], meaning that he himself will before he does come face to face with this congregation. The future tense is predictive for an event expected to occur in the future.


“shortly” is an adverb, tachéōs (ταχέως) [pronounced tahkh-EH-oce], which means “soon.”


Philippians 2:24 Now I have confidence in the Lord that I myself also shall be coming [to you] soon.


Paul would soon be released from prison and will be free to make a fourth missionary journey, but he will also make an inspection tour throughout all of the churches and he will come face to face with the Philippians. Paul expresses confidence that he will leave prison and fellowship with the Philippians.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #67


67 04/30/1976 Philippians 2:25 Epaphroditus, the plugger


Bob reads the first 24 verses of this chapter.


Bob has returned from CA


Philippians 2:25  Now I esteemed it necessary to send to you Epaphroditus, my brother and fellow worker and fellow soldier, and your messenger and minister to my need,  (BLB)


Verse 25 – Epaphroditus was a plugger and he was totally free from jealousy. He had no hang-ups and was not competing with anyone. He knew that he could not teach like Paul and that he could not speak like Timothy, but plugged away anyway.


“Yet I suppose it necessary” starts with the enclitic conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], used as a transitional conjunction without any contrast intended here. It is used to insert an explanation regarding the Philippians own right pastor at the present time. “Yet is really “Now.” “I suppose” is aorist active indicative of the verb hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee]. The word means to be an expert, to be such an expert in the subject that you can act as a guide. This word is found in some lexicons to be defined as a guide. It doesn’t mean that at all, it means to be an expert, but it just so happens that an expert is always guiding people. It means to be an expert in such a way that one becomes a guide, or that one’s opinion is important. Therefore it also means to think, to regard, to consider. “Now I consider.” The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views the action of the verb in its entirety—Paul’s thinking, planning—but it emphasizes the result of sending Epaphroditus back to Philippi. The active voice: Paul as the apostle produces the action of the verb. He is returning Epaphroditus. The indicative mood is declarative, it represents the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality.


Then comes the accusative singular direct object from the adjective anankaîos (ἀναγκαος) [pronounced an-ang-KAH-yoss]. This means “proper.” This has to do with God’s will for Epaphroditus to get back to his own congregation at this point. He has been ill and it is time for him to come back. A plugger is never appreciated until he is gone. Paul considered this a matter of integrity, a matter of divine will, and “proper” is simply another way of stating it.


“to send to you” – aorist active infinitive of pempô (πέμπω) [pronounced PEHM-poh]. The aorist tense is a dramatic aorist, it states what has just been realized and is on the point of being accomplished. Enough time has elapsed so that Epaphroditus is now appreciated for what he is—a plugger. A plugger is always a stable person, a consistent person. He may be a little slower but he gets there, he keeps right on going. The active voice: Paul as the apostle makes the personnel change. This is the infinitive of purpose expressing the aim of action denoted by the finite verb. The prepositional phrase is the preposition prós (πρός) [pronounced pross] plus the accusative plural of su (σύ) [pronounced soo] indicating all of the Philippian congregation. This can mean “face to face” or “with you.”


“Epaphroditus” – accusative singular direct object from the proper name, Epaphróditos (Έπαφρόδιτος) [pronounced ep-af-ROD-ee-toss], [us is the Latin suffix; os is the Greek suffix. The Greek and Latin languages at this time were exact equivalents], meaning ‘belonging to Aphrodite [Venus in Latin].’ It means “belonging to the goddess of love.” But what is wrong with that is that his name is an idiom: his name is “Handsome.” “Now I consider it proper to send Epaphroditus face to face with you.”


For smoother English, add the relative pronoun hôs (ὡς) [pronounced hohç] plus the present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] at this point, “who is” [these words do not occur but are implied as needed in the English]—“who is.”; “my brother,” the appositional accusative or the double accusative singular, adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS] is the word, correctly translated “brother.” With it is a possessive genitive singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. It indicates that Epaphroditus is a fellow-believer, not a relative. No one functions in the plan of God apart from regeneration and salvation. Brother is used to indicate that we are now in the royal family, as of the point of salvation. We can be very different but we are part of the same family.


“and companion in labour” – this indicates that not only is he royal family but a special category of royal family, a communicator of doctrine. The adjunctive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] should be translated “also.” With it is an appositional double accusative singular from the compound noun sunergós (συνεργός) [pronounced soon-er-GOSS] [sun = with; ergos = work], which means to work with. Ergon (ἔργον) [pronounced EHR-gon] also means “duty, office, work, action, production,” hence together in duty. It means here that “we are in the same duty profile.” They are fellow communicators of doctrine: Paul has the gift of apostleship; Epaphroditus has the gift of pastor-teacher.


“and fellow soldier” – the accusative singular (and still part of the double accusative) direct object from the compound noun sustratiôtēs (συστρατιώτης) [pronounced soos-trat-ee-OH-tace] [sun – together with; stratiôtês (στρατιώτης) [pronounced strat-ee-OH-tace] = solder], which means fellow soldier or comrade in arms, emphasizing the fact that service and discipline are involved in teaching Bible doctrine. The communication of doctrine, whether it is an apostle or pastor-teacher, must first recognize the authority of Jesus Christ, the living Word, who can provide and has provided the doctrine for the Church Age. Then the recognition of what He has provided—the canon of Scripture. They are different but they have the same function. There is no stereotypical clergyman. The pastor-teacher is a student for life; and he never leads a normal life, just like the soldier.


Berachah blood wings.


The ministry is not a normal life, but it is a wonderful life. The pastor must have great self-discipline. He must demand group discipline as he teaches Bible doctrine to his congregation. It takes great self-discipline to take it in. His schedule is not the same as others. Then he communicates it.


“but” – the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is used as a conjunction of contrast. This is not a strong contrast and should be translated “that is”; “your messenger” – a possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo]. That possessive genitive is very important because this means that the Philippians church have their very own communicator, it belongs to them. Then a double accusative again, direct object from apostolos (ἀπόστολος) [pronounced ap-OSS-tol-os] which means apostle when it is applied to Paul or one of the eleven who were carry-overs from the Jewish Age. But that isn’t what the word means. It means highest-ranked one. Why does Paul use these military terms? These terms that denote authority and rank? Because the Philippians congregation is by and large retired military personnel and they understand these things, and to further add to every generation whether they know anything about military or not, the local church runs on authority.


“and he that ministered” – incorrect. This is part of that same double accusative direct object. The noun is leitourgos (λειτουργός) [pronounced li-toorg-OSS], used for a person of great wealth who performs a public duty at his own expense’ plus the ascensive of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. Put together it is, “that is you highest ranked one, even your super-grace minister.” And by minister is meant one who communicates doctrine.


“to my wants” – this is the crowning part of this verse because it indicates that Epaphroditus is going to make some kind of a contribution to Paul’s ministry totally apart from that money. There is a genitive singular of reference from chreia (χρεία) [pronounced KHRI-ah], “with reference to my needs.” Here is a spiritual need. The large monetary offering took care of all of his material needs and will for the rest of his life, while the personal presence of and fellowship with Epaphroditus took care of a very definite need in his life, a spiritual need—companionship, a fellow human being with whom he can talk. The need is rapport. Mature believers need encouragement and companionship when crossing no-man’s land.


Philippians 2:25 Now I consider it proper to send Epaphroditus face to face with you, who is my brother, also my co-worker and comrade in arms; that is, your highest-ranked one, even your super-grace minister sent with reference to my need.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #68


68 05/02/1976 Philippians 2:26–27 Doctrine of the trend of temporary gifts, i.e., healing, etc.


Reviewing v. 25 for the translation.


Philippians 2:26  since he was longing after you all and being deeply distressed because you heard that he was ill.  (BLB)


Verse 26 – a statement of love: “For he longed after you all.” This begins with the temporal conjunction epeidê (ἐπειδή) [pronounced ep-ih-DAY], used in the causal sense as well as the temporal, and it means “Since” or “Because.” The present active participle of epipothéō (ἐπιποθέω) [pronounced ep-ee-poth-EH-oh] is a term of love and it means to have an extreme desire for someone—“Because he was longing for.” It is longing in the sense of a very strong soul love. The present tense of duration denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The active voice: Epaphroditus produces the action toward the Philippians, his congregation. The participle is a part of the periphrastic imperfect, formed with the present participle and the imperfect of the verb eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal idea from the standpoint of reality.


Principle: a pastor always falls in love with a positive congregation. His love is not on the basis of personal rapport, it is based upon those who come under his ministry and listen to the teaching of the Word of God. The key to this love is positive volition toward doctrine.


The Philippian church was a great church, founded by Paul, then pastored by Timothy and then by Epaphroditus. Because they are positive toward doctrine, Epaphroditus loves his congregation.


The word eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] in the imperfect tense is a progressive imperfect of description, it represents a process which has been going on in the past and is still continuing according to the present participle.


The accusative plural direct object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], and with it the pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] refers to all of the Philippians who have advanced to super-grace—“you all.”


“and was full of heaviness” – the connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ] simply carries on the concept that his love was intensified at a certain point: “full of heaviness,” present active participle of adēmonéō (ἀδημονέω) [pronounced ad-ay-mon-EH-oh], which means to be depressed, to be in anxiety. But it also means to be distressed or concerned, as here—“and since he was distressed.” The word “since” comes from the fact that this is a causal participle, it denotes the ground for the main verb. The aoristic present tense for punctiliar action in present time indicates the fact that the concern is temporary at this moment. The active voice: Epaphroditus is producing the action of the verb because of his deep and abiding love for his congregation.


“because that ye had heard” – dioti (διότι) [pronounced dee-OAT-ee] indicates that this is the reason he is concerned. The interesting thing here is that he doesn’t want his congregation to be unhappy about anything; His congregation had been very unhappy because they had heard that he was dying. It is true that he was dying and now it is a source of embarrassment to him and concern that his dying would in any way inconvenience them. He had the true attitude about death from his own great spiritual growth. He knew that he was going to die and be absent from the body and face to face with the Lord. Therefore, during his critical illness he was not concerned about his dying because he was in dying grace. What was bothering him was that he was causing anyone any unhappiness. He was totally thoughtful of others as an expression of his love. He was a person who had no hang-ups of any kind. The aorist active indicative of akoúô (ἀκούω) [pronounced ah-KOO-oh] indicates that a report had come concerning his critical illness. The aorist tense is an epistolary aorist in which the writer places himself in the viewpoint of the readers (the Philippians) who have heard about the terrible illness of Epaphroditus. The active voice: the Philippians produced the action by hearing the rumour that Epaphroditus, their pastor, was dying in Rome. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of the rumour.


“that he had been sick” – the conjunction is hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], used here after verbs that denote any kind of mental or sense perception, or the transmission of such perception through verbal report, as in this case. The aorist active indicative of the verb astheneô (ἀσθενέω) [pronounced as-then-EH-oh] indicates a very serious illness. It means not only to be ill but to be losing strength in that illness. In other words, to be dying. This is an ingressive aorist which contemplates the action of the verb at its beginning. Epaphroditus in producing the action had become critically ill in Rome.


Paul was the greatest healer and He is thanking God for healing of Epaphroditus. After a.d. 96, there are no more temporary gifts. Paul had the gift of healing early on; and this was his credit card as an evangelist and teacher. He was the 12th Apostle; and he had to prove that he was the true Apostle replacing Judas. He has all of these gifts and they were credit cards.


Philippians 2:26 Because he was longing for you all, and since he was distressed because you had heard that he had become critically ill.


Philippians 2:27  And indeed he was sick, nearly unto death. But God had mercy on him, and not on him alone but also on me, that I should not have sorrow upon sorrow.  (BLB)


Verse 27 – “For indeed” is the explanatory use of the conjunction gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] plus the emphatic use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is used here in one of its most unusual ways—emphatic. So it should be translated, “For in fact [or, really, or truly].”


“he was sick” – aorist active indicative confirming the fact that he was critically ill of the same verb again, astheneô (ἀσθενέω) [pronounced as-then-EH-oh]. This time, however, it is the constative aorist which gathers up the critical illness of Epaphroditus into one entirety. The active voice: Epaphroditus was critically ill, he was dying. The indicative mood is the confirmation of the fact. What they heard was a rumour, the rumour was a fact.


“nigh unto death” – accusative singular direct object from the adjective paraplêsion (παραπλήσιον) [pronounced par-ap-LAY-see-on], used as an adverb, and it simply means he nearly died; plus the dative singular of reference from thanatos (θάνατος) [pronounced THAH-nah-toss]. An adjective used as an adverb, plus a noun in the dative case, is an idiom—“he was so ill that he nearly died” is the way we translate that idiom into English. There is no verb in the idiom but it takes a verb in the English to bring out the true meaning.


“but” introduces the adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] which sets up a contrast between Paul’s helplessness to heal Epaphroditus and God’s power that delivered him; “God” – ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], refers to God the Father who actually healed Epaphroditus. There is no question as to who performed the healing, it was God, not Paul. God still had a purpose for his life, and the fact that Paul did not heal Epaphroditus anticipates the approach to the post-canon period of the Church Age in which the temporary gifts—like healing, tongues, miracles, apostleship—were all discontinued.


“had mercy” – aorist active indicative from ἐleeô (ἐλεέω) [pronounced ehl-eh-EH-oh] which means mercy or grace in action. In this case mercy is the logistical grace in action. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views that action of the verb in its entirety but emphasizes the result. In this case there is the mercy of God, grace in action, in its entirety, but the emphasis is on the result which will be the divine healing of Epaphroditus. The active voice: God the Father produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality. God Himself stepped in to heal Epaphroditus.


“on him” – accusative singular direct object from the intense pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]—this same person. The intensive pronoun always emphasizes something great in a person. In this case he was a mature believer, a plugging pastor with true greatness of divine viewpoint in the eyes of God.


“and not on him only” – the strong negative ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook] and the accusative singular direct object from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], “him.” The transitional use of the conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is followed by monos (μόνος) [pronounced MON-oss], which means “only”—“and not only on him.”


“but on me also” – allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] sets up a strong adversative conjunction. Paul and Epaphroditus are together in Rome, their rapport is phenomenal. Epaphroditus has been a spiritual blessing to Paul, even as Paul has been to Epaphroditus. To take out Epaphroditus would leave Paul desolate at this point.


Principle

1.       Paul makes it very perspicuous and lucid that the miracle of healing is directly from God and not from Paul’s gift of healing. In fact, Paul’s gift of healing has been removed. Paul was given the gift of healing to establish the fact that he was an apostle.

2.       Both the gift of healing and miracles were used to establish Paul’s authority as an apostle. They have now been discontinued since Paul’s authority is well established by the epistles that have been accepted into the canon.

3.       The bravo phase of logistical grace not only blesses the recipient, advancing across no man’s land, but overcomes any other factor of adversity. Also overtones of blessing by association to all in the supergrace believer’s periphery. Epaphroditus took up the slack with Paul with a friendship.

4.       Note how all of the blessings of paragraph SG2 are carried over into bravo grace to become logistical support. +H is sharing the happiness of God. This is a characteristic which is enjoyed on the periphery of supergrace. Like occupation with Christ and the various capacities (for life, love, happiness, etc.). Also the temporal blessings of success, friends, wealth, prosperity, social and sexual prosperity, material prosperity, professional prosperity; all of the types of prosperity; leadership dynamics, blessing by association, historical impact, all of which are a part of paragraph SG2. Once you saddle up and cross over into no man’s land, advancing into supergrace B, then everything is SG2 becomes a part of bravo grace. + H is also brought into Bravo grace.

5.       The first categories of paragraph SG2 become major factors in bravo grace.

6.       Occupation with Christ, sharing the happiness of God, and other blessings in the perimeter become logistical support in no man’s land.

7.       Cat2 of SG2 the believers temporal blessings of wealth, promotion, success, prosperity, leadership dynamics. David is the perfect illustration of this. He was almost in ultra supergrace when he met Bathsheba and he kept all of paragraph sg2. He did not go into reversionism. He was under terrible discipline; but when he recovered, she was his right woman and she is in the line of Christ. David went into ultra supergrace from there. Moses was disciplined for various things, but he never lost his supergrace status. From time to time when Moses sinned, he received discipline. He retained all of the blessings of sg2 after rebound. Few people have what it takes to recover from reversionism. One of the great tests when crossing no man’s land is being ambushed by other believers.

8.       Cat3; blessing by association carried into no man’s land.

9.       Cat4 great historical impact and h eis the source of great impact.

10.     Both Paul and the Philippians were benfitted by the divine act of healing Epaphroditus. Paul is unable to healed him; but God can. The proximity of death or the danger of death will not result in the reality of death. The only exception would be if it is the will of God to keep you from departing. We will be in danger of death a few times or many times, but you will only die once. You may have a critical illness, but you are not dead. You may face many dangers, but you will only die once. You can enjoy life just as much. You can laugh at your enemy.


 Teddy Roosevelt III landed in virtually every amphibious attack and he laughed at it. FDR was so worried that he would not allow information about T. Roosevelt to be released. He was jealous and wanted to hold onto his power.


Douglas MacArthur had great genius, but he was not afraid of fire. He was the point man and a totally fearless person. He demonstrated every point of courage. MacArthur was a perect illustration and he enjoyed danger. This should be true of every believer in every situation.


God removes the believer from phase II when it is time. So God did not remove Epaphrotitus from life.


“lest” – hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] mê (μή) [pronounced may] is literally, “that not,” but it is an idiom meaning “lest”’ “I should have” – aorist active subjunctive of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh], ‘I should have and hold.’ This is a dramatic aorist, it states a present reality with the certitude of a past event. It is used to state what has just been realized. Paul, in crossing no-man’s land to ultra-super-grace, has been under maximum pressure. The death of Epaphroditus would have been a terrible, for Epaphroditus has been such a phenomenal blessing to him. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb. The subjunctive mood goes with the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] to indicate a purpose clause.


“sorrow” – accusative singular direct object from lupē (λύπη) [pronounced LOO-pay], referring to the potential death of Epaphroditus when he was critically ill; “upon sorrow” – preposition epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus lupē (λύπη) [pronounced LOO-pay]—“lets I should have sorrow stacked [mounted] upon sorrow.”


Philippians 2:27 For as a matter of fact he was so ill that he nearly died: but God had mercy on him; and not only on him, but also on me, lest I should have sorrow stacked upon sorrow.


The first sorrow would be the death of Epaphrotitis and the sorrow stacked upon that would be other pressures in life.


The Trend of Temporary Gifts

1.       The meaning of temporary gifts: A temporary spiritual gift was designed to provide order and authority in the early church. The canon of scripture for the New Testament for the Church had not been written. There had to be order and authority before the canon was completed and circulated. These temporary gifts included apostleship, tongues, the interpretation of tongues, miracles, healing, prophecy.

2.       Paul as an apostle possessed all the temporary gifts to establish his authority as an apostle and Bible teacher in the early Church.

3.       As a part of his authority Paul had the gift of healing. In Acts 19:11,12 any person who was ill and even touched Paul was healed.

4.       It is obvious at this time [A.D. 62] that Paul no longer possesses the gift of healing or miracles and can do nothing for Epaphroditus.

5.       It is also obvious that the gifts of healing and miracles had been permanently removed from Paul, for later on [A.D. 67] he could not heal Trophimus—2Timothy 4:20.

6.       The reason: Once the authority of the apostle was permanently established his temporary spiritual gifts, used as credit cards, were removed.

7.       Temporary spiritual gifts were designed to establish the authority of apostles, evangelists, prophets and pastors before the New testament canon was completed and circulated. But once the New Testament canon was completed and circulated [A.D. 96] all temporary gifts were withdrawn and have not functioned since the first century.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #69


69 05/02/1976 Philippians 2:28–30 Doctrine of ingredients of a good congregation


Philippians 2:28  Therefore I have sent him all the more eagerly, that having seen him again, you may rejoice, and I might be less anxious.  (BLB)


Verse 28 – the comparative adverb of spoudaiotérōs (σπουδαιοτέρως) [pronounced spoo-dah-yot-ER-oce], which means “with haste.” Generally that is the correct meaning, but here with the comparative it has special urgency. So it should be translated “with special urgency.” The special urgency is that the Philippians are about ready to break into ultra-super-grace and therefore their pastor must be returned to them for that purpose. The inferential enclitic particle oun (ον) [pronounced oon] is translated “therefore.” Here it is used in the historical narrative to resume a subject after some interruption. This is the resumption from verse 25 where Paul mentioned for the first time that he is sending back Epaphroditus. However the translation of this particle is a little different here. Since the meaning here is not truly inferential but the resumption of a subject it should be translated “so as has been said.”


The aorist active indicative of pempô (πέμπω) [pronounced PEHM-poh], the verb to send, is next. The aorist tense is a dramatic aorist used for a result which is on the point of being accomplished. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb by returning Epaphroditus to his own right congregation. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality. The object of the verb is the accusative singular direct object from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. The intensive pronoun emphasizes the identity of Epaphroditus. Literally, “So as has been said, I have sent him with special urgency.”


“that” is the conjunction hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na], it introduces a final clause—“in order that.”


“when you see him again” – the aorist active participle of horaô (ὁράω) [pronounced hoh-RAW-oh]. It means to stare, to take a panoramic look, or to keep looking. The ordinary verb for seeing is blepô (βλέπω) [pronounced BLEHP-oh], it means just a glance. When Epaphroditus gets back they are going to stare a bit, because now they really appreciate him. This is an epistolary aorist in which the writer, Paul, places himself in the viewpoint of his readers, the Philippian congregation, to state an event which is future to him, and he knows that this is what they will do. The active voice: the Philippians congregation will produce the action. They love and appreciate him so much now that they will just keep staring, they will be so happy to have him back. This is a temporal participle and it should be translated “when you see him again.” The accusative singular direct object of the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] again emphasizes Epaphroditus. The adverb palin (πάλιν) [pronounced PAL-in] expresses his return—“again.”


“ye may rejoice” – aorist passive subjunctive of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row], the expression of +H. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views the action of the verb in its entirety but emphasizes the result—intensified happiness. The passive voice: the Philippians believers receive the action of the verb, the intensification of their happiness. The subjunctive mood is the potential subjunctive, it implies a future reference and is qualified by the element of contingency—here, simply one of purpose expressed. The subjunctive goes with hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] which introduces this clause. Intensified happiness is the result of reaching the final objective.


“and that I” – ‘and I’ is a combination of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] and the pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—kagô/kamoi/kame (κἀγώ/κἀμοί/κἀμέ) [pronounced kag-OH/ kam-OY/kam-EH]. It emphasizes that there is no self-consciousness and no inner subjectivity among these great communicators of the early century. The first person singular pronoun is the Biblical term for the self-consciousness of the soul. They were not only aware of their existence but they properly related their existence to God through grace. Therefore they have no qualms about using the words, “I, me, my.” Plus the predicate nominative masculine singular from the comparative of the adjective a)lupoj, which means “less anxious” here. The verb here is the present active subjunctive of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME], the verb to be. The present tense of the verb is a futuristic present, it denotes an event which has not yet occurred but which is regarded as so certain in thought that it is contemplated as already occurring. Already the apostle is relieved of his anxiety, just knowing that Epaphroditus will return to the Philippian church. The active voice: Paul will produce the action of the verb in the near future when Epaphroditus returns to the congregation at Philippi. The subjunctive mood is potential, it implies a future reference and is qualified by the element of contingency—“that I may be less anxious.” The comparative use of the adjective here implies that Paul, now approaching ultra-super-grace, will never be free from pressure. But all pressure intensifies the blessing of ultra-super-grace, so don’t feel sorry for him.


Philippians 2:28 So as has been said, I have sent him with special urgency, in order that, when you see him again you might have intensified happiness and I may be less concerned.


Philippians 2:29  Therefore, receive him in the Lord with all joy, and hold such in honor,  (BLB)


Verse 29 – “Receive him therefore in the Lord.” The first word is a present active imperative from a compound verb prosdechomai (δέχομαι) [pronounced DEKH-om-ahee] [prós (πρός) [pronounced pross] = face to face; dechomai (δέχομαι) [pronounced DEKH-om-ahee] = to throw your arms around, face to face]. It means to welcome with open arms. It also means to receive with submission and expectation. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs or may reasonably be expected to occur when a congregation assembles under the teaching ministry of its right pastor. The active voice: the Philippians congregation will produce the action of the verb by recognition of Epaphroditus’s authority. The imperative mood is the imperative of permission in which the command given by the apostle complies with the desires of the congregation; therefore not a direct command but a permissive command. They are willing and anxious for Epaphroditus’s return (Bob is calling him the E-factor].


The conjunction oun (ον) [pronounced oon] here is strictly inferential to introduce the result of the inference, and it is translated “therefore.” The prepositional phrase is en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss]—“in the Lord.” The definite article does not occur in the Greek, this is anartharous, calling special attention to the high quality of the Lord as the Prince Ruler of the Church. “Therefore receive him with submission and expectation in the Lord.”


“with all gladness” – metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive singular of the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] is correctly translated “with all.” But the noun chara (χαρά) [pronounced khahr-AH] is generally translated “joy,” but it is +H or happiness—“with all happiness,” or “associated with all happiness.”


“and hold” – present active imperative of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh], and with the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] should be translated, “also be holding.” This is a static present tense representing a condition as taken for granted. They are mature believers, they will hold him in the highest honour, they will concentrate on his ministry because he is going to bring them all the way through to ultra-super-grace. The implication is that by the time Epaphroditus reaches Philippi he will have arrived at ultra-super-grace and he will lead them in. The active voice: the congregation will produce the action of the verb. The imperative mood is a direct command.


“such” is the accusative plural direct object from the correlative adjective toioutoj, a qualitative concept, ‘such a high quality type’ is what it means. It has an attributive connotation.


“in reputation” – incorrect. This is the double accusative plural from the adjective entimos (ἔντιμος) [pronounced EN-tee-moss], which means “in honour.” But it is stronger than that. Because it is a double accusative and because it is a verbal adjective it is translated “in highest honour.”


The Ingredients of a Good Congregation

1.       A good congregation identifies its right pastor, and then gets under his authority—because it is not going to like everything he says! Being under his authority means taking some things that are not pleasant. You have to know who your right pastor is and stay with him.

2.       Submission to his authority in teaching and church policy.

3.       A good congregation has consistent positive volition toward doctrine.

4.       A good congregation has stability, it avoids distractions to public assembly in the daily function of GAP.

5.       A good congregation has objectivity, poise, good academic discipline under the ministry of God the Holy Spirit.

6.       A good congregation has thoughtfulness of others, recognition of the privacy of the priesthood of others. Therefore avoidance of mental attitude sins, verbal sins, which intrude upon the privacy of someone else. It fulfils the principle of live and let live.

7.       A good congregation follows the pastor in his spiritual advance, cracking the maturity barrier when he cracks the maturity barrier.

8.       Through spiritual growth and progress a good congregation comes to be blessed of God in time. And they are relaxed about their blessings, they are occupied with Christ, they share the happiness of God, they have capacity for life.

9.       A good congregation means a highly decorated pastor in eternity. These decorations glorify Jesus Christ forever.


Philippians 2:29 Therefore receive him with submission to his authority and expectation in the Lord with all happiness, also beholding such pastors in the highest honor,...


Philippians 2:30  because for the sake of the work of Christ he came near unto death, having disregarded his life so that he might fill up your deficit of service toward me.  (BLB)


Verse 30 – “Because” is the causal conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee]; “for the work of Christ” – diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative from ergon (ἔργον) [pronounced EHR-gon]. diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative also means “on account of.” Ergon (ἔργον) [pronounced EHR-gon] means “business.” Then a descriptive genitive singular of the proper noun Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS]—“Because on account of the business of Christ.”


“he was nigh” – aorist active indicative of eggizô (ἐγγίζω) [pronounced eng-ID-zoh], which means near. But with the prepositional phrase it has to be translated, “he came close to.” The aorist tense is an ingressive aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb at its beginning. The active voice: Epaphroditus produced the action. He was critically ill. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality.


“unto” is an adverb of time—méchri (μέχρι) [pronounced MEHKH-ree],. However the adverb is used as an improper preposition, and the object of the preposition is thanatos (θάνατος) [pronounced THAH-nah-toss]—“death.” It should be translated here, “to dying.”


“not regarding” – the aorist middle participle of a compound verb (with the negative), parabouleúomai (παραβουλεύομαι) [pronounced par-ab-ool-YOO-om-ahee]. This is a gambling term [para (παρά) [pronounced paw-RAW] = beside; bouleúō (βουλεύω) [pronounced bool-YOO-oh] = to consider; to take counsel, to resolve; to advise. Bob says bállô (βὰλλω) [pronounced BAWL-low] = to throw], and it means to throw down beside the money, the dice. But it is a little stronger than that, it means to gamble. He gambled his life. The constative aorist gathers into one entirety the illness of Epaphroditus which brought him to the point of dying. The middle voice is an indirect middle in which Epaphroditus as the agent produced the action of the verb. The participle is temporal. It should be translated, “when he had gambled his life”—dative singular indirect object from psuchê (ψυχή) [pronounced psoo-KHAY], which means “soul.” A true gambler is a person who has cognizance of the game, he understands all the principles involved. He is a scientific person! And he doesn’t show what he is thinking. Epaphroditus was sick. He knew that going to Rome was a gamble and that the percentages could go either way. Yet, knowing the fact that he might never come back he went ahead and handled it. It doesn’t mean he risked his life as such, but he gambled his life. Only the Lord could change the trend for him.


Bob shares all that he knows about horse race betting.


Epaphroditus coming from Rome was going on a gamble. He was gambling his life and he knew that his life was the stake.


Then we have hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na], which introduces a final purpose clause, denoting the objective. With it is the aorist active subjunctive from the compound verb anaplēróō (ἀναπληρόω) [pronounced an-ap-lay-ROH-oh] [aná (ἀνά) [pronounced aw-NAW] = again and again; plêroô (πληρόω) [pronounced play-ROH-oh] = to fill up a deficiency]. So to fill up a deficiency again and again means to fulfil a contract, to make complete, to fill a gap, to take over the part in place of someone who is absent—“that he might make up for you.” He was with Paul and again and again he filled up the deficiency of the absence of these people. The dramatic aorist states a present reality with the certitude of a past event. The idiom is a device for emphasis here, it is used for a result that has just been accomplished. Epaphroditus made up for the absence of the Philippians. The active voice: Epaphroditus produced the action of the verb. The subjunctive mood used with hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] introduces the concept of objective or goal.


“your lack” – hustérēma (ὑστέρημα) [pronounced hoos-TEHR-ay-mah] does not means deficiency as such, but it means lack of fellowship, social life. They loved Paul very dearly also, and Paul loves their presence.


“of service” – a descriptive genitive from leitourgia (λειτουργία) [pronounced li-toorg-EE-ah]. This word has been previously used for the ministry of Paul to the Philippians—study and teach, feeding the flock. But here it is reversed, the flock has a ministry to Epaphroditus and it is the warmth and love which they give to him. This is the service. Since the congregation cannot all come and spend time with Paul they have sent their best representative. This is not a rebuke or a censor but is an expression of love for the Philippian believers. The lack here is not money, they have spent a large amount. But their personal presence is not there and this is what he is mentioning. Yet, Epaphroditus did the job beautifully, taking up the slack for their personal presence not being there.


“toward me” is prós (πρός) [pronounced pross] plus the accusative of egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], and it should be “face to face with me.”


Philippians 2:30 Because on account of the business of Christ he came close to dying, when he gambled his life, in order that he might make up for your lack of service to me.


Philippians 2 is read.


[1] See the Doctrine of Spirituality.

[2] See the Doctrine of Happiness.

[3] See the Doctrine of Occupation with Christ.

[4] See the Doctrines of Resurrection, Ascension and Session of Jesus Christ.

[5] See the Doctrine of the Royal Family

[6] See the Doctrine of Motivation

[7] See the Doctrine of Morality.

[8] See the Doctrine of the Rapture

[9] See the Doctrine of Running.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #70


70 02/03/1972 Philippians 2:25–30 Mental attitude of Epaphroditus; bona fide depression of soul. (4 years prior to the previous lesson)


Apparently, Bob taught Philippians twice, and very close in time to each set of lessons. This second time, to teach Philippians 1 (which was taught right after the previous lesson) and Philippians 2. Apparently, Bob taught Philippians 3 then and the makes up the rest of this book.


Philippians 2 is read. I decided to skip this lesson and pick up with the next lesson, which is below. I picked up this lesson later. I will leave out all of the Greek.


I’ve come back to give this lesson a listen and maybe to take some notes. We are studying the mental attitude of the 3rd pastor, Epaphrotites.


Philippians 2:25 Now I esteemed it necessary to send to you Epaphroditus, my brother and fellow worker and fellow soldier, and your messenger and minister to my need, 

Philippians 2:26 since he was longing after you all and being deeply distressed because you heard that he was ill. 

Philippians 2:27 And indeed he was sick, nearly unto death. But God had mercy on him, and not on him alone but also on me, that I should not have sorrow upon sorrow. 

Philippians 2:28 Therefore I have sent him all the more eagerly, that having seen him again, you may rejoice, and I might be less anxious. 

Philippians 2:29 Therefore, receive him in the Lord with all joy, and hold such in honor, 

Philippians 2:30 because for the sake of the work of Christ he came near unto death, having disregarded his life so that he might fill up your deficit of service toward me. (BLB)


Aorist Tenses;

Constantive Aorist - The circle is a constantive aorist. A series of points in time all gathered up into one ball of wax.

Ingressive aorist - If the action begins right here, this is an ingressive aorist.

Culminative aorist - when we look at it from the view of the end of the action.

Gnomic aorist - if the aorist is something which should be known.


I have pondered this thing and I conclude. Paul will need to begin to send Epaphroditus to them. Right pastor and right congregation means, there must be face to face teaching. We are told not to forsake assembling for teaching. He must be sent back because he is indispensable to the Philippians.


Epaphroditus

1.       His name means belongs to Aphrodite, who is the goddess of love. Bob wants to meet this guy. It fascinates Bob having such a name. There are many statues of her. She is worshiped in many places. More acts of fornication were committed in her name than anyone else in history. He might have been able to give the testimony, I was the worst person in town.

2.       Epaphroditus had a soul illness and a physical illness.

3.       Epaphroditus is a believer. He is a minister and it always helps to be saved. Bob has no idea why a person would be unsaved and become a minister. Bob’s father resented the ministers in his hometown because he could not do anything on Sunday.

4.       Epaphroditus has doctrine and an edification complex structure.

5.       He is called a fellow-soldier. Paul and Epaphroditus are both involved in the unseen angelic conflict. Paul previously was the pastor of Philippi, and now Epaphroditus is.

6.       He is called apostle. This is the highest military rank in the Athenian Navy. Chilliarch was the highest rank in the Athenian army. Here, he is their highest-ranking officer in that church. He is their right pastor.

7.       He is a grace man as is Paul.


Northern Ireland is a strong Protestant area and they know all about the oppression of the Catholic church. They have 1000 years of concentrated horrible treatment of other people. When they had the upper hand, they committed the worst atrocities against Protestants and Jews. The special priest to Isabella, Torquemada, and he exterminated the Jews in Spain. He destroyed the middle class of Spain. They have never recovered since then. The inquisition originally designed to get rid of Jews, but later it got rid of Christians. The worst persecutions in history took place in France under the Catholics. No one ever thinks that the Catholics are out of line, because news is slanted in their direction. Religious people are the worst people in history and they always have a facade of benevolence. Religion is a part of cosmos diabolicus. Religion is always the enemy of grace and Christianity.


About 60–70% of the clergy could be removed in one stroke, because they are not believers in Jesus Christ.


General Sun Tzu and the Art of War.


We are involved in an unseen, spiritual conflict.


Philippians 2:25 But, after weighting the facts, I concluded it absolutely necessary to send face to face to you Epaphroditus, my brother and fellow-worker (comrade in arms), but your apostle and grace minster to my need.


A grace man came to help out another grace man during a time of disaster. Epaphroditus came when Paul needed him the most. Paul was depressed by the situation in Rome. Paul was down and Epaphroditus snapped him out of it; and Epaphroditus then became depressed himself.


Epaphroditus was a great help to Paul, but something has taken place along the way. This is an imperfect paraphrastic. This is a strong statement. Paul’s love for the Philippians is extremely strong.


Philippians 2:26 Inasmuch as he had a deep and abiding affection for all of you and was constantly depressed because you have heard he has become sick.


Epaphroditus is the right pastor of Philippi. He was full of heaviness. This means to be depressed. Absence from those you love causes a depression of soul. This brings up the principle of bona fide depression.


The Principle of a a Bonafide Depression

1.       There exists a legitimate depression. Epaphroditus was a grace man with doctrine in the right lobe.

2.       He was depressed because of absence from his congregation.

3.       There is a bonafide depression that comes from capacity for love through doctrine.

4.       Believers who neglect doctrine reach a sinful depression rather than a bonafide one. Epaphroditus has a right pastor/right congregation relationship, so this is a bonafide depression.

5.       This does not apply to category #1 love. If a believer neglects Bible doctrine, he is going to be depressed.

6.       In the relationship rm/rw, there is a depression that comes from separation from those whom you love. Epaphroditus became physically ill as a result.


His emotional illness turned into a physical illness. An ingressive aorist. He fell sick; he became sick.


His illness becomes more severe in v. 27. Now in the culminative aorist, where he has been sick, sick, sick, and he is about to die. The same form, but first an ingressive aorist followed by a culminative.


Death was about to come along side Epaphroditus. So, if Paul had the gift of healing, but he did not heal Epaphroditus right here. Trophimus was so sick, Paul had to leave him behind. There are two very great friends to Paul, and if he wanted them to be healed. The explanation is, the gift of healing was removed. The purpose was to establish apostolic authority. These gifts did not even last until the end of the precanon period.


God granted mercy; grace in action. Paul says, not on him only, but on me. Paul makes it very clear that this healing was directly from God. Miracles today only come through the direct sovereignty today. No one has the gift of healing.


You may be told that you have terminal cancer and then you begin to panic, and try every possible divine thing to get cured.


Philippians 2:28 Therefore, I sent him with special urgency that, having seen him back again, you (all) might have inner happiness and I may be more free from sorrow.


Paul will never be totally free from pressure. As an apostle, he will always have care of the churches and no apostle has ever retired. They never had a chance to draw their social security.


Epaphroditus began to teach this epistle upon his return. The people accepted Paul’s authority.


When we get to the 4th chapter, we will find out that there is a fight going on in the church.


Philippians 2:29 Receive with submission and expectation in the sphere of the Lord associated with all inner happiness and keep on having and holding this kind in highest honor most valued, precious.


The Doctrine of the Ingredients of a Good Congregation

1.       The ability to identify the one teaching as your right pastor. This does not mean that you like him personally. No one can be your right pastor unless he teaches exegetically.

2.       Therefore recognition of the pastor’s authority and submission to it.

3.       Therefore, positive volition toward doctrine resulting in assembling to hear doctrine.. Expectation.

4.       Capacity for love based upon Bible doctrine develops.

5.       A congregation which has its right pastor should have +H from taking in Bible doctrine and an edification complex. Freedom from reversionism.

6.       The ability of objectivity. That is to benefit from the pastor’s ministry, not getting thrown off by his sin nature (not getting tangled up in it or

7.       Function in a congregation and at the same time to protect the privacy and volition of the other believers. Live and let live.


Philippians 2:30 because, on account of the business of Christ, he was approaching the point of death, gambling with respect to having no concern in the sphere of his soul that he might replace with highest quality your lack of priestly ministry face to face with me.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #71


71 02/17/1972 Philippians 3:1–2; 2Corinthians 11:18–20 Doctrines of occupation with Christ, dogs, reverse process reversionism


It turns out that this is also a lesson from 1972, but we go back to 1975 and 1976 with Philippians 3 and 4 that follow. Therefore, I will skip this lesson as well and move on to the next. However, it turns out that the next lesson was mislabeled. The next lesson is actually lesson #71. I decided to go back and give this lesson a listen. #71 and #72 are very different in length, so they must be different lessons. I think that Tapes and Pubs has these lessons backwards.


Every bit of freedom that we are enjoying is because of the military. On battlefields our freedom is born and sustained.


Tech Sergeant Frank is mentioned as a medal of honor recipient.


Someone else in the Philippians in 1945. Private Perez.


George Jay Peters in 1946. He is east of the Rhine.


There is a relattionship between Philippians 3 and 2Timothy 3. The key of this relationship is the ultra supergrace objective. We previously discussed the ultra supergrace objective in 1Timothy 3. Unless Bob covered 1Timothy twice in three years, 1Timothy was a study which took place in 1975. 2Timothy 3 was covered 12/9/1975–1/18/1976. So, even though this lesson is dated 1972, it is likely the 1975 lesson which follows.


What happened in the 2Timothy series is, Bob taught most of Philippians 3 a second time, probably based upon the new doctrine of ultra supergrace. So, Bob first taught the Philippians series in 1972, but then, when he came to the 1975 2Timothy series, he thought it was necessary to teach Philippians 3 again. So what makes up Philippians 3 is actually taken from the 1975 Timothy series. The approximate overlap is 2Timothy #60–80 = Philippians #72–92. What I mean by overlap is, this is exactly the same study. In the middle of the 2Timothy study, Bob decided to go back and do Philippians 3 study. This is somewhat confused because the lessons from R. B. Thieme, Jr. Ministries have lessons #71 and #72 mixed up.


Four paragraphs in this chapter.


There Are Four Paragraphs in this Chapter:

1.       The priority perspective of super-grace, verses 1-8

2.       The parenthesis of grace orientation, verses 9-11.

3.       The final objective in life—ultra-super-grace, verses 12-19.

4.       What is beyond super-grace, the final objective—surpassing grace, verses 20, 21.


At this point, I am unsure about what to do about these notes. I take my notes from a set of existing notes which are pretty good. I add in a few things which are missing and fill out the Greek and Hebrew words, and clearly delineate the corrected translation.


These are the notes which follow in the next lesson. Since I already have them in the next lesson, I will not repeat them here.


The idiom changes the subject from Paul, Timothy and Epaphroditus; and now the topic of discussion is supergrace and going from supergrace to ultra supergrace. The objective that Paul speaks of in this chapter, Paul reaches that objective. Paul can bring anyone to supergrace with the prison epistles and to ultra supergrace in the pastoral epistles.


There is something beyond supergrace; and that is what Paul leads us into. We move to higher ground to ultra supergrace; and it takes the mantle of suffering to reach that place.


We must live our life in time in the light of eternity. What we do in that short time is the basis for us having eternal decorations.


In England, the officers are given titles of nobility. The officers in England are not given medals or decorations. These are for the enlisted men. The idea is, whatever you want to decorate the officer for, this is just what they should be doing. This was how it was done in Victorian England.


The higher you go in supergrace the better dying experience that you are going to have. And you will wear decorations and honors throughout all eternity. “If you named your child Timothy, you can lift your head and Merry Christmas to you.” Note the date for lesson #72 is 12/19/1975.


Timothy is where Paul was in 2Timothy 3 is where Paul was in Philippians 3. As mentioned before, these lessons actually came from the 2Timothy 3 study.


“One or two people begin to come to church once or twice and you cannot imagine how tickled we are to have you.”


Middle of v. 1 is chairô. Paul has this same +H with the mantle of suffering.


You do not have many right pastors. The ultra supergrace believer receives a mantle of pressure, which intensifies his happiness.


A review of the doctrine of happiness.


The Doctrine of Happiness (2)

1.       Definition:

          a.       Happiness is defined as a state of well-being. Generally synonymous with welfare and prosperity.

          b.       Happiness if the enjoyment of and taking pleasure in one’s status of life.

          c.        Synonyms like felicity, which denotes an intense happiness. This is the happiness of the ultra supergrace believer. Blessedness refers to happiness as related to God and His plan. It becomes a state of quality or state of being happy. The capability of happiness is in the soul. It is not exterior, pleasant circumstances. Happiness is the awareness of one’s status. Being in a favorable position, spiritually speaking.

          d.       Relationships of happiness. +H is the only happiness which counts. There is minus H, neutral H, which is related to the laws of divine establishment; and +H, which is for the believer in supergrace and ultra supergrace.

2.       Relationships of happiness.

          a.       Happiness is related to Psalm 128:1–4 How blessed everyone who is occupied with the Lord, who walks in His ways, when you should eat in the labor of your hands, you will be happy (if you are occupied with the Lord, that is) and it will be well with you. Your wife will be a fruitful vine. In the innermost parts of your home, your children will be like olive plants around the table. A fruitful vine is a lot of wonderful assets which make you all happy. Some are obvious; some are not. The children also provide happiness, even though happiness is not based upon having children. Behold, for thus will the man be happy who is occupied with the Lord. If you are not occupation with Christ, then you will be made unhappy by your wife and by your children.

          b.       Happiness is related to adversity in the stsatus of ultra supergrace. If you suffer for the sake of righteousness... 1Peter 4:14 If you are insulted for the Person of Christ, happinesses. There must be doctrine for happiness. If you have not taken in doctrine, you will not be happy.

          c.        The one despising his neighbor’s sins is miserable. But happinesses to the one who is gracious, to the afflicted.

          d.       Happiness is related to supergrace status. Proverbs 16:20 28:14 happinesses to the one who keeps on fearing (ultra supergrace happiness) the Lord; but the one who hardens his heart will fall into evil.

          e.       Romans 14:22 Related to a clear conscience. The doctrine which you have according to your own norms and standards.

          f.        Where there is no doctrine, the people are unrestrained; but happinesses to the ones who keep the laws of establishment. Some of you are happy tonite just because you are not in jail.

          g.       Psalm 137:8–9 Happiness is related to military victory. The payment here is total military victory. Happinesses to the ones who seize you, kill you and smash your children against the rocks. The happiness of military victory. The happiness of annihilating an enemy.

          h.       Happiness is related to national prosperity. Psalm 115: happinesses to the people who are situated; happinesses to the people whose God is the Lord. This entire passage describes victory in battle, prosperity in the economy and it goes on to say happinesses to the people who are so situated, who have victory in battle and economic prosperity. This is probably another psalm.

3.       Happiness is related to the essence of God. God is perfect, His character is perfect. Perfect character must possess perfect character. God has never been unhappy. There is no way for unhappiness to creep in. God has never sinned; He has never solicited anyone to sin. God has not committed evil in any sense of the word. God cannot change and lose His power. He can never be unrighteous. God is not unhappy and God is going to have a merry Christmas, whether you are or not. God is not unhappy just because you are. A lot of people are going to blame God. God is trying to share His perfect happiness with imperfect people. But this cannot come through a one day a year pilgrimage to church. God is just; He is always fair. Impossible for Him to be unjust.

          a.       Psalm 43:4 David’s dancing is related to the fact that God has perfect happiness and shares it through the grace principle of the altar. And there I will go to the altar of God and God causes me to dance for happiness. Many Christian parents took a very dim view of dancing. Some told Bob that he would have to give up dancing. He did not have this verse handy. You can never win an argument with a legalist.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #72


72 12/19/1975 Philippians 3:1a Doctrine of happiness (pts. 1–3)


Lessons #71 and 72 come from different studies in Philippians. The notes which follow, which were taken from Lesson #72 actually seem to be the notes for #71.


These do not appear to really fit the notes. The four paragraphs are not given in the notes (maybe they come from Lesson #71?? Lesson #71 indicates that the first doctrine covered is Occupation with Christ. This is also the first doctrine taught in lesson #72. Probably one of the lessons above is #72.


There Are Four Paragraphs in this Chapter:

1.       The priority perspective of super-grace, verses 1-8

2.       The parenthesis of grace orientation, verses 9-11.

3.       The next objective in life—ultra-super-grace, verses 12-19.

4.       What is beyond super-grace, the final objective—surpassing grace, verses 20, 21.


Righteousness Through Faith in Christ


Philippians 3:1  Finally, my brothers, rejoice in the Lord. To write the same things to you indeed is not troublesome to me, and is safe for you.  (BLB)


Verse 1 – the command to continue in super-grace. Super-grace is the base from which we move to the final objective in time—ultra-super-grace. “Finally” is an accusative of general reference from loipon (λοιπόν) [pronounced loy-POHN], plus the definite article. Loipon (λοιπόν) [pronounced loy-POHN] is an adjective and it means remaining. Here it is a part of the idiom, with the definite article, and the idiom changes the subject which was being developed in chapter two. The subject is changed to emphasize the importance of reaching that final objective. One super-grace is reached, don’t stop, keep going. There is something even greater.


Since the accusative of general reference is an adverbial accusative it limits by indicating a fact indirectly related to the action of the verb. This transitional use becomes essential as an adverb. Paul is about to conclude the epistle to the Philippians but he must add some vitally important information on the subject of ultra-super-grace. So when we notice that translation “finally” it means that he is shifting now to an objective which is before him, not yet reached.


“my brethren” – the vocative is addressed to believers, members of the royal family of God. It refers to the Philippians as royal family; it refers to us as royal family. The descriptive genitive from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]—both descriptive and possessive: “my brethren.” As a possessive genitive he is saying “All believers in my generation, I am your right pastor.”


“rejoice” – the only way to have happiness is to consistently take in Bible doctrine. It takes a lot of doctrine to have inner happiness. This is the present active imperative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]. It is a command to “follow me.” Paul has arrived at this happiness. The customary present tense of this verb denotes what habitually occurs or may be expected to occur when a believer stays with doctrine. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The imperative mood is a command to keep moving and never stop—“keep on having inner happiness.”[1]


“in the Lord” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss], indicating that this is a monopoly of those who are members of the royal family of God. It has to do with positional truth. This is the first command to perpetuate super-grace, and this is accomplished by the continuation of the function of GAP.


The doctrine below is not the one which I have from the notebooks.


Occupation with Christ (2)

1.       The basis of occupation with Christ is in intake of Bible doctrine through the function of gap. Jeremiah 9:24 Ephesians 3:18–19 4:20

2.       Friend of God or lover of God in James 2:22–23

3.       Occupation with Christ is based upon the glorification of Christ. Colossians 3:1–2 Christ had to be seated on the right hand of the Father before the chua could begin and before any believer-priest in the Church Age could be occupation with Christ.

4.       Occupation with Christ is the standard operating procedure for the Christian life. Hebrews 12:1–1

5.       Occupation with Christ is illustrated by the doctrine of rm/rw. Ephesians 5:25–32 1Corinthians 11:7

6.       The function of gap is the believer responds to Christ’s love in phase II. The pastor-teacher when teaching doctrine actually is presenting Christ’s love. James 1:21–22

7.       The sealing of the Holy Spirit guarantees and eternal love relationship between the believer and Jesus Christ. Ephesians 1:11–14

8.       Occupation with Christ includes total dependence on grace provision. Psalm 37:4–5

9.       Occupation with Christ is related to stability and inner happiness. Psalm 16:8–9 as goes category #1 love for the believer, so goes all the categories of love and the capacity for love.

10.     Occupation with Christ is the completed edification complex structure. As goes occupation with Christ so goes category #2 and category #3 love, as well as general capacities for love and life.


There is a change which takes place in the life of the believer. Whatever made him happy as an unbeliever cannot make him happy again. We are designed for capacity for life through occupation with Christ.


The real issue is not how is your love life or your social life, but how is your category #1 love? If category #1 love is taken care of, the other things.


Large crowd for Revelation being taught last night.


The right congregation is like the right woman, an empty vessel ready to be filled.


keep on having inner happiness in the Lord.


If an individual believer under category #1 love is going to be occupation with Christ, he must have someone to present him to Christ as a chaste virgin. This happens by the teaching of Bible doctrine from the right pastor. If you could do this on your own, there would be no need for a pastor-teacher. But you cannot do it on your own. It all depends upon your attitude toward Bible doctrine taught by your right pastor and your attitude toward Jesus Christ. If the believer is negative toward their right pastor, this places them into reverse process reversionism.


Some additional exegesis is given in this lesson. The Holy Spirit communicated to Paul to message. He inhaled it and his writing is the exhale of that doctrine. Paul is elated because as he writes to the Philippians, they had not been unfaithful to him (like toe Corinthians).


The same things is the repetition of the command to rejoice. This command will be repeated. In chapter 2, chapter 3 and chapter 4.


Paul is also going to warn the Philippians about the Judaizers.


Neuter singular of oknērós (ὀκνηρός) [pronounced ok-nay-ROSS]. It means irksome, tedious, boring. Repetitious teaching should be boring to the right pastor. It is like the rm making love to the rw. It is not boring or tedious.


Conjunctive particle to continue the concept. The adjective asphalês (ἀσφαλής) [pronounced as-fal-ACE], which means, secure from falling (into reversionism); secure from falling for the wrong teachers or the wrong pastor.


Philippians 3:1 For the rest, my brethren, keep on having (inner) happiness [+H] in the Lord. To go on writing the same doctrines to you, on the one hand, is not tedious, while on the other hand and for you it is a safeguard [basis of security from falling into reversionism].


[The existing notes for this probably came from the 1972 lessons]


in v. 2, we have a warning against these pseudo-lovers, these inconsequential persons who have come onto the scene. The Judaizers would follow Paul throughout his ministry to try to turn his congregations to legalism.


There are three warnings which follow. We move into v. 2. Again, these seems to be more in line with what lesson #71 was supposed to be. The notes which I begin with are not necessarily from the 1975–1976 study (although I sometimes write the notes, most of the notes already exist in written form done by someone else—I don’t know who). The section titles from Berachah’s listings. Most of the time, the existing notes and the lesson information from Berachah synch up. However, this does not appear to be the case for Philippians 3, so far.

 

Furthermore, this Lesson #72 (the mp3 file) does not appear to match up with the information which was given. I ran into a similar mixup at the end of the Romans study. I believe that what I am listening to, despite being numbered as #72, is actually #71, as it matches the description given for #71. I have not listened to lesson #71 yet, so maybe these two got switched?


Philippians 3:2  Beware of the dogs! Beware of the evil workers! Beware of the false circumcision!  (BLB)


Verse 2 – the opposition set up to keep people from going from super-grace to ultra-super-grace. But you do not have to have suffering to get to ultra-super-grace, you have to have doctrine to get there. When you reach ultra-super-grace by means of the intake of doctrine, then God gives you the mantle of suffering, but it is not all kinds of suffering, it is opposition from Satan day by day which intensifies the blessing that you have. You don’t suffer to get there.


“Beware” – present active imperative of the verb blepô (βλέπω) [pronounced BLEHP-oh], which means to look, to be alert, to be wary, or to beware. The present tense is an iterative present, it describes what recurs at successive intervals. It is also known as the present tense of repeated action. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The imperative is the imperative of command.


“of dogs” – accusative plural direct object from kuôn (κύων) [pronounced KOO-ohn]. In the ancient world, dogs were regarded with contempt. They were scavengers, they carried diseases, they were very unclean. Such animals were semi-wild, eating rubbish and dead bodies.


The definite article is used as a demonstrative pronoun, calling special attention to a certain kind of dog. The dog that is in view here is the Judaizer, so we translate this, “Beware of those dogs”—false teachers, apostles of apostasy, evangelists of evil. The Judaizers pass along their disease to those they infect with their false doctrine.


The doctrine below is quite similar to the one in NB1. This is repeated in Lesson #75 as well (these are done in different years).


The Doctrine of Dogs

1.       Biblical references to dogs are derogatory. Therefore the dog is always represented in the scripture as cowardly, evil, or insignificant. The dog is the biblical figure of insignificance. 1Samuel 17:43 24:14 2Samuel 9:8 2Kings 8:13.

2.       One of the most disgraceful and dishonourable deaths in the ancient world was to be devoured by dogs. Dogs survived by eating dead bodies. 1Kings 14:11 16:4 21:19, 23 2Kings 9:10.

3.       Dogs are used for those negative toward doctrine. Dogs are used in analogies to reversionism The dog who vomits and then eats a portion of it. It is an analogy for the dog returning to his vomit, the reversionistic believer reversing his divine establishment opinions and thinking - Matthew 7:6 Philippians 3:2.

4.       Unbelievers called dogs. Dogs are used to describe certain types of evil unbelievers - Revelation 22:15.

5.       Dogs used to described those in reversionism. 2Peter 2:22

6.       Dogs used to describe Judaizers. Philippians 3:2

7.       Those who live by violence [assassins, not professional soldiers] are described as dogs - Psalm 59:6,14, they are hungry for killing.

8.       Dogs used to describe unbelievers at the crucifixion. Psalm 22:16, 20

9.       A seducer of women was called a dog's head - 2Samuel 3:8.

10.     Dogs were used in the administration of the fifth cycle of discipline - Jeremiah 15:3.

11.     In making a grace appeal to the Lord dogs were used in the analogy and the Lord responded to this grace appeal - Matthew 15:25-27 Mark 7:25-28


Why Are These Judaizers Called Dogs?

1.       Dogs in the ancient world were called scavengers. Just like the Judaizers feeding on their victims. Their victims are like dead bodies or garbage. Emotional revolt.

2.       The dog cannot be better than his own nature. Judaizers will never be any better than their own nature.

3.       Judaizers seduced many believers away from their right pastor.

4.       With their phony facade of legalism, the Judaizers were regarded as celebrities in the field of legalism. Paul chose the worst insult possible to describe these Jewish celebrities. This is the greatest insult in Jewish culture.


2Corinthians 11:18 Since many [reference to the same Judaizers who seek to destroy Paul’s ministry] keep on boasting according to the flesh. I also will boast.


Paul will acts like the psychopathic reversionist Judaizers.


2Corinthians 11:19 For you are in pseudo-preoccupation with fools [the inconsequential persons], being wise yourselves! 


The reversionists are confused by the glamor. They do not see the person.


Psychopath

1.       This is a disease of the emotional life. Someone who is occupied with celebrities rather than those who should receive love. This is a sign of emotional revolt. This can be rm/rw and it might be the rejection of the man’s authority. The Corinthians would no longer accept Paul’s authority. Such people always turn against their authorities.

2.       The right lobe is supposed to control their lives. Their intellect is to control their lives. The right lobe is to control the soul. When the Corinthians were controlled by their intellect, they responded to Paul.

3.       Their emotional life responded to their intellectual life.

4.       In the psychopathic person, the subordination of the emotions to the intellect.

5.       Even in neurosis the same thing happens; the emotions controlling the intellect. The Corinthians in emotional revolt gives them antagonism against bonafide love.


The Corinthians and others give their interest to the Judaizers and reject the authority of Paul, under pseudo love.


2Corinthians 11:20 For you have pseudo-love if anyone brings you into bondage, or if anyone devours you [or, plunders you or takes from you], or if anyone takes from you [operation strap-on], or if anyone exalts himself [the concept of human celebrity], or if anyone strikes you in the face [uses violence to keep you in line]. 


The Corinthians give their love to inconsequential persons, and the first thing which is taken from you is your freedom. They are reduced to absolute slavery; absolute servitude. Reversionism is the worst form of slavery. Anytime that you have false objects, your freedom is taken from you.


These are the wages of reverse process reversionism. The Judaizers have turned against the Corinthians. Violence, egocentricity, etc.


V. 21 is the process.


We have two sides of the coin. On one side are the Philippians, who resisted; and Corinthians on the other side, because they gave into reverse process reversionism.


Summary

1.       Occupation with Christ is the daily function of the edification complex structure.

2.       As goes occupation with Christ so goes the function of every other category of love. So goes every other category of love.

3.       As goes category #1 love, so goes response to authority and teaching from the right pastor.

4.       The real issue is not how is your category #2 love or how is your social life, the real issue is how goes occupation with Christ. We have a check from the communion table. Your attitude toward doctrine when it is taught.

5.       If you fulfill occupation with Christ under category #1 love, there is no problem in category #2 or category #3 love, or response to your right pastor-teacher.

6.       The right pastor makes love to his right congregation through the teaching of Bible doctrine. The right congregation is like the empty vessel of the woman.

7.       The congregation in turn responds through accept responsibility and teaching through the function of gap.

8.       In this way, the right pastor brings his right congregation and presents them to Jesus Christ.

9.       The hindrance to the fulfilment of this function is the false teaching, the Judaizers. Any member of his right congregation in reversionism.


Next, beware of evil workers. These are practicers of evil. Beware of concision


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #73


73 12/21/1975 Philippians 3:1a Doctrine of happiness (cont.)


Friday night we began a study of Philippians chapter 3. 12/21/1975 is a Sunday, so this is Lesson #73. Maybe Lessons 71 and 72 were mixed up?


Paul has recovered from his Jerusalem reversionism and in Caesarea, he expiences recovery from reversionism. He was a supergrace believer starting the last section of the book of Acts. Paul saw a need here in Philippians 3 to speak of the ultra supergrace life. This is the intensification of happiness; and it is the highest honor that God can give to anyone.


1Timothy appears to be a correction of Timothy in reversionism. Paul has recovered, he is in supergrace, and he challenges Timothy to go on to ultra supergrace.


2Timothy 4 is a summary of 1tim 3 and Philippians 3. We will see the changing of the guard, the passing on of the guidon. The Apostles carried the ball to begin with, but this was going to be passed on to the next generation. This will be the changing of the guard from the Apostles to the next generation of pastor-teachers. Pastor-teachers pass the guidon to the next generation. No one grows apart from his pastor-teacher. People become spiritual Atlases, the ultra supergrace believer, who carries the nation. As goes the supergrace believer, so goes the nation in the next generation.


Four great men of geniuses who were stabilizing rods for their nations. Always a certain number of geniuses in every generation, but too often, they are not connected to reality. The two unbelievers was Gaius Julius Cæsar and a greater genius than Alexander the Great. He was one of the greatest chasers and womanizers of history. He was a genius when it came to the female species. Cæsar was a mathematical genius, an administrative genius and ended up being a military genius. He is despised by the Marxists and the Fabian socialists. Napoleon Bonaparte was another genius. He was not French. He was bilingual. He was also a man of super-genius. He related his genius to the laws of divine establishment.


One of the objectives of Bible doctrine is to relate the believer to current history. To fail to correctly interpret history means you open yourself up to repeat the mistakes of history.


Three great communicators of the Word in Philippians 2, Paul, Timothy and Epaphroditus.


Philippians 3:1 Finally, my brothers, rejoice in the Lord. To write the same things to you is no trouble to me and is safe for you. (ESV)


Present active imperative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]. There is a –H, what Satan offers. Neutral H is the function of people acting within the laws of divine establishment. There is a happiness that comes with minding one’s own business. +H is God’s happiness. In the supergrace status and in ultra supergrace, the happiness of God is shared by the believer. As a result of getting to supergrace, you enjoy +H; and it is intensified by doctrine and suffering.


We have already had the first three points of happiness (which is the lesson that precedes this lesson. Maybe that is Lesson #70 or 71 (which is mis-numbered).


I have two doctrines of happiness from NB 1 and or 2; and neither one appears to be the doctrine found below.


The Doctrine of Happiness

1.       The definition of happiness: happiness is a state of well-being, which is not the definition of +H, but this gives us a general understanding. Happiness is generally synonymous with welfare, with prosperity, the enjoyment of, that status of one’s pleasure in life, one’s circumstances, one’s relationships. Other synonyms, like felicity which is an intense happiness. Blessed has a happiness connotation. There are three categories of happiness, –H, neutral H, and +H.

2.       The relationships of happiness.

          a.       Related to Psalm 128 or 138, the Christmas Psalm.

          b.       Related to the ultra supergrace life. 1Peter 3:13 4:14 Petr zig zagged a great deal in his life. 1Peter 3:14 suggest that Peter did not have a stable, sustained happiness. Peter could not go from supergrace to ultra supergrace because he could not fully understand Paul’s epistles. Paul was the great leader among the Apostles.

          c.        Related to gap in Proverbs 3:13.

          d.       Related to grace function. Proverbs 14:21

          e.       Related to supergrace status Psalm 146:5 Proverbs 16:20 28:14

          f.        Happiness is related to a clear conscience in Romans 14:22

          g.       Related to the laws of divine establishment in Proverbs 29:18

          h.       Related to total military victory. Psalm 137:8–9

          i.         Psalm 110:14 Happiness is related to national prosperity.

3.       Happiness is related to the essence of God. God is perfect, His character is perfect. Perfect character therefore possesses perfect happiness. God is eternal, His happiness is eternal. God is immutable, His happiness is unchangeable. God is +R, His +H is related to the fact that He is always right. God is justice; therefore, His +H is related to always being fair. God is love. His +H is related to His love. God is omnipotent. He has the eternal ability to be happy and to share it on the principle of grace. God is omniscient, His genius makes Him happy. God is sovereign and has decided to share His happiness with us. It is impossible for God to be unhappy.

4.       Happiness is related to the plan of God. God has found a way to give us His happiness without compromising His character [Ps.97:12; Hab.3:18]. Entrance into the plan of God is salvation by faith in Christ, the beginning of the grace function in the plan of God for members of the RF [Ps.9:14, 51:12]. It begins with a potential and is realized at supergrace. At the dedication of the second temple there was great happiness [Neh.12:43]. Since +H is accomplished through grace [Ps.31:7], it is accomplished through GAP whereby the believer transfers Bible doctrine from the written page into his soul. However this +H must have a starting point. This starting point is entrance into the plan of God by faith in Jesus Christ; but, being saved does not imply instant happiness. God's happiness is still a potential to the believer and depends on his spiritual growth through the daily function of GAP. The first taste of +H comes from the filling of the HS [Gal.5:22; Rom.14:17; 1Thes.1:6]; however, this experience of +H is limited from having no capacity- not enough Bible doctrine resident in the soul. Once a balance of residency [the completion of the ECS] is achieved, then God shares His +H with you and it becomes a reality [John 17:13]. Happiness is the status-quo of the supergrace believer [Neh.8:10; Phil.4:4]. Plus-H protects the believer from 3 disillusions: circumstances [Phil.4:11-12], the details of life [Heb.13:5-6], and people. Plus-H stimulates and enhances the capacity for love. There is a future happiness beyond +H in supergrace, phase 3 happiness. There is a millennial happiness [Isa.35:1-2, 64:4-5, 65:18-19, 66:10; and in the beatitudes]. There are 3 human happiness not related to +H: the temporary happiness of sin, happiness from observance of the laws of divine establishment for unbelievers [Ecclesiastes 9:9, 11:8-9], and the happiness of pleasure in the details of life, it is fleeting and the source of future unhappiness. You cannot build your happiness on someone else’s happiness, and you cannot build your happiness on the details of life to include environment, people you love, fame, violent revolution, the lust pattern and motivation of the OSN. But, you can build happiness on the balance of residency of Bible doctrine through the filling of the Holy Spirit, the daily function of GAP, reaching supergrace, glorifying God in the holding of your supergrace status until dying grace, and by observing the laws of divine establishment. The happy person provides blessing for others through overflow; therefore, this is called the ministry of refreshment [Phil.2:28-29; Rom.15:32; 1Cor.16:17-18; 2Cor.7:13].

5.       God found a way to share His happiness to us. John 17:13, 17 1 John

6.       Happiness is the status of the supergrace and the ultra supergrace believer. Nehemiah 8:10 Philippians 3 Psalm 30:5 For His anger lasts for a moment but it resuls in a lifetime of grace benefits. Weeping may last for the night, but the happiness [or supergrace] lasts through the morning. Psalm 30:11 You have converted my mourning [reversionism] into dancing; You have torn off my sackcloth and have clothed me in +H [absolute happiness]. Philippians 4:4 Keep on having happiness at all times. 1Peter 1:8 And even though you have not seen Christ, you love Him (category #1 love), and though you do not see Him now but believe in Him, you greatly rejoice with joy (+H) inexpressible and full of glory.

7.       Blessed/happiness is often in the plural to indicate many types of happinesses. Blessing by association is the only way some people will have a good Christmas. The happinesses refer to the categories of happiness.

8.       +H protects from disillusion.

          a.       Circumstances of life. Philippians 4:10, 12

          b.       Happiness is a protection in life stimulating all else. Capacity for love illustrates this concept.

          c.        4th floor of the edification complex structure is capacity for love. Luke 22:19 19:24, 25 song of Solomon 3:1 4:6 8:6 Capacity for friendship Philippians 1:3 2Timothy 1:5

9.       X

10.     There is a future happiness beyond supergrace. There is a greater use of +H happiness in ultra supergrace. Philippians 3:1 Jude 24 there is happiness in dying grace, in surpassing grace and in ultra supergrace. These are all beyond the objective of supergrace, which is maturity.

11.     Millennial happiness for Israel Isaiah 35:1–2 64:4–5 65:28–19 66:10 this is one of the important topics that Isaiah divine establishment; alt with, eschetalogical passages.

12.     The concept of human happiness. Two categories.

          a.       Neutral H, a legitimate happiness related to the laws of divine establishment.

          b.       –H is happiness related to temporary and superficial pleasure in life; it is related to a relationship with Satan it is stimulating and it is followed by great misery. It depends upon environment; it depends upon stimulation. Stimulating circumstances, having your own way, never being crossed. It is ruined by a little boredom, a little restlessness, a few problems, and away it goes. It vanishes like a vapor. –H never lasts. 2Samuel 19–20 It iwill not stand up under the Lake of Fire and under many other circumstances. Happiness with children who turn out right.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #74


74 12/21/1975 Philippians 3:1b Doctrine of happiness (cont.)


There Are Four Paragraphs in this Chapter:

1.       The priority perspective of super-grace, verses 1-8

2.       The parenthesis of grace orientation, verses 9-11.

3.       The next objective in life—ultra-super-grace, verses 12-19.

4.       What is beyond super-grace, the final objective—surpassing grace, verses 20, 21.


Philippians 3:1a Finally, my brethren, keep on having happiness in the Lord...


Additional points on the doctrine of happiness are placed in the previous lesson.


The propaganda that there is the perfect family sitting around the first on Christmas Eve or Christmas day and everyone is happy and everyone is there. This causes many a single person on Christmas to go out and tie one on.


Bob speaks of the 8 course dinners that they would have and there would be fights and brawls throughout. Some of the greatest debates of history occur at family gatherings.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #75


75 12/22/1975 Philippians 3:2 Doctrine of dogs; mutilation of grace


Two medal of Honor Recipients read.


Bob deals with the difference between supergrace and ultra supergrace. We get the mantle of suffering in ultra supergrace. You do not suffer to get there. Supergrace is not a high plateau with rarified air. You keep moving.


A military type told Bob that they had it all figured out, that there is a super bachelor and an ultra super bachelor. The supergrace type really enjoys life; but the ultra supergrace bachelor has the mantle of many Berachah babes.


No suffering until you get to ultra supergrace. You keep moving; you keep progressing to the next objective. There are degrees of maturity. You keep pressing and you keep on taking in doctrine.


The mantle of suffering. Happiness only gets better and suffering does not make any difference. And you enter into dying grace.


The opposition to supergrace and ultra supergrace.


We begin with the word beware, the present active imperative of blepô.


Beware of dogs, you too can memorize Scripture. In the ancient world, horses were sought after; but dogs were despised. Beware of those dogs (evangelists of evil, apostate Judaizers)


  Dogs (in Philippians 3:1)

1.       The phrase “dogs” does not refer to the literal quadruped, it refers to bi-ped Judaizer.

2.       The Bible must be interpreted in the time in which it was written.

3.       In the time of writing this passage the dog was an animal which only inspired contempt. The dogs of the ancient world often traveled in packs, were often hungry, and were quite vicious. They were also carriers of disease. Rabies, etc.

4.       The word “dog” was used in the ancient world, as it today, in a very derogatory sense. The Jews called the Gentiles dogs and the nomenclature of derision and a derogatory sense.

5.       Basically, the dog of the ancient world was a scavenger. By nature he was unclean, he was the carrier of disease, and he was the carrier of other creatures who carried diseases—like the flea.

6.       At the same time the dog of the first century was semi-wild, eating garbage, carrion, refuse.

7.       Just as dogs fed on garbage and dead bodies, so the Judaizers fed on the principles and doctrines of evil. Therefore the apostle Paul calls them scavengers of theology.

8.       Just as rabid dogs infected others, so the Judaizers infected Paul’s world-wide congregation. They followed him and they constantly tried to insert legalism where Paul had taught grace. They infected with reversionism and evil their victims.

9.       The dog cannot be better than his own nature, so the Judaizers cannot exceed the content of evil in their soul.

10.     While the Judaizers passed themselves off as religious celebrities Paul in the power of the Spirit, using spiritual language, they were in reality dogs, scavengers, traveling in packs, and providing opposition for the apostle Paul. And while they were a part of the great mantle of opposition, and he could understand them and meet their opposition, his congregation could not. Therefore the warning, “Beware of those dogs.” Hence the derogatory analogy to dogs indicates the personality, the essence of the Judaizers who constantly opposed the great apostle. They were a part of the honour that God bestowed upon him.[2]


The Doctrine of Dogs. This is found in their lesson #72, which is mislabeled. By the description, this is actually lesson #71.


The Lives of the Bengal Lancers would have a real cobra. This lady who handled cobras but she was a crazy lady.


Next is the second “beware”, the present active imperative again, same iterative present, and the active voice: alertness produced by super-grace or ultra-super-grace believers who have doctrine resident in the soul. The imperative mood is for a command. This time the object is “evil workers” – accusative plural from the adjective kakós (κακός) [pronounced kak-OSS], a reference to human good. Evil is Satan’s policy. The word for “workers” is e)rgathj. The accusative plural of the definite article is also used as a demonstrative pronoun, and we simply translate, “Beware of those evil workers.” This is describing the same people but in a different term. The evil work here is the work which was accomplished in persecuting Paul, in offering opposition to Paul’s ministry. They are those who do something to set up a system of opposition to the ministry of the teaching of the Word of God. The final one is “beware of the concision.” This is the same morphology for beware again; the accusative singular direct object of katatomê (κατατομή) [pronounced kat-at-om-AY] is mistranslated “concision.” Katatomê (κατατομή) [pronounced kat-at-om-AY] means “mutilation.” It is a reference to the ritual of circumcision as a means of getting to heaven, the same way some people use baptism today as a means of getting to heaven. The ritual was distorted into something it was never intended to be. The teaching of these Judaizers was, “You have to be circumcised to be saved.” This is all a warning about one category, the Judaizer. These are the apostles of evil, evangelists of reversionism; they have mutilated grace with the addition of ritual as a means of salvation; they took something meaningful, like circumcision, and distorted it into something meaningless, and therefore the word “mutilation” is used. Circumcision had a legitimate function but not as a means of salvation and not as a means of spirituality. They made the ritual of circumcision a prerequisite for salvation as well as for spirituality.


Philippians 3:2 Beware of those dogs, beware of those evil workers, beware of that mutilation.


Summary Points on Mutilation

1.       Starting with the garden, evil or Satan’s policy always seeks to take grace as it finds it and mutilate it.

2.       Mutilation, then, is taking legitimate Bible doctrine or Bible ritual and distorting it into something legalistic and reversionistic.

3.       Mutilation is the Satanic distortion of doctrine so that it appears to be teaching his policy of evil. It is a Biblical concept disguised and coated with evil as appears to teach evil. Many functions of evil today are related to the Word of God, but they are distorted from the Word of God.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #76


76 12/23/1975 Philippians 3:3 Doctrine of circumcision; tabooism


2Timothy 4:1 is the changing of the guard.


First two verses are read.


Philippians 3:3  For we are the circumcision, those worshiping in the Spirit of God, and glorying in Christ Jesus, and not trusting in the flesh—  (BLB)


Verse 3 – the royal family’s true circumcision based upon the concept of mutilation. Circumcision was regarded as mutilation when it was distorted to become a spiritual factor. “For we are the circumcision” – the explanatory use of the particle gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr] is the beginning of the passage. We are now to get an explanation of that last phrase, “beware of that mutilation,” in the previous verse. The nominative plural from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] is in the proleptic or emphatic position, translated “we and only we,” referring to the royal family of God, setting the royal family aside as something very special in God’s plan. The Church Age is special, it is an interruption of the Age of Israel Those who are saved in the Church Age are special, they are royal family of God forever. As royalty they have been given an option that never existed before in history—a completed canon of Scripture with exposure to that complete canon through the teaching of a pastor-communicator by which they can move in a shorter period of time than any other period of history, right to super-grace, and from super-grace to ultra-super-grace, and eventually from ultra-super-grace to dying grace. This is the program, the agenda which God has set up for every believer. This is why we are kept alive under the principle of living grace.


“we are” – present active indicative of the verb eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME], “keep on being.” The customary present indicates what may be expected when you reach super-grace: you keep on with doctrine. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The declarative indicative mood indicates the action of the verb from the viewpoint of historical and doctrinal reality; “the circumcision”—the predicate nominative from the noun peritomê (περιτομή) [pronounced per-it-om-AY] [peri = around; tomê (τομέ) [pronounced toe-may] = to cut). It describes the ritual of circumcision.[3] Circumcision has no spiritual significance but is a perfect analogy. It is analogous sometimes to the ritual of baptism, sometimes to some other ritual, like the Lord’s table. In addition to that, it also indicates here that the super-grace believer has no more of the useless part of the foreskin of evil and reversionism. That evil and reversionism is removed as the dead skin is removed.


Distortion is legalism called here mutilation. If you react to historical disaster, you have not grown spiritually.


Circumcision (2)

1.       This is all about Abraham’s supergrace status and the dedication of the male sex organ to the right woman and no one else. It is in direct opposition to the phallic cult in Leviticus 12:2–3.

2.       Circumcision was established as a sign of the Abrahamic covenant. Genesis 17:1-14. Circumcision is an operation on the male phallus in which some useless skin is removed. This principle is carried into the ritual which emphasised the sanctification of the Jewish nation as a part of God’s plan for the previous dispensation. Only the males had to be circumcised in Genesis 17 because only the males were responsible. Women are designed to be responders, they carry no authority except as parents. The ritual as it began in Genesis 17 was designed to set apart the Jewish nation of Israel as a part of God’s plan as God’s representative in the previous dispensation. Abraham was circumcised after his salvation and after receiving the covenant. It was on the reception of the Abrahamic covenant that we actually have the right of circumcision administered for the first time, Romans 4:11.

          a.       In the history of Israel there are some very dramatic moments in the field of literal circumcision. Literal circumcision represented to the Jews their responsibility before the Lord to maintain and to disseminate Bible doctrine and the principles of establishment. Moses had ignored this with regard to his own children and almost died the sin unto death for his failure to have his youngest son circumcised. Exodus 4:24-26.

          b.       Circumcision was a recognition of the role of Israel under God’s grace and therefore it had great significance. Under the command given the child was circumcised on the eighth day. he had nothing to say about it. Being circumcised on the eighth day had two concepts, the coagulation of blood and the principle of grace. The child neither earned nor deserved nor worked for it, nor did his volition enter into it in any way. Therefore circumcision was of great importance in orienting to the grace of God. No Jew could partake of the Passover without circumcision. Exodus 12:48.

          c.        The Jews were placed under the fifth cycle of discipline for lack of circumcision of the soul to accompany this ritual, Jeremiah 6:10; 9:25,26. So the ritual of circumcision had both physical and spiritual connotation. At its inception we see the spiritual connotation.

3.       Definition. Circumcision consists of the cutting away of the foreskin of the male phallus. The ritual indicated dedication of the male sex organ to the right woman, and no one else. It was in direct contrast with the phallic cult of heathenism which the Jews found in the land. Leviticus 12:2,3. This was the physical significance of the ritual of circumcision. It recognised that Israel would be blessed of God not only through spiritual principles but Israel would be blessed in the fact that a maximum number of Jewish males would find the one designed for them and live in great blessing. The [national, not personal] happiness of a nation and the stability of a nation depends upon a maximum number of males within that nation finding, under God’s grace, their right woman. And when a maximum number of right man, right woman marriages are made that nation is stabilized, happy, and blessed.

4.       The ritual of circumcision has no significance in the Church Age. By this time in our history a maximum number of people everywhere realise the value of circumcision and have followed the principle, but when males are circumcised today it has no spiritual significance in their life, 1Corinthians 7:18,19; Galatians 5:2,3.

5.       Circumcision early in the Church Age became a rallying point for legalism — Acts 15:1, 24; Galatians 6:12,13.

6.       Circumcision was used originally to designate the Jews by their race and by their nation, Galatians 2:8; Colossians 4:11; Ephesians 2:11; Titus 1:10. Under this phraseology the Jews are often called the circumcised.

7.       Circumcision is used to portray retroactive positional truth, Colossians 2:11. Remember there are two categories of positional truth. We are identified with Christ in His death. At the point of salvation we are entered into union with Christ as He died on the cross. Bearing our sins and taking our place He rejected human good. Human good is outside of the pale of the work of Christ on the cross. He rejected human good. Human good, therefore, is equivalent to the portion of the foreskin removed in circumcision. Human good is dead and circumcision is dead, useless skin. We are also identified with Christ as He is seated at the right hand of the Father. This is current positional truth. Circumcision relates to retroactive positional truth. Therefore in portraying retroactive positional truth the ritual circumcision removes that which is unnecessary, useless. The removal of the unnecessary useless portrays what is not necessary in the Christian life. Therefore the spiritual significance of circumcision comes into focus. Today we have a spiritual circumcision whereby grace eliminates legalism — what is useless. Grace eliminates the talent of man, the ability of man, the energy of man, the plans of man. All of these form the legalistic package.

8.       Circumcision is also used to portray scar tissue, emotional revolt, and reversionism, Jeremiah 6:10; 9:25,26; Ezekiel 44:7; Acts 7:51.

9.       Circumcision is used to portray the function of GAP. Deuteronomy 10:16; Jeremiah 4:4.

10.     Circumcision is used to portray the ECS with entrance into the supergrace life. Deuteronomy 30:6; Romans 2:28:29: Philippians 3:3.


“which worship God in the Spirit” – incorrect translation. It is “who worship in the Spirit of God.” The word “worship” is the present active participle from latreuô (λατρεύω) [pronounced lat-RYOO-oh]. It means to serve at the altar, to carry out religious duties, and finally it comes to mean “worship” in the Koine Greek of the New Testament. It is a function of the royal priesthood. The present tense is a descriptive or pictorial present which presents to the mind a picture of events in the process of occurrence. The events in the process of occurrence: to listen to the teaching of the Word of God is the highest point of worship. The active voice: the super-grace believer has produced this action of the verb ,many times, that’s how he has reached super-grace. And the supergrace believer continues to produce the action of the verb as he moves on to the next objective. The participle is circumstantial. The universal royal priesthood of the believer plus the fact that every believer in the Church Age is also royal family of God—spiritual aristocracy—implies a unique form of worship in this dispensation. The uniqueness is found in the locative singular of pneuma (πνεμα) [pronounced PNYOO-mah], and it should be translated “in the Spirit.” There is a descriptive genitive with that from theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], indicating that this is God the Holy Spirit; “who worship” is an articular participle, the definite article is used as a relative pronoun, it refers to super-grace believers in the royal family of God who worship in the Spirit of God. The filling of the Spirit is necessary for the function of GAP, the highest form of worship. The filling of the Spirit is also necessary in any other facet of worship. As a result of this form of worship we have the final phrase:


“and rejoice in Christ Jesus” – the continuative use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] here means this is an extension of worship. But the word “rejoice” here is not rejoice [+H], here it is the present active participle of a different verb, kaucháomai (καυχάομαι) [pronounced kow-KHAH-om-ahee], which means to boast, to glory, to pride one’s-self in something. This is super-grace esprit décor, and it comes from maximum doctrine in the soul. It is used by Paul for boasting in someone else in relationship to a high spiritual condition. Boasting about Christ connotes love, concentration, appreciation. It is an expression of category #1 love capacity in super-grace. The present tense is retroactive progressive present denoting what began in the past, when the person becomes a super-grace believer, and continues while a person is in super-grace on the way to ultra-super-grace and continues to dying grace. This is also called the present tense of duration. It might be translated, therefore, “and glorying [boasting, being confident in].” The middle voice is a deponent verb, middle in form but active in meaning. The super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The participle is circumstantial, it is the highest form of worship—boasting in the Lord Jesus Christ as a result of maximum doctrine in the soul.


“and have no confidence in the flesh” – this includes a transitional kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the negative ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook], plus the perfect active participle of peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh] which means to obey, it is related to strict discipline, to personal obedience, self-discipline. The perfect tense of peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh] does not mean obedience, it means, just as translated, “confidence.” This is an intensive perfect for a completed action, emphasizing the existing results of that action. In other words, a total confidence. When the believer is on the way from super-grace to ultra-super-grace he develops an unshakeable confidence which, by the time he reaches ultra-super-grace, gives the ability to cope with any disaster, any problem, any Satanic opposition. The active voice: the super-grace believer advancing produces the action. The participle is circumstantial. There is also the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of sarx (σάρξ) [pronounced sarx], and en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus sarx (σάρξ) [pronounced sarx] has two meanings here. It means, first of all, to have no confidence in human abilities or thinking or talent, or any other factor which seeks to intrude upon the intake of doctrine. It also comes to have a relationship to the infirmities of the flesh; in other words, adversity.


Philippians 3:3 For we are the true circumcision [for the Church Age], who worship God in the Spirit of God, and glory [boast] in Christ Jesus, also do not have confidence in the flesh.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #77


77 12/24/1975 Philippians 3:4 Intro; documentation of Paul's reversionism (short lesson)


First three verses read.

 

As a young man, Paul showed great promise. He went to the graduate school of Hilel and another prior to this.


Retrospective reflection of Paul in v. 4, which we are studying on Christmas Eve.


The Roman Empire split down the middle with Koine Greek being spoken in the east and Latin in the west. Paul has been all over the eastern side of the Mediterranean.


Paul should have gone west from Rome, but he went east, and this was his big mistake. Paul knew when in Ephesus that he should have gone to Spain. Paul had an emotional desire to go to Jerusalem.


We should understand why a Jew of the Jews, an astute pharisaical statesman like Paul, would like to go to Jerusalem. For him, Palestine was his second home. He was a Roman by citizenship but a Jew by race.


Romans 15:28, Paul wanted to go west, but Paul chose to to east into Jerusalem. An emotional lapse cost him a very rewarding missionary field.


Documentation of Paul’s Reversionism

1.       It was the will of God that Paul’s third missionary journey should go west into Spain. Instead Paul went east. Romans 15:24 tells us that Paul was to go to Spain. So when Paul was in Ephesus, writing to the Romans, that he should have gone to Spain. In Romans 15:25, however, he states what is not the Lord’s will. In Romans 15:28 he said he would go to Rome by way of Spain. The only problem with that was that the Lord did not include Jerusalem in Paul’s agenda for the third missionary journey. It was Paul’s idea, not the Lord’s. And while he eventually intended to do the Lord’s will this emotional lapse was to cost him in a very serious way. Romans 15:25, 26, 28 tell us where Paul should have gone.

2.       After Paul’s visit to Ephesus and the riot of the silversmiths’ union he was headed west. He was still in compliance with his orders in Acts 20, but in verse 1 the riots shook him up. In Macedonia is where Paul slipped into emotional reversionism. It was west of Ephesus and en route to Spain, but that is a s far west as Paul ever went. When he got to Corinth he was still headed in the right direction but he then turned, and from Corinth he sailed for Troy—east. From Troy Paul would not even go back to Ephesus. From there he proceeded on his way to Jerusalem—Acts 20:16. Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus in order that he might not have to spend time in the Roman province of Asia. He was hurrying to be in Jerusalem on the day of Pentecost.

3.       Paul was warned twice not to go to Jerusalem by the Holy Spirit—Acts 21:4-9; 21:10-13.

4.       Paul is now in reversionism, he disobeyed completely—Acts 21:14-17.

5.       When Paul arrived in Jerusalem—Acts 21—he was now in full emotional reversionism, and therefore he was now susceptible to whatever the inclination of the geographical area—called Judaism, which is a form of reversionistic legalism. The church in Jerusalem was so infected that it had lost its leadership in the Christian world. It was now as low as a church could be in its reversionism. The unbelievers were involved in a massive form of Judaism that would end up in the fifth cycle of discipline in 40 years. When Paul went in to meet with the pastors of Jerusalem he took some bad advice from the leaders of the Jerusalem church—Acts 21:20,24. No Bible teacher ever has to compromise in order to gain a hearing for the teaching of doctrine. They suggested he go into the temple and offer a vow. This was a compromise of doctrine. No one has to set up a system of rapport; the Word of God stands on its own. Paul got into the compromise of legalism—Acts 21:26.

6.       This was the beginning of Paul’s discipline. Acts 21:27-32, one week later Paul went back in order to complete the function of his vow in the temple. He was spotted by the Judaisers from Asia, the very people who stoned him at Lystra. When they saw him in the temple they were immediately suspicious and they immediately aroused the people.

7.       It became obvious that Paul was not safe, even in the Mark Anthony barracks, and at the first time he left the barracks he would be assassinated. He was removed to Caesarea where he stayed for two years—A.D. 59-60. This was the time of his reversion recovery. He appealed to Caesar and when he eventually arrived in Rome, because no one could make much out of the indictment, it was decided to merely put him under house arrest until he could come face to face with Nero.

8.       Paul spent two years there, and during that time he put down all of the super-grace doctrine that is put down in the prison epistles—Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, and Philemon.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #78


78 12/25/1975 Philippians 3 via 2Tim. 4:5–8a Final objective: ultra–supergrace (SG–2)


We are going to go through this passage quickly. This is the changing of the guard.


Where Paul was, in recovery and then in supergrace. Paul is going to move to ultra supergrace; and he believes that Timothy is also going to


The changing of the guard at the Windsor Palace is a beautiful thing. But the greatest changing of the guard is that found in 2Timothy, from Paul the Apostle the Timothy and pastor-teacher. Paul says, “You be self-disciplined.” This is the key to spiritual growth. Without self-discipline, no one grows up. In the future, Timothy will reach that point of dying grace.


Bob gives much of the Greek for v. 5, which I will not worry about until we get to 2Timothy. The word for work has several connotations. To do the work of an evangelist or to do the work of a missionary, is going out and traveling and setting up churches here and there. The indigenous missionary function.


2Timothy 4:5 As for you, be self-disciplined in all things; endure opposition from evil, execute the function of an evangelist, carry out to the maximum your ministry. 


Points

1.       No pastor can completely carry out his ministry apart from daily study in the Word of God.

2.       The daily function of gap is the means of his own spiritual growth and the means of feeding his own congregation.

3.       By constantly and consistently teaching his congregation by leading his own congregation to supergrace or, better, to ultra supergrace. The status of glorifying Jesus Christ in the tactical victory of the supergrace life.

4.       No congregation can exceed the spiritual growth of the pastor.

5.       Therefore, the pastor, like Timothy must press on to lead his congregation into supergrace.


To completely carry out his ministry means that Timothy will guide his congregation into supergrace.


2Timothy 4:6 For I am already being poured out as a drink offering, and the (epoch of) time of my departure has come. 


Very few people go this far in the spiritual life.


The wine would be poured out I in front of the altar, as if giving God a drink offering. This is an analogy to dying grace. This is a picture of the believer in dying grace where the believer’s life is poured out.


The time mentioned here is an epoch of time. This is Paul’s time on earth in dying grace. Paul is hoisting anchor and leaving life and going into death. Paul is being unyoked in life, as this is used of cattle being unyoked and made to feel comfortable. This word is also used to unravel a mystery, and death unravels all mysteries of life.


2Timothy 4:7 I have fought that honorable fight, I have finished the race, I have kept the faith. 


The fight here is to engage in a vigorous physical interaction. Paul has broken the greatest barrier of life.


Paul was a spiritual Atlas for his generation.


Dikaiosunê

1.       Fulfilling divine statutes or commands according to God’s characters.

2.       2nd stage word, meaning the primary word dikê and dikaios, these are primary words. These words mean righteousness. Dikiosunê represents a philological second stage.

3.       We know this in part from the suffix sunê. This indicates the development of the Greek sense of law.

4.       The noun was not found in Homer or anyone else from that era. The suffix is a refinement of abstract thought. The epic poetry did not have that sense.

5.       Dikaiosunê became a word for civil virtue; the fulfillment of one’s civic law and duty.

6.       Plato used this term for his utopia. Plato relates this to saphrosunê, the same suffix. From an inner ignorance to an outer cognizance. You do so by reason, by logic, by frame of reference.

7.       A fulfillment of a solemn duty toward God. A perfect way to describe breaking through that barrier of supergrace going through to ultra supergrace. The believer breaks the maturity barrier designed by God for us. Our objective is to reach ultra supergrace. This is open to every believer in Jesus Christ.

8.       From ultra supergrace you go to dying grace, which is as easy as pouring


2Timothy 4:8a  Henceforth there is the wreath or crown of that righteousness [which is total fulfillment of spiritual progress from supergrace to ultra supergrace] is reserved for me (Paul),... 


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #79


79 12/26/1975 Philippians 3 via 2Timothy 4:8 Doctrine of surpassing grace (SG–3)


The worst believers who ever lived will have a resurrection body without a sin nature.


There is no one who knows what eternity is like.


Paul was in heaven and he did not tell us.


There are two special blessing paragraphs in the plan of God. Reward in time (SG2); and the second one is reward and decorations in eternity (SG3). Some of the notes on the next two doctrines come from Lesson #94.


SG2 and the five categories of blessing:


Blessings of Supergrace

1.       Spiritual blessings.

          a.       Sharing the perfect happiness of God, occupation with Christ.

          b.       Capacity for life, love, happiness, blessing, and total appreciation for grace.

          c.        The ability to face undeserved suffering in life.

          d.       The ability to correctly interpret contemporary history, to evaluate current events in the light of the Word of God.

          e.       Freedom from slavery to circumstances in life and adaptability to changing circumstances. The mature believer is the greatest innovator in time of historical disaster.

          f.        Grace orientation, freedom orientation, authority orientation, common sense.

          g.       A total sense of security, whether in prosperity or disaster.

2.       Temporal blessings.

          a.       Wealth, either received or acquired.

          b.       Professional prosperity: great influence, leadership dynamics, success, promotion, recognition in one's sphere of life. When God promotes you, you are qualified for the job. The ability to assume responsibility and authority without emotional inspiration or pseudo motivation.

          c.        Social prosperity, great friends.

          d.       Sexual prosperity with one's right man or right woman.

          e.       Technical prosperity or mental prosperity: the ability to think, and concentrate increase.

          f.        Cultural prosperity: maximum enjoyment of drama, art, literature, music, history.

          g.       Establishment prosperity: enjoyment of freedom, privacy, protection of life and property from criminals and reprisal.

          h.       Economic prosperity.

          i.         Military prosperity.

          j.         Health.

3.       Blessings by association.

          a.       Those around a mature believer are blessed by their association or relationship with that person. They are blessed either directly by God or indirectly from the supergrace believer as a result of the overflow of his supergrace blessings. The supergrace believer shares his blessings with others. All loved ones are blessed if associated with a supergrace believer. Children can be blessed even after their supergrace parents die.

          b.       There are peripheral areas of blessing by association such as loved ones, in business life, in social life, and to those in a local church. Spiritual periphery. The janitor of a company can be key to the prosperity of that business

          c.        Social periphery. Supergrace believer in a petunia club and suddenly, they get a nationwide award or recognition.

          d.       Supergrace and ultra supergrace believers are on the right side of history.

          e.       There are also geographical blessings to the supergrace believer's city, state and nation.

4.       Historical blessings, 2Timothy 1:5. The mature believer carries his generation. He stabilizes his generation and becomes a stabilizer for future historical generations. The ebb and flow of history does not disturb the tranquility or impact of the mature believer. The supergrace believer is on the right side of history; the reversionist is on the wrong side of history. The reversionist is caught up in the disasters of history and swept along with them. But the supergrace believer rides on the crest of the wave of blessing. He rises above historical disaster.

5.       Dying blessings or dying grace. Every believer has a choice in time between being positive to Bible doctrine and receiving dying grace, or being negative to doctrine and dying the sin unto death. The curse of death with its pain and fear is removed. It is the greatest experience in life. It is the antithesis of the sin unto death. The perfect happiness of the supergrace believer in time is exceeded by his +H in dying grace. Therefore, the mature believer has the best of life, better in dying, and better than the best for all eternity. Ps 116:15, "Precious in the sight of the Lord is the death of His godly ones."

6.       Undeserved suffering.

          a.       Only in time does God have the opportunity to give us pressure, disaster, and undeserved suffering to prove to Satan and the fallen angels that Bible doctrine can handle any situation.

          b.       God gives us the ability to handle suffering and turn suffering into blessing, Rom 8:28.

          c.        No rebound or soul searching is involved. A mature believer knows when he is under divine discipline or undeserved suffering. The former is unbearable suffering, the latter is bearable.

          d.       The supergrace believer's ability to handle undeserved suffering glorifies God and becomes evidence against Satan in his appeal trial.

          e.       Undeserved suffering is also used by God to help you keep your eyes on God and your focus an eternity. Rev 2:10; 2 Cor 12:9-10.

          f.        Undeserved suffering teaches us the value of Bible doctrine, Ps 119:67-71.

          g.       Undeserved suffering is designed to manifest the ministry of God the Holy Spirit, 2 Cor 4:8-11.

          h.       Undeserved suffering is designed to put muscle on your faith and occupy the believer with eternal values, Rom 8:36, 5:3-5.


There is a paragraph SG2 and SG3, but Bob has not gotten to it. The doctrine below does not match either of the doctrines found in the doctrinal notebook. Surpassing grace also covered in Lesson #94. These are blessings in eternity and we cannot imagine the great blessings which we will have in eternity.


The Swedes live in such a cold country and they wrote a lot of non-doctrinal hymns.


Surpassing Grace

1.       Surpassing grace is the status of special reward in eternity for the believer who reaches supergrace or ultra supergrace.

2.       Surpassing grace is above and beyond ultimate sanctification.

3.       This is the ultimate in glorifying God.

4.       The Judgment Seat of Christ is the royal family efficiency rating. Believers who break the maturity barrier will receive phenomenal things which they will possess forever. Those who fail to reach spiritual maturity will be in a different category but they will still reach ultimate sanctification. 2Corinthians 5:4, 10

          a.       Alpha company (Jesus Christ) has already passed in review, and He has heard “Well done,” and he receives battlefield royalty, the highest efficiency rating that anyone can have.

          b.       When the Church Age is completed, there is Bravo company passing the reviewing stand. We all have our resurrection bodies and we receive our efficiency ratings at that time. Evil is not a synonym for sin. They are different. Bob says his breakthrough on evil is the most important one since the angelic conflict.

          c.        At the 2nd advent, there will be an efficiency rating for Old Testament believers. That each one might be evaluated in the body. The crowns we wear will glorify God.

5.       The reversionistic believer can lose his SG2 blessings but not ultimate sanctification. 2Timothy 2:11–13 Faithful is the Word, for you see, if we have died with Christ (retroactive positional truth) at the same time also we shall live with Him. If we endure suffering [as an ultra supergrace believer in time], we shall also rule with the Lord [stephanos is the crown, but there is a leadership function which is a part of that], we shall also rule with the Lord . If we as reversionists under the influence of evil, repudiate the Lord, the same One, the Lord, will also repudiate us or refuse us blessings and rewards. If we are unfaithful, He remains faithful, for you see, He cannot deny Himself.

6.       The Judgment Seat of Christ eliminates any reason for a believer to judge another believer. There is no basis for this. Why do you judge your fellow believer, or regard your fellow believer with contempt, for we will all stand before Judgment Seat of Christ.

7.       The daily function of gap is the key to breaking through the maturity barrier. The basis for blessing and reward. James 1:25 2:12, 13

8.       The analogy to the Judgment Seat of Christ is found in Hebrews 6.

9.       Crowns are the highest decorations in eternity. Three categories of crowns in the Roman army. They were all made of gold.


2Timothy 4:8 Henceforth there is the wreath or crown of that righteousness [which is total fulfillment of spiritual progress from supergrace to ultra supergrace] is reserved for me (Paul), which the Lord, the righteous judge, will award to me on that day, and not only to me but also to all who have loved his appearing. 


If Bob caught someone on the job reading their Bible when they are supposed to be working, he would fire them so fast that they would be in prayer meeting that night telling everyone how the devil is after them.


There are three crowns they are not different on one sense, but in another, they are.


Crowns

1.       Three wreaths. The crown of righteousness is given to the supergrace believer or to the ultra supergrace believer. He is given this for breaking the barrier. It means that he has SG2 in time. Righteousness. For the supergrace believer. Reach supergrace and hold 2Timothy 4:7–8

2.       The wreath or stephanos of life, going across no man’s land and reaching the next objective which is ultra supergrace. Second crown is for ultra supergrace believers only. We will see this in James. We have to wear that mantle of ultra supergrace for a period of time. Moses, Paul and Timothy all have this.

3.       Wreath of life in James 1:12

4.       Wreath of glory, given only to a communicator of Bible doctrine. This is leading any member of your congregation to supergrace or to ultra supergrace. The third crow is for officers only. Here, it is for the pastor-teacher only. The pastor does not grow by listening to someone else, he grows by self-study.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #80


80 12/28/1975 Philippians 3 via 2Tim. 4 Three wreath decorations – SG–3


Bob is very happy to have so many soldiers wearing their uniforms. The most attacked areas from time to time is the very source for providing our officer corps.


The supergrace blessing hold up his generation. As goes the supergrace, so goes the nation he lives in.


2Timothy 4:7–8 I have fought the honorable fight, I have completed the course [dying grace] I have retained or guarded or preserved the doctrine resident in my soul. In the future [phase III], a wreath (or crown) of dikaiosunê [total fulfillment of spiritual progress in the attainment of spiritual maturity] is reserved for me [Paul in ultra supergrace], which the Lord, the righteous judge, will aware me on that day [which is the Judgment Seat of Christ where every believer receives his efficiency rating]. And not to me only, but also to all those [supergrace and ultra supergrace believers] who have loved His appearance [Jesus Christ at the rapture].


The Crowns

A.       The crown of righteousness

          1.       All those who reach the place of supergrace or ultra supergrace.

          2.       The rapture begins an award parade. The crowns are not given for witnessing, hustling around the church, praying etc. Production is the result of spiritual status, it is never the means of spiritual status.

          3.       The crown or wreath of righteousness is the reward for breaking the maturity barrier.

          4.       Stephanos includes the crown of righteousness, the believer who goes from supergrace to dying grace. This is the most common.

          5.       This wreath belongs to all who reach supergrace. They establish their command post of maximum doctrine in the soul. Ultra supergrace and supergrace will have this wreath in common.

B.       The crown of life or the stephanos of life.

          1.       This is worn only by those who reach ultra supergrace. Constant pressure, persecution. This is received for taking in more doctrine. You are completely surrounded on all sides by Satanic opposition. Moses had this for forty years. Also true of Paul in the final eight years of his life. He faced the full brunt of Satanic attack from evil. Believers and unbelievers under Satan’s influence.

          2.       James 1:12 Happiness is a man [the ultra supergrace believer] who perseveres under testing, he will receive the wreath of life, which God has promised to them [ultra supergrace believers] constantly loving Him. You must have doctrine in the soul in order to love God.

          3.       For each decoration, there is a special SG3 paragraph. There will be a lot of privates in heaven; a lot of buck privates in heaven. That is ultimate sanctification. There will be many who are in between. But everyone ought to be a general.

          4.       Revelation 2:10 Do not fear those things you are about to suffer [the ultra supergrace believers in Myrna]. The devil is about to cast some of you into prison. Also you will have pressure and affliction from him for ten days. Become faithful unto death [dying grace] and I will give you the wreath of life [which is for ultra supergrace believers].

C.       The wreath of glory is open only to pastor-teachers. You must have a congregation and lead them to supergrace or to ultra supergrace. He leads other members of his congregation to his point of maturity. No pastor can take anyone in his congregation past his own level of spiritual growth. This is for pastor-teachers only.


Bob notices new people in the church who he has never seen before. Do you think I am going to stop and give you a couple of lullabies?


Philippians 4:1 Therefore my brothers, deeply desired ones, those who are positive toward the teaching, my happiness, my victory wreath, in this way be stabilized by the Lord, ones worthy of love.


1Thessalonians for who is our confidence or happiness or source of exhortation, it is not even you, you in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at His coming, you the one who stays with doctrine, for you and even you are our glory and happiness.


1Peter 5:4 And when the Chief Shepherd Jesus Christ appears [rapture of the church] you will receive the unfading wreath of glory, fellow pastors.


Two things occur when a pastor is faithful the pastor grows spiritually through personal study. He teaches what he has been studying, which results in spiritual growth in his congregation. Congregations cannot grow on epigrams, devotionals, counseling, programs, etc. the royal family grows day by day converting γνσις to ἑπίγνωσις.


A stephanos was unique to the Roman army, and this was the highest award.


::11–13 By means of doctrine resident in the soul, he (Abraham) lived as a temporary resident in the land as if in a foreign land [Abraham lived his entire lifetime in a tent, never living in any actual city] for he himself kept on waiting with anticipation for a city having foundations whose found and builder is God. According to the doctrine in their souls, all these died, but having seen the same from a distance, and having soluted and embraced them.


Illustration of an ultra supergrace believer in the Old Testament, Moses. One of his parents were in ultra supergrace. They recognized that he was an infant pertaining to a city.


Comparing the city to a woman dressing for a man she loves.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #81


81 12/28/1975 Philippians 3:4–7 Human celebrityship


Bob was watching the Cowboys in Minnesota. But Bob saw a 56 yard pass. Tom Landry smiled for the first time seeing that.


In 1 and 2Timothy, there is the changing of the gaurd from Apostles to pastor-teachers.


Human celebrity can be a hindrance in the Christian life. Will success spoil you?


Philippians 3:4  though I have confidence even in the flesh. If any other thinks to trust in the flesh, I more:  (BLB)


Verse 4 – Paul’s human celebrityship. “Though I might also have confidence in the flesh” starts with the conjunction kaiper (καίπερ) [pronounced KAH-ee-per]. The word per doesn’t occur except as a part of another word, and it emphasizes the meaning of the word to which it is affixed. Here it means “Although” or “Even though.” It indicates that Paul had a greater basis for confidence in the flesh than any of his critics. He is pointing out that none of the people have attained the ability that he attained in Judaism, and yet they are trying to say security is in human celebrityship, in human success. Paul had gone all of the way to the top in Judaism, his critics were struggling up the latter. His critics, his enemies, these who are being used of Satan are all wrapped up in the human celebrityship of Judaism. Therefore Paul has a great opportunity. He walked out on Judaism when he was higher than any of them, and in order to establish the point he must first of all discuss his human celebrityship.


“I might have” is the present active participle of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh], plus the proleptic use of the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. Together these make up a very strong phrase of confidence—human confidence. “Even though I myself might be having.” The present tense is a pictorial present, it represents to the mind the facts which have occurred in this case. Paul had reached the top in the field of Judaism. The active voice: the apostle Paul produced the action in the past. The participle is concessive in which Paul recognizes his own superiority over his critics who are struggling in the field of Judaism, whereas he attained in the field of Judaism.


“confidence” is the accusative singular direct object of pepoithêsis (πεποίθησις) [pronounced pehp-OY-thay-sis], and it is about as strong a word for confidence as you can get; “in the flesh” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the sarx (σάρξ) [pronounced sarx] in the locative case, and “flesh” here merely means ‘in the human sphere.’


“If” introduces the first class condition, the conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] plus the indicative. This is the protasis of a first class condition, if and it is true. A conditional clause is the statement of a supposition, the fulfilment of which is assumed to secure the realisation of the potential fact expressed in the companion clause. This means that every one of these clauses has a protasis and an apodasis.


“any” – an enclitic indefinite particle tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç], “anyone.” This means the whole wide world here; “other” is allos (ἄλλος) [pronounced AL-lohs], meaning other of the same category; “think” is not quite that in this passage, it is the present active indicative of dokéô (δοκέω) [pronounced dohk-EH-oh] which means to assume. This is what Paul’s critics assume. They are looking down their nose at Paul and saying, “We are high in Judaism, and Paul as a Christian is way down here and will never be a good Christian because he isn’t high enough in Judaism.” That is an assumption on their part and therefore dokéô (δοκέω) [pronounced dohk-EH-oh] is used in the concept of subjective opinion or assumption. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs among those who are Paul’s critics and struggling in Judaism. The active voice: the Judaisers are producing the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative for reality, and this goes with the first class condition.


“that he might trust” – perfect active infinitive of peithô (πείθω) [pronounced PIE-thoh]. This word has three different meanings. In the present tense it is used for obedience. In the aorist tense it is used for faith. But in the perfect tense it is used for confidence. This is the intensive perfect tense here in which we have a completed action emphasizing the existing results or status quo. The active voice: the Judaisers produce the action of the verb. The infinitive is one of result. However, the infinitive of result can be expressed in three categories—actual result, intended result, or conceived result. Here we have a conceived result, therefore it goes on to take the position they have assumed.


“I more” – this is Paul’s superiority and supremacy in the field of legalistic Judaism.


Philippians 3:4 Even though I myself might be having confidence in the flesh. If anyone [of the same category] assumes to have confidence in the flesh, I more.


Philippians 3:5  circumcision on the eighth day; of the nation of Israel, of the tribe of Benjamin; a Hebrew of Hebrews; according to the Law, a Pharisee;  (BLB)


Verse 5 – the false perception of the old standards of Judaism is given in this and the next verse. Paul has to get these Christians away from the false concept of human celebrityship, and get their eyes off of that and get their focus on the barrier that they must break through, and not be deterred by human celebrityship in the field of Judaism.


The verse starts with ritual confidence: circumcision, the dative of advantage from peritomê (περιτομή) [pronounced per-it-om-AY], the word for “circumcision.” Many of these people got into Judaism as Gentiles, and therefore they were circumcised in later life. To them circumcision was a big thing, it came to them late in life. But Paul was circumcised by being born a Jew and was therefore circumcised on the eighth day which was considered the first day on which an operation was safe on a baby, because the eighth day was the first day of babyhood when the blood would coagulate. The Judaisers took the ritual without the reality of salvation and therefore used it as a basis for being critical of Paul. Paul did not teach circumcision as necessary for salvation, for spirituality, and therefore they were very antagonistic.


“an Hebrew of the Hebrews” – Hebras (΄Εβραΐς) [pronounced heb-rah-IHS] ex (ἐξ) [pronounced ehks] Hebras (΄Εβραΐς) [pronounced heb-rah-IHS], “a Hebrews from the Hebrews.” This refers to Jewish nationalism and patriotism. It also refers to the conservative Jewish culture in contrast to the liberal Hellenistic culture. The Jews at this time in history were hopelessly divided. Some of them had become liberals, they had fallen for the Hellenistic culture brought in by Alexander the Great. Others stuck to the Torah, the Word of God as it existed for them, and they were conservative whereas the Hellenistic crowd were liberal. It is good to be conservative but it doesn’t get one into heaven, and this is what Paul means here.


Genius is often not great because they are not oriented to life. Einstein given as an example. He could not ask a woman out on a date if his life depended upon it.


Next we have his religious confidence. Before he was saved he was like the rich young ruler; “as touching the law” – the preposition kata plus the accusative singular of nomos (νόμος) [pronounced NOHM-oss], should be translated “with reference to the law.”


“a Pharisee” – Pharisaios (Φαρισαος) [pronounced far-is-AH-yos]. This was the party of the scribes in the Sanhedrin. The word actually means a separatist, a conservative. They believed in keeping Israel separate from the other nations because of the unique mission, and because of its purpose and function in life, and because of its great history. The Pharisees represent religious confidence in legalism. Saul of Tarsus was the worst sinner who ever lived because he was the most religious of the Pharisees.


Philippians 3:5 Circumcision on the eight day, from the race of Israel, from the tribe of Benjamin, a Hebrew from the Hebrews; with reference to the law, a Pharisee.


In every one of these Paul excelled his critics.


Philippians 3:6  according to zeal, persecuting the church; according to righteousness in the Law, having become faultless.  (BLB)


Verse 6 – the function of confidence. “Concerning zeal” – kata plus the accusative of zêlos (ζλος) [pronounced DZAY-loss] is “with reference to zeal.” Now he gets to the fact where Judaisers persecuted Christians and are persecuting Paul. They had become his life-time enemies and they were so vindictive that they hounded him all of the way to death.


“persecuting” – present active participle of diôkô (διώκω) [pronounced Dee-OH-koh]. It means to persecute, as here, it also means to press or to pursue. This is a historical present. The active voice: Saul of Tarsus produces the action. The participle is circumstantial. The linear aktionsart is very strong. Until the very moment of his salvation Paul had a tremendous desire, and that was to kill all Christians in existence. This was his obsession. Whereas the Judaisers opposed Paul and only persecuted grace type believers Paul persecuted all kinds of believers when he was a Judaiser.


“touching the righteousness” – dikaiosunê (δικαιοσύνη) [pronounced dih-kai-oh-SOON-ā or dik-ah-yos-OO-nay] here is used for self-righteousness or human righteousness: “with reference to self-righteousness.”


“which is in the law” – in the sphere of the law. We have to insert the aorist active participle of the verb gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my], found in the original but not translated, which means to occur or to become. The aorist tense here is a constative aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb in it entirety. It takes keeping the law as a way of life and resultant self-righteousness and arrogance, and gathers it up into one entirety. Paul was always smug and self-righteous. He kept the law and as he did his arrogance and smugness increased. He had a totally sanctimonious attitude at the point of his salvation.


“blameless” is the predicate adjective from amemptos (ἄ́μεμπτος) [pronounced AM-emp-tos], and it means to be blameless or having become blameless.


Philippians 3:6 With reference to zeal, persecuting the church; with reference to self-righteousness in the law, having become blameless.


Philippians 3:7  But whatever things were gain to me, these I have esteemed loss because of Christ.  (BLB)


Verse 7 – the new perspective, the new standard. “But what [quality of] things”—‘what things’ is the qualitative relative pronoun hostis (ὅστις) [pronounced HOHS-tiss]. These had once been quality things to Paul. It is a reference to the standards of human celebrityship, to the false standards and erroneous perspectives of the unbeliever in reversionism.


“were” is the imperfect active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] (in contrast to gínomai (γvίνομαι) [pronounced GHIN-oh-my]). The imperfect tense is a customary imperfect for what has regularly or ordinarily occurred in past time. The active voice: Paul as Saul of Tarsus produced the action of the verb in the field of legalistic self-righteousness, and he was the greatest smug, self-righteous, legalistic unbeliever in that field of celebrityship. The indicative mood is for the reality of the fact.


Bob speaks of the opera.


“gain” is incorrect. This is the nominative plural of kérdos (κέρδος) [pronounced KER-doss], referring to all of these gains, the seven fields of celebrityship which have been enumerated. These seven gains formed the basis for his celebrityship and his confidence in the flesh. These are the things that the Judaisers used in their claims for celebrityship.


“those” – demonstrative pronoun nominative plural from houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], a near demonstrative referring to something in the same sentence—those same gains.


“I counted” – perfect middle indicative of the verb hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee] which means to be a guide, to have knowledge as a guide, to be an expert in something, true knowledge. Here it is to conclude as an expert. Paul concludes as an expert. This is a dramatic perfect which is the rhetorical use of the intensive perfect, it places great emphasis on the results which have been completed and the action that follows. In the middle voice the subject acts with a view toward participating in the outcome of the action of the verb. This middle voice stresses the subject as the agent of the action—indirect middle. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of the fact that Paul, having broken through the maturity barrier, now recognizes that every area of human celebrityship, when it conflicts with doctrine, is out.


“loss” – the accusative singular of zêmia (ζημία) [pronounced dzay-MEE-ah]. This is in the singular in contrast to kérdos (κέρδος) [pronounced KER-doss] in the plural. All of his human celebrityship areas he put together and calls them “gains.” Now he lumps them once more, superimposing divine viewpoint on that plural, and makes them one loss. Many gains, areas of celebrityship, are now one loss.


“for Christ” is diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] which means “because of Christ.”


Philippians 3:7 What category of things were gains to me, these same things I myself have concluded loss because of the Christ.


Principle

1.       This is the perspective of the one who breaks the maturity barrier. This is the attitude of the believer who is occupied with Christ.

2.       This attitude is not acquired by renouncing or giving up any human recognition or human achievement. Do not give up anything until doctrine forces it out.

3.       It is the attitude of those who follow the colors to the high ground when all concept of gain is eliminated from the soul only to be replaced by the celebrityship of Jesus Christ. You do not quit being a wealthy businessman after believing in Jesus Christ. You simply change your set of values to where you do not admire your own abilities and talents and you admire Jesus Christ. This passage is not a matter of giving things up. This passages is all about the priorities of life and keeping them straight.

4.       If you are promoted to some place in life, do not reject or renounce that promotion.

5.       But continue to take in doctrine to take in grace so God might utilize you in that place.

6.       God has many blessing in life for us, and God is glorified in your promotion. We enjoy the benefits of our own victory.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #82


82 12/29/1975 Philippians 3:8 Doctrine of dung


A reading of Philippians .


If h have to chew you out, learn to take it.


Philippians 3:8  But indeed, therefore, I also count all things to be loss because of the excelling knowledge of Christ Jesus my Lord, because of whom I have lost all things, and esteem them rubbish, that I may gain Christ  (BLB)


Verse 8 – “Yea doubtless, and.” Five Greek particles: allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] men oun (ον) [pronounced oon] ge (γέ) [pronounced geh] kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. This is rare. This means, “Listen, get you mind off your distractions.” It is a very strong attention-getter in the Greek. The adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] means something different is coming up. It is often translated as an adversative “but.” Here it is translated “In fact.” It is both emphatic and confirmatory, therefore it is followed by an affirmative particle to show that this is not adversative but confirmatory—men. Therefore the two words are translated, “Most emphatically.” The third inferential is oun (ον) [pronounced oon], “therefore, and indicates a conclusion; a conclusion with emphasis. The fourth, ge (γέ) [pronounced geh], emphasizes the word with which it is used. It is an enclitic particle appended to the word it refers to, and therefore it is translated intensively here—“even.” The fifth particle is kaí (καί) [pronounced ], used as an adjunctive conjunction. When put together in English and given a literal translation as close as possible to the Greek, it goes like this: “Most emphatically therefore, even I also.” The idiom means that it is not what the words say, it is what I am saying to you. So forget the words, just start concentrating. This is designed to attract the attention of the hearers. From now on they need to concentrate.


“I count” – present middle indicative of the verb hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee] which means to guide. Paul is an expert in theology, and therefore when he uses this word in the power of the Spirit it is not arrogance, it is the total confidence that comes from authority, from study, from spiritual growth. He is speaking as a super-grace believer on his way to ultra-super-grace. Therefore, the present tense is an aoristic present for punctiliar action in present time. The present time is Paul having recovered from reversion, having recovered all of the doctrine he had lost in reversionism, and having learned more things, is now ready to take the congregation at Philippi another step forward. The punctiliar is his conclusion based on his recovery and new doctrine which has now come to him. The middle voice is a permissive middle in which the agent, super-grace believer Paul, is represented as voluntarily yielding himself to the results of the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of dogmatic reality. This is a dogmatic fact—“I conclude.” This is the conclusion of one who knows, the conclusion of an expert.


“all things” – accusative neuter plural from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], plus the definite article to designate the formers gains, “the all things.” By application it refers to any human celebrityship, and human achievement, talent, success, popularity.


“but” is not found in the original; is the present active infinitive of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]—“to be,” present linear aktionsart, “to always be.” This is a static present, there will never be a time when they are not in the status quo of maturity. He is now representing the viewpoint of one who has broken the maturity barrier.


“loss” – accusative singular direct object from the noun zêmia (ζημία) [pronounced dzay-MEE-ah].


“for the excellency of the knowledge is a prepositional phrase: the preposition diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative which means “because” or “for the sake of.” And with that in the accusative the present active participle of huperéchō (ὑπερέχω) [pronounced hoop-er-EHKH-oh]. The verb generally means to have power over, to be in authority over. It means here “surpassing.” With it is a descriptive genitive of gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis] for “knowledge.” Since he is not talking about the doctrine resident in his own [epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis]] soul he is talking about the principle—“for the sake of the surpassing greatness of the knowledge of.”


“Christ Jesus my Lord” – Christou Iêsoutou Kuriou mou, used to indicate Paul’s occupation with the person of Christ as a believer who has broken the maturity barrier.


“for whom” is diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the accusative of the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç] and should be translated “because of whom” or “for the sake of whom.”


“I have suffered the loss” – aorist passive indicative of zêmoô (ζημιόω) [pronounced dzay-mee-OH-oh], which means to forfeit or to suffer loss, as translated in the KJV. We translate it, “I have forfeited.” This is the culminative aorist tense, it views the event in its entirety but regards it from the viewpoint of existing results. Here is the process of spiritual growth denoting the attainment of that process. Paul receives the action of the verb by his reversion recovery, by breaking through the maturity barrier, by moving into super-grace, and seeing the next objective and going toward it. The indicative mood views the action of the verb from the viewpoint of reality.


“of all things” – the all things, the accusative plural of pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] again, with the definite article indicating that this refers to human celebrityship, human ability, human talent; anything with which a human being can take credit, or whereby any human standard places one in a concept of fame, reknown or celebrityship.


“and” – continuative use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]; “do count” – incorrect. This is the present middle indicative of hêgeomai (ἡγέομαι) [pronounced hayg-EH-ohm-ahee] again, he is still the expert and he concludes now in the present tense as an expert—“and keep on concluding.” This is a retroactive progressive present tense denoting a conclusion that started in the past when he broke the barrier to maturity and continues into the present time as he presses toward ultra-super-grace. The middle voice: the agent, Paul, participates in the results of the action of the verb. It therefore has a reflexive connotation, “I myself keep on concluding.” The indicative mood is declarative for a dogmatic statement coming up.


We now have the accusative plural, not singular. “Dung” is in the singular, but here is the accusative plural of skubalon (σκύβαλον) [pronounced SKOO-bal-on], and it should be translated in the plural “piles of dung.”[4]


The Doctrine of Dung

1.        Human excrement, or dung, is used in the Word of God to illustrate or to portray certain principles of doctrine. From the standpoint of vocabulary alone there are numerous

          a.       Hebrew words - five prominent ones and about five minor ones - for human excrement. There is at least one Greek word.

                     i.         Hebrew: ashpot. It is used euphemistically and it is used figuratively for any degrading situation or condition. It is also used for something that is as low or useless as anything can be - 1Samuel 2:8; Psalm 113:7; Nehemiah 2:13; 3:14; 12:31. ʾashepôth (אַשְפֹּת) [pronounced ash-POHTH].

                     ii.        There is another word: gelel. It is simply another way of describing the human excrement concept - Job 20:7; 1 Kings 14:10; Ezekiel 4:12, 15; Zephaniah 1:17.

                     iii.       There is a very closely related word, galel, and another which is considered one of the more vulgar words, domen.

                     iv.       Then there is peresh which is literally translated "feces". These words are all used in the Word of God in some context to teach a point of doctrine. They are not the only words.

2.       Dung is used to describe the celebrity standards of legalism or pseudo celebrityship - Philippians 3:8.

3.       Dung is used to describe the administration of the fifth cycle of discipline to a national entity. Dung is used for defeat in battle by which the military establishment is destroyed. The loss and destruction of the military destroys national freedom and function. The dead soldiers, therefore, become the basis of losing everything in a national entity. Jeremiah 9:22; 16:4 - the civilian population. Zephaniah

4.       Dung is used to portray the judgement of the wicked. It is applied to the prosperous wicked or the prosperous believer in reversionism. There is a false prosperity provided by Satan for certain believers in reversionism - Job 20:4-7.

5.       Dung was used to threaten and intimidate the Jews to surrender to the Assyrians - 2Kings 18:27; Isaiah 36:12.

6.       The interruption of the Jewish Age plus the fifth cycle of discipline to the southern kingdom is described in terms of dung in Malachi 2:3. How do you like that verse, did you memorize that one?

7.       Dung is used to describe the fall of mighty ones under human celebrityship - Lamentations 4:5.

8.       Dung is used to describe the uselessness of the reversionistic believer - Luke 14:34,35.


“that I may win Christ” – aorist active subjunctive from kerdainô (κερδαίνω) [pronounced kehr-DAH’EE-noh]. The word means to gain. This is a culminative aorist, it views the action of the verb in its entirety but emphasizes the existing results of moving on to ultra-super-grace. Paul produces the action of the verb. The subjunctive mood is potential, Paul has not reached ultra-super-grace, he has not yet gained Christ. This is the first hint that after one breaks the maturity barrier there is still some place to go after that.


“in order that I may gain Christ” – by gaining Christ he means to go on from super-grace to ultra-super-grace. Paul will not be detracted or deterred away from doctrine by the great blessings that he had.


Philippians 3:8 More emphatically, therefore, even I also myself conclude the all things [of human celebrityship] to be loss for the sake of the surpassing greatness of the knowledge of Christ Jesus my Lord; because of whom I have forfeited the all things [of human celebrityship and achievement] and keep on concluding them piles of dung, in order that I may gain Christ.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #83


83 12/30/1975 Philippians 3:9–11 Grace orientation parenthesis for supergrace believers


Medal of Honor for the Coast Guard.


Philippians 3:9  and be found in Him, not having my own righteousness which is of the Law, but that which is through faith from Christ, the righteousness of God on the basis of faith,  (BLB)


Verse 9 – the first of three verses which are a parenthesis on grace orientation. This versed is grace orientation, phase one. “And be found in him” – the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] begins the parenthesis, “Also.” The aorist passive subjunctive from the verb heuriskô (εὐρίσκω) [pronounced hyoo-RIHS-koh]. The word means to discover, to find—“Also that I may be found.” The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it refers to a momentary action when anyone historically discovers Paul and the impact of his life. No man ever had a greater impact in life than the apostle Paul. This the fact that discovering Paul is an action extending over a period of time in history. Whenever the discovery is made it should be related to positional sanctification, related to the fact that with Paul, the worst sinner who ever lived, there was a moment in his life when he was taken by God the Holy Spirit and entered into union with Christ. The passive voice: the interpreter of history who discovers Paul—any believer who grows up enough to realize that Pauline doctrine in the Scripture is the highest peak of Bible doctrine anywhere—can see the emphasis of his life related to saving grace and to his salvation. The subjunctive mood is used here simply because we have the word hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na], a conjunction that demands the subjunctive, and it is found in the previous verse. The reason that there must be a subjunctive instead of a declarative here is because hina (ἵνα) [pronounced HEE-na] demands this to set up what is known as a final clause, stating a goal, objective or purpose. “Also that I may be found.” The reality of being found is the reality of spiritual growth.


“in him” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative singular of the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. The intensive pronoun emphasizes the uniqueness of the person of Jesus Christ. It is a reminder to us of the fact that none of us would have salvation were it not for the fact that Jesus Christ humbled himself and became a member of the human race. There is no greater manifestation of grace than positional sanctification at salvation through the ministry of God the Holy Spirit.


“not having” is a combination of the negative mê (μή) [pronounced may] and the present active participle of echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh], which means to have and to hold. The present tense is historical, it is used when a past event is viewed with the vividness of a present occurrence. The active voice: the apostle Paul produces the action of not standing on his own personal self-righteousness or the high attainment of celebrityship in the field of Judaism. The participle is circumstantial.


“my own righteousness” – accusative singular direct object of dikaiosunê (δικαιοσύνη) [pronounced dih-kai-oh-SOON-ā or dik-ah-yos-OO-nay]. Here the word is used in a self-righteous connotation: “not having self-righteousness.” Paul’s self-righteousness as an unbeliever far exceeded his critics, but he does not want to be remembered for his attainments in the field of Judaism, or that he was so great in the field of self-righteousness. This is a righteousness in opposition to grace.


Just take in doctrine and stop trying to prove anything to anyone. You do not have to go from law to antinomianism. Doctrine has to be the guide.


“which is” is not found in the original; “of the law” – ek (ἐκ) [pronounced ehk] plus the ablative of nomos (νόμος) [pronounced NOHM-oss], a reference to the Mosaic law: “not having mine own righteousness from the law.” It is derived and developed by keeping the law.


Don’t knock your background which might be a Christian school. You learn discipline there and divine establishment as well.


Respectability is not a spiritual advance.


“but” – the adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], setting up a contrast. The contrast is between Paul’s high achievement in the field of self-righteousness and imputed righteousness. Here is the difference between grace and legalism.


“that” is the accusative singular definite article, that’s all. But it is used here to refer to that same righteousness; “which is” is not found in the original, it is merely used to smooth out the translation.


“through the faith” – diá (διά) [pronounced dee-AH] plus the genitive of pistis (πίστις) [pronounced PIHS-tihs] should be translated “by means of faith.”


“in Christ” – objective genitive singular from Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], referring to the moment of salvation. When salvation is in view it is faith that is mentioned, nothing else.


“the righteousness” – accusative singular of the definite article, still referring to dikaiosunê (δικαιοσύνη) [pronounced dih-kai-oh-SOON-ā or dik-ah-yos-OO-nay]; “which is of God”—e)k plus the ablative of theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], “from the source of God.”


“by faith” is “at the point of faith.”


Philippians 3:9 Also that I may be discovered in him, not having my own righteousness from the law, but that righteousness which is acquired by means of faith in Christ, that righteousness from the source of the God at the point of faith [in Christ].


Philippians 3:10  to know Him and the power of His resurrection and the fellowship of His sufferings, being conformed to His death,  (BLB)


Verse 10 – phase two grace orientation. “That I may know him”—the articular aorist active infinitive from the verb ginskô (vινώσκω) [pronounced gih-NOH-skoh]. The ingressive aorist contemplates the action of the verb at its beginning. The beginning of phase two is the function of GAP leading to super-grace status. In other words, you can’t know Christ unless you take in doctrine. Active voice: Paul in super-grace produces the action of “knowing him.” The infinitive is the articular infinitive. This is an Attic idiom, and it denotes here a purpose. Then, the accusative singular direct object with the infinitive, and this autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] emphasizes again the uniqueness of the person of the Lord Jesus Christ. Translation: “That I may come to know him”—through the constant function of GAP.


“and the power of his resurrection” – this phrase not only anticipates appreciation for phase three, which comes when the maturity barrier is broken, but at the same time it indicates the importance of knowing God the Father and God the Holy Spirit through the daily function of GAP. This includes a transitional use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the accusative singular direct object from dúnamis (δύναμις) [pronounced DOO-nahm-iss], meaning inherent power, therefore omnipotence, plus the descriptive genitive singular anastasia (ἀνάστασις) [pronounced an-AS-tas-is]—“resurrection.” Plus, once more, the possessive genitive singular from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], emphasizing Jesus Christ.


The Power of His Resurrection

1.       Inasmuch as Jesus Christ was raised by the dúnamis (δύναμις) [pronounced DOO-nahm-iss], the omnipotence of two members of the Trinity, this becomes a mandate to become cognisant of the other two members of the Trinity.

2.       To know the power/omnipotence of His resurrection is to have maximum knowledge of doctrine through the constant function of GAP.

3.       The more doctrine the believer knows the more he understands the power of His resurrection—the power that raised Christ from the dead, the power behind the historical resurrection.

4.       This means knowing the power of God the Father who raised Christ from the dead—1Thess. 1:10; 1Peter 1:2.

5.       This means knowing the power of God the Holy Spirit who raised Christ from the dead—Romans 8:11; 1Peter 3:18.

6.       The power of resurrection is only one of many historical manifestations of God’s unlimited and infinite power in the devil’s history. The devil is the ruler of this world, the resurrection took place in the devil’s world, and the devil couldn’t prevent it.

7.       So the more doctrine the believer absorbs, the greater becomes his understanding of God’s power.

8.       The super-grace believer has just begun to know and appreciate the power of God. The ultra-super-grace believer has maximum cognisance in this sphere. While the power of His resurrection gives appreciation for phase two it also anticipates the glories, the blessings, the decorations of SG2.


“and the fellowship of his sufferings” – the continuative use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the accusative singular direct object from koinônia (κοινωνία) [pronounced koi-nohn-EE-ah], “fellowship” or “association,” This tells us that Paul is moving in on the target of ultra supergrace.


but better here is the true translation, “participation.” The ultra-super-grace believer wears the mantle of continual Satanic opposition, and that mantle is participation in His sufferings. This means totally underserved suffering wrapped like a mantle around the ultra-super-grace believer. The blessings of SG2 are intensified. The descriptive genitive plural of paqhma indicates the fact that this is the mantle—“suffering.” This is undeserved suffering. The plural indicates the continuation of the suffering, the mantle of suffering.


“being made conformable”—present passive participle of summorphóō (συμμορφόω) [pronounced soom-mor-FOE-oh] [sum = with; morphê (μορφή) [pronounced mor-FAY] = form], which means to invest with the same form. But in the passive, used here, it means to take on the same form. This is a customary present of the participle for what habitually occurs in the life of the ultra-super-grace believer. The passive voice: the ultra supergrace believer receives the action of the verb—maximum opposition from Satan and the forces of evil. The participle is circumstantial. The circumstances belong to the ultra supergrace believer only.


“unto his death” – dative of reference from the noun thanatos (θάνατος) [pronounced THAH-nah-toss], referring to the oppositional sufferings of Christ connected with His death. It does not refer to His unique sufferings in bearing our sins, for there is no way that we can participate in these sufferings or take on the form of these sufferings. But there were many types of opposition which came from Satan and the forces of evil prior to the cross, during the time that He was on the cross, excluding bearing our sins. But this dative of reference does not emphasize the fact that all ultra supergrace believer receive the same suffering or pressures from the forces of Satan.


Philippians 3:10 That I may come to know him [function of GAP], and the power of his resurrection, and the participation in his sufferings, taking on the same form of sufferings, with reference to his death [of Christ].


Philippians 3:11  if, by any means, I may attain to the resurrection from out of dead.  (BLB)


Verse 11—phase three grace orientation. “If” is the conjunction ei (εἰ) [pronounced I], plus the enclitic particle pôs (πς) [pronounced pohç], and it should be translated, “If in some way.” The conjunctive particle plus the enclitic particle does not mean doubt or uncertainty that Paul will reach phase three, but ignorance as to how he will die.


“I might attain” – aorist active subjunctive of katantáō (καταντάω) [pronounced kat-an-TAH-oh]. Paul is not concerned about how he is going to die, he just wants to get to the objective before he does.


“unto the resurrection of the dead” – incorrect. It should be translated, “that I might cross the goal line to the resurrection, away from dead ones.” This includes the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of exanástasis (ἐξανάστασις) [pronounced ex-an-AS-tas-is]—“to the resurrection,” and then ek (ἐκ) [pronounced ehk] plus the ablative plural of nekros (νεκρός) [pronounced nehk-ROSS], and nekros (νεκρός) [pronounced nehk-ROSS] here refers to the spiritually dead ones who are under the second death. In history the believer and unbeliever are mixed together, but by resurrection we are away from the dead ones. In eternity the separation is based upon attitude toward Jesus Christ. The aorist tense of katantáō (καταντάω) [pronounced kat-an-TAH-oh], crossing the goal line, is a culminative aorist. It views the goal in its entirety but emphasizes the existing results—possession of a resurrection body and the potentiality of decoration. The active voice: the writer, Paul, and all believers produce the action. The subjunctive mood indicates the potential manner in which the resurrection body is received.


Philippians 3:11 If in some way [death or the Rapture] I might cross the goal line to the resurrection away from the dead ones.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #84


84 12/31/1975 Philippians 3:12 Paul anticipates ultra SG–2


Straining Toward the Goal


Philippians 3:12  Not that already I have obtained it or already have been perfected, but I am pursuing, if also I may lay hold of that for which also I was laid hold of by Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


In ultra supergrace, Paul is about to pass along the colors to Timothy. Paul has arrived and he is urging and commanding Timothy to press on to meet the next objective.


Paul was in reversionism, but he afterward broke the maturity barrier, entered into supergrace and now is in ultra supergrace. The decision to advance begins in v. 12.


Our elected representatives have taken us into evil with every decision that they make. If you are a believer without much doctrine, the historical disaster which will come will make us a total casualty. The great objectives to go from salvation to supergrace to ultra supergrace.


The crown of righteousness for the supergrace believer; the crown of for the ultra supergrace; and the crown of for the pastor-teacher leading his congregation to supergrace. Most people want to go out and be hustlers for God. Hustle for Christ by witnessing for Him or by removing communism from the college campuses.


Paul is in his first imprisonment in Rome. He will be released and go on his 4th missionary journey. He will be arrested again and executed under Nero.


Verse 12 – the decision to advance to the next objective stated. “Not as though” – this includes the strong Greek negative ouch (οὐχ) [pronounced ookh] ([ou (οὐ) [pronounced oo], ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook], ouch (οὐχ) [pronounced ookh]—the form merely changes because of what is following the negative: vowel, consonant, rough breathing]. Then the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], used here to introduce a negative conclusion—“Not that.”


“I had already attained” – the word already is the adverb êdê (ἤδη) [pronounced AY-day], and it means “already” or “by now”; the aorist active indicative of the verb lambánô (λαμβάνω) [pronounced lahm-BAHN-oh] which generally means to receive or to attain or obtain. It is a reference to receiving or attaining the ultra-super-grace. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it denotes a momentary status quo. In one moment of time Paul looked out ahead and saw that he had not yet attained that ultra-super-grace objective. By the time he wrote 2Timothy he could write as an ultra-super-grace believer. What is not accomplished in Philippians is later accomplished in the pastoral epistles. The active voice: Paul produces the negative action, he has not yet attained the ultra-super-grace status. The indicative mood is declarative for historical reality at the time of writing.


We have all failed. We do not sit around crying about it. We get up and move forward.


“either were already perfect” – the disjunctive particle ê (ἢ) [pronounced ā]), used to relate similar terms where one term can take the place of another. It is translated “or.” With it is the adverb êdê (ἤδη) [pronounced AY-day], meaning “already,” plus the perfect passive indicative of teleioô (τελειόω) [pronounced tehl-i-OH-oh], which means to reach an objective here, not to be perfect. “Not that I have already attained [ultra-super-grace] or have before now reached the objective.” The perfect tense is the perfect of existing state, in which the past is dropped from his thought. It cancels out any thinking about the past. ‘Forgetting those things which are behind.’ Not only does it drop the past from the thinking but it calls attention to the existing status quo. In the past Paul had been reversionistic. He has recovered. At the time of writing he is in super-grace and now getting ready to press on to the final objective—ultra-super-grace. The passive voice: Paul has not yet received ultra supergrace. The indicative mood is declarative representing the action of the verb from the viewpoint of historical reality.


“but” is the adversative use of the conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], setting up a contrast between Paul’s set-back in reaching ultra supergrace and his determination to keep on pressing. He is not discouraged, he is going to keep on moving on. That should remind us of a principle: There is no such things as spiritual greatness, or even human greatness, where failures are allowed to discourage. None of can ever be in any way detracted by our failures.


“I follow after” – this is a military word, the present active indicative of diôkô (διώκω) [pronounced Dee-OH-koh]. It means to hotly pursue, to press a retreating enemy, to drive on, to move in, to close in. The retroactive progressive present denotes what has begun in the past with consistent +V towards doctrine and continues into the present time with the daily function of GAP. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb after his reversion recovery. By pressing on with Bible doctrine Paul in a short four years has not only attained reversion recovery but he has broken through the maturity barrier and is now a super-grace believer. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal idea from the viewpoint of historical reality.


“if that” – the particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I], not used here as a conditional particle but with the subjunctive mood, and is translated “wether, if.” With it is kaí (καί) [pronounced ], translated “also,” and together all this is translated, “but I keep pressing on, if also I may apprehend.” But there is no “apprehend” here. This is the aorist active subjunctive from the verb katalambanô (καταλαμβάνω) [pronounced kat-al-am-BAHN-oh] [kata = down or according to; lambánô (λαμβάνω) [pronounced lahm-BAHN-oh] = receive or attain], which means to attain according to a norm or standard. It is one of the strongest words for seizing or grasping, or taking possession of something. Here it has the concept of attaining by the intake of doctrine. Kata indicates that there is a norm by which this is accomplished. The objective can only be taken under a certain norm or standard—the daily function of GAP. The culminative aorist here views the attainment of ultra supergrace in its entirety but it emphasizes the existing results. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb. He sees the objective and he presses on. The subjunctive mood is a potential subjunctive implying future reference, and also qualifying reaching the objective by the daily, continual attitude toward Bible doctrine.


Paul recovered from his reversionism when he was two years in Caesarea, being tried by Festus and Felix.


“for which also” – the preposition epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], plus the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], and it should be translated “on account of which [ultra supergrace].”


“I am apprehended” – aorist passive indicative of katalambanô (καταλαμβάνω) [pronounced kat-al-am-BAHN-oh], to seize and hold or, in the passive voice, to be overtaken. So Paul was seized and held. He was on the Damascus road closing in on his objective, but on his way the Lord stopped him dead—seized him and held him, as it were. He is referring to the point of his salvation on the Damascus road. The culminative aorist views the moment of salvation in its entirety but it emphasizes the results—the eternal security, the fact that the apostle Paul was on his way to murder Christians, and on his way to Damascus was stopped and turned around. From his salvation he was turned around to become the greatest believer in history and to reach objectives never before attained.


Philippians 3:12 Not that I have already attained [ultra supergrace status], or before now have reached [the ultra supergrace life]; but I press on, that I may attain [the objective], on account of which [ultra supergrace] I was overtaken by Christ Jesus.


Principle

1.       Everything which Christ did to save the believer has a meaning, both in time and in eternity.

2.       God has both purpose and meaning for the individual believer and the objective for every believer.

3.       Christ overtook man in time but He provided the objective and the blessings in eternity past.

4.       Once saved or overtaken the objectives of time include living grace, supergrace, ultra supergrace, and dying grace.

5.       All of these objectives are related to the most fantastic blessings.

6.       As each objective is reached the blessings both intensify and multiply.

7.       Only reversionism hinders these objectives, but Paul has recovered from his reversionism and being still alive moves from one mature objective to another—from super-grace to ultra-super-grace.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #85


85 01/01/1976 Philippians 3:13–15a Test of mental attitude before ultra–supergrace


Although there was to be another lesson for New Year’s Eve, that was not included in this study.


Bob talks about the football teams in the southern conference. Apparently, he is quite happy about whatever has happened as of late.


Bob reviews that translation. Review of the seven points.


Philippians 3:13  Brothers, I do not consider myself to have taken hold of it. But one thing indeed: Forgetting the things behind and reaching forward to the things ahead,  (BLB)


Verse 13 – the estimate of the situation. It begins with the vocative adelphoi (ἀδελφοί) [pronounced ad-el-FOY], used simply to designate the royal family of God.


“I count not myself” – present middle indicative of the verb logizomai (λογίζομαι) [pronounced log-IHD-zohm-ai] [logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss] = word, speak, communicate; omai = the middle form by which this is converted into a verb]. The present middle indicative means to evaluate, to estimate, to consider. Since Paul is dealing with himself, and because of the type of middle voice we have here (direct middle), we translate this, “I evaluate myself.” This is something that believers must do periodically, objectively, totally apart from any subjective concept. Subjectiveness is a great hindrance to the advance in the spiritual life, and inevitably a subjective believer starts reacting to various things—authority, teaching, personalities—and always winds up in reversionism unless it is caught in time. Paul is not simply evaluating himself for himself, he is evaluating himself for us. The present tense is an aoristic present, punctiliar action in present time. The middle voice is the direct middle, it refers to the results of the action directly to the agent (Paul), and it does so with reflexive force. The evaluation or estimate of the situation applies to that moment in A.D. 62. during Paul’s first Roman imprisonment. The indicative mood is declarative, it represents the verbal idea from the viewpoint of reality. There is also the first person singular of the pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] in the proleptic form, it has strong emphasis and it is even legitimate to translate it, “I, even I, evaluate myself.” Also the accusative singular direct object from the reflexive pronoun emautou/emautô/ emauton (ἐμαυτο/ ἐμαυτ/ἐμαυτόν) [pronounced em-ow-TOO, em-ow-TOE, em-ow-TON], and this throws the action of the verb back on the subject. We do not have a negative here. Instead there is a negative adverb oupô (οὔπω) [pronounced OW-poe], which means “not yet.” This is quite different from a negative; it does not mean “not.”


“to have apprehended” – perfect active infinitive of katalambanô (καταλαμβάνω) [pronounced kat-al-am-BAHN-oh] [kata = preposition of norm and standard; lambánô (λαμβάνω) [pronounced lahm-BAHN-oh] = to receive]. Put together, this compound means to reach an objective according to a specified norm or standard—the function of GAP. And being organised and stabilized in super-grace he is now moving to the next objective on the other side of the maturity barrier. He says, “Brethren, I evaluate myself as to not yet have attained.” He has not yet reached ultra-super-grace. Eventually he wrote the pastoral epistles as an ultra-super-grace believer. The perfect tense of katalambanô (καταλαμβάνω) [pronounced kat-al-am-BAHN-oh] is called the perfect of existing state in which the past is dropped from the thought and attention is focused on the present moment. This is important because it shows whether you are objective about yourself or not. The active voice plus the negative adverb oupô (οὔπω) [pronounced OW-poe] indicates that Paul has not yet completed the action of reaching ultra supergrace. The infinitive is the infinitive of intended result in which the result is indicated as fulfilling a deliberate objective. It is his objective to move on.


“but this one thing I do” – the Greek begins hen (ἕν) [pronounced hehn] de. The dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is an enclitic particle used as a conjunction after a negative adverb of time, and it is translated “however” or “but.” Then a nominative neuter singular from the numeral heís,mia,hen (εἵς,μία,ἕν) [pronounced hice,Mee-ah,ehn] [hen (ἕν) [pronounced hehn]], and being in the neuter it sets up a contrast to the many avenues of reversionism. It therefore has to be translated, “however, one thing on which I concentrate.” He points out the importance of that perfect tense of existing state by using a verb, showing that he will not be handicapped by his past failures. This is great objectivity. Any failures any of us have had in the past should never handicap us. As long as we are alive, God has a purpose for us.


“forgetting” – present middle participle of epilanthánomai (ἐπιλανθάνομαι) [pronounced ehp-ee-lan-THAN-ohm-ahee] [epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] = on, over, near, after; lanthanomai (λανθάνομαι) [pronounced lahn-THAHN-oh-my] = to forget], which simply comes to mean to forget something that has already happened that can be regarded as a failure. Here it means constantly forgetting. The present tense is retroactive progressive present denoting what has happened in the past and continues into the present time. Paul is to forget the fact that he went into reversionism. He is not going to forget his failure because he obviously writes about it from time to time, but he is going to forget it as a handicap. It is not a handicap. He is not going to feel sorry for himself. You never advance while dragging your feet, while handicapping yourself in some past failure. The middle voice this time is the permissive middle, it represents the agent (Paul) as voluntarily yielding himself to the results of the action—advancing to ultra supergrace. The participle is a telic participle, it expresses a purpose for the believer in phase two.


“those things which are behind” – ta (τά) [pronounced taw] men opisô (ὀπίσω) [pronounced ohp-ISS-oh]. This precedes the participle in the Greek text. ta (τά) [pronounced taw] is a plural of the definite pronoun; men is an affirmative particle used to emphasize something else, i.e. the adverb of place opisô (ὀπίσω) [pronounced ohp-ISS-oh]. The phrase means literally, “the things behind.” It is good to translate it into legitimate English: “what lies behind.”


Principle

1.       This refers to Paul’s reversion, as well as any past sin or carnality that might disturb him. Our past failures are never to be a deterrent in our spiritual advance. The only deterrent is death.

2.       Carnality, is handled by the rebound technique. Then forget it and move on. We have no right to a guilt-complex.

3.       Reversionism is handled by persistent +V related to the daily function of GAP.

4.       The recovery is completed when the believer has reached the maturity barrier and breaks through into supergrace.

5.       Paul has followed this pattern: reversion recovery, re-entry into the super-grace status, and therefore the prison epistles represent doctrine of the advance.


“and” – postpositive conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], used here in the transitional sense; “reaching forth” – present middle participle from epekteínomai (ἐπεκτείνομαι) [pronounced ep-ek-TI-nom-ahee] [epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] = on, over, after, near; ekteinô (ἐκτείνω) [pronounced ek-TI-no] = to stretch out], which means to stretch out after, farther, to reach out toward, to strain for. This is pressing, pursuing vigorously—“and pressing toward the objective.” The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs when a believer is positive toward and seeking to reach all the phase two objectives before his death. The middle voice here is the permissive middle, it represents Paul as the agent voluntarily yielding himself to the results of the action, therefore seeking to secure the results of the action in his own interest. The participle is a telic participle denoting Paul’s phase two objective and the closing in on the target.


“unto those things which are before” – tois (τος) [pronounced toiç] dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] emprosthen (ἔμπροσθεν) [pronounced EM-pross-thehn]. The dative plural of the definite article tois (τος) [pronounced toiç], the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], plus the adverb emprosthen (ἔμπροσθεν) [pronounced EM-pross-thehn] meaning in front or ahead. The particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is used with men as a correlative setting up a contrast between the “behind things” of reversionism and the “ahead things,” super-grace and ultra supergrace. His objective is objectivity. He is in SG looking toward ultra supergrace, but not looking back toward his failure of reversionism—“and straining toward what lies ahead,” pressing toward the objective.


Philippians 3:13 Brethren, I evaluate myself to have not yet attained ultra-super-grace; but one thing on which I concentrate, forgetting what lies behind [reversionism], and straining toward what lies ahead [ultra supergrace].


Now the two verses together:


Philippians 3:12 Not that I have already attained [ultra supergrace status], or before now have reached [the ultra supergrace life]; but I press on, that I may attain [the objective of ultra supergrace], on account of which [objective] I was overtaken by Christ Jesus.


Philippians 3:13 Brethren, I evaluate myself to have not yet attained ultra-super-grace; but one thing on which I concentrate, forgetting what lies behind [reversionism], and straining toward what lies ahead [supergrace].


Principle

1.       No greater emphasis on the importance of Bible doctrine can exist than in performing all these functions found in this passage—forgetting failures of the past and pressing from one objective in maturity to another.

2.       The constant function of GAP not only causes reversion recovery but is the means of achieving all of the objective of maturity—super-grace, ultra-super-grace, dying grace.

3.       Bible doctrine resident in the soul is also the key to avoiding the trap of being held up by past failures—becoming subjective, hypersensitive, and therefore becoming unhappy, discontented, or any of the reactor factors in life

4.       Past failure, therefore, must not interfere with present victories.

5.       Past discipline must not hinder present blessing.

6.       Past apostasy must not hinder present glorification of Jesus Christ.

7.       Therefore, never let your failures keep you down. All believers have failed, but not all believers have recovered and moved on to tactical victory.

8.       Only the sin unto death can block reversion recovery.

9.       As long as you are alive, keep pressing.


Philippians 3:14  I press on toward the goal for the prize of the upward calling of God in Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


Verse 14 – the advance of positive volition. “I press” is the present active indicative of diôkô (διώκω) [pronounced Dee-OH-koh], which means to advance to the objective. The present tense is retroactive progressive present, denoting what has begun in the past and continues into the present time through the daily function of GAP. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb; “toward the mark” – the preposition kata plus the accusative of skopós (σκοπός) [pronounced skop-OSS] which means a goal or a mark. “I keep advancing toward the objective.”


“for the prize” – a decoration that glorifies God forever. The preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of brabeion (βραβεον) [pronounced brab-EYE-on] which means reward, prize, a prize of victory. But it doesn’t mean just a prize, it means to receive a decoration, and with that decoration a certain amount of money or some other form of plunder or booty. It means to have a decoration and that decoration represent some kind of financial remuneration, land remuneration. It means to be made a wealthy and successful person and to wear a decoration that says you are a wealthy and successful person. So we translate this, “for the purpose of the reward.”


“of the high calling” is an adverb, anô (ἄνω) [pronounced AN-oh], and it means above or upward. With it is the genitive singular from the noun klêsis (κλσις) [pronounced KLAY-sis]—“calling.” That refers to station here, station in life, position in life. This is the possessive genitive and is translated, “belonging to that upward station in life.” There is a genitive singular definite article used as a demonstrative pronoun, calling attention to the special emphasis on the believer’s paragraph SG3.


“of God” – the ablative of source from theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], plus the ablative singular of the definite article used as an intensive pronoun to identify God the Father as the author of the divine plan known as grace—“from that self-same God.”


“in Christ Jesus” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], “by means of Christ Jesus.” All believers enter the plan of God by means of Jesus Christ, the only saviour.


Philippians 3:14 I keep advancing to the objective for the purpose of reward belonging to that upward station [phase three] from that self-same God [the Father] by means of Christ Jesus.


Principle: God will provide under the principle of living grace the time plus the necessities for breaking the maturity barrier.


Philippians 3:15  Therefore as many as are mature should be of this mind. And if you are minded in anything differently, even this God will reveal to you.  (BLB)


Verse 15 – “Let us therefore.” Nominative plural masculine from the correlative relative pronoun hosos (ὅσος) [pronounced HOS-os], “as many as,” and with it the inferential particle oun (ον) [pronounced oon] in which we draw an inference from the previous three verses.


The wrong mental attitude can take you backwards.


“be perfect” – predicate nominative plural from the adjective téleios (τέλειος) [pronounced TEHL-i-os], which connotes being fully developed. It means mature in the sense here of having reached the super-grace status, “mature ones.”


“be like-minded” – present active subjunctive from the verb phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh], which means to think objectively. The objective mental attitude is the divine viewpoint of life based on maximum doctrine resident in the soul. The present tense is a retroactive progressive present, denoting what has happened in the past and continues into the present time. The objective mental attitude begins with the advance toward super-grace through the accumulation of doctrine in the soul. It continues as the believer follows the colours to the high ground of super-grace. The subjunctive mood is a hortatory subjunctive in which the writer having recovered from reversionism, having attained super-grace status, invites the readers to join him in a course of action—objectivity in mental attitude as you advance.


Bob has the right to judge as the pastor-teacher of Berachah. He is the one with the authority and he would be acting for the congregation.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #86


86 01/02/1976 Philippians 3:15b Doctrine of mental attitude; technical vocabulary


When going from supergrace to ultra supergrace, the chief problem is mental attitude. There is a great difference between supergrace and ultra supergrace. The greatest mental attitude testing occurs between these two statuses.


This next doctrine was previously covered in Lesson #38 and later in Lesson #95. Any additional notes from #95 will be placed here. The points given are slightly out of alignment with those found in #95.


Mental Attitude (2)

1.       Mental attitude, good or bad, is the sum total of what you think. It is thinking reflected in function, in life. “As a man thinks in his heart, so he is.” A thought can make or break you. The thoughts of the soul determine the real person. Every thought in the right lobe of the believer can be categorized. The simplest categorization is divine viewpoint versus human viewpoint, but there are other categories as well. Human viewpoint is any thinking which is in opposition to Bible doctrine. It is the thinking of, sometimes, carnality; most frequently reversionism; it is the thinking of evil. It sometimes is simply the thinking which is anti-establishment. Divine viewpoint is the thinking of the believer who has doctrine in his soul. Doctrine is the design of divine viewpoint. All divine viewpoint is not based on doctrine found in the Bible but doctrine that the believer has transferred from the page of the Bible to his own soul. Divine viewpoint, therefore, is thinking doctrine. Without doctrine in the soul one cannot possibly have divine viewpoint. The maximum expression of divine viewpoint occurs when the maturity barrier is broken through.

          a.       Your mental attitude is the sum total of the words in your vocabulary, the words in your thinking, the words in your viewpoint. In your frame of reference and your launching pad. How you think in your right lobe, that is what you are. This thinking can make or break you. Every thought in the right lobe of the believer can be classified as pro-God or anti-God. You produce what is a blessing or a cursing. Divine viewpoint is the thinking of doctrine and divine establishment; and cosmic thinking is the viewpoint of the cosmic system. Maximum expression of divine viewpoint occurs in supergrace and then on to ultra supergrace. Words are stored in the right lobe. Words form thoughts and your thoughts make up your mental attitude.

          b.       Paul knew that he was going to die when writing 2Timothy. Nero had pronounced the sentence of death.

          c.        There is a mental attitude which accompanies death.

2.       No person’s thinking ever exceeds his vocabulary. Vocabulary is divided into two categories generally: non-technical and technical. Non-technical is vocabulary you need to get along in life—yes, no, if you please, etc. To acquire a technical vocabulary in any field requires study. Studying is one of the most important functions in life—any kind of study.

          a.       When Bob took geology, he learned a vocabulary, which he promptly forgot. It was a dream. All those different ages of the earth.

          b.       There is a technical vocabulary in all things that we learn.

          c.        This is why we come to Bible class and develop a technical vocabulary. Many of Bob’s critics had problems which his doctrines because they had never had a real course in theology. So they really did not understand what he was teaching, but they did not like it.

          d.       Paul coined words in order to develop theology because there were concepts which did not have a word designed for that concept.

          e.       Your vocabulary and your ability to think are more important than any sensual pleasure, including eating, drinking or sex.

          f.        You cannot advance spiritually without a vocabulary.

          g.       Paul put Alexander under the sin unto death, but two years later, he is still alive. You have this information to understand why God keeps some believers around past the expiration date.

3.       The real person is not what appears but what is thought. Thinking is the real personality. Personality is related to thinking—that is, real personality. There are two kinds of personality: real and pseudo.

          a.       Pseudo personality is what a person wants you to think they are in order to impress you or to gain something from you, and real personality is what people really think. Proverbs 23:6–7. This presents the view of a hypocritical person who invites you to stay, but he is being hypocritical about it. There is the smile on the outside; but the real person is calling you a jerk or a fool in his soul.

          b.       What goes on in the soul is the real person. One of the greatest blessings in life is to get rid of the pseudo personality. No one sheds his pseudo personality until he breaks the maturity barrier.

4.       The conflict of mental attitude to the believer is found in Isaiah 55:6-9—positive volition toward doctrine in time. “Seek the Lord” means as long as you are alive you have to GAP it. You have to increase your vocabulary. Without vocabulary you cannot have category, and without category there is no spiritual growth. Every soul of every born again believer is designed to store both vocabulary and to come to categorical thinking as far as the Word of God is concerned, and without it you never grow up. God wants our thoughts to be His thoughts. Bob does not understand people who have cats. They make the worst illustrations. We have to learn God’s thinking. His thinking is not our thinking, but God wants our thinking to be like His thinking.

5.       There is a command to go to divine viewpoint. Since doctrine is the mind of Christ, as per 1Corinthians 2:16, attitude toward doctrine determines viewpoint in life. Phil. 2:5, Keep on having this mental attitude in you, which also was in Christ Jesus. This is talking about taking divine thought and putting it into the soul of an imperfect believer. This command is obeyed by the consistent function of GAP; maximum doctrine resident in the soul is the source of the fulfilment of this command. Cf. 2Corinthians 10:4-6. For the weapons and equipment of our conflict are not human attributes but the attributes of power [resident doctrine in the soul] through God against the destruction of fortifications) assaulting and demolishing cosmic thoughts [human viewpoint], and every obstacle of pride which attacks against the objective of knowledge of God [divine viewpoint], and makes a prisoner of every human viewpoint system of thought to the authority of Christ; holding in readiness to punish all deviation from obedience [reversionistic human viewpoint], when your obedience [daily function of GAP] has been fulfilled.

6.       Rapport in the royal family of God is based on divine viewpoint. Philippians 2:2

7.       The function of the royal priesthood demands a new mental attitude—2Timothy 1:7; Romans 12:2.

8.       Divine viewpoint from doctrine produces confidence (not arrogance)—2Corinthians 5:1, 6–8 (take delight). For we know that our earthly tent [which is our physical body] is torn down, we have a permanent home from God [our resurrection body] a house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens....therefore, we keep on having confidence and we know that while we are at home in the body we are absent from the Lord therefore, we walk by doctrine and not by sight [guidance comes not from what appears on the surface but doctrine guiding in the soul] ...keep on having confidence, I say, and take mental delight in the fact that to be absent from the body is to be at home with the Lord. [everyone does not take delight; that is dying grace for supergrace believers].

9.       Areas of life which involve mental attitude are many: stability of mental attitude—James 1:8 The double-minded man is unstable in all of his ways; prosperity is a mental attitude having overt repercussions—Philippians 4:8; giving—2Corinthians 7,8,9; worldliness—Romans 12:2; Colossians 3:2; evil—Matthew 9:4; arrogance—Galatians 6:3; inner beauty—1Timothy 2:9,10, 15.

10.     Mental attitude receives its greatest test in advance from super-grace to ultra-super-grace—Philippians 3:15 4:2.


One man of Bob’s acquaintance chose to bypass women who are physically attractive and find someone who is feminine who wants to please him. That was a great advance in his personal development.


Philippians 3:15a Therefore, as many who are mature ones, let us continue objective thinking [divine viewpoint through doctrine in the soul];...


“and” is an incorrect translation of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. We have seen the adjunctive, the ascensive and the transitional use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. Here is the emphatic use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] which should be translated “in fact.”


“if” is the conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I], plus the indicative, introducing a first class condition.


“in anything” – accusative neuter plural from the indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç], and with the accusative direct object phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh] it should be translated so far, “In fact if you are thinking somewhat differently.” It comes to mean, “In fact if you have a different attitude.” This is addressed to the Philippians, many of whom had reached super-grace and are now being challenged to move to the next objective which is ultra-super-grace.


“ye be minded” is the present active indicative of phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh], the verb of objective thinking. It is used here for mental attitude. With the adverb “otherwise,”


which is héteros (ἕτερος) [pronounced HEH-ter-os], it comes to have a different meaning. It means to hold different opinions because of your mental attitude. In other words, you form your opinions on the basis of people you do not like, people to whom you react. In other words, you cannot go from supergrace to ultra supergrace if something malfunctions in your mental attitude. Paul knew the situation in Philippi. He had discovered that in the absence of their pastor, Epaphroditus, there had been a kind of power grab. There had been some bad feeling and people were beginning to think, not in terms of divine viewpoint but in their reaction to each other. So their thinking had become different—“otherwise minded.” They are not thinking on the basis of what the Bible says, they are thinking in terms of their reactions in life.


Some person expresses an opinion. Someone else reacts to that person, and therefore takes the opposite opinion. They do not base their opinion on facts, but based upon their thinking toward the person who says something else.


You cannot advance to ultra supergrace if you have the attitude, love me, love my dog.


“God” – ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]; “shall reveal” – the future active indicative of apokaluptô (ἀποκαλύπτω) [pronounced ap-ok-al-OOP-toe] [apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] = ultimate source; kaluptô = to reveal] which means to reveal from ultimate source, to disclose. It means here that God is the ultimate source of the revelation, but not the immediate source. The revelation comes through the Bible, the canon of Scripture, the means by which He has chosen to reveal everything. This is a gnomic future for a statement of fact or performance anticipated under antithetical conditions—the mental attitude. The antithetical conditions also indicate the manner in which God will reveal—under conditions of +V. A person has +V toward doctrine but doesn’t like the personality who communicates it. God will therefore put him under that situation to break him of building a mental attitude and opinions on reaction. The active voice: God produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the standpoint of dogmatic reality.


“even this” is the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ]; plus the accusative singular direct object from the demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], which emphasizes any thought or attitude which is contrary to the absolute norm of Bible doctrine.


“unto you” is the dative of indirect object from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] meaning you are an individual in God’s sight. It indicates the one in whose interest the Bible teaching is conducted.


Philippians 3:15 Therefore, as many who are mature ones, let us continue objective thinking [divine viewpoint through doctrine in the soul, divine viewpoint taking you from supergrace to ultra supergrace]. In fact if you have a different attitude in something, the God will reveal even that to you.


Points

1.       When the believer is thinking does not line up with divine viewpoint as revealed in the Word of God, there are two ways his mental attitude can be corrected to agree with divine viewpoint. The daily function of gap, learning it the easy way. Erroneous thinking corrected. Or, the hard way, the administration of divine discipline to the reactive believer.

2.       Some stage of discipline often awakens the believer to his true condition. The sin unto death may become an option, but sometimes that believer will be kept alive in order to test another believer.

3.       Repentance is reversionism recovery. A period of time given to recover, which depends on how much you gap it and how far down you went in the eight areas of reversionism.

4.       Non-repentance results in divine discipline culiminating in the sin unto death. But first he gets to live as the mantle of reversionism to the believer going from supergrace to ultra supergrace. The mantle of blessing. The deeper you go into reversionism, the more you send someone else off in the opposite direction. You are going down and they are going up. You do not intend to be a blessing to someone, but that is God’s sense of humor.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #87


87 01/04/1976 Philippians 3:16 Importance of discipline; authority of original canon


Philippians 3:16  Nevertheless, to that which we have attained, we are to walk by the same.  (BLB)


Verse 16 – to command to advance to the final objective short of dying grace, i.e. the ultra supergrace status. “Nevertheless” – the adverb plên (πλήν) [pronounced plane] used as a conjunction. This actually breaks off a discussion on mental attitude. Enough has been said. This can be better translated in modern English, “However,” because it indicates the discussion on mental attitude is terminated. This adverb recognizes the importance of advancing after recognizing some of the problems that you face, and that there is an objective beyond super-grace.


“thereto” is simply a prepositional phrase, the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative neuter singular of the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç]. It is simply translated in modern English, “to which.” It refers to super-grace status recently attained by the apostle Paul.


“we have already attained” – there is no adverb êdê (ἤδη) [pronounced AY-day] here for “already.” We simply have the aorist active indicative of the verb phthánō (φθάνω) [pronounced FTHAHN-oh] which means to have just arrived, to come up to, to reach, to attain. We literally translate, “However the objective to which we have attained.” The aorist tense is a dramatic aorist, it states a present reality—super-grace status—with the certitude of a past event. The idiom emphasizes the attainment of super-grace which was achieved when Paul was at Caesarea. The active voice: super-grace Paul produces the action of the verb, namely recovery from the Jerusalem reversionism and now advancing to ultra supergrace. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal idea from the viewpoint of historical reality.


“let us walk by the same rule” – this includes the instrumental singular from the definite article which is used here as a demonstrative pronoun. The demonstrative pronoun is going to put great emphasis on the function of GAP as the means of achieving reversion recovery. Also there is the instrumental singular from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] which emphasizes the function of GAP and resulting doctrine in the soul as the means of spiritual advance—“by that same [function of GAP].” Plus the present active infinitive of the verb stoicheô (στοιχέω) [pronounced stoy-KHEH-oh], which does not mean to walk. It means to march, to be under discipline. You can walk without being under discipline but you cannot march without being under discipline. It is advancing in steps with others, performing maneuvers with a group of people, all of who are under the same discipline. The emphasis here is on discipline. No one ever advances apart from the discipline of Bible teaching. Advancing in rank implies the perpetuation of academic discipline in moving from supergrace to ultra supergrace. We have in stoicheô (στοιχέω) [pronounced stoy-KHEH-oh] a present tense. There is no spiritual advance apart from the academic discipline of Bible teaching and the assembly of the local church. The customary present tense, then, denotes what habitually occurs when the believer recognizes the authority of his right pastor and continues under the function of GAP. Whether he likes him or dislikes him is totally inconsequential. The active voice: the believer having reached super-grace must continue to advance to the next objective. The infinitive is used as the imperative mood. That is why it is called the imperative infinitive in which the infinitive is substituted for the imperative mood of command, the imperative mood of the finite verb. Therefore the translation, “keep advancing in ranks to the next objective.”


“let us mind the same thing” – there is nothing right about that translation! Six words for three words in the Greek, and it is not correct in any way—tô (τ) [pronounced toh] autô (αὐτ) [pronounced ow-TOH] phronein. The words tô (τ) [pronounced toh] autô (αὐτ) [pronounced ow-TOH] means “the same,” and phronein means to think or to mind—to think or to mind the same thing. But that isn’t what is really here. The problem is that this is not here at all, someone wrote that in! Whoever did was tampering with the Word of God; he wanted it to say something it didn’t. The original manuscripts of the Greek to not have this in them. But instead of that we have the instrumental singular from kanôn (κανών) [pronounced kan-OWN], the title for the Bible. It is the Greek word which means rule or standard. It refers to the sum total of Christian doctrine in the Word of God.


There are two variant readings here: (1) the same to march, canon; the same mind (Westcott-Hort text) and (2) the same to march, the same mind (Scrivener Textus Receptus). (3) Bob is suggesting, by his translation, that we do not have the same mind at all, but the same canon.


Bob on prep school and how any teaching that takes place must be compatible with his teaching. That phase of Berachah history is past.


Philippians 3:16 However, the objective to which we have obtained [supergrace] by that same function [of GAP], let us keep advancing in ranks by means the same canon [Bible].


The transfer of what is in the Scripture to your own soul is the mechanical means of fulfilling this command.


Principle

1.       This verse is a command to keep advancing in the spiritual life.

2.       This can only be accomplished by the same methods by which all progress is made: the continuation and persistence in the function of GAP under one’s right pastor-teacher.

3.       The pastor is under authority also. He is under the authority of the Lord Jesus Christ. He is under the authority of the written Word and he cannot exceed his orders and bend the Word of God to say something it doesn’t.

4.       Normal function and production of the royal priesthood begins when you break the maturity barrier.

5.       It follows that ultra supergrace not only intensifies blessing but production. It also increases to the maximum the glorification of Jesus Christ.

6.       Only supergrace believers max out the production of the Christian life.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #88


88 01/04/1976 Philippians 3:17 Spiritual chain of command; right pastor–teacher; doctrine of walking


Chapter 3 translation read.


There is the authority of the written Word, which is the canon of Scripture. A pastor needs to be able to work with the original languages in order to correctly present the Word of God. Last time, we found that that was a whole phrase that did not belong and a phrase that was missing.


Scofield said that it was a tragedy that they did not know the original languages. His assistance was Lewis Sperry Chafer. Scofield told Chafer to found a seminary which teaches the original languages.


The pastor-teacher bypasses the chain of command, which causes his congregation to bypass that same chain of command. That bypass is not knowing the original languages.


Philippians 3:17  Be imitators together of me brothers, and consider those walking thus, as you have us for a pattern.  (BLB)


Verse 17 – no believer can advance beyond the spiritual growth of his right pastor-teacher. “Brethren” is the vocative plural of adelphoi (ἀδελφοί) [pronounced ad-el-FOY], a reference to the royal family of God, and/or the Church Age believer.


“be” is a present active imperative from the verb eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs or may be reasonably expected to occur when the believer is perpetually under the teaching of the pastor, and the pastor is perpetually studying the Word of God. The active voice refers to the believer producing the action of the verb by advancing to the next objective, ultra supergrace. The imperative mood is a command to mature believers, not to babies.


“followers together” – not a good translation. This is a predicate nominative in the plural from the substantive summimētês (συμμιμητής) [pronounced soom-mim-ay-TACE]. It means co-imitators. Co-imitators of whom? The next phrase answers, an objective genitive singular from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], referring to the writer, the apostle Paul as an advancing believer. He is advancing from supergrace to ultra supergrace. The prison epistles—Ephesians, Philippians and Colossians—lead believers to supergrace; the pastoral epistles lead believers to ultra supergrace.


“and mark them” – the continuative use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the present active imperative from the verb skopéō (σκοπέω) [pronounced skohp-EH-oh] which means to regard in the sense of looking for, to the observe and have respect for. This is academic discipline of the function of GAP—“be having respect for.” The present tense is a customary present for what may be reasonably expected to occur from a believer who is positive toward Bible doctrine and understands the importance of the Word as over against any human personality in any Christian situation. The active voice: the positive believer produces the action of the verb by looking for and having respect for his right pastor. How does one have respect for his right pastor? On the basis of his message only! Not on the basis of his personality, his life, or any other human factor involved. It must be the message for it is the message that he has in his soul from his Bible study which is the basis of his personal advance, and also the basis of the congregation’s personal advance. With this is the accusative plural direct object, plus the definite article used as an attributive intensive pronoun emphasizing the identity of your right pastor.


“which walk so” – the word which includes an adverb adverb: hoútô (oὕτω) [pronounced HOO-toh], referring to what precedes. It is translated literally, “in this manner.” With that is peripateô (περιπατέω) [pronounced per-ee-paht-EH-oh] in the present active participle. The word means to walk, used here for advancing—“constantly walking in this manner.”[5] The present tense of peripateô (περιπατέω) [pronounced per-ee-paht-EH-oh] is the present of duration, it denotes what has been happening in the past and continues into the present time, namely the study and growth of the apostle Paul, the study and growth of certain pastor-teachers in every generation because they are prepared to study and prepared to stay with the Word, and prepared therefore for growth. The active voice: positive volition on the part of the pastor produces the action of the verb. The participle is circumstantial.


Doctrine of Walking

1.       Walking. in the New Testament can be classified by two different categories.

          1)       Literal walking is the forward locomotion of biped homo sapien propelling himself with the use of legs and physical energy. Placing the weight on one foot then the next. Ambugation, transversing,

          2)       Spiritual walking is the modus operandi of the Church Age believer in executing the protocol plan of God which requires spiritual energy.

2.       Old Testament Words for Walking.

          1)       hâlake (הָלַךְ) [pronounced haw-LAHKe], which means to go, to come, to depart, to walk. Used for living or pursuing a way of life, like Ezra 5:6, 7 11:12, 20 Psalm 89:41 walking in the counsel of someone. Psalm 1:1 Micah 6:16 also used for walking in righteousness. To live a righteous life by divine standards. Isaiah 33:15 Walking in wind, which is which is walking in falsehood in Micah 2:11.

          2)       Jalak could not find this one.

3.       New Testament Words for Walking.

          1)       The Greek word peripateô (περιπατέω) [pronounced per-ee-paht-EH-oh] means to walk or to walk around. It is used for literal walking in Matthew 4:18. But it is used primarily for the function of the protocol plan of God in the Church Age in such passages as Romans 6:4; Galatians 5:16; Ephesians 5:2. It is used for the modus operandi of the carnal Christian as well in 1Corinthians 3:3 and Philippians 3:18. It is used for the modus operandi of the unbeliever in Ephesians 2:2 and Colossians 3:7.

          2)       The Greek word stoicheô (στοιχέω) [pronounced stoy-KHEH-oh] means to march in step, to march in rank, to walk in agreement with, to function in a system, to follow a leader from the ranks. It is used in the New Testament primarily for functioning in a system and advancing in that system to spiritual maturity. It is used for living under the omnipotence of God in Galatians 5:25. It is used for the pattern of salvation by faith in Christ (walking by faith) in Romans 4:12. It is used for following the rules of the new spiritual species in Galatians 6:16 and Philippians 3:16.

          3)       The Greek word orthopodeô (ὀρθοποδέω) [pronounced or-thop-od-EH-oh] means to walk straight. It is used for legalistic modus operandi and resultant hypocrisy in Galatians 2:14; in other words, they were not walking straight. With a negative, it means to walk in reversionism.

4.       Walking is used metaphorically for the believer relating his life to Bible doctrine. Ephesians 5:8 you were formerly darkness of soul, but now light in the Lord. Keep walking as light’s children. 3John 3 you are marching in doctrine.

5.       Walking is related to the function of gap. One metaphor related to another. Colossians 1:10 this is about walking worthily.

6.       Walking is related to the function of the faith-rest technique. 2Corinthians 5:7 Colossians 2:6

7.       Walking is related to the filling of the Spirit. Romans 8:2–4 Galatians 5:16 Ephesians 5:2

8.       Walking is a synonym for a lifestyle in other areas as well. Romans 13:13

9.       Walking describes reversionism. Ephesians 4:17–18 The gentiles walk in the nothingness of their minds.

10.     Romans 6:4 Walking is used to describe the supergrace believers. Ephesians 4:1 walking worthy of your station of life.

11.     Walking describes the believer under the influence of evil. Philippians 3:18–19

12.     Walking is related to spiritual advance under one’s right pastor. Philippians 3:14–17 Let us continue objective thinking.

13.     Walking describes the believer’s impact on the unbeliever and on history. Colossians 4: Keep walking in wisdom toward the ones outside.


“so as” – the comparative adverb kathôs (καθώς) [pronounced kahth-OCE] which means “just as”; “he has” – present active indicative from the verb echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh]. This is an aoristic present tense, used for punctiliar action in present time. The moment that these things are discovered in the Scripture the believer becomes aware that there is a such a thing as his right pastor. He becomes aware of what his right pastor should have in essence: he should be a constant self-disciplined, dedicated student of the Word of God. As a result of this the pastor will consistently grow, and in his consistent growth he will lead the congregation to his stage of growth as he moves along. The active voice: when the believer reaches a certain stage of growth he produces the action of this verb, having Paul as an example of advancing from supergrace to ultra supergrace. Paul is the pattern of reversion recovery, the pattern of advance to supergrace by braking the maturity barrier, and the example of going from super-grace to ultra-super-grace.


The word “us” is included, the accusative plural direct object from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. Us includes both Paul and Timothy. Both went into reversionism at different times; they both recovered from reversionism; they both broke the maturity barrier and went to supergrace, and then to ultra supergrace.


“for an ensample” – accusative singular direct object from the noun tupos (τύπος) [pronounced TOO-poss], which means an example, a pattern a model.


Philippians 3:17 Brethren, be co-imitators of me [advance to his spiritual growth by listening to the message], and be looking for the same type [studying and growing pastors], constantly walking in this manner just as you have us [Paul and Timothy] for a pattern.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #89


89 01/05/1976 Philippians 3:18 Opposition from reversionists


Somehow, this study is related to 2Timothy as a tangent of sorts. In fact, these are lessons #60–80 of the 2Timothy series. This explains the odd dates right around Philippians 3:1.


When Paul stepped onto the ship headed for Rome, he was back in supergrace. In Philippians 3, Paul sees the next objective is ultra supergrace. Paul is one of the great ultra supergrace believers of his generation.


Timothy went into reversionism, established in 1Timothy, when he was wimpy Timothy. But he got straightened out, recovered, and went into supergrace. And in 2Timothy, he is a supergrace believer who will probably go on to ultra supergrace.


Paul is passing the colors to Timothy, who will take over. The regimental colors will be passed from Paul to Timothy. In the build up, we have seen the right side of history and the wrong side of history.


Review of the translation.


Chelcedon Report, the number of Americans supported by taxes 80 million and 71 million in the private sector. Those supported by taxes exceeds the number of people who are paying taxes. That is a danger signal.


Joan Wilkie writing an article called Guess Who? Guess who spends more money on advertising than (and she names off tons of companies). You do! The US government is the 10th highest advertiser in the United States, spending over $110 million last year in advertising. The ranking is misleading because the government does not pay for radio or television time. The post office spent $13 million a year on advertising, and they have no competition. Advertising for more people to write more letters. We as taxpayers are paying for advertising to convince ourselves to write more letters.


Bob is establishing a parallel between the spiritual growth of Timothy and the spiritual growth of Paul. Where Paul is in Philippians 3, Timothy is in that stage of growth in 2Timothy. That is how they sync up.


Philippians 3:18  For many are walking—of whom I have told you often and now I say even weeping—as enemies of the cross of Christ,  (BLB)


Verse 18 – the opposition of reversionism. The verses begins with the explanatory use of the conjunctive particle gár (γάρ) [pronounced gahr]. It indicates the necessity for the continuation of the function of GAP after reaching super-grace status.


“many” – the nominative masculine plural from the adjective polus,polos (πολύς,πολλός) [pronounced poll-OOS], referring to the large number of believers who when historical disaster occurred, or because they reacted to something else, fell into reversionism, got under the influence of evil. In that first century the reversionistic believer was the greatest enemy of Christianity, not the unbeliever. The believer was fighting the believer, and Satan used believers in a special way; so much so that this verse is going to be very harsh on those believers.


“walk” – present active indicative of the verb peripateô (περιπατέω) [pronounced per-ee-paht-EH-oh]. Walking has to do with modus vivendi, the way of life of the reversionistic believer. The present tense is the retroactive progressive present which denotes reversionism begun in the past and continuing into the present time. The active voice: believers in various stages of reversionism produce the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the viewpoint of reality—wide-spread reversionism and the influence of evil in the first century was the enemy of the truth.


Satan is the greatest personality changer in the world. Doctrine changes the soul and doctrine changes people. Satan knows how to put on a great public facade. The father of all hypocrites is Satan.


The prison epistles take us to supergrace and the pastor epistles take us to ultra supergrace.


Galatians 2 makes it clear that Paul ran the Apostles and that he chewed out Peter.


“of whom” – the accusative plural from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç]. This is the adverbial accusative of reference and therefore it is translated “concerning whom.”


“I have told” – the imperfect active indicative of légô (λέγω) [pronounced LEH-goh] (to talk, to speak, to tell), translated “I have communicated.” The customary imperfect denotes what has regularly occurred in the past. The active voice: Paul constantly taught that the reversionistic believer under the influence of evil produces the action of the verb. The indicative: historical reality for Paul’s constant teaching on the subject.


“you often” – he never stopped. This is the dative plural indirect object from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] and it should be correctly translated “you all”; pollakis (πολλάκις) [pronounced pohl-LAHK-iss] – many times. This describes how frequently and faithfully Paul warned the royal family of God about reversionism; “and now” – nun, the adverb of time. This should be the motto of every pastor-teacher.


“tell” – present active indicative of légô (λέγω) [pronounced LEH-goh], this time a descriptive present for teaching in the process of occurrence. The active voice: Paul continues faithful teaching and warning to both the Philippians and believers of all generations. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of the Pauline epistles as a part of the canon of Scripture, the gist of his teaching which is a monument forever to the importance of persistence in study and teach, and the true concept of communication by which all believers grow. There is no word for “you” in the original manuscript.


“and now tell you” – continue telling; “weeping” – the ascensive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the present active participle from klaiô (κλαίω) [pronounced KLAH-yoh]. This is an aoristic present for punctiliar action in present time. It was a momentary weeping. Inside, Paul could think of all those people he had known in the past and how he enjoyed them, and yet at the very moment that he writes these people have not only turned against Paul but they have turned against the cross. They are anti-Christian Christians, and yet they were former friends.


Bob remembers Fred McIntyre, who said, on their last meeting, that he had the gift of pastor-teacher. He was killed over Berlin in his final mission.


“that they are” – they have made themselves; “the enemies” – accusative plural direct object from echthros (ἐχθρός) [pronounced ehkh-THROSS], used here to describe reversionistic believers[6] under the influence of evil; “of the cross” – descriptive genitive singular from stauros (σταυρός) [pronounced stow-ROSS], referring to the crucifixion of Jesus Christ. The cross epitomizes the principle of grace.


“of Christ” – possessive genitive of the proper noun Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], plus a definite article used as an intensive pronoun to emphasize the uniqueness of the person of Christ” – “they have made themselves the enemies of the cross of that same Christ.”


Philippians 3:18 For many [reversionists under the influence of evil] keep walking concerning whom I have communicated to you many times, and now continue communicating even though weeping, that they have made themselves the enemies of the cross of that same Christ.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #90


90 01/06/1976 Philippians 3:19a Doctrines of enemyship, sin unto death (part 1)


Bob talks about Prep School, which still needs work.


Berachah Church is in the best financial shape ever.


Our government is after Exon, who could solve the energy crisis, but our federal government will try to shut them down. They cannot stand efficiency.


John is the last person to hear the voice of God. God has not spoken to anyone since then.


We will first study...


Alienation and hostility are the key words.


Enemyship (1976)

1/6/76

A.       Definition.

          1.       The Bible specifies by categories certain hostilities and or alienations. Both are irrational acts on the part of humans. Enemyship is a mental attitude sin.

          2.       Alienation means to be well-acquainted with someone and not like them at all.

          3.       Hostility means to not know someone well and not like them at all.

          4.       There is both personal and historical enemyship. An example of personal enemyship existed between Esau and Jacob; an example of historical enemyship exists between the Arabs and the Jews. Personal enemyship is based on a mental attitude sins. There is also Egypt and Israel. Also, the Philistines and Israel. There is Assyria versus Israel.

          5.       There is also angelic enmity. Satan is constantly seeking to gain his objectives by means of hatred.

B.       Categories of Enemyship related to the Spiritual Life.

          1.       Satan and the fallen angels are the enemy of the believer, 1Timothy 5:14; 1Peter 5:8.

          2.       The reversionist, though used by Satan, is the enemy of both Satan and the advancing believer.

          3.       Demons are said to be the enemy of God, 1Corinthians 15:25; Hebrews 10:13.

          4.       Unbelievers are the enemies of God, Romans 5:10; Colossians 1:21. All unbelievers are "in a state of alienation, hostile in thinking, and evil in deeds."

          5.       Both categories of enemies of God will be judged by the Lake of Fire, John 3:18; Matthew 25:41; Hebrews 10:27.

          6.       The carnal believer becomes a temporary enemy of God by being out of fellowship, Romans 8:7-8.

          7.       God is the enemy of the reversionistic believer, 1Samuel 28:16. God is the enemy of the believer when he is under the sin unto death.

          8.       The reversionistic believer is the enemy of God, James 4:4.

          9.       The reversionist is called the "enemy of the cross," Philippians 3:18.

          10.     The pastor who counters legalism with truth is considered the enemy of the legalist, Galatians 4:16. Legalists hate the teaching of grace.


Philippians 3:19  whose end is destruction, whose God is the belly and glory is in their shame, those minding earthly things.  (BLB)


Verse 19 – four characteristics of reversionism. “Whose” is the descriptive genitive plural from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç] which has as its antecedent the reversionist of the previous verse who becomes the enemy of the cross. What happens to them?


The reversionist transfers to eternity under maximum discipline. The low crawl through the 1000 years of ground glass is the sin unto death.


“end” – nominative subject singular of the noun telos (τέλος) [pronounced TEHL-oss], and it means termination, cessation, conclusion. The termination here refers to the termination of life. Then add what is not found in the text, the present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME], a static present. This is what happens to those who are believers and the enemies of God: they keep on being. We translate: “Whose termination of life is.” Then we have a predicate nominative singular. This is how we know that eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] is to be added. It is from the noun apôleia (ἀπώλεια) [pronounced ap-OH-li-a], and it denotes destruction which causes waste or destruction which one experiences. The former is a transitive meaning and the latter is intransitive. The intransitive is correct here for this passage, hence destruction that one experiences is translated here, “ruin.” We are to understand here that the word “ruin” refers to the administration of the sin unto death to the born again believer who is the enemy of the cross.[7]


Sin unto Death

1.       Death is the usual way to transfer from time to eternity, but not the only way. Supergrace blessing or ultra supergrace blessing where God calls believers home apart from death. Enoch and Elisha (Elijah?). There is also the rapture.

2.       There are three causes for Christian death.

          a.       Dying grace, for the advancing believer, the progressing believer. The believer who cracks the maturity barrier. Dying grace is always related to blessing.

          b.       Disciplinary death, the subject, the sin unto death. Always associated with great failure in the Christian life. The place of self-induced misery. Also the discipline for reversionism. A miserable life followed by a miserable death, after which there is no more misery.

          c.        Reversionistic superimposition, Christian suicide. Suicide of the born-again believer. He superimposes his volition over divine volition. He takes his life. He is often psychotic, neurotic or psychopathic.

3.       There are four ways to transfer from time to eternity. This is not cause of death.

          a.       The sin unto death.

          b.       Dying grace.

          c.        The rapture

          d.       Change of station like Enoch and Elijah (Elisha?)

4.       We now focus on the sin unto death. This is how the reversionistic transfers from time to eternity.

5.       He dies under the administration from God maximum punitive discipline. God pronounces the sin unto death, but He delegates this to Satan, to divine establishment government, this is another system of authority. God may utilize the structure of the individual’s life and bring in a disease or a series of diseases. God can use disease. One of the most useful of diseases is syphilis or some good painful discipline or some other painful system of dying. Maximum ways of experiencing pain in your own body. God uses history as well. King Saul is a great warrior, but he died in great disgrace. He could have won the battle because he walked around their left flank, which he traveled to see the witch of Endor.

6.       No believer will suffer or be miserable in phase III. If you are here as a reversionist and you die painfully, but there will be no misery or sadness in heaven. Sin was judged on the cross, so God will not be naming our sins to us. The misery lever stops with time. God knows what hurts us the most. The believer who advances and breaks the maturity barrier will have a happy death. Once we die, no more sorrow, no more tears, no more misery for any believer. Some pastor-teachers use heaven as a lever. “When you get to heaven, you will be ashamed,” etc., but no matter how terrible a person is, there will never be any sorrow in heaven.

7.       The sin unto death is God’s greatest and last expression of divine discipline to the reversionistic believer.

8.       The sin unto death includes both a painful horrible miserable death + loss of two categories of blessing. Phase II and Phase III.


The easy way to learn is in class; the hard way is in life.

1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #91


91 01/07/1976 Philippians 3:19b Doctrines of sin unto death (part 2), emotions


There will be a great exploitation of the bicentennial. The National Educational Association has adopted a program which will be like a May Day rally. The little people are about to get an awful chunk of propaganda.


Bob wants prep school every night of the week that Berachah is open.


The NEA says that we should celebrate the Bicentennial that we need to have a mutual declaration of dependance. Children are to think of themselves as citizens of the world. They kicked off their studies in LA with something they call peace studies. Nations must relinquish much of the sovereignty to an international world.


Bob continues with the sin unto death Part II. Categories of reversionism.


Reversionism recovery, where you hurt enough to want to keep from falling. Rebound is a part of reversionism recovery. The sin unto death covered in the first 30 minutes.


The second category: Reversionists are influenced by emotional revolt: “whose god is their belly” – descriptive genitive plural from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], which has as its antecedent the reversionist who is described in the first category as being headed toward the sin unto death. Now we find that every reversionist has a god, and the god is definitely not God the Father, God the Son, or God the Holy Spirit. While the word is theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS] is does not refer to any member of the Trinity. The present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] must be included because we have a predicate nominative coming up—not found in the text but understood by the Greek text; “their belly” is a predicate nominative from the noun koilia (κοιλία) [pronounced koy-LEE-ah]. The word is used here for emotion. There is also a definite article used as a possessive pronoun. The literal translation is: “whose god is his emotion.” The only thing which influences them is their emotion. The god of all reversionists is their emotion; how they feel is their dictator.[8]


The Doctrine of Emotion

The words heart, kidneys, etc. refer to different aspects of the soul. The heart refers to the right lobe. The physiological heart processes blood; and the heart as the right lobe is understood to process thoughts. The emotion is referred to by several words like belly.


The stomach is empty and it responds to whatever is put into it. In this way, it illustrates the emotions of the soul.


Bowels or intestines are found and refer to the emotions of the soul.


Reins is a portion of the anatomy; they were a reference to kidneys. You can say, “I must drain my reins, and it sounds okay.”


how far can a spiritual zombie get in recovery. A person taking dope.


Bob continues with the doctrine of emotions, which doctrine does not match up with any of the doctrines found in the set of doctrines.


Holy rollers cannot cope with life, so they have to have some sort of feeling. They have to have a great experience. Emotional revolt is a disaster.


Emotion is the appreciatory of love. When the right lobe has doctrine, then there is capacity for love. Emotions stimulate happiness.


The Age of Israel was interrupted. We are now in the Church Age, the age of the royal family. The Jewish age will be completed by the seven years of Tribulation. The Holy Spirit produces the character of Jesus Christ in the believer’s soul.


Believers are to separate from believers who are ruled by their emotions.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #92


92 01/08/1976 Philippians 3:19c–21 Mechanics of reversionism


Notes taken from elsewhere. Close to what is given in this lesson.


The Stages of Reversionism (Here Called Mechanics of Revelation)

1.       Stage one: the presence of reactor factors in the life because of neglect of doctrine. Reactor factors such as rejection of authority, discouragement, disillusion, boredom, overcome by self-pity, inability to handle loneliness, frustration intensified by mental attitude sins. These reactor factors combine difficulties in the life with indifference or lack of exposure to Bible teaching. The result is stage two. Can include personality conflicts with the pastor-teacher; problems with individuals in the church, rebuke and reprimand. Mental attitude sins, like jealousy, implacability, arrogance, guilt complex, operation vengeance, reaction stage with distractions. Health, family, social distractions, gossip, policy distractions; drug addiction, mental incompetence distracts from the ability to recover from reversionism. The believer with minimum doctrine in the soul. Can be reaction to historical events.

2.       Stage two: the frantic search for happiness. The reaction to reactor factors leads to some sort of a frantic search for happiness in order to resolve the frustration part of the reactor factors. The frantic search for happiness follows the trend of the old sin nature. Asceticism leads to legalistic victorious living, super extra natural experiences which have no spiritual qualification - holy rollers, healers, and so on. The trend toward lasciviousness leads to drunkenness, debauchery, and so on.

3.       Stage three: the intensification of reversionism. The frantic search for happiness results in operation boomerang in which the particular type of frantic search merely intensifies the original reactor factors without any resolving of the difficulty. The frustration becomes greater frustration, the bitterness becomes greater bitterness, jealousy becomes extreme jealousy to the point of being psychotic, and so on.

4.       Stage four: the emotional revolt of the soul. The emotion of the soul is designed to respond to the right lobe of the heart. The heart or the right lobe is equivalent to the right man while the emotion is equivalent to the right woman. Emotional revolt shuts down all the valves of the right lobe, destroying the function of doctrine in that area, leading to stage five.

5.       Stage five: negative volition toward doctrine. As a result of the presence of reactor factors, the frantic search for happiness, the intensification and the emotional revolt, a certain type of very consolidated negative volition exists. For example, indifference or apathy toward Bible teaching, being too busy and too preoccupied for Bible teaching, antagonism or personality hang-ups toward the one communicating doctrine, i.e. a pastor, antagonism or conflict with other people in the congregation, failure to utilise the rebound technique and under lack of the filling of the Spirit to become involved with reactor factors, inability to handle prosperity.

          a.       If someone is not your right pastor, then leave quietly. Do not go into any church and be disruptive. Some people are real monsters when they go into a church. They are arrogant, and out of line to go into any local church and attack the pastor.

6.       Stage six: the blackout of the soul. This is an attack on the left lobe but it results in darkness of the soul. The negative volition produces the vacuum which sucks into the left lobe doctrine of demons - 1Timothy 4:1. The mechanics of this is found in Ephesians 4:17 and this is known as demon influence in contrast to demon possession. The unbeliever is demon possessed; the reversionistic believer is not demon possess, he can only be under demon influence.

          a.       Killing is authorized by the Bible in the military and capital punishment.

          b.       Two federal agencies suing a trucking company over a rail. One said to take it down and the other said to leave it up.

7.       Stage seven: hardness of the heart, hardness of the neck, or scar tissue of the soul. This is an attack upon the right lobe or the kardia. It is coterminous with and usually in some ways follows or is related to blackout of the soul.

8.       Stage eight: reverse process reversionism. This is the final status of reversionism, the antithesis of supergrace in which the believer loves and desires the opposite of what the Bible commands. It is a distortion of love, it is a reversal of all the objects of love, it is a total destruction of any true scale of values according to the Word, and therefore the person lives in a state of total confusion before he is removed by the sin unto death.


The third characteristic: They require fame on the basis of dishonour. The word “glory” is the nominative singular of doxa (δόξα) [pronounced DOHX-ah]. This is one of the few times that doxa (δόξα) [pronounced DOHX-ah] is not used for fame and renown and honour, but is used simply for human fame based upon some system of cheating, some system of dishonesty, some lack of integrity or dishonour. Again, there is the present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME] because there is a predicate nominative coming up—“is” is understood in the Greek to be there although it does not occur in the text because of the presence of the phrase “in their shame,” a prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of aischunē (αἰσχύνη) [pronounced ahee-SKHOO-nay], which means dishonour. Also the possessive genitive plural of the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. Dishonour belongs to them as a way of life—“whose fame is by means of their dishonour.”


The final principle: They are under the influence of evil—“whose mind” is incorrect. There is a definite article used as a relative pronoun in the articular present active participle from phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh]. The word is used here to hold an opinion, and we translate this, “who keep on thinking [holding opinions] about earthly things.” The present tense of the participle is retroactive present, it denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. They are under the influence of evil. The active voice: the reversionistic believer produces the action of the verb—thinking evil. The participle is circumstantial.


All kinds of things are going to take place during this bicentennial. There will be all kinds of evil. The study of the right side and wrong side of history was very timely.


Philippians 3:19 Whose termination of life is destruction [ruin or the sin unto death], whose God is his emotion, whose fame is by means of their dishonour, who keep thinking about [or, holding opinions on] earthly things [evil].


Philippians 3:20  For our citizenship exists in the heavens, from whence also we are awaiting a Savior, the Lord Jesus Christ,  (BLB)


What about those who fail in time? Carnality is not failure. Rebound means instant recovery based upon the cross.


Verse 20 – what is the final destination of the royal family? “For” is the explanatory use of the conjunction gar, it introduces the final destination of all members of the royal family. In other words, whether a believer makes it or not, whether he grows in grace, whether he understands that the road to glory is from saving grace at the cross to living grace, to super-grace, to ultra supergrace, to dying grace, and then to surpassing grace, there is perfect security for him. That is grace! It is found in phase three—the concept of ultimate sanctification.


“our conversation” – the possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], plus the nominative singular subject from políteuma (πολίτευμα) [pronounced pol-IT-yoo-mah] [polus,polos (πολύς,πολλός) [pronounced poll-OOS] = from which we get politics, etc, and it means a state, a commonwealth. It means whole body of people constituting a nation or a state or a body politic. It also refers to a body of people united by a common interest. In theatrical use in the Greek language it applied to a company of actors who shared the receipts instead of receiving salaries.] Paul uses this word políteuma (πολίτευμα) [pronounced pol-IT-yoo-mah] when he writes to the Philippians because it is an excellent analogy to the members of the royal family of God who live in the devil’s world. The Philippians were Romans who lived in Philippi, and all around them were Greeks, Macedonians, Jews, all kinds of people. But in Philippi they were a políteuma (πολίτευμα) [pronounced pol-IT-yoo-mah] of Rome. Rome was just as much Rome in that spot in northern Greece as it was anywhere else. Paul is using that word as an illustration to these people, for here is the royal family of God living in the devil’s world, and yet it is just as much royal family as anyone in heaven in the analogy. So políteuma (πολίτευμα) [pronounced pol-IT-yoo-mah] means any member of the royal family. It isn’t conversation, but we might call it the sphere of our citizenship or the sphere of our aristocracy. “For our aristocracy is” – present active indicative of the verb huparchô (ὑπάρχω) [pronounced hoop-AR-khoh], which doesn’t mean “to be” [eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]] at all. It means to exist. “For our aristocracy exists.” This is a static present tense representing a condition, an aristocracy of the royal family of God which will always exist—“keeps on existing.” The active voice: believers of the royal family of God produce the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative representing the action of the verb from the viewpoint of dogmatic reality.


“in heaven” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of ouranos (οὐρανός) [pronounced oo-ran-OSS], “in heaven,” or “in the sphere of heaven.”


“also” is incorrect. This is the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] and should be translated “even”; “from whence” – should be “from which [place].”


“we look” – present active indicative from apekdechomai (ἀπεκδέχομαι) [pronounced ap-ek-DEHKH-om-ahee]. It means to eagerly wait and it connotes anticipation. The present tense is a customary present denoting what habitually occurs in the life of the supergrace or ultra supergrace believer. But the ultimate sanctification belongs to the reversionist too. The active voice: anyone who has broken the barrier to maturity is anticipating, so they produce the action. The indicative mood is declarative, the verbal action is presented from the viewpoint of reality.


Philippians 3:20 For our aristocracy exists in heaven; even from which place [heaven] we eagerly anticipate the Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ.


The anticipation is the Rapture. So we anticipate the transfer of the entire aristocracy, the Church.


Philippians 3:21  who will transform our body of humiliation, conformed to the body of His glory, according to the working enabling Him even to subdue all things to Himself.  (BLB)


Verse 21 – ultimate sanctification. “Who” is a nominative singular relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç]. The antecedent is the Lord Jesus Christ; “shall change” – future active indicative from the verb metaschêmatizô (μετασχηματίζω) [pronounced met-askh-ay-mat-IHD-zoh] which means to change a form, or to transform. However, in the middle voice it means to change or disguise one’s self, while the active voice means to transform. We are changed from the form of our present body to a permanent body that will last forever. Therefore, “Who will transform” is the correct translation. The future tense here is a predictive future, it denotes a future event, the Rapture of the Church, the moment when all of us receive exactly the same type of resurrection body, minus the old sin nature and minus human good. The active voice: the Lord Jesus Christ produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative for future historical reality.


“our vile body” is incorrect. The word “vile” doesn’t occur. The Greek says, “the body of our humble station. Our life is considered a humble station compared to eternity. The body we have at the present time is not vile, it is an excellent body. The only thing bad about the body is that it contains an old sin nature.


“that it may be” is not found in the original; “fashioned” means “in conformity with,” the accusative neuter singular direct object from summorphos (σύμμορφος) [pronounced soom-mor-FOHS].


“his glorious body” – a reference to the resurrection body. This is the associative instrumental case of sōma (σμα) [pronounced SOH-mah], referring to the resurrection body of Christ and we will have one exactly like it, minus the scars in the hands and the feet.


“according to the working” is a prepositional phrase, kata plus the accusative of the noun enérgeia (ἐνέργεια) [pronounced en-ERG-i-ah], operating power.


“he is able” – the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] is the subject here [he and only he], it emphasizes the identity of Jesus Christ. It is in the accusative because we have an accusative of general reference with the infinitive. Then dunamai (δύναμαι) [pronounced DOO-nam-ahee] in the present active infinitive, which means He has the ability from His deity to do all these things. The static present represents a perpetual existing state: Christ always had the ability; Christ is God. The active voice: Christ produces the action. This is the infinitive of intended result. This is a deliberate objective on the part of Jesus Christ on behalf of all members of the royal family of God.


“even to subdue” is literally “to bring under his authority,” the aorist active infinitive of hupotassô (ὑποτάσσω) [pronounced hoop-ot-AS-so]. It also means that even though God cannot bring the reversionistic believer under His authority now, there will be a time when He will. Not now because of the angelic conflict. The believer must be free to go with doctrine or to reject doctrine, as per God’s grace plan. There are all types of authority involved in the Christian life. Many principles of authority taught in the Word of God.


“all things” – refers to angels, to human beings. It refers to the fact that all creatures will be under God’s authority. Even though today in life they have free will this will be changed. All unbelievers and fallen angels will be in the lake of fire under the authority of God. All believers, regardless of how they have failed or succeeded, and all elect angels, will be totally under the authority of God.


Philippians 3:21 Who will transform the body of our humble station in conformity with the body of his glory [resurrection body], according to the operational power from which this same one [Jesus Christ] keeps on being able also to bring under authority all of these creatures.


Phase three is the end of the angelic conflict and the bringing of all creatures under authority. Where do you fit into the authority structure of God?


Bob’s story of the guy who in flying exercises flew very close to the ground, below tree level, and he liked to watch the trees go by, but he did not see the tree coming up in front of him. He hit it with one wing, and ended up about five miles from this point of impact. Bob says, that will be how many of you will end up in heaven.


[1] See the Doctrine of Happiness

[2] See the Doctrine of Dogs.

[3] See the Doctrine of circumcision.

[4] See the Doctrine of Dung.

[5] See the Doctrine of Walking.

[6] See the Doctrine of Enemyship.

[7] See the Doctrine of the Sin unto death.

[8] See the Doctrine of the emotions of the soul.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #93


93 02/18/1976 Philippians 4:1a Doctrines of royalty of Jesus Christ, royal family (partial)


Chapter 4 being done about a month after Philippians 3. This will clarify a few concepts of what is beyond supergrace.


There Are Four Paragraphs for Philippians 4

1.       The perspective of the super-grace life, verses 1-8.

2.       A parenthesis on grace orientation, verses 9-11.

3.       The next objective after super-grace: a dissertation on ultra-super-grace, verses 12-19.

4.       The final objective of the spiritual life on earth: surpassing grace, verses 20,21.


In verses 1-7 we see what is between super-grace and ultra-super-grace: no man’s land. After the maturity barrier is broken and the believer moves into super-grace the next objective is ultra-super-grace. The area in between is filled with some of the greatest tests and pressure that the individual believer faces because this is the final objective that can be attained by the intake of doctrine. Dying grace is merely the reward for it all. In verses 8-13 we see the advance to ultra-super-grace, and finally the logistics for that advance in verses 14-23.


Philippians 4:1  Therefore my brothers, beloved and longed for, my joy and crown, in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved.  (BLB)


Verse 1 – the command to advance to ultra supergrace, not to retreat. This is the most wonderful and most difficult advance in all of the spiritual life of the believer. It begins with the inferential conjunction “Therefore” – Hôste (ὥστε) [pronounced HOH-steh], which introduces an independent clause and is followed by a present imperative.


“my brethren” is the vocative plural from the noun adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS], used in a technical sense to indicate the royal family of God. It is used to distinguish between the believers of this dispensation and believers of all other dispensations and to indicate some of the privileges that belong to us as royal family. There is also the genitive of relationship from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] from which we get the word “my” brothers/brethren. Paul has a definite relationship with the Philippian believers through his authority as an apostle, plus being the founder of that local church. He also recognizes the principle that the royal family of God is a special designation for the Church Age believer only, and consequently he makes it a special point to use “brethren” quite frequently in his epistles, not to promote brotherhood but to promote consciousness of the tremendous mission and privilege that belongs even to the most average believer in this age—royal family of God. This is the only age in which all believers are royal family.


“dearly beloved” – the verbal adjective, vocative plural, adelphoi (ἀδελφοί) [pronounced ad-el-FOY]. This is an important adjective (it modifies adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS]) because it is used as a title for the Lord Jesus Christ, and it is designed as an adjective to make us conscious of the fact that we are members of the royal family of God. It was used in Matthew 3:17 and 17:5 for the Lord Jesus Christ. It was used as an attitude of God the Father toward God the Son that began with the hypostatic union. He was the object of the Father’s total concentrated love. At the point of our salvation, not only were we born into the family of God but God the Holy Spirit also took us and entered us into union with Christ, seated at the right hand of the Father. Being in union with Christ was absolutely unique—the baptism of the Holy Spirit. “Beloved” is used for believers in Romans 12:19; Hebrews 6:9; 1Peter 2:11; 4:12; 2Peter 3:1,3; 1John 3:12, and it is used for royalty[1] only.


In all dispensations, at the point of faith, all are regenerated by the Holy Spirit.


Two doctrines must be reviewed. The Doctrine of the Royalty of Jesus Christ.


Royalty of Jesus Christ

Spiritual Dynamics 1346, 1200-1220 8/13/98; Ephesians 154; Revelation 648; 3John 12; Philippians #93 (2-18-76, 4-4-76); Arm 23, 46-47.

A.       Definition.

          1.       The adjective royal means kingly, pertaining to a crown. It's used to describe a king as the sovereign ruler of people.

          2.       The noun royalty connotes the regal quality or nature of a king.

          3.       The connotation is portrayed in both the original languages of the Bible. The Hebrew word used is meleke (מֶלֶ) [pronounced MEH-lek]; the Greek word is basileus (βασιλεύς) [pronounced bahs-ee-loose]. Both words are used in connection with our Lord Jesus Christ and in other relationships.

          4.       The Bible not only recognizes the legitimacy of various concepts and categories of royalty, but favors it. We tend to be anti-royalty in the United States due to our relationship with George III. Our Constitution reflects some things like a suspicion of royalty. We have ridiculed royalty. It is not considered a good American word, even though we have had our own categories of royalty. However, believers are royalty.

          5.       Our Lord Jesus Christ now possesses three categories of royalty.

                     a.       By virtue of His eternal and infinite being as God, He wears the diadem of the royalty of His deity.

                     b.       The royalty of His true humanity, by virtue of the virgin birth, Incarnation and First Advent.

                     c.        The royalty of His Hypostatic Union, by virtue of His strategic victory of the first Advent.

B.       The Divine Royalty of Christ.

          1.       His divine royalty is based on the fact He is eternal and infinite God, possessing all the attributes of divine essence. This is Christ's eternal and infinite relationship with the Godhead. Jesus Christ is eternal God. He has all the attributes of God the Father and God the Holy Spirit. He is coequal and coeternal with them. As the manifest person of the Trinity, our Lord wears the crown of divine royalty, John 1:18, 6:46

          2.       1Timothy 6:16 1John 4:12. The title for His divine royal patent is Son of God. This royalty has no beginning and no end. All Bible doctrine comes from His divine royalty.

C.       The Jewish Royalty of Christ, the Royalty of His Humanity.

          1.       The royal title of our Lord's humanity is Son of Man. The Jewish royal title of our Lord is Son of David. The virgin birth introduces the humanity of Christ to the world. The royal patent of our Lord's humanity is the virgin birth, resulting in His humanity.

          2.       At the point of His virgin birth, our Lord Jesus Christ became Jewish royalty as a direct descendant of King David in the tribe of Judah, the family of Jesse. Mary is descendant from their son Nathan. Joseph is descendant from their son Solomon, Joseph being Jesus' legal but not real father. Mary's line from Nathan is recorded in Luke 3:31; Joseph's line comes down from Solomon through Jeconiah (who is also called Coniah-see the Coniah curse in Jeremiah 22:24-30, and Jehoiachin, 2Kings 24:6ff; Jeremiah 52:31ff) and is recorded in Matthew 1:11. The Coniah curse is that the Messianic line would at some point be cut off and not be descended from Solomon's line. This curse was fulfilled at the point of the virgin pregnancy of Mary.

          3.       As Jewish royalty, our Lord fulfilled the Davidic covenant. In resurrection body in Hypostatic Union, Jesus Christ will reign forever as the Son of David. Mary became pregnant because God the Holy Spirit provided the necessary chromosomes for her pregnancy.

          4.       Our Lord's promise of the Davidic covenant is found in Psalm 89:33-37, "But I will not break off My lovingkindness from him, Nor deal falsely in My faithfulness. My covenant I will not violate, Nor will I alter the utterance of My lips. Once I have sworn by My holiness; I will not lie to David. His descendants shall endure forever And his throne as the sun before Me. It shall be established forever like the moon, And the witness in the sky is faithful. Selah." Cf. 2 Chr 21:7, "Yet the Lord was not willing to destroy the house of David because of the covenant which He had made with David, and since He had promised to give a lamp to him and his sons forever." Acts 13:22b-23, "I have found David, the son of Jesse, a man after My own heart who will do My will." We fail God, but the integrity of God never fails us. "From the descendants of this man, on the basis of the promise, God has brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus." This is the fulfillment of the royal law.

D.       The Hypostatic Union Royalty of Jesus Christ. Also called His battlefield royalty. When God the Father said, “Sit down while I make Your enemies Your footstool.”

          1.       Our Lord's hypostatic union royalty is based upon His strategic victory during the first Advent, when He defeated Satan during His thirty- three years of executing the prototype spiritual life for the Church Age.

          2.       By living in the prototype divine dynasphere, our Lord was qualified by impeccability to go to the cross and be judged for our sins. That judgment is the beginning of the strategic victory of our Lord. It was followed by His resurrection, ascension and session at the right hand of the Father. The cross was the greatest battlefield in history!

          3.       This royalty makes Jesus Christ the ruler of elect angels and regenerate mankind, Colossians 2:14 Hebrews 2:14.

          4.       The hypostatic union royalty was given to our Lord Jesus Christ as a verbal commission, Psalm 110:1,4, "The Lord [God the Father] says to my Lord [the Lord Jesus Christ]: "Sit down at My right hand Until I make Your enemies a footstool for Your feet. ...The Lord has made a solemn promise and will not change His mind, `You are a priest forever according to the order of Melchizedek.'" There is a complete break with Israel in this royal family. Jesus Christ is a king-priest. The royal priesthood is formed in the dispensation of the Church Age and every Church Age believer is a royal priest, 1Peter 2:5,9; Revelation 1:6. This is a royal family born again into a royal line. Our royalty does not come from physical birth because it includes every race in the world, but from the new birth. You have the same royal life to fulfill the royal law as our Lord Jesus Christ had on the Cross to fulfill the royal law (Jam 2:8). The royal high priesthood of Jesus Christ is confirmed in Hebrews 5:5-6; 6:19-20; 7:15-28.

E.       The Titles of Our Lord's Royalty.

          1.       The divine title of royalty is "Son of God" (or Jehovah Elohim in the Old Testament), Romans 1:4.

          2.       The Jewish title of royalty is "Son of David," Romans 1:3.

          3.       Our Lord has the royal title "Son of Man" because He made the decision in eternity past as part of the divine decrees to come to the earth and provide eternal salvation for the entire human race.

          4.       Battlefield royalty or Hypostatic union royalty title: "King over kings, Lord over Lords; the Bright Morning Star." "King over kings" gives Christ precedence over human rulers; "Lord over lords" gives Christ precedence over angelic rulers, Revelation 17:14; 19:16; Revelation 22:17.

          5.       The royal title "The Logos" is based on our Lord's decision to come into the world and provide eternal salvation. This was an unknown title until it was recorded in the word of God.

F.       The Royal Families of Jesus Christ.

          1.       Divine royalty includes God the Father and God the Holy Spirit. Jesus Christ always had this family in His divine royalty and always will.

          2.       Jewish royalty is the dynasty of David.

                     a.       All His ancestors from David and Bathsheba down to his legal father Joseph and His real mother Mary.

                     b.       His stepbrothers: James, Joseph Jr., Simon, and Judas or Jude. Why are they not called half-brothers here?

                     c.        His stepsisters: at least two, being also royal descendants. Matthew 13:55,56 Half-sisters? Also see Luke 2:5–7

          3.       Hypostatic union royalty is the royal family of God, every Church Age believer. After His ascension and session, there was no royal family for His third royalty. So the Age of Israel was brought to a screeching halt, and the Church Age was inserted, the dispensation for the calling out of the royal family of God. The Church Age is the mystery age, its doctrines being previously unknown. Technical phrases are used to describe the royal family: body of Christ, Church, bride of Christ, baptism of the Holy Spirit, sanctification, and beloved brethren. Age of the Royal family would have been a better designation.

G.       The Royalty of Christ Applied to His Name.

          1.       This is found in three words, kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS], meaning Lord Jesus Christ.

          2.       "Lord" refers to His divine royalty.

          3.       "Jesus" means Savior, emphasizing the strategic victory of the cross, resurrection, ascension and session, Hebrews 1.

          4.       "Christ" means anointed or commissioned one, emphasizing His Jewish royalty. Its Hebrew equivalent is Messiah and refers to His Jewish royalty.

H.       The Royalty of Jesus Christ at the Second Advent.

          1.       Each part of our Lord's royalty performs a specific function at the Second Advent.

          2.       The divine royalty of Christ changes creation for the millennium, judges ecumenical religion and removes it, destroys the armies of the world, removes all unbelievers under the baptism of fire, and establishes perfect environment for the millennium. In His divine royalty, Jesus Christ controls history. Therefore, Jesus Christ judges the world both on the battlefields of Armageddon and in the baptism of fire to surviving unbelievers. Jesus Christ also establishes the Millennium and its 1000 years of perfect environment as the last dispensation of history, a parallel to the first dispensation of perfection.


The Doctrine of the Royal Family of God is also covered Lesson #48; 04/05/1976. Briefly touched on here.


“and longed for” – this goes from the technical to the personal. This is the vocative plural from the verbal adjective, epipóthētos (ἐπιπόθητος) [pronounced ep-ee-POTH-ay-toss], which means “desired.” This should be translated, “Therefore my beloved and desired brethren.” Paul desires to be with the Philippians. As you grow spiritually, you find there are many boring, dull Christians. When Paul says he is not bored with someone, this means he is interested in the Philippians.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #94


94 02/19/1976 Philippians 4:1b Doctrine of surpassing grace (SG–3)


“my joy” – the noun chara (χαρά) [pronounced khahr-AH], used here for a person who causes joy/happiness. Translation: “my object of happiness” or “my source of happiness.” Plus the possessive genitive from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] for “my.” Those who are positive toward doctrine are a source of happiness to the communicator of doctrine.


Bob on being complimented for a sermon.


Making a list of things that make you happy.


The pastor-teacher who studies for two years realizes just how important that Bible doctrine is. All that is important to life is tied in to Bible doctrine. A pastor would be happy for anyone who also pursues Bible doctrine. Nothing makes a pastor happier than a congregation that attempts to follow him in supergrace.


“and crown” – the nominative singular from the noun stephanos (στέφανος) [pronounced STEHF-ahn-oss]. This is not a crown. The Greek word for crown is diadema (διάδημα) [pronounced dee-AD-ay-mah]; it is the crown that the king wears. Stephanos (στέφανος) [pronounced STEHF-ahn-oss] is a wreath which was given to athletes, and was also the highest decoration in the Roman Army.


A bronze armband and a silver armband, similar to our bronze star and silver star. There were decorations about the neck. Their medal on honor is a wreath, oak leaves, some other kind of leaves, and grass. It meaningful when it comes to the soldier’s salary. This could also reflect a soldier’s land.


The Doctrine of Surpassing Grace is found in Lesson #79. Some notes placed there.


“so” is an adverb—houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos]. It refers to what has just preceded. It means “so in this way,” and is a reference to the status of maturity. The Philippians are super-grace believers. Paul is now, in effect, leading them across no-man’s land. He is on his way to the next objective and he is telling the Philippians, “Follow me.”


“stand fast” – present active imperative from the verb stêkô (στήκω) [pronounced STAY-koh], a Koine verb from the perfect estêkô (ἐστήκω) [pronounced eh-STAY-kō] of the verb histêmi (ἵστημι) [pronounced HIHS-tay-mee], and it means to stand firm or be stabilized. This command is given to believers who have cracked the maturity barrier and have reached the super-grace status. Now they need stability in that status to move out once again and to take the next objective which is ultra supergrace. The present tense of duration denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time. The active voice: the Philippian believers who have reached supergrace produce the action. The imperative mood is a command. The command, therefore, to stand fast or to be stabilized introduces the principle that no believer can remain the same in phase two. Either you are advancing or retreating but you never stand in the same spot. Everything depends upon your continued attitude toward Bible doctrine.


“in the Lord” is a prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss], minus the definite article. The absence of the definite article calls attention to the perfect quality of the Lord. The emphasis here is on positional sanctification and indicates the necessity to seize and hold experiential sanctification until overtaken by ultimate sanctification.


Philippians 4:1 Therefore, my beloved and desired brethren, my source of happiness and my wreath [my crown], so stand firm [be advancing] in the Lord, beloved ones.


Principle

1.       This is a command to advance to ultra supergrace and not to retreat into reversionism.

2.       This is a command to advance beyond supergrace.

3.       There is a no-man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace which has certain occupational hazards and hindrances to the advance.

4.       One of these is the subject of the next two verses.

5.       The believer cannot advance from supergrace to ultra supergrace and at the same time become involved in pettiness or personality conflicts, either in the local church or at home, or anywhere else.

6.       Two women in the Philippian congregation have reached supergrace and started out into no-man’s land. But they turned around and fired at each other. That is what personality conflict does. A person’s personality is not an issue in spiritual advance. The only issue is Bible doctrine.


The pastor’s personality is not an issue; but the personality of others on the congregation are not issues either. It does not matter if you are sitting across the room from your ex-husband or three rows down from his third wife, these are not issues.


One reason why prayer is not answered is animosity between husband and wife. Wherever people are gathered, there are personalities in conflict.


Bob wants to go around and shoot pigeons.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #95


95 02/20/1976 Philippians 4:2–3 Doctrines of mental attitude, the book of life


Paragraphs for Philippians 4

vv. 1–7        Between Supergrace and Ultra supergrace, no man’s land

vv. 8–13      Advance to ultra supergrace.

vv. 14–23      The logistics for the advance.


Different from the one given two lessons previously.


So many people get shot down in no mam’s land. Personality conflict means that you will never meet the objective. You cannot afford personality conflict after salvation. It is the result of being in spiritual death; Satan’s policy of evil. This is completely and totally forgiven.


There was a study of women, starting with Eve, then the insensitive woman, then the Queen of Sheba. Here we are once again, a personality conflict between two women (but it could have been between two men).


Paul is in supergrace going toward ultra supergrace, but there are two women who will not follow him due to their personality conflicts.


Exhortation, Encouragement, and Prayer


Philippians 4:2  I exhort Euodia and I exhort Syntyche to be of the same mind in the Lord.  (BLB)


Verse 2 – “I beseech” is a poor translation. Apostles had the highest authority and they never ran around beseeching anyone. There is no begging here. Panhandlers are thrown out. Beseech is a begging word. There is no place for begging in the ministry.


This is the present active indicative from the verb parakaleô (παρακαλέω) [pronounced pahr-ahk-ahl-EH-oh]. The word means to admonish, to command, to appeal, to urge. This is a command which recognizes the fact that the individuals involve have free will. The present tense is an aoristic present. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb of presenting a command to the Philippians church and to two specific people in the church who were about to be shot down by reversionism due to a personality conflict. The indicative mood is declarative indicating the verbal action is from the standpoint of reality.


“Euodias” – accusative singular direct object from the proper noun Euodía (Εὐοδία) [pronounced yoo-od-EE-ah]. It means prosperous journey. Very little is known about her. She is a supergrace believer in a donnybrooks with another believer there. By her name, we known that she was very capable and very professional as a business woman. She was extremely smart, logical, successful, very itense. She would wear tailored clothes today and somber shades with severe personal grooming. She regards this other woman as flighty, a social butterfly, a flirt and obviously, she is in competition with her.


“and Syntyche” – a connective kaí (καί) [pronounced ] and the present active indicative of the same verb, parakaleô (παρακαλέω) [pronounced pahr-ahk-ahl-EH-oh], with the same concept. “Syntyche” is the accusative singular direct object from the proper noun Suntuchē (Συντύχη) [pronounced soon-TOO-khay]. Her name means “pleasant acquaintance” or “happy chance.” She was obviously very loquacious, flirtatious, hilarious, jocular and perhaps a litle bubbly. She dressed in ostentatious finery to match her ostentatious personality. She had a personality conflict with Eudokia.


Dr. Ironside called these women Odious and Soon-touchy.


Mature believers assume leadership and much responsibility in local churches. In this case, two super-grace ladies are engaged in a conflict which is about to destroy their spiritual life and their spiritual advance. They will not be able to follow Paul to ultra supergrace. Such personality conflicts in the local church are not unusual, but if left unchecked, not only do they hinder the personal spiritual growth of the ones involved but they also divide up other believers. The first thing Paul does is deal with this. Principle: You cannot advance from supergrace to ultra supergrace, you cannot move across no-man’s land, in personality conflict. “I urge Euodias and I urge Syntyche.”


these two ladies are out in no man’s land and it is dangerous for them. Let’s assume that at least one of them has a husband, a week sister, and that she has been running this wimpy husband what to wear, when to eat, tells him not to look at that other woman. When she gets in this argument with Eudokia and she has any friends in the business world, male and female; and people take sides.


There was a blowup between Paul and Barnabas over Mark, and the great thing about the church in Antioch is, they did not take sides in this matter. So the conflict was isolated. You cannot do this at a church. If these had strong husbands, they would shut this down. I don’t want you to mention this other woman to me, at the dinner table, to the children, etc. We go to the same church and we cannot do this.


There are too many husbands with no control over their wives. Because women have so much control today, men are huddled back-to-back in bars, in a safe place. There are too many men who have no control of their daughters. Men who have no concept of the laws of divine establishment. The male lion has the main and he is the ruler of the pride. The father is the ruler of the daughter; the husband is the ruler of the wife.


This is not brutal; it is not harsh. This is the only way that a woman can be feminine. This does not reduce women to slavery, but it guides women to a place where they are fantastic. A woman needs a man who can handle her. If she casts a pall of gloom over a house, he takes her aside and he dispenses with this pall of gloom. Women should never be alowed to pout or to throw a pall of gloom over a group of people, whether this is at a church or a good party or a pleasant wonderful Christian home. When a woman does this once, she will do it again. No woman is going to let a wimpy man dominate her because he is a weak sister. When she finds out that she can throw a pall of gloom over the situation and get him to heel and get him to say, “Yes, dear.” And when she tells him what to do.


Bob loves to drive down the street and see women mowing the lawns; or a young boy who is enterprising. And wants to make some money over the summer and go to some kooky camp or buy Baby Ruths.


When you destroy a society like that, you make the men too weak to go to war. We need men who think of their mothers and their sweethearts.


We men cannot live without women. We are not mysogynists. We want women who are lovely and feminine and filled with do.


Probably both of these women are married and their husbands could not control them, so times have not really changed much in that regard.


There are two ways for the women to sort this out. One is for them to work it out together; and the other is for an authority to step in and deal with it.


“that” – there is no conjunction here, it is used as a translational device for translating the infinitive.


“they be of the same mind” – to auto (αὐτό) [pronounced ow-TOH] + fronein. The accusative singular of the definite article to, the accusative singular of the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], plus an intensive pronoun which emphasizes the identity of viewpoint. The attributive use of autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS] means “the same.”


The present active infinitive of phronê from the verb phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh] which means to think objectively. Principle: No person in a conflict with another believer is thinking objectively. You cannot think objectively when you are antagonistic in your soul toward anyone. With the departure of objectivity comes hypersensitivity as well as subjectivity. The present tense here is a customary present for what is expected to occur in the case of a super-grace believer. All supergrace believers have the same mental viewpoint. The active voice: the super-grace ladies, Euodias and Syntyche, should produce the action of the infinitive. The infinitive is the infinitive of intended result in which the result should fulfil a deliberate objective. This means a blending of purpose and result—translation: “to be having the same viewpoint.” This means the same type of viewpoint—objective. They must be objective. They must have an relaxed mental attitude. They must look at one another from the standpoint of doctrine.


“in the Lord” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] should be translated “by means of the Lord.”


Philippians 4:2 I urge Euodia and I urge Syntyche to be having the same viewpoint by means of the Lord.


In this verse the solution is for Bible doctrine to take over where both are concerned, and to no longer look at each other in terms of antagonism but to look at each other in terms of doctrine. You can neither think straight nor function properly as long as any kind of a conflict in the soul exists. Only Bible doctrine resident in the soul resolves personality conflicts among believers. There is no reason for one believer to have a personality conflict with another believer. You cannot think strait or function properly as along as there is any kind of conflict in the soul like this. Only Bible doctrine calms problems between to believers. Personality conflict not only creates false issues for the individual involved, but has an adverse effect on the entire local church. Personality conflict results in failure to advance.[2]


v. 2 emphasizes the use of doctrine in the individual soul; and v. 3 emphasizes the use of authority.


A review of the Doctrine of Mental Attitude. This was covered previously in Lesson #38 and Lesson #86. Any additional notes on this subject in particular will be placed with that second doctrine.


There is no excuse for personality conflict in the local church. If you continue in such conflicts after breaking the maturity barrier, then you will lose it over a personality conflict.


Philippians 4:3  Yes, and I ask you, true yokefellow, help these women who labored together with me in the gospel, with Clement also, and the rest of my fellow workers, whose names are in the book of life.  (BLB)


Verse 3 – the importance of authority over both women, the importance of strong objective spiritual leadership. As long as Epaphroditus, their pastor, was present there was no conflict. But he is in Rome with Paul, and therefore there must be some man in the congregation who can dominate both women with his authority and bring them back together in harmony.


Paul has Epaphroditus with him and Paul will send him back to Ephesus. Philippians 2:25-30. There is one who is there, Gus, who can stand in for Epaphroditus, and straighten out these two women.


“And” is not a correct translation. The affirmative particle nai (ναί) [pronounced nahee] is used to confirm a preceding statement with the significance of a “yes” or an “okay.” The previous statement indicates the personality conflict between two ladies who are in danger of falling into reversionism. Personality conflict hinders spiritual growth at any stage.


Gus is objective and he has established authority. He is a truly great and objective man. He is a manly man. Manliness is in the man’s mental attitude; not in having a great physic. He may not be a football player or a fighter; but he is a man because of what is in his soul. There is the manliness mold and it is wrong (I can stand at the bar and drink you all under the table). This is not a man who talks about all of his conquests.


“I entreat” – this is no command, it is the present active indicative of erôtaô (ἐρωτάω) [pronounced air-oh-TAW-oh] which means to ask. Here it means to request. The indicative mood is declarative for the delegation of Paul’s authority to one of the scene to straighten out the conflict and to preserve the spiritual status of both women. Because Gus is a man, Paul can simply request for him to do this. You do not have to order a real man.


Roger is Bob’s assistant in many ways. He serves gladly. And he is a man about it. When there was a major conspiracy in the church, the men berated Roger. But this did not cause problems for Roger because he is a man.


Paul does not ask a woman to do this because she is a responder, and a responder cannot act as a judge.


“thee also” – the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] plus the accusative singular direct object from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo].


“true” – vocative singular from the adjective gnêsios (γνήσιος) [pronounced GNAY-see-oss]. It is used for children born in wedlock. It means ‘not a bastard’ but legitimate. It means legitimate here, one who is truly a man in his soul; “yokefellow” – this is really his name: Suzugos (σύζυγος) [pronounced SOOD-zoo-goss].


“help” – present middle imperative from sullambanô (συλλαμβάνω) [pronounced sool-lam-BAHN-oh] which means to seize, to apprehend, to take hold of together. It means here to take hold of together and mutually aid; to take hold of both of them and help both of them. The present tense is a futuristic present, it denotes an event which has not yet occurred but which is regarded as so certain that in thought it may be contemplated as already occurring. The middle voice is the indirect middle in which the agent [Sysygus] produces the action of the verb rather than participating in its results. The imperative mood is an imperative of entreaty, not of command, it has the force of an urgent request.


“those women” – dative feminine plural from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS]. The intensive pronoun emphasizes the identity of Euodias and Syntyche as two prominent women involved in a personality conflict which is dividing the church. The dative of indirect object indicates that it is in their interest that arbitration be performed by Sysygus.


“which” – nominative feminine plural from the qualitative relative pronoun hostis (ὅστις) [pronounced HOHS-tiss], to emphasize a quality of former greatness in these women. They are supergrace believers who are about to lose out. They had been great in the past—“who laboured” is the aorist active indicative of sunathléō (συναθλέω) [pronounced soon-ath-LEH-oh] which means to compete alongside with, to team up with. “These women who fought by my side in spreading the gospel” is a good translation. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. In other words, these two women have fought with Paul all of the way through to super-grace. The active voice: Euodias and Syntyche produce the action, they have both moved to greatness as believers. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of the fact that they are in super-grace.


“with me” – referring to Paul; “in the gospel” – in the spreading of the gospel; “with Clement also” – metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive of the proper noun Klêmēs (Κλήμης) [pronounced KLAY-mace].


“and [my] other fellow labourers” – others who had become involved. This had become a congregational problem.


“whose names are in the book of life” – the descriptive genitive plural from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], plus the nominative plural subject onoma (ὄνομα,ατος,τό) [pronounced OHN-oh-ma], referring to these people by name, plus en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of biblos (βίβλος) [pronounced BIB-loss], and the descriptive genitive zôê (ζωή) [pronounced dzoh-AY].[3]


The Book of Life1.The book of life is a registry containing the names of every member of the human race in time. The roster of all born-again believers.

2.       The book of life is related to eternal security. And I will never blot out his name from the book of life. And I will acknowledge his name before My Father and all angels. The believer cannot have his name blotted out from the book of life.

3.       The book of life is related to the function of gap in Philippians 4:3. "Help with Clement and the rest of my fellow workers whose names are in the book of life."

4.       The unbeliever is not registered in the book of life, Revelation 13:8 the people who worship the Beast are unbelievers. Their names are not written in the book of Life.

5.       The book of life is related to the historical power of the revived Roman Empire in the Tribulation. Revelation 17:8.

6.       The book of life is related to the Last Judgment, Revelation 20:12. Unbeliever's names are blotted out of the book of life. Another set of books, "the book of works," is referred to, which contain every good deed the unbeliever has ever done. Revelation 29:15 says that those not in the book of life are cast into the Lake of Fire.

7.       The book of life is related to the holy city. Revelation 21:27

8.       The book of life is the victim of a mistranslation in Revelation 22:19. It is the tree of life, not the book of life.


We are about to get into the section of Philippians which is why Bob is redoing this chapter; starting next time.


Philippians 4:3 I authorize you, legitimate authority Syzygus, to assist those women, who are such a quality to have teamed up with me in the spreading of the gospel along with Clement and my other co-workers, whose names are in the book of life.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #96


96 02/22/1976 Philippians 4:4; 1John 1:4 Doctrine of happiness (revised pts. 1–3)


Philippians 4:4  Rejoice in the Lord always; again I will say, rejoice!  (BLB)


Verse 4 – “Rejoice” is a very poor choice of words in modern English because it is often associated with emotionalism. That is not what the word means. It is a present active imperative from the verb chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row], which means to be happy or to have happiness. Here it is a command to share the happiness of God. The supergrace or ultra supergrace believer shares God’s happiness as a part of his category #1 blessing, paragraph supergrace2. There are two special blessing paragraphs for the believer designed in eternity past. One is for blessing in time [paragraph SG2]and one is for blessing in eternity [SG3]. No one can receive either one of these paragraphs or the other apart from that spiritual growth that comes from the consistent function of GAP and breaks the maturity barrier, reaching supergrace and on to ultra supergrace, and eventually dying grace. In effect, this is a command to grow up, to share the happiness of God; and this command presupposes the fact that there is a definite divine plan by which this can be accomplished totally apart from human merit. The customary present tense denotes what habitually occurs or may be reasonably expected to occur when a person reaches either supergrace or ultra supergrace. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action of the verb. The imperative mood is a command, an order to all believers. Translation: “Keep on having perfect happiness [+H] in the Lord”—en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss]. This is anartharous, no definite article, calling attention to the high quality, the perfect essence of our Lord who has designed a plan whereby we can share His happiness in time. The prepositional phrase indicates maximum category #1 love, or occupation with Christ, on the part of those who break the maturity barrier and reach supergrace or ultra supergrace.


“always” is an old English word. We say “always” today. It is an adverb of time, pántote (πάντοτε) [pronounced PAHN-toht-eh]. It means “at all times.” Not only can we share the happiness of God but it isn’t a fleeting thing, it is a continual thing. “Keep in having happiness in the Lord at all times.” This is a command given in this context to those who are following Paul from supergrace to where he is now in moving on to the next objective, which is ultra supergrace.


There is a repetition of this command because of its importance—the adverb palin (πάλιν) [pronounced PAL-in], “again,” used for receiving a command. It should be translated, “one more time” or “once more”; “I say” – future active indicative from the verb e)irw which means to communicate a very importance message of doctrine. The future tense is an imperative future used to express a command. The active voice: Paul is repeating because of the importance of the command to share the happiness[4] of God. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of the repeated command. Then, once more, the repeated present active imperative of chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row]. This time it is a retroactive progressive present, it denotes what was begun in the past and continues into the present time as the Philippians follow the apostle to the next objective. The active voice: the believer produces the action as a supergrace believer advancing to ultra supergrace.


Philippians 4:4 Keep on having happiness [+H] in the Lord at all times; once more I repeat, Keep on having happiness [+H].


The Doctrine of Happiness (Revised) has already been covered in Lesson #36, which actually was taught a month after this lesson. However, the doctrine there is not a good match. I have somewhat of a match up in my doctrine notes, so I may place that in here instead. Bob has given this doctrine many times and revised it numerous times as well.


The Doctrine of Happiness (Revised)

From the study of Philippians 02/22/1976

1.       The definition of happiness: happiness is a state of well-being, which is not the definition of +H, but this gives us a general understanding. Happiness is generally synonymous with welfare, with prosperity, the enjoyment of, that status of one’s pleasure in life, one’s circumstances, one’s relationships. For the believer, this is related to divine blessing from God. It is the enjoyment of one’s status in life, one’s possessions, one’s life in general. That is partially human viewpoint, but in view of the fact that God provides these things for the mature believer in supergrace, it also becomes a part of divine happiness. Happiness is the maximum pleasure in life that we are capable of enjoying. Other synonyms, like felicity which is an intense happiness. Blessed has a happiness connotation.

          a.       There are three categories of happiness, –H, neutral H, and +H. –H is pseudo happiness, based only upon what you have in life at any given time. This is all the happiness that Satan can provide through his policy of evil. Neutral H is happiness based upon keeping the laws of divine establishment. This is for believers and unbelievers both. This can be marriage, patriotism, accurately doing your taxes, to succeed in your business, apart from government help. +H is the happiness based upon divine blessing.

2.       The concept of human history. Satan is the ruler of this world and he can promote certain people in accordance with his own system. Both believers and unbelievers are promoted by Satan. Believers and unbelievers are promoted by Satan, often related to their carrying out his will. This happiness is only for believers who have rejected Bible doctrine (or for unbelievers who have rejected to laws of divine establishment). This happiness requires involvement in evil and can result in whatever pleasant environment the Satan can or will provide. Superficial pleasure and maximum recognition from cosmos diabolicus or the accumulation of the details of life. Any believer in reversionism is not only eternally saved, but in this life, he can be the servant of Satan himself. There is service rendered to Satan by believers in reversionism. This happiness is temporary and it will be turned into divine discipline. This is for believers under the influence of evil. This is a thought pattern based upon the policy of Satan. Often provided is a pleasurable environment, maximum pleasure as Satan is able to provide. This could be a sexual relationship between two people who are not rm/rw particularly those involved in adultery or some form of sexual perversion. This could be various drugs for those who are addicted or becoming addicted. A recognition of cosmos diabolicus. This is –H and it quickly evaporates under any system of reaction, like boredom, frustration, disaster, or God using this happiness in order to discipline the believer in reversionism. This type of happiness does not sustain during any type of adversity. There is a happiness in a temporary triumph or evil. This is the other side of historical disaster.

          a.       2Samuel 1:19–20 David describes this kind of happiness. The glory of Israel (that is, the leadership of Israel) on your heights has been mortally wounded (a reference to the death of Saul in the battle of Mount Gilboa). [David also notes that many brave soldiers died as well.] How the brave soldiers have fallen. Do not announce the news of Gath; do not spread the news in the streets of Ashkeloth (another city of the Philistines) lest the daughters of the Philistines celebrate, lest the daughters of the uncircumcised exult [this is a perfect description of –H; the Philistines would have a temporary happiness because they have decisively defeated Israel and Saul the king has been slain. that is the concept of –H.]

          b.       Environmentalists think that they are doing great things for the environment and that they will be fondly remembered as doing great works for the earth, but they are involved in evil. Nothing about the environmental movement is good. They are happy in this. They have –H; Satan is giving them a sense of achievement.

          c.        The Senators who think that they are doing a great thing by taking away the guns of law-abiding citizens; when in reality, this is evil.

          d.       The futility of –H is given in Ecclesiastes 11:8–9 If a man should live many years, let him be happy (–H), but let him remember the days of darkness, for they will be many [this is an unbeliever] be happy during childhood also let your right lobe be pleasant during the days of young manhood; therefore, follow the ways of your right lobe [have a pleasant life], and the sight of your eyes, yet know that God will bring you to judgment for all things. There is a –H made available to unbelievers from the ruler of this world, who is Satan.

          e.       There is a second type of happiness, neutral H. This is derived from observation of the laws of divine establishment. People are very happy because they are free. A human happiness from making a good marriage, from family life, and from prosperity. Unbelievers in category #2 love can have neutral H. A rm/rw can have sex happiness, compatibility and job happiness. Ecclesiastes 9:9 Enjoy life with your woman, the one you have loved all the days of your life of emptiness, that right woman who has given you under the sun pleasure for emptiness, for this is your portion in life and your work. He enjoys his job, he enjoys his wife; he has neutral H. I

          f.        In divine institution #3 there is happiness when children turn out well or when there is rapport in the family. Adult children are a source of establishment happiness to their parents. Proverbs 23:24–25 The father of the righteous [the one who is establishment oriented] will be very happy; therefore, he who sires a wise son will be happy in him. Therefore, son, let your father and your mother be happy; let her who gave birth to you be happy. This is neutral H.

          g.       The happy nation under divine institution #4: Psalm 89:15–17 Happinesses to the people who keep knowing the sound of the trumpet [there is a certain type of happiness that can only be derived from military life; military life, even at its worst, is 1000% more orderly than civilian life. The order of national life deteriorates quickly during a national disaster.] They shall advance, O Jehovah, in the light of doctrine of your faith. [This is neutral H and +H, which is as much happiness as anyone can derive in this life.] in your person [referring to Christ], they shall rejoice all the day. In Your righteousness, they shall be exalted [God vindicates the believer who keeps on taking in doctrine.] for You are the object of glorying of their power, for by Your grace, You will cause them to be promoted.

          h.       Doctrinal teaching has a relationship to happiness, Proverbs 29:18 Where there is no revelation of doctrine, the people are unrestrained, but happinesses belong to those who keep the Law. Lack of Bible doctrine means lack of believers who acts as the salt of a nation.

          i.         Happiness is related to total military victory. Psalm 137:8–9 O daughter of Babylon, you destroyer, how happy will be the one who repays you with the payment of total military victory, which you have paid us. Happinesses to the ones who seize and dash your children against a rock. [That’s interesting, isn’t it? Total military victory includes the destruction of the children.]

          j.         Happiness is related to national prosperity. Psalm 144:15 Happinesses to the people who are so situated [prosperity and military victory] Happinesses to the people whose God is the Lord. Neutral H.

3.       The basis for the attainment of God’s happiness (+H)

          a.       The principle of grace becomes the principle of attainment. God found a way to share His happiness with the believer in time. One of the greatest miracles in life. This occurs under certain conditions. God has a perfect happiness which has never been shattered or changed. God can share certain things, but he cannot share His power. He has found a way to share His happiness. First comes eternal life. Happiness connotes benefit, welfare as well as other factors. To do so in the devil’s world, this could only take place by the great genius of God. +H comes from the believer’s consistent intake of doctrine. Happiness depends upon words. It does not depend upon how much money you make or how many friends that you have. It all depends upon words in the soul. Words start out in the left lobe, but they are not yet useable. But you must understand that word in order to use it. The left lobe is the nouç and the right lobe is the heart (kardia). The command to be happy is to learn words which form doctrines. We are to get the thinking of God in our soul. Psalm 31:7 I will rejoice; I will be happy in Your grace. Psalm 32:10–11 Many are the sorrows of the reversionist, but he who trusts in the Lord grace will surround him. Be happy in the Lord and rejoice, you righteous and mature believers, shout with happiness, all of you who are stabilized in the right lobe [from consistently taking in the Word of God; if you do not have God’s thinking, you have Satan’s thinking there instead]. We had the best internal engines in the world until the federal government decided to regulate what came out of the exhaust, and now, what comes out of the exhaust is worse than before. The federal government is not going to be happy until everyone is riding around in a little Volkswagen. OSHA is evil; labor unions are evil. This is the worst year of American history. There is a freedom train in town, but are they celebrating those who bought our freedom, no! One of Berachah’s own is guarding this train. This is the bicentennial when we are supposed to be celebrating freedom and we have a whole generation of people who do not understand freedom. They do not know what freedom is. Our whole system of education is not learning how to add and subtract and learning about the battles in our history by which our freedom has been gained. We have textbooks with Marilyn Monroe in it. There should be page after page about our brilliant officers. Politicians should never be mentioned, and only in a derogatory way, and never more than a paragraph. But is that what you see? No!

          b.       Psalm 33:4–5 For the word of the Lord is upright [it builds up] and all His works exist in faithfulness, for He loves righteousness and justice; the earth is full of the grace of the Lord. God’s happiness begins at the point where we believe in Jesus Christ. This does not mean that we are happy. Salvation only qualifies us to do so. One of the objectives of God’s plan is to take us to the point of sharing God’s happiness. This is maximum doctrine resident in the soul. +H is still a potential at salvation. If we respond to doctrine consistently, then that happiness will come. The mechanics are something else. It is gap. The filling of the Spirit in Galatians 5:22 is joy. This is a down payment. This is the direction in which the believer is to be moving. The balance of residency between maximum doctrine in the soul. Once you have this you have +H. John 17:13 But now I have come face to face with you and these doctrines I am communicating to you. I am communicating in the world in order that they might be having My happiness, having had it fulfilled in themselves. Sanctify them in doctrine; Your Word is doctrine. This is in anticipation of the Church Age. We share all the Jesus is as royal family. He now has enough doctrine to balance out the filling of the Spirit. It is the treasury of words which produce the growth and the happiness. You edification complex is completed + the principle of supergrace = +H. The only improvement on this is ultimate sanctification, in the resurrection body. The daily function of gap is the means by which this is all accomplished. 1John 1:4 In fact, these things we write [this had to be stored for every generation] in order that our happiness might be completed with the result that you might have, in time and eternity, this +H. This is a periphrastic. God the Holy Spirit had to provide the words. Using his own vocabulary, his own personality, his own frame of reference, John exhales these words as John the human author. The Apostle John preached a great many sermons, but they were not all preserved. But what God the Holy Spirit intended for all generations was recorded in the Word of God. Human authors inhale; and they had information for their generation and for future generations. The pastor-teacher can go to the writings and he can get from these writings exactly what God the Holy Spirit has for this generation. The Greek and Hebrew are the documentation, a very important part of the fact. The writers of Scripture had great messages for their generation; but they also recorded words that would provide the basis for the spiritual growth for all subsequent generations. The definition of inspiration is given. These things are in the Bible to be understood. The pastor-teacher is the only one who can go directly to the Scriptures to gap it. What the pastor digs out of the Scriptures becomes the message.

4.       The happiness of the supergrace life. The words blessing, blessed mean, happy, happinesses. The Hebrew word is asheray; machairios means happy or happinesses. The plural is what is generally used. We share God’s hapiness as a part of our paragraph sg2. There are all kinds of blessings and happiness. Anytime a believer reaches supergrace, they are blessings to others. The supergrace believer and his periphery. His neighborhood, his state, his city, his associations, etc. All of these things can receive blessings due to the close association. A platoon or company can be blessed due to someone in it is a supergrace believer. Romans 16:32 In order that I may come to you in happiness by the will of God. Philemon 7 I have come to have much happiness by your love. 1Corinthians 16:17–18 And I had great happiness due to three men. Paul speaks of great happiness associated with Titus. In category #4, there is spiritual blessing. The supergrace believer is the spiritual Atlas who carries his own generation. The supergrace believer is on the right side of history. Blessing is not necessarily perpetuated from one generation to the next. Every generation is blessed by its own remnant. Paul writes about the mother of Timothy. Category 5 is dying blessing, which is the termination of life. The supergrace believer has the best in life and the best in dying. Dying is only gain for the supergrace believer or ultra supergrace believer. Revelation 14:13 Happinesses to the dead who die in the Lord. These verses do not apply to any believer. Precious is the death of His godly ones (those who crack the maturity barrier). Job on the supergrace believer.

5.       The happiness of reversion recovery.

          a.       Psalm 30:5 For His anger lasts but for a moment, but it results in a lifetime of grace benefits. The weeping of reversionism may endure for a night, but happiness comes in the morning. Psalm 30:11 You have converted my morning (discipline for reversionism) into dancing; You have torn off my sackcloth and You have clothed me with happiness.

6.       The happiness of the ultra supergrace life. The ultra supergrace believer always has opposition. There is the ultra supergrace decoration, and it is made up of all the people who have opposed you. With Moses, this was two million people + Pharaoh + the Egyptians. Wearing this Nehemiah 8:10 The happiness of the Lord is your strength (the more opposition that you get, the more intense becomes your happiness). Philippians 3:1 Finally my brethren, keep on having happiness in the Lord, to be writing the same doctrines to you is not irksome, on the one hand, but on the other hand, it is a safeguard or a security to you. Philippians 4:4 Keep on having happiness in the Lord at all times. Once more I repeat, keep on having +H. 1Peter 1:8 Even though you have not seen Jesus Christ, you love Him. In fact, though you do not see Him but believe in Him, you greatly rejoice is maximum +H, full of grace. The command to perpetuate happiness is the same as the command to advance to supergrace.

7.       There are relationships in happiness.

          a.       Related to to the function of GAP. Proverbs 3:13 Happinesses to the man who finds chakmah (wisdom, doctrine in the right lobe). 1John 1:4 In fact, these things we write in order that our happiness might be fully completed.

          b.       Happiness is related to grace function. Proverbs 14:21 The one despising his neighbor’s sins is miserable. This is someone that you are simply around, and if you despise their sins, you are unhappy, and it shows. You frown with disapproval. You throw out a pall of gloom like a smoke grenade thrown into the cab of a tank. You throw out this terrible thing. You ladies are great at this. Every lady is great at this. You are a walking smoke grenade with the pin barely pressed down and easily released. ...but happinesses to the one who is afflicted. This is an antithetical type development. This is an antithetical distich in Proverbs. If one thing is negative, then its antithesis is positive. If you are unhappy because you preoccupy yourself with your neighbor’s failures so that you make yourself miserable, then if you mind your own business and have doctrine in your soul and live and let live, then you are happy.

          c.        Related to Psalm 128 or 138, the Christmas Psalm.

          d.       Related to the ultra supergrace life. 1Peter 3:13 4:14 Peter zig zagged a great deal in his life. 1Peter 3:14 suggest that Peter did not have a stable, sustained happiness. Peter could not go from supergrace to ultra supergrace because he could not fully understand Paul’s epistles. Paul was the great leader among the Apostles. Bob is primarily unhappy when driving in Houston. He notices the failures of his neighbor who is driving. So many thousands of people have no concept of how to drive. They do not how to use signals, do not know which lane is the fast lane or the slow lane. Bob is intolerant of bad driving. People stop for no reason. Great example.

          e.       Related to supergrace status Psalm 146:5 Happinesses to the one of assistance is the God of Jacob whose confidence is in the Lord his God. The God of Jacob is used here to indicate reversionism recovery. Proverbs 16:20 The one who focuses on the Word will find absolute good and happiness. Happinesses to the one who trusts in the Lord. Proverbs 28:14 happinesses to the one who keeps on being occupied with the Lord, but the one who hardens his right lobe against doctrine [against the Word] shall fall into evil.

          f.        Happiness is related to supergrace prosperity. Psalm 128:1–4 How happy is everyone who is occupied with the Lord and who walks in His ways. When you shall eat the labor of your hands you should be happy [a supergrace believer earns a living and what you eat from whatever you spend on food, you’re happy; some people are not happy at all to eat. ] and therefore, it will be well with you. Your wife will be a fruitful vine [you have more grapes, more grapes being made into wine; so you have more wine; stimulation is the connotation] [your wife will be stimulating] in the innermost parts of your home, your children will be like olive plants around the table. [Olive oil was a source of great blessing in the ancient world; it was used for lamps, it was light in the homes; the children will become great as individuals, with honor and integrity] Behold, for thus shall the man be happy who is occupied with the Lord.

          g.       Happiness is related to ultra supergrace. 1Peter 3:14 But if you should suffer for the sake of righteousness, happiness to you. However, this is a 4th class condition, meaning that Peter was not speaking to those who are in supergrace. 1Peter 4:14 If you are insulted for the name of Christ, happinesses to you because the spirit of glory and of God may rest upon you.

          h.       Happiness is related to the conscience of the mature believer (supergrace or ultra supergrace). Happiness is related to a clear conscience in Romans 14:22 The doctrine which you have, have according to your own norms and standards before God. Happinesses to the one who does not condemn himself in what he approves. Legalists force you against doing something which is pleasant and which you enjoy. Happiness is to the one in what he approves. With maximum doctrine, there are a great many things that you will not approve.

          i.         Happiness is related to one’s relationship with God. `

          j.         Related to the laws of divine establishment in Proverbs 29:18

          k.        Related to total military victory. Psalm 137:8–9

          l.         Psalm 110:14 Happiness is related to national prosperity.

8.       Happiness is related to the essence of God.

          a.       God is perfect, His character is perfect.

          b.       Perfect character therefore possesses perfect happiness.

          c.        God is eternal, His happiness is eternal.

          d.       God is immutable, His happiness is unchangeable.

          e.       God is +R, His +H is related to the fact that He is always right.

          f.        God is justice; therefore, His +H is related to always being fair.

          g.       God is love. His +H is related to His love.

          h.       1Timothy 6:15 Jesus Christ is happy.

          i.         God is omnipotent. He has the eternal ability to be happy and to share it on the principle of grace.

          j.         God is omniscient, His genius makes Him happy.

          k.        God is sovereign and has decided to share His happiness with us. It is impossible for God to be unhappy. .

9.       Happiness is related to the plan of God. God has found a way to give us His happiness without compromising His character [Ps.97:12; Hab.3:18]. Entrance into the plan of God is salvation by faith in Christ, the beginning of the grace function in the plan of God for members of the royal family [Ps.9:14, 51:12]. It begins with a potential and is realized at supergrace. At the dedication of the second temple there was great happiness [Neh.12:43]. Since +H is accomplished through grace [Ps.31:7], it is accomplished through GAP whereby the believer transfers Bible doctrine from the written page into his soul. However this +H must have a starting point. This starting point is entrance into the plan of God by faith in Jesus Christ; but, being saved does not imply instant happiness. God's happiness is still a potential to the believer and depends on his spiritual growth through the daily function of GAP. The first taste of +H comes from the filling of the HS [Gal.5:22; Rom.14:17; 1Thes.1:6]; however, this experience of +H is limited from having no capacity- not enough Bible doctrine resident in the soul. Once a balance of residency [the completion of the ECS] is achieved, then God shares His +H with you and it becomes a reality [John 17:13]. Happiness is the status-quo of the supergrace believer [Neh.8:10; Phil.4:4]. Plus-H protects the believer from 3 disillusions: circumstances [Phil.4:11-12], the details of life [Heb.13:5-6], and people. Plus-H stimulates and enhances the capacity for love. There is a future happiness beyond +H in supergrace, phase 3 happiness. There is a millennial happiness [Isa.35:1-2, 64:4-5, 65:18-19, 66:10; and in the beatitudes]. There are 3 human happiness not related to +H: the temporary happiness of sin, happiness from observance of the laws of divine establishment for unbelievers [Ecclesiastes 9:9, 11:8-9], and the happiness of pleasure in the details of life, it is fleeting and the source of future unhappiness. You cannot build your happiness on someone else’s happiness, and you cannot build your happiness on the details of life to include environment, people you love, fame, violent revolution, the lust pattern and motivation of the OSN. But, you can build happiness on the balance of residency of Bible doctrine through the filling of the Holy Spirit, the daily function of GAP, reaching supergrace, glorifying God in the holding of your supergrace status until dying grace, and by observing the laws of divine establishment. The happy person provides blessing for others through overflow; therefore, this is called the ministry of refreshment [Phil.2:28-29; Rom.15:32; 1Cor.16:17-18; 2Cor.7:13].

10.     The principles of happiness, the bad news and the good news.

          a.       You cannot build your happiness upon someone else’s unhappiness.

          b.       You cannot build your happiness upon the details of life. Friend, money, sex,

          c.        You cannot build your happiness on pleasant environment.

          d.       You cannot build your happiness on people you love, wife, husband children, bf, gf, etc.

          e.       You cannot build your happiness on fane ir success,

          f.        You cannot build your happiness on violent revolution or by being anti-establishment or by opposing divine establishment.

          g.       You cannot build your happiness on carnality or reversionism.

11.     The principles of happiness, the good news:

          a.       You can build your happiness on the laws of divine establishment, which include freedom, property, privacy, victory through the military

          b.       You can build your happiness by entering into the plan of God through Jesus Christ.

          c.        You can build your happiness on recovery from carnality or reversionism.

          d.       You can build your happiness on on the daily function of gap.

          e.       You can build your happiness on by cracking the maturity barrier by going from supergrace to ultra supergrace and eventually to dying grace.

12.     Final point on happiness.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #97


97 02/22/1976 Philippians 4 Doctrine of happiness (pts. 4–8)


A review of vv. 1–4.


Bob reviews the first three points of the doctrine of happiness. These points in this doctrine will be placed in the previous lesson, to continue the doctrine.


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #98


98 02/23/1976 Philippians 4 via Matthew 5:3–8 Doctrine of happiness (pt. 9)


The final point is going to come out of Matthew 5:3–14. My numbering is out of whack.


The content of the Sermon on the Mount is the Lord’s policy during the Millennium, when He rules over the world. It will be fulfilled in the Millennium. Jesus presented these chapters as His platform. The kingdom and its platform are


the tragedy of the beatitudes is their distortion. Almost every liberal who has ever existed has distorted this teaching into some sort of liberal panacea.


Matthew 5:3 Happinesses to the destitute (or the helpless) in the spiritual realm because the kingdom from the heavens is for them.


How to be happy and helpless at the same time. This takes a good slap at the Mosaic Law, where the Mosaic Law was distorted into a means of salvation. Salvation never comes from being good. Who tells you that being good saves you? The Tree of the Knowledge of Good and Evil. Little Miss Goody Two-shoes, who says, “I would never do that.” They love Little Lord Fauntleroy’s, who chime in, “Me neither.”


We learn that we are helpless when it comes to salvation. We do not have the assets to be saved by works. You wake up in the morning and you commit a sin, and you say, “I think I will start over,” and, after five minutes, you commit another sin. You are not doing too well on this salvation by works. No one can be happy and be saved by works.


Bob can look into the eyes of several people at Berachah who have a gleam in their eyes right now; famous Berachah chasers.


Bob went to a Presbyterian Church with a friend. The preacher talked about good people who go to heaven and the bad people go to jail. Those pointed out to be good people, Bob did not like anyway.


So many people associate morality and spirituality. But they are not the same.


This beatitude tells us that no one can be happy when working for salvation.


Then there are the people who cross the river and get up on another horse. You cannot be happy if you intrude on the plan of God with your own works. We have no assets with which God is impressed. There are no works which you can use and go to heaven.


These people are spiritually helpless, but they will believe in Jesus Christ and inherit the kingdom.


There will be great evangelism which occurs during the Millennium, and when the King comes from the heavens and supercedes Satan and establishes His millennial reign, He will provide perfect environment. The first real happiness that will come to any millennial citizen is when be comes to believe in the Lord Jesus Christ.


There are many people in the world who have no capacity for happiness. They are the wet blanket wherever they go. They are always frustrated by one thing or another. They are full of bitterness, they are down on this or that.


Happiness is helplessness when grace is appropriated. You can appropriate grace by believing in Jesus Christ, and it is the inhale of the gospel of the exhale of faith in Christ. The inhale of doctrine and the exhale of capacity for happiness. Sometimes, your capacity for happiness is having a sense of humor. Happiness has many different manifestations, but happiness always has a relaxed base in the soul.


Next verse is the plural of happiness again.


Matthew 5:4 Happinesses to the sad for they will be comforted.


whatever causes sadness, and the causes in the Millennium will be relatively few. Today, the things which cause sadness certainly are not connected to what we call happiness.


The man at war receiving a Dear John letter. Do you think that he is happy and effusive. When you have some disaster in life, you know that all things work together for good. And what you have is doctrine in your soul. That is your comfort. But if you are a reversionist, then you have no place to go for comfort. Happiness is not always jumping around like a jumping bean.


To comfort is the passive voice and the indicative mood. There is only one source of comfort, and you have to carry your own. We store up in our soul Bible doctrine for the time of disaster, distress, for heartache. God designed life so that the believer can draw upon the inner resources of grace. When you cand o that, you are happy. Happiness in adversity is having the inner resources of Bible doctrine so that you have something there which gives you comfort.


True friends can stand by you, but happiness comes from your own soul. You must have inner resources.


Sad people are happy when they have doctrine in the soul and they use it in adversity.


People get stimulated by buying things, and there is this stimulation there. For some, the stimulation might last for 48 hours. You had the money, you spent it on this thing, and for a period of time, it is a lot of fun.


Adversity is the same way. You face difficult circumstances, but you reach into your soul and you use the comfort from Bible doctrine. It is like having the money to buy whatever it is that you want for stimulation.


Matthew 5:5 Happinesses to the mature believer (to the grace oriented, to the supergrace believer) because they shall inherit the land.


Meekness is one of the major forms of human hypocrisy. A hypocrite may be happy because he has everyone thinking that he is meek, but that is a form of arrogance. Meekness can be defined as a cover for arrogance or for an inferiority complex.


The Greek word here is from Classical Greek. Milk, nonviolent, friendly. The interpretation, it is the supergrace believer in the Millennium. It is technical for the believer who derives comfort type happiness. A meek person in the sense that he has utilized God’s grace to the maximum. He is now mature.


For the person who has God’s happiness in time, he has much more happiness in eternity. He has surpassing happiness in eternity. The happiness is beyond description. The believer who is happy in time, the supergrace or ultra supergrace believer, will have tons more in eternity. Happiness in time is a down payment for eternity.


The fourth beatitude is next, and these are all introduction to this millennial platform.


Matthew 5:6 Happinesses to those who hunger and thirst for (spiritual) maturity [lit., righteousness, which is the fulfillment of spiritual progress] because they themselves shall be satisfied.


Two present active participles here. They both have the same connotation. All of these happinesses are related to doctrine in the soul. Positive volition toward doctrine in the past which gives us assets to draw upon. The mechanics is given in v. 6. You’re thirsty every day; in context, thirsty for righteousness. 2Timothy 4 There will be a wreath of righteousness (representing supergrace); and the crown of life (which represents ultra supergrace). Hunger and thirst can be satisfied, but the next day, you are hungry and thirsty once again. When you take in doctrine one day, you are satiated, but you want more the next day. If you hunger and thirst for doctrine, God will provide it for you.


Most of the time, we have pleroô; but here we have chortazô, a word used for sheep eating grass. This is an animal stuffed with feed. Someone has to provide the feed, which is the job of the pastor-teacher.


Happiness is related to positive volition toward doctrine.


Summary

1.       Happiness, in every dispensation, comes from doctrine resident in the believer’s soul and doctrine is only resident in the soul from the daily function of gap.

2.       Happiness must be understood in terms of a positive attitude toward doctrine, as illustrated in our verse.

3.       Anyone who hungers for doctrine will be filled and satisfied.

4.       Happiness is cracking the maturity barrier. Then God gives us our very own happiness, which is +H.

5.       Happiness is inevitable for the believer who hungers for doctrine.

6.       Such hunger can only result in cracking the maturity barrier. This is associated with five categories of blessing:

          a.       Spiritual blessing.

          b.       Temporal blessing. You are protected from crime. Your property is protected.

          c.        Blessing by association

          d.       Historical blessing. You know that you are contributing to history from the divine side.

          e.       Dying blessing. +H is associated with each one of those.


The intake of doctrine results in great happiness.


Matthew 5:7 Happinesses to the merciful (or sympathetic) because they shall receive mercy (as a gracious gift).


The supergrace believer is a blessing to his friends, his family, and all organizations which he is associated with. Everyone who is associated with you is associated with blessing.


Even after he dies. Anything associated with him, the blessing goes on by association.


Matthew 5:8 Happinesses to pure (right with God; you smell good to God) of heart [right lobe], for they will see God [through Bible doctrine].


1976 Philippians                                                                                          Lesson #99


99 02/24/1976 Philippians 4; Matthew 5:9–11 Doctrine of happiness; opposition to ultra supergrace believer


Whereas we ought to go back and study Patrick Henry, we read the thoughts of communist Martin Luther King. Edward Pesson writes an article about history. He refers to the new histories and how they use language which is incomprehensible. There is a failure to correctly report history. There is a lot of statistical abstractions which are used to make very minor points. History should be a comprehensive explanation of reality. When groups of people are only discussed specifically as groups, the individuality is lost. There should be an appreciation for diversity and complexity of history. One cannot teach what one does not understand, just as one cannot record history that he does not understand.


Jesus presents Himself as the Son of David, the King of Israel. These principles will be put into practice in the Millennium.


Matthew 5:9 Happinesses to the peacemakers [those who communicate the gospel so that others are saved, evangelists of the Millennium] because they themselves shall receive the designation (mature) sons of God.


Evangelists seem to make the least amount of preparation and study. For that reason, much of their message is distorted. Evangelism should never be left to immature believers.


True evangelism should be a declaration of the gospel so that the Holy Spirit makes the issue real to the recipient. The doctrine of common grace, where the Holy Spirit makes this spiritual information real to the unbeliever. He has spiritually dead and has a sin nature.


God does not honor all of these systems which are false. You must take a true doctrine and relate it to the cross.


There is no way that the modern evangelist can get to supergrace. He does not recognize the authority of a pastor-teacher. There is no good news with the fact that I am a sinner or that the wages of sin is death. It is good news that Christ did something about this on the cross. They have a barrel of sermons which they give, and then move on to the next place and give the same sermons.


At this point we leave the millennial platform. Vv. 10–14 is a concentrated dissertation on the ultra supergrace believer. It related him to happiness.


The ultra supergrace believer introduction v. 11.

The happiness of the supergrace believer is v. 12.

The impact of the ultra supergrace believer on his own generation is v. 13.

The impact of the ultra supergrace believer on history v. 14.


Matthew 5:11 Happinesses belong to the ones who have been persecuted


This is the ultra supergrace believer who is persecuted on the basis of evil.


The Mantle of Opposition

1.       The mantle of opposition and persecution is the highest decoration given by God to a believer in time. The believer who wears the medal of opposition wears the highest medal given out in time.

2.       This is the decoration given to the ultra supergrace believer only.

3.       The accolade intensifies the blessings of paragraph SG2 including happiness, our subject.

4.       The accolade of this persecution brings honor to the persecuted, the ultra supergrace believer.

5.       Moses wore an accolade of such individuals. Janis and Jambres, Pharaoh, Aaron, Korah, Miriam, and 2 million malcontented Jews.

6.       Paul wore such an accolade of Alexander, Hermogenes, Phygellus, the 40 assassins.

7.       The more they oppose the ultra supergrace believer, the greater becomes their personal misery; and the more intense the happiness of ultra supergrace, the more that there is opposition and pressure to intensify that happiness. When you grab a person by the throat and you squeeze hard, you hurt them. But you do that to a tangelo, you only get the sweet juice.


Dikaiosunê is achieving the plan of God thus far in your life.


Matthew 5:10 Happinesses to the ones who have been persecuted for the sake of total fulfillment of spiritual progress (dikaiosunê) resulting in ultra supergrace, for from them is the kingdom from the heavens.


The kingdom from the heavens is for the supergrace believer.


Matthew 5:11 You [ultra supergrace believer] are happy when they both persecute and speak all kinds of evil against you, for they themselves constantly lying against you on account of Me.


Some believers have trouble which they bring on themselves.


Every ultra supergrace believer is lied about daily.


Bob reviews the translation going back to v. 3.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #100


100 02/25/1976 Philippians 4; Matthew 5:12–14 Doctrine of happiness (pt. 9); elections; salt


We are studying the happiness ultra supergrace believer.


Matthew 5:10 Happinesses to the ones who have been persecuted for the sake of total fulfillment of spiritual progress (dikaiosunê) resulting in ultra supergrace, for to them is the kingdom from the heavens [eternal life and eternal reward].


Matthew 5:11 You [ultra supergrace believer] are happy when they heap insults upon you; thet both persecute and speak all kinds of evil against you, for they themselves constantly lying against you on account of Me.


The ultra supergrace believer shares the happiness of God according to the blessing of SG2.


Matthew 5:12 Keep on having +H (happiness) even become extremely happy because your reward [is] great [or extensive] in the heavens, for you see in this manner they have persecuted the [ultra supergrace] prophets [the authorized communicators of doctrine in the Old Testament] who [have lived] before you.


This takes all of the persecution which takes place in ultra supergrace. There is opposition from the satanic forces of evil, which is continual in the ultra supergrace life. It is gathered into one entirety.


Points

1.       Persecution of the prophets and other communicators of doctrine is as old as the angelic conflict.

2.       Satanic opposition to the ultra supergrace communicator of Bible doctrine.

3.       But God has taken this intense opposition and has turned it around into intensified blessing and happiness.


Matthew 5:13 You and only you [ultra supergrace believer] are the salt of the land


Salt was used for many things. It was ancient refrigeration. It was used as a preservation of food. This passage is about the ultra supergrace believer and his impact on history. Our nation is through; it is on the way out.


It does not have decent candidates for president or for Senator. Only an occasional voice says something of divine establishment, but it is drowned out by the press. The only correct media is the Houston Tribune. They have revealed the weakness of the state department. They are ready and willing to do it. This presidential election offers nothing and is not going to turn anything around. People in Berachah get all excited each election cycle. It is pitiful to thing that people have been in Bible class so long and think that your vote is going to count. We are stuck with a mess which is coming to every major city in the United States.


No electioneering in Berachah Church. “You’re looking at the only conservative in the country and I am not running for anything.” The person who thinks a politician will save the country has no sense. Berachah is no place for electioneering. Berachah Church is designed to produce ultra supergrace believers. The only salvation for our country is coming down to Berachah and getting Bible doctrine. Salt is what preserves the land and only supergrace and ultra supergrace believers will save the land. History will be turned around by supergrace and ultra supergrace believers.


Points

1.       The Bible must be interpreted according to the time in which it was written.

2.       Salt was used primarily as a preservative and that is how it is used in this passage.

3.       While the principles is true of the supergrace believer, this passage is dealing with the ultra supergrace believer. He preserves his national entity.

4.       The presence of the supergrace or ultra supergrace believer preserves the nation and flavors the region where such believers live.

5.       The survival of a anation in a tragedy is dependent upon the number of supergrace and ultra supergrace believers. There needs to be enough to save the nation.

6.       The existence of such believers preserve a nation.

7.       Divine discipline or nation disaster is restrained often due to the existence of spiritual gift and ultra supergrace believers. The remnant according to the election of grace.

8.       Even if a nation is destroyed under the fifth cycle of discipline, the supergrace and ultra supergrace believers are preserved, as Judah in 586 b.c. Jeremiah and other supergrace believers were delivered.


Salt

1.       Two uses of salt: preservative of food and flavor of food. Both have a connotation. Flavor has to do with society and preservation has to do with nationalism.

2.       The believer’s impact on society is both spiritual and establishment oriented.

3.       In the spiritual category, the believer participates through evangelism as well as through blessing by association.

4.       The supergrace blessing and the ultra supergrace believer both appreciate the establishment principles being applied.

5.       He is both cognizant of the laws of divine establishment and influences his contemporaries in this regard. Therefore, he is pro-military and pro-freedom. Voting does not change things; the dynamics of Bible doctrine in the soul is what changes things.


Matthew 5:14 You, and only you (supergrace believer) are the light of the world. A city located on top of a mountain cannot be hidden.


The life of the ultra supergrace believer cannot be obscured in history by all of the satanic opposition that exists. The ultra supergrace believer absolutely stops any false interpretation of history. He demonstrates that Jesus Christ controls history. According to the number of ultra supergrace believers in any particular region, so goes the history of that region at that time.


Repeat of translation vv. 10–14.


Matthew 5:10 Happinesses to the ones who have been persecuted for the sake of total fulfillment of spiritual progress (dikaiosunê) resulting in ultra supergrace, because for them is the kingdom from the heavens [eternal life and eternal reward].


Matthew 5:11 You and only you [ultra supergrace believer] are happy when they heap insults upon you; they both persecute and speak all kinds of evil against you, for they themselves constantly lying against you on account of Me.


Matthew 5:12 Keep on having +H (happiness) even become extremely happy because your reward [is] great [or extensive] in the heavens, for you see in this manner they have persecuted the [ultra supergrace] prophets [the authorized communicators of doctrine in the Old Testament] who [have lived] before you.


Matthew 5:13 You and only you [ultra supergrace believer] are the salt of the land [the national entity] but if the salt has become insipid or tasteless [reversionistic], how shall it function as a preservative of the nation. It is efficient for nothing any more [that is, it is totally useless] except having been cast outside [sin unto death] to be trampled down by men [fifth cycle of discipline].


Matthew 5:14 You, and only you (ultra supergrace believer) are the light of the (satanic) world. A city located on top of a mountain cannot be hidden.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #101


101 02/26/1976 Philippians 4:5–6 Doctrine of thanksgiving


Philippians 4:1–4 corrected translation.


Philippians 4:5  Let your gentleness be known to all men. The Lord is near.  (BLB)


Verse 5 – the motivation for the advance from supergrace to ultra supergrace. “Let your moderation be known.” The first problem here is the word “moderation.” It is the nominative neuter singular from the adjective epieikês (ἐπιεικής) [pronounced ep-ee-i-KACE]. This is made up of two words, the preposition epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] [over] and the adjective eikos (εἴκος) [pronounced IKE-oss] [reasonable]. Literally it means “over-reasonableness.” It becomes a technical word for the mental attitude of the supergrace or mature believer. This might be classified as super-grace mental attitude. The original connotation of epieikês (ἐπιεικής) [pronounced ep-ee-i-KACE] means that which is the general conception of life. Consequently, what is fitting, what is right, or what is equitable. It was used for a “reasonable manner,” i.e. a person who is totally oriented to reality. In the Koine Greek it comes to mean total orientation to reality and grace at the same time. No one can be more reasonable than to be oriented to reality and grace all at one time. Plutarch used this word for being adaptable—adaptable to society, orderly. Plato used it for moderate or gentle people. Sophocles in his dramas used it for kindness toward men. Josephus used the word for a Parthian king who was very kind in his treatment of John Hercanus. However, the use in this passage is technical. It connotes a supergrace mental attitude and is translated generally, “reasonable.”


The possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun su indicates that this reasonable or supergrace attitude belongs to the person who has cracked the maturity barrier, who is in supergrace and is getting ready to move out into no-man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace.


There is also the aorist passive imperative of the verb ginskô (vινώσκω) [pronounced gih-NOH-skoh], the Greek verb for cognisance. The aorist tense is a dramatic aorist, it states the present reality of supergrace mental attitude with the certitude of a past event, i.e. the attainment of supergrace status by cracking the maturity barrier. The passive voice: the supergrace believer receives the action of the verb, he receives the mental attitude which accompanies supergrace. The imperative is not a command here, it is the imperative of commission. A command signified by the imperative may be in compliance with the express desire or manifest information on the part of the one who is the object of the command. Therefore it involves consent as well as command, and that is the meaning here. Translation: “Let your supergrace reasonable mental attitude be known to all men” —“to all men” – dative plural indirect object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] and the noun anthrôpos (ἄνθρωπος) [pronounced ANTH-row-poss]. This implies that the supergrace believer is oriented in two directions. He is oriented toward God—grace; he is oriented toward man and history—reality, the concept of being rational and reasonable. Grace plus reality is the meaning of this adjective.


“The Lord” – ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss], referring to the Lord Jesus Christ. There is no verb.


“at hand” – the adverb engus (ἐγγύς) [pronounced eng-GOOÇ]. There are five different ways in which the adverb can be understood. It means “near” as to place, an adverb of place as in Luke 19:11. This is also an adverb of time, as in Matthew 24:32–33, where it means near in the sense of time. It is also used as being in the covenant in Ephesians 2:13; it means near in that sense. There is also another meaning, as in Ephesians 2:17, meaning to be near to God—relationship. But here engus (ἐγγύς) [pronounced eng-GOOÇ] means near in the sense of interposition of grace provision—the Lord is near to provide, to be sure that all grace disposition is near in your direction. Principle: Not only is the Lord near from the standpoint of His omnipresence, as per Isaiah 31:10; Hebrews 4:13, but living grace makes it possible for the believer to reach supergrace and understand fully the reality of grace provision—God’s total provision for the helpless person who has crossed the maturity barrier. “Near grace” makes it possible for the supergrace believer also to advance to ultra supergrace.


And the whole principle in this phrase is simply this: You went from saving grace to super-grace, says Paul, by way of living grace. Living grace was all the provision necessary to get you to cross that maturity barrier. You cracked that barrier because you GAPed it daily; you had all the provision necessary to do so. Next objective is ultra supergrace, and the grace provision which took you from salvation to supergrace will also carry you from supergrace to ultra supergrace. That is the meaning of the nearness of the Lord in this phrase. Near grace is a supercharger performing the same function as living grace except that the provision is intensified in the advance.


Principle

1.       *Near grace is the supercharger, it performs the same function in no-man’s land that living grace performed in the advance to maturity.

2.       *Near grace recognizes the tremendous opposition which develops in the life of any believer advancing through no-man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace.

3.       *The intense opposition from the Satanic forces of evil calls for the intensified provision of grace, therefore another category: near grace.

4.       *In near grace the Lord makes special provision for the supergrace believer advancing to the next objective. Here the going gets tough and the Lord’s provision is greater than the stiffness of the opposition.


Philippians 4:5 Let your mature [supergrace], reasonable mental attitude be known to all mankind. The Lord is near.


Philippians 4:6  Be anxious about nothing, but in everything, by prayer and supplication with thanksgiving, let your requests be made known to God.  (BLB)


Verse 6 – some of the techniques involved. Techniques that were used under living grace are now repeated under near grace. For example, faith-rest and prayer will now be used again under near grace, the logistical provision of God to cross no-man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace. In other words, this is a matter of divine logistics. God provides under living grace the logistics to move from a to b, and now once again, God provides the logistics to move from x to y. It is the same grace principle but a different logistical problem.


“Be careful for nothing” – the accusative singular direct object a negative adjective mêdeis (μηδείς) [pronounced may-DICE], plus the present active imperative from the verb merimnaô (μεριμνάω) [pronounced mer-im-NAH-oh] which means to have anxiety, to be unduly concerned. Even occasionally it means to worry. With the negative adjective mêdeis (μηδείς) [pronounced may-DICE] it it means not to be that sort of thing. The present tense is the aoristic present, denoting punctiliar action at the point of moving out into no-man’s land. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action of the verb under the logistics of near grace. The imperative mood is not a command, it is the imperative of prohibition expressing a negative command in the advance from supergrace to ultra supergrace. Literally, “Have anxiety about nothing.” This is idiomatic for ‘Stop worrying about anything.’


Worry

1.       Principle: Worry is a mental attitude sin which separates the believer from his inner resources of grace and cuts off divine logistics. Worry is the way that the supply line is cut. Worry means no trust in logistical grace.

2.       Worry short-circuits the function of the faith-rest technique and causes the believer to be pinned down in no-man’s land. The place between supergrace and ultra supergrace. You cannot be pinned down and you cannot retreat. You do not retreat to supergrace, but you go back into reversionism.

3.       Worry unloads Bible doctrine from the soul’s right lobe. You have a technical storage of vocabulary. You have norms and standards which make up your conscience. ἑπίγνωσις is what you understand. As it goes into vocabulary, it becomes sunêsis. When it gets into the norms and standards, it becomes sunaidêsis. It becomes sophia on the launching pad.

4.       Worry is a satanic device to lead the believer into reversionism. Once you destroy sophia on the launching pad, then you lose suneisis because the valves freeze; then the loss of sun eidêsis. Then you come to a point where there is no ἑπίγνωσις at all in the right lobe. This leads to the 7th stage of reversionism, which is scar tissue of the soul. 1Peter 5:5–8 In the same way, be under the authority and command of the pastor-teacher; all of you congregation, fasten yourselves to each other with grace thinking, because the Lord opposes the arrogance, but He gives grace to the grace oriented believer. Therefore, humble yourselves [become grace oriented through the function of gap] under the authority of the ruling hand of God in order that He may promote you at the proper time [breaking the maturity barrier] casting all your worries on Hm because it keeps on being a care to Him; be stabilized, be on the alert, your enemy, the devil, prowls around like a roaring lion seeking someone to devour.

5.       Worry is a great weapon in the hands of Satan, and forces of evil take over the soul as a result of worry. In other words, worry makes the believer vulnerable to the enemy’s attack in no-man’s land.

6.       Therefore, worry not only checks the advance of the supergrace believer but pins him down and makes him vulnerable to reversionism. So it becomes absolutely necessary for the function of GAP to put muscle on your faith, as per the principle of Psalm 55:22 (Cast your burden on the Lord and He will sustain you; He will not allow the supergrace believer to totter.); 37:4–5 (Delight yourself [make love with the Lord]; be occupied with the Lord and He will give you’re the desires of your right lobe; commit your way to the Lord, trust also in Him; He will do it.)


90% of prayers are not getting through.


“but” is the adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH], it sets up a strong contrast between worry and the function of the faith-rest technique in prayer; “in everything” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs]—“but in everything.” This is referring to no-man’s land, to the advance of the supergrace believer to ultra supergrace.


“by prayer and supplication” – this combines the instrumental singular of the definite article plus the instrumental singular of two nouns for prayer. The first is proseuchê (προσευχή) [pronounced pros-yoo-KHAY] [prós (πρός) [pronounced pross] = face to face with], it emphasizes prayer as a principle, as the function of royalty. It is a word for prayer used in connection with the royal family of God. The second noun is deêsis (δέησις) [pronounced DEH-ay-sis], the more common word for prayer which emphasizes the mechanics of prayer, that part of prayer involving entreaty or specific and special needs. In this case the specific needs of near grace, the logistics necessary to move from supergrace to ultra supergrace which is made under great opposition in no-man’s land.


“with thanksgiving” – metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the accusative plural of eucharistía (εὐχαριστία) [pronounced yoo-khar-is-TEE-ah] [metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive means “with,” but metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the accusative never means “with,” it means “after”], it means “after thanksgivings.”[5]


The doctrine of thanksgiving was previously covered in Lesson #9. Any additional notes are found there. Very few changes in this doctrine.


“let your requests be known unto God” – present passive imperative of gnôrizô (γνωρίζω) [pronounced gnoh-RID-zoh]. The word means to reveal something. It means that when you are going through customs you are declaring what you are taking from one country to another. It is making something known. Gnôrizô (γνωρίζω) [pronounced gnoh-RID-zoh] means to reveal something. God knows from eternity past what your prayer requests were because there never was a time when omniscience didn’t know every prayer you have ever prayed. But He still wants you to reveal it as coming from you to Him from your volition. Remember that prayer is a volitional issue in the angelic conflict. This is an iterative present which describes what occurs at certain intervals, but not all the time. The passive voice: prayer reveals or makes known or declares what you have in your soul. The imperative mood is not the imperative of command but the imperative of commission. The word “request” is the nominative plural subject of aítēma (αἴτημα) [pronounced AH-ee-tay-mah] which means “petitions”; “unto God” – the preposition prós (πρός) [pronounced pross] plus the accusative [to or face to face with] of ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]. Here, because prayer is an intimate thing, it is “face to face with [the God],” or “to the God,” either is correct.


Philippians 4:6 Stop worrying about anything; but in every circumstance through prayer and by entreaty [for personal need] after thanksgivings, let your petitions [requests] be revealed to the God.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #102


102 02/29/1976 Philippians 4:7 Doctrine of ultra–supergrace (US–G2)


The Doctrine of ultra supergrace is reviewed. It was originally taught in Lesson #25 and any additional notes will be placed there. There were some important additions and clarifications.


Philippians 4:7  And the peace of God, surpassing all understanding, will guard your hearts and your minds in Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


Verse 7 – the hidden prosperity of super-grace. “And the peace of God.” The word “peace” is eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay]. The emphatic use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is translated “In fact.” The nominative singular of eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay] is used in the sense of the Hebrew shalom which is used as a greeting but it has other much more important meanings. Shalom and eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay] are equivalents which both mean “benefit” or “prosperity.” It refers to that hidden prosperity of super-grace in this passage. Sometimes eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay] refers to salvation benefit, especially when dealing with the doctrine of reconciliation, but here it refers to a special benefit to the believer who cracks the maturity barrier. It is the spiritual benefit which motivates the believer to continue the advance to ultra-super-grace. The nominative singular definite article is used as a demonstrative pronoun to call special attention to the spiritual prosperity of supergrace status. The ablative of source is from the noun theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]—God is the source. Translation: “In fact that spiritual prosperity from the source of the God.”


The Hidden Prosperity of Supergrace Is Category #1, Paragraph Supergrace2

1.       This includes occupation with the person of Jesus Christ and/or maximum category #1 love toward God from maximum doctrine resident in the soul.

2.       This maximum doctrine originates from the persistence and constant function of GAP whereby Bible doctrine is transferred from the written page of the canon of scripture to the soul of the individual believer by means of public speaking in a local church. This requires the pastor-teacher and two or three people at least. This is how the believer grows up.

3.       The hidden prosperity includes sharing the happiness of God, known as +H.

4.       It includes capacity for life, for love, for happiness, and for blessing.

5.       The hidden prosperity includes total appreciation of the character and essence of God, plus an understanding of God’s priorities and following them. God’s priorities become your priorities.

6.       The hidden prosperity includes the dynamics of divine viewpoint mental attitude, as well as the ability to face any suffering, and pressure, any disaster in life.

7.       For the ultra supergrace believer add the intensification of these blessings brought about by the continual opposition, pressure, persecution of the Satanic forces of evil.


“which passeth” – the articular present active participle from a compound verb, huperéchō (ὑπερέχω) [pronounced hoop-er-EHKH-oh] [hupér (ὑπέρ) [pronounced hoop-AIR] = over and beyond; echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] = to have and to hold] which means to surpass or to rise above. The definite article here is used as a relative pronoun. The present tense is the present of duration denoting what has begun in the past and continues into the present time. This is sometimes even static present. The active voice: the spiritual prosperity (called “peace” in the KJV) from God produces the action of the verb. It rises above human thinking and human viewpoint. Human thinking merely reflects the rulership of the world. The ruler of the world is Satan. His policy of thought is called evil, and his policy is now broadcast so extensively that he has converted most of the world. The only hold-out against the policy of evil are believers with doctrine resident in their souls.


“all understanding” – accusative singular direct object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], and with it the accusative singular direct object from the noun noús (νούς) [pronounced noose]. Noús (νούς) [pronounced noose] is a technical word for the left lobe of the soul. This is doctrine you know, but doctrine you cannot apply. To apply doctrine you must understand it, and to understand it it must become epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis]. Noús (νούς) [pronounced noose], therefore, is the human thinking, the information of Satan—the concept of evil. Translation: “which rises above every human thinking.” So the hidden prosperity from God or the spiritual prosperity of the super-grace believer is totally incomprehensible to two categories of people: a) the unbeliever who cannot understand doctrine—1Corinthians 2:14; b) the believer in reversionism who is so inculcated with Satanic evil that he cannot understand.


“shall keep” – future active indicative from the verb phroureô (φρουρέω) [pronounced froo-REH-oh] which means to mount guard or to garrison. This is a gnomic future tense for a statement of fact or performance which may be anticipated or expected under the status of super-grace. The active voice: eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay], spiritual prosperity from God produces the action of the verb, it mounts guard or garrisons the right lobe of the soul. The indicative mood is declarative viewing the action of the verb from the standpoint of reality. This is a logistical concept here: “shall provide.”


“your hearts and minds” – accusative plural direct object from the noun kardia (καρδία) [pronounced kahr-DEE-uh], never used in the Bible for the physiological pump that cycles blood. It is always used for the right lobe of the soul which cycles thought—the frame of reference, memory centre, vocabulary storage, categorical storage, norms and standards (the conscience), and the launching pad by which application is made. The word “minds” is the accusative plural direct object from the noun nóēma (νόημα) [pronounced NO-ay-mah]. It means thought, mind, purpose. But it also means, as here, motivation. Motivation must be supplied. We think doctrine to be motivated by doctrine; we think grace to be motivated by grace. In both the Attic Greek as well as the Hellenistic nóēma (νόημα) [pronounced NO-ay-mah] is the result of activity in the noús (νούς) [pronounced noose], and it therefore means purpose. It always connotes proper motivation.


“through Christ Jesus” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] Iêsou (ιησου): “in Christ Jesus” refers to positional sanctification by which the royal family of God is formed in this Church Age.


Philippians 4:7 In fact, that spiritual prosperity from the source of the God which rises above every mind [human thinking], shall supply [garrison, mount guard] over your right lobes and motivations in Christ Jesus.


Principle

1.       Thinking produces motivation. Motivation in life must be compatible with Bible doctrine and the divine plan of grace.

2.       One of the characteristic of the spiritual prosperity of super-grace is the compatibility of motivation with the plan of God and the principle of grace. You cannot move out with a flank; you cannot move out without a point.

3.       It is possible to do a right thing in a wrong way because the motivation is wrong.

4.       Wrong motivation receives its impetus from lust of the old sin nature, mental attitude sins, sincere devotion to the principles of evil, Satanic delusions as to what constitutes the modus vivendi of Christianity.

5.       The believer who is motivated to focus attention and approbation on himself is completely out of phase with the plan of God.

6.       The believer motivated by reversionistic zeal is actually serving Satan while he is assuming that he is serving God.

7.       A right thing done in wrong motivation is wrong. A right thing done in wrong motivation is wrong.

8.       A right thing done in right motivation is right.

9.       A wrong thing done in wrong motivation is wrong.

10.     The odds are against being right. The only guarantee of being right is the absolute criterion of Bible doctrine resident in the soul.

11.     Only the supergrace believer can be absolutely confident that he is doing the right thing with the right motivation. Therefore, the supergrace believer has confidence that he is doing what is right, and this becomes his hidden prosperity in moving out of the supergrace periphery into no-man’s land and advancing on to ultra supergrace.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #103


103 02/29/1976 Philippians 4:8a Doctrine of establishment


A review of the previously translated verses. Review of previous principles.


Verses 8-13, the advance to ultra-super-grace.


So many believers are dead sticks. They try to get involved in one legalistic act after another. How strong is the doctrine in their soul? That is the key test.


Philippians 4:8  Finally brothers, whatever is true, whatever is venerable, whatever is right, whatever is pure, whatever is lovely, whatever is admirable—if any excellence and if any praise—think on these things.  (BLB)


Verse 8 – the capacity for life which is necessary to make this advance. “Finally” is the adversative use of the adjective loipon (λοιπόν) [pronounced loy-POHN]. It actually means “from now


on” or “in the future.” That is the adverb of time connotation. There is also an adverbial of usage inference and here we have a very rare case of that use. It is translated “Therefore.” The inference is related to the fact that attainment of super-grace also has with it supergrace capacity for life. In the advance from supergrace to ultra supergrace these capacities must be maintained through the intake of Bible doctrine.


“brethren” – the vocative plural from adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS] reminds those who are making this advance that they are members of the royal family of God.


“whatsoever things” – this is a correlative pronoun hosos (ὅσος) [pronounced HOS-os] indicating that there are many areas and directions for the capacity of life for the royal family. The capacity for life only comes as a part of maturity—breaking the maturity barrier. It is translated, since it is in the neuter gender and refers primarily to things, “whatever things,” or better yet, “everything.”


“are” – the verb to be, the present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The following six adjectives describe certain areas of supergrace capacity for life. This is a static present, indicating that when the believer finally cracks the maturity barrier he has capacity for life. Six areas are selected because they are pertinent to crossing no-man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace. The active voice of the verb to be indicates certain areas of capacity for life. The indicative mood is for the actual reality of possession as one in supergrace moves out to go to the final objective.


“true” is the first of the six adjectives, the predicate nominative neuter singular from the alēthês (ἀληθής) [pronounced al-ay-THACE]. This first category refers to the doctrines, the principles, the policies of God as preserved in the Word of God and transferred into the soul by the daily function of GAP. All capacity for life comes from doctrine resident in the soul of the believer, and the word “true” as an adjective refers to doctrine resident in the soul.


“honest” – predicate nominative neuter plural from the adjective semnós (σεμνός) [pronounced sem-NOSS]. This adjective does not mean “honest,” it is something greater than honesty. The correct translation is one of three words—honourable, noble, or worthy of respect: “everything that is honourable [noble, worthy of respect].” Obviously this area of capacity is dealing with establishment. In order for the human race to be perpetuated under conditions of freedom so that people can choose for Jesus Christ in evangelism, and after salvation can choose Bible doctrine as over against the Satanic policies of evil. In other words, we still have an issue in the human race. The Lord has made it possible for each one of us to choose between the tree of lives [choice of doctrine] and the tree of the knowledge of good and evil [Satanic policy: human good and evil].[6]


God has provided freedom; Satan destroys freedom.


Divine Establishment

1.       Definition: Establishment is a set of laws designed to protect the liberty, the freedom of the human race to give us the freedom to say no; to give the freedom to that blonde in the back to talk, even though she is out of line. These laws are just as real as any other system of laws given by God. We have laws called scientific laws, but science does not originate these laws nor does science enforce them, science cannot make them work. Science can, at best, observe them. The law of gravity, by which you stay in your seat, are divine laws. The laws by which you are able to stay alive are called divine laws. The laws of divine establishment operate from the fall of man to the end of history. These laws apply to believers and unbelievers alike. They guarantee the perpetuation of the human race. They guarantee that the angelic conflict will be perpetuated from generation to generation.

2.       Volition, which is divine institution #1, inside of our soul is free will, and free will is extremely important. The essence of the soul. You have self consciousness and you have a mentality. You have volition. You have emotion. There is the sin nature in the soul. You have the right to make decisions. Once you become an adult, maturity is measured by how well you are able to take the responsibility for your decisions. People make decisions to come to church or not, to give or not; to believe in Jesus Christ or you are free to say no. We must make our own decisions without coercion. People have the right to own property; and therefore, we are told to not steal. Each commandment is related to the principle of freedom.

3.       One of the great decisions in life, sooner or later, deals with divine institution #2, and/or marriage. This is based upon rm/rw. Marriage forms the basis for stability in society. The man has the moxie to look over the female of the species and choose the right one for him. Somewhere over there, there is the woman designed by God for him. If she is smarter than you, she is not for you. A smarter woman will eventually run a dumber man. The authority in marriage is the man. The woman also has free will. She must remember that, in marriage, she is surrendering herself to him. Her opinion is not even essential. When she accepts this man, she is his slave. You are surrendering your soul and body to that man. This is the last time a woman gets a chance to make a decision of this type. This is the most basic squad, a squad of two.

4.       This squad is increased to a platoon by sex, which is for recreation and continuing the human race. Now, for the first time, the woman has authority again. She is the Executive officer, and the man learns to back up his EX O. A child is trained by age 9. Bob learned at an early age to escort his mother, by taking her arm, to the table. He was asked why he did not show the other Titanic movie, the Barbara Stanwick version, and that is because his sister looks exactly like Barbara Stanwick. Men will inevitably become frustrated with women because a woman can never go for very long without going wrong in her thinking. That is how they are made. They will not think straight at some point, but you cannot slap sense into them. Some men only learn by being beat up. Bob learned that early in his military career. So he would meet some cadets after taps to fight them. He fought them, got their respect, and then they did not wash out in basics. But you cannot do this with girls. You learn it is a brand new ball game. There was never a woman who walked into marriage who did not need a lot of training. Sooner or later you must develop a wife who is your adoring slave, and if you don’t have that... Some women never catch on. But the wrong women are horsey, they are pushy, they are frustrated. The original and natural teacher is the woman. The woman can teach and no one can teach a child better than their mother. If the mother has not been shaped up, she will never teach authority orientation to their children. So the inculcation of authority, the respect for privacy, the respect for property, respect for the rights of others, respect for law and order, respect for patriotism, all of these things are taught. And in the Christian home, you add the teaching of the gospel and the initial inculcation of Bible doctrine. Doctrine without legalism. Deuteronomy 6:6–9 7:9 You must also teach respect for the pastor, and the recognition of his spiritual authority. If you have roast pastor for Sunday dinner, your children will never respond to doctrinal teaching.

5.       The national entity. Genesis 10:5 Acts 7:26–28 Deuteronomy 32:8 God has ordained this institution to protect the freedom and rights of “X” number of people. It may be in the millions or in the hundred thousands it may be in the billions. They may all be of the same race or different races. But race is never an issue in a national entity. There can be no dual standards in any part of life. The very sign of dual standards means the nation is going down. They are generally in one location, but they can be spread out. A nation must have one language. To think like an American you need to speak the American language. The national entity must possess the following things: (1) interior protection (proper law, proper law enforcement and reasonable judicial administration of the law). (2) there must be exterior protection, the military establishment. All freedom comes through the military establishment. Freedom must be won on the battlefield. The uniform of a country’s armed forces is the symbol of their freedom; not an olive branch. Crossed muskets, crossed sabers, crossed artilliary, that is your symbol of freedom. (3) the principle of government. Government must protect the freedoms and rights of its citizens. (4) there must be an economy based upon free enterprise. The investor and management must have the sole right to formulate policy within their own business and the government and the labor unions do not have the right to dictate to the investor or to management. Labor unions and government control of industry, like OSHA, is evil. Like semi-nationalization, like environmental controls. This is blasphemy; God will keep the air clean. All of our blessings are based upon free enterprise; and none of them are based upon an interfering government. Worse than us, Australia and England. We studied this in the book of Matthew. (5) Common law with objective legislation. The Assyrians moved their farmers around because some were not as successful as others. God said that this is wrong. Common law is designed to protect your freedom, your property and your rights. (6) a common culture. Honor, respect, ability. This will reflect the honor and the nobility and the morality of the people of this society. The essence of patriotism; and this is expressed in the nation’s literature and drama and its art and its music and its history. When these things express nobility, then you have a great culture. But when they decline and express something else, then the deterioration is obvious. Notice how the music has changed from the Big Band sounds or note how hard it is to find a good book anymore, especially in fiction. It is almost impossible to find a book where there isn’t a rape or murder or adultery in the first chapter, and then everything falls apart ala Tennessee Williams. It is true in much of our art today. (7) There must be a good government administration which takes care of these principles, which collects taxes and administers the policy of the nation, but it does not make the policy of the nation.

6.       Evangelism and the client nation. Divine establishment is to protect human freedom so that evangelism and Bible teaching can take place. There must be a separation of freedom and state to protect the freedoms and rights of the individual. Whenever religion becomes the state, you have decadency. In South American countries, the Catholic church has become the state. Cuba is only one illustration. So many only know that it is either the Catholic Church or communism, and they do not know anything else in between. They resent the state and religion being the same and therefore they have had hundreds of years of this and they are fed up with it. This icludes Guatemala. This is why England came to a great point of freedom, because the church of England ran the state for a very long time, and England started to go down. They finally separated. Louis XIV was a genius and he could have had the greatest nation in the world but instead he went down, down, down; because the whole state manufacturing, free enterprise system was made up of Huguenots. Louis revoked the Edict of Nance which destroyed the Huguenots because he got hooked up with religion. Also, there was a woman who had too much influence over him. There must be a separation between religion and the state. You must be able to believe in Jesus or not. You should be free to go your way without any sort of persecution. The state must not penalize anyone for accepting or rejecting Christ.

7.       Satan attacks the gospel, the laws of divine establishment and Bible doctrine; and when a national entity declines, certain alternate divine laws enter in; the laws of national judgment; the cycles of discipline given in Leviticus 26.


“just” – predicate nominative neuter plural from the adjective dikaios (δίκαιος) [pronounced DIH-kai-oss], which means righteous, equitable, fair or just. It connotes righteousness in the sense of the fulfilment of the divine statutes or righteousness as the characteristic which God requires of men. However the neuter gender denotes the obligation to be fair, to be just, to be equitable. supergrace capacity for life includes the sense of justice, the sense of fair play, the sense of right treatment toward all in the sphere of one’s life. When the supergrace believer moves out into no-man’s land he is going to be tested by people, and he must not lower himself to their level and become unfair, unjust; other wise he will peel off in the middle of no-man’s land and crash and burn into reversionism.


“pure” – predicate nominative neuter plural from hagnos (ἁγνός) [pronounced hag-NOSS], and adjective of motivation. It connotes motivation, the function of morality, and it is used also for the antithesis of evil as the modus operandi of Satan. It is not simply talking about morality here, it is talking about evil also. Bob gives examples of things which are impure, like buzzers that go off in your car. They violate the volition and the freedom of a person under establishment. Pure means to be pro-military and pro-establishment and anti-government big spending. It is impure to legislate against the farmer so that he must go out of business, that he cannot make any money.


The third adjective: “lovely” – predicate nominative from the adjective prosphilês (προσφιλής) [pronounced pros-fee-LACE], and it is in the plural. The word “lovely” is not a good translation, it should be “everything that is love capacity.” It is plural and refers to three areas of love capacity: love for God, love for your opposite number, love in friendship—everything that is compatible with love capacity.


4th: “good report” – predicate nominative plural from the adjective eúphēmos (εὔφημος) [pronounced YOO-fay-moss]. It means commendable and refers to every category of human culture, such as music, literature, drama, history. The supergrace believer has capacity in these fields.


“if” is the conjunction ei (εἰ) [pronounced I], a conditional particle which with the indicative mood introduces the protasis of a first class condition. With it is the nominative singular from aretê (ἀρετή) [pronounced ar-EHT-ay] as the subject. It means virtue, which is moral goodness, the conformity of one’s life to the laws of divine establishment. It also refers to a spirit of manliness or a spirit of femininity. In other words, where the laws of establishment function the women are feminine and the men are manly. Masculinity and femininity are attitudes of the soul. Masculinity is not having muscles or bullying people. Also, a reference to bravery, honor, integrity. There is nothing greater than the courage of a woman; and her courage is greater because she is a responder. God designed her to be a responder. Many times she has no control over things which take place, like her husband goes broke or there is a terrible tragedy involving her children.


“if any praise” – again the conditional particle ei (εἰ) [pronounced I], introducing a first class condition, plus the indefinite pronoun tís (τὶς) [pronounced tihç] and the noun épainos (ἔπαινος) [pronounced EHP-ahee-noss], which means “approval, recognition.” But here it is “worthy of praise”—“if anything worthy of praise [exists],” and it does.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #104


104 02/29/1976 Philippians 4:8b Concepts of supergrace–2 and US–G2


Then the command: “think on these things.”


“think” – present middle imperative from the verb logizomai (λογίζομαι) [pronounced log-IHD-zohm-ai], used for thinking in the sense of calculation, evaluation, estimation, and it therefore it comes to mean here “concentration.” The customary present denotes what habitually occurs with the supergrace believer who has great capacity for life and who fulfils these principles. The middle voice is a permissive middle, it represents the agent [supergrace believer] as voluntarily yielding himself to the results of the action, or seeking to secure the results of the action in his own interests. The imperative mood is the imperative of commission in which the imperative mood expresses a desire on the one who is the recipient of the command; his volition is involved; he desires it as much as God desires it. The supergrace believer wants to concentrate on the wonderful things of life which are compatible with his supergrace capacity.


“on these things” is the accusative neuter plural from the near demonstrative pronoun houtos (oτος) [pronounced HOO-tos], it emphasizes the categories in the context. These categories are an expression for capacity for life in the supergrace status.


Philippians 4:8 Therefore, brethren [royal family of God], everything that is true [Bible doctrine], everything that is honourable [laws of divine establishment], everything that is righteous, everything that is pure, everything that is love-capacity [or compatible with love-capacity], everything that is commendable; if anything of virtue, if anything worthy of praise exists [and it does], you yourselves be concentrating on these things.


Principle

1.       Super-grace capacity for life is not left without objects of expression.

2.       Even though this is the devil’s world Jesus Christ controls history.

3.       Therefore there is sufficient in life to express supergrace capacity for life. God has provided not only the supergrace capacity through doctrine but He has provided in the devil’s world the areas for expression. These six categories, then, set up guidelines for the expression of supergrace capacity for life.


 Bob will start with the five stages of grace.


The Five Stages of Grace:

Grace is the way by which God can bless a person in time and eternity.

1.       Stage one is saving grace. This is what God has to do in order to save any member of the human race. Every believer hast tasted the grace of God at least once, and that was the point of his salvation - Hebrews 6:4; 1 Peter 2:3.

          a.       The gospel is presented to every person who believes in Jesus Christ. This does not mean that you heard an evangelist who had it straight. If an evangelist spoke for an hour and said all that was true, the whole world would collapse in a dead faint. The worst students of the Word of God are evangelists. But every evangelist says something which is correct, and this is all that is necessary for the spiritually dead person to hear and understand. This is the inhale which we know as the doctrine of common grace. God the Holy Spirit makes this information real and understandable to the unbeliever who then believes in Jesus Christ (or not).

          b.       The issue after salvation is capacity for grace. This is based upon the amount of doctrine in the soul of any believer after salvation.

          c.        The moment of salvation brings the believer 36 irrevocable items of grace. These cannot be cancelled and they cannot be destroyed. Because of propitiation every believer is also under maximum love from God - 1 John 2:2. Maximum love frees God to pour out maximum grace, but grace can only benefit where there is a capacity for grace. The capacity for grace, like capacity for life is based upon the amount of doctrine resident in the believer's soul. However, the believer is saved by grace which is all the Trinity has accomplished for our salvation - Romans 3:23,24; 4:4; 5:20; Ephesians 2:8,9.

2.       Stage two is living grace or logistical grace. Living grace is all that God must do to keep the believer alive and on the earth in this dispensation. Under that principle God provides everything. Logistics is the military concept of finding a way to supply an army with its food and other basic necessities. How are these things taken from point A (where they are) to point B, where the soldiers are. Napoleon moved 250,000 French troops where they were about to invade England, about 1800, he moved them all of the way to the ports across the French coasts all the way to the field of Austerlitz. Supply, provision, planning, troop movement, any military maneuver, whether it is advance, retreat, evacuation, reconnaissance, exploit or pursuit. Logistical grace is divine provision and supply for the royal family to reach two objectives, the two objectives in maturity. The first is supergrace and the second is ultra supergrace. This is so that the believer can advance from the first stage of childhood to supergrace A, the first stage of Christian maturity. Living grace is the means by which we advance from babyhood to supergrace. It includes spiritual and temporal provisions. Living grace is all that God must do to keep the believer alive in the devil’s world to make this advance. There is simply keeping the believer alive. The air that we breathe. The food that we eat; the clothes that we wear, the homes that we live in, the friends and loved ones that we enjoy; the life that we live on this earth courtesy of Jesus Christ. This is the part of logistical grace called living grace. There are also the spiritual provisions. God will provie us, no matter where we are, the provision of the pastor-teacher and the local church where we can be taught. In some cases, the tape recorder.

3.       Between supergrace and ultra supergrace there is no man’s land. All of these things necessary become intensified. We have near grace for crossing no man’s land. This comes from Philippians 4:5. The Lord is near, which provides us with near grace. The life of the reversionist can be short and miserable or long and miserable. This is Charley company. They are good for nothing except to train those who are trainable. They will be a test to us. These people can have a long and miserable life.

4.       Stage three is supergrace, which is equivalent to maturity in the spiritual life. In 1 Timothy 1:14 supergrace is described as the abundant life. Supergrace is the adult stage of spiritual growth, attended by maximum blessings from God which glorify God. Supergrace is the ultimate in spiritual growth in time and the basis for the normal function of the normal priesthood. Supergrace is the sphere of life in which the royal family reaps what God sows in eternity past. Therefore the fulfilment of Romans 8:28. James 4:6 says, "But he gives greater grace [or supergrace], and therefore he says, God opposes the arrogant [reversionist] but gives grace to the humble." Ephesians 1:6 - "Resulting in the recognition of glory from the source of his grace, from which he has pursued us with grace in then beloved." Cf. Ephesians 3:20,21; 1:16-19.

5.       Stage four is ultra supergrace. Paul said it is better for you that I keep on living, and he lived for another 8 years and wrote the pastoral epistles.

6.       Stage five is dying grace. This is the permanent change of station from time to eternity, the greatest blessing that can exist in life, the highest decoration of life. Dying grace is the experience of physical death under special grace provisions whereby no matter what the type of death may be it is nothing but blessing all the way. The principle of dying grace links the supergrace blessings of time with the surpassing grace blessings of eternity - Hebrews 11:13. Therefore dying grace is the extension of the glory road over the chasm between time and eternity. It is that high golden bridge by which we go from paragraph SG2 to paragraph SG3. Cf. Psalm 33:18,19; 116:15; Philippians 1:20,21. The sin unto death is the thousand yard crawl through ground glass. All their goody two shoes production is burned up.

7.       Stage six is surpassing grace. This is the second of the special blessing and reward paragraphs for the believer. This one lasts forever; this one is in eternity. This is above and beyond the normal blessings of heaven which belong to all believers. Beyond these normal blessings of heaven are the special blessings and rewards for the mature or supergrace believer - Ephesians 2:7. Again, God is glorified forever for those believers who are decorated in eternity.


Bob sees Ephesians as having to be redone, and Colossians.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #105


105 03/01/1976 Philippians 4:9 Cycling doctrine from left lobe to the right lobe


Medal of Honor for being held in prison and tortured for a long time. Took a couple of years to bring him back to normal.


AN evil nation creates people to go on welfare. Soft on criminals, but hard on police officers. Federal government creates the conditions to destroy people, and then props them up with welfare.


Bob lists the reason why our nation is messtup. The problems with the federal government. Support of the UN is evil. The greatest spy system the world has ever known. Bob names twelve things like that which are a problem in the US.


The rise of supergrace and ultra supergrace believers are key.


Two ingredients are needed; a right congregation and a right pastor.


Verses 9 & 10 – the means of advance: the function of GAP. Doctrine has to be the #1 priority.


Philippians 4:9  And what you have learned and have received and have heard and have seen in me, practice these things. And the God of peace will be with you.  (BLB)


Verse 9 – the right congregation. “Those things” – nominative neuter plural from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], referring to doctrine. Those doctrines, things,


Concepts, policies of God preserved in the canon of Scripture. These are the doctrines that have been transferred from the Bible to the right lobe of the soul through the function of GAP.


“which” – referring to doctrine; the ‘both/and’ which goes back to Classical Greek: kaí (καί) [pronounced ] kaí (καί) [pronounced ]. The repetition of a kaí (καί) [pronounced ] in a sentence is translated “both and”—“both the things which.”


“you have learned” – aorist active indicative from the verb manthanô (μανθάνω) [pronounced mahn-THAHN-oh]. It means to learn from someone as a teacher, to learn under strict academic discipline. It is the word which means “disciple.” Disciple is simply an old English word for a person learning doctrine under discipline. The word “disciple” actually comes from the Latin: discibulus, a student without portfolio, without rights except to learn. So the word “disciple” means a student of Bible doctrine. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety—the continual daily function of GAP. The active voice: the believer produces the action of the verb when his priorities are straight and when his volition is positive toward doctrine. The indicative mood is declarative viewing the action of the verb from the standpoint of reality.


“and received” – aorist active indicative from paralambanô (παραλαμβάνω) [pronounced pahr-al-am-BAHN-oh] [para (παρά) [pronounced paw-RAW] = beside; lambánô (λαμβάνω) [pronounced lahm-BAHN-oh] = to receive], which means to take or receive to one’s side, to take or to receive to one’s self. The emphasis lies not so much in the receiving or taking over as in the fact that the word implies agreement, approval, and therefore acceptance. It is translated here to “accept.” This is the difference between gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis] and epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis]. Paralambanô (παραλαμβάνω) [pronounced pahr-al-am-BAHN-oh] is accepting what has been taught. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views the function of GAP in its entirety but it emphasizes the existing results of GAP in converting gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis] to epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis].


Doctrine in the left lobe is just the staging area. It is knowledge but not understanding. When this is believed, it is transferred to the right lobe and it is understood.


Chameleon under carborundum (camilla?). Carborundum under chamelia?


“Carborundum is hypersensitive. In other words, Carborundum is so tough that it wants everyone to pay attention to it and if someone like the husband doesn’t cross his Ts properly or smile at the right time or say “Yes, dear,” every five or ten minutes, then there is hell to pay and there will be a smoke that goes out, a pall of gloom, a wet blanket, a pouting, an unbelievable oozing, pouting that reaches every crevice and even the roaches die.” This is because women are responders and with Carborundum in their soul, they become super hyper sensitive. Such a woman is not related to reality.


It is the doctrines which you have heard and accepted that you know.


Knowing doctrine is not enough, you must understand doctrine. The active voice: the believer who has taken doctrine into his left lobe [noús (νούς) [pronounced noose]] produces the action of the verb by accepting what is taught objectively. And that transfers it; paralambanô (παραλαμβάνω) [pronounced pahr-al-am-BAHN-oh] is the transferring agent. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of +V, i.e. paralambanô (παραλαμβάνω) [pronounced pahr-al-am-BAHN-oh] converting knowledge into epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis].


“and heard” – aorist active indicative of akoúô (ἀκούω) [pronounced ah-KOO-oh] which means to hear and concentrate, to hear and accept the authority of: “and having heard under discipline.” There is the true function of the local church. The aorist tense is constative, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. It takes every time the believer assembles in the classroom of the local church and submits to academic discipline of the pastor, and gathers it up into one entirety. The active voice: the believer in submission to the authority of the pastor produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative recognizing the fact that all spiritual growth demands academic discipline, respect for the authority of the one communicating doctrine in order for GAP to function properly.


“and seen” – aorist active indicative of horaô (ὁράω) [pronounced hoh-RAW-oh], which means a panoramic view. This means not only to see, but to have the perspective. It means perceptive perspective, the ability to apply. Here is where we get the principle “understand.” You cannot teach what you know, you can only teach what you, understand. So this should be translated, “and you have understood [the doctrine].” The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views the function of GAP in its entirety but emphasizes the existing results. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action by having maximum epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] or understanding in his right lobe. The indicative mood is declarative viewing the action of the verb from the standpoint of super-grace reality.


“in me” – incorrect. This is en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental of egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] which is “by means of me” or “through me.” That is, through the teaching ministry of Paul.


“do” – this is not the word do at all. If it was going to be “do it”, it would be poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh]. But poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh] does not connote application and it is not here in the Greek text. The word for application is prassô (πράσσω) [pronounced PRAS-so], and that is the word we have here. It means to execute, to apply and execute, to practise, to put it into action. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs with the supergrace believer. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action. The imperative mood is a command. Principle: Doctrine must be in the right lobe to execute or put into action the grace plan of God.


“and the God of peace” – kaí (καί) [pronounced ] ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS] thj eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay]j is “and the God of prosperity.” The descriptive genitive singular of eirênê (εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ) [pronounced eye-RAY-nay] is used in the sense of the Hebrew shalom—prosperity. The nominative subject is theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]—“God.” He is the source of our prosperity: spiritual, temporal, by association, historical, dying. This is the title of God in relationship to the supergrace life and the blessings of paragraph supergrace2.


“shall be” – future active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. The future tense is a gnomic future for a statement of fact or performance which may be rightfully expected under the super-grace status. The active voice: God the Father is the source of supergrace prosperity. The indicative mood is declarative for a statement of dogmatic fact or reality.


“with you” – the preposition metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive plural of the pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] “with you all.”


Philippians 4:9 Both the doctrine which you have learned [from my teaching], and have accepted, and have heard, and have understood by means of me, be putting these into action; and the God of prosperity shall be with you all.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #106


106 03/02/1976 Philippians 4:10a Doctrine of GAP (review pts. 1–5)


Bob is going to review GAP. I need to check my other computer regarding GAP. It might be a good time to update the doctrines.


Bob taught acrostics to many students in seminary; and many of them have written books and developed various systems in Christian thinking. Although I have some notes from the two notebooks, neither doctrine appeared to line up with this iteration of GAP.


Grace Apparatus for Perception

1.       GAP is an acrostic for Grace Apparatus for Perception, whereby we are able to understand the entire system of divine thinking while here on earth. This is a divine grace system for the believer to advance in the Christian life. We must have IQ in order to advance, but human IQ is not going to cut it, as every person has a different IQ. You can have a person who is a genius and he might be just a baby; but you can have a person with a moron IQ and he is positive toward doctrine. He can be in supergrace. God has found a way for every believer to perceive and assimilate as much doctrine as is compatible with his positive volition toward doctrine.

2.       Systems of perception. Three basic systems of perception and two are meritorious and human; one is human and divine and nonmeritorious.

          a.       Rationalism. The mind must have a system of reality before it can understand anything. Reason is a system of thinking apart from the five sense. This automatically rejects divine authority. Spinosa was possible the greatest rationalist. DeCartes was the father of rationalism. DeCartes tried to anchor a system of philosophy on some basic self-evident facts, but he could not do it. His mind bounced around in space and bounced back. The smartest rationalist cannot begin to understand God or to understand spiritual phenomena.

          b.       Empiricism. Learning by observation and experimentation. Reality lies in the function of the sensory system as it pertains the frame of reference in the right lobe. Experience, observation, experimentation providing the basis for perception. Sometimes called the scientific approach.

          c.        From zero to nine years, 90–95% you learn by faith. In a rare case of genius, rationalism may function well enough to think beyond faith. It may drop down to 70%, which is quite a drop. Faith is a system of perception. There is no such thing a blind faith. Faith is a system of perception and therefore it always sees. The person who uses the term blind faith does ot understand blindness or faith. Faith is learning by accepting an authority or a criterion. All learning comes that way. A baby has no thought and no vocabulary. So, words are taught. Parents establish their authority by teaching a vocabulary to their children. Then when their children start saying, “What’s that, what’s that, what’s that?” But if the parent says, run outside and play, rather than answer, that is where they lose their authority over the child. Much of the early teaching of doctrine to children is vocabulary. They have to be able to think and that requires vocabulary. Whoever teaches you words becomes your first authority. Do not every become abusive of a child who keeps asking questions. That child has a mind which wants to go somewhere. You can cut off the working of a mind by telling the child to shut up or to go play, etc. You don’t leave your little children with young kid babysitters who will teach them the wrong vocabulary. Makes sure they learn the right vocabulary. The sooner they develop a vocabulary, the sooner they begin to think. The sooner they begin the think, the sooner they can understand the gospel message. And the quicker these children can mature. Maturity of the soul takes a lot of words; thousands of words. No capacity for life without words. Faith sets up a system of authority. What the authority figure tells you is a fact, whether or not it is a reality. This is the only system of perception where you are oriented to life through authority while you are learning. After age 9 (maybe 7 or 8), it changes. 9–12 is puberty and the vocabulary reaches a point. Some boys start toward empiricism and some start toward rationalism. The experimentors and the rationalists. Faith is somewhere between 65–80%. Faith is reclaimed when a person is born again.

          d.       In gap, faith is directed toward Bible doctrine.

3.       There is a distinction between spiritual IQ and human IQ. The drugs are the chemical destruction of the soul. There is irreversible brain damage; and they are equivalent to a brain-damaged person. There are mental conditions which make it impossible to learn. Berachah has had to throw out certain people for being neurotic or psychotic. They pestered the women constantly. One woman wanted the support of Berachah Church to be a missionary to Israel at $1000/a month. You can be offensive with your language. Or you can stink too much for anyone to sit near you. Berachah is the most protected congregation. The key to spiritual IQ is the amount of ἑπίγνωσις in your soul. Colossians 1:9–10 Because of this, [Epaphroditus has reported to Paul about the Colossian church] we keep on askin that you might be filled by Bible doctrine. Of His sovereign purpose and design and spiritual understanding. That you might walk worthy of the Lord, pleasing God in all things. Human IQ must be excluded. 1Corinthians 1:19–2:16

4.       The grace provision for learning doctrine. There is a permanent storage of all divine policies, which is the canon of Scripture. There is the divine authorization of a classroom, that classroom being the local church. It is designed to primarily to be a class. It is only under the discipline of the local church. The pastor teaches in accordance with his spiritual gift. The deacons administer. The provision of a right pastor. He is not a money raiser or gregarious and gets out and visits the congregation. He could be any one of a different personality.


God's Provision


Philippians 4:10  But I rejoiced greatly in the Lord that now at last you have revived the caring for me, wherein also you were concerned, but you were lacking opportunity.  (BLB)


Verse 10 – “But” is the enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] used as a transitional conjunction. It means “now.” With it is the aorist passive indicative of the verb chairô (χαίρω) [pronounced KHAI-row], translated “rejoice” but it means to have happiness. Here it means sharing the happiness of God, the happiness of the supergrace believer. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. It takes the entire time that Paul was in supergrace and gathers it up into one concept of sharing God’s happiness, +H. The passive voice: Paul receives the action of the verb and has the opportunity to express it under the conditions of this context. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of Paul having received +H. “But I have received very much inner happiness.” The words “very much” is translated “greatly” in the KJV. It is the adverb megálōs (μεγάλως) [pronounced meg-AL-oce], which means “very much.”


“in the Lord” – the preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental from kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] should be translated “by means of the Lord.” Kurios (κύριος) [pronounced KOO-ree-oss] emphasizes the uniqueness of our Lord’s battlefield royalty. This is Paul’s announcement that not only has he recovered from reversionism but he has re-entered the supergrace life. But I have received very much inner happiness by means of the Lord.


Principle

1.       The manifestation of Paul’s recovery of supergrace status is found both in the possession of +H and the fact that his happiness is stimulated by the obvious interest of the Philippian church. No church ever brought Paul more happiness.

2.       So great was their interest that they sent their pastor, Epaphroditus, with an offering for Paul.

3.       As the apostle who founded the Philippians church Paul was the original right pastor of that congregation. The present minister is Epaphroditus. So the Philippians have had at least three right pastors in their history up to now.

4.       Here, then, is the concept of right pastor for a right congregation. The pastor is the missing link between doctrine preserved in the canon of Scripture and doctrine resident in the soul of the believer.

5.       There is no spiritual growth apart from the consistent teaching of the congregation’s right pastor.

6.       Spiritual growth is not accomplished by works or action but by words and doctrines stored in the human soul through teaching, through the ministry of the Holy Spirit.

7.       Therefore the principle: It is not what we do for the Lord that produces spiritual growth, but what we know of the Lord through doctrine resident in the soul.

8.       Spiritual growth is based on the content of the soul, not the energy of the body.

9.       The soul must be saturated with doctrine. This is accomplished by the consistent and daily function of GAP.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #107


107 03/03/1976 Philippians 4:10b–11 Doctrine of importance of Bible doctrine


“that now at last” – the causal use of the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], followed by the adverb of time êdê (ἤδη) [pronounced AY-day], plus the enclitic particle poté (ποτέ) [pronounced poht-EH]; “your care of me” – the articular present active infinitive from the verb phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh], which means objective thinking. The articular infinitive is Attic Greek, not Koine Greek. It is an idiom, and the definite article which is formed with the present active infinitive changes it from verbalization to a substantive with a decided increment of its power. The definite article restores the balance, it takes the infinitive away from the verbal idea and brings it back into the substantive. Whatever is more important in your life you are going to think about.


“hath flourished again” – aorist active indicative from the compound verb anathállō (ἀναθάλλω) [pronounced an-ath-AL-loh] [aná (ἀνά) [pronounced aw-NAW] = again; thallô (θάλλω) = to flourish or thrive], meaning to thrive again, grow again, to recover activity, to bloom again, to revive. Here the corrected translation is “you have revived.” With the articular infinitive: “you have revived your thinking concerning me.” The aorist tense is a dramatic aorist, it states a present reality with the certitude of a past event. The idiom is a device for emphasis and it states the result of what has just been accomplished. The active voice: the Philippian congregation produces the action of the verb because they have advanced from the point of salvation, broken the maturity barrier, advanced to super-grace, and at that point their capacity for love is extended toward God in category #1, and toward the apostle Paul in category #3. At this point they have again become very interested in the apostle and have revived their thinking concerning him. The indicative mood is declarative, it views the action of the verb from the viewpoint of the actual reality. The principle: This revived thinking has come in the form of an offering. The Philippians saw to that their pastor, Epaphroditus, would bring the money to Paul, enough to support him for a period of time.


“wherein” – this is a prepositional phrase, epí (ἐπί) [pronounced eh-PEE] plus the locative of the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç], which is literally, “on whom.” The Greek idiom means “indeed”; the next word is the adjunctive use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ]—“also.”


“you were careful” – imperfect active indicative of phroneô (φρονέω) [pronounced fron-EH-oh], which means to think. Furthermore, it means to think objectively in contrast to dokéô (δοκέω) [pronounced dohk-EH-oh] which means to think subjectively. The imperfect tense is linear aktionsart in past time. Hence, we have the imperfect of duration in which the process of objective thinking has gone on in the past up to this point in the context. The active voice: the Philippian congregation produce the action of the verb in supergrace. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of the fact that the Philippian congregation is constantly remembering Paul and appreciating the doctrine they learned under his ministry—“indeed you also were thinking about me.” That means to be concerned here because they knew of Paul’s imprisonment and assumed that he needed funds.


The enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] is used for an adversative conjunction, and it is used to set up a contrast between past concerns and no opportunity to express it, present concerns with the opportunity to express it. This is then difference between an impulsive giver and a generous person. An impulsive giver is no good, he is a self-centered person calling attention to himself. A generous giver never has any strings attached to his giving, he gives because of love, not to gain anything from it.


“but ye lacked opportunity” – the imperfect middle indicative of akairéomai (ἀκαιρέομαι) [pronounced ak-ahee-REH-om-ahee] which means to have no opportunity. Here it means to have no opportunity to demonstrate their love thinking. Thinking is love! or hate, but no one can love by emotion. All love is related to thinking. Love is what you think, not what you do. This is an imperfect of duration, it contemplates the past process of love thinking and brings it all up into the indirect middle which stresses the agent, the Philippians congregation. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of the fact that love and thinking was there, but no opportunity for expression until the imprisonment of the apostle Paul.


Philippians 4:10 Now I have received very much inner happiness by means of the Lord, because now at last you have revived your love-thinking concerning me; indeed you were thinking but you had no opportunity.


Men who get emotional about women do not love them. If you do not have words in your soul, then you are incapable of love. Love is what you think, not what you do or how you feel. If you are in love, you will be extremely happy or extremely sad or angry.


Most people are full of emotion and they think that it is love, but it is nothing.


The Philippians thought about Paul and they gave him and offering. Love and thinking was there, and there was no opportunity to express their love thinking until Paul was incarcerated.


The question asked, is doctrine a word from the Scripture?


Importance of Bible Doctrine

1.       Vocabulary:

          a.       The basic word in the Old Testament for doctrine is ʾěmeth (אֱמֶת) [pronounced EH-meth]. It is used in Psalm 25:5 26:3 31:5 86:11 119:142 Proverbs 22:21.

          b.       Châkemâh (חָכְמָה) [pronounced khawke-MAW] is used similarly to ἑπίγνωσις, which is Bible doctrine resident in the human spirit. Proverbs 8:1

          c.        Shemûʿâh (שְמֻעָה) [pronounced sh-moo-ĢAW] means, what is heard, doctrine. Isaiah 28:9

          d.       Leqach (לֶקַח) [pronounced le-KAHKH] means doctrine in the sense of what one receives and understands. Doctrine in the right lobe. Deuteronomy 32:2 job 11:4 Proverbs 4:2 Isaiah 29:24.

          e.       The communication of doctrine is expressed by the word mûwçâr (מוּסָר) [pronounced moo-SAWR]. Jeremiah 10:8 Proverbs 1:2 4:13 23:23.

          f.        Γνσις, which is doctrine in the left lobe. What you understand.

          g.       ἑπίγνωσις. Doctrine in the right lobe. What you know.

          h.       Prógnōsis (πρόγνωσις) [pronounced PROG-no-sis] used for doctrine in the ind. Also used for the omniscience of God billions of years ago. Time is variable but eternity is not. Eternity is minus time. Doctrine preexisted eternity. Doctrine is in the mind of God and such doctrine is a matter of foreknowledge. This is doctrine that God knew in eternity past. 1Peter 1:2. We get the medical term prognosis from this word.

          i.         Gnôstos (γνωστός) [pronounced gnome-TOSS] this is used as being capable of being known. Nothing in the Bible is meant to be obscure. When something like this is found, it means that the person is not able to take in the more advanced doctrine; or that maybe there has been some inconsistency with the function of gap. Everything in the Word of God is for man’s understanding. Revelation is very easy doctrine and it is one of the easiest books of the Bible. There is nothing in the Bible that an ultra supergrace believer cannot understand. Asking questions does not always help. Often, you are being educated beyond your intelligence. If you do not have certain doctrines, you do not understand the answer. This is like having algebra, but you have questions about Calculus. Romans 1:19

          j.         Gnôstēs (γνώστης) [pronounced GNOME-tace] is someone who is an expert. Acts 26:3

          k.        There are many other words which are similar.

2.       A definition: Bible doctrine is the content of the canon of Scripture, which is communicated. It is the teaching of the canon of Scripture. This is done on the basis of exegesis and analysis of the original Scriptures. Bible doctrine is what the Bible has to say when it is taught. It is the communication of Bible information on the basis of exegesis, classification, analysis, interpretation of scripture by authorised personnel - someone who has the gift of pastor-teacher and someone who is prepared through study to communicate Bible doctrine. Since Bible doctrine is the mind of Christ — 1Corinthians 2:16 — it must be communicated by those who have been authorised, and beginning in the past this means the prophet, the Levitical priesthood, the apostle, and the pastor-teacher in this particular period of history. Grace is the genius of God and Bible doctrine is the manifestation of that genius.

3.       The legacy of the believer is Bible doctrine. Psalm 138:2 I myself will worship toward the temple of Your holiness [heaven being the true Holy of Holies] and celebrate Your Person [this is the supergrace and ultra supergrace believer enjoying occupation with Christ] because of Your grace and because of Your doctrine because You have magnified Your doctrinal teaching over Your reputation. Doctrine is the most important thing in the scale of values of the believer. God has magnified Bible doctrine over His reputation. Your understanding of God comes from Bible doctrine.

4.       In His dying breath the Lord Jesus Christ made doctrine the spiritual legacy of the royal family of God. This is shown by comparing Luke 23:46 (And crying with a loud voice, Jesus said, Father, "into Your hands I commit My spirit." And saying this, He breathed out the spirit.) with Psalm 31:5. Into Your hands I delivered My Spirit, O God of doctrine.

5.       Bible doctrine pre-existed the human race. Proverbs 8 records how doctrine was with God in eternity past before the creation of the universe.

6.       Attitude of the believer determines whether or not the believer is blessed in time. Proverbs 8:33–36 Concentrate on doctrine (or heed instruction); be wise, do not neglect doctrine. Blessed is the man who listens to Me [says doctrine], watching daily at my gates [the assembly-place for Bible teaching] waiting at my doors, for he who finds me find capacity for life and obtains grace from the Lord [logistical grace, supergrace, ultra supergrace] but he who sins against me [rejection of Bible doctrine] injures himself [resulting in divine discipline]. All of those who hate me [doctrine] love the sin unto death. [maximum punishment for rejection of doctrine].

7.       Therefore, doctrine is the basis for the distribution of supergrace and ultra supergrace blessings. The daily function of gap means doctrine in the soul; and this is how we follow the colors to the high ground Isaiah 53:12

8.       Doctrine is the basis for the distribution of surpassing grace blessings in eternity Hebrews 11:9–10 compared with Hebrews 11:13.

9.       Bible doctrine is more real than any form of human ability or perspicacity. In other words, rationalism or empiricism. 2pe 1:12–21. This says if there is a conflict between what you see, hear, smell or think and Bible doctrine, Bible doctrine is correct and your perception is wrong. Bible doctrine is the criterion for the royal family of God.

10.     Lack of Bible doctrine Bible doctrine destroys a nation. Hosea 4:1–6

11.     Bible doctrine is part of the principle of living grace or logistical grace. For phase II. Logistical grace is divided into three categories the supply, the quartering and and the provision for the believer in time to reach the mature objectives. It is divided into two kinds: the advance to supergrace, which is going from babyhood to maturity. Logistical grace is A category A category is living grace, everything that is necessary to keep you alive and everything that takes you from home to Bible class, which would include transportation. And in addition to that, the existence of Bible class and other spiritual factors—the pastor-teacher, the canon of Scripture, and so on. That was alpha grace. Bravo grace is from supergrace to ultra supergrace. That is called near grace. Living grace and near grace. The person who rejects alpha and bravo grace, he has charley grace, which is disciplinary grace. So Bible doctrine is a part of the pattern of logistical grace. . under logistical grace, God is responsible for keeping you alive in the devil’s world. He provides everything necessary to keep you alive with spiritual food and spiritual growth.

12.     The plan of God is both advanced and vindicated through Bible doctrine. Isaiah 53:10 Romans 3:4

13.     The pastor or communicator of doctrine establishes the balance of residency in the soul of the believer. This is the indwelling of the believer’s body by the Holy Spirit; and the indwelling of the believer’s soul by Bible doctrine. The indwelling of Bible doctrine by the function of gap. Bible doctrine is transferred from the canon of Scripture to your soul by means of the pastor-teacher and the function of God the Holy Spirit.

14.     Therefore, the importance of consistency with the function of gap. The command to go to class Hebrews 10:25 Stop neglecting the assumbly of yourselves together, as is the habit of certain reversionists. Hebrews 10:35 is the warning against negative volition. Do not throw away as worthless your confidence in doctrine, which confidence keeps on having a rich distribution of blessing. Hebrews 10:36 Persevrence of positive volition: For you keep on having need of perseverance to have accomplished the will of God [you’ve gotten to supergrace] you might carry off yourself to the promise [moving on to the next stage, logistical grace to no man’s land to ultra supergrace]. The same idea is found in Colossians 2:6–7

15.     There are many results of doctrine in the soul.

          a.       It produces confidence in phase II. Job 5:24–27 2Corinthians 5:6–8 Hebrews 10:35.

          b.       It produces the divine viewpoint of life. Isaiah 57:7–9 2Corinthians 10:5

          c.        It orients the believer to the plan of God. Isaiah 26(27?):3–4 Romans 8:28

          d.       It produces stability of mind. James 1:8

          e.       The basis for divine guidance and execution of the will of God. Romans 12:2–3

          f.        It leads to occupation with Christ. Capacity and the ability to love God. Philippians 3:10 Ephesians 3:19 Hebrews 12:2–3

          g.       It attains and holds supergrace Philippians 3:12–14 It makes it possible to go on to ultra supergrace. Philippians 4.

          h.       It attains capacity for supergrace blessing Hebrews. 11:9–10 James 1:25 compared with James 2:12–13.

16.     There are numerous synonyms for Bible doctrine resident in the soul.

17.     Bible doctrine is the key Throne Room of God happiness in the soul. Luke 11:27–28. Bible doctrine must be #1 on your scale of values.


In v. 11, the believer recognizes that it is time to move on across no man’s land. This is the most difficult advance.


Philippians 4:11  Not that I speak as to destitution, for I have learned to be content in that which I am.  (BLB)


Verse 11 – stability on the right side of history. “Not that” – the negative ouk (οὐκ) [pronounced ook] plus the causal conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], literally, “Not because.”


“I speak” – present active indicative of the verb légô (λέγω) [pronounced LEH-goh], a descriptive present to indicate what is now going on. The active voice: Paul produces he action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of doctrinal communication under the principle of verbal inspiration.


“in respect of want” – the preposition kata plus the accusative of hustérēsis (ὑστέρησις) [pronounced hoos-TER-ay-sis] which means poverty or lack. “Not because I am speaking with reference to poverty [or lack].”


“for” is the explanatory use of the conjunctive particle gar; “I have learned” – one thing a supergrace believer learns is objectivity. This is the aorist active indicative from the verb manthanô (μανθάνω) [pronounced mahn-THAHN-oh]. It means to learn through instruction, to come to know, to receive instruction under discipline, to appropriate knowledge. The aorist tense is constative, it contemplates the action of the verb in its entirety. Everything it took Paul to get to supergrace taught him something. It taught him to think objectively and to have capacity for true love. The active voice: supergrace or ultra supergrace believers produce the action of the verb. Paul at writing is a supergrace believer. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of learning doctrine through the consistency of the function of GAP, and from that to have a total objectivity toward life.


“in whatsoever state” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative neuter plural from the relative pronoun hos (ὅς) [pronounced hohç] should be translated “in whatever.” Then a word which is a qualitative relative used as a substantive and it should be translated “in whatever circumstances.”


“I am” – the present active indicative of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. This has to be learned, we are not born with this understanding. It is something that has to be taught. The present tense is a pictorial present, it presents to the mind a picture of events in the process of occurrence. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action—Paul. The indicative mood is the historical reality of the objectivity of thinking in supergrace with regard to anything in life so that you are not always worried where you are going to get your next meal.


“to be” – present active infinitive of eimi (εἰμί) [pronounced eye-ME]. This is a perfective present, it denotes a continuation of results. No matter what your circumstances of life you perpetuate something. You perpetuate happiness, contentment, blessing, no matter what the situation may be. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces this action. It requires a lot of doctrine in the soul. The infinitive is conceived result which is assumed as a consequence of being a mature believer—“to keep on being.” Circumstances do not change you; you change circumstances.


“content” – predicate nominative from the adjective autárkēs (αὐτάρκης) [pronounced ow-TAHR-kace]. It means self-sufficient contentment. This is adaptability to any difficult circumstances in life.


Philippians 4:11 Not because I am speaking with reference to poverty; for I have learned in whatever circumstances I am, to keep on being content.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #108


108 03/04/1976 Philippians 4:11–12 Amount of doctrine the issue, not circumstances


Conservative Digest with a picture of Barry Goldwater. Dave Garraway was been blacklisted. The Black militant Angela Davis is back in the classroom. She is now lecturing on Black women in the black community and she gets $3000 per lecture.


The conservative newspaper, the Houston Tribune. If you don’t have doctrine, you will not have sanity.


A review of vv. 1–11.


Philippians 4:11 Not because I am speaking with reference to poverty; for I have learned in whatever circumstances I am, to keep on being content.


Conclusions

1.       Poverty or lack is not the issue to the mature believer, just as circumstances, good or bad, are never the issue.

2.       Poverty merely represents adverse circumstances of life.

3.       What this verse is saying is that circumstances are never an issue to the mature believer. The mature believer is never a slave to his circumstances.

4.       The supergrace or ultra supergrace has perfect happiness and occupation with Christ is all circumstances of life.

5.       For the unbeliever or reversionistic believer circumstances are always an issue, and his happiness or lack of happiness is based upon his circumstances.

6.       To this category of reversionism circumstances determine happiness or lack of happiness.

7.       With the exception of the mature believer members of the human race are slaves to their circumstances.

8.       But to the supergrace or ultra supergrace believer circumstances are not an issue. The resources of supergrace and ultra supergrace provide freedom and independence from circumstances.

9.       The Greek adjective autárkēs (αὐτάρκης) [pronounced ow-TAHR-kace] is a technical word from stoicism for independent self-sustaining individuals who are free from circumstances. So it is vocabulary for independence and freedom from the circumstances of life.


Bob has noticed several people in the congregation who made a deal to be there and they were not getting anything out of it. There is a person in the back who is not sure if he is in church of vaudeville.


If you took all the brains in Congress and put them together, you would have a birdbrain with respect to business. “We’re short of money, so let’s print some.” Printing money is how they divorce themselves from reality. Welfare, socialism and social security are the worst things to happen to this country. A sick society results in unrestrained crime. They are always anti-military and anti-police. They create helpless people in order to provide funds for them.


Andrew Carnegie, a Scotsman, came to the United States and became a multi-millionaire. He had that drive. He did not come over here to draw checks.


I will not abandon you or forsake you; and that is all the social security that a believer should require. For He has said, I will not every abandon you, says the Lord; neither will I forsake you. (Deuteronomy 31:6) There is your security. So that being confident, we say (quote Psalm 118:6) The Lord is my helper (the Lord is my financial security, the Lord is my social security, the Lord is my life security) and I will not be afraid of what man will do to me. Be concentrating on them [pastor-teachers] who are ruling over all of you, who have communicated to you the Word of God . Pastor’s whose doctrine be emulating, be carefully considering the issue of their way of life, which is the presentation of the grace policy in Bible teaching. (Hebrews 13:5b–7)


We turn a society around with a number of supergrace believers.


Philippians 4:12  I know also how to be brought low, and I know how to abound. In everything, and in all things, I have learned the secret also to be full and to hunger, also to abound and to be deficient.  (BLB)


Verse 12 – the objective beyond super-grace. “I know” – the perfect oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da] is used as a present tense, meaning “I have come to know.” The active voice


indicates that reversionistic Paul produced the action of the verb. There is also the word “both” which is the emphatic use of the conjunction kaí (καί) [pronounced ], and should be translated “in fact I have come to know.” Paul learned this in his reversion recovery.


“how to be abased” – present passive infinitive from the verb tapeinoô (ταπεινόω) [pronounced tap-i-NO-oh] which means to be humble, to be humiliated by being assigned a lower place at the table. In the ancient world, the time of writing, all dining rooms were on split levels. That was because during the time of the Roman empire, people became very class conscious.


A large dinner would have people seated in three different positions. The VIPs, then the real friends, and then the hoi polloi. Sometimes you might show up and think that you will dine with the VIPs; but you end up in the bottom tier. That is what debased actually means.


As it comes into the New Testament it changes its meaning slightly. It has the concept of humility in the sense of being helpless. It has the concept of being assigned a lower place at the table. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs when a believer falls into reversionism. This is not humility in a good sense, this is degradation because of the logistical category of grace called C. A = the grace that carries the believer from salvation to maturity. B = from super-grace, across no-man’s land to ultra supergrace. C = the alternative for the believer negative toward doctrine—a lifetime of discipline and misery, and being used as a guinea pig to test growing believers. Paul has been debased. He has gone through his Jerusalem reversionism. So the passive voice here: Paul as a reversionistic believer received the action of the verb, debasement under C grace of logistical grace. The infinitive is the infinitive of actual result, it refers to Paul’s Jerusalem reversionism. It refers also to warning discipline—not to go to Jerusalem.


“and” is the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], translated “also”; “I know” – again, the perfect oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da], used as a present tense—“and I have come to know.” The active voice: this time the active voice of oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da] is super-grace Paul producing the action of the verb. Each time oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da] is used in this verse it is the same word but with a different connotation.


“how to abound” – present active infinitive of the verb perisseuô (περισσεύω) [pronounced per-iss-SUE-oh]. It means to have more than enough and comes to mean to have prosperity: “also I have come to know what it is to live in prosperity.” Living in prosperity is supergrace status. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs in super-grace status. The active voice: the super-grace believer produces the action of the verb. The infinitive is the infinitive of conceived result, it is assumed as a consequence of being a supergrace believer and possessing paragraph supergrace2 in its five categories: #1, spiritual blessings; #2, temporal blessings; #3, blessing by association; #4, historical blessing; #5, dying blessings. Paul is not talking about circumstances here, he is talking about status In the previous verse he was talking about up and down circumstances—pleasant and unpleasant. But here he is talking about status—as a reversionist and as a super-grace believer. All supergrace believers live in prosperity. The degree in which that prosperity is visible to others varies, so that you can never look at another person and say that one is prosperous and is in supergrace. But there is often a manifestation. Sometimes it is all in the soul and sometimes it isn’t.


All supergrace believers live in prosperity (either inner or exterior). The degree that the prosperity is visible to others varies. This passage is not referring to different circumstances but to different statuses. The first, Paul knows how to live in reversionism; and he also knows how to live in supergrace.


“everywhere and in all things” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs]. Pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] as an adjective means “all” or “every.” This is a locative singular, so it means “in any place.” Then we have a locative plural for circumstances: “in any place and in all circumstances.” Pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] occurs twice. The singlar pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] refers to several geographical locations where Paul learned—Jerusalem, Caesarea, and now Rome. The plural pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] refers to all circumstances which contributed to the varying circumstances by which Paul was initiated into the blessings of paragraph supergrace2. In other words, everything that contributed to his reversion recovery.


I am instructed” – perfect passive indicative from the verb muéō (μυέω) [pronounced moo-EH-oh]. It means to be initiated into a fraternity. The word “mystery” comes from this word, it is the noun mustêrion (μυστήριον) [pronounced moos-TAY-ree-on]. Translation: “I have been initiated.” The perfect tense is a consummative perfect, it emphasizes the process rather than the exiting results. It is not merely the process but the consummated process that is emphasized, and it implies results. The passive voice: once reversionistic but now supergrace Paul has received initiation into the mysteries, the doctrines that led to his reversion recovery and supergrace status. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical fact that Paul’s Jerusalem reversionism is over.


Now comes the statement of another objective beyond supergrace. There are two clauses introduced by kaí (καί) [pronounced ] kaí (καί) [pronounced ], generally translated “both and.”


“both to be full” – present passive infinitive of the verb chortazô (χορτάζω) [pronounced khor-TAD-zoh]. The word is used for an animal being filled with grass or feed. It is used for the royal family of God, supergrace believer, being filled with doctrine. The present tense is the present of duration, it denotes what has begun in the past and continues into the present time—the process of reversion recovery. The passive voice: the apostle Paul receives the action of the verb—saturation with doctrine in the right lobe. The infinitive is actual result.


“and to be hungry” – present active infinitive of peinaô (πεινάω) [pronounced pi-NAH-oh]. The present tense is a perfective present, it denotes the continuation of +V toward doctrine resulting in being well fed or saturated with maximum doctrine in the soul. The supergrace believer desires more and more doctrine and this is necessary for the next objective. Paul is hungry for ultra supergrace status. The active voice: Paul produces the action. The infinitive is conceived result which is assumed as being the result of supergrace status, hunger for more doctrine, for the next objective. The present tense is a descriptive present, it indicates what is now going on.


“and to suffer need” – present passive infinitive from the verb husteréō (ὑστερέω) [pronounced hoos-ter-EH-oh], which means to be lacking. Here it means to be lacking the ultra supergrace objective. It does not mean to lack prosperity. The supergrace is prosperous, and Paul is not talking about starving or about being down to a bare bones situation. Paul is only lacking the final objective. The passive voice: the supergrace believer receives the action of the verb, i.e. he has not reached ultra supergrace. This is the infinitive of intended result, a blending of Paul’s purpose to reach ultra supergrace and the result of having attained supergrace.


The supergrace believer is prosperous. You may not see his prosperity, but it is there.


Bob has never seen this passage ever explained correctly. Paul is not lacking prosperity; he is lacking the final objective.


Philippians 4:12 In fact, I have come to know [through experience] how to be degraded [the degradation of reversionistic discipline], also I have come to know what it is to live in prosperity [SG]; in every place and in all circumstances I have been initiated in both how to be well fed [saturated with doctrine] and to hunger [for more doctrine].


Paul wants to move beyond supergrace to ultra supergrace. That is what he is expressing here.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #109


109 03/05/1976 Philippians 4:13–14 Giving: true, false, and Supergrace–2


A Dr. Grady speech from 1975. Almost every American knows today that these are dangerous times. The erosion of our Constitution, of the free enterprise system, rampant inflation, pride as a nation, military is weakened.


Cicero spoke to Rome about balancing the budget and requiring people to pay for their own stuff.


When the Athenians wanted freedom from responsibility, that caused the downfall of Greece.


None of our money has any backing; and the nation is flooded with our currency. No more gold backing for money in 1965. All silver coins were collected, melted down, and sold below market around the world.


When a private individual prints money, it is called counterfeiting; but when the government does this, it is called inflation. This also steals from the nation.


In 1971, Nixon announced, I am now a Keneysian in economics.


The examples of federal spending. Studying the frisbee, following migrating bats to Morocco. $7 billion given to the UN.


We are building hydroelectric dams and factories and other things in Russia. We are even importing soviet tractors. We are building refineries, wells, pipelines and factories all over the world. At the end of WWII, Russia owed us billions of dollars.


Books National Suicide; Wall Street in the Russian Revolution. Russians mine about 10x the amount of gold that we do. At this time, the entire federal budget was $400 billion and our debt was $500 billion (1960s or 70s?). There are federal agencies and federally pioneered businesses, all of these debt are around $2 trillion. Social Security indebtedness. He says that this current debt, all things taken into consideration, we are $6 trillion in debt.


Our founding fathers were God-fearing men, but our freedom requires eternal vigilance. We need to pray as if everything depended upon Him. We are in a jam and there is not enough red, white and blue bicentennial paint to get us out of it. A sick society despises the military and the police.


Reviewing the translations. This should make the believer desire to reach out to supergrace or to ultra supergrace.


What is said is by the believer in supergrace who is going to move out into ultra supergrace.


Philippians 4:13  I have strength for all things in the One strengthening me.  (BLB)


Verse 13 – the determination to step out, to reach ultra supergrace. “I can do” – present active indicative of the verb ischuô (ἰσχύω) [pronounced is-KHOO-oh], which means to be strong, to be powerful, to have power, to be competent. It should be translated, “I have power.” He is talking about the possession of power, not the possession of individual ability. The present tense is a customary present for what habitually occurs in a supergrace believer. The supergrace believer has the endowed power of Bible doctrine resident in the soul to saddle up and move out into no-man’s land to ultra supergrace. The active voice: Paul as a supergrace believer produces the action of the verb, namely the possession of maximum doctrine resident in the soul, the inherent power. Paul has the endowed power. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of maximum doctrine resident in Paul’s soul.


“to attain all things” – accusative neuter plural of pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], an adjective sometimes used as a substantive. This is the direct object of the verb. “I have the endowed power to attain all things.” We have the implication of katalambanô (καταλαμβάνω) [pronounced kat-al-am-BAHN-oh] here which is why the phrase ‘to attain’ is used. There is no definite article with pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], it is an anartharous construction calling attention to the qualitative aspects of the adjective representing the next objective beyond supergrace. “All things” is simply a reference to ultra supergrace. The plural indicates that ultra supergrace will be followed by dying grace eventually, which is the greatest of all blessings in life.


“which strengtheneth me” – prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the articular present active participle endunamoô (ἐνδυναμόω) [pronounced ehn-doo-nam-OH-oh]. The preposition en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the instrumental masculine refers to God the Holy Spirit who is the teacher of doctrine and the member of the Godhead who makes GAP function. The present tense is a retroactive progressive present for the ministry of the Holy Spirit in teaching the Word in the past with the result that the ministry of the Holy Spirit continues right up until the present time. The endowed power plus what will be learned crossing no-man’s land is what is in view. The active voice: the Holy Spirit produces the action of the verb, pouring power into Paul as he moves across no-man’s land. This is an instrumental participle.


“me” is the accusative singular direct object from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], referring to Paul. The empowering power is the Holy Spirit in the function of GAP, as taught in John 14:26; 16:12-14; 1Corinthians 2:9-16; 1John 2:27.


Philippians 4:13 I have the endowed power [maximum doctrine] to attain all things [ultra supergrace/DG] by means of the one [Holy Spirit] who keeps on pouring the power into me.


Verses 14-23, the logistics for the advance.


Logistical Grace

1.       Alpha grace under logistics is everything that God must do to keep us alive in the devil’s world after salvation and before salvation. Alpha grace takes us from zero to supergrace. This providing the basic needs, along with the doctrinal needs.

2.       Bravo grace is the grace which gets us through no man’s land, which is vv. 14–23.

3.       Charley grace is discipline.


Philippians 4:14  But you did well, having fellowship in my affliction.  (BLB)


Verse 14 – This begins with the conjunction plên (πλήν) [pronounced plane], which is translated, notwithstanding.


The money that is given is always replaced. That will be brought out. All true giving has a wonderful grace motivation. Grace motivation has nothing to do with gimmicks. Bob is going to put together a doctrine on giving. Emotional giving is illegitimate giving. A missionary works up a few stories to bleed them dry of their money. There is giving with strings. This is selfishness; it is bribery; it is the purchasing of affection. Some give for approbation lust, where those around you commend you for giving. True giving is choosing to give from the mentality of the soul. It is motivation from love and from doctrine resident in the soul.


Better to shut down the church than to ask for money to be given.


“ye have done” is the aorist active indicative of poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh]. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it takes their offering and the time it took to gather it and gathers it into one entirety and views the result. It was collected, transported, and received. The active voice: the grace-oriented Philippians produce the action of the verb under the principle of balance of residency between the filling of the Spirit and maximum doctrine in the soul. The indicative mood is declarative indicating the reality of honourable giving. Poieô (ποιέω) [pronounced poi-EH-oh] means to function here.


“well” – the adverb kalôs (καλς) [pronounced kal-OCE] means “honourably.” They gave without strings and totally apart from emotional giving. They gave motivated by doctrine resident in the soul.


“that ye did communicate” – aorist active participle from the compound verb sunkoinōnéō (συγκοινωνέω) [pronounced soong-koy-no-NEH-oh] [sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] = with; koinōnéō (κοινωνέω) [pronounced koy-no-NEH-oh] == to share], to share with. It means to share something with someone, to be a partner with someone, and both meanings are blended into this participle. They have shared their money with Paul and have therefore entered into partnership with him. The aorist tense is a constative aorist, it views the giving in its entirety. The active voice: the Philippians believers produce the action. The participle is a temporal participle. The action of this aorist participle precedes the action of the main verb—“you have functioned honourably.”


“with my affliction” – the locative singular of the noun thlipsis (θλίπσις) [pronounced THLIP-siss], and with it the possessive genitive from egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH].


Philippians 4:14 However when you shared by giving and became partners with me in my adversity, you functioned honorably.


   Giving Principles

1.       The pressure or tribulation refers to Paul’s Roman imprisonment in AD 62.

2.       The unsolicited but kindly giving of the Philippians indicates a maximum number of supergrace believers in that congregation. There was no solicitation.

3.       Giving apart from pressure or coercion is a manifestation of supergrace status, or very close.

4.       Super-grace provides the true motivation, then, for grace giving.

5.       Giving without emotional involvement or gimmicks indicates the vast resources of Bible doctrine resident in the souls of the Philippians.

6.       The supergrace believer occupied with Christ has capacity for love, for life, and is therefore correctly motivated to give in an honourable manner.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #110


110 03/07/1976 Philippians 4:15–18 Evidences of doctrine in kardia; doctrine of giving


We cannot neglect the little children. The children today are the adults of tomorrow. To understand doctrine, it has to be in your soul. It is a failure of our public schools or our Sunday Schools to have material written out and some teachers simply read what is there.


You can have the talent to be a teacher and not teach well.


Bob has had many teachers and professors. He had two history professors who were absolutely great. They made history live; they made history wonderful. His Greek professor was one of the greatest teachers that Bob has ever known. He could open up his Greek text and he could explain it from the Greek. He understood what he was teaching and it was a pleasure to be in his class. Bob looked forward to his class.


Written out Sunday School literature is like ignoring what is being taught from the pulpit. Our little people are exposed to the most ghastly information in schools. There will be a generation of people who will not know one good thing about our country. They will think socialism.


Operation ZOOM. The revamping of the teaching of the kids.


Philippians 4:15  And you Philippians also know that in the beginning of the gospel, when I came out from Macedonia, not one church had partnership with me with regard to the matter of giving and receiving, except you alone.  (BLB)


Verse 15 – “Now” is a postpositive enclitic particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] used here as a transitional conjunction.


“you Philippians know also” – the perfect oida (ὀίδα) [pronounced OY-da] used as a present tense. It means to know, to cause to know, to understand, to correctly apply. Here it means


to recognize; the transitional conjunction de; the adjunctive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ], plus the nominative plural from the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] the vocative for the Philippian church: “you yourselves also recognize.” Paul was talking to supergrace believers and therefore he does not have to teach a lot of basic details.


“that” – the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] is used after verbs of mental activity; “in the beginning” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of archê (ἀρχή) [pronounced ar-KHAY]. This is a reference to Paul’s ministry in Philippi.


“of the gospel” – the genitive of reference, “with reference to the gospel.” The gospel is what Paul originally gave them. They were unsaved; they were unevangelised. Once they were evangelised they were new babes in Christ. They had to be fed and nourished and taught basic things.


“when I departed” – eventually Paul had to leave them. The temporal particle hote/hête/tote (ὅτε/ἥτε/τότε) [pronounced HOT-eh,HAY-teh,TOT-eh] used as a temporal conjunction, indicating the point of time which they both recall; the aorist active indicative of the verb e)cerxomai, referring to the departure of Paul. The aorist tense is a constative aorist for a momentary action. The active voice: Paul produced the action when he left the Philippians. The indicative mood is for the reality of the fact that Paul moved on, leaving Timothy behind as their pastor.


“from Macedonia” – the preposition apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] plus the ablative of the proper noun.


“no church communicated” – the subject nominative feminine singular from oudeís (οὐδείς) [pronounced oo-DICE], which means really “not one” or “no one.” Plus ekklêsía (ἐκκλησὶα) [pronounced ek-klay-SEE-ah] for “church,” and the aorist active indicative from koinōnéō (κοινωνέω) [pronounced koy-no-NEH-oh], a word for giving. It means to contribute, to share—“not one church had contributed.” This is a dramatic aorist tense, it states a present reality with the certitude of a past event. The active voice plus the negative adverb indicates that no local church except the Philippians church had produced the action. The indicative mood is declarative for the historical reality of the fact that in that area where so many churches were formed none of them had advanced enough spiritually to be properly motivated for true giving.


“with me” is a dative singular indirect object personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH].


“as concerning giving and receiving” – this includes the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE], plus the accusative from the singular logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss]: “with reference to doctrine.” This is the doctrine of giving and receiving. Then comes two descriptive genitives, dósis (δόσις) [pronounced DOS-ihç]—“giving” and lēmpsis (λêμψις) [pronounced LAMPE-sis]—“receiving.”


“but ye only” – ei (εἰ) [pronounced I] mê (μή) [pronounced may] means “except”; u(meij means “you”; the nominative plural of monos (μόνος) [pronounced MON-oss] refers to only one church at that time, the Philippians church.


Philippians 4:15 And you yourselves also recognize, that in the beginning of my ministry with reference to the gospel, when I had departed from Macedonia, not one church had contributed to me in application of the doctrine of giving and receiving, except only you.


Knowing and Applying Doctrine

1.       One of the sure signs of understanding doctrine is to translate such doctrine into grace action.

2.       You cannot apply doctrine you know, you can only apply doctrine you understand.

3.       Doctrine in the left lobe as gnôsis (γνσις) [pronounced GNOH-sis] cannot be applied or utilized or form the basis for motivation.

4.       Only doctrine in the right lobe is applicable—epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis], which becomes sophia (σοφία) [pronounced sohf-EE-ah]—to life.

5.       The Philippians not only knew the doctrine of giving but they understood it.

6.       Therefore they applied the doctrine of giving as epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] and sophia (σοφία) [pronounced sohf-EE-ah], with the result that they were the only local church contributing to Paul’s financial support at that critical time of his ministry. God is able to use the sophia (σοφία) [pronounced sohf-EE-ah]-type believer in logistics.

7.       Grace action in the royal family of God originates from the doctrine that is understood, not the doctrine that is known.

8.       The Philippians demonstrated by their grace giving their reception of doctrine and resultant spiritual advance.

9.       They are ready to follow Paul from supergrace to ultra supergrace.


Philippians 4:16  For even in Thessalonica, both once and twice, you sent for my needs.  (BLB)


Verse 16 – a causal use of the conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee], translated “For,” and should be “Because.”


“even” is the ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ]; “in Thessalonica” – prepositional phrase, en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of Thessaloníkē (Θεσσαλονίκη) [pronounced thes-sal-on-EE-kay]. “Even in Thessalonica”—Paul on departing from Philippi went immediately to Thessalonica—Acts 17:1-9—and even after he had departed to Thessalonica they were already sending offerings. This indicates that the Philippian congregation immediately undertook the support of Paul simply because they had responded quickly and positively to doctrinal teaching.


“you sent” – aorist active of pempô (πέμπω) [pronounced PEHM-poh] which means to send an offering. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it views several financial gifts in their entirety but regards the giving from the viewpoint of its existing results. In other words, the Philippians took up regular offerings, administered them, and sent them. The active voice: growing believers of Philippi produced the action of the verb from grace motivation of doctrine resident in their souls. Principle: True motivation for giving is based on the application of resident doctrine. The indicative mood is declarative for historical reality.


“once and again” is really “both once and twice,” an idiom meaning more than once.


“unto my necessity” – the preposition eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative chreia (χρεία) [pronounced KHRI-ah]. This means that Paul had a need which they didn’t know of. They didn’t have to know it.


Philippians 4:16 Because even in Thessalonica you had sent an offering more than once for my needs.


The Meaning

1.       To send an offering once might indicate emotional giving, but to send an offering more than once denotes correct motivation.

2.       It is not the impulsive one-shot emotional gift that counts but the consistent and faithful application doctrine, the perpetuation of giving under grace orientation.

3.       Grace orientation in giving is based on maximum doctrine resident in the soul and/or spiritual growth.

4.       Giving in the Christian life must never be associated with bribing God for blessing. Under the principle of grace God cannot be bribed.

5.       Grace giving reflects grace motivation.

6.       Grace giving denotes grace growth.

7.       Grace giving is that spiritual function of the royal priesthood expressing worship, commemorating God’s grace, and with the Philippians, denoting occupation with the person of Jesus Christ.


Philippians 4:17  Not that I seek after the gift, but I seek after the fruit abounding to your account.  (BLB)


Verse 17 – “Not because I desire a gift.” This includes the particle ouch (οὐχ) [pronounced ookh] as a summary negation, plus the causal conjunction hóti (ὅτι) [pronounced HOH-tee] for “because” and the present active indicative of the verb epizêteô (ἐπιζητέω) [pronounced ep-EED-zay-TEH-oh] which means to seek after, to solicit. The present tense is a descriptive present, it indicates what is now going on, the slander from some quarters that Paul was using the gospel to solicit money and to become rich. The negative ouch (οὐχ) [pronounced ookh] denies the allegation emphatically. The active voice plus the negative means that Paul produces the action of the verb—denial of the gossip. The indicative mood is declarative, viewing the action of the verb from the viewpoint of reality.


“but” – the adversative conjunction allá (ἀλλά) [pronounced ahl-LAH] sets up a strong contrast with the previous clause. There is the need for believers to express doctrine resident in their souls, and giving is a worship expressing doctrine resident in the soul. The principle of logistical supply is obvious. Paul provides the need of the Philippians—Bible doctrine. That is logistical supply for their growth. As a result of their growth they are properly motivated and prospered. So while the believers provide the needs of Paul from their prosperity, Paul provides their needs in his prosperity. All people have different prosperities. A pastor has spiritual prosperity and he provides doctrine for the congregation. As a result of that doctrine being converted into epignôsis (ἐπίγνωσις) [pronounced ehp-IHG-noh-sis] and sophia (σοφία) [pronounced sohf-EE-ah] they have financial prosperity and they become a part of the logistical support of the pastor whose time must be totally devoted to the study of the Word of God.


Paul’s intake is doctrine, and he shares this doctrine with the Philippians as a part of their logistical grace. They take in the doctrine and they enjoy the great prosperity of being in supergrace. They share a portion of this prosperity with Paul, sending him a gift.


“I desire” – present active indicative of epizêteô (ἐπιζητέω) [pronounced ep-EED-zay-TEH-oh] again: “I seek after.” The retroactive progressive present denotes Paul motivated in the past which continues into the present. The active voice: Paul’s true motivation is now expressed. The indicative mood is declarative representing the verbal action from the standpoint of reality and pure motivation apart from any selfish interest.


“fruit” – accusative singular definite article plus the accusative singular direct object from karpos (καρπός) [pronounced kahr-POSS]. But it does not mean “fruit” here, it means production. This is the grace production of divine good.


“may abound” – present active participle from pleonázō (πλεονάζω) [pronounced pleh-on-AHD-zo], “which accumulates.” The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs with supergrace believers when they give. The active voice: the Philippians as supergrace believers produce the action. The participle is circumstantial. The principle is that supergrace believers are going to be prospered financially no matter what the conditions of a nation may be.


Supergrace believers are prospered in prosperous times and in times of recession and depression.


“to your account” – eis (εἰς) [pronounced ICE] plus the accusative of logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss]. It can be “to your account” because logos (λόγος, ου, ὁ) [pronounced LOHG-oss] sometimes means that, or “with reference to your doctrine.” The combination of the verb and the prepositional phrase is a technical business term for accounts and the accumulation of interest from an investment. The investment is resident doctrine in the soul, and the resident doctrine of the supergrace believer who not only knows doctrine but understands it and in the application of his understanding gives.


Philippians 4:17 (Translation not given)


Philippians 4:18  But I have all things, and abound. I am full, having received from Epaphroditus the things from you, an odor of a sweet smell, an acceptable sacrifice, well-pleasing to God.  (BLB)


Verse 18 – “But I have all,” the postpositive conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh] used as a transitional translation should be translated “Moreover”; the present active indicative from the verb apechô (ἀπέχω) [pronounced ap-EKH-oh] [echô (ἔχω) [pronounced EHKH-oh] = to have and to hold; apó (ἀπό) [pronounced aw-PO] = from the ultimate source]—“Moreover I have received in toto.” The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what habitually occurs in the life of a super-grace believer. He has more than enough. Also the accusative neuter plural direct object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], referring to the all things of paragraph supergrace2. The absence of the definite article calls attention to the high quality of all five categories in paragraph supergrace2.


“and abound” – present active indicative from the verb perisseuô (περισσεύω) [pronounced per-iss-SUE-oh]. It means to have more than enough, to have an abundance, to be extremely rich. The present tense is a customary present, it denotes what may be reasonably expected when any believer reaches supergrace. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action of the verb. The indicative mood is declarative for the reality of prosperity, the reality of extreme riches in supergrace status.


“I am full” – perfect passive indicative from the verb plêroô (πληρόω) [pronounced play-ROH-oh] which means to fill up a deficiency, to fully possess, to fully influence. Paul has been filled to the maximum with a grace gift which will carry him for some time. The perfect tense is a dramatic perfect, the rhetorical use of the perfect tense. The action is completed. Once Paul lacked, now he is full, and the results mean that he will be carried financially for the rest of his life. The passive voice: Paul receives the action of the verb.


“having received” – aorist active participle of dechomai (δέχομαι) [pronounced DEKH-om-ahee]. The aorist tense is a culminative aorist, it view the event of supergrace Philippian giving in its entirety but it emphasizes the existing results, maximum supergrace blessing to Paul. The active voice: Paul produces the action of the verb as the recipient of the offering.


“of Epaphroditus” is para (παρά) [pronounced paw-RAW] plus the ablative. He brought the offering.


“the things from you” – accusative neuter plural of the definite article, the preposition para (παρά) [pronounced paw-RAW] plus the ablative of the personal pronoun su (σύ) [pronounced soo] “from you all.”


“an odour” – the double accusative osmê (ὀσμή) [pronounced os-MAY] which means a sweet odour, a pleasant odour; “of sweet smell” – a descriptive genitive from euōdía (εὐωδία) [pronounced yoo-o-DEE-ah], emphasizing the fragrance of memories as well as the acceptability of a grace oriented offering—“an odour of fragrance.”


“a sacrifice” – the accusative of apposition from thusia (θυσία) [pronounced thoo-SEE-ah], a priestly sacrifice or offering. The point here is not sacrificial giving but simply an offering, an acceptable or a propitious offering; “acceptable” – dektos (δεκτός) [pronounced dehk-TOSS]; “well-pleasing” – euárestos (εὐάρεστος) [pronounced yoo-AR-es-toss], which means a propitious sacrifice.


“to God” – ho (ὁ) [pronounced hoh] theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], “the God.”


Philippians 4:18 Moreover, I have received en total the all things [of paragraph supergrace2]: I have more than enough, in fact I have been filled up with the highest quality of [supergrace] giving with the result that I am filled with a maximum blessing, having received from Epaphroditus the things [money] which was collected from you, an odour of fragrance [memories], a propitious sacrifice, pleasing to the God.


Sacrifices of the Royal Priesthood

1.       Every member of the royal family of God is a priest. (Not sacrificial giving, but sacrifices)

2.       Every priest makes sacrifices or offerings.

3.       The sacrifices of the royal priesthood in this dispensation include: the sacrifice of rebound—Romans 12:1,2; the sacrifice of GAP—Hebrews 13:10; the sacrifice of separation (from evil)—Hebrews 13:13; the sacrifice of praise—Hebrews 13:15 (appreciation of Jesus Christ); the sacrifice of divine good—Hebrews 13:16; the sacrifice of giving—Hebrews 13:16; Philippians 4:18; the sacrifice of academic discipline—Hebrews 3:17; the sacrifice of prayer—Hebrews 13:18,19.

4.       The Old Testament Levitical priesthood offered animal sacrifices to commemorate God’s grace, but the royal priesthood of the Church Age offered sacrifices compatible with this dispensation—the application of doctrine to experience.

5.       The Levitical sacrifices commemorated grace in anticipation of the cross, therefore the use of animal sacrifices. But the royal priesthood sacrifices are retrospective, looking back to the cross, commemorating grace historically.

6.       The Levitical priesthood offered animals whereas the royal priesthood offers the volition and mentality of his soul, the expression of doctrine resident in his right lobe.




The Doctrine of Giving (1976)

1.       Definition of giving:

          a.       Giving is an expression of worship which commemorates the grace policy of God.

          b.       Giving is the function of the royal priesthood in worship.

          c.        Giving is the means of inculcating teamwork in the body of Christ.

          d.       Giving is generally the presentation of money or other valuables to sustain a doctrinal ministry. No one should be giving until he has a little doctrine in the right lobe, so he knows enough to have the basis for giving; and understanding of giving. The doctrine must precede the giving.

2.       The principle of giving:

          a.       Old Testament reference: Proverbs 11:24–25 There is one who gives generously, yet becomes more prosperous [in supergrace, you never lose, not even financially; the so-called sacrificial giving makes people broke]. But there is also the stingy one, who holds back what is fitting [which results only in his own poverty; stingy souls are stingy in everything else]; the soul of the supergrace person will be completely prosperous. And he who gives water will also be caused to have water [under an agricultural economy, water was capital; this means that the giver of water meant that you always had water for yourself.] Notice not one reference to tithing.

          b.       New Testament reference: 2Corinthians 9:6–7 Let each one [of the royal family], according to as he has determined in his right lobe, so give not from distress of mind [pressures from the one who wants you to give] or from compulsion of emotions, for the God keeps on loving a grace oriented giver.

3.       The concept of tithing. What is tithing. Tithing is not really a part of giving.

          a.       Tithing was not spiritual giving in Israel ever. Tithing was a straight across the board 10%j income tax under the category of divine institution #4. This is the only true system for income tax. Everyone should pay the same percentage. Paying different percentages is immoral. God does not teach us to tax ability.

          b.       3 categories of taxation in Israel. Jewish believers and unbelievers all tithed. This is because they were citizens of a national entity. They were tithed for the Levitical tribe. 10% income tax. Numbers 18:21, 24 10% tax for feasts and sacrifices. Deuteronomy 14:22–24. These were holidays. A tax to observe the holiday.

          c.        No socialism; no welfare state. An additional tax of 10% every third year, for the poor of the land. Malachi 3:8–10 Will a man defraud God? Yet you are robbing Me. But you ask, ‘How have we defrauded You?’ In taxes and offerings. There were two types of defrauding. The Jews were avoiding their income tax and the Jews were not motivating by doctrine to give. Tithes ande offerings to the storehouse. There are no churches at the time of Malachi. Bring your tax to the treasury department so that there might be food in My house. Test Me now in this, says the Lord of the armies. See if I will not open the windows of heaven for you and pour you out blessing until there is not room enough to contain it. God would provide the early and late rains for their prosperity.

          d.       Many of you ask, why emphasize these things? You have not been to a church where such things go on; where people appeal to emotions in order to gain money. Berachah will board up its doors if the giving shuts down.

4.       The concept of New Testament giving 1Corinthians 16:2 On the first day of the week let each one of you put aside and save on the basis of his prosperity in order that no collection be taken when I come. Paul was coming by to take up money for relief for the saints in Jerusalem. But he did not want them to take it up while they were there. Giving is always on the basis of your prosperity. There is no percentage of giving. No one is expected to give and deprive their family of food. It could have been written, “Put aside 10%,” but it does not.

5.       The doctrinal principles of giving:

          a.       Giving is a mental attitude in every circumstance of life. It is not the presentation of money. 2Corinthians 8:2 That in the midst of severe testing of great pressure [ultra supergrace] the superabundance of their happiness [+H] and their deep-down poverty superabounded because of their riches of their generous mental attitude.

          b.       Giving must be from your free will. 2Corinthians 8:3 That according to the standard of their ability, I testify, and beyond their ability, willingly and voluntarily, they gave of their free will. No gimmicks; no coercion.

          c.        Giving must express an attitude toward the Lord before it can be an attitude toward others in the plan of God. 2Corinthians 8:5 And not even as we anticipated, they first gave of themselves to the Lord, then to us by the purpose and will of God.

          d.       Giving depends on the consistent function of gap. No one can give out until they first take in doctrine. 2Corinthians 8:7 Moreover, just as in everything you superabounded [supergrace status], in the sphere of faith, and doctrine and knowledge, both in diligence and application of that doctrine; also in the sphere of your relaxed mental attitude from you to us with the result that you also superabounded in the sphere of grace giving. Grace giving is way down the line after preparation.

          e.       Giving must always be related to the principle of grace. 2Corinthians 8:9 For you know the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, for though He was rich, yet for your sake He became poor, that you through His poverty might become rich [supergrace and ultra supergrace blessings].

          f.        Doctrine in the soul producing spiritual prosperity precedes giving. 2Corinthians 8:12 For if positive volition is present, this is acceptable, whether he has or does not have. Don’t every put money in the place if you are broke. You are only required to bring positive volition. You are never required to give. Passing the plate is a matter of convenience. It is an expression of worship. If you have the right attitude, that counts for an offering.

          g.       Giving is affected by attitude toward Bible doctrine. 2Corinthians 9:6 Now this I communicate, the one sowing sparingly but the one sowing on the principle of blessing, he shall also reap.

          h.       Therefore, giving is related to the doctrinal content of the soul 2Corinthians 9:7 Each one according to what he has determined in his right lobe so give, not from distress of mind or compulsion of emotions, for the God keeps on loving the gracious giver.

          i.         God proves the spiritual and financial capital for grace giving. 2Corinthians 9:8 And the God has the ability to cause all grace to superabound toward you; that always, having an all-sufficiency in all things, you may superabound with reference to every divine good production.

          j.         The most effective grace giving comes when the believer cracks the maturity barrier. 2Corinthians 9:10 Now He that provides graciously the seed for the sower [the supergrace believer] also graciously provides bread for food. He will also multiply you seed of sowing [that is He gives you money to give; which happens to the supergrace believer] and He increases the harvest of your righteousness [which is the total fulfillment of spiritual progress]. God gives you the money to give. You cannot give what you do not have. We never get any IOUs in the offering plate. If we did, we would throw them away. If God has given us, we can give, provided that we have to doctrine to understand that this is a commemoration of grace. God provides the money so that you can give. The only issue is positive volition toward doctrine.

          k.        Generosity of the mind leads to generosity of giving. A person is not generous unles they have a generous soul. Giving merely expresses the generosity of the soul. People have no reason to get uptight when they receive a gift. This means they have no capacity for life. A generous soul will express generosity in life. There is nothing that needs to payback. There are no strings with generosity of soul. Generosity of soul expresses itself. There is nothing expected in return. 2Corinthians 9:11 You will be enriched in all things because of your generosity of mind, which through us is producing thanksgiving to God.

6.       The subject of supergrace giving. This is what we studied Philippians 4 14–18



1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #111


111 03/07/1976 Philippians 4 Doctrines of giving (pts. 1–6 revised); logistical grace


Don’t tell your weird friends to come here.


The Doctrine of Giving is continued above in the previous lesson. A few miscellaneous comments follow.


In the past, Bob has turned down a $10,000 gift because the person had strings attached to that gift. He has turned down as much as $20k in the past. It is not the amount of money that you have, but the amount of doctrine that you have. Your motivation should always come from grace orientation in the soul. You must have doctrine in the soul and the filling of the Holy Spirit in order to give. When you have to ask for money, something is wrong. Doctrine, not money, is the issue.


In the last election, there were two parties who tried to get money in Berachah. They were thrown out.


Dr. Chafer would not allow Dallas Theological Seminary to ask for money. If you have a need, ask the heavenly Father about it.


V. 19 is logistical grace giving.


Let’s review the doctrine of logistical grace. This doctrine was covered in Lesson #5. Logistical grace is divided into three parts: Alpha, Bravo and Charley. Alpha grace is the logistic supporting taking you from salvation to supergrace. Bravo grace is logistical support from supergrace to ultra supergrace. Charley grace is the alternative, which is discipline for the reversionist. You get logistical support, one way or another. We are alive because of the grace of God. It is logistical grace which keeps the believer alive during his tenure on this earth. We all have at least one set of clothes that we wear. That is logistical support from God, for positive and negative believers. We have eaten 2 or 3 times; and this food is God’s logistical support. You have a way to get to Berachah. Transportation. You or a friend has a car. You have hobbies, and you have things related to your hobbies. Whatever interests you in life, you have it. Logistical support from God. God has provided doctrine preserved in the Bible. He has provided a local church, He has provided a local church. Those who are positive move into alpha or bravo. Apart from your own volition, suicide, we will stay alive as long as God wants us alive. Everything that we need to stay alive, God provides. Many things that we enjoy. All of this should require thanksgiving.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #112


112 03/12/1976 Philippians 4:19a Master plan for Prep School


Bob has spent time in San Francisco. There is someone who follows him to all of his West Coast conferences. He gave Bob a bumper sticker: Prevent Suicide, Register the Golden Gate. Bob ran down his college professor, the one who taught him Greek for four years at the University of Arizona and the greatest teacher in the classroom that Bob has known in his life. He was able to spend 6 or 7 hours with him. Some friends with Bob went with him. They remarked that they did not realize that someone who thought that clearly and expressed it so well still existed. Bob asked Dr. Percy who he considered to be the greatest person in the ancient world. He answered that is very simple, Saint Paul. He was the last person in the ancient world to think clearly.


Bob begins talking about Prep School.


Churchill decided to create a new front. His landing at Glipoli or Darnel? This was one of the few brilliant ideas from the British. The British generals who carried it out, and they were a little thick upstairs. These men were apparently advanced in rank beyond their ability. They should have never had the job. It was a terrible disaster. Because of this, Churchill was relieved of one of the highest positions that he held. His plan was good, but those who executed the plan were not up to it.


PREP school is a great direction for us to go in, far superior to Sunday School. The lives of our little people are at stake. They have just as much right to hearing doctrine as we have.


Our military is the watchdog of our freedom. When you have a military establishment, then you have military science. There are three aspects to military science which we will borrow from: strategy, tactics, and logistics.


The strategy will be delineated by the master plan. This master plan will determine the curriculum for ages 2–12. The teens have to come into the auditorium. There will be a format, an outline for each day of the week for each class. Children will not be bribed into coming or any gimmicks. They had opening exercises previously but no more of that. Teachers will no longer use a crutch to teach. The greatest training aide for teaching children is the child’s imagination. Loving the little people is not enough. You have to teach them.


There will be a think tank.


There are a thousand ways to get the affection of a child; they’re easy. The objective is to get them to listen for five minutes or ten or twenty.


There will be a master curriculum chart. A child from age 2 to age 12 will get a very complete theological background. The writing of the lesson plan. Establishment of a think tank. It will take some time to get the ducks on the pond; but there must be something done on the interim. Operation quilt is what will be done in the meantime. An eclectic combination of fingers in the dyke. A third plan, operation firecracker, for teaching the 4th of July conference.


Philippians 4:19  And my God will fill up all your needs according to His riches in glory in Christ Jesus.  (BLB)


Verse 19 – the logistics of super-grace giving. “But” – the postpositive conjunction de. It is a transitional particle without any contrast intended. It is used here to insert an explanation, so it is translated “Now.” The giving of money as an expression of priestly worship is a continuous process throughout life, especially in super-grace.


“my God” – the genitive of relationship from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH]. Paul is out in no-man’s land and occupied with Christ. Plus the nominative singular subject theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS], referring to God the Father as the source of all logistical grace.


“shall supply” – future active indicative of the verb plêroô (πληρόω) [pronounced play-ROH-oh]. “Supply” is all right, but supply is really not the whole story of plêroô (πληρόω) [pronounced play-ROH-oh]. The word means to fill up a deficiency. Paul had a deficiency. He was not deficient in doctrine but he was short on money. Paul is pointing out a principle in connection with the Philippians’ giving. They are now wealthy because they have advanced to supergrace and God under the principle of logistical grace has provided these things, and he is saying that God used their wonderful prosperity in supergrace to bless Paul on the road from supergrace to ultra supergrace. Out in no-man’s land he needs support. That’s why he says, “my God shall implement.” The future tense is a gnomic future for a statement of fact rightly expected when the believer gives his money as worship. The active voice: the supergrace believer produces the action of the verb. All growing believers also produce the action of the verb in giving as an expression of worship and commemoration of grace. The indicative mood is declarative for a dogmatic principle of doctrine, namely God’s logistical implementation to fill the deficiency of money.


Because of the money given in worship there is a deficiency in the pockets of some of the Philippians. They, too, are supergrace believers. Now the question is: Where does the money originate for this to continue? The answer is that God provides it under logistical grace. God will replace the money given in this type of giving.


Bob asked his Greek professor why Rome survived so long. They tolerated immorality in their leaders, but taxes were kept at 10% and they did not tolerate homosexuality. This is what perpetuated Rome.


“all your need” – the accusative is in the singular. The adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs] is in the singular. These both refer to spiritual and material need of the supergrace life. Principle: In the true function of giving both doctrine in the soul and money in the pocket co-ordinate. Therefore God will provide the few things it takes to give in this order: doctrine first; money second. He provides first the doctrine for your motivation so that it is legitimate worship, and then He provides the money. Therefore God will provide not only the money but the continual doctrinal teaching so that the logistical problem will always be solved in perfect co-ordination. Plus the accusative singular direct object from chreia (χρεία) [pronounced KHRI-ah] referring to a lack or deficiency. “My God shall fill up the deficiency of all of your need.”


Sacrificial giving is a mental attitude. Bob used to teach at the Torrey conference. This was McGee’s conference. Bob was called in to talk about having missionaries. The guy decided to give to missions instead of increase the size of his church. Bob figured that, if there was not enough room, you needed to expand the church to take in the people. Bob said that was the better idea. A few people agreed with him, but about 3000 did not.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #113


113 03/14/1976 Philippians 4:19b Doctrines of logistical grace (amplified); electioneering


Check the translation. You do not even need to train people to give because they will figure it out as they grow spiritually.


When no money comes into a church, then you close it down. The whole point of a local church is malfunctioning if the people are not getting doctrine, then that church is failing.


Bob reviews the doctrine of logistical grace. Logistics is the military science of moving and supplying troops. The quartermaster is one part of logistics. Logistics is getting the troops across the battlefield. Logistics takes cognizance of such things, no matter what the troops are doing, pursuing, moving, etc.


Logistical grace is the divine provision and supply for believers in the devil’s world to sustain them in reaching supergrace and ultra supergrace.


Alpha, Beta and Charley grace. Alpha grace takes one from salvation to maturity.


Alpha grace means that you need transportation. We are here in Berachah means that God is taking care of you. When we go from point A to point B we have protection.


Bravo grace is the second system of logistics, taking us from supergrace to ultra supergrace. This is the final objective. This is also called near grace.


Eggus is reviewed and five approaches given.


There is an intensified conflict from supergrace to ultra supergrace, and this is one of the most vulnerable areas to get off track, as per Moses, David, Jeremiah, and Paul. You cannot be unhappy in ultra supergrace. It is a rarified place to be. The more people work on trying to harm you, the more you are blessed. They become less happy and you become more. It takes some work to get to ultra supergrace. Bravo grace has many unseen blessings combined with alpha grace.


Charley grace is for the reversionistic believer. This is divine discipline. Many areas of divine discipline. It is the divine provision of punishment for the believer in time. It is the only time that this can take place. In eternity, there is no more. Every church has its reversionists and they are kept around. No man can be a great leader without true moral courage.


A general with 20,000 in WWII against the 200,000 German soldiers. This was in north Africa.


Every great leader will make a few bad decisions. Churchill made a bad decision regarding that thing above. British system enigma. This machine could develop 250,000 code systems. Ultra was the great secret of the war, which was always able to read enigma and every major German plan for war was known throughout. Everything that Hitler said was known. Ultra had to be kept under wraps. Ultra was how the British were able to win the Battle of Britain.


Operation Sledgehammer deploying Americans on a new front. Churchill checked with his experts and they said this would be a terrible idea.


If we are positive, you can understand and interpret history and contemporary events.


On this anniversary, we have never been in worse shape as Americans.


No electioneering and no pamphlets to be distributed in Berachah. This is March 1976, which was the year that Carter was elected.


There is no one person who can save the United States; there is only the remnant according to grace who can save America. It will take doctrine in the souls of believers.


“according to his riches” – the preposition kata plus the accusative singular ploutízō (πλουτίζω) [pronounced ploo-TIHD-zo] which means wealth. With it is the possessive genitive singular from the intensive pronoun autos (αὐτός) [pronounced ow-TOSS], important because it emphasizes the wealth of God. The wealth of God is infinite, unlimited. In the mundane system of economics you must possess money or credit to make money, but in the grace system of things you must have nothing to gain credit. Nothing means no ability of your own. Doctrine is the issue.


Principle

1.       The grace system of logistics has its own capital: Bible doctrine.

2.       God in His grace provides both the spiritual and the material capital for the function of the royal priesthood in time.

3.       This function reaches its zenith in spiritual maturity and/or super-grace or ultra-super-grace status.

4.       Having nothing means having no human assets or ability.

5.       Grace has found a way to provide capital for all believers—the daily function of GAP.

6.       The accumulation of Bible doctrine in the soul not only results in supergrace status but it also provides both spiritual and material capital to make grace offerings to the Lord.

7.       Grace motivation leads to grace function.

8.       The supergrace status is a frame of reference to all priestly sacrifices.

9.       Under category #1 of paragraph supergrace2 God has provided the motivation for these royal priesthood sacrifices. Under category #2 of paragraph supergrace2 God has provided whatever is necessary to express the grace motivation of the soul.


“in glory” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus the locative of doxa (δόξα) [pronounced DOHX-ah]. This glory is a reference to the eternal status of God. You can choose the temporal or the eternal solution while you live in time. The eternal solution is the wealth of God. The capital is Bible doctrine in the soul.


“by Christ Jesus” – en (ἐν) [pronounced en] plus Iêsous (̓Ιησος) [pronounced ee-ay-SOOCE] Christos (χριστός) [pronounced krees-TOHSS] which is “in Christ Jesus.” This last prepositional phrase refers to the royal family of God in union with Christ as the means of contact with the resources of wealth. It gives the believer the right to tap the eternal riches of God. Because the royal family is in union with Christ they possess the potentiality of spiritual maturity in time which provides spiritual and material assets to make an acceptable offering to God, and at the same time to save the national entity.


Philippians 4:19 Now my God shall fill up the deficiency of all of your need according to His wealth in glory in Christ Jesus.


“Politics will never solve anything except to give good jobs to imbeciles.” Thieme 1976.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #114


114 03/14/1976 Philippians 4:20–23 Doctrine of spiritual maturity; social life


JT is six years old. Bobby has been teaching him how to jump off of desks and chairs. Bob became instant friends with JT.


He came to give his PREP school report. He was grinning all over the place and he also had two pages of notes. He loves his teacher. Doctrine of Sheep 1. Won’t drink water. 2. Smell bad. 3. Are dumb. 4. So in all directions get excited. More points. He also has the doctrine of authority, with ten points.


JT is a pretty discerning person for six years old. He regards Bobby as his uncle and “I think he considers me one of the patriarchs.”


Philippians 4:20  Now to our God and Father be the glory to the ages of the ages. Amen.  (BLB)


Verse 20 – “Now” is a postpositive conjunctive particle dé (δέ) [pronounced deh], used here as a transitional particle without any contrast intended. It is used here to continue the dissertation and to emphasize the importance of responding to Bible teaching.


“unto God and our Father” – a dative of reference of the definite article, and of the noun theos (θεός) [pronounced theh-OSS]: “Now with reference to the God, even our Father.” The possessive genitive plural from the personal pronoun egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH] is important because it is very personal. God the first person is our Father. The very designation “Father” is a reminder of logistical grace and its source. The ascensive use of kaí (καί) [pronounced ] is used here for apposition.


“glory” – the nominative singular subject doxa (δόξα) [pronounced DOHX-ah]. All glory belongs to God. The more doctrine we receive the more we realize that; that there is only room for God to be glorified. All glory belongs to God. This is in contrast to the people to whom Paul referred to at the end of Philippians 3, whose glory is their shame.


“forever and ever” – this is how long we will be glorifying God and increase in our motivation for glorifying Him.


“Amen” is simply an affirmative particle, amên (ἀμήν) [pronounced am-ANE], “So let it be” or “So be it.”


Philippians 4:20 Now glory with reference to the God, even our Father, forever and ever. So be it.


The order of verses 21 & 22 is very important. In verse 20 the focus is on God the Father and glorifying Him. When the focus is in that direction then in verses 21 and 22 those who are up to date on verse 20 have a rapport, regardless of personality, of age, or any other factor. In these two verses we have rapport among the beneficiaries of the supergrace logistics.


Final Greetings


Philippians 4:21  Greet every saint in Christ Jesus. The brothers with me greet you.  (BLB)


Verse 21 – “Salute” is the aorist active imperative of aspazomai (ἀσπάζομαι) [pronounced as-PAD-zom-ahee]. It means to greet. The greeting here is verbal. The aorist tense is a constative aorist referring to a momentary action. The active voice: supergrace believers produce the action of the verb. They have rapport with each other. They have in common Bible doctrine resident in the soul. The imperative mood is the imperative of entreaty in which the imperative does not convey the finality of a command, it has the force of a request.


The Romans brought the fist across the chest and held it there until acknowledged.


The Romans were said to be very much against homosexuality. You could be immoral, but not get involved in homosexual acts.


“every saint” – accusative masculine singular direct object from the adjective pás (πάς) [pronounced pahs], plus the accusative direct object from hagios (ἅγιος) [pronounced HA-gee-oss]; “in Christ Jesus” – “Say hello to every saint in Christ Jesus.”


    The Social Life of the Royal Family

1.       Attitude toward Bible doctrine divides all Church Age believers.

2.       Former friends and close associates become separated in the Christian life. Those positive toward doctrine are moving in one direction; the people who are negative are moving in another. And families are divided by their attitude toward doctrine.

3.       Doctrine is a divider of family, friends and loved ones.

4.       The viewpoint of the supergrace believer and that of the reversionist are antithetical and without compatibility.

5.       The believer under the influence of evil has neither capacity for love nor friendship.

6.       Rapport is destroyed between the supergrace believer who is out in no-man’s land and the reversionist passing through the 8 stages of reversionism. There is no compatibility and there is nothing that can draw them together.

7.       The believer who starts to advance without his old friends must forget them.

8.       Both in the advance to maturity and the advance to ultra supergrace occupation with Christ is the issue. Eventually other supergrace believers will form the nucleus of social life as the believer advances in the Christian life.

9.       You have no excuse if married to separate.


We send wheat to Russia and they turn around and send this wheat to India to gain a foothold there.


You are like a person in the candy store who tried chocolate bon bons and decided that you did not like it, so you go back to try peanut brittle.


“The brethren” – nominative plural of adelphos (ἀδελφός) [pronounced ad-el-FOSS], a reference to the royal family; “which are” is not found in the original. There is a nominative plural definite article used as a relative pronoun.


“with me” – the preposition sun (σύν) [pronounced soon] plus the instrumental singular of egô (ἐγώ) [pronounced ehg-OH], “together with me.” There is rapport.


“greet you” – aspazomai (ἀσπάζομαι) [pronounced as-PAD-zom-ahee], present active indicative. The present tense is a descriptive present, it denotes what is now going on. There is rapport among positive believers in Rome.


Philippians 4:21 Say hello to every saint in Christ Jesus. The brethren who are together with me send greetings to you.


Philippians 4:22  All the saints greet you, and especially those of the household of Caesar.  (BLB)


Verse 22 – “All the saints” – royal family; “salute you” – this refers to the fact that at this time in Rome there are a large number of advancing believers. Later on many of these will peel off but at the moment they are positive. Again, the customary present tense of aspazomai (ἀσπάζομαι) [pronounced as-PAD-zom-ahee] for what may be reasonably expected from supergrace believers. The active voice: the supergrace believer in Rome produces the action of the verb as a result of instant rapport with other advancing believers.


“chiefly” – the adverb málista (μάλιστα) [pronounced MAHL-is-tah] means “especially”; “they that are” is not found in the original.


“those from Caesar’s palace” literally. Nero is the Cæsar; and there are VIPs in the palace who are believers.


Philippians 4:22 All the saints greet you, especially those from Caesar’s palace.


Philippians 4:23 The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ be with your spirit. (BLB)


Verse 23 – the principle of advance to ultra supergrace. “The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with your spirit.”


“The grace” – nominative singular from the noun charis (χάρις) [pronounced KHAHR-iç]. This is the principle that sustained Paul. The word “spirit” is for the human spirit, metá (μετά) [pronounced meh-TAH] plus the genitive of pneuma (πνεμα) [pronounced PNYOO-mah]. The human spirit is where doctrine is converted.


This is very similar to what Paul said at the end of 1 or 2Timothy.


Philippians 4:23


This brings us to the Doctrine of Spiritual Maturity. There are 11 minutes remaining.


We start as spiritual babies, and we move to adolescence and then to adulthood. That is where the dynamics of Christianity takes place and this is where we fulfill our ambassadorship. None of this is know when a baby. As an adolescence, they are confuses and possibly get involved in doing works.


I will place the doctrine in the next lesson. We get as far as the definition of spiritual maturity in this night’s lesson.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #115


115 03/15/1976 Philippians 4 Doctrine of maturity (pts. 1–4)


Everyone has a true personality and a false personality. The secret of teaching is to bring your teaching and your true personality together. From all reports, PREP school has some great reports.


Bob translates all of Philippians 4.


All of the doctrine of spiritual maturity will be placed in this less. This is not a match for the doctrine of spiritual maturity in NB 2. Most of point one originally came from the previous lesson, but it was reviewed and appended in this lesson.


The Doctrine of Spiritual Maturity

A.       Definition of spiritual maturity:

          1.       Maturity represents the maximum spiritual growth of the believer in time.

          2.       It is defined categorically under two concepts: supergrace and ultra supergrace. There will be some extensive discussion.

          3.       Maturity is the objective in keeping the believer on this earth, in this life after salvation.

          4.       Maturity is the only means of glorifying Jesus Christ.

          5.       Maturity is the tactical victory of the angelic conflict designed to complement our Lord’s strategic victory in bring seated on the right hand of the Father.

          6.       Maturity is the complement of our Lord’s battlefield royalty. This is how we salute Him.

          7.       Maturity is the productive status of the royal family of God.

          8.       Maturity is the key issue of phase II for the believer. This is the objective of the believer; not production, not works, not human planning.

          9.       Maturity is the manifestation of the believer’s correct scale of values and his modus operandi of right priorities.

          10.     Maturity is the modus vivendi of occupation with Jesus Christ.

          11.     Therefore, maturity is the divine objective for the believer in time. As per many commands in the Scriptures. Maturity is the means of glorifying Jesus Christ. This is the basis of all temporal and eternal rewards in the Christian life. There is no blessing in time or in eternity apart from spiritual maturity.

B.       Since maturity is related to the grace of God, it become necessary to study the relationship of maturity and grace.

          1.       The definition and concept of grace:

                     a.       Grace is all that God is free to do on the basis of the work of Jesus Christ on the cross. The cross is the key to understanding grace.

                     b.       Because of the complexity of divine essence, God must be consistent with Himself.

                     c.        No characteristic of divine essence can be compromised or jeopardized when blessing mankind.

                     d.       Because of propitiation, God is able to carry out His plan of both temporary and eternal blessing for mankind without any compromise of His perfect essence.

                     e.       God is free to express His love under the plan of grace where God does all of the providing, all of the work, all of the sustaining, and man does all of the receiving, totally apart from his merit or ability.

          2.       Concepts of grace:

                     a.       Therefore under the concept of grace, everything depends upon Who and What God is. Nothing depends upon us.

                     b.       That means that everything depends pon the essence of God. Grace is all that God is able to do for an and be consistent with His Own essence.

                     c.        Under the principle of grace, God provides a series of blessings for man totally apart from man’s merit, man’s ability, man’s energy, man’s ingenuity, man’s policy, That knocks out 90% of fundyy policy.

                     d.       God’s policy is, God gives and man receives. God does all of the work while man does all of the benefitting.

                     e.       Under the mechanics of grace, man has a relationship with God under two categories: before the fall and after the fall.

                                (1)      The relationship before the fall was based upon creation; God created man. The relationship, as with all of God’s creatures, it all begins in perfect harmony and rapport. There is always the possibility of man breaking that relationship. In grace, everything is taken care of for the body, the soul and the spirit of man. Nothing was omitted. While it is not given in any detail, man had perfect environment and nothing was missing. Jesus was the perfect teacher there teaching every day. There were trees that were pleasant for the eyes. There was also physical provision for the body. Not only was the food from the trees good, but slitting among the trees was the most beautiful female form in all existence. And they had magnificent sexual rapport and they had sex all of the time. The angelic conflict was based upon one prohibition which tested their volition. There was one tree, the tree that represented Satan’s plan, the tree of good and evil. Good is the invention of Satan. God has trumped human good with divine good. But both good and evil are the invention of Satan. Evil is the policy of Satan and good is the outworking of that policy. This was man’s initial volitional test, to avoid the tree of the knowledge of good and evil.

                                (2)      After the fall, God supercharged...the issue was attitude toward doctrine. Doctrine is the issue; doctrine is the key. Believer’s attitude toward Bible doctrine is reducing the Christian’s life to the utmost simplicity. The alternative in accepting doctrine is judgment. We actually have a direct system set up in the soul. You are either for doctrine and blessed or you are against doctrine and you are cursed. Blessing and cursing is based upon your attitude toward Bible doctrine. Grace, therefore, is the genius of God; doctrine is the manifestation of that genius, maturity is the glorification of that genius.

          3.       The categories of grace.

                     a.       Saving grace. All that the Trinity must do to accomplish man’s salvation. In eternity past, God the Father did all of the planning. He did not stop with that. It is inevitable that God’s plan will be perfect as God is perfect. Once God gave the spark of life to that fetus, it would be unique. This would be a fetus that comes out from the womb with both human life and spiritual life. Man comes into a new category, only-born Son of God. All of us have been born into the world, except for Adam and Eve. We are born spiritually dead. The production of human good and sin, which is as much as we can do as unregenerate.

                     b.       Logistical grace. Logistics is the military science of supply, provision, planning of troop movement and any military maneuver (advance, retreat, attack exploitation, reconnaissance, or pursuit). . in the spiritual realm, this is divine provision and the sustaining grace in the devil’s world for believers that provides and cares for the believer from salvation to maturity. Then from maturity 1 to maturity 2. Alpha grace takes believer from salvation to supergrace. This is all that God must do to keep the believer alive in the devil’s world. Positive volition toward doctrine is the basis for requisitioning alpha grace. Food, shelter, clothing, transportation and environment. Security provision; doctrine in the soul is one form of security and guardian angels is another. We have a guardian angel who acts as point when we drive to Berachah Church. There is rear guard and another angel who is a mine sweeper. Spiritual provision. The Word of God as the textbook. Preserved for time and eternity. The pastor as the communicator and the local church as the classroom. Everything necessary to sustain your physical and spiritual life. Then bravo grace, which is logistical support from supergrace to ultra supergrace. Everything it takes to support, sustain. This is an intensified provision to take believers to the highest point in the spiritual life. Philippians 4:5 Let your supergrace reasonable mental attitude be known to all mankind; the Lord is near. Then there is Charley grace for the believer who neglects Bible doctrine or is out of line. This is divine discipline. The believer who rejects Bible doctrine, the beans and bullets of life, then Charley grace is the alternative. Hebrews 12:6.

                     c.        Supergrace is the first stage of Christian maturity. The first place where we glorify Jesus Christ. This is the status of spiritual maturity. It is the status of the completed edification complex structure; the only place where Christ is glorified after salvation.

                     d.       Ultra supergrace is characterized by maximum pressure which only intensifies that blessings. There is a lot of flack, a lot of pressure, a lot of activity. This is a place where believers often peel off and crash and burn. When someone speaks against a supergrace believer they get double discipline. Moses is the example of this. His sister turned white with leprosy when Moses remarried and she complained about it.

                     e.       Dying grace. Leaving behind great blessing for friends and family. They will be blessed for the rest of their lives from blessing by association.

                     f.        Surpassing grace; it surpasses the ability of the mind to comprehend it. It will be so wonderful in eternity and there are no words to describe it. There are no streets paved with gold. That is millennial Jerusalem. There will be no equality in heaven.

          4.       According to Bob, this is point 4, so somehow I have an extra point in here/ This is supergrace, which comes from the book of James where he writes, He give more grace (or, supergrace). 1Timothy 1:14 the grace of our Lord super-abounding grace with doctrine and love which is in Christ Jesus. This is the adult stage of the royal family of God. This is maximum glorification of Jesus Christ. This is where the normal function of the royal priesthood begins. This is accompanied with divine blessing beyond the human mind. God has things far greater than we can imagine, greater than we would think to ask for. Spiritual IQ is resident doctrine in the soul, called ἑπίγνωσις in the Greek. Hebrews 13:10 The building synonym Hebrews 4:12, 16. These subpoints all come from the doctrine of supergrace.

                     a.       Theological: "greater grace," James 4:6.

                     b.       The Hebrew word CHAKMAH means wisdom, the nomenclature for maximum Bible doctrine in the soul.

                     c.        Priestly: "the altar of the soul," Hebrews 13:10.

                     d.       Building: "the edification complex of the soul," Ephesians 4:12,16.

                     e.       Sanctification: "godliness," 1Timothy 6:3-6; 2Timothy 3:12; 2Peter 1:3. The Greek word eusebaia, which is usually translated godliness. It means experiential sanctification.

                     f.        Chemical: "salt," Matthew 5:13. For the mature believer salt is used as a preservative and as a seasoning. The preservation of our nation lies within our soul. We reach supergrace having maximum doctrine in our soul.

                     g.       Crucifixion: "take up your cross..." Matthew 10:38; Mark 8:34; Luke 9:23, 14:27. This is not a comparison to our Lord being crucified, but it refers to the Roman custom of crucifixion.

                     h.       Military: "put on the full armor of God," Ephesians 6:11-18; "follow the colors to the high ground," Hebrews 12:1-2; "establish a command post of the soul," Colossians 2:5-8. The principle of advance.

                     i.         Volition is emphasized. Central control system: "the inner rule or dictator of the soul," Ephesians 6:10. Bible doctrine is the dictator in the soul of the mature believer.

C.       Maturity is the objective of phase II. Logistical grace sustains the believer and provides all things necessary to crack the maturity barrier.

D.       The means of attaining maturity. Ephesians 3:16–19 The blessings of supergrace 2

What follows is actually from the next lesson:

E.       The doctrine of ultra supergrace is point five.

          1.       Ultra supergrace is the most advanced stage of spiritual maturity related to time and to history.

          2.       The way I am going to reference the notes for ultra supergrace given in lesson #25, which actually takes place two months after this lesson. Any additions will be placed with that doctrine.


Bob is advancing and we need to advance with him. A lady asked Taylor Williams, “If God is omnipresent, is he in hell?”


When you are learning, you will always have questions. You cannot teach what you only know. You can only teach what you understand.


1976 Philippians                                                                                        Lesson #116


116 03/16/1976 Philippians 4; Psalm 84:1–12 Doctrine of maturity (pts. 5–8)

END OF SERIES


Two medal of Honor recipients.


First night in 30 years without a single uniform in Berachah. Nope, there is one.


A brief review of the doctrines of maturity. Big point #5 was ultra supergrace. Big point #6 is the blessings of maturity.


The Blessings of Maturity

1.       There is a constant flow of blessing for those in supergrace and ultra supergrace, as long as they remain in that status. David is the most dramatic illustration of this. When he went through this adultery situation, he did not lose his blessings of SG2. He was still wealthy, he was still king. He was under discipline. The baptist response buries the truth of this teaching in a mass of debris and dung. If you are carnal in supergrace, you will be disciplined. When you rebound, the discipline will eventually be withdrawn. Bob occasionally indulges in sin, but he does not advocate it. Babies can be spiritual or carnal. As long as carnality does not get you into evil, you are okay. No matter what your stage, you will be carnal and you have the option of recovering. Nobody gets away with anything. David did not get away with anything. Be careful of evil. Rebound and keep moving. Do not get your nose into anyone else’s business and do not draw conclusions about anyone else. You cannot get your doctrine by watching others. Psalm 23:5–6 My cup overflows [this is supergrace David] as a basis of confidence, both divine good and grace will pursue me all the days of my life. David was in supergrace or ultra supergrace at this time and he sinned greatly with Bathsheba, but when he numbers the people, that will be an even greater sin. The devil put him up to that. The devil did not put him up to Bathsheba. His own good taste put him up to that. ...and I will dwell in the house of the Lord forever.

2.       The content of SG3 as already been covered and we can find it elsewhere in our notes. The various types of blessing.


The Promotion of the Mature Believer

1.       As a part of blessing SG2, God promotes the mature believer. He is the supergrace believer or the supergrace believer sustained by Bravo grace or he is the ultra supergrace believer. If God does not promote you, you are not promoted. There is promotion by Satan and this is temporary and not accompanied by promotion or blessing. Then there is blessing which comes from God, the promotion which comes in Alpha or Bravo supergrace; or in ultra supergrace. This is the principle, if God does not promote you, you are not promoted.


There are two sets of notes for Psalm 84. This set of notes is close, but not the same as what Bob is teaching in this final lesson of Philippians.


The promotion of supergrace -This psalm actually talks about a temple, and there was no temple. This is a psalm written by the sons of Korah and there was no temple when the sons of Korah were doing their writing.


Verse 1 - "How lovely are thy dwelling places, O Lord of hosts!" His dwelling places are the places where supergrace believers live; high ground. And where else is a dwelling place? On the golden bridge, how long it takes you to die. And where else is a dwelling place? On the other side in eternity where you have SG3, surpassing grace. So the dwelling places are SG2 and SG3. They are not "lovely". The word for lovely in the Hebrews means the utmost beauty, the beauty which charms, a beauty which enhances, a beauty which gets into your soul and you think about it and remember it. "O Lord of hosts!" is referring to the fact that God is the God of the armies of heaven as well as earth.


Verse 2 - "My soul longs" - positive volition toward doctrine; "even yearns" - intensifying the intake of doctrine; "for the courts of the Lord" - the court is where the Word is taught. So the temple or the dwelling places are where the victories are won, but the victories are won by spending a lot of time in the courts. In a sense the local church is a court; "my right lobe and my flesh [my human ability to sing] sing with +H to the living God." Anyone who is a mature believer is either promoted or promotable.


Verse 3 - "The bird also has found a home [doctrine]" - the bird is a wanderer. In other words, where doctrine is that is the place where home is; if he gets out of the house, reversionism cancels promotion. "and the swallow a nest" - the swallow is a bird that migrates from place to place and regularly comes back to the same place; "for herself where she may lay her young, even thine altars, O Lord of hosts, my King and my God." The altar always takes us back to the initiation of grace which is salvation grace.


The sparrow and the swallow are both vulnerable, helpless birds when they are outside of their nexts. This is a believer who is away from doctrine and is in a dangerous place.


The altar is where the believer learns Bible doctrine. You get into reversionism a few times and God passes you over many times; and eventually, you go out under the sin unto death.


Verse 4 - "Blessings [the five categories of blessing] to those who dwell in thy house" - persistence in doctrine; "they are ever praising thee. Selah [think about that]."


Selah describes the tranquility of the believer. Stop singing for a minute and let the orchestra carry the ball. That is the ultra supergrace believer.


Verse 5 - "Blessed is the man whose strength is in thee" - resident Bible doctrine, getting to the high ground; "in whose right lobe are the highways to glory" - supergrace, dying grace, surpassing grace.


Verse 6 - "Who passing through the valley of Baca [valley of tears]" - This is no man’s land; the land of tears, the land of pressures. Baca is the place for ultra supergrace believers. and crying so much they "make a spring; however the early rain [doctrine] also covers it with blessing" - doctrine in the soul in time of great tragedy in your life. You can be in the valley of Baca and have great blessing. When they make it to the well, that is ultra supergrace. So even in the greatest tragedies and heartaches of your life doctrine will take you through the valley of Baca just as doctrine takes you to the high ground of supergrace. Rain is not only blessing but the primary provision of Bravo grace.


Verse 7 - "They go from strength to strength" - the first strength is the high ground, SG2, and you have your SG2 paragraph and everything that God has for you, and you seize and you hold. You go from supergrace to ultra supergrace. That is strength. What is coming up next? Death is coming up next. Death is considered something related to weakness, but you're going from SG2 to strength, and this is a golden bridge over the chasm from time to eternity and that is dying grace, and therefore another strength. You don't die in weakness, you die in strength under dying grace. And as you cross the bridge you come over now to your next paragraph, surpassing grace. So you go from strength to strength to strength.


"every one of them" - not found in the original. It should be "they go from strength to strength appearing before God in Zion." In other words, the whole principle here is that when you go from strength to strength you come face to face with God. You may be in time and you can't see God, but when you get on the high ground you see the invisible. "We look not at the things which are seen, but at the things which are not seen; for the things which are seen are temporal, but the things which are not seen are eternal" - 2 Corinthians 4:18. When you get on the high ground you can look over and see what was invisible before. This is the fantastic blessing that goes with occupation with Christ.


Verse 8 - "O Lord God of hosts, hear my prayer; give ear, O God of Jacob. Selah."


Verse 9 - "Behold, our shield O God" - the shield is an item of military equipment used in advancing. No army ever carried them while retreating. The whole concept of a shield is advance; "and look upon the face of your anointed one" - that is David speaking. In other words, `Look God, I'm moving toward you, look on my face.'


Verse 10 - Here is how you advance, get back to those courts, wherever your right pastor and local church is. "For a day in class [Bible class, learning doctrine] is better than a thousand [out raising hell]. I would rather stand at the entrance of Bible class than to dwell in the tents of wickedness."


Being in the courts is where Bible teaching is taking place. One day of taking in doctrine is equal to a thousand days of rejecting doctrine.


Verse 11 - "For the Lord God is a light and a shield" - in other words the glory road is light ahead of us, all we do is follow, and He is a shield, He protects us on the flanks and to the rear as we move forward - "the Lord gives grace and glory" - saving grace, living grace, supergrace, dying grace, surpassing grace. And the last three are glory. And when you get to the high ground of supergrace you have one paragraph, SG2, and you have the assurance of the second paragraph, SG3, and this is what it says: "No good thing does he withhold from those who walk uprightly [with integrity]" - integrity here means doctrine. He does not hold any good thing from those who walk in the Word.


The Eternal Decorations for Cracking the Maturity Barrier.

1.       The alpha cross 2Timothy 4:7–8

2.       The bravo cross, the crown of life. The decoration for the attainment of ultra supergrace. Bob derives the names from logistical support. James 1:12 Revelation 2:10

3.       The pastor-teacher who leads believers to supergrace or to ultra supergrace. A pastor-teacher can never lead his congregation beyond his own spiritual growth. So the pastor-teacher must have the alpha cross. When he leads his congregation over no man’s land, he also must possess braveo grace. The crown of glory is the highest cross of all. He will get an alpha cross with an oak leaf cluster and that alpha cross is called the crown of glory. 1Peter 5:4 1Thessalonians 19–20


The doctrine of maturity clears the decks for the next study, which is Philippians 2.

 


 


[1] See the doctrine of the royalty of Jesus Christ.

[2] See the Doctrine of Mental Attitude.

[3] See the Doctrine of the Book of Life.

[4] See the Doctrine of Happiness.

[5] See the Doctrine of Thanksgiving.

[6] See the Doctrine of Establishment.



R. B. Thieme, Jr.’s Corrected Translation of Philippians:

R. B. Thieme, Jr.’s corrected translation of Old Testament passages from Philippians.




R. B. Thieme, Jr.’s corrected translation of New Testament passages from Philippians.



Philippians 1:1 Paul and Timothy, slaves of Christ Jesus, to all the saints [royal family of God] in Christ Jesus who are located at Philippi, together with bishop-guardians [the pastor as a policy-makers; the ruler of a system] and deacons:...


The pastor-teacher must be wise in the field of administration. A good administrator is able to delegate his authority.


Philippians 1:2 ...Grace to you, and so prosperity, from God our Father, and from the Lord Jesus Christ.


Philippians 1:3 I am giving thanks to my God for every memory of you [because of your contribution].


Philippians 1:4 Always in my every prayer for all of you when offering prayer with inner happiness. [End parenthesis.]


Philippians 1:5 Because of your contribution [offering] from that first day until now for the purpose of spreading the gospel.


Philippians 1:6 Because I have confidence in this doctrine itself [logistical grace], that he who has begun a good work [alpha grace] will complete it [bravo grace] until the day of Jesus Christ [or, the rapture].


Philippians 1:7 Since it is right for me to be holding this opinion in behalf of you, because I have you in my right lobe while in prison, both in the defense of establishment of the gospel, all of you are my partners in grace.


Philippians 1:8 For God is my witness [I am telling the truth], how I long for [or, deeply desire] all of you [Philippians] with the same affections of Christ Jesus.


Philippians 1:9 In fact I pray [this prayer] that your [category #1] love may be caused to abound still more, even to a greater degree, by means of knowledge [epignosis doctrine] and [resultant] all discernment.


Philippians 1:10 In order that you might be completely pure [that is, free from evil] in the light of doctrine; and blameless [or, undamaged] [in the area of human good and evil] with reference to the day of Christ.


Philippians 1:11 Having been filled up with production of righteous [that is, the total fulfillment of spiritual progress], which comes through Jesus Christ, for the glory and praise of God.


Philippians 1:12 Now, I want all of you to comprehend, brothers [or, royal family], that my circumstances have turned out rather for the advance of the gospel.


Philippians 1:13 With the result that my imprisonment in Christ has become well-known through the entire Praetorium Guard, and to all the rest [of Rome].


Philippians 1:14 In fact the majority of the brethren, since they have received confidence in the Lord because of my imprisonment, have much greater courage to communicate the word without fear.


Philippians 1:15 On the one hand certain ones [reversionists] are making known the Christ even because of jealousy and strife [discord]; on the other hand certain ones [positive and advancing believers] because of good motivation.


Philippians 1:16 The latter category from the motivation of love [occupation with Christ], knowing that I am appointed for the defence of the good news [the policy of God for the Church Age].


Philippians 1:17 The former category from the motivation of divisive self-promotion, not from pure motives, since they presume to arouse [or, activate] mental distress with regard to my incarceration.


Philippians 1:18 What is my conclusion? Only that, in every way. Whether in false motivation or true, Christ is being proclaimed; in fact, in this I am happy, not only now, but I will continue to be happy.


Philippians 1:19 Indeed I know that all this shall turn out for deliverance to me through your intercessory prayer, and logistical provision, motivated by the Spirit of Jesus Christ.


Philippians 1:20 According to my intense concentration [on doctrine] and resultant confidence, that in nothing shall I be disgraced, but with integrity [or, spiritual maturity], even now as always [anticipation of ultra supergrace], Christ shall be exalted in my person, whether by life, or by death.


Philippians 1:21 For me living is Christ [occupation with Christ], likewise dying is gain [profit, advantage].


Philippians 1:22 But since living in the flesh is Christ, this status of maturity is for me a result of grace achievement [accomplishment]. Really, I do not know what I myself prefer.


Philippians 1:23 In fact, I am hard pressed to choose between the two alternatives [of life and death], because I have a desire to depart [or, weigh anchor], and so to keep on being together with Christ; for this alternative is better by far.


Philippians 1:24 Yet on the other hand to remain on in my body [in the flesh, in my person] is more necessary for your sake.


Philippians 1:25 And so since having confidence [in this principle of doctrine], I know that I shall remain [in phase two] and be continuing in association with all of you [Philippians] for the purpose of your advance and inner happiness from doctrine.


Philippians 1:26 That your confident glorying in Christ Jesus may abound by means of me through my return once more, face to face with you.


Philippians 1:27 Only conduct your life as [members of the] royal family of God in a manner worthy of the good news doctrines of the Christ; in order that whether I come and see you, or remain absent, I may hear about your status quo, that you are standing fast [in ultra supergrace] by means of one and the same Spirit [the Holy Spirit indwelling and filling], in the sphere of one and the same soul since you have joined in the conflict by means of faith in the gospel.


Philippians 1:28 Likewise in no way be intimidated [or, panic] by your enemies; which intimidation [panic] is to them a proof of your destruction [successful ambush], but with reference to you deliverance; in fact this deliverance is from the source of God.


Philippians 1:28 In no way be intimidated by your enemies; which is to them a public proof of your neutralization [in the angelic conflict] [any believer who is intimidated in no man’s land between supergrace and ultra supergrace has been neutralized and he is moving into reversionism] but to you deliverance and this deliverance from the source of God.


Philippians 1:29 Because to you it has been graciously given, not only to believe on Him but also to suffer for His sake.


Philippians 1:29 Because it has been given to you in behalf of Christ, not only to believe in Him, but also to suffer in behalf of Him,...


Philippians 1:30 ...since you have the same conflict [of supergrace B] such as you have seen in me, and now hear through me [that is, through his writing to the Philippians].



Philippians 2:1 Therefore if there is any encouragement in Christ [and there is], if there is any comfort from love [occupation with Christ; and there is], if there is any partnership with the Holy Spirit [and there is], if there is any emotional response to doctrine and resultant mercies [grace function in action; and there is],...


Philippians 2:2 ...bring to completion my happiness [+H], that you might be thinking the same things, having the same love [occupation with Christ][3], united in soul, concentrating [intent] on the same objective [or, on one objective; that is ultra supergrace].


Philippians 2:3 Do nothing motivated by contentiousness nor ambitious pride; but, by means of grace orientation [logistical or bravo grace], be considering each other [in the royal family] as better than himself.


Philippians 2:4 Every one of you [advancing to ultra-super-grace] should not only be regarding his own personal interests [in the advance] but also every one of you [advancing to ultra supergrace] (should be advancing) should be regarding the personal interests of others [those who are also advancing].


Philippians 2:5 Keep on thinking this doctrine within you, which also was resident in Christ Jesus,...


Philippians 2:6 ...Who though He existed in the essence of God, He did not think equality with God a gain to be seized and held,... He did not see Deity as something which must be held onto, thus not advancing the plan of God. This is so He would not hinder or frustrate the plan of God.


Philippians 2:7 ...but He deprived himself [= kenosis] of the proper function of deity, when He had received the form of a servant, although He had been born in the likeness of mankind.


Philippians 2:8 In fact, although having been discovered in outward appearance as a man, He humbled Himself by becoming obedient to the point of [spiritual] death, that is, the death of the cross.


Philippians 2:9 Therefore also, the God [the Father] has exalted Him to the maximum, and has bestowed on Him [Jesus Christ] the rank which is above every rank,...


Philippians 2:10 ...in order that in the presence of the person of Jesus every knee of heaven shall bow, both the ones on earth [believers alive at the Rapture], and the ones under the earth [believers who die before the Rapture occurs],...


Philippians 2:11 ...and every tongue shall acknowledge that Jesus Christ is Lord, resulting in the glory of God the Father.


Philippians 2:12 So then, my beloved, just as you have always obeyed, not as in my presence only, but now much more in my absence, be accomplishing your own preservation in danger [be advancing in ultra supergrace] with reverence [directed toward Christ] and respect [directed toward Bible doctrine].


Philippians 2:13 For it is God [Holy Spirit] Who is at work in you both to will [spiritual motivation] and to do [spiritual execution] above and beyond His will and good pleasure.


Philippians 2:14 Keep on doing all things [advancing] without sullen discontent [pouting] and augmentations [which undermine authority].


Philippians 2:15 In order that you yourselves might become blameless [faultless, not censored by God for reversionism], even innocent [full of doctrinal integrity; not influenced by evil], blameless [from the standpoint of establishment, morality, patriotism], sons of God in the middle of a crooked [rejection of establishment] and perverted [under the influence of evil] generation, among whom you [mature believers] keep shining as light-giving bodies in the world [the devil’s domain].


Philippians 2:16 Be concentrating on the world of life [crossing no man’s land to ultra supergrace]; that I might have a basis for boasting with reference to the day of Christ [Rapture, with emphasis on the judgment seat of Christ], that I have not run in vain, nor worked hard for no purpose.


Philippians 2:16 Be concentrating on the word of life [bravo grace leading to the award of the bravo cross, the crown of life] that I may have reason for boasting with reference to the day of Christ that I have not run or advanced in vain or struggled for no purpose.


Philippians 2:17 But even if I am being poured out as a libation on the altar of sacrifice [study] and service [teaching] with reference to your doctrine, I keep on having inner happiness, and I congratulate you all [who are right behind me, who have attained supergrace B].


Philippians 2:18 Now you also have inner happiness for the same reason; in fact you ought to congratulate me.


Philippians 2:19 Now I anticipate by the grace of the Lord Jesus to send Timothy to you without delay, that I also may have tranquillity of soul when I know your status.


Philippians 2:20 For I have no one of equal soul [comparable spiritual growth], who because of spiritual maturity will be genuinely concerned for your welfare.


Philippians 2:21 For they all [the reversionists of Rome] keep seeking their own interests, not the interests of Christ Jesus.


Philippians 2:22 But you have come to know his character as a student with reference to a teacher, who has served with me in reference to the gospel.


Philippians 2:23 Therefore I expect to dispatch him [Timothy] immediately, as soon as I determine my status quo [or, ‘as soon as I see how things turn out here’].


Philippians 2:24 Now I have confidence in the Lord that I myself also shall be coming [to see you] soon.


Philippians 2:25 Now I consider it proper to send Epaphroditus face to face with you, who is my brother, also my co-worker and comrade in arms; that is, your highest-ranked one, even your super-grace minister sent with reference to my need.


Philippians 2:26 Because he was longing for you all, and since he was distressed because you had heard that he had become critically ill.


Philippians 2:27 For as a matter of fact he was so ill that he nearly died: but God had mercy on him; and not only on him, but also on me, lest I should have sorrow stacked upon sorrow.


Philippians 2:28 So as has been said, I have sent him with special urgency, in order that, when you see him again you might have intensified happiness and I may be less concerned.


Philippians 2:29 Therefore receive him with submission to his authority and expectation in the Lord with all happiness, also beholding such pastors in the highest honor,...


Philippians 2:30 ...because on account of the business of Christ he came close to dying, when he gambled his life, in order that he might make up for your lack of service to me.



Philippians 2:25 But, after weighting the facts, I concluded it absolutely necessary to send face to face to you Epaphroditus, my brother and fellow-worker (comrade in arms), but your apostle and grace minster to my need.

 

Philippians 2:28 Therefore, I sent him with special urgency that, having seen him back again, you (all) might have inner happiness and I may be more free from sorrow.

 

Philippians 2:29 Receive with submission and expectation in the sphere of the Lord associated with all inner happiness and keep on having and holding this kind in highest honor most valued, precious.

 

Philippians 2:30 because, on account of the business of Christ, he was approaching the point of death, gambling with respect to having no concern in the sphere of his soul that he might replace with highest quality your lack of priestly ministry face to face with me.




Philippians 3:1 Finally my brethren, keep on having (inner) happiness [+H] in the Lord. To go on writing the same doctrines to you, on the one hand, is not irksome (or tedious), while on the other hand and for you it is a safeguard [or, a security measure] to you [basis of security from falling into reversionism].


Philippians 3:2 Beware of those dogs [legalistic reversionism in the form of Judaizers], beware of those evil workers, beware of that mutilation.


Philippians 3:3 For we [supergrace believers] are the true circumcision [for the Church Age], who worship God in the Spirit of God, and glory [boast] in Christ Jesus, and do not have confidence in the flesh.


Philippians 3:3 For we [supergrace and ultra supergrace believers] are the true circumcision [for the Church Age], who worship God in the Spirit of God, and glory [boast] in Christ Jesus, also do not have confidence in the flesh.


Philippians 3:4 Even though I myself might be having confidence in the flesh. If anyone [of the same category, the Judaizers] presumes to have confidence in the flesh, I more than they.


Philippians 3:5 Circumcision on the eight day, from the race of Israel, from the tribe of Benjamin, a Hebrew from the Hebrews; with reference to the law, a Pharisee;...


Philippians 3:6 ...with reference to zeal, persecuting the church; with reference to self-righteousness in the law, having become blameless.


Philippians 3:7 But what category of things were advantages (gains) to me, these same things I myself have concluded disadvantage (a loss) because of the Christ.


Philippians 3:8 More emphatically, therefore, even I also myself conclude the all things [of human achievement and celebrityship] to be loss for the sake of the surpassing greatness of the knowledge of Christ Jesus my Lord; because of whom I have forfeited the all things [of human celebrityship and achievement] and keep on concluding them piles of dung, in order that I may gain the Christ [hold the supergrace status and advance to ultra supergrace].


Philippians 3:9 Also that I may be discovered in Him, not having my own righteousness from the law, but that righteousness which is acquired by means of faith in Christ, that righteousness from the source of the God at the point of faith [in Christ].


Philippians 3:10 That I may come to know Him [through the function of GAP], and the power of His resurrection, and the participation in His sufferings [mantle of ultra supergrace], taking on the same form of sufferings, with reference to His death [of Christ] [the last part of v. 10 refers to the mantle of the supergrace believer].


Philippians 3:11 If in some way [death or the Rapture] I might cross the goal line to the resurrection away from the dead ones [the unbelievers].


Philippians 3:12 Not that I have already attained [ultra supergrace status], or before now have reached [the objective of ultra supergrace life]; but I press on, that also I may attain [seize and hold] [the objective], on account of which [ultra supergrace] I was overtaken by Christ Jesus.


Philippians 3:12 Not that I have already attained [ultra supergrace status], or before now have reached [the ultra supergrace life]; but I press on, that I may attain [the objective of ultra supergrace], on account of which [objective] I was overtaken [or, saved] by Christ Jesus.


Philippians 3:13 Brethren [royal family of God , I evaluate myself to have not yet attained ultra-super-grace; but one thing on which I concentrate, forgetting what lies behind [reversionism], and straining toward what lies ahead [ultra supergrace].


Philippians 3:14 I keep advancing to the objective [the ultra supergrace status] for the purpose of reward belonging to that upward station [phase three] from that self-same God [the Father] by means of Christ Jesus.


Philippians 3:15 Therefore, as many who are mature ones, let us continue objective thinking [divine viewpoint through doctrine in the soul, divine viewpoint taking you from supergrace to ultra supergrace]. In fact if you have a different attitude in something, the God will reveal even that to you.


Philippians 3:16 However, the objective to which we have obtained [supergrace] by that same function [of GAP], let us keep advancing in ranks [academic discipline] by means the same canon [Bible, to the next objective, which is supergrace].


Philippians 3:17 Brethren [royal family of God], be co-imitators of me [advance to his spiritual growth by listening to the message], and be looking for the same type [studying and growing pastors], constantly walking in this manner just as you have us [Paul and Timothy] for a pattern.


Philippians 3:18 For many [reversionists under the influence of evil] keep walking concerning whom I have communicated to you many times, and now continue communicating even though weeping, that they have made themselves the enemies of the cross of that same Christ.


Philippians 3:19 Whose termination of life is destruction [ruin or the sin unto death], whose God is his emotion, whose fame is by means of their dishonour, who keep thinking about [or, holding opinions on] earthly things [evil].


Philippians 3:20 For our aristocracy exists in heaven; even from which place [heaven] we eagerly anticipate the Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ.


Philippians 3:21 Who will transform the body of our humble station in conformity with the body of his glory [resurrection body], according to the operational power from which this same one [Jesus Christ] keeps on being able also to bring under authority all of these creatures.



Philippians 4:1 Therefore, my beloved and desired brethren, my source of happiness and my wreath [the crown of glory], so stand firm [be advancing not retreating] in the Lord, beloved ones.


Philippians 4:2 I urge Euodia and I urge Syntyche to be having the same viewpoint by means of the Lord [and Bible doctrine].


Philippians 4:3 I authorize you, legitimate authority [Green light, or, Okay to you,] Syzygus [or, Okay, legitimate authority, Syzygus, I also authorize you] to assist those women, who are such a quality to have teamed up with me in the spreading of the gospel along with Clement and my other co-workers [or, fellow workers], whose names are in the book of life.


Philippians 4:4 Keep on having happiness [+H] in the Lord at all times; once more I repeat, Keep on having happiness [+H].


Philippians 4:5 Let your mature [supergrace], reasonable mental attitude be known to all mankind. The Lord is near [near grace, the grace that carries you over no man’s land, between supergrace and ultra supergrace].


No man’s land is the battlefield between two opposing forces.


Philippians 4:6 Stop worrying about anything; but in every circumstance through prayer and by entreaty [for personal needs] after thanksgivings, let your petitions [requests] be revealed to the God.


Philippians 4:7 In fact, that spiritual prosperity from the source of the God which rises above every mind [human thinking], shall supply [garrison, mount guard] over your right lobes and motivations in Christ Jesus.


Philippians 4:8 Therefore, brethren [royal family of God], everything that is true [Bible doctrine], everything that is honourable [laws of divine establishment], everything that is righteous [just or fair], everything that is pure, everything that is love-capacity [or compatible with love-capacity], everything that is commendable; if anything of virtue, if anything worthy of praise exists [and it does], you yourselves be concentrating on these things.


Philippians 4:9 Both the doctrine(s) which you have learned [from my teaching], and have accepted [converting γνσις into ἑπίγνωσις], and have heard [under academic discipline], and have understood by means of me [by my teaching], be putting these into action [or, be executing]; and the God of prosperity [paragraph SG2] shall be with you all.


Philippians 4:10 Now I have received very much inner happiness by means of the Lord, because now at last you have revived your (love-)thinking concerning me; indeed you were thinking but you had no opportunity [to demonstrate your love and concern].


Philippians 4:11 Not because I am speaking with reference to [lack or] poverty; for I have learned in whatever circumstances I am, to keep on being content [or, self-sufficient].


Philippians 4:12 In fact, I have come to know [through experience] how to be degraded [the degradation of reversionistic discipline], also I have come to know what it is to live in prosperity [divine blessing in supergrace]; in every place and in all circumstances I have been initiated in both how to be well fed [saturated with doctrine] and to hunger [for more doctrine, leading to ultra supergrace].


Philippians 4:13 I have the endowed power [maximum doctrine in the soul] to attain all things [ultra supergrace/DG] by means of the one [God the Holy Spirit] who keeps on pouring the power [the doctrine] into me.


Philippians 4:14 However when you shared by giving and became partners with me in my adversity [or, pressure], you functioned honorably.


Philippians 4:15 And you yourselves also recognize, that in the beginning of my ministry with reference to the gospel, when I had departed from Macedonia, not one church had contributed to me in application of the doctrine of giving and receiving, except only you.


Philippians 4:16 Because even in Thessalonica you had sent an offering more than once for my needs.


Philippians 4:17 Not because I seek after the gift but I seek after the grace production of divine good, which accumulates to your account.


Philippians 4:18 Moreover, I have received en total the all things [of paragraph supergrace2]: I have more than enough, in fact I have been filled up with the highest quality of [supergrace] giving with the result that I am filled with a maximum blessings, having received from Epaphroditus the things [the money] which was collected from you, an odor of fragrance [memories], a propitious sacrifice, pleasing to the God.


Philippians 4:19 Now my God shall fill up [or, implement] the deficiency of all of your needs [spiritual and material] according to His wealth in glory in Christ Jesus.


Philippians 4:20 Now glory with reference to the God, even our Father, forever and ever. So be it.


Philippians 4:21 Say hello to every saint in Christ Jesus. The brethren [supergrace believers in Rome] who are together with me send greetings to you.


Philippians 4:22 All the saints [that is, the supergrace believers in Rome] say hello, especially those from Caesar’s palace.


Philippians 4:23  The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ be with your spirit.








Old Testament passages:


Genesis 3:15–16. “And I will put hostility between you and the woman, between your seed and her seed; he [the seed of the woman, Christ] shall crush your head [Satan], and you [Satan] will crush his heel [at the cross]. Unto the woman he said, multiplying I will multiply your pain in pregnancy; in sorrow you shall bear sons; and to your right man you will have the strongest desire, therefore he shall rule over you.”


Deuteronomy 30:15-20. Behold, I have set forth before you, life and prosperity [supergrace blessing or ultra supergrace blessing] or death and despair [discipline for reversionism] [attitude toward doctrine determines which] when I command you today to love the Lord your God [occupation with Christ] to walk in His way, both to keep His commandments [codex #1] and His statutes [codex #2] and His judgments [codex #3] in order that you may live and multiply and in order that the Lord God may bless you [paragraph supergrace2] while you are in the land, where you are entering to possess it. By loving the Lord your God and by obeying His voice [doctrine] and by holding fast to Him [the function of gap] for this is your life, the length of your days in order that you live in the land that your Lord promised to your ancestors, Abraham, Isaac and Jacob,


Joshua 23:10-11 One man [a supergrace blessing or an ultra supergrace believer] puts to flight a thousand enemy soldiers for the Lord your God is He Who fights for you just as He promised He would, so take careful heed to yourselves to love the Lord your God. This is fulfilled in alpha supergrace, bravo supergrace or ultra supergrace.


2Samuel 1:19–20 David describes this kind of happiness. The glory of Israel (that is, the leadership of Israel) on your heights has been mortally wounded (a reference to the death of Saul in the battle of Mount Gilboa). [David also notes that many brave soldiers died as well.] How the brave soldiers have fallen. Do not announce the news of Gath; do not spread the news in the streets of Ashkeloth (another city of the Philistines) lest the daughters of the Philistines celebrate, lest the daughters of the uncircumcised exult [this is a perfect description of –H; the Philistines would have a temporary happiness because they have decisively defeated Israel and Saul the king has been slain. that is the concept of –H.]


Nehemiah 8:10 The happiness of the Lord is your strength (the more opposition that you get, the more intense becomes your happiness).


Job 17:11 My days are past; my motivations are ripped apart also the desires of my right lobe.


Job 18:17 The memory of him perishes from the earth and he has no name around him (or in his periphery).


Psalm 6:4-5 Return, O Lord, rescue my life from reversionism; deliver me with Your grace; for there is no remembrance in you, O Lord, in dying. In the grave, who will give You thanks?


Psalm 30:5 For His anger lasts for a moment but it results in a lifetime of grace benefits. Weeping may last for the night, but the happiness [or supergrace] lasts through the morning.


Psalm 30:5 for His anger lasts but for a moment, but it results in a lifetime of grace benefits. The weeping of reversionism may endure for a night, but happiness comes in the morning.


Psalm 30:11 You have converted my morning (discipline for reversionism) into dancing; You have torn off my sackcloth and You have clothed me with happiness.


Psalm 30:11 You have converted my mourning [reversionism] into dancing; You have torn off my sackcloth and have clothed me in +H [absolute happiness].


Psalm 31:23 Love the Lord, all you, His supergrace ones, the Lord preserves the faithful but He fully pays off in discipline the arrogant doers [the reversionists].


Psalm 32:10–11 Many are the sorrows of the reversionist, but he who trusts in the Lord grace will surround him. Be happy in the Lord and rejoice, you righteous and mature believers, shout with happiness, all of you who are stabilized in the right lobe [from consistently taking in the Word of God; if you do not have God’s thinking, you have Satan’s thinking there instead].


Psalm 33:4–5 For the word of the Lord is upright [it builds up] and all His works exist in faithfulness, for He loves righteousness and justice; the earth is full of the grace of the Lord.


Psalm 34:22 The Lord redeems the souls of sinners; therefore, none of those who take refuge in Him will be condemned.


Psalm 36:1-4 Transgression speaks to the ungodly, within his right lobe, there is no respect of God in his eyes for he flatters himself in his own eyes concerning the discovery of his iniquity; the words of his mouth are evil; and deceit he has ceased to be wise he planes evil on his own bed, he sets himself on a path not good, he does not despise evil.


Psalm 37:4-5 Delight yourself also in the Lord [this is used for amorous behavior for human beings], therefore He will give you the desires of your right lobe; commit your way to the Lord, trust also in Him and he will do it beyond your fondest imagination.


Psalm 37:4–5 Delight yourself [make love with the Lord]; be occupied with the Lord and He will give you’re the desires of your right lobe; commit your way to the Lord, trust also in Him; He will do it.


Psalm 38:19-20 But my enemies are vigorus and numerous [says ultra supergrace David] and many are those who hate me wrongfully; and they who repay evil for good, they oppose me because I follow the absolute good [Bible doctrine].


Psalm 52:1 (Why do you boast in evil, O might man; the grace endures all day long [in other words, grace grace will always outweigh evil and will endure beyond it.]


Psalm 54:5 The evil will return for those who lie in wait for me and you will put them to silence with your doctrine.


Psalm 55:22 Cast your burden on the Lord and He will sustain you; He will not allow the supergrace believer to totter.


Psalm 84:1 How loved are Your dwelling places [this is where the believer is taught doctrine; mature believers must stay with a mature pastor. Some pastor out of Berachah does not understand why he is not embraced by all of the tapers of his region, it is because he is still green, and his potential congregation is actually ahead of him; so they would not place themselves with a pastor who is not as advanced. No believer ever exceeds the spiritual maturity of his own pastor. When you have advanced, Bible doctrine is your #1 priority. You love the place where you get it. You are not always happy while you are there.],

Lord of armies! This phrase is found 4x in this passage and that is because the military is the source of the freedom of any client nation. You must be free to go to the place where Bible doctrine is taught. David would hear doctrine at the Tabernacle; at his own tent; when a prophet is speaking.

Psalm 84:2 My soul longed [intensive love, even positive volition] and even yearned [this verb indicates personal motivation; you apply that desire for teaching to experience, so that you get under the teaching of the wog] for the courts of the Lord [the place of doctrinal instruction in the Old Testament; the outer courts of the Tabernacle; the prophets and the priests would communicate doctrine there. You cannot advance spiritually by working. Witnessing and prayer are the result of growth, and not the means of growth];

My right lobe and my flesh [a reference to the body; the soul must be in the body to be alive] rejoice over the living God [This is sharing God’s +H; this is when we reach the perimeter of supergrace A, where we receive paragraph supergrace2].


Bob does not like birds or flowers (except in hunting season). He does like the buzzard and he cleans up the desert or the wilderness. A guy on a hunting trip tried to kill a buzzard and Bob clocked him. Or a vulture, which is a super-buzzard. He also likes them because they are ugly.


Bob is also an admirer or the hawk. He likes the eagle as the emblem of the United States.


Psalm 84:3 The bird also has found a house [this illustrates a believer finding security; he find his own right pastor] [sparrows are seed-ickers and they make their nests low to the ground and they are hidden by their look; they camaflauge] [we are never secure as believers unless we get with doctrine. It is a tough world on the believer who does not make Bible doctrine his #1 priority.],

And the swallow a nest for herself, where she may put her young [The swallow is another helpless bird; they are vulnerable birds outside of their nests; this is the believer with Bible doctrine; it is like the swallow in its nest.]:

Your altars [This is where Bible doctrine is taught.], Lord of armies,

My King and my God.

Psalm 84:4 Happinesses [the five categories of blessings] are those who dwell in Your house! [the daily, consistent function of gap]

They [mature believers] are ever praising You [there is occupation with the Lord Jesus Christ]. Selah The have a soul and you enjoy the things in your life. Jesus Christ is the key to everything in life. The Levites were professional singers; they practiced all day long. The chiors are amateurs. They cannot harmonize like the Four Freshmen. Selah means, the chior stops singing and the band plays on. If singers can rest their voices, we can rest our souls that God will carry the ball for us.


Psalm 84:5 Happinesses are to the man whose power is vested in You, [doctrine resident in the soul]

In whose heart are the roads to Zion! Or, the highways to maturity.

Psalm 84:6 Passing through the Valley of Baca [tears; this is the most difficult stage of spiritual growth; God allows other believers to act as interference.] they make it to the well; [or to the final objective of the supergrace life]

The early rain also covers it with blessings.

Psalm 84:7 They go from power to power,

Each one in Zion is seen [or, supported] by Elohim. After believing in Jesus Christ, we are under the support of God. We are walking around with the security of God. We have the perfect security in life.


The worst con-game in the world is social security.


Psalm 84:8 O Lord God of armies, hear my prayer;

Listen, God of Jacob! Selah Look, You took care of the worst jerk who lived; so You can take care of me. This is a prayer approach. Jacob did grow up and his name was changed.

Psalm 84:9 See our shield [protection and security; and this is Bible doctrine in the soul of the believer], God,

Therefore, regard with respect Your appointed one. Every believer is appointed by God. We are appointed as royal family forever.

Psalm 84:10 For a day in Your courts [this is Bible class; or a day in Berachah Bible class] is better than a thousand days elsewhere [in a bordello, or, with someone that you love madly; in the 20th century, there is no romance, there is no romantic love anymore.].

I would rather stand at the threshold of the house of my God

Than dwell in the tents of evil. The mature believer has the correct perspective.

Psalm 84:11 For the Lord God is a sun [the sun is the blessing of warmth and energy; and Bible doctrine in the soul gives you warmth and energy; this means that the Lord is your capacity for life.] and shield [security of the shield. ];

The Lord gives grace and promotion [Paul and Timothy were two promoted believers. The worst thing in the world is to become a frustrated old person. Humility is no hangups in the soul; it is the lack of subjectivity in the soul. Subjectivity in the soul means that you are arrogant.];

He withholds no good thing [God will not hold back the divine good; He will not hold back those categories of blessing, logistical grace, etc.] from those who walk with integrity [or, honor, as a result of doctrine in the soul.]. Bob grew up in a generation where your word was your bond. That was their honor code. The gentleman’s code is, never be guilty of kiss and tell. Men are never to gossip about women. A lady’s name would never be dragged out, except in a very respectful way, even if she were the town whore. Bob authored the honor code for the Army Air Corp; and he held a school in order to teach this to the soldiers.

Psalm 84:12 O Lord of armies, [Freedom comes from military victory.]

Happinesses to the man who trusts in You!


Psalm 89:15–17 Happinesses to the people who keep knowing the sound of the trumpet [there is a certain type of happiness that can only be derived from military life; military life, even at its worst, is 1000% more orderly than civilian life. The order of national life deteriorates quickly during a national disaster.] They shal advance, O Jehovah, in the light of doctrine of your faith. [This is neutral H and +H, which is as much happiness as anyone can derive in this life.] in your person [referring to Christ], they shall rejoice all the day. In Your righteousness, they shall be exalted [God vindicates the believer who keeps on taking in doctrine.] for You are the object of glorying of their power, for by Your grace, You will cause them to be promoted.


Psalm 100:3-5 Know that Jehovah Himself is God. It is He Who has made us [the Lord Jesus Christ] and His we are. Enter into His gates with thanksgiving [today we would say enter into Bible class with gratitude] and into His courts with praise. Give thanks to Him; honor His Person, for the Lord is absolute good. His grace is everlasting. His faithfulness belongs to all generations.


Psalm 107:22 Let them also offer sacrifices of thanksgiving and enucleate His works with joyful singing.


Psalm 110:1. The Lord [God the Father] said to my Lord [God the Son], “Sit down at My right hand until I make Your enemies a footstool for Your feet.”


Psalm 116:17 To You shall I offer the sacrifice of Thanksgiving and call upon the Person of the Lord—Thanksgiving then prayer.


Psalm 119:16(I will delight in doctrinal principles; I will not forget Your Word), 83 (Although I have become like a wineskin and smoke [few things stink as much as an old wineskin being burned up] I do not forget Your doctrinal principles [once you have smelled a wineskin being burned up, you cannot forget it; similarly, you cannot forget doctrine]), 93 (I have not forgotten Your categorical doctrines, for by them, You have revived me.), 109 (My life is in continual danger, and yet I do not forget Your doctrine —you cannot apply doctrine unless you remember doctrine), 141 (I am small and despised; but I do not forget Your doctrinal categories.)


Psalm 119:132 Turn to Me and be gracious, according to the standard by which you are gracious to those who love your person.


Psalm 128:1–4 How happy is everyone who is occupied with the Lord and who walks in His ways. When you shall eat the labor of your hands you should be happy [a supergrace believer earns a living and what you eat from whatever you spend on food, you’re happy; some people are not happy at all to eat. ] and therefore, it will be well with you. Your wife will be a fruitful vine [you have more grapes, more grapes being made into wine; so you have more wine; stimulation is the connotation] [your wife will be stimulating] in the innermost parts of your home, your children will be like olive plants around the table. [Olive oil was a source of great blessing in the ancient world; it was used for lamps, it was light in the homes; the children will become great as individuals, with honor and integrity] Behold, for thus shall the man be happy who is occupied with the Lord.


Psalm 137:8–9 O daughter of Babylon, you destroyer, how happy will be the one who repays you with the payment of total military victory, which you have paid us. Happinesses to the ones who seize and dash your children against a rock. [That’s interesting, isn’t it? Total military victory includes the destruction of the children.]


Psalm 138:2 I myself will worship toward the temple of Your holiness [heaven being the true Holy of Holies] and celebrate Your Person [this is the supergrace and ultra supergrace believer enjoying occupation with Christ] because of Your grace and because of Your doctrine because You have magnified Your doctrinal teaching over Your reputation.


Psalm 144:15 Happinesses to the people who are so situated [prosperity and military victory] Happinesses to the people whose God is the Lord.


Psalm 146:5 Happinesses to the one of assistance is the God of Jacob whose confidence is in the Lord his God. The God of Jacob is used here to indicate reversionism recovery.


Proverbs 3:13 Happinesses to the man who finds chakmah (wisdom, doctrine in the right lobe).


Proverbs 8:33–36 Concentrate on doctrine (or heed instruction); be wise, do not neglect doctrine. Blessed is the man who listens to Me [says doctrine], watching daily at my gates [the assembly-place for Bible teaching] waiting at my doors, for he who finds me find capacity for life and obtains grace from the Lord [logistical grace, supergrace, ultra supergrace] but he who sins against me [rejection of Bible doctrine] injures himself [resulting in divine discipline]. All of those who hate me [doctrine] love the sin unto death. [maximum punishment for rejection of doctrine].


Proverbs 11:24–25 There is one who gives generously, yet becomes more prosperous [in supergrace, you never lose, not even financially; the so-called sacrificial giving makes people broke]. But there is also the stingy one, who holds back what is fitting [which results only in his own poverty; stingy souls are stingy in everything else]; the soul of the supergrace person will be completely prosperous. And he who gives water will also be caused to have water [under an agricultural economy, water was capital; this means that the giver of water meant that you always had water for yourself.]


Proverbs 14:21 The one despising his neighbor’s sins is miserable. This is someone that you are simply around, and if you despise their sins, you are unhappy, and it shows. You frown with disapproval. You throw out a pall of gloom like a smoke grenade thrown into the cab of a tank. You throw out this terrible thing. You ladies are great at this. Every lady is great at this. You are a walking smoke grenade with the pin barely pressed down and easily released. ...but happinesses to the one who is afflicted. This is an antithetical type development. This is an antithetical distich in Proverbs. If one thing is negative, then its antithesis is positive. If you are unhappy because you preoccupy yourself with your neighbor’s failures so that you make yourself miserable, then if you mind your own business and have doctrine in your soul and live and let live, then you are happy.


Proverbs 16:20 The one who focuses on the Word will find absolute good and happiness. Happinesses to the one who trusts in the Lord.


Proverbs 23:6–7 Do not eat the bread of a selfish man or enjoy his delicacies (when such a person invites you over to dinner, say no) for as he thinks in his soul, so he is. And he says to you, “Eat my food, drink my beverage” but in his right lobe, he is not with you {a Hebrew idiom for, “He despises you.”] This passage portrays the great hypocrisy of even our day.


Proverbs 23:24–25 The father of the righteous [the one who is establishment oriented] will be very happy; therefore, he who sires a wise son will be happy in him. Therefore, son, let your father and your mother be happy; let her who gave birth to you be happy.


Proverbs 28:14 happinesses to the one who keeps on being occupied with the Lord, but the one who hardens his right lobe against doctrine [against the Word] shall fall into evil.


Proverbs 29:18 Where there is no revelation of doctrine, the people are unrestrained, but happinesses belong to those who keep the Law.


Ecclesiastes 9:9 Enjoy life with your woman, the one you have loved all the days of your life of emptiness, that right woman who has given you under the sun pleasure for emptiness, for this is your portion in life and your work.


Ecclesiastes 11:8–9 If a man should live many years, let him be happy (–H0, but let him remember the days of darkness, for they will be many [this is an unbeliever] be happy during childhood also let your right lobe be pleasant during the days of young manhood; therefore, follow the ways of your right lobe [have a pleasant life], and the sight of your eyes, yet know that God will bring you to judgment for all things. There is a –H made available to unbelievers from the ruler of this world, who is Satan.


Isaiah 7:14 Therefore the Lord himself [God the Father] will give you a sign [supernatural manifestation]; Behold, the virgin shall be pregnant, consequently bearing a son, therefore you will call his name Immanuel [God with us].


Isaiah 53:10 (He shall see a seed; he shall prolong His days [the resurrection]; therefore, the plan of Jehovah [the Father] shall advance in His hand [that is, the hand of Christ in the resurrection]).


Isaiah 53:12  Therefore I [God the Father] will divide the spoils [the gain, the plunder of the angelic conflict] to him [the Lord Jesus Christ, in resurrection, in the hypostatic union] because of the many believers. Then he [the Lord Jesus Christ] will distribute this [the plunder, the gain] to the great ones [the powerful ones, believers who have reached some level of supergrace] because He poured out his soul unto death.



Lamentations 3:16-24 He had broken my teeth with gravel; he had made me cower in the dust; and my soul has been rejected from prosperity; and I have forgotten happiness. My strength has perished; my memory is from the Lord; remember my affliction (my reversionistic discipline) and my wandering in evil (remember it so that I avoid reversionism): wormwood (wormwood is a mental attitude of misery; this is absinth) and bitterness. Surely my soul remembers and is bowed down within me (it is a humiliating experience and a good one to remember what divine discipline is like). This doctrine I recall to my mind; therefore, I have hope; the Lord’s great support will never cease expressions never fail, they are new every morning, great is Your faithfulness. The Lord is my portion, says my soul therefore, I have confidence in Him.


Lamentations 3:21-25. This I recall to my mind and have confidence in time of historical disaster. The grace expressions of the Lord [that’s logistical grace with emphasis upon bravo grace in crossing no man’s land, that is ultra supergrace] ; the grace expressions of the Lord [logistical grace] are never exhausted; His compassions never fail, they are new every morning. Great is Your faithfulness. The Lord is my portion says my soul, therefore I have confidence in Him. The Lord is good to those who wait for Him, to the soul who will constantly seek Him.



Daniel 2:23 To You, O God, of my fathers, I give praise and thanksgiving for you have given me wisdom and power.



Amos 4:5 Offer up also thanksgiving offerings from that which is leavened, then proclaim freewill offerings; make them known, for thus says the Lord, So you express your capacity for love.





Micah 5:2 However as for you, Bethlehem Ephrathah, too small to be among the clans of Judah, from you one shall go forth from me to be ruler of Israel; his appearance is from long ago, from the days of eternity.





New Testament passages:


Matthew 5:3 Happinesses to the destitute (or the helpless) in the spiritual realm because the kingdom from the heavens [eternal life] is for them.


Matthew 5:4 Happinesses to the grieving ones for they will receive comfort.


Matthew 5:5 Happinesses to the mature believer (to the grace oriented, to the supergrace believer) because they shall inherit the land [surpassing grace reward].


Matthew 5:6 Happinesses to those who hunger and thirst for (spiritual) maturity [lit., righteousness, which is the fulfillment of spiritual progress] because they themselves shall be satisfied.


Matthew 5:7 Happinesses to the merciful ones (or sympathetic) because they shall receive mercy (as a gracious gift).


Matthew 5:8 Happinesses to pure ones (right with God; you smell good to God) of heart [right lobe], for they will see God [through Bible doctrine].


Matthew 5:9 Happinesses to the peacemakers [those who communicate the gospel so that others are saved, evangelists of the Millennium] because they themselves shall receive the designation (mature) sons of God.


Matthew 5:10 Happinesses to the ones who have been persecuted for the sake of total fulfillment of spiritual progress (dikaiosunê) resulting in ultra supergrace, because for them is the kingdom from the heavens [eternal life and eternal reward].


Matthew 5:11 You and only you [ultra supergrace believer] are happy when they heap insults upon you; they both persecute and speak all kinds of evil against you, for they themselves constantly lying against you on account of Me.


Matthew 5:12 Keep on having +H (happiness) even become extremely happy because your reward [is] great [or extensive] in the heavens, for you see in this manner they have persecuted the [ultra supergrace] prophets [the authorized communicators of doctrine in the Old Testament] who [have lived] before you.


Matthew 5:13 You and only you [ultra supergrace believer] are the salt of the land [the national entity] but if the salt has become insipid or tasteless [reversionistic], how shall it function as a preservative of the nation. It is efficient for nothing any more [that is, it is totally useless] except having been cast outside [sin unto death] to be trampled down by men [fifth cycle of discipline].


Matthew 5:14 You, and only you (ultra supergrace believer) are the light of the (satanic) world. A city located on top of a mountain cannot be hidden.


Matthew 5:10-14 Happinesses to the ones [the ultra super grace ones] who have been persecuted for the sake of righteousness [maximum fulfillment of spiritual progress] because for them is the kingdom from the heavens [great rewards in phase III]. You [ultra super grace believer] are happy when they heap insult on you. They both persecute and speak all kinds of evil against you, they themselves constantly lying against you on account of the Christ. [No matter what they do, you are still happy.] keep on having this hapiness, even becoming extremely happy [stay where you are in ultra super grace] because your reward [paragraph supergrace3] is great in the heavens for in this manner they have persecuted these ultra super grace prophets before you [you’re not the first, you’re not the last]. [Historical impact:] You [ultra super grace believer] are the salt of the national entity [salt in terms of flavor on society; but also salt in terms of preservation] [the ultra super grace believer is the ultimate in preserving a national entity.] If the salt should become tasteless, useless, how shall it function as a preservative of the nation or as a flavor to society. It is efficient for nothing, either for preservation or for flavor anymore [it is totally useless], except having been cast outside [sin unto death], it is to be trampled down by men [fifth cycle of discipline]. You ultra supergrace believer the light of the world, a city located on the top of a mountain cannot be hidden [the top of the mountain is ultra supergrace status].


Mark 7:22-23 (Out of the heart [the right lobe] comes evil thoughts [the source of many of the problems that they had]


Luke 11:27–28 Now it came to pass, while He was teaching these things, a certain woman [a very emotional and reversionistic woman, whose name will not be revealed] from the audience having interrupted with a loud voice [she is talking to express her arrogance] shouted to Him, [she should not be speaking at all; it is rude to speak when someone else is already speaking], “Happy is the woman whose womb carried you [wombs cannot be happy; the womb receives no stimulation in sex; it is the womb which has the curse] [This is a bright yet stupid woman; and she is interrupting the Lord] [If there is ever a time when a woman is unhappy, it is during her pregnancy] and whose breasts You have sucked.” [which is a walking grocery store for the little one] But He replied, “Wrong! [or, on the contrary] [Jesus is there to teach] :Happinesses to those who keep hearing the Word of God and keep on guarding.” (and therefore, retaining) [the crucial aspect is Bible doctrine is related to happiness]


John 1:1-3 — “In a beginning which was not a beginning” — a wonderful phrase used to describe the reality for thinking doctrine. Neither rationalism nor empiricism will work in this case — “there always existed the Word, and the Word was face to face with God, and the Word was God.” The Word is a title for Jesus Christ. “This same one was in the beginning with God” — there never was a time when Jesus Christ did not preexist and coexist with God the Father. “All things came into existence through him [Christ] and apart from him nothing came into existence that has come into being.”


John 1:14 The Word became flesh, and tabernacled among us (and we beheld the glory, the glory as of the Unique One from the Father), full of grace and full of doctrine.


John 8:58 — “Jesus answered them [the Pharisees], A fact I communicate to you, Before Abraham came into being, I had always existed.”


John 11:41 And so they removed the stone Now Jesus, speaking from His humanity as an ultra supergrace believer now Jesus raised His eyes and said, “Father, I thank You, that You have heard Me.”


John 14:1-3 Let not your herat be troubled; you believe ini God, believe also in Me. In My Father’s house [the eternal heavens] are many dwelling places. If it were not so, I would not have communicated this to you. For you see, I got to prepare a place for you.. If I go to prepare a place for you [and I do], then I will come again [promise of the rapture] and receive you to Myself, that where I am, you also may be. The promise and prophecy of the rapture.


John 17:13 But now I have come face to face with you and these doctrines I am communicating to you. I am communicating in the world in order that they might be having My happiness, having had it fulfilled in themselves. Sanctify them in doctrine; Your Word is doctrine.



Acts 1:9-11 And after He had said these things [announcement of Church Age, Acts 1:5, 8], He was lifted up before their very eyes, and a cloud hid Him out of their sight. And as they were gazing intently up in the sky as He was going, behold two men [teaching angels] dressed in white stood beside them. And they also said, “Men of Galilee, why do you stand staring into the sky? This Jesus Who has been taken from you into heaven will come in the same way as you have seen Him go into heaven.”


Acts 13:45 But when the Jews saw the crowds, they were filled with jealousy and began contradicting the things spoken by Paul. The religious Jews could not attract large crowds. Their jealousy was compressed, jealousy and the whole cluster of mental attitude sins were released. They were motivated to destroy the ministry of the Apostle Paul.


Acts 17:5 Then the Jews, being jealous, and taking along some evil men from the marketplace, organizes a mob and set the city in an uproar [this is when they tried to kill Paul by rioting, but Paul escaped]



Romans 1:3-4 Concerning His Son, born of the seed of David according to the flesh, having been established the Son of God in the sphere of inherent power [His omnipotence] according to the standard of the Spirit of sanctification [the Holy Spirit] from the source of the resurrection from the deaths.


Romans 4:25 Who has been delivered over to judgment because of our transgressions and has been raised up from the dead because of our justification.


Romans 5:19 For as through the one man’s disobedience [Adam] many were made sinners [the human race], even so, through the obedience of One [Jesus Christ] the many will be made righteous.


Romans 6:4 (Therefore, we have been buried with Him through baptism into death in order that, as Christ was raised from the dead, through the glory of the Father, so we too might walk in newness of life [being in a state of spiritual maturity; our motivation being based upon Christ being raised from the dead]).


Romans 8:34 asks, who has the right to condemn others? Who is the one who has the right to condemn? Christ Jesus is He Who died; yes rather, was raised from the deaths, Who is at the right hand of God, Who also intercedes for us.


Romans 14:22 The doctrine which you have, have according to your own norms and standards before God. Happinesses to the one who does not condemn himself in what he approves.


1Corinthians 1:4-8 I always thank my God concerning you for the grace of God which was given to you in Christ Jesus [this is Paul’s sanctified sarcasm; in other words, they were still alive], that in everything you were enriched by Him [they had wonderful logistical support] by all the doctrine and all the knowledge [gnosis], even as the testimony concerning you was confirmed among you. You were not lacking any of the spiritual gifts. You should be eagerly waiting for the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ [Rapture], who will strengthen you to the end [of Church Age], blameless in the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.


1Corinthians 2:9 But just as it stands written, things that the eye has not seen and the ear has not heard [empiricism] and it has not entered into the right lobe of man [rationalism] for all that God has prepared for those who love Him [alpha supergrace believers, bravo supergrace believers and the ultra supergrace believers].


1Corinthians 10:5-6 (Nevertheless with most of them, they were laid low in the desert-wilderness Now these things happen as an example for us in order that we crave not evil things as they craved evil. The Exodus generation was motivated by evil; everything else stems from that principle.)


1Corinthians 15:1-4. The Gospel includes the spiritual death of Christ bearing the sins of the world, His physical death, and His resurrection. Now I make know to you, brothers, the gospel which I preached to you, which also you received in which also you keep standing forever [Paul came to Corinth, evangelized them and organized them into a local church] by which you were saved, if you hold fast (and you do) the word which I preached to you, unless you have believed in vain [this is a type of reversionism where the resurrection is rejected as true] for I delivered to you as a matter of first importance what I also received [or, I delivered to you that which had the highest priority] that Christ died for our sins according to the Scriptures [that’s according to the Old Testament Scriptures] and that He was buried and that He was raised on the third day according to the Scriptures [resurrection is an Old Testament as well as a New Testament doctrine; and it is a part of the gospel as declared in these verses].


1Corinthians 15:20-25. But now Christ is raised from the dead, the firstfruits of those who have been asleep [the soul does not sleep; only the body]. For since by man came death[that is, the first Adam; he sinned] by man came also the resurrection from the dead [that’s the last Adam, the Lord Jesus Christ] For as in Adam, all die [spiritual death] so also in Christ shall all be made alive. But each one of u sin his own battalion, Christ the first fruits, and then those there at His coming [the royal family of God] then comes the end [the end of the Jewish Age; the end of the Tribulation] He delivers up the kingdom to God, even the Father [this is the time of operation footstool] when He has abolished all rule, all authority and all power, for He must reign until He has put all of His enemies under His feet [the dispensation of the Millennium].


1Corinthians 15:50-53 Now I communicate this doctrine to you, royal family, that flesh and blood cannot inherit the Kingdom of God [in our present bodies, we cannot go to heaven]; neither does corruption inherit incorruption. Behold, I teach you a mystery that we shall not all sleep [the body is asleep] but we shall all be changed, in a moment, in the blinking of an eye, at the last trumpet [for the assembly of the royal family], for the trumpet shall sound and the dead shall be raised incorruptible and we shall be changed. For this corruptible [subject to death] must put on the incorruptible [not subject to death] and this mortal must put on immortality [this is a reference to the rapture of the church].


1Corinthians 15:57-58 But thanks be to God Who gives us the victory through our Lord Jesus Christ [the victory is everything involved in reaching maturity]; therefore, my beloved brothers, be stabilized [be consistent in the function of gap], be immoveable [lock your positive volition in toward Bible doctrine] knowing that your labor [advance to supergrace] is not empty in the Lord.


1Corinthians 16:22 If anyone does not love the Lord [that refers to all reversionists] let him be anathema maranatha [which is an Aramaic phrase "cursed until the Lord comes."].



2Corinthians 4:15 For all things are for your benefit, that the grace that is being multiplied to more and more people shall cause the giving of thanks to abound to the glory of the God.


2Corinthians 5:1, 6, 8 For we know that our earthly tent [which is our physical body] is torn down, we have a permanent home from God [our resurrection body] a house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens....therefore, we keep on having confidence and we know that while we are at home in the body we are absent from the Lord therefore, we walk by doctrine and not by sight [guidance comes not from what appears on the surface but doctrine guiding in the soul] ...keep on having confidence, I say, and take mental delight in the fact that to be absent from the body is to be at home with the Lord. [everyone does not take delight; that is dying grace for supergrace believers].


2Corinthians 5:14 The love of Christ controls us, having concluded this that one died for all.


2Corinthians 8:2 That in the midst of severe testing of great pressure [ultra supergrace] the superabundance of their happiness [+H] and their deep-down poverty superabounded because of their riches of their generous mental attitude.


2Corinthians 8:3 That according to the standard of their ability, I testify, and beyond their ability, willingly and voluntarily, they gave of their free will.


2Corinthians 8:5 And not even as we anticipated, they first gave of themselves to the Lord, then to us by the purpose and will of God.


2Corinthians 8:7 Moreover, just as in everything you superabounded [supergrace status], in the sphere of faith, and doctrine and knowledge, both in diligence and application of that doctrine; also in the sphere of your relaxed mental attitude from you to us with the result that you also superabounded in the sphere of grace giving.


2Corinthians 8:9 For you know the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, for though He was rich, yet for your sake He became poor, that you through His poverty might become rich [supergrace and ultra supergrace blessings].


2Corinthians 9:6 Now this I communicate, the one sowing sparingly but the one sowing on the principle of blessing, he shall also reap.


2Corinthians 9:7 Each one, as he has been motivated in his right lobe, so let him give, not grudgingly or under some form of compulsion, for God loves a cheerful giver.


2Corinthians 9:7 Each one according to what he has determined in his right lobe so give, not from distress of mind or compulsion of emotions, for the God keeps on loving the gracious giver.


2Corinthians 9:6–7 Let each one [of the royal family], according to as he has determined in his right lobe, so give not from distress of mind [pressures from the one who wants you to give] or from compulsion of emotions, for the God keeps on loving a grace oriented giver.


2Corinthians 9:8 And the God has the ability to cause all grace to superabound toward you; that always, having an all-sufficiency in all things, you may superabound with reference to every divine good production.


2Corinthians 9:10 Now He that provides graciously the seed for the sower [the supergrace believer] also graciously provides bread for food. He will also multiply you seed of sowing [that is He gives you money to give; which happens to the supergrace believer] and He increases the harvest of your righteousness [which is the total fulfillment of spiritual progress].


2Corinthians 9:11 You will be enriched in all things because of your generosity of mind, which through us is producing thanksgiving to God.


2Corinthians 9:10–11 Now He Who supplies seed to the soul and bread for food will supply your seed for sowing [when you give sacrificially, God will provide more for the giving; the more that you sow, the more that God gives you] and increase the harvest of your spiritual blessings of supergrace. You will be enriched in everything for all liberality, which, through us, is producing thanksgiving to God.


2Corinthians 10:4-6 tells us what our attitude and what our concept in the royal family should be - For the equipment and the weapons of our conflict are not human attributes - we are fighting in the greatest of all warfares, the angelic conflict, older than the human race, and we are not fighting it with human attributes. The power is in the soul - but the attributes of unseen power [resident doctrine in the soul] through God against the destruction of [Satan's] fortifications. - Assault and demolish cosmic thoughts and demolish [human viewpoint], and every obstacle of pride which attacks against the objective of knowledge of God [divine viewpoint], and makes a prisoner of every human viewpoint system of thought to the authority of Christ; - in other words, your greatest fighting capabilities in the angelic conflict are in your soul. You can have a weak body and be totally out of it as far as your physical body is concerned and you can have the most dynamic powerful attack. You possess in your soul the great capabilities for fighting. However, like any good weapon, the soul has to be loaded; and loading and locking is Bible doctrine in the soul. You have to load the weapon - holding in readiness to punish all deviation from obedience [reversionistic human viewpoint], when your obedience [daily function of GAP] is fulfilled.


2Corinthians 11:19 For you are in pseudo-preoccupation with fools [the inconsequential persons], being wise yourselves! 


2Corinthians 11:20 For you have pseudo-love if anyone brings you into bondage, or if anyone devours you [or, plunders you or takes from you], or if anyone takes from you [operation strap-on], or if anyone exalts himself [the concept of human celebrity], or if anyone strikes you in the face [uses violence to keep you in line]. 



Galatians 2:2 Now according to revelation, I went up and submitted to them the good news which I preach among the Gentiles, but I did so in private to those who were of reputation, for fear that I might be running, or had run, in vain.


Galatians 2:12-13. "For prior to the coming of certain men [legalistic believers] from James, he [Peter] used to have dinner with Gentiles. But when the legalists came, he began to withdraw and hold himself aloof, fearing the circumcision party. And the rest of the Jews acted out this hypocrisy [put on the mask of legalism], with the result that even Barnabas was carried away by this hypocrisy [acting]."


Galatians 3:10 For as many who are under the Law are under a curse; for it stands written [in Habakkuk 2:4] Cursed is everyone who does not abide by all things written in the book of the Law to do them, knowing that a man is not justified by the works of the Law but by faith in Jesus Christ, even we who have believed in Christ that we might be justified the faith of Christ and not by the works of the Law. For by the works of the Law shall no flesh be justified.


Galatians 3:14 Christ has redeemed us from the curse of the Law having become a curse for us. The Mosaic Law can only condemn us. It reminds us that we are sinners and there is not asset from spiritual birth to help us. Keeping the Law will not provide us with salvation. For it stands written, Cursed is everyone who hangs on the wood.


Galatians 5:7 You were running honorably; who cut in and broke your stride resulting in you to you not obeying doctrine? Those who were in charge in Jerusalem were stupid; they were legalistic.



Ephesians 1:20 Which power has been operational in Christ, the Father having raised Him from the dead and having seated Him at His Own right hand in the heavenlies.


Ephesians 1:22–23 Which power [the power of the Word, understood through the function of GAP] has been operational in Christ, the Father having raised him from the deaths, and having seated him at his own right hand in the heavenlies, over and above all principality [the super demons], and authority [the commissioned demon], and power [the gifted demons], and lordship [the ruling demon], - in other words, Jesus Christ is superior and over all of these categories of demons - and every name that is named [rank and file demons], not only in this age but also in the one to come; and he has subordinated all demons under his feet, and has given absolute sovereignty over all the royal family of God with reference to the Church.


Ephesians 5:26-27. Having purified her [the royal family] He might consecrate her by means of the washing [that’s the teaching of Bible doctrine] from the water with the word that He Himself [Jesus Christ] might present the splendid glory of the church to Himself, not having stain [an sin nature] or wrinkles [human good, evil] or any such category of things related to reversionism, but that she [the church] should be holy and blameless.



Philippians 3:20-21 For the seat of our citizenship exists in heaven; even from which place [heaven] we eagerly anticipate the Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ; Who shall change the form of our body of our humble station [phase II] in conformity with the body of His glory [resurrection body; the glory of the resurrected Christ] according to the operational power from of this same one [Jesus Christ] also keeps on being able also to bring into subjection all these things to Himself.


Colossians 1:15 Jesus Christ, Who keeps on being the exact image of the unseen God and the privileged firstborn with reference to all creatures.


Colossians 3:1-2 If therefore you have been raised in Christ [and you have in baptism of the Spirit and current positional truth], keep on desiring to possess and endeavoring to obtain the above things [escrow blessings] where Christ is, sitting at the right hand of the Father. Keep thinking objectively about the above things [doctrine], not things on the earth [good and evil]. For you have died, and your life is hidden with Christ in God.


1Thessalonians 3:9 For what thanksgiving could we offer to God for you in return for all the happiness with which we rejoice before our God on account of you.


1Thessalonians 4:13-14. However, we do not desire you to be ignorant, royal family, about those who are asleep [Christian death; the body is sleeping waiting for the resurrection] in order that you might not grieve as the rest of the world who have no hope. For if we believe that Jesus died and rose again [which we do] so also the God will bring with Him those who have fallen asleep in Jesus.


1Thessalonians 4:15-18 For this doctrine of the word in the Lord we communicate to you, that we who are alive who remain until the coming of the Lord [the rapture] shall not precede those who are asleep for the Lord Himself will descend from heaven with a command [the command is to assemble everyone] with the voice of the archangel, also with the bugle of God; in fact the dead in Christ shall rise first and then we who are alive who remain shall be caught up together with them [the dead in Christ] in the clouds for the purpose of meeting the Lord in the air, and so we shall always be with the Lord. Therefore, comfort one another with these doctrines.



1Timothy 3:16 — “And by consent of all, great is the mystery doctrine with reference to godliness: the unique one [Jesus Christ as eternal God] became visible by means of the flesh [Jesus Christ is true humanity], the same one [Christ in hypostatic union] was vindicated by means of the Holy Spirit, observed by angels, proclaimed among the nations, became the object of faith in the world, taken up into the place of glory.”


1Timothy 6:3–4. If any teaches a different doctrine and does not concur with sound doctrine, namely those doctrines of our Lord Jesus Christ, even to that doctrine pertaining to godliness [which we describe as cracking the maturity barrier, going from supergrace A to supergrace B and eventually ultra super grace]. He has received blind arrogance understanding nothing, but he has morbid obsessions about controversies and verbal conflicts from which originate jealousy.



2Timothy 1:9 The One having saved us and having elected the royal family into a station of life not according to our works but according to His Own pre-determined plan, even grace which has been give to us in Christ Jesus before human history.


2Timothy 1:13-14 Retain the standard of sound words [doctrinal teachings] which you have heard from me in the sphere of doctrine and love, which are in Christ Jesus. Guard through the Holy Spirit Who dwells in us the deposit of doctrine which has been entrusted to you.


2Timothy 2:8 Keep in mind [or, recall to mind] Jesus Christ having been resurrected out from the deaths [the two deaths on the cross], out from the seed of David according to my gospel.


2Timothy 2:11–13 Faithful is the Word, for you see, if we have died with Christ (retroactive positional truth) at the same time also we shall live with Him. If we endure suffering [as an ultra supergrace believer in time], we shall also rule with the Lord [stephanos is the crown, but there is a leadership function which is a part of that], we shall also rule with the Lord . If we as reversionists under the influence of evil, repudiate the Lord, the same One, the Lord, will also repudiate us or refuse us blessings and rewards. If we are unfaithful, He remains faithful, for you see, He cannot deny Himself.


2Timothy 4:5  As for you, be self-disciplined in all things; endure opposition from evil, execute the function of an evangelist, carry out to the maximum your ministry. 


2Timothy 4:6  For I am already being poured out as a drink offering, and the (epoch of) time of my departure has come. 


2Timothy 4:7  I have fought that honorable fight, I have finished the race, I have guarded (or preserved) the doctrine [in my soul].


2Timothy 4:7–8 I have fought the honorable fight, I have completed the course [dying grace] I have retained or guarded or preserved the doctrine resident in my soul. In the future [phase III], a wreath (or crown) of dikaiosunê [total fulfillment of spiritual progress in the attainment of spiritual maturity] is reserved for me [Paul in ultra supergrace], which the Lord, the righteous judge, will aware me on that day [which is the Judgment Seat of Christ where every believer receives his efficiency rating]. And not to me only, but also to all those [supergrace and ultra supergrace believers] who have loved His appearance [Jesus Christ at the rapture].



Titus 2:13 Waiting with keen anticipation for that happy guarantee, even the appearance of glory of that Great God, even our Savior, Jesus Christ;



Hebrews 1:3 Who, being the flashing forth of His glory and the exact image of His essence, also sustaining all things by the verbal expression of His power [Jesus Christ in the cradle held the entire universe together by the verbal expression of His power] having Himself accomplished the purification of sin was caused to sit down at the right hand of the majesty in the highest places.


Hebrews 1:8-10 But of the Son He says, “Your throne, O God” — Jesus Christ is addressed as God by God the Father — “is forever and ever; and the righteous sceptre is the sceptre of his kingdom. You have loved righteous and have hated unrighteousness, therefore God [Jesus Christ], your God, has anointed you with the oil of gladness above your peers. And you, Lord, in the beginning, have laid the foundation of the earth and the heavens are the work of His hands.”


Hebrews 1:13 But to which of the angels did He say at any time, “Sit down at My right hand until I appoint your enemies a footstool for your feet?” The


Hebrews 2:14 — “Since therefore children share blood and flesh, He also Himself [Jesus Christ] in the same manner took hold of the same flesh and blood, in order that he through spiritual death might neutralize and destroy the one having the ruling power of spiritual death, that is, the devil.”


Hebrews 4:15 For we have not a High Priest unable to sympathize with our weaknesses but having been tempted in all points in quite the same way as we, yet apart from sin.


Hebrews 6:1-2 Therefore, having graduated from the elementary (or basic) doctrines of Christ, let us advance ourselves toward maturity [supergrace, ultra supergrace], not laying again the foundation, that is, a change of mind away from dead works, faith toward God, doctrine of baptisms, as well as the laying on of hands, resurrection from the source of deaths and eternal judgment.


Hebrews 8:1 Now the main point on what is being communicated is this: we have such a category of High Priest high priest [that’s Jesus Christ, the God-man] who has taken His seat at the right hand of the throne of the majesty in the heavens.


Hebrews 9:22 And according to the standard of the law [the Law was given in the Old Testament] nearly all things are cleansed by animal blood and without the pouring out of blood, forgiveness does not happen.


Hebrews 9:23–24 Of necessity, therefore, on the one hand that the copies [or models] of things in heaven be cleansed with shadows; but on the other hand the heavenly realities themselves with better sacrifices than these - the work of Christ on the cross is superior to animal blood on the altar; the Jews were good at preserving the shadows, but they did not associate the shadows with the reality. - For Christ has not entered into a holy of holies made with hands [the tabernacle], a model of the reality [heaven], but into heaven itself to appear in the presence of God on behalf of us.


Hebrews 10:12 But this One [Jesus Christ in contrast to the Old Testament sacrifices], when He had offered one unique sacrifice as a substitute for our sins for all time, sat down at the right hand of God.


Hebrews 10:25 Stop neglecting or the forsaking of assembling yourselves as is the habit of certain ones [reversionistic believers under the influence of evil]; but by being en encouragement even so much more as you see the day drawing near that you stop running [you stop running when you forsake the assuming of yourselves together].


Hebrews 11:27 By means of doctrine resident in his soul, Moses gave up the throne of Egypt, not being afraid of the anger of the king [Thutmose III] for you see, he became strong under pressure [ultra supergrace] as long as he kept seeing the Invisible One [occupation with Christ].


Hebrews 12:1 for this reason, therefore, since we have such a battalion of witnesses [old testament supergrace believers] surrounding us, having stripped for action, having laid aside every impediment [distractions to gap] and the easily ensnaring sin [the function of rebound], let us advance on the run with endurance to the present [supergrace A, Supergrace B, and ultra supergrace].


Hebrews 12:28 therefore, because we have received to ourselves an unshakable royal kingdom, let us be hanging onto grace through which we might render acceptable service to God with reverence toward Christ and respect toward doctrine.


Hebrews 13:5b–7 For He has said, I will not ever abandon you, says the Lord; neither will I forsake you. (Deuteronomy 31:6) There is your security. So that being confident, we say (quote Psalm 118:6) The Lord is my helper (the Lord is my financial security, the Lord is my social security, the Lord is my life security) and I will not be afraid of what man will do to me. Be concentrating on them [pastor-teachers] who are ruling over all of you, who have communicated to you the Word of God . Pastor’s whose doctrine be emulating, be carefully considering the issue of their way of life, which is the presentation of the grace policy in Bible teaching.


Hebrews 13:7 Be concentrating on them [your right pastor-teacher] who themselves are ruling over all of you, [pastors] who have communicated to you the word from the God; [pastors] whose doctrine be emulating, be carefully considering the end [supergrace] of their way of life.


James 1:8 The double-minded man is unstable in all of his ways.


James 1:12 Happiness is a man [the ultra supergrace believer] who perseveres under testing, he will receive the wreath of life, which God has promised to them [ultra supergrace believers] constantly loving Him.


James 5:7-8 Therefore, brethren, have patience [faith-rest technique; have patience because it could happen at any time] until the coming of the Lord [Rapture]. The farmer waits with anticipation for the valuable production of the soil, constantly being patient until it has received the early and the latter rains. Have patience! Furthermore, all of you become stabilized in your right lobes because the coming of the Lord [Rapture] has approached with the result that it is constantly drawing nearer and nearer.



1Peter 1:3-5 Blessed be the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ Who according to His great mercy has caused us to be born again to a living hope [condidence] through the resurrection of Jesus Christ from the deaths, to obtain an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled and will not fade away, reserved in heaven for you are guarded by the power of God through the faith of salvation ready to be revealed in the last time.


1Peter 1:8 And even though you have not seen Christ, you love Him (category #1 love), and though you do not see Him now but believe in Him, you greatly rejoice with joy (+H) inexpressible and full of glory.


1Peter 1:8 Even though you have not seen Jesus Christ, you love Him. In fact, though you do not see Him but believe in Him, you greatly rejoice in maximum +H, full of grace. The command to perpetuate happiness is the same as the command to advance to supergrace.


1Peter 1:18–19 Knowing that you were not redeemed with corruptible things like silver and gold from your empty way of life inherited from your forefathers, but with the precious blood as with a lamb unblemished and spotless from the Christ.


1Peter 1:21 Who through Him are believers with reference to God Who raised Him from the deaths and gave Him glory so that your faith and hope is in God.


1Peter 2:9 You are a chosen race [a race of election; the only super race in the Church Age are those who have believed in Jesus Christ. Superiority is based upon grace and not upon any human act or ability.], you are a royal priesthood, you are a holy nation, a people of God's Own possession [God does not just keep us alive to provide us with the bare necessities. God wants to bless us to the maximum.], that you may proclaim the excellencies of Him Who has called you out of darkness into His marvelous light.


1Peter 3:22 Jesus Christ Who is at the right hand of God, having gone into heaven after the angels and authorities and powers had been subordinated to Him.


1Peter 5:4 And when the Chief Shepherd Jesus Christ appears [rapture of the church] you will receive the unfading wreath of glory, fellow pastors.


1Peter 5:5–8 In the same way, be under the authority and command of the pastor-teacher; all of you congregation, fasten yourselves to each other with grace thinking, because the Lord opposes the arrogance, but He gives grace to the grace oriented believer. Therefore, humble yourselves [become grace oriented through the function of gap] under the authority of the ruling hand of God in order that He may promote you at the proper time [breaking the maturity barrier] casting all your worries on Hm because it keeps on being a care to Him; be stabilized, be on the alert, your enemy, the devil, prowls around like a roaring lion seeking someone to devour.


1Peter 5:12 I have written you briefly exhorting and testifying that this is the true grace of God, stand fast in it.



2Peter 1:12-13 Therefore, I will always be ready to keep on reminding you concerning these doctrines although you have known and have become stabilized by means of resident doctrine. Moreover, I consider it my duty as long as I reside in this tent to arouse you by means of memory.


1John 1:4 In fact, these things we write [this had to be stored for every generation] in order that our happiness might be completed with the result that you might have, in time and eternity, this +H.


1John 3:1-2 Concentrate on how great a love the Father has given to us that we should be called the children of God [and we are]; therefore the world does not recognize us because it did not recognize Him. Beloved, now are we the children of God and it has not yet appeared what we shall be; but we know that if He should appear [the rapture of the church], we shall be an exact copy of Him because we shall see Him just as He is.


1John 4:15-19 Whoever acknowledges that Jesus is the Son of God, God abides in him and he in God and we have come to know and believe the love that God has for us [demonstrated through propitiation] God is love and the one who abides in love abides in God and God abides in him. By this, love has been perfected with us that we may have confidence in the day of our efficiency ratings [the judgment seat of Christ] because, as He is, so also are we in the world [when He was in the world, He progressed all the wa to ultra supergrace] there is no fear in love, but perfect love [lov in ultra supergrace] casts out fear [eliminates fear because fear begets punishment] and the one who fears is not perfected in love We love Him because He first loved us.


1John 5:20 And we know that the Son of God has come, and He has given us understanding, in order that we might know Him Who is true; also we are in Him Who is true, and in His Son Jesus Christ. This One is the true God and eternal life.


Revelation 1:6 And He has made us to be a kingdom of Priests, God His Father to Him be the glory forever.


Revelation 2:10 Do not fear those things you are about to suffer [the ultra supergrace believers in Myrna]. The devil is about to cast some of you into prison. Also you will have pressure and affliction from him for ten days. Become faithful unto death [dying grace] and I will give you the wreath of life [which is for ultra supergrace believers].


Revelation 19:12 And His eyes [were] a flame of fire, and on His head [are] many diadems [crowns]; and He has a royal title which has been written which no one understood except Himself.Revelation 19:13 He is clothed with a military robe splattered with blood, and His royal title is designated The Logos of God. Revelation 14:20 explains why this military cloak is splattered with blood: And the wine press was trampled outside the city, and the blood flowed from the wine press up to the horses’ bridles as far a one hundred and eighty miles. Revelation 19:14 And the armies of heaven were following Him on white horses, and they were clothed in fine linen, white and pure. Revelation 19:15 A sharp broadsword comes out from His mouth, in order that with it He might strike the nations, and He will rule them with an iron scepter, and prior to this He treads down the wine press of the wine of the wrath of the anger of God, the Omnipotent One. Revelation 19:16 And He has a royal title written on His military cloak and on His thigh, “KING of KINGS, AND LORD of LORDS.


Revelation 20:6 Blessed and royal is the one who has part in the first resurrection, over these, the second death has no power; but these will be priests of God, of Christ, and they will reign with Him 1000 years.